Hyster Forklift S70XM-120XM (E004, F004) service manual

Page 1

ALTERNATOR WITH REGULATOR DELCO, MOTOROLA, AND LEECE-NEVILLE COVERS DELCO, MOTOROLA, AND LEECE-NEVILLE ALTERNATORS USED ON HYSTER LIFT TRUCKS

PART NO. 899784

2200 SRM 2


Alternator with Regulator

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS General ............................................................................................................................................................... Description ......................................................................................................................................................... Alternator Repair............................................................................................................................................... Alternator Type A .......................................................................................................................................... Remove and Disassemble.......................................................................................................................... Clean .......................................................................................................................................................... Assemble .................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Alternator Type B .......................................................................................................................................... Remove and Disassemble.......................................................................................................................... Clean .......................................................................................................................................................... Assemble .................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... General Check and Adjustment ........................................................................................................................ Low Output Check (Type A or Type B) ............................................................................................................. High Output Check (Type A or Type B) ............................................................................................................ Brushes Circuit Check....................................................................................................................................... Delco Alternators ........................................................................................................................................... Motorola Alternators ..................................................................................................................................... Diodes Check ...................................................................................................................................................... Diode Bridge Check ........................................................................................................................................... Delco and Leece-Neville Alternators ............................................................................................................ Motorola Alternators ..................................................................................................................................... Rotor Field Winding Check ............................................................................................................................... Stator Windings Check ...................................................................................................................................... Voltage Regulator Check ................................................................................................................................... Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................................................

1 1 3 3 3 4 5 5 8 8 8 9 10 11 11 13 14 14 15 16 16 16 16 17 18 18 18

This section is for the following models: Covers Delco, Motorola, and Leece-Neville alternators used on Hyster lift trucks

Š2003 HYSTER COMPANY

i


2200 SRM 2

Description

General CAUTION When using an arc welder, always disconnect the ground lead from the lift truck battery to prevent alternator or battery damage. Attach the welding ground clamp as close to the weld area as possible to prevent welding current from damaging the bearings. The diodes and resistors in the electrical system can be damaged if the following cautions are not followed: • Do not disconnect the battery when the engine is running. The voltage surge can damage the diodes and resistors in the electrical system. • Do not disconnect an electric wire before the engine is stopped and the switches are OFF.

• Do not cause a short circuit by connecting the electric wires to the wrong terminals. Make sure a correct identification is made of the wire before it is connected. • Make sure a battery is the correct voltage and polarity before it is connected. • Do not check for current flow by making a spark because the electronic components can be damaged. NOTE: Information on alternators manufactured outside the United States is in the SRM (Service Repair Manual) sections for lift trucks that use those alternators. This section has a description and the repair procedures for the alternator with a voltage regulator as part of the alternator.

Description NOTE: For this SRM section, the alternators are in two groups: Type A and Type B. The two types are very similar, but the Type A alternators have a set of three diodes (diode set) as well as the diode bridge. The Type B alternator has zener diodes as part of the diodes in the diode bridge. This alternator does not have a diode set, but does have an additional fan inside the rear housing. The basic operation of both types is very similar. The alternator generates an alternating current when the engine is running. The alternator is either ON or OFF. The alternator generates maximum current when it is ON and no current when it is OFF. The regulator switches the alternator between ON and OFF to get the average current needed to charge the battery. Alternator output is directly changed by engine speed and rotor field current. The alternating current is changed to a direct current by the diode bridge inside the alternator. The alternator has these parts (see Figure 1 and Figure 2): A stator A rotor A diode bridge A diode set (Type A only) Two end housings or frame halves A solid-state voltage regulator

NOTE: DELCO TYPE A SHOWN. 1. BRUSH ASSEMBLY 2. ROLLER BEARING 3. GREASE RESERVOIR 4. LIP SEAL

5. 6. 7. 8.

DIODE BRIDGE BALL BEARINGS FELT SEAL REGULATOR

Figure 1. Alternator Cross Section

1


Description

2200 SRM 2

Figure 2. Alternator Schematics

2


2200 SRM 2

Alternator Repair Legend for Figure 2

NOTE: LEECE-NEVILLE NOT AVAILABLE, SIMILAR TO THOSE SHOWN. A. DELCO TYPE A (SMALL CAPACITY LIFT TRUCKS) B. DELCO TYPE B

C. MOTOROLA TYPE A D. DELCO TYPE A (LARGE CAPACITY LIFT TRUCKS)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

BATTERY KEY SWITCH FUSE RESISTOR INDICATOR LIGHT OR AMMETER VOLTAGE REGULATOR ROTOR FIELD

The direct current from the diodes of the diode bridge flows to the output or BAT terminal. A capacitor between the BAT terminal and the electrical ground removes any remaining alternating current from the direct current. The capacitor also protects the diodes from high voltages. The voltage is controlled by the amount of current flowing through the field winding in the alternator and the rpm of the rotor. The voltage regulator, inside the housing, contains a transistor, diodes, resistors, and capacitor. The voltage regulator cannot be repaired. NOTE: On some large capacity lift trucks, the alternator has an external voltage adjustment.

STATOR DIODE BRIDGE DIODE SET FIELD TERMINAL REGULATOR TERMINAL OUTPUT (BAT) TERMINAL VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT

The voltage regulator controls the alternator to charge the battery. The voltage is set by the manufacturer and is not usually adjustable. Battery voltage decreases as the starting circuit and other circuits take energy from the battery. When the key switch is put in the IGN position, the voltage regulator is energized. A positive current flows to the field terminal (F or 1) on Type A alternators and (L) on Type B alternators. The battery sends a positive current to the regulator terminal (Type A R or 2) and the BAT terminal. The regulator senses a decrease in battery voltage and increases the alternator output to charge the battery.

Alternator Repair ALTERNATOR TYPE A Remove and Disassemble WARNING Always disconnect the battery ground cable before making repairs to prevent possible damage and injury. Install a tag on the battery terminal so that no one connects the cable on the terminal. NOTE: Use Troubleshooting and General Check and Adjustment, Low Output Check (Type A or Type B), High Output Check (Type A or Type B), Brushes Circuit Check, Diodes Check, Diode Bridge Check, Rotor Field Winding Check, Stator Windings Check, and Voltage Regulator Check procedures of this SRM before starting any repair procedures. Make sure that repair or replacement of that part is necessary before removal, disassembly, or replacement of the part.

NOTE: There are some checks of the alternator that are done with the alternator on the engine. See General Check and Adjustment, Low Output Check (Type A or Type B), High Output Check (Type A or Type B), Brushes Circuit Check, Diodes Check, Diode Bridge Check, Rotor Field Winding Check, Stator Windings Check, and Voltage Regulator Check procedures of this SRM before starting any removal or repair procedures. NOTE: Many parts of the Leece-Neville alternator can be replaced without disassembling the alternator. See Figure 5. The alternator must be disassembled to replace only the diode bridge, filter capacitor, rotor, stator, or bearings. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. See Figure 3, Figure 4, and Figure 5. Install labels and disconnect the wires at the alternator. Loosen the alternator mount capscrews and remove the drive belt. Remove the capscrews that hold the alternator to the engine.

3


Alternator Repair

2200 SRM 2

2. On Leece-Neville alternators, remove the brushes, voltage regulator, or diode set. Install labels on all wires for correct connection during installation. 3. Put a mark on each housing and on the stator for correct alignment during assembly. Remove the bolts that hold the housings together. Separate the housings and stator. 4. Put the rotor in a vise that has soft jaws. Do not tighten the vise to cause rotor distortion. Use a socket wrench to remove the pulley nut. Remove the pulley, fan, collar, spacer, shield, or other parts between the fan and housing. Remove the front housing from the rotor. 5. Remove any nuts or screws that fasten parts inside to the rear housing. Then, remove the stator assembly from the rear housing so that the other parts can be removed. Remove the screws for the capacitor, diode bridge, diode set, brushes, and other parts as necessary. If the stator will be removed from the diode bridge, make sure the wires have tags for correct connection during assembly. 6. Mark the stator to show the position of the brushes and connector or diode bridge assembly. Use pliers as a heat sink to keep heat from the

diodes. Use a soldering iron to remove the stator leads from the diode assembly. 7. Remove the bearings from the housings only if they will be replaced.

Clean WARNING Compressed air can move particles so that they cause injury to the user or to other personnel. Make sure that the path of the compressed air is away from all personnel. Wear protective goggles or a face shield to prevent injury to the eyes.

CAUTION Never use solvent on the parts of the alternator. NOTE: If necessary, use fine abrasive cloth to polish the slip rings. The abrasive cloth must be number 500 to 600. Remove all dust. Turn the rotor while polishing the slip rings. Use compressed air to remove dirt from the alternator. Clean the brushes and slip rings with a clean, dry cloth.

A. DELCO

B. MOTOROLA

1. GROUND TERMINAL 2. BATTERY TERMINAL (BAT OR +)

3. FIELD TERMINAL 4. REGULATOR TERMINAL

Figure 3. Type A Alternators, Rear Views

4


2200 SRM 2

Alternator Repair

Assemble

a. Install the brush and holder, voltage regulator, and diodes from the inside of the alternator. Make sure the insulator sleeves are on the screws for the brush holder. Install the capacitor.

1. For Delco (Type A) alternators, install a new bearing(s) in the housing as follows (see Figure 3, Figure 4, and Figure 5): a. Install a new plug and seal in the rear housing. Push the bearing from the outside of the housing until the top of the bearing is even with the outside of the housing. Hold the housing with the collar on the inside of the housing. Keep the lip of the seal away from the bearing. Lubricate the bearing area with non-conductive grease. b. Install a new bearing in the front housing. Fill one quarter of the grease reservoir with non-conductive grease. Move the grease so that it touches the bearing when the retainer plate is installed. c. Add the same type of grease to fill the area between the retainer plate and the bearing. Install the spacer, gasket, and retainer plate on the bearing. Fasten the retainer plate in position with the three screws and lockwashers. 2. For Motorola and Leece-Neville alternators, use a press to install the rear bearing on the rotor. Install the bearing and bearing retainer in the front housing. If used, install the spacer on the bearing.

CAUTION Hold the rotor in a vise that has soft jaws. Do not tighten the vise more than necessary. 3. Install the front housing on the rotor. If used, install the spacer or shield, shaft key, and washer. Install the fan, pulley, lockwasher, and nut. Tighten the nut to 54 to 81 N•m (40 to 60 lbf ft).

CAUTION Be sure to install the insulators. Make sure the heat sink does not touch the housing. 4. Install the diode bridge and heat sink in the reverse order of disassembly. Make sure the insulators and washers are in the correct positions. Install the capacitor.

b. Install the stator in the rear housing. Connect the three wires from the stator to the diode bridge and fasten at the studs. Connect the wires from the diodes to the studs on the diode bridge. Install and tighten the three lockwashers and nuts. c. Install the brushes in the brush holders. To hold the brushes in position, put a pin through the hole in the brush holders. Apply a thin layer of oil to the lip of the seal for the bearing. 6. On Motorola alternators, install parts as follows: a. Install the diode bridge on the stator. Use pliers to keep the heat from the soldering iron away from the diodes. b. Install the capacitor, diode set, and terminal on the diode bridge. Align the marks made during removal and install the stator and bridge assembly in the rear housing. 7. Align the marks made during disassembly. Carefully install the stator and the rear housing over the rotor. Do not damage the seal while sliding the housing over the rotor shaft. Install the front housing. 8. Install the four screws to hold the alternator together. On Delco alternators, remove pin to release the brushes. 9. On Motorola alternators, install the brush holder and brushes. Make sure the washer is on the right-hand screw. Install the voltage regulator and tighten the screws. 10. On Leece-Neville alternators, install the brushes, voltage regulator, or diode set in the reverse order of removal.

Install 1. Install the alternator in the bracket on the engine and adjust the tension of the belt.

5. On Delco alternators, install parts as follows:

5


Alternator Repair

2200 SRM 2

2. Connect all wires and the connector according to the labels made during removal. Also see the schematic diagram for your alternator in Figure 2. Make sure all wires are connected correctly and all fasteners are tight. See Figure 3.

3. Check the indicator light or the ammeter to check the operation of the alternator. The indicator light for Type A alternators will only be ON if the battery is discharged.

Figure 4. Type A Alternators, Exploded Views

6


2200 SRM 2

Alternator Repair Legend for Figure 4

A. DELCO

B. MOTOROLA

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26.

NUT SCREW DIODE BRIDGE CAPACITOR BEARING SLIP RINGS TERMINAL PULLEY FAN RETAINER SPACER SHIELD GASKET

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

BOLT FAN ROTOR STATOR NEGATIVE DIODE BRIDGE POSITIVE DIODE BRIDGE FILTER CAPACITOR REAR HOUSING

INSULATOR PLUG AND BEARING BEARING SEAL BOLT HOUSING VOLTAGE REGULATOR LOCKWASHER BRUSH AND HOLDER BRUSH SPRING WASHER ROTOR STATOR DIODES

A. LEECE-NEVILLE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

TERMINAL DIODE SET BRUSH AND SPRING BRUSH HOLDER VOLTAGE REGULATOR BEARING RETAINER BEARING FRONT HOUSING

Figure 5. Type A Alternator, Exploded View

7


Alternator Repair

ALTERNATOR TYPE B Remove and Disassemble WARNING Always disconnect the battery ground cable before making repairs to prevent possible damage and injury. Install a tag on the battery terminal so that no one connects the cable on the terminal.

2200 SRM 2 4. Use a punch to remove the rivets or pins that fasten the cover. Remove the cover for access to the stator leads. Discard the cover. See Figure 7. 5. Cut the stator leads as close to the connectors as possible. Install labels on the leads for correct connection during assembly and remove the stator from the rear housing. 6. Use a punch to remove the three baffle pins and remove the baffle. See Figure 7.

NOTE: Use the Troubleshooting and General Check and Adjustment, Low Output Check (Type A or Type B), High Output Check (Type A or Type B), Brushes Circuit Check, Diodes Check, Diode Bridge Check, Rotor Field Winding Check, Stator Windings Check, and Voltage Regulator Check procedures of this SRM before starting any repair procedures. Make sure that repair or replacement of that part is necessary before removal, disassembly, or replacement of the part.

NOTE: Carefully make a note of the sequence of removal of parts in Step 7 and Step 8 for correct installation. Also make a note of all types of connections (crimp, soldered, or welded) as well as all mechanical fasteners.

NOTE: There are some checks of the alternator that are done with the alternator on the engine. See General Check and Adjustment, Low Output Check (Type A or Type B), High Output Check (Type A or Type B), Brushes Circuit Check, Diodes Check, Diode Bridge Check, Rotor Field Winding Check, Stator Windings Check, and Voltage Regulator Check procedures of this SRM before starting any removal or repair procedures.

8. Open the crimps or use a soldering iron and disconnect the connectors to separate the brush holder, voltage regulator, and diode bridge.

1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. See Figure 6, Figure 7, and Figure 8. Install labels and disconnect the wires at the alternator. Disconnect the wire connector. Loosen the alternator mount capscrews and remove the drive belt. Remove the capscrews that hold the alternator to the engine. 2. Put a mark on each housing and on the stator for correct alignment during assembly. Remove the bolts that hold the housings together. Separate the housings and stator. 3. Put the rotor in a vise that has soft jaws. Do not tighten the vise to cause rotor distortion. Use a socket wrench to remove the pulley nut. Remove the pulley, collar, fan, outside collar, front housing, and inside collar from the rotor. NOTE: The cover must be replaced if the parts will be removed from the stator. If necessary, remove the stator as described in Step 4 and Step 5.

8

7. Remove the three mount screws and "BAT" terminal nut. See Figure 8. Lift the brush holder, voltage regulator, and diode bridge from the housing.

9. If the bearing will be replaced in the rear housing, remove the bearing and retainer ring.

Clean WARNING Compressed air can move particles so that they cause injury to the user or to other personnel. Make sure that the path of the compressed air is away from all personnel. Wear protective goggles or a face shield to prevent injury to the eyes.

CAUTION Never use solvent on the parts of the alternator. NOTE: If necessary, use fine abrasive cloth to polish the slip rings. The abrasive cloth must be number 500 to 600. Remove all dust. Turn the rotor while polishing the slip rings. Use compressed air to remove dirt from the alternator. Clean the brushes and slip rings with a clean, dry cloth.


2200 SRM 2

Alternator Repair

A. DELCO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

NUT PULLEY COLLAR OUTSIDE FAN OUTSIDE COLLAR FRONT HOUSING INSIDE COLLAR

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

STATOR ROTOR AND FAN BAFFLE SCREW DIODE BRIDGE BRUSHES AND HOLDER VOLTAGE REGULATOR

15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

COVER REAR HOUSING BALL BEARING RETAINER RING TERMINAL SET BOLT

Figure 6. Type B Alternator, Exploded View

Assemble 1. If the bearing was removed from the rear housing, install a new retainer ring. See Figure 6.

CAUTION

4. Put a thin coating of silicon grease on the inside of the rear housing under the diode bridge. 5. Install the bridge, regulator, and brush holder assembly in the rear housing and install the screws as removed during disassembly.

The bearing is not completely installed until Step 11 is complete.

6. Install the baffle and use a punch to fasten the pins.

2. Install a new bearing by pushing on the new bearing outer race until the bearing hits the bottom in the rear housing.

7. Align the marks made during disassembly and install the stator in the rear housing. Use pliers on the connectors of the diode bridge to keep heat from the diodes. Use a soldering iron to connect the stator leads to the connectors.

3. Assemble the voltage regulator, diode bridge, and brush holder on a flat surface. Put crimps in the connectors or solder the connectors to fasten and connect the parts as originally assembled. Use a pin to hold the brushes in the brush holder.

9


Alternator Repair

2200 SRM 2 (0.075 to 0.087 in.) below the surface of the rear housing.

Install 1. Install the alternator in the bracket on the engine and adjust the tension of the belt. 2. Connect all wires and the connector according to the labels made during removal. Also see the schematic diagram for your alternator in Figure 2. Make sure all wires are connected correctly and all fasteners are tight. See Figure 7. 3. Check the indicator light or the ammeter to check the operation of the alternator. The indicator light can also be ON if the alternator output is too high on Type B alternators.

NOTE: TYPE B ONLY. 1. REAR HOUSING 2. COVER 3. COVER RIVETS OR PINS

4. BAFFLE PINS 5. BOLTS TO FASTEN HOUSINGS TOGETHER

Figure 7. Outside Rear Housing 8. Install a new cover using rivets or pins to fasten the cover to the rear housing. 9. If necessary, install the bearing in the front housing. Put the rotor in a vise with soft jaws and install the inner collar, front housing, outer collar, fan, collar pulley, and nut on the rotor. Tighten the nut to 54 to 108 N•m (40 to 80 lbf ft). 10. Align the front and rear housings using the marks made during disassembly. Push on both the inner and outer races of the rear bearing to push the two housings and stator together. Install the three bolts that fasten the alternator together. 11. Push on both the inner and outer race of the rear bearing so that the outer race is 1.9 to 2.2 mm

10

NOTE: TYPE B ONLY. 1. REAR HOUSING 2. VOLTAGE REGULATOR 3. BRUSH HOLDER 4. DIODE BRIDGE 5. TERMINALS FOR STATOR LEADS

6. NUT ON "BAT" TERMINAL 7. MOUNT SCREWS 8. SOLDERED OR WELDED CONNECTOR 9. BRUSH PIN

Figure 8. Inside Rear Housing


2200 SRM 2

Low Output Check (Type A or Type B)

General Check and Adjustment There are no adjustments for the alternator or most regulators. One Delco alternator and the Leece-Neville alternator has a voltage adjustment. Always check the general condition of the complete system before doing a complete check on each part. Check the general condition of the following parts: (1) battery, (2) battery cables and connections, and (3) alternator and regulator wires and connectors. Also check the condition and tension of the fan belt for the alternator.

CAUTION NEVER operate the engine if the alternator output BAT terminal is not connected to the battery. Do not short-circuit or connect jumper wires to any of the alternator terminals unless told to by the procedures. Make sure polarity is correct before connecting a battery charger or another battery. Remove the battery cables and clean the terminals and cable connectors. Inspect the insulation on the wires. Make sure all the fasteners and connections are clean and tight. If necessary, use a water and soda solution to clean the top of the battery. Do NOT remove the cell caps or permit the water and soda solution to get in the battery.

WARNING Put the transmission in NEUTRAL. Apply the parking brake.

CAUTION Do not change the polarity of the circuits. Do not connect any wires in the circuits, except as described in these instructions. Never connect the wire from the terminal marked "BAT" to an open circuit. When connecting a charger or another battery, connect the positive terminals to the positive terminal of the battery. Then connect the negative terminal to a clean metal part of the engine. Disconnect the charger or other battery in the reverse order. Problems in the charging circuit are indicated by one or more of the following: • The starter motor turns slowly. The battery voltage is low because of low alternator output or a bad battery. • The specific gravity readings are low. Battery is not fully charged or is damaged. • The battery uses more than 30 ml (1 oz) of water per cell per month. The alternator output is too high. The two problems of the charging circuit are low output and high output. Low output causes a low battery and difficult starting. A high output causes heating of the battery and evaporation of water from the electrolyte. The following two checks will find out if the alternator, regulator, or wiring has a charging fault. The two checks will also find out if the charging system has a correct output. Do the following two checks before removal, disassembly, or replacement of alternator or regulator. NOTE: Information on alternators manufactured outside the United States is in the SRM (service repair manual) sections for lift trucks that use those alternators.

Low Output Check (Type A or Type B) CAUTION Do not connect the wire from the "BAT" terminal to the electrical ground.

2. Connect a voltmeter to the field terminal and the regulator terminal. Follow the procedure in Step 1 and check the readings.

NOTE: Make sure the wire from the voltmeter makes contact with each terminal on the alternator.

3. If there are no readings on the voltmeter during Step 1 and Step 2, check for an open circuit between each terminal and the battery.

1. Connect a voltmeter between the BAT terminal and the electrical ground. Turn the key switch to the ON position and check the reading.

4. If there are readings on the voltmeter during Step 1 and Step 2, disconnect the cable for the electrical ground on the battery.

11


Low Output Check (Type A or Type B) 5. Make connections to the Type A alternator as shown in Figure 9. Make connections to the Type B alternator as shown in Figure 10. 6. Connect the cable for the electrical ground on the battery.

2200 SRM 2 10. If the ammeter reading is within 10%, the alternator is in good condition. Check the starter or wires for problems. Some alternators on larger lift trucks have a voltage adjustment. See Figure 12. For alternators with the voltage adjustment, do Step a to set the voltage:

7. Connect a carbon pile across the terminals of the battery.

a. The voltage setting can be increased by changing the position of the adjustment plug. LO is the lowest voltage setting. 2 is medium low and 3 is the medium setting. The voltage setting is highest when HI is aligned with the arrow on the alternator. Change the setting as necessary.

8. Run the engine at 2000 to 2500 rpm. Adjust the carbon pile until the maximum charging rate is reached. 9. Read the value of the maximum charging rate shown on the alternator housing or in the section Capacities and Specifications for your lift truck. Read the ammeter. The reading on the ammeter must be within 10% of the maximum value.

NOTE: TYPE B ONLY. NOTE: TYPE A ONLY. 1. 2. 3. 4.

CARBON PILE BATTERY AMMETER STARTER

5. ALTERNATOR 6. BAT TERMINAL 7. FIELD TERMINAL

Figure 9. Alternator Output Check

12

1. 2. 3. 4.

BATTERY CARBON PILE VOLTMETER RESISTOR (35 OHM 5 WATT TO 500 OHM 1/2 WATT)

5. 6. 7. 8.

AMMETER ALTERNATOR BAT TERMINAL CONNECT TO L TERMINAL

Figure 10. Alternator Output Check


2200 SRM 2

High Output Check (Type A or Type B)

11. On Type A Delco alternators, do the following checks:

CAUTION Do not push the screwdriver into the hole for more than 25 mm (1 in.). a. If the output shown is not within 10%, put a screwdriver into the hole shown in Figure 11. b. Run the engine at 2000 to 2500 rpm. Adjust the carbon pile until the maximum charging rate is reached. c. If the output is within 10%, check the field winding. If the field winding is in good condition, replace the voltage regulator. d. If the output is not within 10%, check the wires to the brushes, diodes, diode bridge, field winding, and stator. e. Remove the screwdriver, ammeter, and variable resistor.

NOTE: DELCO TYPE A SHOWN. 1. HOLE 2. MAKE SURE SCREWDRIVER TOUCHES HOUSING AND METAL TAG. Figure 11. Electrical Ground on Field Winding

High Output Check (Type A or Type B) 1. Connect a voltmeter from the regulator terminal to the electrical ground. Check the reading on the voltmeter. See Figure 9 or Figure 10. 2. If there are no readings, check for an open circuit between the regulator terminal and the battery. 3. If there is a reading, connect a voltmeter between the BAT terminal and the electrical ground. 4. Increase the engine speed until the maximum voltage reading is reached. 5. If the voltage shown is more than 15.5 volts on a 12-volt system or 31 volts on a 24-volt system, disassemble the alternator and do the remainder of the checks. For alternators with the voltage adjustment, do the following:

a. Delco alternator. The voltage setting can be increased or decreased by changing the position of the adjustment plug. See Figure 12. LO is the lowest voltage setting. 2 is medium low and 3 is the medium setting. The voltage setting is highest when HI is aligned with the arrow on the alternator. Do not change the setting when engine is operating. Change the setting as necessary. b. Leece-Neville alternator. Remove the screw in the cover. See Figure 12. Start the engine. Connect a voltmeter across the battery terminals and use a screwdriver to adjust the voltage.

13


Brushes Circuit Check

2200 SRM 2

1. VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT CAP SHOWN IN MEDIUM HIGH (3) POSITION.

2. DELCO TYPE A 3. LEECE-NEVILLE

Figure 12. Voltage Adjustment

Brushes Circuit Check DELCO ALTERNATORS 1. Use an ohmmeter that has a 1.5 volt cell. (Use the lowest range scale.) Connect the ohmmeter from the clip for the brushes to the metal housing. Make the test, then connect the ohmmeter leads in the reverse direction and test again. 2. If both readings are zero, either the wire or the clip for the brushes has a short circuit to ground, or the voltage regulator has damage. 3. The cause of the problem can also be a missing washer, a missing sleeve on a screw, or a damaged insulator. See Figure 13. Remove the screw

14

and inspect the insulator. If the insulator is in good condition, do Step 4, Step 5, and Step 6. 4. Connect the ohmmeter from the wire of the diodes to the housing. 5. If the reading is zero on the ohmmeter, either the wire to the diodes has a short circuit to ground, or the voltage regulator has damage. 6. The cause of the problem can be a missing washer, a missing sleeve on a screw, or a damaged insulator. Remove the screw and inspect the insulator. If the insulator is in good condition, replace the voltage regulator.


2200 SRM 2

Brushes Circuit Check

MOTOROLA ALTERNATORS 1. Use an ohmmeter or a 12-volt test lamp to check the brushes as shown in Figure 13. 2. For correct operation, there must be continuity between A to B and C to D. There must be no continuity from A to D or from C to B. See Figure 13. If there is continuity, the brushes are connected to the wrong terminal.

A. DELCO

B. MOTOROLA

1. 2. 3. 4.

5. DIODES 6. INSULATOR WASHERS 7. OHMMETER

BRUSH HOLDER CAPACITOR DIODE BRIDGE NUTS

Figure 13. Brushes Circuit Check

15


Diode Bridge Check

2200 SRM 2

Diodes Check Use an ohmmeter with a 1.5 volt cell. Use the lowest range scale. Connect one lead of tester to the common connector, and one lead to one of the three diode connections. Make the test, then reverse the tester

leads and make the same test. If both readings are the same reading, replace the diodes. A good diode will show one high reading, and one low reading. See Figure 14.

A. DELCO TYPE A

B. MOTOROLA

1. OHMMETER 2. COMMON FOR DIODE SET

3. DIODE SET CONNECTIONS Figure 14. Diodes Check

Diode Bridge Check DELCO AND LEECE-NEVILLE ALTERNATORS CAUTION Do not use a 120-volt test lamp to check the diode bridge. Use a 12-volt tester to prevent diode damage. To check the diode bridge, connect the ohmmeter to one heat sink and each of the three diodes in turn.

16

Check the readings, then connect the leads in the reverse direction. If both readings are the same, replace the diode. Repeat the test for the other heat sink checking in both directions. See Figure 15.

MOTOROLA ALTERNATORS Remove the wires for the diode set from the terminals A, B, and C. Use an ohmmeter, diode tester, or 12-volt test lamp to check between points A, B, and C, and points D and E. Good diodes indicate continuity in only one direction. If any parts are bad, replace the diode bridge assembly. See Figure 14.


2200 SRM 2

Rotor Field Winding Check

A. DELCO TYPE A

B. DELCO TYPE B

C. LEECE-NEVILLE

1. BRUSH HOLDER 2. HEAT SINK

3. VOLTAGE REGULATOR 4. DIODE

5. OHMMETER

Figure 15. Diode Bridge Check

Rotor Field Winding Check Connect an ohmmeter to each slip ring and check for open circuits. If the reading is high (infinity), the winding has an open circuit. To check the resistance of the field, connect the ohmmeter to the two slip rings. The correct reading is 4.0 to 4.5 ohms. If the reading is less than specified, there is a short circuit in the windings. If the reading is more than specified, there is excessive resistance in the windings. NOTE: Make sure the needle in the ohmmeter always returns to zero correctly. The readings will change when the temperature of the winding changes. To check the electrical ground, connect the ohmmeter between either slip ring and the electrical ground as shown in Figure 16. Replace the rotor if the reading is less than infinity. Figure 16. Rotor Coil Checks

17


Troubleshooting

2200 SRM 2

Stator Windings Check To check the stator windings for electrical ground, connect an ohmmeter as shown in Figure 17. There must be no continuity between any of the stator terminals and the metal housing. To check the stator for open circuits, connect the ohmmeter or test lamp between each pair of wires to the stator as shown in Figure 17. If the test lamp does not illuminate or the meter reading is high, the windings have an open circuit.

Figure 17. Stator Checks

Voltage Regulator Check Use a voltage regulator test device. Do not use an ohmmeter. If the voltage regulator has damage, replace the voltage regulator.

Troubleshooting PROBLEM Battery is charged above normal.

Battery uses more water than normal.

18

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Alternator is not charging correctly.

Repair or install new parts.

Electrical ground in wire to brush or clip.

Repair or install new parts.

High resistance in the circuit.

Repair or install new parts.

Battery is charging more than normal.

Replace voltage regulator.

Alternator has damage in the field windings, diodes, diode bridge, or stator.

Install new parts.

Battery has damage or is too old.

Replace battery.


2200 SRM 2

PROBLEM There is no charge from the alternator.

There is no charge from the alternator. The indicator light or ammeter indicates a discharged condition when the rpm is high and the load is high.

Ammeter or the indicator light indicates a discharged condition at all speeds.

Troubleshooting

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

The brushes are worn or damaged.

Install new brushes.

Weak springs for brushes. Brushes or brush holders do not move freely.

Install new parts.

Dirt on the slip rings.

Clean or install new parts.

There is an electrical ground in the field winding.

Replace rotor or alternator.

Drive belt is not tight or is broken.

Adjust or replace drive belt.

There is a short circuit in the diodes.

Install new parts.

There is an electrical ground at the end of the windings.

Replace rotor or alternator.

The voltage regulator has damage.

Replace voltage regulator.

19


NOTES ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

20



BRAKE SYSTEM S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]

PART NO. 1510466

1800 SRM 985


Brake System

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS General ............................................................................................................................................................... Description and Operation ................................................................................................................................ Brake Booster and Master Cylinder............................................................................................................. Service Brake Assembly ................................................................................................................................ Parking Brake................................................................................................................................................ Brake Shoe Assemblies Repair ......................................................................................................................... Remove and Disassemble .............................................................................................................................. Clean .............................................................................................................................................................. Inspect ............................................................................................................................................................ Assemble and Install ..................................................................................................................................... Brake Booster and Master Cylinder ................................................................................................................. Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Disassemble ................................................................................................................................................... Clean and Inspect .......................................................................................................................................... Assemble ........................................................................................................................................................ Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Brake Booster Filter, Replace ....................................................................................................................... Parking Brake Repair........................................................................................................................................ Remove and Disassemble .............................................................................................................................. Assemble and Install ..................................................................................................................................... Brake System Air Removal ............................................................................................................................... Brake Pedal Adjustment ................................................................................................................................... Parking Brake Adjustment ............................................................................................................................... Parking Brake Not Applied Switch Test........................................................................................................... Parking Brake Switch Test (MONOTROL® Pedal Only)................................................................................. Brake Shoes Adjustment ................................................................................................................................... Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................................................

1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 5 5 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 10 10 10 12 12 12 13 13 14 14

This section is for the following models: S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]

©2005 HYSTER COMPANY

i


1800 SRM 985

Description and Operation

General This section contains a description and repair procedures for parts of the hydraulic brake system. These parts include the brake booster, master cylinder, and brake shoe assemblies.

Description and Operation The brake pedal is connected to the push rod for the brake booster. The brake booster helps increase the force on the master cylinder by using vacuum from the engine. The piston in the master cylinder forces oil to the wheel cylinders to apply the brakes. The system allows braking without vacuum from the engine.

links move with the drum during a stop when the truck is traveling in reverse. The links permit the adjuster spring lever to rotate the adjuster screw wheel. The adjuster screw wheel will only turn when there is clearance between the lining and brake drum. The adjuster screw wheel can be turned manually through a slot in the back plate.

BRAKE BOOSTER AND MASTER CYLINDER

PARKING BRAKE

The brake booster and master cylinder are assembled as a unit. The brake booster has a diaphragm that is actuated by engine vacuum. See Figure 1. The diaphragm along with the operator’s effort pushes on the piston in the master cylinder. Hydraulic pressure actuates wheel cylinders as the piston pushes fluid through check valve. A return spring pushes piston back to the stop plate when pedal is released. Fluid can flow through passages in piston and past the primary cup as piston returns. Fluid flows across the piston to prevent a vacuum while fluid returns through the check valve. When piston passes the compensator port, excess fluid from brake system returns to the reservoir. The check valve keeps a very small amount of pressure in brake system. The reservoir for brake fluid has a sending unit for a low fluid level warning light.

The parking brake uses the service brake shoes. Additional linkage pushes brake shoes apart when the hand lever pulls the cables. A switch on the right-hand side of mounting bracket is actuated by the hand lever. On all units, the switch energizes the seat warning circuit when hand lever is released. On units with a MONOTROLÂŽ pedal, this switch puts the transmission in NEUTRAL by de-energizing the direction solenoids. On units with a MONOTROL pedal, there is also a switch on left-hand side of bracket. This switch prevents engine from starting unless parking brake is applied.

SERVICE BRAKE ASSEMBLY Service brake assemblies are installed at each end of the housing for the drive axle. Each service brake assembly has a single wheel cylinder at the top of each back plate. The support plate has an anchor for each shoe. When wheel cylinder is actuated by fluid pressure from the master cylinder, the shoes expand against the drum. The primary shoe starts to turn with the drum. This action pushes secondary shoe tight against drum and anchor. When lift truck is traveling in reverse, the primary shoe is pushed against anchor and drum by the secondary shoe. The automatic adjusting linkage turns adjuster screw wheel to adjust clearance between brake shoes and brake drum. The secondary shoe and

1. 2. 3. 4.

PUSH ROD BRAKE BOOSTER RESERVOIR MASTER CYLINDER

5. OUTLET TO WHEEL CYLINDERS 6. ENGINE VACUUM CONNECTION

Figure 1. Brake Booster and Master Cylinder

1


Brake Shoe Assemblies Repair

1800 SRM 985

Brake Shoe Assemblies Repair REMOVE AND DISASSEMBLE WARNING Brake linings can contain dangerous fibers. Breathing dust from these brake linings is a cancer or lung disease hazard. Do not create dust! Do not clean brake parts with compressed air or by brushing. Use vacuum equipment approved for brake dust or follow cleaning procedure in this section. When brake drums are removed, do not create dust. Do not sand, grind, chisel, hammer, or change linings in any way that will create dust. Any changes to linings must be done in a restricted area with special ventilation. Protective clothing and a respirator must be used. 1. Tilt mast back and put blocks under outer mast weldment. Tilt mast forward to raise tires from floor. 2. Remove wheel nuts, then remove wheels. Put capscrews (16 mm) in threaded holes to push brake drums from hubs. See Figure 2. 3. Remove capscrews holding axle shaft to wheel hub. Remove axle shaft. 4. Remove lock nut, lockplate, and bearing adjustment nut from axle housing. Remove outer bearing cone. See Figure 2. 5. Remove hub from axle housing. Remove inner seals and bearing cone from hub.

WARNING When the brake shoes are removed, do not create dust in the air. See the cleaning procedures in this section. 6. Turn adjuster screw to loosen brake shoes. Disconnect linkage for automatic adjuster. See Figure 3. 7. Use spring pliers to remove shoe return springs. 8. Remove hold down springs.

2

CAUTION The adjuster screw assemblies are not the same. Make sure each assembly has identification for installation on the correct side of the axle. 9. Remove brake shoes from wheel cylinder rods. Remove adjuster screw spring. Remove adjuster screw assembly. See Figure 3. 10. Remove parking brake cable from parking brake lever. Remove lever from rear brake shoe. 11. Disconnect and put a cap on the line to the wheel cylinder. Remove backplate. Remove capscrews holding wheel cylinder to backplate. Remove cable clamp and pull cable through backplate.

CLEAN WARNING Brake linings can contain dangerous fibers. Breathing dust from these brake linings is a cancer or lung disease hazard. Do not create dust! Do not clean brake parts with compressed air or by brushing. Use vacuum equipment approved for brake dust or follow cleaning procedure in this section. When brake drums are removed, do not create dust. Do not sand, grind, chisel, hammer, or change linings in any way that will create dust. Any changes to linings must be done in a restricted area with special ventilation. Protective clothing and a respirator must be used. 1. Do not release brake lining dust from brake linings into air when brake drums are removed. 2. Use a solvent approved for cleaning of brake parts to wet brake lining dust. Follow instructions and cautions of manufacturer for use of solvent. If a solvent spray is used, do not create dust with spray.


1800 SRM 985

Brake Shoe Assemblies Repair

CAUTION Do not use an oil solvent to clean wheel cylinder. Use a solvent approved for cleaning of brake parts. Do not permit oil or grease in brake fluid or on brake linings.

3. When dust is wet, clean brake parts. Put any cloth or towels in a plastic bag or airtight container while they are still wet. Put a DANGEROUS FIBERS warning label on plastic bag or airtight container. 4. Any cleaning cloths that will be washed must be cleaned so fibers are not released into the air.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

AXLE HOUSING AXLE MOUNT BRAKE ASSEMBLY (SHOES AND BACKPLATES) BRAKE DRUM SEAL BEARING CONE BEARING CUP WHEEL HUB

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

ADJUSTMENT NUT LOCKWASHER LOCK NUT AXLE SHAFT TIRE AND WHEEL MOUNTING PIN DOWEL PIN

Figure 2. Brakes and Drive Axle Assembly

3


Brake Shoe Assemblies Repair

1800 SRM 985

NOTE: LEFT-HAND SIDE SHOWN. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

BACKING PLATE WHEEL CYLINDER ASSEMBLY REAR BRAKE SHOE ADJUSTER SCREW PARKING BRAKE LEVER SHOE RETURN SPRING SPRING AND LINK ASSEMBLY STRUT SHOE HOLDDOWN PIN SHOE HOLDDOWN CUP

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

SHOE HOLDDOWN SPRING WASHER COTTER PIN BOLT BRAKE LINE SPRING LEVER FRONT BRAKE SHOE LINK

Figure 3. Service Brakes

4


1800 SRM 985

INSPECT WARNING

Brake Shoe Assemblies Repair to axle mounts. See Figure 2. Use sequence shown in Figure 4 and tighten capscrews to 340 to 375 N•m (250 to 275 lbf ft).

Cleaning solvents can be flammable and toxic and can cause skin irritation. When using cleaning solvents, always follow the recommendations of the manufacturer. 1. Clean all metal parts except brake linings and wheel cylinder with solvent. 2. Check bore of wheel cylinder for holes or scratches. Replace wheel cylinder if there is any damage. 3. Check return springs for damage. Inspect backplate for wear where brake shoes touch backplate.

WARNING The brake shoes on both wheels must be replaced if any shoe is damaged. The brake performance on both ends of an axle must be equal, or lift truck can be difficult to steer when brakes are applied. 4. Inspect brake shoes for cracks or damage. If linings or shoes are worn or damaged, replace brake shoes. It is recommended that brake shoes be replaced in complete sets. 5. Check adjuster screw wheel for wear. Make sure adjuster screw turns. Check for bent or broken adjuster links. NOTE: If the brake drums require grinding, do not grind more than 1.5 mm (0.060 in.) from the diameter. The maximum inside diameter of the brake drum, including wear, is 319.5 mm (12.58 in.). If brake drum is larger than this, replace brake drum. 6. Inspect brake drums for cracks or damage. Use sandpaper to clean surface for brake shoes.

ASSEMBLE AND INSTALL

Figure 4. Backplate Installation 3. Connect brake line to fitting on wheel cylinder. 4. Install link pivot on front brake shoe. Install parking brake lever on rear brake shoe. Install anchor pins in the support flange so they engage brake shoes. 5. Lubricate the back plate with a small amount of grease where the brake shoes touch. Install the brake shoes on the anchor and engage the push rods of the wheel cylinder. Engage the parking brake lever in the slot in the parking brake cable as the brake shoes are installed on the back plate. 6. Put an anchor pin that holds the brake shoes through the back plate. Put a spring seat, spring, and retainer on the anchor pin. Push the retainer onto the anchor pin and rotate the retainer 90 degrees. Make sure the retainer is in the correct position. Install another retainer spring assembly. 7. Install the link, parking brake, and spring between the parking brake lever and the brake shoe. NOTE: The forward shoe return spring is marked with white paint.

1. Install wheel cylinder on backplate. Push parking brake cable through backplate and fasten clamp. See Figure 3.

8. Using the correct tools, install the return springs.

2. Use a sealant (Hyster Part No. 264159) between backplate and axle hanger. Install backplate

10. Connect cable for parking brake to lever.

9. Verify that the return springs are properly installed.

5


Brake Shoe Assemblies Repair

1800 SRM 985

WARNING The threads of the adjuster wheel are not the same for each side. If the adjuster assemblies are installed on the wrong side, the brake shoe clearance will increase each time the brakes are applied. The adjuster wheel for the right brake has left-hand threads. The adjuster wheel for the left brake has right-hand threads. 11. Lubricate adjuster screw with antiseize compound. Turn adjuster screw to retract brake shoes. Install adjuster between shoes. 12. Align adjuster screw wheel with slot in backplate. 13. Install adjuster spring with long hook toward adjuster screw wheel. 14. Install adjuster spring lever and two links.

CAUTION Do not damage the seals when you install the hub assembly. 15. Use new oil seals. Install inner seal, bearing cups, and outer seal in hub. Install inner bearing cone on spindle. Lubricate inner bearing with grease. See Figure 5 and Figure 6. 16. Install hub on spindle. See Figure 5 and Figure 6. Lubricate outer bearing cone with 80W-90 oil for gears. Install outer bearing cone and adjustment nut. 17. Tighten adjustment nut to 203 N•m (150 lbf ft) while rotating hub until hub does not turn. Loosen nut until hub rotates freely with NO end play. The torque must be less than 27 N•m (20 lbf ft). Tighten nut to 34 N•m (25 lbf ft) or to the first alignment position after 34 N•m (25 lbf ft). Install lockwasher to hold the nut. Install lock nut and tighten it to 135 N•m (100 lbf ft).

6

NOTE: LONG-WHEEL BASE HUB SHOWN 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

AXLE HOUSING AXLE MOUNT BRAKE SYSTEM HUB ASSEMBLY AXLE SHAFT DURALOCK BOLTS OUTER SEAL OUTER BEARING BEARING CUP LOCK NUT WHEEL NUT

11. BRAKE HOSE 12. SERRATED BOLTS 13. AXLE SHAFT BOLTS 14. LOCKWASHER 15. LOCK NUT WHEEL BEARINGS 16. INNER BEARING 17. INNER SEAL

Figure 5. Brake Assembly 18. Install brake drum and adjust brake shoes as described in Brake Shoes Adjustment.


1800 SRM 985

Brake Shoe Assemblies Repair

A. SHORT WHEEL BASE HUB ASSEMBLY

B. LONG WHEEL BASE HUB ASSEMBLY

1. 2. 3. 4.

5. ROLLER BEARING CUP 6. BEARING CONE 7. INNER SEAL

HUB BRAKE DRUM SERRATED HUB BOLT OUTER SEAL

Figure 6. Hub Assembly 19. Apply sealant (Hyster Part No. 264159) to flange of axle shaft. Install axle shaft. See Figure 2. Tighten capscrews to 225 N•m (166 lbf ft). See Figure 7.

CAUTION When the wheels have been installed, check all wheel nuts after 2 to 5 hours of operation. Tighten the nuts to the correct torque. When the nuts stay tight after an 8-hour check, the interval for checking can be extended to 500 hours. 20. Install wheel. Tighten wheel nuts to 610 to 680 N•m (450 to 500 lbf ft). 21. Remove air from brake system and adjust brakes. See Brake Shoes Adjustment in this section.

Figure 7. Axle Shaft Tightening Sequence

7


Brake Booster and Master Cylinder

1800 SRM 985

Brake Booster and Master Cylinder REMOVE

ASSEMBLE

1. Disconnect push rod from inching crank. See Figure 8. Disconnect brake line at master cylinder. Cover end of brake line. Disconnect wires at reservoir.

NOTE: Lubricate parts of master cylinder with clean brake fluid.

2. Remove nuts that hold brake booster to mount. 3. Remove brake booster and master cylinder.

1. Install seals on piston. Install seat, check valve, and spring in bore. Install spring and piston. Install snap ring in bore. See Figure 9. 2. Install O-ring and master cylinder on brake booster.

DISASSEMBLE NOTE: Do not disassemble the brake booster. Repair parts are not available. 1. Remove nuts that hold master cylinder to brake booster. See Figure 9.

WARNING

INSTALL 1. Put master cylinder in position on brake booster and install nuts for master cylinder. Install brake booster on mount. 2. Install nuts for brake booster. Connect push rod to inching crank. See Figure 8.

There is a compressed spring behind the piston. To prevent possible injury, use care when removing the snap ring and piston.

3. Connect brake line at master cylinder. Connect wires at reservoir.

2. Remove snap ring from end of master cylinder. Carefully remove piston and spring from bore.

4. Fill reservoir and remove air from brake system as described in Brake System Air Removal in this section.

3. Remove seals from piston.

CLEAN AND INSPECT

5. Adjust brake linkage as described in Brake Pedal Adjustment.

BRAKE BOOSTER FILTER, REPLACE CAUTION DO NOT use an oil solvent to clean the master cylinder. Use a solvent approved for cleaning of brake parts. Inspect bore of master cylinder for holes or scratches. Replace master cylinder assembly if there is damage.

8

1. Remove the two clamps holding the old filter to the brake vacuum lines. Remove the brake booster filter. See Figure 9. 2. Install new filter onto brake vacuum lines. Install the two clamps to hold brake booster filter onto brake vacuum lines.


1800 SRM 985

Brake Booster and Master Cylinder

Figure 8. Brake System

9


Parking Brake Repair

1800 SRM 985 Legend for Figure 8

NOTE: DUAL-PEDAL OPTION SHOWN. A. BRAKE SYSTEM ARRANGEMENT

B. BRAKE LINES ARRANGEMENT

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34.

BRACKET BRAKE PEDAL INCHING PEDAL PEDAL PADS BUSHING CAPSCREW LOCKWASHER NUT MASTER CYLINDER AND BOOSTER PIN COTTER PIN LINK INCHING LINK WASHER ROD END PIN DISK SNAP RING

SWITCH SPACER CRANK BEARING SPRING SCREW HEX LINK ROD END WAVE SPRING BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR BRAKE LINES MANIFOLD PRESSURE SWITCH FITTING HOSE CLAMP FILTER

Parking Brake Repair REMOVE AND DISASSEMBLE

ASSEMBLE AND INSTALL

If the lever assembly for the parking brake must be removed from the cowl, use the following procedure (see Parking Brake Lever Adjustment):

If the lever assembly for the parking brake was removed from the cowl, use the following procedure for installation (see Figure 10):

1. Place blocks under tires to make sure lift truck cannot move. Push the release button to release the parking brake lever.

1. Make sure parking brake lever is in the released position. Turn adjustment knob until parking brake link is adjusted to the bottom of adjustment slot.

2. Remove the two nuts that fasten the parking brake to the mounting bracket on the cowl. Remove the brake lever assembly. 3. Loosen the jam nuts that fasten the threaded ends of the brake cables to the brake lever assembly.

2. Place parking brake assembly between mounting bracket on the inside of the cowl. Align mounting holes on lever assembly with holes on mounting bracket. Insert the two capscrews to secure parking brake assembly to mounting bracket and cowl.

4. Turn adjuster knob counterclockwise until brake cables are loosened. Disconnect cables from the parking brake link.

3. Install parking brake cable to parking brake lever assembly by loosening grip and moving yoke to lowest position.

5. The service brake assembly must be removed before the parking brake cable can be removed from the backplate of the service brake. The sheath of the parking brake cable is threaded into the backplate of the service brake.

4. Check to ensure nut on parking cable end is at the center in the screw range. 5. Adjust guide to a distance of 12 mm (0.47 in.) from the body guide. See dimension H in Figure 10. 6. Install parking brake cable to yoke and guide.

10


1800 SRM 985

Parking Brake Repair

7. Turn lever grip clockwise three times and pull up yoke. Confirm that lever does not return by pulling lever. 8. Tighten the two bolts which fasten the guide and tension the cables. Adjust guide to a distance

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

BRAKE BOOSTER SNAP RING SEAL PISTON SPRING CHECK VALVE SEAT O-RING MASTER CYLINDER

of 14 to 15 mm (0.55 to 0.59 in.) from the body guide. See dimension H in Figure 10. 9. Turn lever grip as needed to adjust it so that parking brake will hold lift truck when applied.

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

GROMMET RESERVOIR CAP PIN VACUUM FITTING VACUUM LINES CLAMPS BRAKE BOOSTER FILTER VACUUM LINE FITTING

Figure 9. Brake Booster and Master Cylinder

11


Parking Brake Adjustment

1800 SRM 985

Brake System Air Removal Air must be removed from the brake fluid. Fill the reservoir for the master cylinder with brake fluid. Always remove air from master cylinder first, then from wheel cylinders. Put one end of a rubber hose on the special fitting at the master cylinder or wheel cylinders. Put the other end of the hose in a container

with brake fluid. Loosen the special fitting. Push slowly on the brake pedal. Close the special fitting. Repeat the procedure until no air bubbles are seen in the container. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. Keep the reservoir full of brake fluid during these procedures.

Brake Pedal Adjustment The adjustment for the brake/inching pedal is in the section Single-Speed Powershift Transmission, Troubleshooting and Repair 1300 SRM 397.

Parking Brake Adjustment Make sure the service brakes are adjusted and the operation of the automatic adjuster mechanism is correct before the parking brake is adjusted. 1. Turn adjustment knob to raise the parking brake link and tighten parking brake cables. Turn adjustment knob until parking brakes are fully applied when lever is used to apply parking brake. See Figure 10. 2. Test the operation of the parking brake. The lift truck with a capacity load must not move when the parking brake is applied on a 15% grade, [a slope that increases 1.5 m in 10 m (1.5 ft in 10 ft)]. See Figure 11. 3. Check the operation of the switches on the parking brake. Legend for Figure 10 NOTE: THE LETTER H IN FIGURE ABOVE REPRESENTS THE GUIDE MOVEMENT RANGE. SEE SECTION PARKING BRAKE REPAIR FOR H DIMENSIONS. 1. GRIP 2. ADJUSTMENT SLOT 3. YOKE ASSEMBLY 4. GUIDE PLATE 5. ADJUSTMENT KNOB 6. PARKING BRAKE CABLES

7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

NUTS COWL EQUALIZER LINK MICROSWITCH PARKING BRAKE LEVER 12. RELEASE BUTTON 13. NUT 14. BRACKET Figure 10. Parking Brake Lever Adjustment

12


Parking Brake Switch Test (MONOTROLÂŽ Pedal Only)

1800 SRM 985

Figure 11. Defining a 15% Grade

Parking Brake Not Applied Switch Test The "Parking Brake Not Applied" switch is located in the operator seat. This switch actuates an audible buzzer on the instrument cluster. When the operator leaves the seat for more than 2 seconds

without applying the parking brake, the buzzer will be on continuously for 10 seconds. The buzzer operates whether key switch is ON or OFF.

Parking Brake Switch Test (MONOTROLÂŽ Pedal Only) When the parking brake assembly and cables have been adjusted, the parking brake switches must be tested for correct operation.

WARNING If brake switches are not adjusted correctly, the engine can be started with the parking brake released. The purpose of the left-hand switch is to prevent the starter motor from being energized when parking brake is not applied. The right-hand switch de-energizes the direction solenoids to put the transmission in NEUTRAL when the parking brake is applied. 1. Put lift truck on blocks so the drive wheels do not touch the ground or any other object. Put blocks at both sides of steering tires to prevent movement of lift truck. 2. Release parking brake. The right-hand, two-circuit microswitch closes the electric circuit for the MONOTROL pedal (energize the solenoids for the powershift transmission). The left-hand switch de-energizes the starting circuit.

4. Apply parking brake with the parking brake lever. The right-hand, two-circuit microswitch opens the MONOTROL circuit (de-energize the solenoids for the transmission). The starting circuit is energized by the ignition switch through the left-hand switch. 5. Turn ignition switch to START position. The starter operates when the parking brake switch operates correctly. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. 6. Check the wires for the parking brake switches if the conditions from the results of Step 2 through Step 5 are not correct. 7. Apply parking brake and start the engine. Push parking brake lever toward the released position, but do not push release button. The parking brake will stay in the ON position and locked. 8. The transmission must be in NEUTRAL any time the parking brake lever is applied. If results of the test are not correct, check for wear and damage. Make repairs as necessary and repeat Step 1 through Step 7.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the START position. If parking brake switch operates correctly, the starter will not energize. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.

13


Troubleshooting

1800 SRM 985

Brake Shoes Adjustment The brake shoes are automatically adjusted when the brakes are applied while the truck travels in REVERSE. Use the procedure described below to manually adjust the brakes after you make repairs. 1. Put lift truck on blocks so drive wheels do not touch the ground. See the section Periodic Maintenance 8000 SRM 987 for the correct procedures. Make sure the blocks do not prevent access to backplates of brakes. 2. Remove plugs in slots in backplates. See Figure 3. NOTE: If the automatic brake adjusters adjust the brake shoes too much or too little, refer to Remove and Disassemble in this section for the brake shoes. 3. Use a tool for brake adjustment in the slot nearest the teeth of the adjuster screw wheel. Push

up on the teeth and turn adjuster screw wheel until brake shoes touch brake drum. 4. Insert a small screwdriver through slot in back plate in order to move automatic adjustment lever away from adjuster screw wheel. 5. Turn adjuster screw wheel with brake adjustment tool. Push down on teeth to turn adjuster screw wheel in opposite direction. Turn adjuster screw wheel one revolution for the necessary clearance between brake shoes and drum. Rotate drive wheel to check for clearance. 6. Repeat Step 3, Step 4, and Step 5 at other brake assembly. Install plugs in backplates. 7. Remove lift truck from blocks. Drive lift truck in FORWARD and REVERSE. Use brakes to stop 10 times in each direction.

Troubleshooting PROBLEM Brakes do not stop the lift truck correctly.

14

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Air is in the brake system.

Remove air from brake system.

Mount for the brake booster or the brake booster is loose.

Tighten capscrews.

Brake shoes are worn or damaged.

Install new brake shoes.

Brake linings are too hard.

Install new brake shoes.

Brake drum is cracked.

Install new brake drum.

Backplate is damaged.

Install new backplate.

A wheel cylinder is leaking or does not operate correctly.

Repair or install a new wheel cylinder.

Brake linings do not fit the brake drums.

Install new brake shoes.

Master cylinder is damaged.

Repair or install a new master cylinder.

Water or oil is on the brake linings.

Clean linings or install new brake shoes.

Brake booster is damaged.

Install a new brake booster.


1800 SRM 985

Troubleshooting

PROBLEM One brake does not release.

Brakes make too much noise.

Brakes equally.

do

not

operate

Both brakes do not release.

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Brake shoe is damaged.

Install new brake shoes.

Return spring is damaged.

Install a new spring.

Brake lines have a restriction.

Install new brake lines.

Parking brake cable is damaged or needs adjustment.

Adjust or install new brake cable(s).

Wheel cylinder is damaged.

Repair or install a new wheel cylinder.

Backplate is worn or damaged.

Install a new backplate.

Oil, water, or brake fluid is on the linings.

Clean linings or install new brake shoes.

Brake linings or brake shoes are worn or damaged.

Install new brake shoes.

Brake drum is damaged.

Install a new brake drum.

Oil or brake fluid is on the linings.

Clean linings or install new brake shoes.

Brake linings are worn or hard.

Install new brake shoes.

Wheel cylinder is leaking.

Repair or install a new wheel cylinder.

Brake shoes are not correctly installed.

Install brake shoes.

Backplate or brake shoes are damaged.

Install new parts.

Brake drum is not round.

Repair or install a new brake drum.

Brake shoes are adjusted too tight.

Adjust brake shoes correctly.

Parking brake is not released.

Adjust parking brake.

Parking brake cables need adjustment.

Adjust parking brake.

There is not enough clearance for the push rod.

Adjust brake linkage.

15


Troubleshooting

PROBLEM Both brakes do not release. (Cont.)

Parking brake will not hold the lift truck.

Parking brake will not release.

16

1800 SRM 985

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Master cylinder is damaged.

Repair or install a new master cylinder.

Brake shoes are adjusted too tightly.

Adjust brake shoes.

Oil, water, or brake fluid is on the linings.

Clean linings or install new brake shoes.

Parking brake cables need adjustment.

Adjust parking brake.

Parking brake cable is damaged.

Install new cable(s).

Parking brake lever is adjusted too tightly.

Adjust parking brake.

Parking brake cables are damaged.

Install new cable(s).



CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]

PART NO. 1510478

8000 SRM 988


Capacities and Specifications

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS Tire Sizes ............................................................................................................................................................ Hydraulic System............................................................................................................................................... Electrical System ............................................................................................................................................... Engine Specifications......................................................................................................................................... Capacities ........................................................................................................................................................... Lift Truck Weights ............................................................................................................................................. Transmission Pressures (Single-Speed Powershift)......................................................................................... Mast Speeds ....................................................................................................................................................... Torque Specifications ......................................................................................................................................... Frame ............................................................................................................................................................. Engine - GM V-6 ............................................................................................................................................ Engine - Perkins ............................................................................................................................................ Transmission.................................................................................................................................................. Drive Axle ...................................................................................................................................................... Steering System............................................................................................................................................. Brake System................................................................................................................................................. Hydraulic System .......................................................................................................................................... Main Control Valve........................................................................................................................................ Tilt Cylinders ................................................................................................................................................. Lift Cylinders ................................................................................................................................................. Mast................................................................................................................................................................

1 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7

This section is for the following models: S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]

Š2005 HYSTER COMPANY

i


8000 SRM 988

Electrical System

Tire Sizes Model

Steering

Drive

S3.50 (S70XM)

18 × 6 × 12.1

22 × 9 × 16

S4.00 (S80XM)

18 × 7 × 12.1

22 × 9 × 16

S4.50-5.50XM (S100-120XM)

18 × 8 × 12.1

22 × 12 × 16

Hydraulic System Item

Specification

Hydraulic System Capacity

39.3 liter (10.4 gal)

Hydraulic Tank Capacity (Total Tank Capacity)

35.5 liter (9.4 gal)

Relief Pressures* Main Control Valve Lift Circuit

22.0 MPa (3200 psi)

Tilt and Auxiliary Circuit

15.5 MPa (2250 psi)

Steering Circuit

10.7 MPa (1550 psi)

Hydraulic Pump** Capacity

89 liter/min (23.5 gal/min)

Priority Flow

None

*Oil temperature 50 to 100 C (120 to 210 F) and engine speed at 2500 rpm. **Oil temperature 80 to 100 C (176 to 210 F) and engine speed at 2550 rpm.

Electrical System Alternator Output GM V-6

Perkins

38 Amps @ 650 rpm (Hot) 62 Amps @ 2200 rpm (Hot) 42 Amps @ 650 rpm (Hot) 62 Amps @ 2500 rpm (Hot) All Models - 12 Volt, Negative Ground

1


Capacities

8000 SRM 988

Engine Specifications Item

GM V-6 4.3

Perkins 1004-4

6

4

1-6-5-4-3-2

1-3-4-2

Bore

102.00 mm (4.00 in.)

103.00 mm (4.055 in.)

Stroke

88.40 mm (3.50 in.)

127.00 mm (5.00 in.)

Number of Cylinders Firing Order

3

4.3 liter (262.4 in. )

4.0 liter (244.0 in. 3 )

9.3:1

18.5:1

675 to 725 rpm

725 to 775 rpm

2400 to 2500 rpm

2450 to 2550 rpm

Broken in Engine

1810 (Gas) 1735 (LPG) +300/-50 rpm

2050 rpm ±50 rpm

New Engine

1710 (Gas) 1635 (LPG) +300/-50 rpm

1950 rpm ±50 rpm

0 BTDC at 650 rpm

2 BTDC (Static)

207 to 380 kPa (30 to 55 psi)

280 kPa (41 psi)

Intake

Not adjustable

0.20 mm (0.008 in.) Cold

Exhaust

Not adjustable

0.45 mm (0.018 in.) Cold

Displacement Compression Ratio Idle Speed Governor Speed Stall Speed

Timing Oil Pressure (Minimum) Valve Clearance

Capacities Item

Quantity

Engine Oil GM V-6

4.7 liter (5.0 qt)

Perkins 1004-4

8.0 liter (8.5 qt)

Cooling System

18.9 liter (20.0 qt)

Hydraulic Tank (Total Tank Capacity)

35.5 liter (9.4 gal)

Transmission

15.1 liter (16.0 qt)

Differential Fuel Tank Brake Fluid

2

5.7 liter (6.0 qt) 34.0 liter (9.1 gal) 0.2 liter (0.5 pt)


8000 SRM 988

Lift Truck Weights

Lift Truck Weights Unit

kg

lb

S3.50XM (S70XM)

5,515

11,937

S4.00XM (S80XM)

5,780

12,742

S4.00XM BCS (S80XM BCS)

5,995

13,217

S4.50XM (S100XM)

6,768

14,920

S4.50XM BCS (S100XM BCS)

7,245

15,973

S5.50XM (S120XM)

7,433

16,387

S5.50XMS (S120XMS)

7,527

16,589

S5.50XMSPRS (S120XMSPRS)

7,820

17,241

NOTE: Lift trucks equipped with overhead guard, mast, carriage, load backrest, forks, and LPG engine. NOTE: S3.50-4.00XM (S70-80XM) and S4.00XM BCS (S80XM BCS) have 3099 mm (122 in.) two-stage LFL mast. S4.50-5.50XM (S100-120XM), S4.50XM BCS (S100XM BCS), S5.50XMS (S120XMS), and S5.50XMSPRS (S120XMSPRS) have 2845 mm (112 in.) two-stage LFL mast.

3


Transmission Pressures (Single-Speed Powershift)

8000 SRM 988

Transmission Pressures (Single-Speed Powershift) Port No.

Transmission Pressures*

1

System Pressure

1170 to 1380** kPa (170 to 200 psi) **Relief pressure 1379 kPa (200 psi)

2

Forward Clutch

895 to 1035 kPa (130 to 150 psi)

3

Reverse Clutch

895 to 1035 kPa (130 to 150 psi)

4

Torque Converter

655 to 760 kPa (95 to 110 psi)

5

Lubrication Pressure

35 to 105 kPa (5 to 15 psi)

6

Modulator Pressure

Pressure Variation

*Oil temperature at least 50 to 65 C (120 to 150 F) and engine speed at 2000 rpm. NOTE: The difference between Forward and Reverse clutch pressure must not be more than: • Manufacturing limit 48 kPa (7 psi) • Service limit 70 kPa (10 psi)

4


8000 SRM 988

Mast Speeds

Mast Speeds Two-Stage Full Free-Lift Mast Unit

Lifting No Load

Lowering Rated Load

No Load

Rated Load

m/sec

ft/min

m/sec

ft/min

m/sec

ft/min

m/sec

ft/min

S3.50-4.00XM (S70-80XM)

0.60

118

0.56

111

0.36

70

0.50

99

S4.50XM (S100XM)

0.51

101

0.48

94

0.32

63

0.45

89

S5.50XM (S120XM)

0.51

101

0.44

87

0.32

63

0.47

92

Two-Stage Limited Free-Lift Mast Unit

Lifting No Load

Lowering Rated Load

No Load

Rated Load

m/sec

ft/min

m/sec

ft/min

m/sec

ft/min

m/sec

ft/min

S3.50-4.00XM (S70-80XM)

0.68

134

0.62

123

0.47

93

0.55

108

S4.50-5.50XM (S100-120XM)

0.55

108

0.53

105

0.42

82

0.51

100

Three-Stage Full Free-Lift Unit

Lifting No Load

Lowering Rated Load

No Load

Rated Load

m/sec

ft/min

m/sec

ft/min

m/sec

ft/min

m/sec

ft/min

S3.50-4.00XM (S70-80XM)

0.63

124

0.58

114

0.44

87

0.53

105

S4.50XM (S100XM)

0.52

102

0.51

100

0.39

76

0.47

92

S5.50XM (S120XM)

0.52

102

0.45

89

0.39

76

0.47

92

5


Torque Specifications

8000 SRM 988

Torque Specifications FRAME

TRANSMISSION

Counterweight Capscrew 1022 N•m (755 lbf ft)

Transmission Cover Capscrews 40 N•m (30 lbf ft)

ENGINE - GM V-6

Oil Pump Capscrews 40 N•m (30 lbf ft)

Intake Manifold Capscrews 47 N•m (35 lbf ft) Valve Cover Capscrews 10 N•m (7 lbf ft) Exhaust Manifold Capscrews 35 N•m (25 lbf ft) Center Port 25 N•m (20 lbf ft) Outer Ports 50 N•m (35 lbf ft) Camshaft Sprocket Capscrews 25 N•m (20 lbf ft) Vibration Damper Capscrew 81 N•m (60 lbf ft) Main Bearing Cap Capscrews 70 N•m (50 lbf ft) Connecting Rods 45 N•m (35 lbf ft) Flywheel Capscrews 80 N•m (60 lbf ft) Flywheel Housing Capscrews 50 N•m (40 lbf ft) Engine Mount to Engine Capscrews 30 N•m (25 lbf ft) Engine Mount to Mount Plate Bolts 65 N•m (50 lbf ft) Engine Mount to Flywheel Housing Capscrews 165 N•m (120 lbf ft) Engine Mount Bolts 120 N•m (90 lbf ft)

ENGINE - PERKINS Engine Mount to Engine Capscrews 65 N•m (50 lbf ft) Engine Mount Bolts 120 N•m (90 lbf ft)

6

Torque Converter Housing Capscrews 40 N•m (30 lbf ft) Control Valve Capscrews 20 N•m (15 lbf ft) Differential Case Capscrews 140 N•m (105 lbf ft) Ring Gear Capscrews 140 N•m (105 lbf ft) Output Gear Nut 750 N•m (550 lbf ft) Torque Converter Drive Plate Capscrews 45 N•m (35 lbf ft) Differential Bearing Caps 225 N•m (166 lbf ft)

DRIVE AXLE Brake Assembly to Axle Nuts 340 to 375 N•m (251 to 277 lbf ft) Axle Mount to Frame 320 to 350 N•m (235 to 258 lbf ft) Axle Shaft Flange Capscrews 225 to 250 N•m (166 to 184 lbf ft) Axle Housing to Transmission Capscrews 65 N•m (48 lbf ft) Hub Adjustment Nut 205 N•m (151 lbf ft) Initial 35 N•m (26 lbf ft) Final Wheel Nuts 610 to 680 N•m (450 to 502 lbf ft)

STEERING SYSTEM Axle Mount Capscrews 90 N•m (66 lbf ft)


8000 SRM 988 Bearing Cap for Spindle 45 N•m (35 lbf ft) Tie Rod Castle Nut 175 N•m (129 lbf ft) Steering Cylinder Capscrews 225 N•m (166 lbf ft) Wheel Bearing Adjustment Nut 200 N•m (148 lbf ft) Initial 35 N•m (26 lbf ft) Final

BRAKE SYSTEM Back Plate Capscrews 340 N•m (251 lbf ft)

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM Capscrews for Special Blocks for Pump Drive Chain 20 N•m (15 lbf ft)

MAIN CONTROL VALVE Through Bolt Nuts (5/16 in.) 20 N•m (15 lbf ft) Through Bolts Nuts (3/8 in.) 45 N•m (35 lbf ft)

Torque Specifications

TILT CYLINDERS Piston Nut 400 to 440 N•m (295 to 325 lbf ft) Retainer 400 to 500 N•m (295 to 370 lbf ft) Rod End Lock Capscrews 90 N•m (66 lbf ft) Anchor Pin Retainer Capscrews 77 N•m (57 lbf ft)

LIFT CYLINDERS Main Lift Cylinder Retainer Cap 340 to 410 N•m (251 to 302 lbf ft) Free-Lift Cylinder Retainer Cap 400 to 475 N•m (295 to 350 lbf ft) Free-Lift Cylinder Mount Capscrews 121 N•m (89 lbf ft)

MAST Pivot Pin Capscrews 320 N•m (236 lbf ft) Sideshift Carriage Lower Hook Capscrews 78 N•m (58 lbf ft) Side Roller Mount Capscrews 90 N•m (66 lbf ft)

7


NOTES ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

8



&22/,1* 6<67(0 INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE POWERED UNITS

PART NO. 897934

700 SRM 626


Cooling System

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS General ............................................................................................................................................................... Description ......................................................................................................................................................... Radiator.......................................................................................................................................................... Radiator Cap .................................................................................................................................................. Thermostat..................................................................................................................................................... Water Pump ................................................................................................................................................... Fan and Fan Shroud...................................................................................................................................... Cooling System Checks...................................................................................................................................... Radiator.......................................................................................................................................................... Thermostat..................................................................................................................................................... Water Pump ................................................................................................................................................... Exhaust Leaks ............................................................................................................................................... Fan and Fan Shroud...................................................................................................................................... Radiator Cleaning .............................................................................................................................................. Drain .............................................................................................................................................................. Clean .............................................................................................................................................................. Fill .................................................................................................................................................................. Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................................................

1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 6

This section is for the following models: Internal Combustion Engine Powered Units

©2002 HYSTER COMPANY

i


700 SRM 626

General

General This section has the description and the checks for some parts of the cooling system. Prodecures for cleaning the radiator and troubleshooting are also included in this section.

The cooling system has the following parts: radiator, auxiliary coolant reservoir, water pump, thermostat, fan, and fan shroud. See Figure 1.

1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6. 7. 8.

AUXILIARY COOLANT RESERVOIR RADIATOR CAP RADIATOR RADIATOR DRAIN VALVE

TOP RADIATOR HOSE FAN SHROUD BOTTOM RADIATOR HOSE PORTS FOR TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER

Figure 1. Typical Radiator Arrangement

1


Description

700 SRM 626

Description The purpose of the cooling system is to control the operating temperature of the engine (and in some units, the transmission, brakes, and hydraulic system). A centrifugal water pump circulates coolant through passages in the engine block and the radiator. A thermostat is installed in the water outlet fitting on the engine. As the coolant flows through the radiator, the fan moves air through the radiator to help cool the system. The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze. The antifreeze prevents the coolant from freezing in cold weather, and thereby preventing damage to the engine and radiator. The antifreeze also prevents rust and lubricates the water pump.

RADIATOR The radiator is the heat exchanger for the cooling system. The fan causes air to flow through the radiator and reduces the temperature of the coolant. The auxiliary coolant reservoir is connected to the radiator by a hose. As the engine gets hot, the coolant expands. During expansion, coolant moves from the radiator to the reservoir. When the engine stops, the coolant becomes cool and contracts. The coolant in the reservoir flows back into the radiator. In this way, the radiator is kept filled with coolant during normal operation.

by another spring. The vacuum valve opens to relieve the vacuum created when the coolant temperature decreases. In certain conditions this vacuum can cause the radiator or top hose to collapse.

THERMOSTAT The thermostat is a device that controls coolant flow by opening and closing to regulate coolant temperature. The thermostat uses a wax pellet to control its operation. The wax pellet expands when it is heated and contracts when it is cold. When heated, the wax pellet pushes on the piston, causing the valve in the thermostat to open. As the wax pellet cools, it contracts and lets a spring close the valve. When the engine is first started and the coolant is cold, the thermostat remains closed. During this time the coolant circulates through the engine, letting it warm quickly. As the engine becomes warm the thermostat opens, letting coolant circulate through the radiator. The opening and closing of the thermostat helps keep the coolant within the operating limits of the system. The same thermostat is used for summer and winter seasons. Do not operate the engine without a thermostat. The engine will take longer to get warm and may run improperly. See Figure 2.

On units with a powershift transmission, an oil cooler is built into the radiator. Oil from the transmission flows through coils in the radiator tank to help control the oil temperature.

RADIATOR CAP The radiator cap is a pressure-vent type that lets the pressure in the cooling system increase to 103 kPa (15 psi). The pressure in the system prevents vapor from forming in the coolant flowing to the water pump. This action maintains the efficiency of the water pump and the performance of the cooling system. The increase in pressure also raises the boiling point of the coolant mixture to approximately 125 C (257 F) at sea level. The radiator cap has a pressure valve and a vacuum valve. The pressure valve is held against its seat by a spring. The pressure valve opens when the pressure in the cooling system exceeds 103 kPa (15 psi). The vacuum valve is held against its seat

2

1. 2. 3. 4.

PISTON VALVE SEAT SPRING DIAPHRAGM

5. 6. 7. 8.

WAX PELLET FRAME FLANGE VENT HOLE

Figure 2. Typical Thermostat


700 SRM 626

Cooling System Checks

WATER PUMP

FAN AND FAN SHROUD

The centrifugal-type water pump is installed at the front of the engine block. The inlet for the pump is connected to the bottom of the radiator by a hose. From the pump, coolant passes through the passages in the engine block to the top of the radiator. The thermostat controls the flow of coolant through the engine and radiator.

The fan is used to provide airflow through the radiator at all engine speeds. The fan is a pusher-type or puller-type and can be installed on the water pump or on a separate hub. The fan is driven by a drive belt from the engine crankshaft. The fan shroud ensures the air flow from the fan goes through the core of the radiator.

Cooling System Checks RADIATOR

2. Mix solution of water with 33% antifreeze. Heat solution to 14 C (57 F) above temperature on thermostat.

WARNING During engine operation, be careful not to touch the fan, pulleys, or drive belts. Contact with these parts can cause serious injury.

3. Hold thermostat with wire and put it in solution. Stir solution. If operating correctly, thermostat will open.

NOTE: The Repair procedures for the radiator are in the Frame section of the Service Manual.

4. Remove thermostat and put in same solution at −12 C (10 F) below temperature on thermostat. Valve must close completely.

To check for water flow restrictions in the radiator, run the engine until it is warm. Shut the engine OFF and feel the radiator. The temperature must be even across the radiator. (The radiator will be hotter near the top radiator hose.) Cold spots on the radiator indicate restrictions. If the radiator has leaks, have it repaired by trained personnel.

THERMOSTAT WARNING During engine operation, be careful not to touch the fan, pulleys, or drive belts. Contact with these parts can cause serious injury.

CAUTION DO NOT operate the engine without a thermostat. The engine and cooling system can be damaged. NOTE: Repair procedures for the thermostat are in the Engine section of the Service Manual. 1. Remove thermostat from cooling system. Figure 3.

See

1. 2. 3. 4.

FAN SPACER HUB/PULLEY WATER PUMP

5. THERMOSTAT 6. THERMOSTAT HOUSING

Figure 3. Cooling System Components Typical Arrangement

3


Radiator Cleaning

700 SRM 626

WATER PUMP

FAN AND FAN SHROUD

WARNING

WARNING

During engine operation, be careful not to touch the fan, pulleys, or drive belts. Contact with these parts can cause serious injury. NOTE: Repair procedures for the water pump are in the Engine section of the Service Manual. Run the engine until it is warm. Check the operation of the water pump by holding the top radiator hose. If the pump is operating, there will be pressure surges in the hose. See Figure 3.

During engine operation, be careful not to touch the fan, pulleys, or drive belts. Contact with these parts can cause serious injury.

WARNING DO NOT try to repair a damaged fan. If a fan has a bent blade or is cracked, install a new fan. A damaged fan can break during use and cause damage or serious injury. NOTE: Repair procedures for the fan and shroud are in the Frame section of the Service Manual.

EXHAUST LEAKS WARNING During engine operation, be careful not to touch the fan, pulleys, or drive belts. Contact with these parts can cause serious injury. To check for exhaust leaks into the cooling system, use a kit for this purpose. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions when doing the test.

1. When installing fan, make sure correct spacers are installed and mounting capscrews are tight. See Figure 1 and Figure 3. 2. When installing fan shroud, make sure correct seals are on shroud. Before tightening capscrews, make sure clearance around circumference of fan is even with shroud. Also make sure 1/3 to 1/2 of cross-section of fan blade extends into fan shroud. 3. Make sure WARNING labels are installed on shroud.

Radiator Cleaning DRAIN WARNING DO NOT remove the radiator cap from the radiator when the engine is hot. When the radiator cap is removed, the pressure is released from the system. If the system is hot, the steam and boiling coolant can cause burns.

CAUTION Disposal of lubricants and fluids must meet local environmental regulations. 1. Let coolant cool to room temperature. Put drain pan under radiator. Remove radiator cap. See Figure 1.

4

2. Open drain valve or remove bottom radiator hose. Remove drain plug from engine block to drain engine.

CLEAN CAUTION Disposal of lubricants and fluids must meet local environmental regulations. 1. Drain cooling system. Fill cooling system with clean water. 2. Install radiator cap. Run engine until top radiator hose is hot. Stop engine and let engine cool.


700 SRM 626 3. Drain water from radiator. If water is dirty, fill system with water and repeat procedure until water is clean.

CAUTION Follow the manufacturer’s instructions when using a chemical radiator cleaner. 4. If water does not clean system, use chemical radiator cleaner.

CAUTION Follow the manufacturer’s instructions when using special equipment to reverse clean the radiator. NOTE: On lift truck models S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004), the cooling system may be equipped with an optional radiator screen.

Radiator Cleaning NOTE: Units with a Mazda engine must use a boronfree type of antifreeze. 2. Fill cooling system with mixture of 50% water and 50% ethylene glycol antifreeze. Install radiator cap. The 50/50 mixture will protect the cooling system to −37 C (−35 F). 3. Use same coolant mixture to fill auxiliary coolant reservoir to FULL mark. See Figure 4. 4. Start and run engine until thermostat opens. (Top radiator hose will be warm.) 5. Check coolant level at auxiliary coolant reservoir. Add coolant as necessary to keep level between FULL and ADD marks.

5. If radiator or cooling system is very dirty or has restriction, use reverse cleaning method. This method uses air pressure to force water through radiator in opposite direction of normal flow.

WARNING Compressed air can move particles so they cause injury to the user or to other personnel. Make sure the path of the compressed air is away from all personnel. Wear protective goggles or a face shield to prevent injury to the eyes. 6. Check radiator fins. Clean exterior of radiator with compressed air or water as needed.

FILL 1. Install drain plug in engine block. Close drain valve or install bottom radiator hose as needed.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

ADD MARK FULL MARK AUXILIARY COOLANT RESERVOIR FILL CAP RADIATOR CAP

WARNING Do not use an alcohol or methanol-base antifreeze. They are flammable and can cause personal injury or damage to the lift truck.

Figure 4. Auxiliary Coolant Reservoir

5


Troubleshooting

700 SRM 626

Troubleshooting PROBLEM Coolant leaks.

The engine is too hot during operation.

Exhaust leaks into coolant.

6

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

There is a leak in the radiator.

Repair radiator.

There is a leak in a radiator hose or coolant hose.

Install new hoses.

There is a leak from a plug or sensor in the engine block.

Check sensors and plugs, and repair leaks.

Water pump leaks.

Install new water pump.

Thermostat housing leaks.

Install new thermostat housing. Check for correct installation of thermostat.

Cylinder head gasket is damaged.

Install new head gasket.

Cylinder head is cracked.

Install new cylinder head.

Engine block is cracked.

Install new cylinder block.

There is not enough coolant in the cooling system.

Check coolant level in radiator and coolant recovery bottle. Add coolant to correct level.

The radiator is dirty.

Drain and clean radiator. Clean radiator fins with low pressure air or water in reverse direction of normal air flow. Be careful not to bend fins. Refill with clean coolant.

The drive belt for water pump is not adjusted correctly, worn, or broken.

Check water pump drive belt. Adjust or install new belt as required.

The thermostat is wrong heat range or does not operate correctly.

Check heat range. Install new thermostat.

The cooling system has restrictions.

Drain and back-flush engine and radiator. Refill with clean coolant.

The water pump is worn or damaged.

Install new water pump.

The exhaust system has restrictions.

Check exhaust system. Remove restrictions.

Ignition timing is not correct.

Check and adjust timing.

Head gasket(s) leaks.

Install new gasket(s).

Cylinder head is damaged.

Install new cylinder head.



DIAGRAMS S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]

PART NO. 1510481

8000 SRM 989


Diagrams

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS General ............................................................................................................................................................... Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements ......................................................................................................... Figure 1. Electrical Schematic LPG (REV 1) (E004)............................................................................... Figure 2. Electrical Schematic LPG (REV 2-5) (E004) ........................................................................... Figure 3. Electrical Schematic LPG (REV 6) (E004)............................................................................... Figure 4. Wiring Diagram LPG (REV 1) (E004)...................................................................................... Figure 5. Wiring Diagram LPG (REV 2 and 3) (E004) ........................................................................... Figure 6. Wiring Diagram LPG (REV 4) (E004)...................................................................................... Figure 7. Electrical Schematic Gas (REV 1) (E004)................................................................................ Figure 8. Electrical Schematic Gas (REV 2-4) (E004) ............................................................................ Figure 9. Electrical Schematic Gas (REV 5) (E004)................................................................................ Figure 10. Wiring Diagram Gas (REV 1) (E004) .................................................................................... Figure 11. Wiring Diagram Gas (REV 2) (E004) ..................................................................................... Figure 12. Wiring Diagram Gas (REV 3) (E004)..................................................................................... Figure 13. Electrical Schematic Chassis - 4.3L ECES (F004) ................................................................ Figure 14. GM V-6 Gas and LPG Engine Electrical Schematic/Wiring Diagram (F004), Before November 2005.......................................................................................................................................... Figure 15. GM V-6 Gas and LPG Engine Electrical Schematic/Wiring Diagram (F004), After November 2005.......................................................................................................................................... Figure 16. Electrical Schematic Diesel (REV 1) (E004, F004), Before November 2005........................ Figure 17. Electrical Schematic Diesel (REV 2-4) (E004, F004), Before November 2005 .................... Figure 18. Electrical Schematic Diesel (F004), After November 2005................................................... Figure 19. Wiring Diagram Diesel (REV 1) (E004, F004), Before November 2005............................... Figure 20. Wiring Diagram Diesel (REV 2) (E004, F004), Before November 2005............................... Figure 21. Wiring Diagram Diesel (F004), After November 2005.......................................................... Figure 22. Hydraulic System Schematic (REV 1) (E004, F004)............................................................. Figure 23. Single-Speed Powershift Transmission Schematic (REV 1) (E004, F004)...........................

1 2 2 5 7 9 13 17 21 24 26 28 32 36 40 42 46 48 51 53 55 59 63 67 67

This section is for the following models: S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]

Š2007 HYSTER COMPANY

i


8000 SRM 989

General

General This service repair manual contains electrical, hydraulic, and transmission diagrams for S3.50-5.50XM (S70120XM) model lift trucks.

1


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 1. Electrical Schematic LPG (REV 1) (E004) (Sheet 1 of 3)

2

8000 SRM 989


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 1. Electrical Schematic LPG (REV 1) (E004) (Sheet 2 of 3)

3


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 1. Electrical Schematic LPG (REV 1) (E004) (Sheet 3 of 3)

4

8000 SRM 989


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 2. Electrical Schematic LPG (REV 2-5) (E004) (Sheet 1 of 2)

5


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 2. Electrical Schematic LPG (REV 2-5) (E004) (Sheet 2 of 2)

6

8000 SRM 989


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 3. Electrical Schematic LPG (REV 6) (E004) (Sheet 1 of 2)

7


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 3. Electrical Schematic LPG (REV 6) (E004) (Sheet 2 of 2)

8

8000 SRM 989


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 4. Wiring Diagram LPG (REV 1) (E004) (Sheet 1 of 4)

9


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 4. Wiring Diagram LPG (REV 1) (E004) (Sheet 2 of 4)

10

8000 SRM 989


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 4. Wiring Diagram LPG (REV 1) (E004) (Sheet 3 of 4)

11


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 4. Wiring Diagram LPG (REV 1) (E004) (Sheet 4 of 4)

12

8000 SRM 989


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 5. Wiring Diagram LPG (REV 2 and 3) (E004) (Sheet 1 of 4)

13


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 5. Wiring Diagram LPG (REV 2 and 3) (E004) (Sheet 2 of 4)

14

8000 SRM 989


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 5. Wiring Diagram LPG (REV 2 and 3) (E004) (Sheet 3 of 4)

15


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 5. Wiring Diagram LPG (REV 2 and 3) (E004) (Sheet 4 of 4)

16

8000 SRM 989


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 6. Wiring Diagram LPG (REV 4) (E004) (Sheet 1 of 4)

17


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 6. Wiring Diagram LPG (REV 4) (E004) (Sheet 2 of 4)

18

8000 SRM 989


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 6. Wiring Diagram LPG (REV 4) (E004) (Sheet 3 of 4)

19


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 6. Wiring Diagram LPG (REV 4) (E004) (Sheet 4 of 4)

20

8000 SRM 989


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 7. Electrical Schematic Gas (REV 1) (E004) (Sheet 1 of 3)

21


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 7. Electrical Schematic Gas (REV 1) (E004) (Sheet 2 of 3)

22

8000 SRM 989


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 7. Electrical Schematic Gas (REV 1) (E004) (Sheet 3 of 3)

23


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 8. Electrical Schematic Gas (REV 2-4) (E004) (Sheet 1 of 2)

24

8000 SRM 989


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 8. Electrical Schematic Gas (REV 2-4) (E004) (Sheet 2 of 2)

25


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 9. Electrical Schematic Gas (REV 5) (E004) (Sheet 1 of 2)

26

8000 SRM 989


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 9. Electrical Schematic Gas (REV 5) (E004) (Sheet 2 of 2)

27


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 10. Wiring Diagram Gas (REV 1) (E004) (Sheet 1 of 4)

28

8000 SRM 989


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 10. Wiring Diagram Gas (REV 1) (E004) (Sheet 2 of 4)

29


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 10. Wiring Diagram Gas (REV 1) (E004) (Sheet 3 of 4)

30

8000 SRM 989


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 10. Wiring Diagram Gas (REV 1) (E004) (Sheet 4 of 4)

31


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 11. Wiring Diagram Gas (REV 2) (E004) (Sheet 1 of 4)

32

8000 SRM 989


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 11. Wiring Diagram Gas (REV 2) (E004) (Sheet 2 of 4)

33


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 11. Wiring Diagram Gas (REV 2) (E004) (Sheet 3 of 4)

34

8000 SRM 989


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 11. Wiring Diagram Gas (REV 2) (E004) (Sheet 4 of 4)

35


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 12. Wiring Diagram Gas (REV 3) (E004) (Sheet 1 of 4)

36

8000 SRM 989


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 12. Wiring Diagram Gas (REV 3) (E004) (Sheet 2 of 4)

37


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 12. Wiring Diagram Gas (REV 3) (E004) (Sheet 3 of 4)

38

8000 SRM 989


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 12. Wiring Diagram Gas (REV 3) (E004) (Sheet 4 of 4)

39


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

8000 SRM 989

Figure 13. Electrical Schematic Chassis - 4.3L ECES (F004) (Sheet 1 of 2)

40


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 13. Electrical Schematic Chassis - 4.3L ECES (F004) (Sheet 2 of 2)

41


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

8000 SRM 989

Figure 14. GM V-6 Gas and LPG Engine Electrical Schematic/Wiring Diagram (F004), Before November 2005 (Sheet 1 of 4)

42


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 14. GM V-6 Gas and LPG Engine Electrical Schematic/Wiring Diagram (F004), Before November 2005 (Sheet 2 of 4)

43


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

8000 SRM 989

Figure 14. GM V-6 Gas and LPG Engine Electrical Schematic/Wiring Diagram (F004), Before November 2005 (Sheet 3 of 4)

44


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 14. GM V-6 Gas and LPG Engine Electrical Schematic/Wiring Diagram (F004), Before November 2005 (Sheet 4 of 4)

45


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

8000 SRM 989

Figure 15. GM V-6 Gas and LPG Engine Electrical Schematic/Wiring Diagram (F004), After November 2005 (Sheet 1 of 2)

46


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 15. GM V-6 Gas and LPG Engine Electrical Schematic/Wiring Diagram (F004), After November 2005 (Sheet 2 of 2)

47


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

8000 SRM 989

Figure 16. Electrical Schematic Diesel (REV 1) (E004, F004), Before November 2005 (Sheet 1 of 3)

48


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 16. Electrical Schematic Diesel (REV 1) (E004, F004), Before November 2005 (Sheet 2 of 3)

49


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

8000 SRM 989

Figure 16. Electrical Schematic Diesel (REV 1) (E004, F004), Before November 2005 (Sheet 3 of 3)

50


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 17. Electrical Schematic Diesel (REV 2-4) (E004, F004), Before November 2005 (Sheet 1 of 2)

51


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

8000 SRM 989

Figure 17. Electrical Schematic Diesel (REV 2-4) (E004, F004), Before November 2005 (Sheet 2 of 2)

52


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 18. Electrical Schematic Diesel (F004), After November 2005 (Sheet 1 of 2)

53


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

8000 SRM 989

Figure 18. Electrical Schematic Diesel (F004), After November 2005 (Sheet 2 of 2)

54


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 19. Wiring Diagram Diesel (REV 1) (E004, F004), Before November 2005 (Sheet 1 of 4)

55


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

8000 SRM 989

Figure 19. Wiring Diagram Diesel (REV 1) (E004, F004), Before November 2005 (Sheet 2 of 4)

56


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 19. Wiring Diagram Diesel (REV 1) (E004, F004), Before November 2005 (Sheet 3 of 4)

57


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

8000 SRM 989

Figure 19. Wiring Diagram Diesel (REV 1) (E004, F004), Before November 2005 (Sheet 4 of 4)

58


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 20. Wiring Diagram Diesel (REV 2) (E004, F004), Before November 2005 (Sheet 1 of 4)

59


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

8000 SRM 989

Figure 20. Wiring Diagram Diesel (REV 2) (E004, F004), Before November 2005 (Sheet 2 of 4)

60


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 20. Wiring Diagram Diesel (REV 2) (E004, F004), Before November 2005 (Sheet 3 of 4)

61


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

8000 SRM 989

Figure 20. Wiring Diagram Diesel (REV 2) (E004, F004), Before November 2005 (Sheet 4 of 4)

62


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 21. Wiring Diagram Diesel (F004), After November 2005 (Sheet 1 of 4)

63


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

8000 SRM 989

Figure 21. Wiring Diagram Diesel (F004), After November 2005 (Sheet 2 of 4)

64


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 21. Wiring Diagram Diesel (F004), After November 2005 (Sheet 3 of 4)

65


Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

8000 SRM 989

Figure 21. Wiring Diagram Diesel (F004), After November 2005 (Sheet 4 of 4)

66


8000 SRM 989

Diagrams, Schematics, or Arrangements

Figure 22. Hydraulic System Schematic (REV 1) (E004, F004)

Figure 23. Single-Speed Powershift Transmission Schematic (REV 1) (E004, F004)

67


NOTES ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

68



DRIVE AXLE S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]

PART NO. 1510463

1400 SRM 984


Drive Axle

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS General ............................................................................................................................................................... Description ......................................................................................................................................................... Drive Axle Repairs ............................................................................................................................................. Remove and Disassemble .............................................................................................................................. Clean and Inspect .......................................................................................................................................... Brakes ........................................................................................................................................................ Drive Axle .................................................................................................................................................. Assembly and Installation ............................................................................................................................ Torque Specifications ......................................................................................................................................... Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................................................

1 1 1 1 3 3 4 4 6 7

This section is for the following models: S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]

©2003 HYSTER COMPANY

i


1400 SRM 984

Drive Axle Repairs

General This section contains the description and repair procedures for the drive axle, wheel bearings, and mounts for the axle housing. For a description of the differential and ring and pinion gears, see the section Single-Speed Powershift Transmission - Description and Operation 1300 SRM 399. Repair

procedures for the differential and ring and pinion gears can be found in the section Single-Speed Powershift Transmission - Troubleshooting and Repairs 1300 SRM 397.

Description The drive axle assembly is fastened to the frame of the lift truck by separate mounts and can rotate in the mounts. The outer ends of the axle housings are the spindles for the wheel bearings. The wheel bearings are tapered roller bearings with the cups pressed into the hubs. The nut on the end of the axle housing adjusts and holds the wheel bearings. The

axle shafts are fastened to the hubs by capscrews and two dowel pins. The back plate and brake assembly are fastened to the axle mounts. The axle mounts also have bearing journals for the upright. The outer wheel bearing is lubricated by gear oil from the differential housing. The inner wheel bearing is lubricated by wheel bearing grease. See Figure 1.

Drive Axle Repairs REMOVE AND DISASSEMBLE WARNING When putting the lift truck on blocks, make sure the surface is solid, even, and level. Any blocks used to support the lift truck must be solid, one-piece units. 1. Place blocks on each side (front and rear) of steering tires to prevent movement of lift truck. 2. Raise lift truck and place blocks under frame so drive wheels are just touching floor. Place blocks under counterweight to maintain stability. Drain oil from differential housing. 3. Remove mast assembly as directed in Mast - Description and Repairs 4000 SRM 736. 4. Remove wheel assemblies from drive axle. 5. Remove capscrews that hold axle shafts to hubs. There are two holes with threads in the flange of the axle shaft. Put capscrews in holes to push axle shaft from hub. Or, hit end of axle shaft with a soft hammer. Remove axle shaft.

WARNING Brake linings contain dangerous fibers. Breathing the dust from these brake linings

is a cancer and lung disease hazard. Do not create dust! Do not clean brake parts with compressed air or by brushing. Use vacuum equipment approved for brake dust or follow the cleaning procedure in this section. When the brake drums are removed, do not create dust. Do not sand, grind, chisel, hammer, or change linings in any way that will create dust. Any changes to linings must be done in a restricted area with special ventilation. Protective clothing and a respirator must be used. NOTE: The following procedure is for one side of the axle assembly. This procedure applies to both sides. See Figure 1 and Figure 2. 6. Remove adjustment nut, lockwasher, and lock nut. Remove hub and brake drum, bearings, and seal. Discard the seal. If brake drum cannot be easily removed, loosen brake shoes by turning adjuster wheel. 7. If the brakes need repair, see the section Brake System 1800 SRM 985. 8. Disconnect hydraulic brake lines at wheel cylinders. Disconnect parking brake cable at parking brake lever and loosen cable clamps along frame for parking brake cable.

1


Drive Axle Repairs

1400 SRM 984

1. AXLE HOUSING 2. AXLE MOUNT 3. BRAKE ASSEMBLY (BRAKE SHOES AND BACK PLATES) 4. BRAKE DRUM 5. SEAL 6. BEARING CONE 7. BEARING CUP

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

HUB ADJUSTMENT NUT LOCKWASHER LOCK NUT AXLE SHAFT TIRE AND WHEEL MOUNTING PIN DOWEL PIN

Figure 1. Drive Axle Assembly 9. Remove brake assembly from axle mount. 10. Put a block for support under transmission. Remove capscrews holding axle housing to transmission housing.

2

NOTE: If axle mounting pins cannot be removed, soak them in penetrating oil or use a hacksaw blade to saw a slot in the pins. 11. Use a lifting device to hold weight of axle housing. Use a puller to remove mounting pins from frame and axle mount. Remove bolts that hold axle mounts to frame. See Figure 2.


1400 SRM 984

Drive Axle Repairs

12. Remove axle assembly from lift truck. Remove axle mounts from the drive axle. 13. Remove shims only if they are damaged. Be sure to note number of shims removed from each side.

CLEAN AND INSPECT Brakes WARNING Cleaning solvents can be flammable and toxic and can cause skin irritation. When using cleaning solvents, always follow the solvent manufacturer’s recommended safety precautions.

WARNING Brake linings contain dangerous fibers. Breathing the dust from these brake linings is a cancer and lung disease hazard. Do not create dust! Do not clean brake parts with compressed air or by brushing. Use vacuum equipment approved for brake dust or follow the cleaning procedure in this section. When the brake drums are removed, do not create dust. Do not sand, grind, chisel, hammer, or change linings in any way that will create dust. Any changes to linings must be done in a restricted area with special ventilation. Protective clothing and a respirator must be used. 1. Do not release brake lining dust from brake linings into the air when brake drum is removed. 2. Use a solvent approved for cleaning of brake parts to wet brake lining dust. Follow instructions and cautions of the manufacturer when using solvent to wet the asbestos dust on parts of brake. If a solvent spray is used, do not create brake lining dust with the spray.

CAUTION Do not use an oil solvent to clean the wheel cylinder. Use a solvent approved for cleaning of brake parts. Do not permit oil or grease in the brake fluid or on the brake linings.

A. REMOVAL

B. INSTALLATION

1. FRAME 2. AXLE MOUNT 3. MOUNTING PIN

4. BOLT 5. SPACER

Figure 2. Axle Mounts

3. When brake lining is wet, clean parts. Put any cloth or towels in a plastic bag or an airtight container while they are still wet. Put a DANGEROUS FIBERS warning label on plastic bag or airtight container. 4. Any cleaning cloths that will be washed must be cleaned so fibers are not released into the air.

3


Drive Axle Repairs

Drive Axle WARNING Cleaning solvents can be flammable and toxic and can cause skin irritation. When using cleaning solvents, always follow the solvent manufacturer’s recommended safety precautions.

WARNING

1400 SRM 984 capscrews and washers. Tighten capscrews to 65 N•m (48 lbf ft). 4. Install capscrews for axle mounts, but DO NOT tighten them. Lubricate mounting pins with Never-Seeze® compound. Install mounting pins in axle mounts and frame. See Figure 2. After mounting pins are installed, tighten capscrews for axle mounts to 320 to 350 N•m (236 to 258 lbf ft).

Compressed air can move particles so they cause injury to the user or to other personnel. Make sure the path of the compressed air is away from all personnel. Wear protective goggles or a face shield to prevent injury to the eyes.

5. Install brake assembly onto axle mounts. Tighten capscrews to 340 to 375 N•m (251 to 277 lbf ft) using torque pattern shown in Figure 5.

1. Clean all parts of drive axle with solvent and dry with compressed air.

7. Connect hydraulic brake lines at the wheel cylinders. Connect parking brake cables at parking brake lever and connect cable clamps along frame for parking brake cable.

2. Inspect bearings and bearing cups for damage. If either bearings or bearing cups are damaged, replace both bearings and bearing cups. Also replace inner hub seal.

6. Adjust the clearance of brake shoes as described in Brake System 1800 SRM 985.

3. Inspect spindle, axle bushing, and axle mounts for damage. Replace parts if damaged. 4. Inspect splines of axle shaft and replace axle shaft if splines are damaged.

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION NOTE: The following procedure is for one side of the axle assembly. This procedure applies to both sides. See Figure 1 and Figure 4. 1. If shims were removed, install correct number of shims on each side (noted during disassembly) to center axle assembly in frame to within one shim. Tighten shim mounting capscrews to 11 to 13 N•m (8 to 10 lbf ft). See Figure 3. 2. Lubricate surface for axle mounts on axle housing with Never-Seeze® compound. Slide axle mounts onto axle housing. See Figure 4. NOTE: Use a lifting device, roller jack, or forklift truck to support the drive axle during assembly onto transmission housing and lift truck frame. 3. Align axle mounts with frame and install axle housing onto transmission housing. Install

4

NOTE: STANDARD SHORT WHEEL BASE SHOWN. 1. WASHER 2. CAPSCREW

3. SHIMS 4. AXLE MOUNT

Figure 3. Axle Mount Shim Arrangement


1400 SRM 984

Drive Axle Repairs Legend for Figure 4 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

AXLE HOUSING AXLE MOUNT BRAKE SYSTEM HUB ASSEMBLY AXLE SHAFT DURALOCK BOLTS OIL SEAL BEARING CONE BEARING CUP

10. LOCK NUT WHEEL NUT 11. BRAKE HOSE 12. SERRATED BOLTS 13. AXLE SHAFT BOLTS 14. LOCKWASHER 15. LOCK NUT WHEEL BEARINGS

Figure 5. Brake Assembly Torque Pattern 8. Pack wheel bearings with multipurpose grease. 9. Install new oil seal in center of hub. See Figure 6. Install inner bearing. Install inner seal in hub.

Figure 4. Drive Axle

A. SHORT WHEEL BASE HUB ASSEMBLY

B. LONG WHEEL BASE HUB ASSEMBLY

1. HUB 2. BRAKE DRUM 3. SERRATED HUB BOLT

4. OIL SEAL 5. ROLLER BEARING CUP 6. ROLLER BEARING CONE Figure 6. Hub Assembly

5


Torque Specifications

1400 SRM 984

10. Install hub onto drive axle. Use care not to damage seals when installing hub. 11. Install outer bearing cone. 12. Install adjustment nut. Tighten nut to 205 N•m (151 lbf ft) while rotating hub. Loosen nut until hub rotates freely. The torque to rotate wheel hub must be less than 25 N•m (18 lbf ft). Retighten nut to 35 N•m (26 lbf ft) or to first alignment position after 35 N•m (26 lbf ft). Install lockwasher to hold nut. Install lock nut and tighten it to 135 N•m (100 lbf ft).

15. Apply sealant, Hyster Part No. 264159, to flange of axle shaft. Install axle shaft. Tighten capscrews to 225 to 250 N•m (166 to 184 lbf ft), using the sequence shown in Figure 7. 16. Install mast as described in the section Mast Description and Repair 4000 SRM 736. Fill differential housing with 80W-90EP or 85W-140 gear lubricant through fill hole. Remove air from brake system as described in the section Brake System 1800 SRM 985.

13. Install brake drum onto drive axle.

CAUTION When the wheels have been installed, check all wheel nuts after 2 to 5 hours of operation. Torque nuts in a cross pattern to correct torque value. When the nuts stay tight after an 8-hour check, the interval for checking the torque can be extended to 500 hours. 14. Install wheels. Tighten wheel nuts to 610 to 680 N•m (450 to 502 lbf ft).

Figure 7. Axle Shaft Torque Pattern

Torque Specifications Brake Assembly to Axle Mounts 340 to 375 N•m (251 to 277 lbf ft)

Wheel Nuts 610 to 680 N•m (450 to 502 lbf ft)

Axle Mount to Frame 320 to 350 N•m (236 to 258 lbf ft)

Hub Adjustment Nut 205 N•m (151 lbf ft) (Initial) 35 N•m (26 lbf ft) (Final)

Axle Shaft Flange Capscrews 225 to 250 N•m (166 to 184 lbf ft) Axle Housing to Transmission Capscrews 65 N•m (48 lbf ft)

6


1400 SRM 984

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting PROBLEM The lift truck will not move.

The drive axle has leaks.

The drive axle makes noise.

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

An axle shaft is broken.

Install new axle shaft.

The capscrews that hold the axle shaft to the hub are broken.

Replace capscrews.

The differential is damaged.

Repair differential.

Pinion or ring gear is damaged.

Install new pinion and ring gear set.

The drain or fill plug has damaged threads, is loose, or is missing.

Repair threads. Tighten plug. Install missing part.

The O-rings or seals have damage.

Install new O-rings and seals.

The drive axle housing is cracked.

Install new drive axle housing.

The bearings have damage.

Install new parts.

The brake assembly is damaged.

Repair brake assembly.

The oil level is low.

Fill as required. Check for leaks.

The axle mounting capscrews are loose.

Tighten torque.

capscrews

to

specified

7


NOTES ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

8



ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION MEFI-4

PART NO. 1519772

2200 SRM 1016


Electronic Engine Control

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS General ............................................................................................................................................................... Description and Operation ................................................................................................................................ General ........................................................................................................................................................... Electronic Control Module (ECM) ................................................................................................................ Diagnostic Connector ................................................................................................................................ How ECM Begins Operation..................................................................................................................... Electronic Engine Control ............................................................................................................................. What ECM Does ........................................................................................................................................ Distributor ................................................................................................................................................. Ignition Module ......................................................................................................................................... When Engine Is Being Started ................................................................................................................. When Engine Is Running.......................................................................................................................... Electronic Control Module (ECM) with Ignition Module Distributor, Corrections ............................... Fuel Control ................................................................................................................................................... Throttle Body Injection (TBI) ................................................................................................................... Fuel Injectors............................................................................................................................................. Fuel Pressure Regulator ........................................................................................................................... Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) ................................................................................................................. Idle Air Control (IAC)................................................................................................................................ GM 4.3L Engine Governor System........................................................................................................... GM 3.0L Engine Governor System........................................................................................................... Vacuum Ports............................................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump ................................................................................................................................................. ECM Sensors and Controllers....................................................................................................................... Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) .......................................................................................................... Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ............................................................................................

1 1 1 1 1 3 6 6 7 8 9 10 10 11 12 13 13 13 14 14 15 16 16 19 19 19

This section is for the following models:

Š2004 HYSTER COMPANY

i


2200 SRM 1016

Description and Operation

General This section includes description and operation of the electronic engine control system and its components. Repair and troubleshooting procedures for the system used in the GM 3.0L and 4.3L engines are in the section Electronic Engine Control Troubleshooting and Repair.

Engines that have an LPG fuel system use a Microprocessor Spark Timing System (MSTS) or a Carburated Engine Management System (CEMS). They do not have an electronically controlled fuel injection system.

Description and Operation GENERAL When a carburetor and distributor are used for fuel supply and ignition control, a single adjustment cannot be made to give the best adjustment for all operating speeds and conditions. The use of microprocessors has enabled development of electronic systems that can better control engines that use gasoline during all operating conditions.

• Idle Air Control (IAC) • Fuel pump relay • A serial data link for troubleshooting Each ECM has a specific program for the model of lift truck in which it is installed. A replacement ECM must have the same part number so that the lift truck will operate correctly.

An electronic engine control continuously makes adjustments to control spark timing and fuel mixture to the engine. This control provides the following benefits: • Engine is easier to start and operate during changing conditions. • An electronic governor is installed for finer engine speed control. • Electronic monitoring of engine operation as an aid to troubleshooting.

ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE (ECM) The ECM is a small computer that controls the ignition timing, governor, and fuel supply in a gasoline engine. See Figure 1. An Electronically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM) is installed in the ECM. This EEPROM is programmed with information for the best operation of the engine according to fuel, temperature, load, and other conditions. The ECM receives signals from sensors on the engine and electronically controls the following systems and components for best fuel use and engine performance: • A fuel injection system • Electronic Spark Timing (EST) • An electronic governor • Check Engine light

1. ECM 2. J1 CONNECTOR

3. J2 CONNECTOR

Figure 1. ECM

Diagnostic Connector The diagnostic connector is connected through a wiring harness to the ECM. See Figure 4. The diagnostic connector is an important link for troubleshooting the operation of the ECM and the electronic engine control system. The diagnostic connector is found in the engine compartment. See Figure 2 and Figure 3. The use of the diagnostic connector is described in the Electronic Engine Control Troubleshooting and Repair section for these engines.

1


Description and Operation

2200 SRM 1016

Figure 2. Electronic Engine Control Components Arrangement (GM 3.0L Engine)

2


2200 SRM 1016

Description and Operation Legend for Figure 2

A. TOP VIEW

B. SIDE VIEW

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

THROTTLE BODY INJECTION (TBI) UNIT FUEL INJECTOR FUEL INJECTOR FUSE ECM FUSE (IGNITION) STARTER FUSE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR 7. DISTRIBUTOR 8. ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE (ECM) 9. GOVERNOR MOTOR

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

How ECM Begins Operation

The ECM makes the checks in a few milliseconds and determines correct air and fuel ratio for starting the engine. The range of this air and fuel ratio is 1.8:1 at 40 C ( 40 F) to 17:1 at 150 C (302 F) as indicated by the signal from the Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECT). The ECM controls the amount of fuel sent to the engine by changing the pulse times (how long the fuel injector is energized and de-energized).

When ignition switch is turned to ON, the ECM does the following functions (see Figure 5): • Measures atmospheric pressure (BARO signal) from MAP sensor. • Checks signal from ECT sensor. • Energizes fuel pump relay for approximately 2 seconds. • Checks that Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) indicates that throttle is less than 80% open. If throttle is more than 80% open, the ECM determines that engine is flooded with fuel and delivers less fuel to the engine. • Distributor System: Checks starting mode from ignition module. When starter is engaged, the ignition module sends electronic pulses to the ECM. The frequency of the pulses indicates to the ECM that engine is being started. The ignition module also electronically energizes (ON) and de-energizes (OFF) the primary circuit of the ignition coil to create a spark at the spark plugs.

FUEL PUMP RELAY DIAGNOSTIC CONNECTOR FUEL PUMP FUSE ECM FUSE (B+) MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS) IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) IGNITION COIL OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

When the engine starts, frequency of pulses from the ignition module increases and indicates to the ECM that the engine is running. The ECM takes control of the ignition timing, and the EEPROM within the ECM follows its program to give ignition timing and fuel control for best engine operation. When engine is operating, the ECM continuously checks the signals from the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP), Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor, Throttle Position Sensor (TPS), and engine speed sensors to make timing and fuel adjustments for the engine operating conditions.

3


Description and Operation

2200 SRM 1016

Figure 3. Electronic Engine Control Components Arrangement (GM 4.3L Engine)

4


2200 SRM 1016

Description and Operation Legend for Figure 3

A. TOP VIEW

B. VIEW FROM TRANSMISSION

1. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR 2. FUEL PUMP FUSE 3. ECM (B+) FUSE 4. THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS) 5. ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE (ECM)

6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) DIAGNOSTIC CONNECTOR IGNITION COIL TYPE EST DISTRIBUTOR FUEL PRESSURE TEST PORT FUEL FILTER THROTTLE BODY INJECTOR FUEL INJECTORS

14. MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR 15. FUEL PUMP RELAY 16. OIL PRESSURE SWITCH 17. OIL PRESSURE SENDER 18. COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE SENSOR 19. GOVERNOR MOTOR Legend for Figure 4

A. B. E. F. G.

GROUND FAULT ANALYSIS TERMINAL CHECK MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT +12 VOLTS SERIAL DATA FOR SCAN TOOL TESTER

Figure 4. Diagnostic Connector

Figure 5. Electronic Engine Control System

5


Description and Operation

ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL What ECM Does The ECM receives signals from the following components (see Figure 6):

1. ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE (ECM) 2. THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS) 3. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR 4. MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR 5. FUEL PUMP RELAY 6. FUEL PUMP

2200 SRM 1016 • Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor. This sensor is a pressure transducer that measures atmospheric pressure before the engine is started, and the ECM uses this pressure as a reference. This sensor then measures changes in pressure in the intake manifold during engine operation.

7. FUEL INJECTOR (ONE FOR 3.0L, TWO FOR 4.3L) 8. GOVERNOR MOTOR (GM 4.3L SHOWN) 9. GOVERNOR MOTOR CONTROLLER 10. DISTRIBUTOR 11. SPARK PLUG (GM 4.3L SHOWN) 12. IGNITION COIL

Figure 6. Electronic Engine Control System (V6, 4.3L Engine)

6


2200 SRM 1016 • Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor. This sensor is a thermistor (resistor that is calibrated to change its value as its temperature changes) that monitors the engine coolant temperature. • Throttle Position Sensor (TPS). This sensor indicates the position of the throttle that is set by the operator and the governor to a speed that is below the governed speed and is used with indications from other sensors to determine the correct engine operation. • Fuel Pump. When the key switch is first turned to ON, the ECM energizes the fuel pump relay for 2 seconds. This action quickly raises fuel pressure to the fuel injectors. If engine is not cranked or started within 2 seconds, the ECM de-energizes the fuel pump relay; and fuel pump turns off. When engine is cranked by the starter, the ECM energizes the fuel pump relay to operate the fuel pump. • Ignition Module. This component is a small electronic module within the distributor. See Figure 7. This ignition module is a signal converter that senses the operation of the distributor. A sensor coil in the distributor senses the rotation of the timer core and the ignition module senses the speed of rotation. A square wave generator in the ignition module converts the pulses from the sensor coil to a square wave signal that is sent to the ECM. If the signals from the ignition module to the ECM indicate the crankshaft is rotating at less than 400 rpm, the ECM determines the engine is being cranked by the starter. The ignition module controls the ignition for an engine being started. The Electronic Spark Timing (EST) function from the ECM is de-energized. If the signals from the ignition module to the ECM indicate the crankshaft is rotating at greater than 400 rpm, the ECM determines the engine is running and the EST from the ECM controls the ignition. • Electronic Governor. The ECM senses the engine speed from the ignition module and operates the governor motor on the throttle body to control the engine speed. The governor motor overrides the throttle position set by the operator to control the engine speed within the limits set in the ECM.

Description and Operation

1. CAP 2. ROTOR 3. SHAFT/TIMER CORE 4. RETAINER 5. SHIELD 6. COIL 7. POLE PIECE

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

IGNITION MODULE ALIGNMENT PIN HOUSING WASHER SEAL DRIVE GEAR ROLL PIN GASKET

Figure 7. Distributor Parts (GM 4.3L Shown)

Distributor A timer core (permanent magnet) on the shaft of the distributor has external teeth that align sometimes with an equal number of teeth on the pole piece. See Figure 8. When the teeth of the timer core rotate past the teeth of the pole piece, there is a decrease in the air gap between the timer core and the pole piece. The magnetic field increases. When teeth are not aligned, the magnetic field decreases between the timer core and the pole piece. As the timer core rotates, the magnetic field increases and decreases in a cycle.

7


Description and Operation

2200 SRM 1016 signal from the magnetic pulse generator and ignition module as one of the signals to control the EST. The pole piece has the same number of teeth as the engine has cylinders so that a spark voltage is correctly sent to each spark plug as the shaft in the distributor rotates.

Ignition Module NOTE: The ignition module controls spark timing only when: • The engine is being started. • A module problem has occurred. • An EST or bypass wiring problem is present. • The ECM fails. The ECM controls the spark timing during engine operation. The ignition module will also control the spark timing if there are some failures in the signals to the ECM. This backup mode of operation will often permit operation of the engine so that lift truck can be moved to an area for repair. The result of failures in signals to the ECM is described in the paragraphs under Electronic Control Module (ECM) with Ignition Module Distributor, Corrections. 1. TIMER CORE 2. RETAINER 3. SHIELD

4. SENSING COIL 5. POLE PIECE AND PERMANENT MAGNET

Figure 8. Distributor Pulse Generating Parts When a coil is near a changing magnetic field, a voltage is generated in the coil. This principle is called magnetic induction. A sensing coil is installed over the permanent magnet. As the magnetic field near the pole piece changes, a small voltage is generated in the sensing coil. The principle of magnetic induction also controls the polarity of the voltage generated in the coil. An increasing magnetic field will generate a voltage in the coil that is the opposite polarity of a magnetic field that is decreasing. This signal pulse causes the integrated circuits in the ignition module to generate a square wave signal. The ignition module and magnetic pulse generator control the primary circuit to the ignition coil when engine is started. The ECM receives the square wave

8

The ignition module is a solid-state electronic device that operates like a fast switch except that it does not have any moving or mechanical parts. See Figure 9 and Figure 10. Small electrical pulses from the sensing coil of the pulse generator go to the ignition module. The ECM must always know the speed at which the engine is operating. Engine speed signal is generated by the ignition module. The signal converter changes the signal voltage from the sensing coil to a square wave reference signal for the ECM. This square wave reference signal for engine speed is called REF HI. The ECM must also have a reference to compare with REF HI. An additional wire between the ECM and the ignition module is called REF LO (GROUND). The REF HI and REF LO connections give the EEPROM in the ECM the necessary information about engine speed. The other two wires between the ECM and the distributor control the EST and are called EST and BYPASS.


2200 SRM 1016

Description and Operation

When Engine Is Being Started When the engine is cranked by the starter, the electronic relay is in the de-energized position. See Figure 9. The sensing coil is connected through the square wave generator to the base of the transistor. When the sensing coil applies a positive voltage (the square wave voltage is increasing) to the transistor, the transistor turns on. When the voltage from the

1. 2. 3. 4.

IGNITION MODULE ELECTRONIC RELAY SQUARE WAVE GENERATOR SENSING COIL

sensing coil changes to negative (the square wave voltage is decreasing), the transistor turns off. When the transistor is on, current flows through the primary winding of the ignition coil. When the transistor turns off, the current flow through the primary winding stops. The changing magnetic field in the primary winding generates a high voltage in the secondary winding of the ignition coil. This high voltage generates a spark at the spark plug.

5. 6. 7. 8.

ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE (ECM) BATTERY (+) TO COIL TO IGNITION COIL ( ) TRANSISTOR

Figure 9. Ignition Module When Engine Is Being Started

9


Description and Operation

When Engine Is Running When engine speed is greater than approximately 400 rpm, the ECM determines the engine is running and applies 5 volts on the BYPASS wire to the ignition module. See Figure 10. This voltage energizes the electronic relay and makes the following changes:

1. 2. 3. 4.

IGNITION MODULE ELECTRONIC RELAY SQUARE WAVE GENERATOR SENSING COIL

2200 SRM 1016 The EST wire is not grounded and is now connected to base of the transistor. The sensing coil is disconnected from the base of the transistor. The ignition module and ignition timing are now controlled by the EST signal from the ECM. This operating mode is the EST mode.

5. 6. 7. 8.

ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE (ECM) BATTERY (+) TO COIL TO IGNITION COIL ( ) TRANSISTOR

Figure 10. Ignition Module When Engine Is Running

Electronic Control Module (ECM) with Ignition Module Distributor, Corrections Operation of the ECM was described in earlier paragraphs. See the description in What ECM Does. The following paragraphs describe the corrections made by the ECM in an engine with an ignition module distributor.

10

The ECM does a check of system components of the EST circuit. A set of normal operating limits are part of the EEPROM program. If a sensor sends a signal that is outside the limits of the EEPROM program, the ECM will not use the information. The ECM uses a standard value from its program and continues to operate the ignition module.


2200 SRM 1016 The following examples are the action of the ECM if it detects a problem: MAP Sensor Signal Voltage Is Too High or Too Low. The ECM will use a MAP value from its EEPROM program and use this value to calculate ignition timing and fuel injection. ECT Signal Voltage Is Too High or Too Low. If coolant sensor sends a signal voltage that is outside the range programmed by the ECM, the ECM uses a value from the EEPROM program for spark and fuel calculation. Open Circuit in EST Wire. Normally, the signal from the ECM to the ignition module rises and falls as voltage from the sensing coil rises and falls. If EST circuit is open, the electronic relay in the ignition module is not at ground potential. The engine starts but will not continue to run. If the EST circuit becomes open during engine operation, the engine stops. Short Circuit (Grounded Circuit) in EST Wire. When the engine is being rotated by the starter, the ECM normally detects 0 volts in the EST circuit because the circuit is at ground potential in the ignition module. The ECM would not detect a problem until the engine began to run. The ECM could not operate in the EST mode and the engine will not operate. If the EST circuit has a short circuit (grounded circuit) when the engine is running, the engine stops. Open Circuit or Short Circuit in BYPASS Circuit. The ECM may not detect a problem until the engine began to run. The ECM could not operate in the EST mode, and the engine may operate with reduced power or stop running. If this problem occurs when engine is running, the engine will only operate in starting mode with the ignition module. Open Circuit or Short Circuit in REF HI Circuit. The ECM would not detect that the engine is operating. The ECM will not operate the fuel injector, and the engine will not operate. Open Circuit or Short Circuit in REF LO Circuit. The ECM may not have a good comparison for operation. The ECM may not operate in the EST mode, and the engine may not operate correctly.

Description and Operation

FUEL CONTROL The fuel control system is controlled by the ECM. The purpose of the fuel control system is to deliver fuel to engine for the most efficient operation in all operating modes. The Starting Mode and the Run Mode are described in the paragraphs under How ECM Begins Operation. When the ECM is in the Run Mode, the ratio of the air and fuel mixture is controlled for best operating conditions. Clear Flood Mode. If the engine floods, it can be cleared by opening the throttle to 100% (wide open) during cranking. The ECM then shuts down the fuel injectors so no fuel is delivered. The ECM holds this injector rate as long as the throttle stays at 100% and the engine speed is below 300 rpm. If the throttle position becomes less than 100%, the ECM returns to the starting mode. Acceleration Mode occurs when the ECM senses rapid changes in the throttle position and manifold pressure. The ECM sends additional fuel to the engine. Deceleration Mode occurs when the ECM senses rapid changes in throttle position and manifold pressure. The ECM reduces fuel to engine. If deceleration is very fast, the ECM can stop the fuel supply completely for short periods. Voltage Correction Mode. When battery voltage is low, the ECM can make adjustments for a weak spark from the distributor. The ON time for fuel injectors can be increased, the engine idle can be increased, and the ignition dwell time can be increased. Fuel Shutoff Mode. When the ignition switch is turned to OFF, the ECM stops the pulses to the fuel injectors. This procedure stops a condition called dieseling in a gasoline engine. Also, no fuel is sent to the engine if there are no reference pulses from the distributor. This condition indicates that engine is not running. If the ECM senses that engine speed is above the maximum set (rev limit) in the EEPROM, fuel to engine is stopped until engine rpm drops below the maximum set (rev limit). This action normally occurs if the governor is not operating correctly.

11


Description and Operation

Throttle Body Injection (TBI) This system is similar to a carburetor system because it has a throttle body installed on an inlet manifold. There are two injectors in the GM 4.3L throttle body that mixes the air and fuel. See Figure 11.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

FUEL INJECTOR (2) FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE GOVERNOR MOTOR AND THROTTLE DRIVE ASSEMBLY 6. VACUUM PORTS Figure 11. GM 4.3L Throttle Body Injection (TBI) Unit NOTE: In the GM 3.0L engine, there is only one injector. See Figure 12. The fuel injection system is controlled by the ECM. The basic function of the fuel injection system is to control fuel delivery for the most efficient operation of the engine. Fuel is sent to the Throttle Body Injection (TBI) unit by the fuel pump. The ECM senses the operation of the engine from signals from its sensors and controls the air/fuel ratio to engine by controlling the operation of the fuel injectors and spark timing. The ECM controls the air/fuel ratio for the best operating conditions of the engine. All modes of engine operation are controlled by the ECM and conditions set in its EEPROM. The following paragraphs describe the TBI fuel injection system designed by General Motors®. See Figure 11 and Figure 12. The TBI has the following assemblies: • Fuel injectors • Fuel pressure regulator

12

2200 SRM 1016 • Throttle position sensor • Idle air control valve


2200 SRM 1016 • Governor motor and throttle drive assembly • Vacuum ports

Description and Operation the diaphragm. Fuel pressure from the fuel pump on one side of the diaphragm acts against the force from the calibrated spring on the other side of the diaphragm. The system operates at a pressure of 72 ±3 kPa (10.5 ±0.8 psi).

Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) The TPS is fastened to the side of the throttle body. See Figure 13. The function of the TPS is to sense the throttle position and send a signal to the ECM. This information permits the ECM to generate the correct pulses to the fuel injectors for fuel control. If the Throttle Position Sensor indicates a fully opened throttle to the ECM, the ECM then increases the pulse width to the fuel injectors. An increased pulse width increases fuel flow.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

FUEL INJECTOR FUEL INLET THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS) FUEL OUTLET IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR Figure 12. GM 3.0L Throttle Body Injection (TBI) Unit

The TPS electrical circuit has a 5-volt supply line and a ground path line, both from the ECM. A third wire is used as a signal line to the ECM. By monitoring the voltage on this signal line, the ECM calculates throttle position. As the throttle plate angle is changed (accelerator pedal moved), the signal voltage of the TPS also changes. At a closed throttle position, the signal of the TPS is below 0.5 volt. As the throttle plate opens, the signal voltage increases, so that at wide open throttle, it is approximately 4.5 volts for the 3.0 liter engine and 3.5 volts for the 4.3-liter engine.

Fuel Injectors NOTE: The 3.0L engine has one fuel injector while the 4.3L engine has two fuel injectors. The fuel injectors are solenoids controlled by the ECM. The ECM energizes a solenoid that lifts a normally closed ball valve from its seat. The fuel is under pressure and is injected in a cone spray pattern into the bore of the throttle body above the throttle plate. The fuel that is not used by the fuel injector flows through the pressure regulator and returns to the fuel tank.

Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator is part of the fuel metering assembly of the TBI. The function of the fuel pressure regulator is to keep fuel pressure at the fuel injectors during all operating modes. An air chamber and a fuel chamber are separated by a diaphragm-operated relief valve and a calibrated spring. Fuel pressure at the fuel injectors is controlled by the difference in pressure on each side of

1. 2. 3. 4.

THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR SCREW THROTTLE SHAFT Figure 13. Throttle Position Sensor

13


Description and Operation

2200 SRM 1016

Idle Air Control (IAC)

GM 4.3L Engine Governor System

The idle speed of the engine is controlled by the ECM through the Idle Air Control valve (IAC). The IAC valve has a linear DC step motor that moves a pintle valve to control the idle air system. See Figure 14. The shaft of the pintle valve moves through 256 steps. The step motor moves the pintle one step for each count that it receives from the ECM. Each voltage pulse from the ECM to move the pintle valve is a count.

The components of the governor system are the ECM, governor control module, and governor throttle drive assembly. See Figure 15. The governor prevents engine speeds above the specification when operating with light loads and permits throttle to open for full power for heavy loads.

This movement of the pintle valve controls the airflow around the throttle plates. This airflow controls engine idle speed at all operating temperatures. A minimum idle is set at the factory with a setscrew. This minimum setting is for engine idle at sea level and normal operating conditions. A heavier load from the alternator, hydraulic pumps, and other accessories will cause the ECM to set a higher number of counts on the pintle valve. The number of counts that indicates position of the pintle valve can be seen when the SCAN Tool is connected for troubleshooting.

Figure 15. GM 4.3L Engine Governor System

1. THROTTLE BODY 2. LINEAR DC STEP MOTOR

3. PINTLE VALVE 4. AIRFLOW

Figure 14. Idle Air Control Valve

14

A control cable connects the accelerator pedal to the throttle lever cam. See Figure 16. The throttle lever cam is not connected directly to the throttle shaft. The throttle lever cam is connected to its own shaft that has a throttle drive lever. This throttle drive lever engages a fixed lever on the throttle shaft. This split arrangement permits the throttle lever cam to close the throttle plates, but not to open them directly. The throttle lever cam only gives a limit to the maximum opening of the throttle plates. When the engine speed increases to its maximum rpm, the governor motor controls the actual position of the throttle plates from signals from the ECM. The ECM senses the engine speed and load and controls the engine speed within the specifications. A network of engine sensors (Throttle Position Sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor, Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor, and distributor reference pulses) sends data about operating conditions to the ECM. The ECM uses the data to determine whether or not governed operation is needed.


2200 SRM 1016 When the engine speed is less than approximately 2500 rpm (depending upon the software installed), the governor motor is not energized; and a return spring keeps the governor motor lever at its parked position (Figure 16). The throttle plates can move with the position of the throttle lever cam, and no governor action is used. When the engine speed increases toward approximately 2500 rpm (depending upon the software installed), the ECM sends signals to the governor control module to energize the governor motor. The governor control lever moves from its parked position to control the opening of the throttle plates. If the engine load increases and the engine rpm decreases, the governor motor moves the governor control lever to permit the throttle plates to open further. If the governor system is not operating correctly, the ECM stops fuel to the engine at engine speeds greater than 2900 rpm (depending upon the software installed).

1. THROTTLE DRIVE ASSEMBLY COVER PLATE 2. DC GOVERNOR MOTOR

Description and Operation

GM 3.0L Engine Governor System The governor motor is an electric DC motor that is actuated and controlled by the ECM through the governor control module (governor motor driver circuit). See Figure 17. The governor prevents engine speeds above specifications when operating with light loads and permits the throttle to open for full power for heavy loads. The components of the governor system are the ECM, the governor control module, and the governor motor assembly and cables. The cables and drum allow the throttle control to be split. This split arrangement allows the governor motor drum to close the throttle plate, yet open them indirectly. The first drum is turned by the accelerator pedal. A spring located inside the drum pushes on the second drum. This action allows the operator to open the throttle when under heavy load, but the motor will rotate the drum against the spring to close the throttle plate under light load/high rpm. Using engine speed and load, the governor controls the actual position of the throttle plate, within that range of possible opening.

3. THROTTLE LEVER CAM 4. THROTTLE DRIVE LEVER 15


Description and Operation

2200 SRM 1016

5. GOVERNOR MOTOR LEVER 6. SHAFT TO THROTTLE PLATES 7. THROTTLE DRIVE ASSEMBLY HOUSING Figure 16. Governor Motor and Throttle Drive Assembly (V6, 4.3L Engine) The engine sensors, such as the TPS, MAP Sensor, and crankshaft reference pulses (rpm) give constant information on engine operating conditions to the ECM. The ECM uses the information on throttle plate position and engine rpm to determine whether or not governed operation is needed. At low engine speeds, below calibration rpm, the governor drive motor is not energized. At higher engine speeds above calibration rpm where the governor is needed, the ECM sends a signal to the governor control module to increase current flow to the governor motor. The governor motor rotates the drum, and this causes the throttle plate to rotate toward the closed position. Control of the throttle plate is determined by the TPS and engine speed signals to the ECM. When engine load increases and rpm decreases, the electrical current to the motor is reduced by the ECM through the governor control module, thus allowing the throttle plate to open farther.

Figure 17. GM 3.0L Engine Governor System

16

Legend for Figure 17 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

SENSOR INPUTS KEY SWITCH GOVERNOR CONTROL MODULE GOVERNOR THROTTLE CABLES TBI UNIT THROTTLE (MONOTROL) PEDAL ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE (ECM)

Vacuum Ports The TBI has vacuum ports to provide a source of vacuum for the MAP sensor and PCV valve that require a vacuum source to operate.

Fuel Pump The fuel injection system must have fuel pressure to operate correctly. A check for the correct fuel pressure is often the first test when troubleshooting a fuel injection system. A test port is installed in the fuel pressure line for this purpose. A typical fuel system is shown in Figure 18.


2200 SRM 1016

Description and Operation

Figure 18. Typical Fuel Supply System

17


Description and Operation

2200 SRM 1016 Legend for Figure 18

1. FUEL INJECTOR 2. FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR 3. THROTTLE BODY 4. FUEL PRESSURE LINE

5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

FUEL RETURN LINE FUEL FILTER FUEL PUMP SCREEN FUEL TANK

A small turbine pump connected to an electric motor is installed in the fuel tank below the liquid level. See Figure 19. The fuel pressure regulator on the throttle body keeps the fuel pressure at a constant 72 kPa (10.5 psi). Fuel that is not used by the throttle body is returned to the fuel tank. A screen is connected to the fuel pump to prevent large particles from entering fuel system. Baffles are installed in fuel tank to make sure that fuel is always available to the fuel pump during normal operation of the lift truck.

10. CHECK PORT FOR FUEL PRESSURE 11. BAFFLE

28 kPa (4 psi), the oil pressure switch closes a circuit to operate the fuel pump. If the fuel pump relay is not operating correctly, a long cranking time for a cold engine will be the result. The oil pressure switch will energize the fuel pump when the engine oil pressure increases to approximately 28 kPa (4 psi).

A fuel filter must be used in series with the fuel pump to prevent any dirt from entering the fuel injectors in the throttle body. The orifices in the fuel injectors are very small in diameter, and a particle of dirt can stop the operation. A liquid level sender for the fuel gauge is often fastened to the support for the fuel pump. A fuse and fuel pump relay switch for the fuel pump are mounted in the engine compartment. See Figure 2 and Figure 3. When the key switch is first turned to ON, the ECM energizes the fuel pump relay for 2 seconds. This action quickly raises the fuel pressure to the fuel injectors. If the engine is not started within 2 seconds, the ECM de-energizes the fuel pump relay; and the fuel pump turns off. When the engine is cranked by the starter, the ECM energizes the fuel pump relay again so that the fuel pump operates. This ECM control also prevents the fuel pump from operating if the ignition switch is turned to ON and the engine is not running. When the engine is running or being cranked by the starter, the ECM receives reference pulses from the EST distributor or the DIS module. The ECM then energizes the fuel injectors. The fuel pump can also be energized by the oil pressure switch. When the engine is being cranked by the starter and engine oil pressure is approximately

18

1. OUTLET FUEL LINE 2. RETURN FUEL LINE AND FUEL PUMP SUPPORT 3. CLAMP (2)

4. FLEXIBLE COUPLING 5. FUEL PUMP AND MOTOR 6. SCREEN

Figure 19. Fuel Pump


2200 SRM 1016

Description and Operation

ECM SENSORS AND CONTROLLERS

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)

NOTE: If the connection between the ECT sensor and the ECM is open during starting or operation of the engine, the ECM determines that the engine is cold and adjusts the air and fuel mixture to the full 1.5:1 ratio. This condition will set DTC Code 14 and uses a default value.

The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor is a pressure transducer that measures changes in the pressure in the intake manifold. See Figure 20. The pressure changes are a result of engine load and speed changes. The MAP sensor converts these pressure changes to a signal voltage to the ECM. The ECM sends a 5-volt reference signal to the MAP sensor. When the pressure in the intake manifold changes, the electrical resistance in the MAP sensor also changes. The change in the voltage signal from the MAP sensor enables the ECM to sense the pressure in the intake manifold. A closed throttle causes a low pressure (high engine vacuum) in the intake manifold. This low pressure causes a low-voltage signal from the MAP sensor to the ECM. A fully opened throttle causes a higher pressure (low engine vacuum) in the intake manifold. This higher pressure causes a higher voltage signal from the MAP sensor to the ECM. These pressure changes indicate the load on the engine and send a signal to the ECM. The ECM then calculates the spark timing and fuel requirements for best engine performance. The MAP sensor also measures the barometric pressure when the key switch is turned to ON and before the engine is started. The ECM remembers the barometric pressure (BARO signal) after the engine is running. This method enables the ECM to adjust the ignition timing automatically for different altitudes and atmospheric conditions.

The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor is a resistor that changes its resistance value when the temperature changes (thermistor). See Figure 21. This sensor is installed in the engine coolant system. A low coolant temperature makes the thermistor have a high resistance [101,000 ohms at 40 C ( 40 F)]. A higher coolant temperature makes the thermistor have a lower resistance [70 ohms at 130 C (266 F)]. The ECT sensor uses a thermistor to control the signal voltage to the ECM. The ECM applies a 5-volt reference voltage to the ECT sensor. The measured voltage will be high when the engine coolant is cold. The measured voltage will be lower when the engine coolant is at operating temperature. The ECM will adjust the range of the air and fuel ratio between 1.5:1 at 36 C ( 33 F) and 14.7:1 at 94 C (201 F) from the ECT sensor signal. The ECM will also adjust the ignition timing for more spark advance when the engine coolant is cold and less spark advance when the engine coolant is hot. An engine at operating temperature normally needs less spark advance.

1. TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR 3. LOCK TAB Figure 21. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1. SENSOR 2. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR Figure 20. Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

19


NOTES ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

20



ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR MEFI-4

PART NO. 1519774

2200 SRM 1017


Electronic Engine Control

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS General ................................................................................................................................................................. Troubleshooting Procedure.............................................................................................................................. How This Section Is Arranged ........................................................................................................................ Where Do I Start? ............................................................................................................................................ Visual/Physical Inspection .............................................................................................................................. Knowledge/Tools Required .............................................................................................................................. Damage From Static Discharge (Static Electricity) ...................................................................................... Troubleshooting Information .......................................................................................................................... Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ............................................................................................................ Reading Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC).................................................................................................. Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ............................................................................................... ECM Diagnostic Codes Available.................................................................................................................... Diagnostic Mode .......................................................................................................................................... Field Service Mode ...................................................................................................................................... ECM Learning Ability................................................................................................................................. SCAN Tool Information ................................................................................................................................... On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check ................................................................................................. Test Description......................................................................................................................................... Troubleshooting Charts ..................................................................................................................................... General ........................................................................................................................................................... Tools and Test Equipment......................................................................................................................... Presssure Conversion Chart ..................................................................................................................... Troubleshooting Chart Description Summary ............................................................................................. A-1 No Malfunction Indicator Lamp................................................................................................................. Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Diagnostic Aids .............................................................................................................................................. Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. A-2 No Scan Data, No DTC-12, Malfunction Indicator Lamp ON .................................................................. Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Diagnostic Aids .............................................................................................................................................. Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. A-3 Engine Cranks but Does Not Run.............................................................................................................. Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Diagnostic Aids .............................................................................................................................................. Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. A-4 Fuel Injector Circuit.................................................................................................................................... Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. A-5 Fuel Pump Relay Circuit ............................................................................................................................ Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Diagnostic Aids .............................................................................................................................................. Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. A-6 Fuel System Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................... Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Diagnostic Aids .............................................................................................................................................. Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. A-7 Ignition System Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................... Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Diagnostic Aids .............................................................................................................................................. Test Description .............................................................................................................................................

©2004 HYSTER COMPANY

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 6 7 7 7 8 8 10 11 12 12 12 13 14 15 15 15 15 17 17 17 17 19 19 19 19 22 22 22 24 24 25 25 27 27 27 28 30 32 32 33 33

i


Table of Contents

Electronic Engine Control

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) DTC 14 ECT Sensor Circuit - Low Temp Indicated (Scan Diagnostics) ......................................................... Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Diagnostic Aids .............................................................................................................................................. Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. DTC 15 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Circuit High Temp Indicated ...................................... Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Diagnostic Aids .............................................................................................................................................. Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. DTC 21 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage High ............................................................... Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Diagnostic Aids .............................................................................................................................................. Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. DTC 22 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage Low ................................................................ Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Diagnostic Aids .............................................................................................................................................. Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. DTC 31 Engine Governor Circuit...................................................................................................................... Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Diagnostic Aids .............................................................................................................................................. Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. DTC 33 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage High ......................................... Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Diagnostic Aids .............................................................................................................................................. Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. DTC 34 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage Low........................................... Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Diagnostic Aids .............................................................................................................................................. Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. DTC 41 Electronic Spark Timing (EST) - Open EST Circuit .......................................................................... Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Diagnostic Aids .............................................................................................................................................. Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. DTC 42 EST - Grounded EST Circuit, Open or Grounded Bypass Circuit .................................................... Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Diagnostic Aids .............................................................................................................................................. Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. DTC 51 Calibration Checksum Failure ............................................................................................................ Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Diagnostic Aids .............................................................................................................................................. Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. DTC 81 Fuel Pump Relay Driver Circuit High, Low, or Open ........................................................................ Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Diagnostic Aids .............................................................................................................................................. Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. DTC 81 5-Volt Reference Circuit Out of Range ................................................................................................ Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Diagnostic Aids .............................................................................................................................................. Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. DTC 81 FPRSENSE Circuit Fault .................................................................................................................... Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Diagnostic Aids ..............................................................................................................................................

ii

36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 47 47 47 47 49 49 50 50 52 52 52 52 54 54 54 54 56 56 56 56 57 57 58 58 60 60 61 61 62 62 63


Electronic Engine Control

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. Troubleshooting, Poor Operation ...................................................................................................................... General ........................................................................................................................................................... Make a Careful Visual Check ....................................................................................................................... FAULT: Codes or Performance That Is Abnormal ....................................................................................... FAULT: Loss of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Memory ........................................................................... FAULT: Engine Quits While Driving............................................................................................................ Additional Checks ..................................................................................................................................... FAULT: Engine Is Difficult to Start ............................................................................................................. FAULT: Variation in Engine Power When Throttle Is Held Steady ........................................................... FAULT: Decreased Engine Power................................................................................................................. FAULT: Detonation/Spark Knock ................................................................................................................. FAULT: Engine Momentarily Does Not Increase Power When Throttle Changes .................................... FAULT: One or More Cylinders Do Not Operate Correctly - Engine Does Not Idle Correctly ................. FAULT: Rough Idle or Engine Stalls During Idle........................................................................................ FAULT: Fuel Usage Too High ....................................................................................................................... FAULT: Dieseling........................................................................................................................................... FAULT: Backfire ............................................................................................................................................ System Test Charts............................................................................................................................................ General ........................................................................................................................................................... Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Test......................................................................................... Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check ............................................................................................................ Minimum Idle Speed ..................................................................................................................................... Adjustment ................................................................................................................................................ B-1 - Idle Air Control (IAC) System Check....................................................................................................... Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Diagnostic Aids .............................................................................................................................................. B-2 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Output Test ........................................................................ Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. B-3 - Check Governor System ........................................................................................................................... Governor System Not Operating Correctly .................................................................................................. Check Function of Governor System ............................................................................................................ Check PCV System ........................................................................................................................................ Fuel System Components Repair...................................................................................................................... General ........................................................................................................................................................... Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure .................................................................................................................... Fuel Pump Replacement ............................................................................................................................... Throttle Body Injection Unit (TBI) ............................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Clean and Inspect...................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Fuel Meter Body ............................................................................................................................................ Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Fuel Injector................................................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Pressure Regulator ........................................................................................................................................ Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Inspect........................................................................................................................................................

63 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 65 65 66 66 67 67 67 68 68 68 68 68 69 69 69 71 71 71 72 72 73 75 75 75 75 76 76 76 76 77 77 77 78 80 80 80 81 81 81 82 82 82

iii


Table of Contents

Electronic Engine Control

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) ..................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve.......................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Clean and Inspect...................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Governor System 3.0L Engine Repair .............................................................................................................. Governor Module, Replace ............................................................................................................................ Governor Motor, Replace ............................................................................................................................... Throttle Cables, Install and Adjust .............................................................................................................. MONOTROLÂŽ Pedal, Check ......................................................................................................................... Governor System 4.3L Engine Repair .............................................................................................................. Governor Throttle Drive Assembly............................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Inspect........................................................................................................................................................ Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Governor Drive Motor ................................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Clean and Lubricate.................................................................................................................................. Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Inspect........................................................................................................................................................ MONOTROLÂŽ Pedal, Check ......................................................................................................................... Ignition System Components Repair ................................................................................................................ ECM Replacement ......................................................................................................................................... Function Check .............................................................................................................................................. Distributor ..................................................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Disassemble ............................................................................................................................................... Inspect........................................................................................................................................................ Assemble .................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Firing Order............................................................................................................................................... Ignition Timing.......................................................................................................................................... Ignition Module Repair...................................................................................................................................... Test For Fault ................................................................................................................................................ Replace ........................................................................................................................................................... Sensing Coil ................................................................................................................................................... Test ............................................................................................................................................................. Replace ....................................................................................................................................................... Ignition Coil ................................................................................................................................................... Test ............................................................................................................................................................. Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Sensors Repair ................................................................................................................................................... Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor, Replace .................................................................................. MAP Sensor, Replace..................................................................................................................................... PCV System Repair ........................................................................................................................................... Replace ........................................................................................................................................................... Wiring .................................................................................................................................................................

iv

82 82 82 83 83 83 83 83 84 84 84 84 85 86 86 86 87 87 87 87 88 88 89 89 89 89 90 90 90 90 91 91 91 91 92 92 92 93 93 93 93 93 93 94 94 94 94 95 95 95 95


Electronic Engine Control

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Connectors and Terminals ............................................................................................................................ 96 Procedures for Spark Plugs, Spark Plug Wires, and Boots ......................................................................... 99 Wiring Diagram ............................................................................................................................................. 99 Spark Plugs Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................... 103 Special Tools ..................................................................................................................................................... 104 This section is for the following models:

v


2200 SRM 1017

General

General This section contains troubleshooting and repair procedures for parts of the electronic engine controls. Users of this section must know components and operation as described in the section Electronic Engine Control Description and Operation 2200 SRM 1016. The electronic engine control system is made of many parts. The main parts are the Throttle Body Injection (TBI) unit and the Electronic Control Module (ECM). See Figure 1. These parts and their sensors provide information about engine operation and the systems they control. The ECM has the ability to perform some troubleshooting of itself and of other parts of the system. When a problem is found, the ECM turns ON the Malfunction Indicator Lamp that is in the instrument cluster. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is kept in the memory of the ECM.

4. System Test Charts 5. Repairs

WHERE DO I START? There are three things to do to start troubleshooting. First, become familiar with the electronic engine control system. Second, always start your work with a complete visual/physical inspection. See Visual/Physical Inspection below for more explanation. Third, understand the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check.

VISUAL/PHYSICAL INSPECTION A careful visual and physical inspection must be done as part of any diagnostic procedure. This can solve the repair of a problem without further steps. Inspect all vacuum hoses for correct routing, restrictions, cuts, or bad connections. Be sure to inspect hoses that are difficult to see beneath the air filter. Inspect all wires in the engine compartment for proper connections, routing, damaged spots, or contact with sharp edges or the exhaust manifolds. This visual/physical inspection is very important and must be done carefully.

KNOWLEDGE/TOOLS REQUIRED

1. ECM 2. J1 CONNECTOR

3. J2 CONNECTOR

Figure 1. ECM

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE Before using this part of the manual, knowledge of correct troubleshooting procedures is required. If the correct troubleshooting procedures are not followed, as described in this section, replacement of good parts can result. Troubleshooting charts use a SCAN Tool where possible. The SCAN Tool has the ability to save time in troubleshooting, and it prevents replacement of good parts.

HOW THIS SECTION IS ARRANGED This section is in five parts, describing troubleshooting and repair procedures. They are as follows: 1. General 2. Troubleshooting Charts 3. Troubleshooting, Poor Operation

To use this manual most effectively, a general understanding of basic electrical circuits and circuit testing tools is required. One should be familiar with wiring diagrams; the meanings of voltage, ohms, amps, and basic theories of electricity; and understand what happens in an open or shorted wire. To perform troubleshooting procedures, use of a diagnostic SCAN Tool is required. A tachometer, test lamp, ohmmeter, digital voltmeter with 10 megohms impedance, vacuum gauge, and jumper wires are also required. Special tools that are required for system service and the ones described above are shown in the section found in back of this manual.

DAMAGE FROM STATIC DISCHARGE (STATIC ELECTRICITY) NOTE: To prevent damage by static electricity, DO NOT touch the ECM connector pins. Electronic components used in control systems use a very low voltage and can be easily damaged by static discharge or static electricity. Less than 100 volts of

1


General static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components. There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. Most common methods of charging are by friction and by induction. An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a car seat, in which a charge of as much as 2 to 5,000 volts can build up. Charging by induction occurs when a person with well-insulated shoes stands near a highly-charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off, leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges of either type can cause damage; therefore, it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components.

TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION Troubleshooting charts and function checks in this section are designed to find a bad circuit or component through logic based on the process of elimination. Charts are prepared with the requirement that the vehicle functioned correctly at time of assembly and that there are no multiple failures. ECM does constant testing on certain control functions. ECM communicates the source of a malfunction with Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC). DTC’s are two-digit numbers that can range from 12 to 99. When a malfunction is found by the ECM, a DTC is set and Malfunction Indicator Lamp is turned ON.

2200 SRM 1017 If the lamp remains ON, the system has found a problem. This problem is referred to as a current DTC. If the problem goes away, the lamp will go out after 10 seconds. In either condition a DTC will remain in the ECM. When the lamp remains ON while the engine is running or when there is a malfunction, On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check must be done. When a problem is not regular or constant, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp will turn ON for approximately 10 seconds and then turn OFF. However, the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is kept in memory of the ECM until DTC’s are cleared. (See Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) in this section.) A DTC that is not constant can reset. If it is a problem that is not constant, a DTC Chart is not used. However, you can use the Other Troubleshooting Checks in the section for that DTC to help locate the problem.

Reading Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) The Diagnostic Connector (see Figure 2) is used to communicate with the ECM. The Diagnostic Connector is installed on the bracket near the valve cover. See Figure 3 and Figure 4. It is used in the assembly plant to receive information in checking that the engine is operating correctly before it leaves the plant. DTC(s) kept in the ECM’s memory can be read with a SCAN Tool connected to the Diagnostic Connector.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) This lamp is on the instrument cluster and has the following functions: It lets the operator know that a problem has occurred and that the vehicle must be taken in for service as soon as possible. It flashes Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC’s) kept by the ECM, which help the technician troubleshoot system problems. As a bulb and system check, the lamp will come ON with the ignition switch ON and the engine not running. When the engine is started, the lamp will turn OFF.

2

A. GROUND B. FAULT ANALYSIS TERMINAL C. NOT USED D. NOT USED E. CHECK ENGINE LIGHT

F. +12 VOLTS G. SERIAL DATA FOR SCAN TOOL TESTER H. NOT USED J. NOT USED K. NOT USED

Figure 2. Diagnostic Connector


2200 SRM 1017

General

Figure 3. Electronic Engine Control Components Arrangement (GM 3.0L Engine)

3


General

2200 SRM 1017 Legend for Figure 3

A. TOP VIEW

B. SIDE VIEW

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

THROTTLE BODY INJECTION (TBI) UNIT FUEL INJECTOR FUEL INJECTOR FUSE ECM FUSE (IGNITION) STARTER FUSE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR 7. DISTRIBUTOR 8. ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE (ECM)

4

GOVERNOR MOTOR FUEL PUMP RELAY DIAGNOSTIC CONNECTOR FUEL PUMP FUSE ECM FUSE (B+) MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) OIL PRESSURE SWITCH IGNITION COIL


2200 SRM 1017

General

Figure 4. Electronic Engine Control Components Arrangement (GM 4.3L Engine)

5


General

2200 SRM 1017 Legend for Figure 4

A. TOP VIEW

B. VIEW FROM TRANSMISSION

1. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECT) 2. FUEL PUMP FUSE 3. ECM FUSE (B+) 4. THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS) 5. ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE (ECM) 6. IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) 7. DIAGNOSTIC CONNECTOR 8. IGNITION COIL 9. TYPE EST DISTRIBUTOR

10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

When SCAN Tool is connected to the Diagnostic Connector with key switch ON and engine OFF, the system will enter the Diagnostic Mode. At this point, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp will flash DTC 12 two times consecutively (see Figure 5). The following is the flash sequence for DTC 12: 1. Long pause 2. Flash 3. Pause 4. Flash-flash 1. Long pause 2. Flash 3. Pause 4. Flash-flash

DTC 12 (which means no crankshaft rpm signal) indicates that the ECM’s diagnostic system is operating correctly at this time. If DTC 12 is not indicated, a problem is in the diagnostic system itself.

1. LONG PAUSE

2. FLASH

15. 16. 17. 18.

FUEL PRESSURE TEST PORT FUEL FILTER THROTTLE BODY INJECTOR FUEL INJECTORS MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR FUEL PUMP RELAY OIL PRESSURE SWITCH OIL PRESSURE SENDER TEMPERATURE GAUGE SENDER

Following the output of DTC 12, if additional codes are stored, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp will flash the DTC two times. If more than one DTC has been stored in the ECM’s memory, the DTC’s will be flashed starting with the lowest DTC set and finishing with the highest DTC set. Remember each DTC will be flashed two times. When all DTC’s have been flashed, the sequence will start over again with DTC 12.

3. PAUSE

4. FLASH-FLASH

Figure 5. Diagnostic Trouble Code 12 Example

Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) NOTE: When clearing DTC’s with or without the use of a SCAN Tool, the ignition must be cycled to the OFF position or the DTC’s will not clear.

6

Install the SCAN Tool according to the operator’s manual for the tool. Select clear DTC’s from the tools menu. This operation electronically clears all ECM DTC’s. Check for DTC’s again to see that the DTC’s are cleared.


2200 SRM 1017

General

ECM DIAGNOSTIC CODES AVAILABLE Table 1. ECM Diagnostic Codes Available

Code

Turn On Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Description

12

Indicates that Fault Monitor System is working correctly

No

14

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Circuit - Low Temperature (High Volts)

Yes

15

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Circuit - High Temperature (Low Volts)

Yes

21

Throttle Position Sensor - High Volts

Yes

22

Throttle Position Sensor - Low Volts

Yes

31

Governor Circuit Malfunction

Yes

33

MAP Sensor Circuit - High Volts

Yes

34

MAP Sensor Circuit - Low Volts

Yes

41

Ignition Control (IC) System.

Yes

42

Electronic Spark Timing (EST)-Grounded EST Circuit, Open or Grounded Bypass Circuit

Yes

51

Calibration Checksum Failure

Yes

81

Fuel Pump High, Low, or Open

Yes

81

Recirc J1-32 Fault

Yes

81

5-Volt Reference Circuit Out of Range

Yes

Diagnostic Mode CAUTION To prevent ECM damage, the key must be OFF when disconnecting or reconnecting ECM power. When the SCAN Tool is connected to the Diagnostic Connector with the key switch ON and the engine OFF, the system will enter the Diagnostic Mode. 1. Display a DTC 12 by flashing the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (indicating the system is operating correctly). 2. Display any additional stored DTC’s by flashing the Malfunction Indicator lamp. Each DTC will flash two times, then DTC 12 will flash again.

3. The Idle Air Control (IAC) valve moves to its fully extended position, blocking the idle air passage.

Field Service Mode NOTE: The ignition timing can be set with a timing light. If the SCAN Tool is connected to the Diagnostic Connector and turned ON with the engine running, system will enter Field Service Mode. For the GM 3.0L engine, this will cause the engine to run at approximately 1500 rpm and 8 before top dead center spark advance. For GM 4.3L engine, the numbers are approximately 1000 rpm and 0 before top dead center spark advance. While the system is in Field Service Mode, new trouble codes can be kept in the ECM.

7


General

2200 SRM 1017

ECM Learning Ability The ECM has a learning ability that lets it make corrections for variations in the idle system to improve idle performance. If the battery is disconnected for any reason, the learning process resets and begins

again. To teach the vehicle, make sure that the engine is at operating temperature. Drive the lift truck at low throttle, with moderate acceleration, and idle until normal performance returns.

SCAN TOOL INFORMATION Table 2. Rinda SCAN Tool Information Test under following conditions: Idle speed, upper radiator hose hot, throttle closed, NEUTRAL, all accessories OFF SCAN Position

Units Displayed

Expected Values at Idle

Barometric Press

kPa/Volts

98 to 102 kPa (14 to 15 psi)/3 to 5 Volts

Battery Volts

Volts

12.5 to 14.5 Volts

Check Engine Lamp

Discrete

Off

Coolant Temperature

C/ F

85 to 100 C (180 to 212 F)

Des Idle Speed

rpm

ECM idle command (changes with temperature)

Engine Speed

rpm

Âą100 rpm from desired idle

Engine Type ID

Numeric

XXXX (varies with calibration) - 3001

Fuel Pump Output

Discrete

On

IAC Follower

Counts

0

IAC Position

Counts

5 to 50

Inj "A" On Time

Milliseconds

0.8 to 3.0 ms

Inj "B" On Time

Milliseconds

0.8 to 3.0 ms

MAP Volts

kPa/Volts

1 to 2 Volts (depends on Vac. and Baro Pressure), 30 to 40 kPa (4 to 6 psi)

MEMCAL Checksum

Numeric

0-65535

RPM CTRL Output

Discrete

No

Spark Advance

Degrees

Varies

Throttle Percent

Hr:Min:Sec

00:00:00 - 18:12:15

TPS Volts

Volts

0.45 to 1.25

8


2200 SRM 1017

General Table 3. TECH 1 SCAN Tool Information

Reading

Units

Expected Values at Idle

Baro

kPa/Volts

98 to 102 kPa (14 to 15 psi)/3 to 5 Volts

Battery/ Ignition Voltage

Volts

12.5 to 14.5 Volts

Block Learn Cell

Numeric

1-16

Calibration Checksum

Numeric

0-65535

Calibration ID

Numeric

XXXX (varies with calibration) 3001

Closed Loop Fuel

Discrete

Yes/No

Closed Throttle

Yes/No

Yes

Desired Idle

rpm

ECM Idle Command (changes with temperature)

Desired Throttle

Percent

1

ECT

C, F

85 to 100 C (180 to 212 F)

Engine Hour Meter

Hours

0.0-1193046.47

Engine Speed

rpm

±100 rpm from desired idle

Fuel Pump Relay

Discrete

On

Governor Duty Cycle

Percent

0

IAC Position

Counts

5 to 50

IAC Throttle Follower

Counts

0

Injector A Pulse Width

Milliseconds

0.8 to 3.0 ms

Injector B Pulse Width

Milliseconds

0.8 to 3.0 ms

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Discrete

Off

Standard

Governor

Oxygen (O2) Sensor

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

9


General

2200 SRM 1017

Table 3. TECH 1 SCAN Tool Information (Continued)

Reading

Units

Expected Values at Idle

Standard

Governor

Oxygen (O2) Sensor

X

X

X

MAP

kPa/Volts

30 to 40 kPa (4 to 6 psi), 1 to 2 volts (depends on Vac. and Baro pressure)

O 2 Sensor 1

Voltage

0-1.00

O 2 Sensor 1, Blk LM Corr

Multiplier

0-1.99

O 2 Sensor 1, Cross Counts

Counts

0-255

O 2 Sensor 1, Sensor 1 Status

Discrete

Rich/Lean

RPM Control

Discrete

No

Spark Advance

Degrees

Varies

System Voltage Warning

Discrete

OK

Throttle Angle

Percent

0

Time From Start

Hr:Min:Sec

00:00:00-18:12:15

TP Sensor

Volts

0.45 to 1.25 Volts

MPH Control

Discrete

No

Vessel Speed

mph

0

X X

X

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM CHECK On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check is a troubleshooting chart to find a problem caused by a malfunction in the electronic engine control system. See On-Board Diagnostic System Checks. It must be the starting point for any troubleshooting. SCAN data shown in Table 1 can be used for comparison after doing troubleshooting checks and finding On-Board Diagnostics working correctly with no trouble codes shown. The data are an average of display values from normally operating vehicles and show a display of a normally operating system.

10

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

After visual/physical inspection, On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check is the starting point for all troubleshooting procedures. The correct procedure to find a problem is to follow three basic steps. 1. Are On-Board Diagnostics working? This is determined by doing the OBD System Check. Since this is the starting point for troubleshooting procedures, always begin here. If On-Board Diagnostics do not work, the OBD System Check will not lead to a troubleshooting chart to fix the problem. If On-Board Diagnostics are working correctly, go to the next step.


2200 SRM 1017

General

2. Is there a Diagnostic Trouble Code? If there is a DTC, go directly to the DTC chart for that number. This will determine if the fault is still there. If there is no DTC, proceed to Step 3.

Test Description

3. SCAN serial data transmitted by the ECM. This involves reading the information available on the serial data stream with one of the tools available for that purpose. Information on these tools and the meaning of the displays can be found in the operator’s manual of the tool. Readings for certain operating conditions can be found in Table 1.

1. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 12 means no rpm reference pulses from the ignition module. This is correct when engine is not running.

The numbers below are a reference to the bold numbers in On-Board Diagnostic System Checks.

2. Checks the Serial Data Circuit (HZ) in A-1 No Malfunction Indicator Lamp and ensures ECM is able to transmit serial data. 3. A SCAN Tool parameter that is not within typical ranges may help isolate the area that is causing the problem.

Table 4. On-Board Diagnostic System Checks Step

Action

Value

Yes

No

1

Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF Is Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminated steady? or is MIL flashing DTC 12?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 7.

Go to A-1 No Malfunction Indicator Lamp.

2

Install SCAN Tool Does SCAN Tool display DTC 12?

Go to Step 3.

Go to A-2 No Scan Data, No DTC-12, Malfunction Indicator Lamp ON.

3

Does SCAN Tool display ECM data?

Go to Step 4.

Go to A-2 No Scan Data, No DTC-12, Malfunction Indicator Lamp ON.

4

Does engine start?

Go to Step 5.

Go to A-3 Engine Cranks but Does Not Run.

5

Were any other DTCs displayed?

Go to applicable DTC chart. Start with lowest numbered DTC.

Go to Step 6.

6

Compare SCAN Tool data with typical values shown in Rinda SCAN Tool Information Are values normal or within range?

Go to Troubleshooting, Poor Operation.

Troubleshoot the components, circuit, or system the SCAN Tool indicates is not within normal values.

7

Check for grounded diagnostic test circuit 438. Was problem found?

Go to Step 1.

Go to Step 8.

8

Replace ECM. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

11


Troubleshooting Charts

2200 SRM 1017

Troubleshooting Charts GENERAL WARNING This troubleshooting requires the operation of the engine for some tests. Make sure tests are done carefully to prevent injury: • Put the lift truck on a level surface. Lower the carriage and forks and apply the parking brake. Make sure the lift truck cannot move and cause an injury during the tests. Use blocks, as necessary, to prevent movement of the lift truck. • The fuel system and the engine must operate correctly. Any problems or leaks in the fuel system and the engine must be repaired before doing troubleshooting. • The fan and the drive belts can remove fingers or cause other injuries. Be careful that your hands and tools do not touch the moving fan or the drive belts. • The engine exhaust and other parts of the engine are hot. Do not touch a hot surface and cause a burn.

CAUTION Electronic equipment can be damaged if troubleshooting and repairs are not done correctly. The following CAUTIONS must be followed when doing troubleshooting or repairs on an engine with an ECM: • Always disconnect the battery negative cable before disconnecting and removing any parts, except as described in Troubleshooting. • Never start the engine unless the battery is correctly connected. • Never disconnect the battery from any equipment when the engine is running. • Never disconnect the battery from the charging system when the engine is running. • If the battery must be charged with a battery charger, ALWAYS disconnect the battery from the electrical system. • Make sure that all electrical connections are clean and have good electrical contact. • Never connect or disconnect the wiring harness at the ECM when the key switch is ON.

12

• Always disconnect the battery and the ECM connectors if electric arc welding must be done on the vehicle. • If the engine compartment is cleaned with steam, make sure that any water or steam is not directed toward the ECM or its sensors. The heat and steam can damage the electronic components and cause corrosion in the electrical connections. • Use only the tools and test equipment described in Tools and Test Equipment to prevent damage to good components and to obtain correct test results. • All voltage measurements must be made with a digital voltmeter with a rating of 10 megohm input impedance. • When a test light is used in troubleshooting, the test light must have less than 0.3 amps (300 milliamps) of maximum current flow. A test for a correct test light is shown in Figure 6. The following troubleshooting charts are designed to give an efficient method of fault analysis on electronic engine controls.

Tools and Test Equipment The following tools are necessary for troubleshooting the system: (Also, see Special Tools in back of section.) • Digital multimeter. Voltmeter must have a minimum input impedance of 10 megohms. (A digital voltmeter and ohmmeter are normally included in a multimeter test instrument. • Tachometer with inductive trigger signal sensor. • Test light that has a low current draw as described in Figure 6. • Vacuum pump with a gauge. This vacuum pump is held and operated with the hand. The gauge must be able to indicate a gauge pressure (vacuum) of 34 kPa (10 inHg). See Presssure Conversion Chart. • Spark tester. Spark tester is used to check the secondary ignition. Spark tester is also called an ST125 and creates a 25-kilovolt load on secondary ignition components.


2200 SRM 1017

Troubleshooting Charts

Presssure Conversion Chart Vacuum and pressure readings often cause confusion because everyone does not use the same point of reference. Absolute pressure is gauge pressure plus atmospheric pressure. Standard atmospheric pressure is also called the standard barometric pressure and is equal to 101.325 kPa (14.695 psi) or 29.92 inHg at sea level. The reference point for these measurements is zero pressure or an absolute vacuum. The following formula is used in converting inches of mercury to kilopascals: inHg x 3.37685 = kPa. Service people normally use gauge pressure as the reference point, which does not add the atmospheric pressure. The reference point for gauge pressure is atmospheric pressure. It is important to know when reading a pressure chart whether the units are given in absolute pressure or gauge pressure. The gauges used by most service people indicate gauge pressure. However, most gauges calibrated in a metric scale (kilopascals) and used to measure less than atmospheric pressure normally indicate absolute pressure as shown in the chart. A gauge calibrated in inHg and used to measure a vacuum begins at zero and increases its indication as the vacuum increases.

NOTE: IF THE AMMETER INDICATES LESS THAN 0.3 amps (300 milliamps), THE TEST LIGHT CAN BE USED. IF THE AMMETER INDICATES MORE THAN 0.3 amps (300 milliamps), THE TEST LIGHT CANNOT BE USED BECAUSE IT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS. 1. DC AMPS 2. TEST LIGHT

3. BATTERY

Figure 6. Current Flow Test for Test Light Table 5. Voltage and Pressure Chart ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE

5-VOLT REFERENCE 4.80

4.90

5.00

5.10

5.20

kPa

inHg

MAP SENSOR SIGNAL VOLTAGE

64.35

19.0

2.75

2.80

2.86

2.92

2.97

66.04

19.5

2.83

2.89

2.95

3.01

3.07

67.73

20.0

2.92

2.98

3.04

3.10

3.16

69.43

20.5

3.00

3.07

3.13

3.19

3.25

71.12

21.0

3.09

3.15

3.22

3.28

3.35

72.81

21.5

3.18

3.24

3.31

3.37

3.44

74.51

22.0

3.26

3.33

3.40

3.47

3.53

76.20

22.5

3.35

3.42

3.49

3.56

3.63

13


Troubleshooting Charts

2200 SRM 1017

Table 5. Voltage and Pressure Chart (Continued) ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE

5-VOLT REFERENCE 4.80

4.90

5.00

5.10

5.20

kPa

inHg

MAP SENSOR SIGNAL VOLTAGE

77.89

23.0

3.43

3.51

3.58

3.65

3.72

79.59

23.5

3.52

3.59

3.67

3.74

3.81

81.28

24.0

3.61

3.68

3.76

3.83

3.91

82.97

24.5

3.69

3.77

3.85

3.92

4.00

84.67

25.0

3.79

3.86

3.94

4.01

4.09

86.36

25.5

3.86

3.94

4.03

4.11

4.19

88.05

26.0

3.95

4.03

4.11

4.20

4.28

89.75

26.5

4.04

4.12

4.20

4.29

4.37

91.44

27.0

4.12

4.20

4.29

4.38

4.47

93.13

27.5

4.21

4.30

4.38

4.47

4.56

94.83

28.0

4.29

4.38

4.47

4.56

4.65

96.49

28.5

4.38

4.47

4.56

4.65

4.75

98.19

29.0

4.47

4.56

4.65

4.75

4.84

99.88

29.5

4.55

4.65

4.74

4.84

4.93

101.57

30.0

4.64

4.74

4.83

4.93

5.03

103.27

30.5

4.72

4.84

4.92

5.02

5.12

104.96

31.0

4.81

4.91

5.01

5.11

5.21

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART DESCRIPTION SUMMARY Table 6 below provides a descriptive summary of the troubleshooting charts that follow this section. Table 6. Troubleshooting Chart Description Summary

14

Chart Number

Description

Malfunction Indicator Lamp Status

A-1

A-1 No Malfunction Indicator Lamp

ON

A-2

A-2 No Scan Data, No DTC-12, Malfunction Indicator Lamp ON

ON

A-3

A-3 Engine Cranks but Does Not Run

OFF

A-4

A-4 Fuel Injector Circuit

OFF

A-5

A-5 Fuel Pump Relay Circuit

OFF

A-6

A-6 Fuel System Troubleshooting

OFF

A-7

A-7 Ignition System Troubleshooting

OFF


2200 SRM 1017

A-1 No Malfunction Indicator Lamp

A-1 No Malfunction Indicator Lamp CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will be ON when the ignition is ON and engine is not running. Voltage from the ignition switch is supplied to the light bulb.

The Electronic Control Module (ECM) will control the lamp and turn it ON by connecting it to ground through circuits 420A and 420. See Figure 7.

Figure 7. No Malfunction Indicator Lamp

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS

TEST DESCRIPTION

Check for the following conditions:

NOTE: The numbered paragraphs directly correspond with the numbered steps in Table 7 below.

If the engine runs correctly, check the following: • Faulty light bulb. • Circuits 420A and 420 are open. • 5-ampere circuit breaker in instrument cluster is bad. This will cause no dash indicator lights, gauges, or seat belt reminder in the 3.0L engine. If the engine cranks but will not run: • ECM Battery + fuse/circuit 358A is open. • ECM ignition fuse/circuit 112A is open. • Poor connections to ECM.

3. This test provides a ground circuit for the MIL circuit. If the lamp works at this time, external circuits are correct. 4. This tests circuits 358A and 112A for voltage. 6. Using a test light connected to Battery +, check each of the system ground circuits to be sure there is a good ground. 7. If a fuse is open, remember to locate any short circuits to ground or other high ampere causes on that circuit.

After repairs, clear DTC’s following Troubleshooting Information, Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Failure to do so may result in DTC’s not properly being cleared.

15


A-1 No Malfunction Indicator Lamp

2200 SRM 1017

Table 7. No Malfunction Indicator Lamp (GM 3.0L Engine Only) Step

Action

Value

Yes

No

1

Was the On-Board Diagnostics (OBD) System Check performed?

Go Step 2.

Go to On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check

2

Turn key switch to ON and start the engine. Does the engine start?

Go to Step 3.

Go to Step 4.

3

Perform the following: • Turn ignition OFF. • Disconnect ECM connectors. • Connect test light to ground and circuit 420A at ECM harness connectors.

Go to Step 5

Go to Diagnostic Aids.

Go to Step 6.

Go to Step 7.

Is Malfunction Indicator Light on? 4

Perform the following: • Turn ignition key switch OFF. • Disconnect ECM connectors. • Turn ignition key switch ON. • Connect test light to ground and circuits 358A and 112A at harness connectors. Is test light on for all circuits?

16

5

Check for and repair damaged connections or replace ECM. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

6

Check for and repair damaged ground connections or replace ECM. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

7

Repair any circuits that did not energize the test light. Is action complete?

Verify repair.


2200 SRM 1017

A-2 No Scan Data, No DTC-12, Malfunction Indicator Lamp ON

A-2 No Scan Data, No DTC-12, Malfunction Indicator Lamp ON CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will be ON when ignition is ON and engine is not running. Voltage from ignition switch is supplied to the light bulb. ECM will control the light and turn it ON by connecting it to ground through circuit 420A to the ECM. See Figure 8.

When SCAN Tool is connected and turned ON, the Malfunction Light will flash a DTC 12, followed by any trouble codes kept in memory. A steady light means a short to ground in the light control circuit 420A, 420, or an open in circuit 438.

Figure 8. No Scan Data, No DTC-12, Malfunction Indicator Lamp ON

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Check for the following conditions: After repairs, clear DTC’s following Troubleshooting Information, Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Failure to do so may result in DTC’s not properly being cleared.

TEST DESCRIPTION NOTE: The numbered paragraphs directly correspond with the numbered steps in Table 8 below. 2. If there is a problem with the ECM that causes a Scan Tool not to read data from the ECM, the ECM will not flash a DTC 12.

• If DTC 12 does flash, be sure Scan Tool is working correctly on another lift truck. • If Scan Tool is working correctly and circuit 439 is good, the ECM can be the cause for the NO SCAN DATA symptom. 4. This step will check for an open diagnostic circuit 438. 5. If the light turns OFF after the ECM connector J2 is disconnected, then circuit 420A, 420 is not shorted to ground. If 10 to 12 volts are present between A and B, check Scan Tool on a known good lift truck. If, when used on a known good lift truck, the Scan Tool does not cause Malfunction Indicator Lamp to flash DTC 12, the Scan Tool is faulty.

17


A-2 No Scan Data, No DTC-12, Malfunction Indicator Lamp ON

2200 SRM 1017

Table 8. No Scan Data, No DTC-12, Malfunction Indicator Lamp ON Yes

No

Did you perform the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check?

Go to Step 2

On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check

2

Turn ignition switch to ON. Is Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) ON?

Go to Step 3.

Go to A-1 No Malfunction Indicator Lamp

3

Connect Scan Tool to diagnostic connector. Does Malfunction Indicator Lamp flash DTC 12?

Go to Step 6.

Go to Step 4.

4

Test the voltage between diagnostic connector terminals B and A. See Figure 8. Is voltage within specified limits?

Go to Step 5.

Go to Step 7.

5

1. Turn ignition switch to OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM connectors. 3. Turn ignition switch to ON, and observe MIL.

Go to Step 8.

Go to Step 9.

Step

Action

1

Value

10-12 Volts

Does MIL come on?

18

6

Repair open or short in circuit 439. If there is no open or short in circuit 439, repair faulty ECM connections or replace faulty ECM. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

7

Repair open or ground circuit 438 or open ground circuit. If these circuits are correct, repair faulty ECM connections or replace faulty ECM. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

8

Repair short to ground on circuit 420A, 420. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

9

Repair faulty ECM connections or replace faulty ECM. Is action complete?

Verify repair.


2200 SRM 1017

A-3 Engine Cranks but Does Not Run

A-3 Engine Cranks but Does Not Run CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Before using this chart, battery condition, engine cranking speed, and fuel quantity must be checked to make sure they are correct. See Figure 9.

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Check for the following conditions: Water or foreign material can cause a no-start condition during freezing weather. The engine can start after approximately 5 minutes in a heated shop.

A MAP sensor voltage reading between 0.5 to 3.0 volts can cause a no-start condition. Disconnect the MAP sensor. If the engine starts, replace the MAP sensor. See MAP Sensor, Replace. If the fuel pump fuse is damaged, test current draw of the pump motor located in the fuel tank. If more than 5 to 6 amps, correct the circuit or replace the fuel pump motor. After repairs, clear DTC’s following Troubleshooting Information, Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Failure to do so may result in DTC’s not properly being cleared.

Figure 9. Engine Cranks but Does Not Run

TEST DESCRIPTION NOTE: The numbered paragraphs directly correspond with the numbered steps in Table 9 below. 2. A Malfunction Indicator Lamp ON is a test to determine if there is battery and ignition voltage at the ECM. 3. If no Scan data is caused by a ECM problem, go to A-2 No Scan Data, No DTC-12, Malfunction Indicator Lamp ON.

4. If throttle position sensor is higher than the range, the ECM can be using the wrong mode for starting. 5. If throttle position sensor is less than the range, the ECM can be using the wrong mode for starting. 6. If coolant sensor is not within range, the ECM can be using the wrong mode for starting. 10. If rpm was indicated during crank, the ignition module is receiving a crank signal; but no spark

19


A-3 Engine Cranks but Does Not Run at this test indicates the ignition module is not triggering the coil. 11. While cranking engine, there must be no fuel spray with the injector electrical connector disconnected. Replace injector seals if fuel sprays or drips. 12. Test light will flash, indicating the ECM is controlling the injector.

2200 SRM 1017 13. Fuel spray from the injector indicates that fuel is available. However, the engine can be getting too much fuel. No fuel spray from the injector indicates a fault in the fuel system or no ECM control of the injector.

Table 9. Engine Cranks but Does Not Run Yes

No

Did you perform the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check?

Go to Step 2.

Go to On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check.

2

Turn ignition switch to ON, leaving engine OFF. Does Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) come on?

Go to Step 3.

Go to A-1 No Malfunction Indicator Lamp.

3

Install SCAN Tool. Is data present?

Go to Step 4.

Go to A-2 No Scan Data, No DTC-12, Malfunction Indicator Lamp ON.

4

Using SCAN Tool, check Throttle Position Sensor voltage. Is voltage above 2.5 volts?

0.2 to 2.5 Volts

Go to DTC 21 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage High.

Go to Step 5.

5

Using SCAN Tool, check Throttle Position Sensor voltage. Is voltage less than 0.2 volt?

0.2 to 2.5 Volts

Go to DTC 22 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage Low.

Go to Step 6.

6

Using SCAN Tool, check coolant temperature. Is temperature above specified temperature?

30 C (22 F)

Go to Step 7.

Go to DTC 15 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Circuit High Temp Indicated.

7

Using SCAN Tool, check Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) voltage. Is voltage above specified volts?

3.0 Volts

Go to Step 8.

Go to Diagnostic Aids.

8

Check fuel pump fuse. Is fuse OK?

Go to Step 9.

Replace fuse and go to step 9.

9

1. Turn ignition to OFF for 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition to ON and listen for fuel pump to run for about 2 seconds.

Go to step 10.

Go to A-4 Fuel Injector Circuit.

Step

Action

1

Does fuel pump run?

20

Value


2200 SRM 1017

A-3 Engine Cranks but Does Not Run

Table 9. Engine Cranks but Does Not Run (Continued) Yes

No

Crank engine without starting, and check for spark at each spark plug using a spark plug tester. Is there spark at each spark plug?

Go to Step 11.

Go to A-7 Ignition System Troubleshooting.

11

Disconnect injector connectors; crank engine; do not start. Is there fuel spray from injector(s)?

Go to Step 15.

Go to Step 12.

12

1. Connect an injector test light to the harness connector at the injector. 2. Crank the engine.

Go to Step 13.

Go to A-4 Fuel Injector Circuit.

Go to A-6 Fuel System Troubleshooting.

Go to Step 14.

Go to Step 16.

Go to A-6 Fuel System Troubleshooting.

Step

Action

10

Value

Does the light flash? 13

1. Reconnect the injector connector. 2. Crank engine; do not start. Does fuel spray from injector?

14

1. Turn ignition OFF. 2. Install fuel pressure gauge. 3. Turn ignition ON.

72 Âą3 kPa (10.5 Âą0.5 psi)

Is fuel pressure within limits? 15

Replace damaged injector or injector seals. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

16

Replace injector. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

21


A-4 Fuel Injector Circuit

2200 SRM 1017

A-4 Fuel Injector Circuit CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This troubleshooting chart is used if indicates a fuel injector problem. If both fuel injector circuits indicate a problem, test one circuit at a time. See Figure 10.

TEST DESCRIPTION NOTE: The numbered paragraphs directly correspond with the numbered steps in Table 10 below.

and ECM for a fault. If a 12-volt test light is connected to 12 volts and then touched and removed from circuit 435, a reference pulse is normally generated. If the fuel injector test light, connected to the fuel injector circuit, momentarily illuminates, the ECM and wires are correct. 5. This step checks for 12 volts to the fuel injector. This test will also determine if there is a short circuit to a voltage source on the ECM side of the circuit. 7. This test checks for a good circuit to the ECM.

2. This test will determine if the Ignition Module is generating a reference pulse and check the wires

Figure 10. Fuel Injector Circuit Table 10. Fuel Injector Circuit Step 1

22

Action During the performance of A-3 Engine Cranks but Does Not Run, step 12, the injector test light should pulse with each pulse. Does the test light flash?

Value

Yes

No

Go to Step 3.

Go to Step 2.


2200 SRM 1017

A-4 Fuel Injector Circuit

Table 10. Fuel Injector Circuit (Continued) Step

Action

2

1. Disconnect the four-pin connector from the distributor. 2. Connect injector test light to the injector harness connector. 3. Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF. 4. Connect test light to a 12-volt source. 5. Momentarily touch pin C of the ignition module with the test light probe. The injector test light that is connected to the fuel injector circuit will flash each time the test light probe is removed from pin C of the ignition module.

Value

Yes

No

Go to Step 12.

Go to Step 5.

Go to Step 10.

Go to Step 4.

Go to Step 10.

Go to Step 13.

Go to step 14.

Go to Step 6.

Light turns ON on one terminal; go to Step 7. Light turns ON on two terminals; go to Step 8.

Go to Step 9.

Go to Step 10.

Go to Step 11.

Does the injector test light flash? 3

Test for short circuit to ground in circuit between injector and ECM. Is there a short circuit?

4

Check resistance across the fuel injector terminals. Is resistance the value given?

5

Test for open/short in circuit 435. Is there a short/open indicated?

6

1. Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF. 2. Install test light between each injector wire connection and ground. Does light turn on?

7

1. Turn ignition OFF. 2. Connect fuel harness connector to fuel injectors. 3. Disconnect J1 (32 pin) connector from ECM. 4. Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF. 5. For the 3.0L engine, connect a test light between connector terminal J1-26 and ground. 6. For the 4.3L engine, connect a test light between connector terminals J1-26 and ground and J1-11 and ground.

1.2 Ohms

Does test light illuminate?

23


A-5 Fuel Pump Relay Circuit

2200 SRM 1017

Table 10. Fuel Injector Circuit (Continued) Step

Action

Value

Yes

8

Repair short circuit to voltage in the circuit between injector and ECM. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

9

Repair open circuit between injector and ignition switch. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

10

Replace ECM. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

11

Repair connection or open circuit between injector and ECM. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

12

Replace faulty ignition module or replace 4-pin connector. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

13

Replace fuel injector and ECM. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

No

A-5 Fuel Pump Relay Circuit CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the ignition is turned ON, the ECM will activate the fuel pump relay with a ground path and run the fuel pump. The fuel pump relay will operate as long as the engine is cranking or running if

the ECM is receiving ignition reference pulses. The ECM will stop the fuel pump relay signal 2 seconds after the ignition reference pulses stop. This will also occur 2 seconds after the key is ON and the engine not started. See Figure 11.

Figure 11. Fuel Pump Relay Circuit

24


2200 SRM 1017

A-5 Fuel Pump Relay Circuit

If the fuel pump relay or relay ground circuit from the ECM fails, the fuel pump will receive an electrical current through the circuit for the oil pressure switch when the engine is running.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The fuel pump test terminal is near the relay in the engine compartment. When the engine is stopped, the pump can be turned ON by applying battery + to the fuel pump prime terminal.

1. Test light will connect to ground through relay to the fuel pump. 6. After fuel pump relay has been replaced, continue with the Oil Pressure Switch Test, Step 8. 7. If pump does not run, it is either damaged or worn and must be replaced. 8. At this point, fuel pump relay is operating correctly. Test parallel circuit through the oil pressure switch. 11. If the fuse is damaged, check circuit for excessive current usage (including fuel pump).

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS A fuel pump relay that does not work can cause long cranking times. Extended crank period is caused by the time necessary for oil pressure to reach the pressure required to close the oil pressure switch and turn on the fuel pump.

NOTE: The numbered paragraphs directly correspond with the numbered steps in Table 11 below.

Table 11. Fuel Pump Relay Circuit Step

Action

1

During the test performance from A-3, Step 13, the fuel pump does not operate. 1. Turn the ignition to OFF. 2. With the test light connected to battery +, probe the fuel pump drive connector.

Value

Yes

No

Go to Step 2.

Go to Step 3.

Go to Step 4.

Go to Step 5.

Go to Step 9.

Go to Step 10.

Go to Step 7.

Go to Step 11.

Does the test light come on? 2

1. Turn the ignition to ON. 2. Test light should go OFF for approximately 2 seconds. Does test light turn off?

3

1. Disconnect fuel pump relay harness connector. 2. With the test light connected to battery +, probe fuel pump relay harness connector terminal 30. Does the test light come on?

4

1. Disconnect fuel pump relay harness connector. 2. With the test light connected to ground, probe fuel pump relay harness connector terminal 87. Does the test light come on?

25


A-5 Fuel Pump Relay Circuit

2200 SRM 1017

Table 11. Fuel Pump Relay Circuit (Continued) Step

Action

5

1. Disconnect fuel pump relay harness connector. 2. With the test light connected to ground, probe fuel pump relay harness connector terminal 86.

Value

Yes

No

Go to Step 6.

Go to Step 12.

Go to Step 13.

Go to Step 14.

Does the test light come on? 6

1. With a test light connected to battery +, probe relay harness connector 85. 2. Turn ignition to OFF for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ignition to ON. 4. Test light should light for approximately 2 seconds. Did the test light turn on?

7

Apply battery + to relay pin 30. Does fuel pump turn on?

Go to Step 13.

Go to Step 15.

8

Oil pressure switch test: 1. Run engine at normal temperature and oil pressure. 2. Disconnect fuel pump relay harness connector from fuel pump relay.

Go to Step 17.

Go to Step 16.

Does engine continue to run?

26

9

Repair circuit 827 between fuel pump test terminal and relay or replace damaged relay. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

10

Repair open circuit 826 or 826A or 645 or damaged connections or replace fuel pump. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

11

Repair open circuit 360A. Check fuel pump fuse, wiring, and connections. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

12

Repair open circuit 360B. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

13

Replace pump relay. Is action complete?

Go to Step 8.

14

Repair grounded circuit 651 or replace ECM. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

15

Replace fuel pump. Is action complete?

Verify repair.


2200 SRM 1017

A-6 Fuel System Troubleshooting

Table 11. Fuel Pump Relay Circuit (Continued) Step

Action

Value

16

Check circuits 360C and 826A/826B to oil pressure switch. If the circuits are OK, replace oil pressure switch. Is action complete?

17

No trouble found.

Yes

No

Verify repair.

A-6 Fuel System Troubleshooting CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When ignition switch is turned ON, the Electronic Control Module (ECM) will activate the fuel pump relay with a ground path and run the fuel pump. Fuel pump relay will operate as long as the engine is cranking or running if the ECM is receiving ignition reference pulses. The ECM will stop the fuel pump relay signal 2 seconds after the ignition references’ pulses stop. This will also occur 2 seconds after the key is turned ON and the engine is not started. See Figure 12.

If the fuel pump relay or relay ground circuit from the ECM fails, the fuel pump will receive electrical current through the oil pressure switch circuit when engine is running. When engine is stopped, the fuel pump can be turned ON by applying battery + to fuel pump test terminal. This terminal is located near the fuel pump relay. The fuel pump delivers fuel to the Throttle Body Injector (TBI) unit where system pressure is controlled to 72 ±3 kPa (10 ±0.5 psi). Excess fuel is returned to the fuel tank.

Figure 12. Fuel System

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Check for the following conditions: Fuel system pressure that is incorrect can cause one of the following symptoms: • Cranks but will not start

• Starts but will not continue to run • Long cranking times before engine starts • Rough idle or low idle speed • Engine miss, feels like ignition problem • High fuel usage, loss of power, poor performance

27


A-6 Fuel System Troubleshooting

TEST DESCRIPTION NOTE: The numbered paragraphs directly correspond with the numbered steps in Table 12 below. 2. Check fuel pressure while pump is running. Pressure will start to drop as soon as pump stops because of an internal relief in the pressure regulator.

2200 SRM 1017 4. If engine does not run, go to A-3 Engine Cranks but Does Not Run. 6. This test checks operation of the fuel pump check valve. A check valve that leaks will cause fuel in pressure line to drain back to the tank and cause long start times. The amount of pressure is not important as long as some pressure is maintained.

Table 12. A-6A Fuel System Troubleshooting Yes

No

Did you perform the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check?

Go to Step 2.

Go to On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check.

72 ±3 kPa Turn the ignition OFF. (10.5 Check fuel tank quantity. Install pressure gauge. See Figure 13. ±0.5 psi) Apply Battery + to the Fuel Pump Primer using a 10-amp fused jumper wire. 5. Observe fuel pressure.

Go to Step 4.

No fuel pressure, go to Step 5.

Step

Action

1

2

1. 2. 3. 4.

Value

Is fuel pressure within specifications? 3

72 ±3 kPa Turn the ignition OFF. (10.5 Check fuel tank quantity. ±0.5 psi) Install pressure gauge. See Figure 13. Apply Battery + to the Fuel Pump Primer using a 10-amp fused jumper wire. 5. Observe fuel pressure. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Go to Table 13.

Is fuel pressure outside of specifications? 4

Engine runs. Is there a long crank time before starting?

Go to Step 6.

System is correct.

5

Listen for fuel pump running at fuel tank. Is fuel pump running?

Go to Step 7.

Go to Step 8.

6

1. Apply Battery + to the Fuel Pump Primer using a 10-amp fused jumper wire. 2. Disconnect jumper wire and immediately close the fuel return shutoff valve at the tank.

Go to Step 10.

Go to Step 9.

Does some pressure hold?

28


2200 SRM 1017

A-6 Fuel System Troubleshooting

Table 12. A-6A Fuel System Troubleshooting (Continued) Step 7

Action 1. Check the in-line filter. 2. Check fuel pump strainer. 3. Check fuel feed line.

Value

Yes

No

Go to Step 11.

Go to Step 13.

Go to Step 14.

Go to Step 15.

Go to Step 13.

Are they restricted? 8

1. Disconnect fuel pump relay. 2. Using a 10-amp fused jumper wire, connect circuit 826 to battery +. Does fuel pump run?

9

Inspect for partially disconnected pump coupling hose. Is hose disconnected?

Go to Step 12.

10

Problem is not constant, open shutoff valve. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

11

Clean/replace as required. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

12

Reconnect fuel pump coupling hose. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

13

Replace fuel pump. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

14

Repair connection at the relay or if the connection is OK, replace fuel pump. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

15

Repair open in circuit 826/826A or if circuit is OK, replace fuel pump. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

29


A-6 Fuel System Troubleshooting

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

RETURN LINE FUEL SUPPLY SHUTOFF VALVE FUEL RETURN SHUTOFF VALVE STRAINER FUEL TANK

2200 SRM 1017

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

PUMP FUEL FILTER FUEL PRESSURE LINE FUEL PRESSURE TEST PORT FUEL PRESSURE GAUGE

Figure 13. Fuel System Troubleshooting

TEST DESCRIPTION 1. Fuel pressure less than 69 kPa (10 psi) can cause several problems. It can cause hard starting in cold conditions and poor performance. Low fuel pressure can also allow engine to run at idle or low speeds but cause engine to run poorly or stall when more fuel is required (i.e., accelerating or at high speed). 2. Causing a restriction in fuel flow at the tank causes the fuel pump to develop its maximum pressure. With fuel pump running, pressure will increase to more than 75 kPa (11 psi).

CAUTION Do not block the fuel return line completely (outlet side of TBI assembly). Too much

30

pressure can damage the TBI pressure regulator. 3. This test determines if high fuel pressure is caused by a restriction in the fuel return line or a problem with the pressure regulator. 4. If pressure is correct at idle, yet becomes lower as engine is accelerated, repair restriction in fuel feed line. If there is no restriction, replace fuel pump. 5. Wrong fuel pump installed (too much capacity) can also cause high pressure. 6. Check that shutoff valves are open when finished.


2200 SRM 1017

A-6 Fuel System Troubleshooting Table 13. A-6B Fuel system Troubleshooting Action

Value

Yes

No

Turn the ignition OFF. Check fuel tank quantity. Install pressure gauge. See Figure 13. Using a 10-amp fused jumper wire, apply Battery + to the Fuel Pump Primer. 5. Observe fuel pressure.

69 kPa (10 psi)

Go to Step 3.

Go to Step 2.

75 kPa (11 psi)

Go to Step 4.

Go to Step 3.

Step 1

1. 2. 3. 4.

Is fuel pressure less than specifications? 2

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition OFF. Check fuel tank quantity. Install pressure gauge. See Figure 13. Using a 10-amp fused jumper wire, apply Battery + to the Fuel Pump Primer. 5. Observe fuel pressure. Is fuel pressure above specifications?

3

Check for restricted fuel filter or restricted fuel line between fuel pump and pressure gauge. Is there a restriction?

Go to Step 7.

Go to Step 6.

4

1. Disconnect 10-amp fused jumper wire. 69-75 kPa 2. Disconnect fuel return line at throttle (10-11 psi) body. 3. Install pressure gauge. See Figure 13. 4. Attach correct-sized flexible hose to throttle body outlet fitting. Insert other end of hose in an approved gasoline container. 5. Using a 10-amp fused jumper wire, apply battery + to fuel pump test connector and observe pressure.

If pressure is above 75 kPa (11 psi), go to Step 5.

If pressure is below 69 kPa (10 psi), go to Step 10.

Is pressure above or below specified value? 5

Check for restricted fuel line inside the throttle body. Is there a restriction?

Go to Step 8.

Go to Step 9.

6

69-75 kPa 1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. Install pressure gauge. See Figure 13. (10-11 psi) 3. Using a 10-amp fused jumper wire, apply battery + to fuel pump test terminal. 4. While observing pressure, gradually close valve on return fitting at the fuel tank.

If pressure is above 75 kPa (11 psi), go to Step 9.

If pressure is below 69 kPa (10 psi), go to Step 11.

Is pressure above or below specified value?

31


A-7 Ignition System Troubleshooting

2200 SRM 1017

Table 13. A-6B Fuel system Troubleshooting (Continued) Step

Action

Yes

Value

7

Replace filter or clear restriction and retest. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

8

Clear restricted fuel return inside the throttle body. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

9

Replace pressure regulator. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

10

Clear restriction from fuel tank return line. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

11

Replace fuel pump. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

No

A-7 Ignition System Troubleshooting CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When system is running on ignition module, there is no voltage on the bypass wire because the ignition module sends the Electronic Spark Timing (EST) signal to ground.

When engine is being started and approximately 400 rpm are sensed, bypass voltage is applied. The EST will no longer be grounded in the ignition module, and EST voltage will normally have a variation during operation. See Figure 14.

Figure 14. Ignition System

32


2200 SRM 1017

A-7 Ignition System Troubleshooting

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Check wiring harness connectors for tight fit into ECM and loose or broken pins.

TEST DESCRIPTION NOTE: The numbered paragraphs directly correspond with the numbered steps in Table 14 below. NOTE: If a tachometer has been connected to the TACH CONN., disconnect it before doing this test. 2. Check a minimum of two spark plug wires to make sure that one spark plug wire does not have an open circuit. 3. If spark occurs when EST connector is disconnected, output from the sensing coil is too low for EST operation. 4. A spark indicates that the fault is in the distributor cap or the rotor. 5. The normal voltage at C and + terminals is battery voltage. A low voltage can indicate: a. An open circuit or a high resistance circuit from distributor to ignition coil or b. An open circuit in the primary winding of the ignition coil. If voltage at C is less than battery voltage and there are 10 volts or more at +, there is an open circuit from C to the ignition coil or an open circuit in the primary winding of the ignition coil. See Figure 15. 6. Use the test light to check for a short circuit in the EST module or in circuit from the ignition coil to the EST module. Check for approximately 12 volts between the TACH CONN. and ground.

If the voltage is low (approximately 1 to 6 volts), there can be a fault in the ignition coil. This condition can cause a failure in the ignition coil from too much heat. If there is an open circuit in the primary winding of the ignition coil, a low voltage can leak through the EST module from the B+ to the TACH CONN. terminal. 9. EST module normally goes ON when 1.5 to 8 volts are applied to terminal P. When EST module is ON, voltage between TACH CONN. and ground will normally decrease to 7 to 9 volts. This test checks if the sensing coil or EST module has a fault. When 1.5 to 8 volts are momentarily applied to terminal P, this voltage acts as a trigger voltage that replaces voltage from sensing coil. The procedure shows a test light, but any low-voltage, low-current source can be used as a trigger voltage. 10. When momentary trigger voltage is removed, a spark is normally generated through the ignition coil. If no spark occurs, replace ignition coil. If a spark occurs, check sensing coil and rotating timer core.

Figure 15. Ignition Module Table 14. Ignition System Troubleshooting Yes

No

Did you perform the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check?

Go to Step 2.

Go to On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check.

1. Disconnect tachometer. 2. Turn ignition switch to ON. 3. Use the starter to rotate the engine; do not start the engine. 4. Using a spark tester, check for a spark at the No. 1 spark plug wire. If there is no spark on the No. 1 wire, check another wire.

Go to Step 13.

Go to Step 3.

Step

Action

1

2

Value

Is spark present?

33


A-7 Ignition System Troubleshooting

2200 SRM 1017

Table 14. Ignition System Troubleshooting (Continued) Step

Action

Value

Yes

No

3

Disconnect the four-terminal ignition module connector located on the distributor and check for spark. See Figure 15. Is there spark?

Go to Step 14.

Go to Step 4.

4

1. Turn ignition switch to ON, leaving the engine OFF. 2. Use the starter to rotate the engine; do not start the engine. 3. Using a spark tester, check for a spark at the coil wire.

Go to Step 15.

Go to Step 5.

If voltage is greater than 10 volts on both terminals, go to Step 6.

If voltage is less than 10 volts on both terminals, go to Step 16. If voltage is less than 10 volts on terminal C only, go to Step 17.

If greater than 10 volts, go to Step 8.

If less than 1 volt, go to step 18. If 1 to 10 volts, go to Step 7.

Is spark present? 5

1. Turn ignition switch to ON, leaving the engine OFF. 2. Disconnect the two-pin connector from the ignition module. See Figure 14. 3. Using a voltmeter, check the voltage between ground and C and also + at the connector. See Figure 15. Is voltage present?

6

1. Turn ignition switch to OFF. 2. Connect the two-pin connector to the ignition module. See Figure 14. 3. Turn ignition switch to ON, leaving the engine OFF. 4. Using a voltmeter, check the voltage between ground and Tachometer connector. See Figure 14. Is voltage present.

7

Replace the ignition module and check for spark from ignition as described in Step 10. Is there spark?

System is correct.

Go to Step 19.

8

1. Connect a test light between Tach Connector and ground. 2. Rotate the starter, being careful not to start the engine, and check the test light.

If the test light is steady, go to Step 9.

If the test light blinks, go to Step 20.

Is the test light on?

34


2200 SRM 1017

A-7 Ignition System Troubleshooting

Table 14. Ignition System Troubleshooting (Continued) Step

Action

9

1. Disconnect the four-terminal ignition module connector located on the distributor. 2. Remove the distributor cap and disconnect the sensing coil from the ignition module, which is located under the timer core. 3. Connect a voltmeter from the TACH Connector to ground. 4. Turn ignition switch to ON, leaving the engine OFF. 5. Insulate the probe on the test light to 6 mm (0.24 in.) from the tip. 6. Connect the uninsulated probe of the test light to a 1.5- to 8-volt DC power supply. 7. Check the voltmeter when the insulated probe of the test light is touched to terminal P of the ignition module.

Value

Yes

No

Go to Step 10.

Go to Step 21.

Is there a voltage decrease? 10

Using a spark tester, check for spark from the coil wire when the test light is removed from terminal P. Is there spark?

Go to Step 11.

Go to Step 12.

11

Check the rotating timer core to see if it is magnetized. Is the rotating timer core magnetized?

Go to Step 22.

Go to Step 23.

12

Replace the ignition coil and repeat Step 10. Is there spark?

System is correct.

Go to Step 24.

13

Check for fuel supply to engine. Check spark plugs. Check for other faults not in the ignition system. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

14

Replace sensing coil. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

15

Inspect the distributor cap for water, cracks, or other damage. If the distributor cap is in good condition, replace the distributor rotor. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

16

Repair the pink wire from the ignition module + terminal to the + terminal on the ignition coil. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

35


DTC 14 ECT Sensor Circuit - Low Temp Indicated (Scan Diagnostics)

2200 SRM 1017

Table 14. Ignition System Troubleshooting (Continued) Value

Yes

Step

Action

17

Check for open or short circuit in the white wire from terminal C on the ignition coil. If the circuit is correct, repair the connector or replace ignition coil. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

18

Repair the wire or the connector for the TACH Connector and repeat Step 6. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

19

Replace ignition coil. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

20

Replace ignition coil and check for spark with the spark tester. If there is no spark, install original ignition coil and replace ignition module. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

21

Check the ground connection on the ignition module. If connection is correct, replace ignition module. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

22

Check resistance of sensing coil. Is resistance within specified limits?

23

Replace rotating timer core and shaft. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

24

Install original ignition coil and check wire from distributor cap. If correct, replace ignition module. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

25

Replace sensing coil. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

500 to 1500 ohms

System is OK.

No

Go to Step 25.

DTC 14 ECT Sensor Circuit - Low Temp Indicated (Scan Diagnostics) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor uses a thermistor to control the signal voltage to the ECM. The ECM applies 5 volts on circuit 430 to the sensor. When the engine coolant is cold, the sensor (thermistor) resistance is high. As the engine coolant warms

36

up, the sensor resistance becomes less. See Table 15 under "Test Description." At normal operating temperature [85 to 95 C (185 to 203 F)], the voltage will measure about 1.5-2.0 volts. See Figure 16.


2200 SRM 1017

DTC 14 ECT Sensor Circuit - Low Temp Indicated (Scan Diagnostics)

Figure 16. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Circuit Low Temp Indicated

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Check for the following conditions: • Poor connection at ECM. Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. • Damaged harness. Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the ECT display on the SCAN Tool while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the ECT sensor. A change in the ECT display will indicate the location of the fault. • The SCAN Tool displays engine coolant temperature in degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit. If the engine is cold (not running within 8 hours), the SCAN Tool should display a ECT sensor value within a few degrees of outside air temperature. This may help in diagnosing a "shifted" coolant sensor. After the engine is started, the temperature should rise steadily and then stabilize at operating temperature when the thermostat opens. • If DTC 33 is also set, check for open ground circuit 649/648. After repairs, clear DTC’s following Troubleshooting Information, Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Failure to do so may result in DTC’s not properly being cleared.

2. DTC 14 will set if signal voltage indicates a coolant temperature below 30 C ( 22 F). 3. This test simulates a DTC 15. If the ECM recognizes the low-voltage signal and displays a high temperature, the ECM and wiring are OK. NOTE: Temperature vs. Resistance Values in the following table are approximate. Table 15. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor C

F

Ohms

100

212

177

80

176

332

60

140

667

45

113

1188

35

95

1802

25

77

2796

15

59

4450

5

41

7280

5

23

12,300

15

5

21,450

30

22

52,700

40

40

100,700

TEST DESCRIPTION NOTE: The numbered paragraphs directly correspond with the numbered steps in Table 16.

37


DTC 15 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Circuit High Temp Indicated

2200 SRM 1017

Table 16. DTC 14 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Circuit Low Temp Indicated Step

Action

Value

Yes

No

Go to Step 2.

Go to On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check.

1

Was the "On-Board Diagnostic" (OBD) System Check Performed?

2

Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF. Does SCAN Tool display a coolant temperature less than the specified value?

-30 C (-22 F)

Go to Step 3.

Go to Step 4.

3

1. Turn ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 3. Connect a jumper wire from harness terminal "A" (circuit 649/648) to harness terminal "B" (circuit 430). 4. Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF.

130 C (266 F)

Go to Step 6.

Go to Step 5.

Does SCAN Tool display a coolant temperature above the specified value? 4

DTC 14 is intermittent. Locate and repair intermittent faulty connections. • Refer to Diagnostic Aids.

Verify Repair.

5

Locate and repair open in circuit 430 or circuit 649/648. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found?

Verify Repair.

6

Repair faulty ECT Sensor. Is action complete?

Verify Repair.

7

Repair faulty ECM connections or replace faulty ECM. Is action complete?

Verify Repair.

Go to Step 7.

DTC 15 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Circuit High Temp Indicated CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor uses a thermistor to control the signal voltage to the ECM. The ECM applies 5 volts on circuit 430 to the sensor. When the engine coolant is cold, the sensor (thermistor) resistance is high. As the engine coolant

38

warms up, the sensor resistance becomes less. See engine coolant temperature sensor table under "Diagnostic Aids." At normal operating temperature 80 C (180 F), the voltage will measure about 1.5-2.0 volts. See Figure 17.


2200 SRM 1017

DTC 15 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Circuit High Temp Indicated

Figure 17. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Circuit

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Check for the following conditions: • Poor connection at ECM. Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. • Damaged harness. Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the ECT display on the SCAN Tool while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the ECT sensor. A change in the ECT display will indicate the location of the fault. • The SCAN Tool displays engine coolant temperature in degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit. If the engine is cold (not running within 8 hours), the SCAN Tool should display a ECT sensor value within a few degrees of outside air temperature. This may help in diagnosing a "shifted" coolant sensor. After engine is started, the temperature should rise steadily and then stabilize at operating temperature when the thermostat opens. • Check harness routing for a potential short to ground in circuit 430.

2. DTC 15 will set if signal voltage indicates a coolant temperature above 130 C (266 F). 3. This test simulates a DTC 14. If the ECM recognizes the high voltage signal and displays a low temperature, the ECM and wiring are OK. NOTE: Temperature vs. Resistance Values in the following table are approximate. Table 17. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Table C

F

Ohms

100

212

177

80

176

332

60

140

667

45

113

1188

35

95

1802

25

77

2796

15

59

4450

5

41

7280

After repairs, clear DTC’s following Troubleshooting Information, Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Failure to do so may result in DTC’s not properly being cleared.

-5

23

12,300

-15

5

21,450

-30

-22

52,700

TEST DESCRIPTION

-40

-40

100,700

NOTE: The numbered paragraphs directly correspond with the numbered steps in Table 18.

39


DTC 21 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage High

2200 SRM 1017

Table 18. DTC 15 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Circuit High Temp Indicated Step

Action

Value

Yes

No

Go to Step 2.

Go to On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check.

1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system check performed?

2

Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF. Does the scan tool display a coolant temperature greater than the specified value?

130 C (266 F)

Go to Step 3.

Go to Step 4.

3

1. Turn ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect ECT sensor harness connector. 3. Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF.

-30 C (-22 F)

Go to Step 6.

Go to Step 5.

Does SCAN Tool display a coolant temperature below the specified value? 4

DTC 15 is intermittent. Locate and repair intermittent faulty connections. Refer to Diagnostic Aids.

Verify Repair.

5

Locate and repair short to ground in circuit 430. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found?

Verify Repair.

6

Repair faulty ECT sensor. Is action complete?

Verify Repair.

7

Repair faulty ECM connections or replace faulty ECM. Is action complete?

Verify Repair.

Go to Step 7.

DTC 21 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage High CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The Throttle Position (TP) sensor is a potentiometer that provides a voltage signal that changes relative to the throttle blade. Signal voltage should vary from about 0.7 volt at idle to about 4.8 volts at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The TP sensor signal is one of the most important inputs used by the ECM for fuel control and for IAC control.

40

The ECM supplies a 5-volt signal to the sensor through circuit 432. Circuit 434 is the TP sensor ground circuit. The TP sensor will send a voltage signal back to the ECM, through circuit 433, according to where the throttle blades are positioned. See Figure 18.


2200 SRM 1017

DTC 21 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage High

Figure 18. Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage High

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Check for the following conditions: • Poor connection at ECM. Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. • Damaged harness. Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the TP sensor display on the SCAN Tool while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the TP sensor. A change in the TP sensor display will indicate the location of the fault. • The SCAN Tool reads throttle position in voltage and percentage relative to the throttle blade opening. With ignition ON, engine OFF, throttle blades closed (idle), the voltage should be 0.3-0.9 volt. The voltage should steadily increase as the throttle is moved toward Wide Open Throttle (WOT). • If a TP sensor circuit failure is present, the MAP sensor default value will be used along with the TP sensor default value.

After repairs, clear DTC’s following Troubleshooting Information, Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Failure to do so may result in DTC’s not properly being cleared.

TEST DESCRIPTION NOTE: The numbered paragraphs directly correspond with the numbered steps in Table 19 below. 2. With the throttle closed, the TP sensor voltage should read 0.3-0.9 volt. If it does not, check the throttle cable adjustment or for bent or binding linkage. 3. This test simulates a DTC 22. If the ECM recognizes the low voltage signal, the ECM and wiring are OK. 4. Using DVOM from harness terminal "A" (circuit 432), harness terminal "B" (circuit 434) checks the sensor ground circuit. A faulty sensor ground circuit 434 will cause a DTC 21.

Table 19. DTC 21 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage High Step

Action

1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system check performed?

2

1. Throttle closed. 2. Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF.

Value

4 volts

Yes

No

Go to Step 2.

Go to On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check.

Go to Step 3.

Go to Step 5.

Does SCAN Tool indicate TP sensor voltage greater than the specified value?

41


DTC 22 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage Low

2200 SRM 1017

Table 19. DTC 21 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage High (Continued) Step

Action

Value

Yes

No

3

1. Throttle closed. 2. Disconnect TP sensor harness connector. 3. Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF.

0.36 volt

Go to Step 4.

Go to Step 6.

4 volts

Go to Step 8.

Go to Step 7.

Does DVOM indicate a voltage less than the specified value? 4

Connect DVOM from harness terminal A (circuit 432) to harness terminal B (circuit 434). Does DVOM indicate a voltage greater than the specified value?

5

DTC 21 is intermittent. Locate and repair intermittent faulty connections. Refer to Diagnostic Aids.

6

Locate and repair short to voltage in circuit 433. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found?

Verify repair.

Go to Step 9.

7

Locate and repair open in ground circuit 434. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found?

Verify repair.

Go to Step 9.

8

Replace faulty TP sensor. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

9

Repair faulty ECM connections or replace faulty ECM. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

DTC 22 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage Low CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The Throttle Position (TP) sensor is a potentiometer that provides a voltage signal that changes relative to the throttle blade. Signal voltage should vary from about 0.7 volt at idle to about 4.8 volts at Wide-Open Throttle (WOT). The TP sensor signal is one of the most important inputs used by the ECM for fuel control and for IAC control.

42

The ECM supplies a 5-volt signal to the sensor through circuit 432. Circuit 434 is the TP sensor ground circuit. The TP sensor will send a voltage signal back to the ECM, through circuit 433, according to where the throttle blades are positioned. See Figure 19.


2200 SRM 1017

DTC 22 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage Low

Figure 19. Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage Low

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Check for the following conditions: • Poor connection at ECM. Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. • Damaged harness. Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the TP sensor display on the SCAN Tool while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the TP sensor. A change in the TP sensor display will indicate the location of the fault. • The SCAN Tool reads throttle position in voltage and percentage relative to the throttle blade opening. With ignition ON, engine OFF, and throttle blades closed (idle), the voltage should be 0.30.9 volt. The voltage should steadily increase as the throttle is moved toward Wide Open Throttle (WOT). • If DTC 34 is also set, check for a short to ground in circuit 432.

• If a TP sensor circuit failure is present, the MAP sensor default value will be used along with the TP sensor default value. After repairs, clear DTC’s following Troubleshooting Information, Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Failure to do so may result in DTC’s not properly being cleared.

TEST DESCRIPTION NOTE: The numbered paragraphs directly correspond with the numbered steps in Table 20 below. 2. With the throttle closed, the TP sensor voltage should read 0.3-0.9 volt. If it does not, check the throttle cable adjustment or check for bent or binding linkage. 3. This test simulates a DTC 21. If the ECM recognizes the low-voltage signal, the ECM and wiring are OK. 4. This test checks for the 5-volt reference on circuit 432.

Table 20. DTC 22 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage Low Step

Action

1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system check performed?

2

1. Throttle closed. 2. Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF.

Value

0.36 volts

Yes

No

Go to Step 2.

Go to On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check.

Go to Step 3.

Go to Step 5.

Does SCAN Tool indicate TP sensor voltage greater than the specified value?

43


DTC 31 Engine Governor Circuit

2200 SRM 1017

Table 20. DTC 22 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage Low (Continued) Step

Action

Value

Yes

No

3

1. Turn ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect TP sensor harness connector. 3. Connect a jumper wire from harness terminal A (circuit 432) to harness terminal C (circuit 433). 4. Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF.

4 volts

Go to Step 8.

Go to Step 4.

4 volts

Go to Step 7.

Go to Step 6.

Does SCAN Tool indicate TP sensor voltage greater than the specified value? 4

1. Turn ignition OFF. 2. Connect DVOM from harness terminal A (circuit 432) to a known good ground. 3. Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF. Does DVOM indicate a voltage greater than the specified value?

5

DTC 22 is intermittent. Locate and repair intermittent faulty connections. Refer to Diagnostic Aids.

6

Locate and repair open or short to ground in circuit 432. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found?

Verify repair.

Go to Step 9.

7

Locate and repair open or short to ground in circuit 433. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found?

Verify repair.

Go to Step 9.

8

Replace faulty TP sensor. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

9

Repair faulty ECM connections or replace faulty ECM. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

DTC 31 Engine Governor Circuit CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ECM sends a controlled signal pulse to the governor control module (circuit 431) to drive the governor motor. Depending on the need of the engine for the governor, the module translates the ECM data into the correct value of DC current (circuits 825 and 641) to

44

the motor. This current causes the motor to limit engine speed by loosening the throttle cable on the 4.3L engine only. The system is capable of reducing the throttle back to near idle position. A DTC 31 will find a damaged ECM, governor module, motor, linkage, or wiring. If DTC 31 is set, the ECM will limit engine rpms by momentarily shutting off fuel (at slightly higher rpms than governor calibration). See Figure 20.


2200 SRM 1017

DTC 31 Engine Governor Circuit

Figure 20. Engine Governor Circuit

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Check for the following conditions: • Poor connection at ECM. Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. After repairs, clear DTC’s following Troubleshooting Information, Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Failure to do so may result in DTC’s not properly being cleared.

TEST DESCRIPTION NOTE: The numbered paragraphs directly correspond with the numbered steps in Table 21 below.

DTC 31 will set if the ECM is commanding near 100% authority. 2. This check determines if the governor control module has a voltage supply to operate.

CAUTION DO NOT hold current to the motor for longer than 30 seconds, as the motor can be damaged. 3. Applying Battery + to motor will not let the throttle plate open. 4. This test requires complete governor control to determine if ECM or governor system has a fault. Throttle plate must not open during this test.

Table 21. DTC 31 Engine Governor Circuit Step

Action

Value

Yes

No

1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system check performed?

Go to Step 2.

Go to On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check.

2

1. Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF. 2. Disconnect governor control module. 3. Using a test lamp connected to a known good ground, probe harness terminal A.

Go to Step 3.

Go to Step 6.

Go to Step 4.

Go to Step 7.

Is the test lamp illuminated? 3

Connect a test lamp between harness connector terminals A and C. Is the test lamp illuminated?

45


DTC 31 Engine Governor Circuit

2200 SRM 1017

Table 21. DTC 31 Engine Governor Circuit (Continued) Step

Action

4

1. Using connector test adapter Kit #J-356176, install a jumper between harness terminals E and C. 2. Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF. 3. Using a fused jumper, connect terminals D to A for a maximum of 30 seconds. 4. Depress the accelerator pedal.

Value

Yes

No

Go to Step 8.

Go to Step 5.

Go to Step 12.

Go to Step 9.

Did the throttle plate open? 5

1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. Using connector test adapter Kit #J-356176, install a jumper between Governor Controller Module and its connector, except terminal B of the wiring harness. 3. Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF. 4. With a test light connected to battery +, touch test probe to terminal B of the Governor Controller Module. 5. Depress the accelerator pedal. Did the throttle plate open?

46

6

Repair open in Battery + circuit 112B. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

7

Repair open ground circuit 646. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

8

Test for an open in circuit 825 or circuit 641, including plug near governor motor. Are the circuits and plug OK?

Go to Step 13.

Go to Step 10.

9

Test for an open or grounded circuit 431 or damaged terminal. Are the circuit and terminal OK?

Go to Step 12.

Go to Step 11.

10

Repair open in circuit 825 or circuit 641 or plug near governor motor. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

11

Repair grounded circuit 431 or damaged terminal. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

12

Replace Electronic Control Module. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

13

Replace governor control module. Is action complete?

Verify repair.


2200 SRM 1017

DTC 33 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage High

DTC 33 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage High CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor responds to changes in manifold pressure (vacuum). The ECM receives this information as a signal voltage that will vary from about 1.0-1.5 volts at idle to about 4.0-4.5 volts at Wide Open Throttle (WOT).

If the MAP sensor fails, the ECM will substitute a default MAP value that will vary with RPM. The MAP sensor voltage of 5 volts is delivered to the MAP sensor through circuit 428. Circuit 649 is the ground circuit for the MAP sensor. The MAP signal circuit 429 will send a voltage signal back to the ECM according to what the manifold pressure is. See Figure 21.

Figure 21. Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage High

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Check for the following conditions: • Poor connection at ECM. Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. • Damaged Harness. Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the MAP sensor display on the SCAN Tool while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the MAP sensor. A change in the MAP sensor display will indicate the location of the fault. • If the idle is rough or unstable, refer to symptoms for items that may cause an unstable idle. • With the ignition ON, engine OFF, the manifold pressure is equal to atmospheric pressure; and the signal voltage will be high. This information is used by the ECM as an indication of altitude and is referred to as BARO. Comparison of this BARO reading, with a known good MAP sensor, is a good way to check the accuracy of a suspect sensor. Reading should be the same, plus or minus 0.4 volt.

• If DTC 14 is also set, check for open in ground circuit 649. • If a MAP sensor circuit failure is present, the TP sensor default value will be used along with the MAP sensor default value. After repairs, clear DTC’s following Troubleshooting Information, Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Failure to do so may result in DTC’s not properly being cleared.

TEST DESCRIPTION NOTE: The numbered paragraphs directly correspond with the numbered steps in Table 22 below. 2. This step will determine if there is an adequate vacuum supply to the MAP sensor. If the vacuum gauge reading is erratic, refer to the rough or unstable idle symptom. 4. This step emulates a DTC 34. If the ECM recognizes the low signal voltage and sets a DTC 34, the ECM and wiring are OK. 5. This step checks for an open in ground circuit 649. 47


DTC 33 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage High

2200 SRM 1017

Table 22. DTC 33 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage High Step

Action

1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system check performed?

2

1. Install a vacuum gauge to a manifold vacuum source. 2. Start the engine and allow engine to idle. 3. The vacuum reading should be steady.

Yes

No

Go to Step 2.

Go to On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check.

Go to Step 3.

Go to Step 6.

4 volts

Go to Step 4.

Go to Step 7.

1 volt

Go to Step 5.

Go to Step 8.

4 volts

Go to Step 10.

Go to Step 9.

Value

356 mm Hg (14 inHg)

Is the vacuum gauge reading steady and above the specified value? 3

1. Install a SCAN Tool. 2. Start the engine and allow engine to idle. Does SCAN Tool indicate MAP sensor voltage greater than the specified value?

4

1. Turn ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect MAP sensor harness connector. 3. Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF. Does SCAN Tool indicate MAP sensor voltage less than the specified value?

5

1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. Connect DMM from harness terminal A (circuit 649) to harness terminal C (circuit 428). 3. Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF. Does DMM indicate a voltage greater than the specified value?

6

Repair low or unsteady vacuum problem. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

7

DTC 33 is intermittent. Locate and repair intermittent faulty connections. • Refer to Diagnostic Aids.

Verify repair.

Is action complete?

48

8

Locate and repair short to voltage in circuit 429. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found?

Verify repair.

Go to Step 11.

9

Locate and repair open in circuit 649. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found?

Verify repair.

Go to Step 11.


2200 SRM 1017

DTC 34 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage Low

Table 22. DTC 33 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage High (Continued) Value

Yes

Step

Action

10

Check for plugged or leaking sensor vacuum fitting. If OK, replace faulty MAP sensor. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

11

Repair faulty ECM connections or replace faulty ECM. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

No

DTC 34 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage Low CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor responds to changes in manifold pressure (vacuum). The ECM receives this information as a signal voltage that will vary from about 1.0-1.5 volts at idle to about 4.0-4.5 volts at Wide-Open Throttle (WOT).

The MAP sensor voltage of 5 volts is delivered to the MAP sensor through circuit 428. Circuit 649 is the ground circuit for the MAP sensor. The MAP signal circuit 429 will send a voltage signal back to the ECM according to what the manifold pressure is. See Figure 22.

If the MAP sensor fails, the ECM will substitute a default MAP value that will vary with RPM.

Figure 22. Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage Low

49


DTC 34 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage Low

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Check for the following conditions: • Poor connection at ECM. Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. • Damaged Harness. Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the MAP sensor display on the SCAN Tool while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the MAP sensor. A change in the MAP sensor display will indicate the location of the fault. • If the idle is rough or unstable, refer to symptoms for items that may cause an unstable idle. • With the ignition ON, engine OFF, the manifold pressure is equal to atmospheric pressure, and the signal voltage will be high. This information is used by the ECM as an indication of altitude and is referred to as BARO. Comparison of this BARO reading, with a known good MAP sensor, is a good way to check the accuracy of a suspect sensor. Reading should be the same, plus or minus 0.4 volt. • If a MAP sensor circuit failure is present, the TP sensor default value will be used along with the MAP sensor default value.

2200 SRM 1017

After repairs, clear DTC’s following Troubleshooting Information, Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Failure to do so may result in DTC’s not properly being cleared.

TEST DESCRIPTION NOTE: The numbered paragraphs directly correspond with the numbered steps in Table 23 below. 2. This step will determine if there is an adequate vacuum supply to the MAP sensor. If the vacuum gauge reading is erratic, refer to the rough or unstable idle symptom. 3. This step determines if DTC 34 is the result of a hard failure or an intermittent condition. A DTC will set when MAP signal voltage is too low with engine running. 4. This step emulates a DTC 33. If the ECM recognizes the high signal voltage, the ECM and wiring are OK. 5. This step checks for 5-volt reference on circuit 428.

Table 23. DTC 34 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage Low Step

Action

1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system check performed?

2

1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. Install a vacuum gauge to a manifold vacuum source. 3. Start the engine and raise to about 1000 RPM in neutral. 4. The vacuum reading should be steady.

Value

356 mm Hg (14 inHg)

Yes

No

Go to Step 2.

Go to On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check.

Go to Step 3.

Go to Step 6.

Go to Step 4.

Go to Step 7.

Is the vacuum gauge reading steady and above the specified value? 3

1. Install a SCAN Tool. 2. Start the engine and allow engine to idle. Does SCAN Tool indicate MAP sensor voltage less than the specified value?

50

1 volt


2200 SRM 1017

DTC 34 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage Low

Table 23. DTC 34 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Signal Voltage Low (Continued) Step

Action

Value

Yes

No

4

1. Turn ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect MAP sensor harness connector. 3. Connect a jumper wire from harness terminal B (circuit 429) to harness terminal C (circuit 428). 4. Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF.

4 volts

Go to Step 10.

Go to Step 5.

4 volts

Go to Step 9.

Go to Step 8.

Does SCAN Tool indicate MAP sensor voltage greater than the specified value? 5

1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. Connect DMM from harness terminal C (circuit 428) to a known good ground. 3. Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF. Does DMM indicate a voltage greater than the specified value?

6

Repair low or unsteady vacuum problem. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

7

DTC 34 is intermittent. Locate and repair intermittent faulty connections. • Refer to Diagnostic Aids.

Verify repair.

Is action complete? 8

Locate and repair open or short to ground in circuit 428. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found?

Verify repair.

Go to Step 11.

9

Locate and repair open or short in circuit 429. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found?

Verify repair.

Go to Step 11.

10

Check for plugged or leaking sensor vacuum fitting. If OK, replace faulty MAP sensor. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

11

Repair faulty ECM connections or replace faulty ECM. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

51


DTC 41 Electronic Spark Timing (EST) - Open EST Circuit

2200 SRM 1017

DTC 41 Electronic Spark Timing (EST) - Open EST Circuit CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION A DTC 41 is indicated if there is an open circuit in the Electronic Spark Timing Signal (EST). When the system is running on the ignition module, there is no voltage on the bypass wire because the ignition module sends the Electronic Spark Timing Signal (EST) to ground. If the ECM senses a voltage on the EST wire, a Code 41 will be set and the electronic control system will not go into the EST mode of operation.

EST will no longer be grounded in the ignition module, and EST voltage will normally have a variation during operation. If the bypass wire is open or grounded, the ignition module will not change to EST mode; and a Code 42 will be indicated. If the EST wire has a short circuit to ground, there will not be an EST signal; and a Code 42 will be indicated. See Figure 23.

When the engine is being started and approximately 400 rpm are sensed, bypass voltage is applied. The

Figure 23. Electronic Spark Timing (EST) Open EST Circuit

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS

TEST DESCRIPTION

Check for the following conditions: • Poor connection at ECM. Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection.

NOTE: The numbered paragraphs directly correspond with the numbered steps in Table 24 below.

After repairs, clear DTC’s following Troubleshooting Information, Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Failure to do so may result in DTC’s not properly being cleared.

52

2. A code 41 is indicated if there is an open circuit in the Electronic Timing Signal (EST). This test checks that the Code 41 is a real fault. 3. This test checks that the ground path through the ignition module is correct. A short circuit in circuit 436 to ground will also indicate less than 500 ohms, and a code 42 will be indicated.


2200 SRM 1017

DTC 41 Electronic Spark Timing (EST) - Open EST Circuit Table 24. DTC 41 Electronic Spark Timing (EST) - Open EST Circuit

Step

Action

Value

Yes

No

1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system check performed?

Go to Step 2.

Go to On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check.

2

1. Clear Codes from ECM. Go to Troubleshooting Information, Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). 2. Start engine and run at idle speed at least 1 minute.

Go to Step 3.

Code 41 is not constant or not regular. If additional codes are not stored, go to Troubleshooting, Poor Operation.

Go to Step 4.

Go to Step 5.

Go to Step 6.

Code 41 is not constant or not regular. If additional codes are not stored, go to Troubleshooting, Poor Operation.

Is Code 41 present? 3

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn ignition switch to OFF. Disconnect connectors at ECM. Turn ignition switch to ON. Set ohmmeter selection switch to 1,000- to 2,000-ohm range. 5. Check resistance between ground and circuit 436 at the ECM connector. Is resistance less than 1500 ohms?

4

1. Clear codes from ECM. Go to Troubleshooting Information, Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). 2. Connect the ECM. 3. Start engine and run at idle for at least 1 minute. Is Code 41 present?

5

Locate and repair open in circuit 436, or replace faulty ignition module if no open in circuit 436 is found. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

6

Replace faulty ECM. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

53


DTC 42 EST - Grounded EST Circuit, Open or Grounded Bypass Circuit

2200 SRM 1017

DTC 42 EST - Grounded EST Circuit, Open or Grounded Bypass Circuit CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION A DTC 42 is indicated if there is a grounded circuit in the Electronic Spark Timing Signal (EST) or open or grounded bypass circuit. When the system is running on the ignition module, there is no voltage on the bypass wire because the ignition module sends the Electronic Spark Timing Signal (EST) to ground. If the ECM senses a voltage on the EST wire, a Code 41 will be set and the electronic control system will not go into the EST mode of operation.

When the engine is being started and approximately 400 rpm are sensed, bypass voltage is applied. The EST will no longer be grounded in the ignition module, and EST voltage will normally have a variation during operation. If the bypass wire is open or grounded, the ignition module will not change to EST mode; and a Code 42 will be indicated. If the EST wire has a short circuit to ground, there will not be an EST signal; and a Code 42 will be indicated. See Figure 24.

Figure 24. Electronic Spark Timing (EST) Grounded EST Circuit, Open or Grounded Bypass Circuit

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS After repairs, clear DTC’s following Troubleshooting Information, Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Failure to do so may result in DTC’s not properly being cleared.

TEST DESCRIPTION NOTE: The numbered paragraphs directly correspond with the numbered steps in Table 25 below. 2. Code 42 is indicated if there is a grounded circuit in the electronic spark timing signal (EST) or open or grounded bypass circuit. This test checks that the Code 42 is a real fault.

54

3. When TEST LIGHT voltage touches circuit 437, the module correctly causes the ohmmeter to overrange if the ohmmeter is in the 1000-ohm position to the 2000-ohm position. When the selector switch on the ohmmeter is changed to the 10,000- to 20,000-ohms position, the ohmmeter correctly indicates more than 5000 ohms. The important part of this test is to check if the module makes the switch. 4. If the module did not make the switch in step above, this step makes the following checks: a. Circuit 436 has a short circuit to ground. b. Bypass circuit 437 is open. c. Ignition module has a fault or bad connection.


2200 SRM 1017

DTC 42 EST - Grounded EST Circuit, Open or Grounded Bypass Circuit

Table 25. DTC 42 Electronic Spark Timing (EST) - Grounded EST Circuit, Open or Grounded Bypass Circuit Step

Action

Value

Yes

No

1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system check performed?

Go to Step 2.

Go to On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check.

2

1. Clear codes from the ECM. Go to Diagnostic Aids. 2. Start engine and run at idle speed for at least 1 minute and check for Code 42.

Go to Step 3.

Code 42 is not constant or regular. If no other codes are stored, go to Troubleshooting, Poor Operation.

Does Code 42 appear? 3

Connect a test light between battery voltage and circuit 437 at the ECM connector. Is the light off?

Go to Step 4.

Go to Step 7.

4

1. Connect an ohmmeter between ground and circuit 436 at the ECM cable connector. 2. Connect a test light between battery voltage and circuit 437 at the ECM cable connector. 3. When the test light probe touches circuit 437, the resistance will correctly make a switch from less than 1,000 ohms to greater than 2,000 ohms.

Go to Step 6.

Go to Step 5.

Does resistance change? 5

With the ohmmeter still connected between ground and circuit 436 at the ECM connector, disconnect the four-way connector at the ignition module. Does resistance go high (open circuit)?

Go to Step 8.

Go to Step 9.

6

1. Connect the ECM connector to the ECM. 2. Start the engine and run at idle for at least 1 minute and check for Code 42.

Go to Step 10.

Code 42 is not constant or regular. If no other codes are stored, go to Troubleshooting, Poor Operation. Go to Step 12.

Is Code 42 present? 7

Disconnect the four-way connector at the ignition module. Is the light off?

Go to Step 11.

8

Locate and repair open in circuit 437 or replace faulty ignition module if open in circuit 437 is not found. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

55


DTC 51 Calibration Checksum Failure

2200 SRM 1017

Table 25. DTC 42 Electronic Spark Timing (EST) - Grounded EST Circuit, Open or Grounded Bypass Circuit (Continued) Step

Action

Value

Yes

9

Locate and repair short between circuit 436 and ground. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

10

Replace faulty ECM. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

11

Locate and repair short in circuit 437 to ground. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

12

Replace faulty ignition module. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

No

DTC 51 Calibration Checksum Failure CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS

This test allows the ECM to check for a calibration failure by comparing the calibration value to a known value stored in the EEPROM.

If DTC 51 failed more than once, but is intermittent, replace the ECM.

This test is also used as a security measure to prevent improper use of calibration or changes to these calibrations that may alter the designed function of MEFI. See Figure 25.

Figure 25. Electronic Control Module

56

TEST DESCRIPTION NOTE: The numbered paragraphs directly correspond with the numbered steps in Table 26 below. 2. This step checks to see if the fault is present during diagnosis. If present, the ECM is not functioning properly and must be replaced or reprogrammed.


2200 SRM 1017

DTC 81 Fuel Pump Relay Driver Circuit High, Low, or Open Table 26. DTC 51 Calibration Checksum Failure

Step

Action

Value

Yes

No

1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system check performed?

Go to Step 2.

Go to On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check.

2

1. Install Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) tool. 2. Using Clear DTC Procedure, Clear DTC 51. 3. Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF. 4. Switch DTC tool to "service mode," or ON.

Go to Step 3.

Refer to Diagnostic Aids.

Does DTC 51 reset? 3

Replace or reprogram faulty ECM and verify DTC does not reset. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

DTC 81 Fuel Pump Relay Driver Circuit High, Low, or Open CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The Engine Control Module (ECM) controls the relay by grounding the control circuit via an internal switch called a driver. The primary function of the driver is to supply the ground for the controlled component. This driver has a fault line that the ECM monitors. When the ECM commands the relay ON, the voltage of the control circuit should be low, near 0 volt. When the ECM commands the relay OFF,

the voltage should be high, near battery voltage. If the fault detection circuit senses a voltage other than what the ECM expects, the fault line status changes, causing the DTC to set. The relay controls the high current flow to the fuel pump. This allows the ECM driver only to have to control the relatively low current used by the relay. See Figure 26.

Figure 26. Fuel Pump Relay Driver Circuit

57


DTC 81 Fuel Pump Relay Driver Circuit High, Low, or Open

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Check for the following conditions: • Poor connection in harness. Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. After repairs, clear DTC’s following Troubleshooting Information, Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Failure to do so may result in DTC’s not properly being cleared.

2200 SRM 1017

2. Listen for an audible click when the relay operates. Command both the ON and OFF states. Repeat the commands if necessary. 3. This test can detect a partially shorted coil, which would cause an excessive current flow. Leaving the circuit energized for 2 minutes allows the coil to warm up. When warm, the coil may open, and the current drops to 0; or the coil may short, and the current goes above 0.75 amp. 5. Identify and test the relay coil terminals in order to avoid improper diagnosis.

TEST DESCRIPTION NOTE: The numbered paragraphs directly correspond with the numbered steps in Table 27 below. Table 27. DTC 81 Fuel Pump Relay Driver Circuit High, Low, or Open Step

Action

Value

Yes

No

1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system check performed?

Go to Step 2.

Go to On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check.

2

1. Turn the ignition ON, leaving the engine OFF. 2. Using the SCAN Tool, command the relay ON and OFF.

Go to Step 3.

Go to Step 5.

Go to Diagnostic Aids.

Go to Step 4.

Does the relay turn ON and OFF when commanded? 3

1. Turn the ignition to OFF. 2. Disconnect the ECM connector J1. 3. Install a 5-amp fused jumper wire from a known good ground to the control circuit at the ECM harness connector J1-6. 4. Turn the ignition ON, leaving the engine OFF. Important: Replace the relay if the DMM goes to 0 during the current draw test. 5. Using a DMM on the 40 amp scale, measure the current from the relay control circuit in the harness to ground for 2 minutes. Does the current draw measure less than the specified value?

58

0.75 A


2200 SRM 1017

DTC 81 Fuel Pump Relay Driver Circuit High, Low, or Open

Table 27. DTC 81 Fuel Pump Relay Driver Circuit High, Low, or Open (Continued) Step

Action

4

1. Turn the ignition to OFF. 2. Disconnect the fuel pump relay connector. 3. Using a DMM, measure the resistance from the relay control circuit in the ECM harness connector to ground.

Value

Yes

No

Go to Step 12.

Go to Step 10.

Go to Step 8.

Go to Step 6.

Does the DMM display infinite resistance or OL? 5

1. Turn the ignition to OFF. 2. Disconnect the fuel pump relay connector. 3. Connect a test lamp between the fuel pump relay control circuit and the fuel pump relay ignition feed circuit, on the coil side of the relay, at the fuel pump relay harness connector. 4. Turn the ignition ON, leaving the engine OFF. 5. Using a SCAN Tool, command the relay ON and OFF. Does the lamp turn ON and OFF when commanded?

6

Using a test lamp connected to ground, probe the ignition feed circuit on the coil side of the fuel pump relay harness connector. Is the test lamp illuminated?

Go to Step 7.

Go to Step 11.

7

1. 2. 3. 4.

Go to Step 9.

Go to Step 10.

Verify repair.

Go to Step 12.

Turn the ignition OFF. Reconnect the relay. Disconnect ECM connector J2. Turn the ignition ON, leaving the engine OFF. 5. Using a fused jumper wire connected to ground, momentarily probe the relay control circuit in the ECM harness connector. Does the relay turn ON when the circuit is grounded and OFF when the circuit is opened?

8

Locate and repair faulty connections at the relay. Was a problem found?

59


DTC 81 5-Volt Reference Circuit Out of Range

2200 SRM 1017

Table 27. DTC 81 Fuel Pump Relay Driver Circuit High, Low, or Open (Continued) Step

Action

Value

Yes

No Go to Step 13.

9

Locate and repair faulty connections at the ECM. Was a problem found?

Verify repair.

10

Repair the faulty relay control circuit. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

11

Repair the faulty relay ignition feed circuit. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

12

Replace the faulty relay. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

13

Replace the ECM. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

DTC 81 5-Volt Reference Circuit Out of Range CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The Engine Control Module (ECM) uses a common 5-volt reference circuit as a sensor feed. This circuit supplies 5 volts to the Manifold Absolute Pressure

(MAP) sensor and the Throttle Position (TP) sensor. The ECM monitors the voltage on the 5-volt reference circuit. This DTC sets if the voltage is out of range. See Figure 27.

Figure 27. Fuel Pump Relay Driver Circuit

60


2200 SRM 1017

DTC 81 5-Volt Reference Circuit Out of Range

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS

TEST DESCRIPTION

Check for the following conditions: • Poor connection in harness. Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection.

NOTE: The numbered paragraphs directly correspond with the numbered steps in Table 28 below.

After repairs, clear DTC’s following Troubleshooting Information, Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Failure to do so may result in DTC’s not properly being cleared.

3. The 5-volt reference circuit may be shorted to another ECM circuit. The shorted circuit may not be apparent when the ECM harness connector is disconnected.

Table 28. DTC 81 5 Volt Reference Circuit Out of Range Step

Action

1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system check performed?

2

1. Disconnect the ECM harness connector J2. 2. Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF. 3. Using DMM connected to a known good ground, probe the other lead of the DMM to the 5-volt reference circuit (J2-2) at the ECM harness connector.

Yes

No

Go to Step 2.

Go to On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check.

5.1 V

Go to Step 6.

Go to Step 3.

0-2 ohms

Go to Step 7.

Go to Step 9.

Go to Step 8.

Go to Step 5.

Value

Does the circuit measure more than the specified value? 3

Before proceeding, remove the following fuses: • ECM/BAT • INJ/ECM • MEFI System Relay 1. Disconnect the MAP sensor and the TP sensor harness connectors. 2. Using a DMM, test the continuity from the 5-volt reference circuit to all other ECM circuits at the ECM J2 harness connector. Do any of the circuits indicate a resistance within the specified range?

4

1. Turn the ignition to OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM connector J2. 3. Using a test lamp connected to B+, probe 5-volt reference circuit (J2-2) at the ECM harness connector. Does test lamp illuminate?

61


DTC 81 FPRSENSE Circuit Fault

2200 SRM 1017

Table 28. DTC 81 5 Volt Reference Circuit Out of Range (Continued) Step

Action

Value

Yes

No

5

Using a DMM, test the continuity from the 5-volt reference circuit to all other ECM circuits at the ECM J2 harness connector. Do any circuits indicate a resistance within the specified range?

0-2 ohms

Go to Step 7.

Go to Step 9.

6

Locate and repair a short to voltage on the 5 volt reference circuit. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

7

Locate and repair short between the 5 volt reference circuit and the ECM circuit that had continuity. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

8

Locate and repair short to ground on the 5 volt reference circuit. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

9

Replace the ECM. Is the action complete?

Verify repair.

DTC 81 FPRSENSE Circuit Fault CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When running the diagnostic for the fuel pump relay sense circuit, the ECM first checks for ignition voltage to be greater than 7.0 volts. It then checks to see if the ECM is commanding the fuel pump to be ON. If the fuel pump is commanded ON, the FPRSENSE should be ignition voltage. It the fuel pump is commanded OFF, then the FPRSENSE

should be near 0 volt. An internal counter increments or decrements based on the results of the diagnostics. Each time the diagnostics fails, the counter is incremented. Each time the diagnostics passes, the counter is decremented. When the counter reaches a calibrated amount, a DTC 81 is set. If the counter reaches 0, then an active DTC 81 is cleared. See Figure 28.

Figure 28. Fuel Pump Relay Sense Circuit

62


2200 SRM 1017

DTC 81 FPRSENSE Circuit Fault

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Check for the following conditions: • Poor connection in harness. Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. After repairs, clear DTC’s following Troubleshooting Information, Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes

(DTCs). Failure to do so may result in DTC’s not properly being cleared.

TEST DESCRIPTION NOTE: The numbered paragraphs directly correspond with the numbered steps in Table 29 below. 2. This test checks for a short to ground on the fuel pump relay circuit.

Table 29. DTC 81 FPRSENSE Circuit Fault Step

Action

Value

Yes

No

1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system check performed?

Go to Step 2.

Go to On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check.

2

1. Install a SCAN Tool. 2. Clear diagnostic trouble codes. 3. Run the engine for 5 minutes or until a DTC is set. 4. Check for DTCs.

Go to Step 3.

Problem may be intermittent. Go to Diagnostic Aids.

Is DTC 81 (FPRSENSE Circuit Fault) present? 3

Turn ignition ON, leaving engine OFF. Does the fuel pump continue to run longer than the calibrated "prime" time?

Go to Step 5.

Go to Step 4.

4

Check the FPRSENSE circuit for a short to ground or a short to voltage. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found?

Verify repair.

Go to Step 7.

5

Check for shorted contacts within the relay. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found?

Verify repair.

Go to Step 6.

6

Repair the short to ground in circuit 651. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

7

Inspect for poor connection at the ECM. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found?

Verify repair.

8

Replace the ECM. Is the action complete?

Verify repair.

Go to Step 8.

63


Troubleshooting, Poor Operation

2200 SRM 1017

Troubleshooting, Poor Operation NOTE: Before using the following information, make sure you have done the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check and found that: 1. The ECM and Malfunction Indicator Lamp are operating correctly. 2. There are no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) or there is a DTC but no Malfunction Indicator Lamp.

GENERAL Make sure you have done the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check before this Troubleshooting section is used. Make sure problem is correctly described. Check indicated items in this Troubleshooting section under described problem. If starter will crank engine but engine will not start, see A-3 Engine Cranks but Does Not Run.

MAKE A CAREFUL VISUAL CHECK This check is very important because some problems can be corrected without doing a fault analysis. Check the following items: • Ground connections for the ECM are clean, tight, and in their proper location • Vacuum hoses for correct connections or damaged hoses • Vacuum leaks at the mount for the TBI and the intake manifold • Condition of the ignition wires for cracks, bad connections, and indications of electric arcs • Wires and connectors for damage and bad connections

FAULT: CODES OR PERFORMANCE THAT IS ABNORMAL

• Operation of lift truck with a SCAN Tool connected. SCAN Tool will normally indicate a trouble code. • Electrical noise caused by a relay, solenoid, or switch. This problem will occur when faulty component is operated. • Installation of lights, radios, or other electrical accessory equipment. • Sensor wires are not too close to high voltage ignition system wires. Wire for circuit 650 from ECM to Ignition Control Module (ICM) must be a good connection. • Ignition secondary has a short to ground. • Circuit 420A Malfunction Indicator Lamp or circuit 438 (diagnostic test terminal) has a short circuit to ground.

FAULT: LOSS OF DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) MEMORY To check, disconnect Throttle Position (TP) sensor and run engine at idle speed until Malfunction Indicator Lamp comes ON. DTC 21 will be kept in memory when ignition is turned OFF for at least 10 seconds. If not, the ECM is bad. DTCs will be erased after 50 starts if they do not reoccur.

FAULT: ENGINE QUITS WHILE DRIVING Check for a failure of the injector driver in ECM. If injector driver fails, replace the ECM.

Additional Checks If problem has not been found, see System Test Charts.

FAULT: ENGINE IS DIFFICULT TO START

NOTE: DO NOT use the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) charts for problems that are not constant. Fault must be present to locate problem. If a fault is not constant, use of DTC charts can cause replacement of good parts.

Definition: The starter cranks the engine correctly, but the engine is difficult to start; or the engine stops immediately after it starts.

Definition: A problem that does not cause Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) to illuminate and a code is not kept in the ECM.

Make a CAREFUL VISUAL CHECK as described in Make a Careful Visual Check. Make sure the operator is using the correct starting procedure.

Check: • Wires and connectors for damage and bad connections.

SENSORS • Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor. Using a SCAN Tool, compare coolant temperature with ambient temperature when engine is cold. If

64

Check:


2200 SRM 1017 coolant temperature reading is 5 degrees greater than or less than ambient air temperature on a cold engine, check resistance at the ECT sensor circuit or sensor itself. Compare ECT resistance value to charts in DTC 14 and DTC 15. • MAP sensor. • Throttle Position (TP) sensor for binding or a high TP voltage with throttle closed (will read between 0.33 to 1.33 volts). FUEL SYSTEM • Fuel pump relay operation - pump must turn ON for 2 seconds when ignition is turned ON. Use A-5 Fuel Pump Relay Circuit. • Fuel pressure, use A-6 Fuel System Troubleshooting. • Dirty fuel. • Injector driver circuit. Disconnect injector harness connector at injector. Connect a 12-volt test light between harness terminals of injector connector and check light while cranking. If test light fails to blink, it is a bad injector circuit harness, connector, or terminal. • Injector resistance. Measure resistance of injector. Nominal resistance of injector is 1.6 ohms or greater at 20 C (68 F). Resistance will increase at higher temperatures. • A bad check valve for fuel pump will allow fuel in lines to drain back to the tank after engine is stopped. To check for this condition, perform A-6 Fuel System Troubleshooting. IGNITION SYSTEM • Correct ignition voltage output with spark tester. • Spark plugs: dirty, cracks, wear, wrong gap, burned electrodes, and correct heat ranges. • Wires or cables are damaged or shorted. • Connections at Ignition Module are loose. • Bad ECM or ignition grounds. • Engine misses or quits under load or at idle. See System Test Charts. • Circuit 436 (Electronic Spark Timing) shorted to ground. • Idle Air Control (IAC) operation.

FAULT: VARIATION IN ENGINE POWER WHEN THROTTLE IS HELD STEADY Definition: Engine power variation under steady throttle feels like vehicle speeds up and slows down with no change in accelerator pedal position. Check:

Troubleshooting, Poor Operation Make a CAREFUL VISUAL CHECK as described in Make a Careful Visual Check. • ECM grounds are clean, tight, and in their proper location. • Vacuum lines for restrictions or leaks. • Alternator output voltage. Repair if less than 9 or more than 16 volts. • Governor cables. SENSORS • Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor. MAP sensor must change quickly at different throttle positions. Check MAP sensor vacuum line for restrictions. The ECM will respond to any MAP signal and can change amount of fuel sent to engine, causing operating problems. Also, use to test MAP sensor. IGNITION SYSTEM • For correct ignition voltage output using spark tester. • Spark plugs. Remove spark plugs, check for wet plugs, cracks, wear, wrong gap, burned or dirty electrodes, insulators, and correct heat range. Repair or replace as necessary. • Check spark plug cables. FUEL SYSTEM To check if condition is caused by a rich or lean system, test vehicle under same conditions that symptom occurs as described by the customer. • Fuel pressure while condition exists. Use A-6 Fuel System Troubleshooting. • In-line fuel filter. Replace if dirty. • Fuel injector. • Poor fuel quality.

FAULT: DECREASED ENGINE POWER Definition: Engine delivers less than expected power. Little or no increase in speed when accelerator pedal is pushed down part way. Check: Make a CAREFUL VISUAL CHECK as described in Make a Careful Visual Check. • Remove air filter and check for dirt or other restrictions. Replace as necessary. • ECM grounds are clean, tight, and in their correct locations. See section for ECM wiring diagrams. • Alternator output voltage. Repair if less than 9 or more than 16 volts. • Exhaust system for restriction or damage.

65


Troubleshooting, Poor Operation ENGINE • Engine valve timing and compression. • Engine for correct or worn camshaft. • Leaky valve seals. • Excessive carbon buildup in combustion chambers. IGNITION SYSTEM • For correct operation of Electronic Spark Timing (EST). • Secondary voltage circuit. FUEL SYSTEM • Restriction in fuel filter. • Dirty fuel. • Fuel pressure, use A-6 Fuel System Troubleshooting. • Low fuel pressure after a cold start or during acceleration. If fuel pressure drops below 62 kPa (9 psi), there can be a bad fuel pump or restriction in fuel system. GOVERNOR SYSTEM • Throttle adjustment. • Governor motor.

2200 SRM 1017 COOLING SYSTEM • Problems from engine running too hot: – Low engine coolant level. – Loose water pump belt. – Restriction in airflow to radiator, or restriction in water flow through radiator. – Incorrect coolant mixture. FUEL SYSTEM To check if the condition is caused by a rich or lean system, test the vehicle under same conditions that symptom occurs as described by the customer. • Fuel pressure while condition exists. Use A-6 Fuel System Troubleshooting.

FAULT: ENGINE MOMENTARILY DOES NOT INCREASE POWER WHEN THROTTLE CHANGES Definition: Engine momentarily does not increase power when throttle is opened further. Engine can stop when throttle is opened rapidly from idle.

FAULT: DETONATION/SPARK KNOCK

Make a CAREFUL VISUAL CHECK as described in Make a Careful Visual Check.

Definition: Engine makes sharp metallic knocking sounds that change when throttle position is changed. This condition is normally worse during acceleration. Air and fuel mixture is exploding in the cylinder instead of burning evenly.

Check: • Engine thermostat operates correctly and at the correct heat range. • Alternator output voltage. Repair if less than 9 or more than 16 volts.

Check:

SENSORS • Throttle Position (TP) sensor. Check TP sensor for correct operation. Voltage will increase evenly as throttle is moved toward Wide-Open Throttle (WOT). • MAP sensor output.

Make a CAREFUL VISUAL CHECK as described in Make a Careful Visual Check. If SCAN Tool readings are normal (see On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check) and there are no engine mechanical faults, fill fuel tank with a good grade of gasoline that has a minimum octane rating of 87 and check vehicle performance. IGNITION SYSTEM • Spark plugs for correct heat range. ENGINE • For oil in combustion chamber caused by leaky valve oil seals. • Combustion chambers for excessive carbon buildup. Remove carbon with top engine cleaner using instructions on the can. • Low cylinder pressure by doing a compression test. • Basic engine parts such as cam, head, pistons that are not correct or are worn.

66

IGNITION SYSTEM • Spark plugs. Remove spark plugs, check for wet plugs, cracks, wear, wrong gap, burned or dirty electrodes, insulators, and correct heat range. Repair or replace as necessary. • Ignition system connection, circuit 650. FUEL SYSTEM • Fuel pressure, use A-6 Fuel System Troubleshooting. • Dirty fuel. • Low fuel pressure after a cold start or during acceleration. If fuel pressure drops below 62 kPa (9 psi), there can be a bad fuel pump or restriction in fuel system.


2200 SRM 1017 GOVERNOR SYSTEM • Throttle cables. • Governor motor.

FAULT: ONE OR MORE CYLINDERS DO NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - ENGINE DOES NOT IDLE CORRECTLY Definition: Operation of one cylinder is not regular and problem increases when engine load increases. Problem normally does not occur above 1500 rpm. Engine has a rough idle or has noticeable variation at idle speed. Make a CAREFUL VISUAL CHECK as described in Make a Careful Visual Check. IGNITION SYSTEM • Start engine, let engine become steady, then disconnect Idle Air Control (IAC) motor. Remove one spark plug cable at a time, using pliers with insulation. Be sure to connect the cable that was removed to ground while testing. • If there is a decrease in rpm on all cylinders (equal to within 50 rpm), go to FAULT: Rough Idle or Engine Stalls During Idle. Connect IAC valve. • If there is no decrease in rpm on one or more cylinders, check for spark on cylinder(s) using an oscilloscope or spark tester. Check one spark plug cable at a time. If no spark, see System Test Charts. If there is a spark, remove spark plug(s) in these cylinders and check for: • Cracks in the insulator, wrong gap, burned electrodes, or wear. • Spark plug cables by connecting ohmmeter to ends of each cable in question. If meter reads over 30,000 ohms, replace cable(s). ADDITIONAL CHECKS An engine that misses can be caused by Electromagnetic Inference (EMI) on the reference circuit. EMI can be found by monitoring engine rpm with a SCAN Tool. A sudden increase in rpm with little change in actual engine rpm change indicates EMI is present. If problem exists, check routing of secondary wires and check ground circuit. ENGINE • Do a cylinder compression check. If compression is low, repair as necessary. • Remove rocker cover. Check for bent push rods, worn rocker arms, broken valve springs, worn camshaft lobes, and valve timing. Repair as necessary.

Troubleshooting, Poor Operation • Check intake and exhaust manifold passage for restrictions. FUEL SYSTEM • Low fuel pressure. Use A-6 Fuel System Troubleshooting. • Dirty fuel. • Dirty fuel filter.

FAULT: ROUGH IDLE OR ENGINE STALLS DURING IDLE Definition: Engine has a rough idle speed or has a large variation in idle speed. Engine stops running during idle. Make a CAREFUL VISUAL CHECK as described in Make a Careful Visual Check. Check: • For vacuum leaks. • ECM ground connections are clean and secure. See ECM wiring diagrams. • For broken engine mounts. • Alternator output voltage. Repair if less than 9 or more than 16 volts. IGNITION SYSTEM • For correct ignition voltage output using spark tester or equivalent. • Spark plugs. Remove spark plugs, check for wet or dirty plugs, cracks, wear, wrong gap, damaged electrodes, or insulators. Replace as necessary. • Spark plug wires by connecting an ohmmeter to ends of each cable in question. If meter reads over 30,000 ohms, replace cable(s). ENGINE • Do a cylinder compression check. See GM Engines 4-153, 4-181, 3.0L, 6-250 600 SRM 3, GM Engines 4.3L V6, 5.7L V8 600 SRM 104, or GM Engines 4.3L V6 600 SRM 590. • For correct camshaft or weak valve springs. OTHER CHECKS • MAP sensor output. • Throttle linkage for smooth operation. • IAC operation. • PCV valve for correct operation. • Check motor mounts.

FAULT: FUEL USAGE TOO HIGH Definition: Fuel use is higher than expected or has increased during later operation; make a CAREFUL

67


System Test Charts

2200 SRM 1017

VISUAL CHECK as described in Make a Careful Visual Check. Check: • Vacuum hoses for damage, restriction, or correct connections. • Check operator’s methods of operation. Are tires at correct pressure? Are loads more than capacity? • Check air filter for dirt or other restriction. • Check for fuel leaks. IGNITION SYSTEM • Spark plugs. Remove spark plugs, check for wet or dirty plugs, cracks, wear, correct heat range, wrong gap, damaged electrodes, or insulators. Replace as necessary. COOLING SYSTEM ENGINE • Compression. See GM Engines 4-153, 4-181, 3.0L, 6-250 600 SRM 3, GM Engines 4.3L V6, 5.7L V8 600 SRM 104, or GM Engines 4.3L V6 600 SRM 590. OTHER CHECKS • For exhaust system restriction. • Air intake system and crankcase for air leaks. • Excessive mechanical drag.

FAULT: DIESELING Definition: Engine continues to run after ignition switch is turned OFF but runs very roughly. If engine runs smoothly, check ignition switch. Make a CAREFUL VISUAL CHECK as described in Make a Careful Visual Check.

Check: • Fuel injector and TBI for fuel leaks. Use A-6 Fuel System Troubleshooting. • Check ECM grounds.

FAULT: BACKFIRE Definition: Fuel explodes in intake manifold or in exhaust system, making loud noise. Make a CAREFUL VISUAL CHECK as described in Make a Careful Visual Check. Check: IGNITION SYSTEM • Correct output from ignition coil with spark tester. • Spark plugs. Remove spark plugs, check for wet or dirty plugs, cracks, wear, wrong gap, damaged electrodes, or insulators. Replace as necessary. Also, check spark plug wires. • Spark plug wires for damage and correct installation. Inspect ignition coil assembly. • Do fuel system tests. Use A-6 Fuel System Troubleshooting. ENGINE • Compression - Look for valves that stick or leak. • Valve timing. See GM Engines 4-153, 4-181, 3.0L, 6-250 600 SRM 3, GM Engines 4.3L V6, 5.7L V8 600 SRM 104, or GM Engines 4.3L V6 600 SRM 590. • Intake and exhaust manifold passages for restrictions. • Check the crankcase ventilation valve for proper operation. Place a finger over the inlet hole in the valve end several times. The valve should snap back. If not, replace the valve.

System Test Charts GENERAL This part of the section has the following: • Components tests • Circuit tests • Function tests and adjustments For location of components, complete engine electronic wiring diagrams, and ECM wiring harness connector terminal end views, see Wiring in this section.

68

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR TEST The ECT, using the following procedure, can be tested at different temperatures. A volt/ohmmeter, a thermometer, engine coolant, and something to heat the coolant will be needed for the test. • Heat coolant to one of the temperatures shown in Table 30. • Position ECT sensor (sensing end) into heated coolant. • Wait about 60 seconds to allow coolant to heat sensor.


2200 SRM 1017

System Test Charts

• Test sensor resistance and compare reading to those in Table 30. • Sensors with a reading within 10% of specifications shown in Table 30 can be used. Table 30. ECT Sensor - Temperature vs. Resistance C

F

Ohms

100

212

177

90

194

214

80

176

332

70

158

467

60

140

667

50

122

943

45

113

1188

40

104

1459

35

95

1802

30

86

2238

25

77

2796

20

68

3520

15

59

4450

10

50

4670

5

41

7280

0

32

9420

5

23

12,300

10

14

16,180

15

5

21,450

20

4

28,680

30

22

52,700

40

40

100,700

THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR CHECK Using a SCAN Tool, watch the TP sensor percent and voltage. The reading will increase evenly as throttle plate is opened. See Figure 29. The reading must not be lower than previous reading as throttle plate opens up. A reading that goes lower or higher then lower as plate is opened indicates a damaged sensor that must be replaced. See Figure 30.

Figure 29. Good TP Sensor Reading

Figure 30. Damaged TP Sensor Reading

MINIMUM IDLE SPEED Minimum idle speed (minimum air setting) should only be set when installing a replacement throttle body. The idle stop screw is used to hold minimum idle speed of engine. On original equipment throttle bodies, it is adjusted at the factory, then covered with a plug.

Adjustment NOTE: The minimum idle speed adjustment is important for correct system operation. A minimum idle speed that is set too high can cause IAC valve pintle to touch the bottom of its seat constantly, leading to valve failure. If minimum idle speed is too low,

69


System Test Charts lift truck can be hard to start in cold weather or can cause a stall during idle. 1. Put a block on both sides of the drive tires and apply parking brake. 2. Put transmission in NEUTRAL. Start and run engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition key OFF. 4. Connect a SCAN Tool to Diagnostic Connector. 5. Turn ignition key to ON position. 6. Select Field Service Mode on the SCAN Tool. This will cause IAC valve pintle to extend, closing the air passage in the throttle body. Wait 45 seconds, disconnect IAC valve connector, then exit Field Service Mode.

2200 SRM 1017 a. Start and run engine over 2000 rpm. b. Select Field Service Mode. c. Run engine at 2000 rpm for approximately 10 seconds. d. Exit Field Service Mode. e. Allow engine to return to idle. f.

Turn ignition switch OFF.

g. Wait 10 seconds, start engine, let idle. h. Check for correct idle. (IAC at 5-40 Counts.) i.

Disconnect SCAN Tool.

j.

Remove blocks from drive tires.

7. Start and run engine. It may be necessary to hold throttle open slightly to run engine. 8. Select Engine RPM on the SCAN Tool, and read engine speed. NOTE: • Engine must be at normal operating temperature. • All accessories must be OFF. • Make sure throttle and governor cables do not hold throttle open. • Correct idle speed for engines that have more than 10 hours’ operating time is 800 ±25 rpm (GML 4-3.0L) or 650 rpm (GM V-6 4.3L). 9. Remove plug as shown in Figure 31. Adjust minimum idle speed only if necessary. 10. Turn ignition switch OFF. 11. Connect IAC valve electrical connector. 12. Reset IAC valve pintle position:

70

1. PLUG

2. IDLE STOP SCREW

Figure 31. Minimum Idle Speed Adjustment


2200 SRM 1017

B-1 - Idle Air Control (IAC) System Check

B-1 - Idle Air Control (IAC) System Check CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ECM controls engine idle speed with the IAC valve. To increase idle speed, the ECM retracts the IAC valve pintle away from its seat, allowing more air to bypass the throttle bore. To decrease idle speed, IAC valve pintle extends toward its seat,

reducing bypass airflow. A SCAN Tool will read the ECM commands to the IAC valve in counts. Higher counts indicate more air bypass (higher idle). Lower counts indicate less air is allowed to bypass (lower idle). See Figure 32 and Table 31.

Figure 32. Chart B-1 - Idle Air Control (IAC) System Check

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS • A slow, unstable, or fast idle speed can be caused by a problem other than the IAC system. Out-of-control range IAC SCAN Tool counts will be above 50 if idle is too high, and zero counts if idle is too low. Make the following checks to identify a problem that is not in the IAC system: • Vacuum Leak (High Idle) - If idle is too high, stop engine. Fully extend (low) IAC with tester. Start engine. If idle speed is above 800 RPM, fix vacuum leak, including PCV system. Also, check for smooth movement of throttle plate and linkage. • PCV Valve - If a high idle condition exists (900 to 1000 RPM), check for vacuum leaks and correct PCV valve operation. A missing PCV valve or grommet or a valve that sticks can cause this condition.

• System Too Lean (High Air/Fuel Ratio) - Idle speed can be too high or too low. Engine speed can vary up and down and disconnecting IAC valve does not help. Check for low fuel pressure, water in fuel, or a dirty injector. • System Too Rich (Low Air/Fuel Ratio) - Idle speed will be too low. SCAN Tool IAC counts will usually be above 50. System is rich and can cause black smoke in exhaust. Check for high fuel pressure or an injector that leaks or sticks. • Throttle Body - Remove IAC valve and inspect bore for dirt. • See Troubleshooting, Poor Operation. • If problems are fixed by disconnecting the IAC, carefully check connections and IAC valve terminal resistance, or replace IAC.

71


B-2 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Output Test

2200 SRM 1017

Table 31. Idle Air Control (IAC) System Check Step

Action

1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system check performed?

2

1. Install SCAN Tool. 2. Apply parking brake. 3. Run engine to normal operating temperature. 4. Turn ignition OFF.

Value

40 to 80 ohms

Yes

No

Go to Step 2.

Go to On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check.

Go to Step 3.

Go to Step 4.

Go to Diagnostic Aids.

Go to Step 4.

NOTE: Ignition must be OFF for at least 10 seconds continuing. 5. Disconnect the IAC connector. 6. Check resistance between IAC terminals A to B and C to D. Is resistance within specified limits? 3

Check resistance between IAC terminals B and C and A and D. Was resistance infinite?

4

Replace IAC Valve. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

B-2 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Output Test CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor measures the changes in the intake manifold pressure that come from engine load (intake manifold vacuum) and rpm changes. See Figure 33. The MAP sensor converts these changes into a voltage output. The ECM sends a 5-volt reference voltage to the MAP sensor. As the manifold pressure changes, the output voltage of the sensor also changes. By monitoring sensor output voltage, the ECM knows

72

manifold pressure. A lower pressure (low voltage) output voltage will be about 1 to 2 volts at idle while higher pressure (high voltage) output voltage will be about 4 to 4.8 at Wide-Open Throttle (WOT). The MAP sensor is also used, under certain conditions, to measure barometric pressure (BARO), allowing the ECM to make adjustments for altitude changes. The ECM uses the MAP sensor to control fuel delivery and ignition timing.


2200 SRM 1017

B-2 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Output Test

Figure 33. Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Output

TEST DESCRIPTION The numbers below directly correspond to the numbers in Table 33. 2. Using a SCAN Tool, take MAP sensor voltage reading of a known good vehicle. When comparing SCAN readings to a known good vehicle, it is important to compare vehicles that use a MAP sensor having the same number. See Figure 34.

good vehicle in Step 2. When applying vacuum to sensor, change in voltage must be quick. Slow voltage change indicates a bad sensor. 4. Check vacuum source to sensor for leaking or restriction. Be sure that no other vacuum devices are connected to the MAP vacuum source. NOTE: Make sure the electrical connector remains securely fastened. 5. Remove sensor from intake manifold and twist sensor, by hand only, to check for intermittent connection. Output changes greater than 0.10 volt indicate a bad sensor or connection. If bad, replace sensor. Table 32. Altitude Voltage Chart

Figure 34. Map Sensor 3. Apply 34 kPa (10 inHg) vacuum to the MAP sensor to cause voltage readings of 1.5 to 2.1 volts less than voltage reading gathered from known

RANGE (Meters)

ALTITUDE (Feet)

VOLTAGE (Volts)

Below 305

Below 1,000

3.8 to 5.5

305 to 610

1,000 to 2,000

3.6 to 5.3

610 to 914

2,000 to 3,000

3.5 to 5.1

914 to 1219

3,000 to 4,000

3.3 to 5.0

1219 to 1524

4,000 to 5,000

3.2 to 4.8

1524 to 1829

5,000 to 6,000

3.0 to 4.6

1829 to 2133

6,000 to 7,000

2.9 to 4.5

2133 to 2438

7,000 to 8,000

2.8 to 4.3

2438 to 2743

8,000 to 9,000

2.6 to 4.2

2743 to 3048

9,000 to 10,000

2.5 to 4.0

Low Altitude = High Pressure = High Voltage

73


B-2 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Output Test

2200 SRM 1017

Table 33. Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Output Test Step

Action

Value

Yes

No

1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system check performed?

Go to Step 2.

Go to On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check.

2

1. Turn ignition ON, Leaving engine OFF. 2. Install Scan Tool. Scan Tool should indicate a MAP sensor voltage. 3. Compare this reading with the reading of a known good vehicle. Voltage reading should be within +0.4 Volts. (If another vehicle is not available see Table 32).

Go to Step 3.

Go to Step 4.

Go to Step 6.

Go to Step 5.

Is voltage within specified limits? 3

1. Disconnect vacuum source to MAP sensor and plug end of hose. 2. Connect a hand vacuum pump to MAP sensor 3. Note MAP sensor voltage shown on SCAN Tool. 4. Apply 34 kPa (10 inHg) of vacuum and note voltage change. 5. Subtract the two readings. The value should be grater than 1.5 volts. Is voltage greater than 1.5 volts?

74

4

Check vacuum hose for collapsed condition. If collapsed, replace MAP sensor. Is action complete?

Very repair.

5

Check MAP sensor connector. If the connector is damaged, replace MAP sensor. Is action complete?

Verify repair.

6

No trouble found. Check sensor vacuum source for leakage or restriction. This source supplies vacuum to the MAP sensor only. Is action complete?

Verify repair.


2200 SRM 1017

B-3 - Check Governor System

B-3 - Check Governor System GOVERNOR SYSTEM NOT OPERATING CORRECTLY A governor system that does not operate correctly can cause any of the following: • Engine rpm more than limit of governor • Engine power variation (surge) • Engine backfire • Low engine power • No acceleration (low engine rpm)

CHECK FUNCTION OF GOVERNOR SYSTEM Normal testing for governor will include the following (see Figure 35): 1. Start engine, keep transmission in NEUTRAL.

3. Observe engine speed. 4. Did engine accelerate smoothly and to the normal limit? If system appears to function incorrectly, compare RPM readings from a SCAN Tool with readings from a secondary tachometer attached to a spark plug wire. They must be very close or the same. If they are different, check for Electromagnetic Inference (EMI). Inspect for spark plug wires too close to the distributor primary wires or charging system wires. If readings are close or the same, see chart for DTC 31 for more testing. It is possible that the system will not set DTC 31. In this case the DTC 31 chart can be used.

2. Accelerate engine to wide open throttle (WOT).

Figure 35. Chart B-3 Check Governor System

CHECK PCV SYSTEM CAUTION An engine that is operated without any crankcase ventilation can be damaged. Therefore, it is important to replace the PCV valve at intervals shown in the Periodic Maintenance section.

A restriction in PCV valve or hose can cause: • Rough idle, slow idle speed, oil leaks, or oil in the air cleaner. A PCV valve or hose that leaks can cause: • Rough idle, high idle speed, or engine stalls.

75


Fuel System Components Repair

2200 SRM 1017

If engine has a rough idle, check for a restriction in PCV valve or hose. See Figure 36. Replace parts as described in PCV System Repair. With the PCV system, crank case fumes are sent into the air filter and into the engine intake manifold.

1. CHECK VALVE NEEDLE Figure 36. PCV Valve

Fuel System Components Repair GENERAL WARNING

– Governor assembly

FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE

To reduce the risk of fire and personal injury, relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing fuel system components.

1. Disconnect negative battery terminal to avoid fuel leakage if an accidental attempt is made to start engine.

After relieving system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing fuel lines or connections. To reduce the chance of personal injury, cover fuel line fittings with a shop towel before disconnecting to catch any fuel that may leak out. Place towel in an approved container when disconnect is completed.

2. The internal relief in TBI unit relieves fuel pump pressure when engine is OFF. Therefore, no additional pressure relief procedure is required.

NOTE: The following is general information to be used when working on fuel system: • Always use new O-rings on fuel line fittings. • All steel tubing on fuel system must be replaced with original equipment parts. • All fuel hoses must be replaced with original equipment parts. • Do not replace any steel fuel tubing with fuel hose. Do not replace any steel fuel tubing with copper or aluminum tubing. • Some parts of Throttle Body Injector (TBI) can be cleaned in a cleaner such as Hyster Carburetor Cleaner or its equivalent. DO NOT clean the following parts: – Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) – IAC valve – Fuel injectors – Cover for fuel meter body – Ball bearings

76

FUEL PUMP REPLACEMENT WARNING To reduce the risk of fire and personal injury, do not operate the fuel pump outside of the fuel tank. The pump can make sparks and cause an explosion. 1. Disconnect negative cable at battery. 2. Disconnect fuel lines at access plate on fuel tank. Disconnect wiring harness from TBI. 3. Remove capscrews holding access plate to fuel tank. Remove access plate, fuel pump, and sending unit, if attached. See Figure 37. 4. Inspect fittings and fuel lines that are inside fuel tank for damage. Inspect screen for damage. 5. Install fuel pump and fittings on access plate. Install float assembly. 6. Use a new seal ring and install access plate on tank. Tighten capscrews for access plate.


2200 SRM 1017

Fuel System Components Repair

WARNING To reduce the risk of fire and personal injury, relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing fuel system components.

1. SHUTOFF VALVE 2. ELECTRICAL TERMINAL

3. SENDER UNIT 4. PLATE

Figure 37. Fuel Pump Arrangement 7. Connect fuel lines to fittings. Connect wire connectors.

THROTTLE BODY INJECTION UNIT (TBI) Remove NOTE: See Parts Manual for repair kits for components of the Throttle Body Injection (TBI) unit. To make sure the replacement part has the correct part number, verify the actual part. See Figure 38. The TBI is made of many separate components. See Figure 39 and Figure 40. The TBI can be replaced as a complete unit, or parts of the TBI can be replaced while the TBI is installed on engine. Replacement of individual components is described in the following procedures.

After relieving system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing fuel lines or connections. To reduce the chance of personal injury, cover fuel line fittings with a shop towel before disconnecting to catch any fuel that may leak out. Place towel in an approved container when disconnect is completed. 7. Remove fasteners that hold TBI to manifold. Remove TBI. Cover opening in manifold to prevent dirt from entering engine.

Clean and Inspect See the cleaning instructions in the NOTE under General at the beginning of this section. Clean gasket from manifold and TBI. Be careful to prevent damaging machined surfaces and check all machined surfaces for damage. Check manifold for loose parts.

1. Disconnect negative cable at battery. 2. Disconnect and remove parts that connect TBI to air filter. 3. Disconnect wires to IAC valve, TPS, governor motor, and fuel injector. Remove wiring harness grommet for fuel injector. 4. Disconnect throttle cable at throttle crank. 5. Disconnect vacuum hoses. 6. Disconnect fuel pressure and fuel return lines at TBI. Hold fittings in TBI to keep them from turning when fuel lines are disconnected.

1. DAY OF YEAR 2. YEAR 3. ASSEMBLY PLANT CODE

4. SHIFT IDENTIFICATION 5. SOURCE CODE

Figure 38. TBI Identification 3.0L Engine

77


Fuel System Components Repair

1. 2. 3. 4.

FUEL INJECTOR FUEL METER BODY INLET FUEL FITTING FUEL RETURN PORT

2200 SRM 1017

5. 6. 7. 8.

THROTTLE BODY THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR

Figure 39. Throttle Body Injection (TBI) Unit for 3.0 Liter Engine

Install 1. Use a new gasket and install TBI on manifold. Tighten fasteners for TBI to 25 N•m (18 lbf ft). 2. Use new O-rings and washers on fuel lines. Connect fuel pressure and fuel return lines. Tighten fuel line nuts to 27 N•m (20 lbf ft). 3. Connect vacuum hoses. 4. Connect throttle cable at throttle cam. Check adjustment of throttle cables as described in Governor System 3.0L Engine Repair and Governor System 4.3L Engine Repair.

78

5. Install wiring harness grommet for fuel injector. Connect wires to IAC valve, TPS, and fuel injector. 6. Connect negative cable at battery. 7. Turn key switch ON (do not start the engine) and check for fuel leaks. 8. Use a new gasket and connect air filter to TBI.


2200 SRM 1017

Fuel System Components Repair

Figure 40. Assembly View of Throttle Body Injection (TBI) Unit for 4.3 Liter Engine

79


Fuel System Components Repair

2200 SRM 1017 Legend for Figure 40

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

FUEL INJECTOR FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE GOVERNOR MOTOR AND THROTTLE DRIVE ASSEMBLY 6. VACUUM PORTS 9. Set position of pintle valve of IAC as follows: a. Depress throttle pedal a small amount. b. Start and run engine for 3 seconds.

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

INLET FUEL FITTING FUEL RETURN FITTING GASKET (TBI TO MANIFOLD) O-RING GASKET FUEL METER BODY a. For 3.0L engine, remove fasteners that hold TBI to manifold. b. For 4.3L engine, remove fuel meter body and gasket.

c. Turn key switch OFF for 10 seconds. d. Start engine and check for correct idle operation.

FUEL METER BODY Remove 1. Disconnect negative cable at battery. 2. Disconnect and remove parts that connect air filter to TBI. 3. Disconnect electrical connector at fuel injector. Remove grommet and wires from body. See Figure 39 and Figure 40.

WARNING To reduce the risk of fire and personal injury, relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing fuel system components. After relieving system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing fuel lines or connections. To reduce the chance of personal injury, cover fuel line fittings with a shop towel before disconnecting to catch any fuel that may leak out. Place towel in an approved container when disconnect is completed. 4. Disconnect fuel lines at fuel meter body. Hold fittings in fuel meter body to keep them from turning when fuel lines are disconnected. 5. For 4.3L engine, remove fuel line fitting from inlet port in fuel meter body. 6. Remove screws that hold fuel meter body to throttle body.

80

WARNING Cleaning solvents can be flammable and toxic and can cause skin irritation. When using cleaning solvents, always follow the recommendations of the manufacturer. 7. Clean gasket surfaces on fuel meter body and throttle body with cleaning solvent.

Install 1. Use new gasket and install fuel meter body on throttle body. See Figure 39 and Figure 40. 2. Use thread-locking adhesive (Loctite® 262) on screws for fuel meter body. Install screws and tighten them to 4.0 N•m (35 lbf in). 3. Use a new gasket and install TBI on manifold. Tighten fasteners for TBI to 25 N•m (18 lbf ft). 4. Use new gasket and install fuel line fittings. Tighten fittings to 40 N•m (30 lbf ft). 5. Use new O-rings and washers on fuel lines. Connect fuel pressure and fuel return lines. Tighten fuel line fittings to 27 N•m (238 lbf in). 6. Install wiring harness grommet for fuel injectors. Connect wires at fuel injector. 7. Connect negative cable at battery. Turn key switch to START position. (Do not start engine.) Ignition On function will cycle the fuel pump for a few seconds, pressurizing the fuel system. Visually inspect fuel system (fittings, fuel pump, and fuel lines) for leaks. 8. Use new gasket and connect air filter to TBI.


2200 SRM 1017

Fuel System Components Repair

FUEL INJECTOR Remove NOTE: The fuel injector must be replaced as a complete unit. To make sure the replacement part has the correct part number, see Figure 41. 1. Disconnect negative cable at battery. 1. FUEL INJECTOR 2. SCREWDRIVER

3. FULCRUM 4. FUEL METER BODY

Figure 42. Fuel Injector Removal

Install

1. FUEL INJECTOR (TOP VIEW) 2. PART NUMBER 3. MONTH, 1 TO 9 (JAN. TO SEPT.) O, N, D (OCT., NOV., DEC.) 4. DAY 5. YEAR 6. BUILD DATE CODE 7. • = INDICATES HIGH DYNAMIC RANGE

1. Lubricate new O-rings with engine oil. See Figure 43. Install lower (small) O-ring so that it is against fuel filter. Install upper (large) O-ring on fuel injector.

Figure 41. Fuel Injector Identification 2. Disconnect and remove parts that connect air filter to TBI. 3. Disconnect electrical connector at fuel injector. 4. Remove screws and retainer for fuel injector.

WARNING To reduce the risk of fire and personal injury, relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing fuel system components. After relieving system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing fuel lines or connections. To reduce the chance of personal injury, cover fuel line fittings with a shop towel before disconnecting to catch any fuel that may leak out. Place towel in an approved container when disconnect is completed. 5. To remove fuel injector, use a screwdriver as shown in Figure 42. Remove and discard O-rings on fuel injector.

1. 2. 3. 4.

FUEL INJECTOR UPPER O-RING LOWER O-RING FUEL METER BODY

5. SCREW 6. COVER/RETAINER 7. FUEL VAPOR BLOCK

Figure 43. Fuel Injector Installation (4.3L Engine Shown)

81


Fuel System Components Repair 2. Install fuel injector into bore of fuel meter body. Push fuel injector until it is against its seat. Turn fuel injector so that electrical connector is toward notch. 3. Use thread-locking adhesive (Loctite 262) on screws for retainer. Install retainer and screws. Tighten screws to 3.0 N•m (27 lbf in). 4. Connect negative cable at battery. Turn key switch to START position. (Do not start engine.) Ignition On function will cycle the fuel pump for a few seconds, pressurizing the fuel system. Visually inspect fuel system (fittings, fuel pump, and fuel lines) for leaks. 5. Use a new gasket and connect air filter to TBI.

PRESSURE REGULATOR

2200 SRM 1017 After relieving system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing fuel lines or connections. To reduce the chance of personal injury, cover fuel line fittings with a shop towel before disconnecting to catch any fuel that may leak out. Place towel in an approved container when disconnect is completed. 3. Hold pressure regulator to compress spring. Remove screws holding pressure regulator to fuel meter body. Remove pressure regulator assembly. Remove diaphragm.

Inspect Inspect valve seat in fuel meter body for damage. Replace fuel meter body if there is any damage.

Install

Remove 1. Disconnect negative cable at battery. 2. Disconnect and remove parts that connect air filter to TBI. See Figure 44.

1. Install a new diaphragm. See Figure 44. Make sure diaphragm fits in groove of fuel meter body. 2. Install seat for spring and spring in cover, then install cover. Use thread-locking adhesive (Loctite 262) on screws for cover. Install screws and tighten to 2.4 N•m (21 lbf in). 3. Connect negative cable at battery. Turn key switch to START position. (Do not start engine.) Ignition On function will cycle the fuel pump for a few seconds, pressurizing the fuel system. Visually inspect fuel system (fittings, fuel pump, and fuel lines) for leaks. 4. Use a new gasket and connect air filter to TBI.

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS) 1. COVER 2. SCREW 3. SPRING SEAT

4. SPRING 5. DIAPHRAGM 6. FUEL METER BODY

Figure 44. Pressure Regulator

Remove 1. Disconnect and remove parts that connect TBI to air filter. See Figure 45. 2. Disconnect electrical connector from TPS.

WARNING To reduce the risk of fire and personal injury, relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing fuel system components.

82

3. Remove screws for TPS and remove TPS.


2200 SRM 1017

Fuel System Components Repair shape and diameter of pintle is made for this application. See cleaning instructions in NOTE under General at beginning of this section. Use a carburetor cleaner to clean carbon from valve seat for pintle, air passage, and surface for O-ring. Inspect O-ring for damage.

1. 2. 3. 4.

THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR SCREW THROTTLE SHAFT Figure 45. Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)

A. DISTANCE OF PINTLE EXTENSION B. DIAMETER OF PINTLE 1. SCREW 2. IAC VALVE BODY

3. O-RING 4. PINTLE

Install Figure 46. Idle Air Control Valve 1. With throttle valve closed, install TPS on throttle shaft. See Figure 45. Rotate TPS to align screw holes. Use thread-locking adhesive (Loctite 262) on screws. Install screws and tighten to 2.0 N•m (18 lbf in). 2. Connect electrical connector to TPS. Use a new gasket and connect air filter to TBI.

IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE Remove CAUTION If the IAC valve has been in service, DO NOT push or pull on pintle. Moving pintle can damage internal parts of IAC valve. 1. Disconnect and remove parts that connect TBI to air filter. See Figure 46. 2. Disconnect electrical connector from IAC valve.

Install NOTE: When installing a new IAC valve, measure distance between tip of pintle and flange (dimension A in Figure 46). If distance is more than 28 mm (1.1 in.), use your finger to retract pintle slowly. This procedure will not damage a NEW IAC valve. DO NOT do this procedure if IAC valve has been in service. 1. Lubricate O-ring for IAC valve with engine oil and install it on valve. 2. Install IAC valve on throttle body. screws to 3.0 N•m (27 lbf in).

Tighten

3. Connect electrical connector to IAC valve. 4. Use a new gasket and connect air filter to TBI. 5. Do the following procedures to reset position of pintle:

3. Remove screws for IAC valve and valve.

a. Depress throttle pedal a small amount.

Clean and Inspect

b. Start and run engine for 5 seconds.

NOTE: If IAC valve must be replaced, make sure replacement part has correct part number and that the

c. Turn key switch to OFF for 10 seconds. d. Start engine and check for correct idle operation.

83


Governor System 3.0L Engine Repair

2200 SRM 1017

Governor System 3.0L Engine Repair GOVERNOR MODULE, REPLACE NOTE: The governor module is installed on inside of cowl, under plastic panel. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. Remove mounting screws and remove module.

3. Push on throttle pedal and hold it against floor plate. Adjust cable housing at pedal bracket until pulleys in governor actuator are rotated fully clockwise against internal stop (as seen from front of lift truck). Adjust cable housing only enough so cable is not loose. There also must be no tension in cable. When adjustment is correct, tighten both jam nuts at pedal bracket.

3. Inspect electrical connectors and terminals for damage. 4. Install governor module with screws. Connect connector at module. 5. Connect negative battery cable.

GOVERNOR MOTOR, REPLACE 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove cover from governor assembly. 3. Disconnect throttle cables at TBI and throttle pedal. Disconnect cables at governor. 4. Remove governor assembly from bracket. 5. Install governor assembly on bracket. 6. Install and adjust throttle cables as described in Throttle Cables, Install and Adjust. 7. Connect electrical connector at governor. 8. Connect negative battery cable.

THROTTLE CABLES, INSTALL AND ADJUST 1. Connect throttle cables to governor actuator as shown in Figure 47. Only the two pulleys closest to governor motor are used. Install lockwashers and flat washers on cable housings. Slide each cable housing to end of slot. Each cable will align with a groove in a pulley. The pulley closest to governor motor is for cable that goes to TBI unit. Install cable ends into pulley, making sure cables fit in grooves. Check for free operation of cables on pulleys. Tighten nuts on cable housings to 18 to 20 N•m (12 to 15 lbf ft). 2. Connect cable to pedal as shown in Figure 48.

84

1. GOVERNOR MOTOR 2. COVER 3. CABLE TO TBI UNIT

4. ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY 5. CABLE TO ACCELERATOR PEDAL

Figure 47. Throttle Cables 4. Connect cylinder cable anchor on other cable to lever on TBI unit. Install cable housing in bracket that is fastened to TBI adapter. Adjust cable housing at bracket to get full throttle at TBI. Tighten jam nuts at bracket when adjustment is correct. 5. Install cover on governor assembly.


2200 SRM 1017

Governor System 3.0L Engine Repair

6. Adjust pedal return stop (see Figure 48) to ensure there is no tension on throttle cable at idle position. When pedal return stop is in correct position, tighten capscrew that holds stop to bracket.

MONOTROL® PEDAL, CHECK Slowly move MONOTROL® pedal pad from FORWARD to REVERSE and REVERSE to FORWARD. See Figure 48. There must be some movement of pedal pad before pedal frame moves and throttle opens.

1. PEDAL PAD 2. PEDAL FRAME 3. PEDAL RETURN STOP 4. LINK

5. CAPSCREW 6. CRANK 7. GAS ENGINE THROTTLE CONNECTION

Figure 48. MONOTROL Pedal

85


Governor System 4.3L Engine Repair

2200 SRM 1017

Governor System 4.3L Engine Repair GOVERNOR THROTTLE DRIVE ASSEMBLY Remove 1. Disconnect and remove parts connecting TBI to air filter. See Figure 49, Figure 50, and Figure 51. 2. Disconnect electrical connector at drive motor.

1. THROTTLE DRIVE ASSEMBLY 2. SCREW Figure 49. Governor Throttle Drive Assembly

Figure 50. Governor Motor and Throttle Drive Assembly

86


2200 SRM 1017

Governor System 4.3L Engine Repair Legend for Figure 50

1. 2. 3. 4.

THROTTLE DRIVE ASSEMBLY COVER PLATE DC GOVERNOR MOTOR THROTTLE DRIVE CAM THROTTLE DRIVE LEVER

CAUTION The spring for the throttle lever has tension. Hold throttle valves closed; then rotate cam for throttle lever clockwise. Rotate cam until ball joint for throttle cable is in 11-o’clock position. See Figure 51. This procedure will prevent damage to throttle drive assembly.

5. GOVERNOR MOTOR LEVER 6. SHAFT TO THROTTLE PLATES 7. THROTTLE DRIVE ASSEMBLY HOUSING

GOVERNOR DRIVE MOTOR Remove 1. Remove governor motor and throttle drive assembly. See Figure 52.

3. Remove screws that hold throttle drive assembly to throttle body. Remove throttle drive assembly.

Inspect Check for worn or damaged parts.

Install 1. Hold throttle valves closed. Rotate throttle drive cam until ball joint for throttle cable is in 11-o’clock position. See Figure 51. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

THROTTLE DRIVE ASSEMBLY COVER PLATE MOTOR DRIVE LEVER SHOCK ABSORBER SPRING MOTOR DRIVE LEVER

Figure 52. Governor Drive Motor Arrangement

CAUTION

1. THROTTLE VALVES 2. CAM Figure 51. Align Governor Throttle Drive 2. Put throttle drive assembly in position. Use a thread locking adhesive (Loctite® 262) on screws and install screws for throttle drive assembly. Tighten them to 4.5 N•m (40 lbf in). Check that cam for throttle valves and throttle valves rotate freely. 3. Connect electrical connector at drive motor.

The spring for the throttle lever has tension. Hold throttle valves closed; then rotate cam for throttle lever clockwise. Rotate cam until ball joint for throttle cable is in 11-o’clock position. See Figure 51. This procedure will prevent damage to throttle drive assembly. 2. Disconnect spring from motor lever so that motor lever will be free when drive motor is removed. See Figure 52. 3. Remove four screws that hold drive motor to cover plate. Remove screw under throttle lever cam last. Move throttle lever cam clockwise from drive motor to prevent release of spring tension. See Figure 53.

4. Use a new gasket and connect air filter to TBI.

87


Governor System 4.3L Engine Repair

2200 SRM 1017 4. Remove drive motor. 5. Remove shock absorber(s) only if damaged. See Figure 55.

Clean and Lubricate Some parts of the governor throttle drive need to be lubricated with a special grease (Mobil No. 28 or equivalent). Clean and lubricate these parts only if new parts are used or there is no grease on parts. Lubricate parts as shown in Figure 54.

1. THROTTLE LEVER CAM 2. SCREW

3. DRIVE MOTOR

Figure 53. Governor Throttle Drive Assembly

1. 2. 3. 4.

LEVER AND BEARING ASSEMBLY THROTTLE-TO-MOTOR LINK SHOCK ABSORBER THROTTLE DRIVE LEVER

5. COVER PLATE 6. LUBRICATION POINTS 7. THROTTLE DRIVE CAM

Figure 54. Lubricate Governor

Install 1. If replaced, install shock absorber parts as shown in Figure 55. 2. Align motor lever with cover plate. See Figure 52. Put straight end of spring in detent area in cover plate. Put motor drive lever against shock absorber.

88

3. Wind spring for motor drive lever to engage motor drive lever as shown in Figure 52. 4. Rotate cam until ball joint for throttle cable is in 11 o’clock position. See Figure 51 and Figure 53. 5. Use a thread locking adhesive (Loctite® 262) on screws and install screws for governor drive motor. Tighten screws to 3.2 N•m (28 lbf in).


2200 SRM 1017

Ignition System Components Repair

1. SUPPORT PIN 2. SHOCK ABSORBER 3. COVER PLATE

4. RETAINER RING (HERE ONLY) 5. LEVER AND BEARING ASSEMBLY

Figure 55. Shock Absorber

Inspect Check that motor drive lever rotates freely. See Figure 52. Make sure spring returns drive lever to position against shock absorber.

MONOTROL® PEDAL, CHECK NOTE: The MONOTROL pedal check information contained below applies only to S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004) lift truck models. Slowly move MONOTROL pedal pad from FORWARD to REVERSE and REVERSE to FORWARD. See Figure 56. There must be some movement of pedal pad before pedal frame moves and throttle opens.

1. PEDAL PAD 2. PEDAL FRAME 3. PEDAL RETURN STOP 4. LINK 5. CAPSCREW

6. CRANK 7. GAS ENGINE THROTTLE CONNECTION 8. SWITCH CONNECTOR

Figure 56. MONOTROL Pedal S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) Model Units

Ignition System Components Repair ECM REPLACEMENT 1. Disconnect negative battery cable.

NOTE: To prevent Electrostatic Discharge damage to ECM, DO NOT TOUCH connector pins of ECM.

2. Disconnect connectors from ECM.

4. Install ECM in position and install capscrews. Connect connectors to ECM.

3. Remove capscrews that hold ECM to mounting plate on frame.

5. Connect negative battery cable.

89


Ignition System Components Repair

2200 SRM 1017

FUNCTION CHECK 1. Turn ignition key ON. 2. Connect SCAN Tool to Diagnostic Connector and check for DTC 12. Check that no other DTCs are present. This indicates that ECM functions correctly. Let DTC 12 flash four times in a row to check that no other DTCs are present. This indicates that ECM functions correctly.

DISTRIBUTOR Remove CAUTION Carefully lift and release lock tabs on connectors to distributor. Lock tabs can be easily broken if too much force is applied with screwdriver or other tool. Never permit TACH CONN. terminal to touch ground. Ignition module or ignition coil can be damaged. 1. Disconnect battery negative (ground) cable. 2. If removal of spark plug wires are not required for repairs, leave them connected to distributor cap. Remove two capscrews that fasten distributor cap to distributor. Move distributor cap away from work area. 3. Disconnect distributor four-terminal connector. 4. Disconnect ignition coil connector. 5. Remove bolt and clamp that hold distributor in engine. Make a note of positions of rotor to distributor housing and distributor to engine. Slowly pull distributor from engine until rotor just stops turning counterclockwise and make a note of position of rotor. This position must be used when distributor is installed again.

Disassemble 1. Remove rotor. See Figure 57. Make a match mark on gear and shaft so they can be assembled in the same position.

90

1. CAP 2. ROTOR 3. SHAFT/TIMER CORE 4. RETAINER 5. PIN 6. DRIVE GEAR

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

SEAL HOUSING MODULE ALIGNMENT PIN POLE PIECE COIL

Figure 57. Distributor (3.0L Shown) 2. Use a punch to remove roll pin from shaft. 3. Remove gear. 4. Remove shaft with timer core from housing. 5. Remove retainer from housing. driver as a prybar.

Use a screw-

6. Disconnect sensing coil from ignition module.


2200 SRM 1017

CAUTION Carefully lift and release lock tab on connector to sensing coil. Lock tab can be easily broken if too much force is applied with screwdriver or other tool.

Ignition System Components Repair If engine has been rotated after distributor was removed, the following procedure must be used before distributor is installed again: a. Remove No. 1 spark plug.

7. Use a screwdriver to lift lock tab. Remove sensing coil.

b. Put a finger over No. 1 spark plug hole and slowly rotate engine until pressure is felt on compression stroke.

8. Remove two screws that hold ignition module in housing. Remove ignition module.

c. Align timing mark on crankshaft pulley to 0 (TDC) on engine timing indicator.

Inspect

d. Turn distributor rotor to point near position on distributor cap for No. 1 spark plug lead.

Inspect shaft for a loose fit between shaft and its bushing in housing. If bushing or shaft is worn so that shaft moves from side to side in bushing, replace shaft or housing. Inspect housing for cracks or damage.

Assemble NOTE: Hyster Part No. 304408 is a silicon bearing grease used between electronic components and their heat sinks. A small container of silicon grease is enclosed in package with a new ignition module. 1. Apply silicon grease to bottom of ignition module. See Figure 57. Install ignition module into housing and tighten two screws.

e. Install distributor in engine. Rotor and shaft will rotate a few degrees when gear on distributor shaft engages drive gear on engine cam. Timing is correct if rotor points at position on distributor cap for No. 1 spark plug lead. 2. Install clamp and bolt. Tighten bolt with your hand. 3. Install distributor four-terminal connector. 4. Install ignition coil connector. 5. Install distributor cap and two capscrews. If spark plug wires were removed, install them in correct sequence.

2. Install sensing coil. Tab on bottom of sensing coil fits into anchor hole in housing.

6. Connect battery negative cable.

3. Connect sensing coil to ignition module. Make sure lock tab on connector is fastened.

7. Start engine and check engine timing. See Distributor, Ignition Timing below for more information on Ignition Timing.

4. Install retainer. 5. Install shaft assembly into housing. 6. Install seal on housing. Install gear on end of shaft. 7. Align marks on gear and shaft. Install roll pin. Turn shaft assembly and make sure teeth of timer core on shaft assembly do not touch pole piece.

8. Tighten bolt for distributor clamp to 43 N•m (25 lbf ft).

Firing Order The firing order for the GM 3.0L engine is 1-3-4-2. The firing order for the GM 4.3L engine is 1-6-5-4-3-2. See Figure 58.

8. Install rotor on shaft.

Install 1. Put rotor and distributor in same position as it was removed from engine.

Figure 58. Firing Order for GM 4.3L V-6

91


Ignition Module Repair

2200 SRM 1017

Ignition Timing 1. Start and run engine until it is at normal operating temperature. Turn key switch OFF. 2. Connect SCAN Tool to Diagnostic Connector connector. 3. Connect a timing light to No. 1 spark plug wire.

WARNING Do not touch moving parts (fan, belt, shafts, pulleys).

4. Start engine and check initial timing. Set SCAN Tool to Field Service Mode. Correct setting for initial timing set point is 8 BTDC on 3.0L engine and 0 BTDC on 4.3L engine. 5. If timing is not correct, loosen clamp that holds distributor housing. Rotate housing right or left to get correct timing. Tighten clamp when timing is correct. 6. Disconnect timing light. Disconnect SCAN Tool. Put cover on Diagnostic Connector.

Ignition Module Repair TEST FOR FAULT NOTE: The ignition module can be checked in the distributor. A test light and three jumper wires are needed to perform the tests. The battery in the vehicle must be fully charged so that starter rotates engine at normal speed. 1. Disconnect four-terminal connector from distributor. See Figure 59. Use two jumper wires between distributor and four-terminal connector to connect the following circuits: REFERENCE Circuit 435 GROUND Circuit 650 2. Connect test light to a 12-volt positive source. Start engine. Touch probe of test light to pin B in four-terminal connector on distributor. When 12 volts are applied through test light to pin B (BYPASS), ignition module changes to EST mode.

EST connection (pin D) is open and engine will normally stop. This step checks BYPASS operation of ignition module. 3. Use a jumper to connect pin D (EST) to pin C (REFERENCE) at distributor. Apply 12 volts through test light to pin B (BYPASS) as described in Step 2. Start engine. If engine starts, this step checks that EST circuit in ignition module is good. 4. Remove test light from pin B (BYPASS) while engine is running. If engine stops, this check shows that ignition module internally changes EST circuit to ground. Since there is a jumper wire between pin D (EST) to pin C (REFERENCE), the REFERENCE signal is also sent to ground and engine stops.

Figure 59. Ignition Module Test

92


2200 SRM 1017 5. If any tests described in Step 2, Step 3, or Step 4 do not work as indicated, check wiring harness for a short circuit or an open circuit. If wiring harness is good, replace ignition module.

Ignition Module Repair open circuits that are not constant. Ohmmeter will correctly indicate 500 to 1500 ohms. If indication is not constant or is not within resistance range, replace sensing coil.

6. When tests are complete, connect system for normal operation.

REPLACE 1. Remove distributor cap and rotor. See Figure 57. 2. Remove 2 screws that hold ignition module in distributor. 3. Lift ignition module and disconnect connections. Make a note of connections so that they can be correctly connected again. Remove ignition module from distributor. NOTE: Do not remove silicon grease from ignition module or distributor if same ignition module will be installed again. If a new ignition module is installed, a small container of silicon grease is in package. Clean old silicon grease and apply a new layer of silicon grease to both ignition module and distributor housing. This silicon grease is necessary for cooling ignition module. 4. Connect connectors in distributor to ignition module. Make sure connectors are the same as when they were removed. 5. Install ignition module in distributor. 6. Install two screws that fasten ignition module in distributor.

1. SENSING COIL CONNECTIONS

2. OHMMETER 3. IGNITION MODULE

Figure 60. Test the Sensing Coil

Replace

7. Install distributor cap and rotor.

SENSING COIL

Remove and disassemble distributor as described in repairs for Distributor.

Test

IGNITION COIL

NOTE: Also see A-7 Ignition System Troubleshooting.

Test

This test checks the resistance of the sensing coil for the ignition module. The distributor can stay on the engine for this test.

NOTE: Also, see A-7 Ignition System Troubleshooting.

Do the following procedure to check the sensing coil: • Connect an ohmmeter to either sensing coil connection and housing as shown in Step 1 of Figure 60. If reading is not infinity (∞), replace sensing coil. • Connect an ohmmeter to both connectors of sensing coil as shown in Step 2 of Figure 60. Move connectors at sensing coil and at connector to find any

This procedure tests for open circuits and short circuits in ignition coil. Ignition coil can stay on engine for this test. 1. Disconnect distributor wire and control wires from ignition coil.

93


Sensors Repair

2200 SRM 1017

2. Connect an ohmmeter as shown in Step 1 of Figure 61. Use high scale. Correct indication is infinity (∞). If a short circuit is indicated, replace ignition coil.

Remove 1. Turn key switch to OFF. Apply parking brake. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Put tags for identification on connectors and disconnect them from coil.

CAUTION Do not damage high-voltage wires (spark plug wires) during removal. Hold wire by boot near end of wire. Rotate boot before pulling it and connection from terminal. 4. Remove high voltage wire. 5. Remove nuts (or capscrews) that fasten bracket for ignition coil to engine. 6. Remove ignition coil and bracket assembly from engine. 7. Use a drill and punch to remove two rivets that fasten bracket to coil. A. CLEAN METAL FOR GOOD GROUND CONNECTION

Install

Figure 61. Test Ignition Coil

1. Install original bracket on replacement coil using screws (supplied with replacement coil).

3. Connect an ohmmeter as shown in Step 2 of Figure 61. Use low scale. Indication will be very low or approximately zero. If indication is not low, replace ignition coil.

2. Install ignition coil assembly on engine with nuts (or capscrews).

4. Connect an ohmmeter as shown in Step 3 of Figure 61. Use high scale. Reading must not be infinity (∞). If reading is infinity, replace ignition coil.

4. Connect negative (ground) battery cable.

3. Install control wire connectors and high voltage wire on ignition coil.

5. Connect distributor lead and wiring to ignition coil.

Sensors Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR, REPLACE WARNING The coolant can be very hot. Use caution to prevent personal injury. 1. Disconnect battery negative cable. Disconnect connector at ECT sensor. See Figure 62.

94

2. Use a wrench and carefully loosen ECT from coolant manifold. 3. Use a liquid sealant on threads and install ECT in its hole in coolant manifold. Tighten ECT carefully to 30 N•m (22 lbf ft). 4. Connect connector at ECT. Connect battery negative cable. 5. Fill radiator with coolant as required.


2200 SRM 1017

Wiring

MAP SENSOR, REPLACE 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. Disconnect electrical connector. 2. Remove mounting screws and disconnect vacuum hose. 3. Inspect electrical connectors and terminals for damage. 4. Install sensor on bracket.

1. TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR 3. LOCK TAB Figure 62. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECT)

5. Connect electrical connector. Connect vacuum hose from MAP sensor to fitting at TBI unit.

PCV System Repair REPLACE 1. Remove PCV valve from rocker arm cover. See Figure 63. 2. Run engine at idle speed. 3. Put your thumb over end of PCV valve to check for vacuum. If there is no vacuum at PCV valve, check for restrictions in hoses, manifold port, or PCV valve. Replace damaged parts. 4. Turn OFF engine and remove valve. Shake valve and listen for movement of needle inside valve. If needle does not move, replace valve. Connect hose between PCV valve and fitting on intake manifold.

1. PCV VALVE 2. GROMMET

3. VALVE COVER

Figure 63. PCV System

Wiring NOTE: The most common fault that occurs in an electronic engine control system is caused by a bad connection in the wiring. Work carefully and make sure that connectors are not damaged during troubleshooting.

The signal wires in the electronic control system have a low voltage and low current. All wire splices must be high quality so that a fault is not made in the circuit by the wire splice. Use solder on the wire splices when possible.

The ECM wiring harness electrically connects the ECM to solenoids, switches, and sensors in the engine compartment. A wiring harness must be replaced with a wire harness that has the same part number. If a repair (wire splice) must be made to a wiring harness, replacement wire must have a hightemperature insulation.

Some connectors are made as a one-piece unit. A damaged one-piece connector must be replaced with a wire splice into the wiring harness. Some connectors can be replaced, or a terminal within the connectors can be replaced. These connectors are described in Connectors and Terminals.

95


Wiring

2200 SRM 1017

CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS Be careful when using a probe to check voltages on terminals in a connector. It is easy to cause a short circuit between two terminals with opposite voltages. Electronic components can be easily damaged by a short circuit. Always use a fused jumper between connectors when checking circuits. Never damage insulation or a seal on a connector when making a check or doing troubleshooting. The Connector Test Adapter Kit has a variation of adapters and connectors that can be used when troubleshooting a circuit. When troubleshooting, open circuits are often difficult to see because of dirt, corrosion, or a terminal that is not in alignment in its socket. When troubleshooting for an open circuit, always check for loose connections and a terminal that can have corrosion. A fault that is neither regular nor constant can also be caused by a loose connection or a terminal that has corrosion. If a connector must be repaired, be sure to replace it with the correct connector type. Some of the smaller connectors can look similar but have a different construction. Micro-PackÂŽ 100W Connector is shown in Figure 64. This connector is normally used to connect the wire harness to the ECM.

1. PICK 2. LOCK TAB

3. TERMINAL 4. CONNECTOR BODY

Figure 65. Metri-Pack Push-to-Seat Connector NOTE: Not all Metri-Pack connectors have a seal. Do the following procedures to remove and install a terminal: 1. Open any secondary locks that hold wires and seals in their positions. Slide seals along wires from ends of connector. 2. Hold wire and use it to push terminal to its forward position in connector body. Hold terminal in this position. 3. Find lock tab for terminal in connector channel. Push a removal tool (pick) of correct size into connector channel. See Figure 64 and Figure 66.

Figure 64. Micro-Pack 100W Connector Metri-PackÂŽ Connectors, shown in Figure 65, come in several sizes and types that are used on the wire harness. These connectors are made by Packard Electric Company. The typical connectors used on lift trucks are No. 150, No. 280, No. 480, and No. 630. Some of these connectors are push-to-seat and others are pull-to-seat. Make sure connector is correctly identified before it is changed. Terminals can be damaged if they are removed or installed wrong.

1. PICK 2. LOCK TAB 3. TERMINAL

4. CONNECTOR BODY

Figure 66. Metri-Pack Pull-to-Seat Connector

96


2200 SRM 1017 4. Use removal tool to move lock tab and release terminal from its seat.

Wiring 5. Inspect terminal and connector for damage. Make repairs as necessary. See Figure 68.

Push-To-Seat - Gently pull wire to remove terminal from back of connector. See Figure 66. Pull-To-Seat - Gently push wire to remove terminal through front of connector. See Figure 67.

NOTE: THE GREATER THE DISTANCE D, A FAULT CAN OCCUR IN THE CONNECTION. A. D = 0

B. D = GREATER THAN 0

1. CONTACT TAB

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

FEMALE TERMINAL LOCK TAB HYSTER TOOL KIT HYS1004 CONNECTOR BODY SEAL

Figure 67. Metri-Pack Series 150 Pull-to-Seat Terminal Removal

CAUTION Work carefully and do not use enough force to damage terminal or connector.

Figure 68. Metri-Pack Series Terminal Inspection 6. If terminal will be used again, make sure lock tab is correctly bent so that terminal will be locked in connector again. 7. Push terminal into connector channel. Make sure that lock tab correctly locks terminal in position. 8. Push seals into their position and install any secondary locks.

97


Wiring

2200 SRM 1017

Weather-PackÂŽ Connectors all have a rubber seal at rear end of connector. All Weather-Pack Connectors have a round barrel shape around the terminal. This connector is used in the engine compartment to protect against moisture and dirt, which can cause corrosion and a fault in the voltage signal. These connectors normally have the low voltage and current used by the electronic control system. The repair of this type of connector is shown in Figure 69 and Table 34. Use a remover tool (from Hyster Tool Kit HYS1004 or equivalent) to remove pin and sleeve terminals. These terminals can easily be damaged during removal if correct tool is not used. Terminal must then be replaced. When making repairs on these connectors, make sure that terminals are all in their seats correctly and sealing rings are installed. These connectors must be correctly installed and in good condition so that electronic engine control operates correctly.

Table 34. Weather-Pack Terminal Repair 1. Open secondary lock hinge on connector.

1. FEMALE CONNECTOR 2. MALE CONNECTOR 3. SECONDARY LOCK HINGE 2. Remove terminal using tool.

A. PUSH TO RELEASE 1. TERMINAL 2. TOOL 3. Cut wire behind cable seal.

1. SEAL 2. WIRE 4. Replace terminal. a. Put new seal on wire. A. PUSH-TO-SEAT TERMINAL, MALE

b. Remove 5 mm (0.2 in.) of insulation from wire.

1. TERMINAL 2. LOCK TAB 3. WIRE

c. Install terminal over wire and seal.

4. SEAL 5. REMOVAL TOOL 6. CONNECTOR BODY

Figure 69. Weather-Pack Terminal and Connector 1. SEAL 5. Push terminal and connector until they are engaged. 6. Close secondary lock hinge.

98


2200 SRM 1017

Wiring

PROCEDURES FOR SPARK PLUGS, SPARK PLUG WIRES, AND BOOTS NOTE: Use a silicon grease on inside of spark plug boots to make a better weather seal and make spark plug boot easier to remove. The following silicon greases are approved for use: • General Electric®

GE627

• Packard®

PM776

• Wacker® Silicones

G47

NOTE: The condition of spark plugs removed from engine can show engine operating problems. See Spark Plugs Troubleshooting. 1. Do not damage spark plug wires during removal. Hold wire by boot near end of wire. Rotate boot a half-turn before pulling it and connection from spark plug. Do not use pliers or other tools that can damage boot. Do not pull wires to disconnect spark plug wires. Pull boot, or use a tool made for this purpose.

2. Do NOT put a hole in boot or insulation of spark plug wire. Do NOT try to insert a wire between boot and connector of spark plug wire. 3. Make sure spark plug wires are installed in same locations using original clips. Spark plug wires can be damaged or cause poor engine operation if they are not correctly installed. 4. Special care must be used when spark plug boots are installed. Make sure that metal terminal within boot is fully connected to spark plug terminal. Make sure that boot has not moved on wire. If there is boot-to-wire movement, boot can appear to be installed fully when it is not. 5. Make sure to install insulator in shield at boot of all spark plug wires.

WIRING DIAGRAM The wiring diagram for the electronic control module is shown in Figure 70. The wiring diagram is followed by tables of pinouts for the ECM connectors J1 and J2. See Table 35 and Table 36.

Figure 70. Wiring Connections (Sheet 1 of 2)

99


Wiring

2200 SRM 1017

Figure 70. Wiring Connections (Sheet 2 of 2) Table 35. ECM Connector J1 Identification Pin No.

Ckt No.

1 2

To Pin

Not Used 358

Diagnostic Test Terminal

3

Not Used

4

Not Used

5

Not Used

6

100

Function

651

Fuel Pump Relay Control

7

Not Used

8

Not Used

9

Not Used

F


2200 SRM 1017

Wiring

Table 35. ECM Connector J1 Identification (Continued) Pin No.

Ckt No.

10 11

To Pin

Not Used 423

12 13

Function

Fuel Injector 2 Driver Not Used

642

14

ECM Ground Not Used

15

424

Idle Air Control (IAC) Coil "B" Low

A

16

427

Idle Air Control (IAC) Coil "A" High

D

17

Not Used

18

Not Used

19

Not Used

20

Not Used

21

Not Used

22

Not Used

23

431

Governor

24

Not Used

25

Not Used

26

422

Fuel Injector 1 Driver

27

420

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

28

643

ECM Ground

29

642

ECM Ground

30

425

Idle Air Control (IAC) Coil "B" High

B

31

426

Idle Air Control (IAC) Coil "A" Low

C

32

440

Fuel Pressure Relay Sense

E

101


Wiring

2200 SRM 1017 Table 36. ECM Connector J2 Identification

Pin No.

Ckt No.

Function

1

358

Battery Feed

2

428

5 Volt Reference

3

649

Sensor Ground

4

Not Used

5

Not Used

6

Not Used

7

430

Engine Coolant Temperature

8

429

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)

9 10

Not Used 439

Serial Data

11

Not Used

12

Not Used

13

Not Used

14

Not Used

15

437

Bypass

B

16

435

Reference High

C

17

Not Used

18

650

Reference Low

19

112

Ignition Feed

20

Not Used

21

Not Used

22

Not Used

23

102

To Pin

433

Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)

24

Not Used

25

Not Used

26

Not Used

27

Not Used

28

Not Used

29

Not Used

A

C


2200 SRM 1017

Spark Plugs Troubleshooting

Table 36. ECM Connector J2 Identification (Continued) Pin No.

Ckt No.

Function

30

To Pin

Not Used

31

436

Electronic Spark Timing

32

D

Not Used

Spark Plugs Troubleshooting PROBLEM

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Brown to gray or tan deposits and some electrode wear.

Normal wear.

Clean the spark plugs, set the electrode clearance, and install.

Dry, black carbon deposits.

Poor ignition output.

Check distributor to coil connections.

Wet, oily deposits with minimum electrode wear.

Break-in of new or recently overhauled engine.

Clean and install spark plugs.

Clearances too large between valve stem and valve guide.

See Engine section for your engine.

Worn seals on inlet valves.

Replace seals.

Red, brown, yellow, and white colored coatings on insulator. Engine operation is not constant during difficult operating conditions.

Byproducts of combustion.

Clean spark plugs, set electrode clearance, and install.

Heavy deposits on part of plug that go into chamber and on side facing intake valve.

Valve seals have leaks if condition is found in only one or two cylinders.

Check seals. Replace if necessary. Clean, set electrode clearance, and install spark plugs.

103


Special Tools

PROBLEM

2200 SRM 1017

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Yellow glaze coating on insulator of spark plug.

Melted by-products of combustion.

Avoid sudden acceleration with full throttle after long periods of low-speed driving. Replace spark plugs.

Insulator tips are burned or electrodes worn.

Overheating.

Check cooling system. Lean air-fuel mixture. Check heat range of spark plugs for too hot. Check ignition timing. Check torque value of spark plugs to make sure they are correctly installed.

Spark plugs have broken or cracked insulator tips.

Heat shock from sudden rise in tip temperature under severe operating conditions. Electrode clearance not correct.

Replace spark plugs. Set electrode clearance to correct value.

Special Tools SCAN Tool Reads problem codes from the ECM memory. Used to analyze and Troubleshoot components and the ECM operation of the electronic engine control system. SCAN Tool will also record data stream information when the engine is operating. This procedure will record information that is not regular nor constant or that only occurs during some conditions. Available from: Rinda Technologies Inc. 4563 North Elston Ave. Chicago, IL 60630 Spark Tester Used to check secondary ignition voltage. Also called an ST125.

104


2200 SRM 1017

Special Tools

OTC Part No. 3320

Tester for Idle Air Control and Idle Speed Control The TBI units do not have external adjustments for idle speed nor idle air control. This tester is required to set the idle air control and the idle speed control electronically.

OTC Part No. 3053

Signal Test Lights for Idle Air Control and Idle Speed Control Signal test lights that can be used with the Tester for Idle Air Control and Idle Speed Control Part No. 3320. Vacuum Pump, Hand Operated Use gauge to check engine manifold vacuum and to test vacuum sensors, valves, and solenoids.

Digital Multimeter Voltmeter - A minimum impedance of 10 Megohms is required so that the electronic circuit being measured is accurate. Ammeter - Can be used to measure current flow in electronic circuits. Ohmmeter - Some Ommeters will automatically change ranges. Other Ohmmeters have range switches. Many of the multimeters available will also operate as a tachometer, a distributor dwell, and a diode tester.

Tachometer Use a tachometer with an inductive trigger sensor to check the engine speed.

105


Special Tools

2200 SRM 1017

Test Light (Without Internal Battery) Used to check for open circuits, short circuits, and signal voltages in a circuit.

Adjustment Wrench for Minimum Idle Speed Used to adjust the throttle stop screw on the TBI unit.

Injector Harness Test Light A specially designed light used to visually indicate injector electrical pulses from the ECM.

106



FRAME S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]

PART NO. 1510458

100 SRM 981


Frame

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS Description ......................................................................................................................................................... Counterweight Repair ....................................................................................................................................... Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Exhaust System Repair ..................................................................................................................................... Muffler............................................................................................................................................................ Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Exhaust Pipe - LPG/Gas Engine................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Exhaust Pipe - Diesel Engine ....................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Hood Repair........................................................................................................................................................ Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Overhead Guard Repair .................................................................................................................................... Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Install ............................................................................................................................................................. LED Backup and Brake Lights, Replace...................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Operator Restraint System Repair ................................................................................................................... Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ............................................................................................................. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................................................................................................ Radiator and Coolant System ........................................................................................................................... Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Alternator Replacement .................................................................................................................................... Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Engine Removal and Installation ..................................................................................................................... Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Fuel and Hydraulic Tanks Repair..................................................................................................................... Inspect ............................................................................................................................................................ Repairs, Small Leaks..................................................................................................................................... Repairs, Large Leaks..................................................................................................................................... Clean .............................................................................................................................................................. Steam Method of Cleaning........................................................................................................................ Chemical Solution Method of Cleaning.................................................................................................... Other Methods of Preparation for Repair ................................................................................................ Safety Labels ......................................................................................................................................................

1 2 2 7 9 9 9 9 10 10 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 17 17 18 18 18 20 20 20 20 20 24 26 26 26 26 26 26 27 27 29

This section is for the following models: S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]

Š2007 HYSTER COMPANY

i


100 SRM 981

Description

Description The frame is one weldment and includes the hydraulic tank and fuel tank for gasoline or diesel fuel. Liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) tanks are mounted behind the seat on top of the counterweight. There is a counterweight for each capacity of lift truck. The counterweights are similar, but are different weights. The muffler is fastened to the frame inside of the counterweight.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

OVERHEAD GUARD COUNTERWEIGHT STEER AXLE DRIVE AXLE FRAME

An overhead guard is fastened to the cowl at the front of the lift truck and to a frame plate at the rear of the lift truck. The hood is connected to the frame plate with hinges. A gas-controlled spring gives assistance when raising the hood and holds the hood in the open position. The floor plates can be removed for access to the transmission and other components. See Figure 1.

6. 7. 8. 9.

FLOOR PLATE HOOD MAST CARRIAGE

Figure 1. Frame and Connected Parts

1


Counterweight Repair

100 SRM 981

Counterweight Repair REMOVE WARNING The lift truck must be put on blocks for some types of maintenance and repair. The removal of the following assemblies will cause large changes in the center of gravity: mast, drive axle, engine and transmission, and the counterweight. When the lift truck is put on blocks, put additional blocks in the following positions to maintain stability: • Before removing the mast and drive axle, put blocks under the counterweight so the lift truck cannot fall backward. • Before removing the counterweight, put blocks under the mast assembly so the lift truck cannot fall forward. The surface must be solid, even, and level when the lift truck is put on blocks. Make sure that any blocks used to support the lift truck are solid, one-piece units. See the Operating Manual or the Periodic Maintenance section for your lift truck.

WARNING Do not operate the lift truck if the capscrew for the counterweight is not installed. When the capscrew is removed, the counterweight can fall from the lift truck. The counterweight is held in position on the frame by two hooks that are part of the frame. One large mounting capscrew holds the counterweight to the lower part of the frame. See Figure 2. If lift truck is equipped with an LPG fuel system, the LPG tank and tank mounting bracket must be removed before removing the counterweight.

WARNING LPG can cause an explosion. Do not cause sparks or permit flammable material near the LPG system. LPG fuel systems can be disconnected indoors only if the lift truck is at least 8 m (26 ft) from any open flame, motor vehicles, electrical source, or ignition source. NOTE: The LPG tank can be mounted on either a fixed mounting bracket or an EZ lift mounting

2

bracket. If the tank is mounted on an EZ lift mounting bracket, follow Step 1 through Step 4 and Step 6 through Step 10. If a fixed mounting bracket is used, complete Step 1 through Step 3 and Step 5 through Step 10. If lift truck is equipped with either a diesel or gas fuel system, start at Step 6. 1. Move lift truck to an area where tanks are changed. 2. Close fuel shutoff valve on LPG tank, by turning valve clockwise. See Figure 3. Before any part of the LPG fuel system is disconnected, run engine until fuel in the system is used and engine stops. Turn key switch to OFF position.

WARNING LPG is very cold in the atmosphere. Always wear gloves to protect your hands from the cold fittings. Do not permit LPG to contact the skin. 3. If engine will not run, close fuel shutoff valve on LPG tank. Loosen fitting on supply hose from LPG tank where it enters filter unit. Permit pressure in the fuel system to decrease slowly. Use a cloth or gloves to protect your hands from cold fitting. 4. Perform this step to remove LPG tank with an EZ lift mounting bracket from counterweight.

WARNING LPG is very cold in the atmosphere. Always wear gloves to protect your hands from the cold fittings. Do not permit LPG to contact the skin. a. Disconnect quick-disconnect fitting. b. Grab tank handle on mounting bracket and swing tank out to left side of truck. See Figure 4. c. Tilt mounting bracket to position tank vertically. d. Release tank strap and lift tank from mounting bracket. e. Remove capscrew, located behind seat, from counterweight. Remove fastener block. See Figure 3.


100 SRM 981

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Counterweight Repair

LIFTING EYES LIFTING CHAIN COUNTERWEIGHT WASHER LOCKWASHER MOUNTING CAPSCREW

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

FRAME HOOKS (COUNTERWEIGHT MOUNTS) SHIM TOW PIN RADIATOR COVER ATTACHMENT HOLES RADIATOR COVER HANDLES RADIATOR COVER

Figure 2. Counterweight Removal and Installation

3


Counterweight Repair

Figure 3. Remove EZ Lift Mounting Bracket From Lift Truck

4

100 SRM 981


100 SRM 981

Counterweight Repair Legend for Figure 3

NOTE: SOME LPG TANKS HAVE A PLUG INSTEAD OF AN AUXILIARY FILL FITTING FOR ITEM (12). A. FRONT VIEW

B. SIDE VIEW

C. TOP VIEW

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

CAPSCREW CAPSCREW HOSE CLAMP CAPSCREW BRACKET ASSEMBLY

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

11. 12. 13. 14.

1. 2. 3. 4.

TANK HANDLE QUICK-DISCONNECT FITTING ALIGNMENT PIN TANK STRAP

FASTENER BLOCK COUNTERWEIGHT SHUTOFF VALVE QUICK-DISCONNECT FITTING ALIGNMENT PIN

FUEL GAUGE AUXILIARY FILL FITTING LIQUID LEVEL INDICATOR TANK RELIEF VALVE

5. LPG TANK 6. EZ LIFT MOUNTING BRACKET 7. LPG FUEL LINE

Figure 4. Remove LPG Tank From EZ Lift Mounting Bracket f.

Remove capscrews from top of mounting bracket.

g. Remove hose clamps. h. Remove mounting bracket assembly. 5. Perform this step if LPG tank is mounted on counterweight with a fixed mounting bracket.

WARNING LPG is very cold in the atmosphere. Always wear gloves to protect your hands from the cold fittings. Do not permit LPG to contact the skin.

a. Disconnect quick-disconnect fitting. See Figure 5. b. Release tank strap and remove tank from bracket. c. Remove capscrew, located behind seat, from counterweight. Remove fastener block. See Figure 5. d. Remove capscrews from top of mounting bracket. e. Remove hose clamps. f.

Remove mounting bracket assembly.

5


Counterweight Repair

Figure 5. Remove Fixed Mounting Bracket From Lift Truck

6

100 SRM 981


100 SRM 981

Counterweight Repair Legend for Figure 5

NOTE: SOME LPG TANKS HAVE A PLUG INSTEAD OF AN AUXILIARY FILL FITTING FOR ITEM (14). A. FRONT VIEW B. SIDE VIEW

C. TOP VIEW

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

CAPSCREW CAPSCREW HOSE CLAMP CAPSCREW BRACKET ASSEMBLY FASTENER BLOCK COUNTERWEIGHT LPG HOSE

QUICK-DISCONNECT FITTING TANK STRAP SHUTOFF VALVE ALIGNMENT PIN FUEL GAUGE AUXILIARY FILL FITTING LIQUID LEVEL INDICATOR TANK RELIEF VALVE

6. Remove radiator cover assembly from counterweight by pulling two pins up and cover toward seat using handles. See Figure 2.

10. Remove capscrew, washer, and lockwasher that holds counterweight to frame. Use crane to lift counterweight from lift truck.

7. Remove cover between counterweight and hood. Remove tow pin.

INSTALL

8. If installed, remove overhead exhaust pipe from overhead guard and counterweight.

WARNING Make sure that the lifting device used has the correct capacity for the counterweight being removed. See Table 1. 9. Install two eyebolts into counterweight lifting holes. Connect a crane to lifting eyes and raise crane until it supports part of the weight of the counterweight.

CAUTION When lifting the counterweight from the lift truck, be careful not to bend the exhaust pipe.

WARNING Make sure the lifting device used has the correct capacity for the counterweight being installed. See Table 1. 1. When the counterweight is installed, make sure hooks on frame fully engage counterweight so it is aligned with the parts of the frame. Install lockwasher, washer, and mounting capscrew and tighten to 1022 N•m (755 lbf ft). Remove eyebolts from counterweight lifting holes. 2. Install tow pin in counterweight. 3. Install radiator cover assembly over radiator by lifting each pin up and aligning each hole on cover to holes on frame. Release each pin so they go through both holes and hold cover in place.

Table 1. Weight of Counterweights Lift Truck Model

Weight (kg)

Weight (lbs)

S3.50XM (S70XM)

1,822 to 1,878

4,017 to 4,140

S4.00XM (S80XM)

2,156 to 2,222

4,753 to 4,899

S4.50XM (S100XM)

2,352 to 2,421

5,185 to 5,338

S5.50XM (S120XM)

2,955 to 3,041

6,515 to 6,705

S4.00XM (S80XM) BCS

2,065 to 2,135

4,553 to 4,707

S4.50XM (S100XM) BCS

3,225 to 3,325

7,110 to 7,330

S5.50XM (S120XM) BCS

3,035 to 3,135

6,691 to 6,911

7


Counterweight Repair NOTE: If lift truck is equipped with an EZ lift mounting bracket for the LPG tank, follow Step 4. If a fixed mounting bracket is used, perform Step 5. If a diesel or gas fuel system is used, proceed to Step 6. 4. For lift trucks equipped with an EZ lift mounting bracket, do the following to install the mounting bracket and LPG tank: a. Install fastener block into horizontal hole in counterweight. Make sure tab on fastener block is on top.

100 SRM 981 h. Make sure mounting bracket is in a vertical position on left side of truck. See Figure 4. Place tank into mounting bracket. Make sure alignment pin is in the hole in the bracket. Secure tank to mounting bracket by fastening tank strap. Move tank and bracket into horizontal position and swing tank into place behind seat. i.

b. Place mounting bracket on top of counterweight. align mounting holes in bracket with holes in counterweight. c. Coat capscrew threads with Loctite® 271 and insert capscrews into mounting bracket hole. Do not tighten capscrews at this time.

WARNING The fuel valve on the tank must be closed when the truck is not being used. j.

d. Adjust angle of mounting bracket relative to counterweight by adjusting capscrew. Tighten both capscrews to 85 to 95 N•m (63 to 70 lbf ft). See Figure 3. e. Install hose clamps. f.

Coat capscrew thread with Loctite® 271 and insert into same horizontal hole in counterweight as the fastener block. Tighten to 85 to 95 N•m (63 to 70 lbf ft).

WARNING Do not use any LPG tank that is damaged. Damaged tanks must be removed from service.

WARNING The tank must be installed in the correct position or the relief valve will not operate correctly. If the tank is not installed in the correct position, vapor instead of liquid fuel can go out the fuel valve. Also, liquid fuel can flow from the relief valve on the tank. The relief valve can close because of the freezing caused by the change of the liquid to vapor. g. Before the tank is installed on the lift truck, check operation of fuel gauge. Look at fuel gauge and move tank. The needle of the gauge must move when the fuel moves. If the needle does not move, a new tank must be installed. See Figure 3.

8

Connect quick-disconnect fitting to fuel valve on tank. Do not open fuel valve until quickdisconnect fitting is securely connected. To open fuel valve, slowly turn it counterclockwise.

Inspect fuel system for leaks when fuel Make sure liquid level valve is open. See the section LPG valve is closed. Fuel System 900 SRM 348, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004), or Electronic Controlled LPG/Gasoline Fuel System, GM 3.0L and 4.3L EPA Compliant Engines 900 SRM 1088 S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (F004) for detailed procedures on how to inspect the LPG fuel system for leaks.

5. For lift trucks equipped with a fixed mounting bracket, do the following to install the mounting bracket and LPG tank: a. Install fastener block into horizontal hole in counterweight. Make sure tab on fastener block is on top. b. Place mounting bracket on top of counterweight. align mounting holes in bracket with holes in counterweight. c. Coat capscrew threads with Loctite® 271 and insert capscrew in mounting bracket hole. Do not tighten capscrews at this time. d. Adjust angle of mounting bracket relative to counterweight by adjusting capscrew. Tighten both capscrews to 85 to 95 N•m (63 to 70 lbf ft). See Figure 5. e. Install hose clamps.


100 SRM 981 f.

Exhaust System Repair

Coat capscrew thread with Loctite® 271 and insert into same horizontal hole in counterweight as the fastener block. Tighten to 85 to 95 N•m (63 to 70 lbf ft).

bracket. Secure tank to mounting bracket by fastening tank strap. Move tank and bracket into horizontal position and swing tank into place behind seat. i.

WARNING

Connect the quick-disconnect fitting to fuel valve on tank. Do not open fuel valve until the quick-disconnect fitting is securely connected. To open fuel valve, slowly turn it counterclockwise.

Do not use any LPG tank that is damaged. Damaged tanks must be removed from service.

WARNING The tank must be installed in the correct position or the relief valve will not operate correctly. If the tank is not installed in the correct position, vapor instead of liquid fuel can go out the fuel valve. Also, liquid fuel can flow from the relief valve on the tank. The relief valve can close because of the freezing caused by the change of the liquid to vapor.

WARNING The fuel valve on the tank must be closed when the truck is not being used. j.

g. Before the tank is installed on the lift truck, check operation of fuel gauge. Look at fuel gauge and move tank. The needle of the gauge must move when the fuel moves. If the needle does not move, a new tank must be installed. See Figure 5. h. Make sure mounting bracket is in a vertical position on left side of truck. See Figure 4. Place tank into mounting bracket. Make sure alignment pin is in the hole in the

Inspect fuel system for leaks when fuel Make sure liquid level valve is open. See the section LPG valve is closed. Fuel System 900 SRM 348, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004) or Electronic Controlled LPG/Gasoline Fuel System, GM 3.0L and 4.3L EPA Compliant Engines 900 SRM 1088 S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (F004) for detailed procedures on how to inspect the LPG fuel system for leaks.

6. Install overhead exhaust pipe to overhead guard. Tighten capscrews to 38 N•m (28 lbf ft). See Figure 6, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004) or Figure 7, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (F004).

Exhaust System Repair MUFFLER Remove The muffler is underneath the counterweight, between the counterweight and radiator. A short exhaust pipe sends exhaust gases out of the lift truck through the counterweight. The lift truck may also have an overhead exhaust system. The overhead exhaust pipe is fastened to the right rear leg of the overhead guard. 1. If lift truck is equipped with an overhead exhaust pipe, remove it from overhead guard. 2. If lift truck uses LPG, remove LPG tank. See Counterweight Repair in this section. 3. Remove counterweight. See Counterweight Repair in this section.

4. Disconnect lower exhaust pipe from muffler. If lift truck has a counterweight exhaust, remove counterweight exhaust pipe. If lift truck has an overhead exhaust, remove upper exhaust pipe. See Figure 6, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004) or Figure 7, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (F004). 5. Remove muffler from mounting bracket.

Install 1. Install muffler on mounting bracket. Tighten bolts until all clearance has been removed, then tighten another one to two additional turns. 2. If lift truck has a counterweight exhaust, install counterweight exhaust pipe to muffler. If lift truck is equipped with an overhead exhaust, connect upper exhaust pipe to muffler. Install lower exhaust pipe to muffler.

9


Exhaust System Repair

100 SRM 981

3. Install counterweight on lift truck. See Counterweight Repair in this section.

1. Remove overhead exhaust pipe from overhead guard.

4. Install overhead exhaust pipe to overhead guard and to the upper exhaust pipe through opening in counterweight. Tighten capscrews to 38 N•m (28 lbf ft). See Figure 6, S3.50-5.50XM (S70120XM) (E004) or Figure 7, S3.50-5.50XM (S70120XM) (F004).

2. Remove counterweight. See Counterweight Repair in this section.

EXHAUST PIPE - LPG/GAS ENGINE

5. Disconnect lower exhaust pipe from intermediate lower exhaust pipe. Disconnect intermediate lower exhaust pipe from left and right engine exhaust pipes.

Remove NOTE: If the lift truck does not have an overhead exhaust perform Step 2, and Step 4 through Step 7. If the lift truck has an overhead exhaust, perform Step 1 through Step 3 and Step 5 through Step 7. See Figure 6, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004) or Figure 7, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (F004).

3. Remove upper exhaust pipe from muffler. 4. Disconnect counterweight exhaust pipe from muffler.

6. Remove metal heat shield from lower exhaust pipe. 7. Remove left and right engine exhaust pipes from engine exhaust manifolds.

Legend for Figure 6 A. ENGINE EXHAUST CONNECTION FOR LPG/GAS ENGINES. B. ENGINE EXHAUST CONNECTION FOR DIESEL ENGINES. COUNTERWEIGHT AND OVERHEAD EXHAUST CONNECTIONS ARE THE SAME AS LPG/GAS ENGINE TRUCKS. C. OVERHEAD EXHAUST ASSEMBLY. D. COUNTERWEIGHT EXHAUST ASSEMBLY. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

10

MUFFLER MOUNTING BRACKET MOUNTING CAPSCREW WASHER BUSHING - STEP CLAMP LOWER EXHAUST PIPE INTERMEDIATE LOWER EXHAUST PIPE LEFT ENGINE EXHAUST PIPE RIGHT ENGINE EXHAUST PIPE ENGINE MANIFOLDS NUT SPRING EXHAUST FLANGE

15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27.

EXHAUST SEAL UPPER EXHAUST PIPE HEAT SHIELD (WITH SNAPS) OVERHEAD EXHAUST PIPE OVERHEAD EXHAUST PIPE MOUNTING BRACKETS NUT GROMMET WASHER CAPSCREW DIESEL ENGINE EXHAUST PIPE MOUNTING BRACKET HEAT SHIELD COUNTERWEIGHT EXHAUST PIPE


100 SRM 981

Exhaust System Repair

Figure 6. Exhaust System - All Fuel Types S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004)

11


Exhaust System Repair

100 SRM 981

Figure 7. Exhaust System - All Fuel Types S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (F004)

12


100 SRM 981

Exhaust System Repair Legend for Figure 7

A. ENGINE EXHAUST CONNECTION FOR LPG/GAS ENGINES. B. ENGINE EXHAUST CONNECTION FOR DIESEL ENGINES. COUNTERWEIGHT AND OVERHEAD EXHAUST CONNECTIONS ARE THE SAME AS LPG/GAS ENGINE TRUCKS. C. OVERHEAD EXHAUST ASSEMBLY. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

MUFFLER COUNTERWEIGHT EXHAUST PIPE CLAMP CAPSCREW LOCKWASHER WASHER NUT WASHER CUSHION PLATE GASKET OXYGEN SENSOR PORT LEFT ENGINE EXHAUST PIPE RAW GAS CHECK PORT LEFT MANIFOLD EXHAUST PIPE BOLT

17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30.

SPRING SEAL RIGHT MANIFOLD EXHAUST PIPE RIGHT ENGINE EXHAUST PIPE CROSSOVER EXHAUST PIPE GROMMET OVERHEAD EXHAUST PIPE MOUNTING BRACKETS OVERHEAD EXHAUST PIPE HEAT SHIELD (WITH SNAPS) UPPER EXHAUST PIPE MOUNTING BRACKET LOWER EXHAUST PIPE DIESEL ENGINE EXHAUST PIPE ENGINE MANIFOLD

Install

EXHAUST PIPE - DIESEL ENGINE

NOTE: If the lift truck does not have an overhead exhaust perform Step 1 through Step 4, and Step 6. If the lift truck has an overhead exhaust, perform Step 1 through Step 3 and Step 5 through Step 7. See Figure 6, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004) or Figure 7, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (F004).

Remove

1. Install left and right engine exhaust pipes on engine exhaust manifolds. DO NOT compress springs to a solid height. Tighten nuts to 30 to 35 N•m (22 to 25 lbf ft). 2. Install metal heat shield on lower exhaust pipe. 3. Connect intermediate lower exhaust pipe to lower exhaust pipe. Connect lower exhaust pipe to left and right engine exhaust pipes. Connect lower exhaust pipe to the muffler. 4. Connect counterweight exhaust pipe to muffler. 5. Connect upper exhaust pipe to muffler. 6. Install counterweight. See Counterweight Repair. 7. Install overhead exhaust pipe to overhead guard and upper exhaust pipe through opening in counterweight. Tighten capscrews to 38 N•m (28 lbf ft).

NOTE: If the lift truck does not have an overhead exhaust perform Step 2, and Step 4 through Step 7. If lift truck has an overhead exhaust, perform Step 1 through Step 3 and Step 5 through Step 7. See Figure 6, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004) or Figure 7, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (F004). 1. Remove overhead exhaust pipe from overhead guard. 2. Remove counterweight. See Counterweight Repair in this section. 3. Remove upper exhaust pipe from muffler. 4. Remove counterweight exhaust pipe from muffler. 5. Remove lower exhaust pipe from diesel engine exhaust pipe. 6. Remove heat shield from lower exhaust pipe 7. Remove diesel engine exhaust pipe from engine manifold.

13


Hood Repair

100 SRM 981

Install

3. Connect lower exhaust pipe to muffler.

NOTE: If the lift truck does not have an overhead exhaust perform Step 1 through Step 4 and Step 6. If the lift truck has an overhead exhaust, perform Step 1 through Step 3 and Step 5 through Step 7. See Figure 6, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004) or Figure 7, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (F004).

4. Connect counterweight exhaust pipe to muffler.

1. Install diesel engine exhaust pipe on engine exhaust manifold. 2. Connect lower exhaust pipe to engine exhaust pipe.

5. Connect upper exhaust pipe to muffler. 6. Install counterweight. See Counterweight Repair for the procedures to install the counterweight. 7. Install overhead exhaust pipe to overhead guard and to upper exhaust pipe through opening in counterweight. Tighten capscrews to 38 N•m (28 lbf ft).

Hood Repair REMOVE 1. Raise hood and disconnect two gas springs at hood. Disconnect park brake alert wiring harness. See Figure 8. 2. Remove cotter pins and pins holding hood hinges to crossmember. Remove hood.

INSTALL 1. Install hood in position on lift truck. Install pins and cotter pins that hold hood hinges to crossmember. See Figure 8. 2. Connect gas springs to hood. Connect park brake alert wiring harness.

WARNING The hood, hood latch, and hood striker must be correctly adjusted for the correct operation of the operator restraint system.

14

3. Adjust hood latch as follows: a. Center latch striker in slot, located in rear crossmember. Check latch striker to ensure it is in the center of the jaws of hood latch and tighten. b. Loosen capscrews for hood latch just enough to let latch move. Position latch and tighten capscrews for latch. c. Check operation of hood latch. Have an operator sit in seat. Make sure hood is fully closed (two clicks). Also check that hood touches rubber bumpers. If necessary, repeat Step b.


100 SRM 981

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Overhead Guard Repair

SEAT BELT LATCH HIP RESTRAINT SEAT WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT LEVER SEAT RAIL LATCH

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

LATCH STRIKER HOOD GAS SPRING SUPPORT BRACKETS HOOD HANDLE COTTER PIN

Figure 8. Check Hood and Seat Latches

Overhead Guard Repair REMOVE WARNING Do not operate the lift truck without the overhead guard correctly fastened to the lift truck. Do not make changes to the overhead guard by welding. Changes that are made by welding or by drilling holes that are too big in the wrong location, can reduce the strength of the overhead guard. See the instructions for Changes to the Overhead Guard in the Periodic Maintenance section for this lift truck.

2. Remove capscrews, located at the front and rear, that hold overhead guard to frame. 3. Lift overhead guard from lift truck frame.

INSTALL 1. Connect lifting device to top of overhead guard. Put overhead guard in position on lift truck. 2. Install capscrews at rear of overhead guard. Tighten capscrews to 90 N•m (67 lbf ft). Install capscrews and nuts that secure overhead guard to cowl. Tighten capscrews to 90 N•m (66 lbf ft).

1. Connect lifting device to top of overhead guard.

15


Operator Restraint System Repair

100 SRM 981

LED BACKUP AND BRAKE LIGHTS, REPLACE NOTE: Newer models of lift trucks are equipped with LED (Light Emitting Diode) backup and brake tail lights. These light assemblies are non-repairable and must be replaced as a complete unit. See the Parts Manual for replacement LED lights.

Remove 1. Disconnect negative terminal of battery and remove the key. 2. Disconnect the LED light from the chassis light harness. 3. Remove LED light assembly and harness from mounting bracket. See Figure 9. 4. If the LED mounting bracket must be removed from the overhead guard leg, remove the plug, screw and bracket from the overhead guard leg.

Install 1. If the mounting bracket was removed, install it onto the overhead guard leg. Insert the plug and screw to attach mounting bracket to overhead guard leg. See Figure 9. 2. Install the LED light assembly and harness on the mounting bracket. 3. Connect the LED light to the chassis light harness. 4. Connect the negative terminal of battery and close the hood.

A. LED ASSEMBLY WITH STANDARD EXHAUST B. LED ASSEMBLY WITH OVERHEAD EXHAUST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

LED LIGHT SCREW WASHER LOCK NUT MOUNTING BRACKET GROMMET PLUG SCREW OVERHEAD GUARD LEG Figure 9. LED Backup and Brake Lights Assembly

Operator Restraint System Repair WARNING The lift truck must be put on blocks for some types of maintenance and repair. The removal of the following assemblies will cause large changes in the center of gravity: mast, drive axle, engine and transmission, and counterweight. When the lift truck is put on blocks, put additional blocks in the following positions to maintain stability: a. Before removing the mast and drive axle, put blocks under the counterweight so the lift truck cannot fall backward.

16

b. Before removing the counterweight, put blocks under the mast assembly so the lift truck cannot fall forward. The surface must be solid, even, and level when the lift truck is put on blocks. Make sure that any blocks used to support the lift truck are solid, one-piece units. The seat belt, hip restraint brackets, seat and mounting, hood, and latches are all part of the operator restraint system. Each item must be checked to make


100 SRM 981

Operator Restraint System Repair

sure it is attached securely, functions correctly, and is in good condition. See Figure 8.

AUTOMATIC LOCKING RETRACTOR (ALR) NOTE: Lift trucks produced before November 2005 are equipped with the ALR type seat belts. The seat belt must fasten securely. Make sure the seat belt extends and retracts smoothly and is not frayed or torn. If the seat belt is damaged or does not operate properly, it must be replaced. See Figure 10.

EMERGENCY LOCKING RETRACTOR (ELR)

When the ELR style seat belt is properly buckled across the operator, the belt will permit slight operator repositioning without activating the locking mechanism. If the truck tips, travels off a dock, or comes to a sudden stop, the locking mechanism will be activated and hold the operator’s lower torso in the seat. A seat belt that is damaged worn or does not operate properly will not give protection when it is needed. The end of the belt must fasten correctly in the latch. The seat belt must be in good condition. Replace the seat belt if damage or wear is seen. See Figure 10.

NOTE: Lift trucks produced after November 2005 are equipped with the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) style seat belt.

NOTE: SWIVEL SEAT IS AN OPTIONAL FEATURE A. AUTOMATIC LOCKING RETRACTOR

B. EMERGENCY LOCKING RETRACTOR

1. FORWARD/BACKWARD ADJUSTMENT 2. SWIVEL ADJUSTMENT 3. OPERATOR WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT

4. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTMENT (SEAT RAIL) 5. SEAT BELT

Figure 10. Operator Restraint System (Swivel Seat Shown)

17


Radiator and Coolant System The following seat belt operation checks must be performed: • With the hood closed and in the locked position, pull the seat belt slowly from the retractor assembly. Make sure the seat belt pulls out and retracts smoothly. if the seat belt cannot be pulled from the retractor assembly or the belt will not retract, replace the seat belt assembly. • With the hood closed and in the locked position, pull the seat belt with a sudden jerk. Make sure the seat belt will not pull from the retractor assembly. If the seat belt can be pulled from the retractor, when it is pulled with a sudden jerk, replace the seat belt assembly. • With the hood in the open position, make sure the seat belt will not pull from the retractor assembly.

100 SRM 981 If the seat belt can be pulled from the retractor, with the hood in the open position, replace the seat belt assembly. Make sure the seat rails and latch striker are not loose. The seat rails must lock securely in position but move freely when unlocked. The seat rails must be securely attached to the mounting surface. The hood must be fully closed. Lift the hood to make sure it is closed and will not move. Adjust hood, hood latch, and latch striker when any of the parts of the operator restraint system are installed or replaced. See the section Hood Repair in this manual for the adjustment procedures for the hood.

Radiator and Coolant System REMOVE 1. Remove radiator cover between hood and counterweight. See Counterweight Repair.

CAUTION Disposal of lubricants and fluids must meet local environmental regulations. 2. Drain coolant from radiator. NOTE: To aid in the draining of coolant from the radiator, remove radiator cap. See Figure 11. 3. Disconnect upper and lower coolant hoses from radiator. 4. Disconnect lines to oil cooler at bottom of radiator. Also, disconnect these lines at transmission housing. Put caps on open lines and ports. Remove two capscrews that still hold radiator. Remove radiator. 5. On GM-powered lift trucks, remove clamp and hose from bottom of radiator. 6. Disconnect coolant recovery reservoir hose from radiator. 7. Remove coolant recovery reservoir from overhead guard leg. 8. Remove radiator from fan shroud by removing four capscrews (13) that join them together. Lift fan shroud from frame.

18

9. If lift truck is equipped with a screen, remove screen from radiator. 10. Remove radiator from radiator frame by removing 4 capscrews (14) that hold it in place.

INSTALL NOTE: Radiator will rest on pins in frame for assembly. 1. Install radiator in its frame and install top two capscrews (14). Tighten capscrews to 10.8 N•m (96 lbf in). 2. Connect hydraulic hoses for transmission oil to oil cooler in radiator. Also, connect these lines at ports in transmission housing. 3. Connect upper and lower coolant hoses to radiator. 4. On GM-powered lift trucks, install clamp and hose to bottom of radiator. 5. Install coolant recovery reservoir to lift truck and connect coolant recovery reservoir hose to radiator. 6. Install fan shroud to radiator and frame by inserting and tightening four capscrews (13). 7. If a screen was removed, install screen onto truck. Tighten capscrew to 10.8 N•m (96 lbf in).


100 SRM 981

Radiator and Coolant System

Figure 11. Radiator and Cooling System

19


Engine Removal and Installation

100 SRM 981 Legend for Figure 11

A. B. C. D.

RADIATOR WITH OPTIONAL SCREEN (DIESEL SHOWN) DIESEL ENGINE RADIATOR AND COOLANT SYSTEM LPG/GAS ENGINE RADIATOR AND COOLANT SYSTEM (NON EPA COMPLIANT ENGINES) LPG/GAS ENGINE RADIATOR AND COOLANT SYSTEM (EPA COMPLIANT ENGINES)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

RADIATOR CAP RADIATOR CLAMP SCREEN (OPTIONAL) FAN SHROUD OIL COOLER CONNECTION PLUGS DRAIN AND SHUT OFF VALVE COOLANT RECOVERY RESERVOIR COOLANT RECOVERY RESERVOIR HOSE

8. Add coolant to system until entire cooling system is full.

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

UPPER COOLANT HOSE LOWER COOLANT HOSE COOLANT RESERVOIR SHIELD CAPSCREW CAPSCREW SHRINK BAND RADIATOR FRAME HOSE CLAMP

9. Install radiator cover between hood and counterweight. See Counterweight Repair.

Alternator Replacement REMOVE NOTE: The alternator on S3.50-5.50XM (S70120XM) lift trucks is a nonrepairable part. Disconnect battery ground cable. Install labels and disconnect wires at alternator. Loosen alternator mount capscrews and remove drive belt. Remove capscrews that hold alternator to engine.

2. Connect all wires and connector according to labels made during removal. Make sure all wires are connected correctly and all fasteners are tight. 3. Check indicator light or ammeter to check operation of alternator. The indicator light will only be ON if the battery is discharged.

INSTALL 1. Install alternator in bracket on engine and adjust belt tension.

Engine Removal and Installation REMOVE NOTE: The engine can be removed with or without the transmission. To remove only the engine, perform Step 1 through Step 8. To remove the engine and transmission, perform Step 1 through Step 7 and Step 9. 1. Put lift truck on blocks. See the Operating Manual or the section Periodic Maintenance 8000 SRM 987 for correct procedures to put lift truck on blocks. Remove overhead guard and hood, hood side covers, and hood cross-bar. Remove floor plates. Remove radiator cover between hood and counterweight.

20

2. Disconnect cables at battery. Remove battery and battery tray. 3. Remove hood support brackets, radiator, fan, and fan shroud. See Radiator and Cooling System. Disconnect exhaust pipe at exhaust manifolds. See Figure 6, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004) or Figure 7, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (F004). Remove air filter housing from frame. 4. Disconnect fuel lines, wires, and wiring harnesses. 5. Disconnect throttle linkage at engine. See Figure 12.


100 SRM 981

Engine Removal and Installation

A. GAS ENGINE B. LPG ENGINE

C. DIESEL ENGINE

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

LPG LINKAGE CABLE GAS LINKAGE CABLE DIESEL LINKAGE CABLE THROTTLE MOUNTING BALL STUD PIN CABLE BRACKET (DIESEL)

NUT CABLE ADJUSTMENT LOCK NUTS CARBURETOR FUEL INJECTOR PUMP CABLE BRACKET (LPG) CABLE BRACKET (GAS)

Figure 12. Throttle Linkage at Engine

21


Engine Removal and Installation

100 SRM 981 crane is holding the weight of engine and transmission. Remove bolts that hold engine mounts to frame of lift truck.

6. Disconnect hydraulic tubes and hose from hydraulic control valve. Disconnect hydraulic tank breather hose from tank. 7. Remove control valve mounting bracket with valve, levers, and breather. 8. Perform the following steps to remove the engine and not the transmission. See Figure 13. a. Remove plug in torque converter housing. Remove capscrews holding drive plate for torque converter to flywheel. b. Connect lifting device to engine. Make sure lifting device has a capacity of at least 450 kg (1000 lb). Put blocks under transmission to hold it in position. c. Remove bolts that hold engine mounts to frame of lift truck. Use lifting device to hold weight of engine. d. Remove capscrews that hold transmission to flywheel housing. Put capscrews in holes with threads in housing to push transmission from flywheel housing. e. Raise engine from frame. Be careful of the hydraulic pump and brake booster. Make sure all wires and hoses are disconnected. 9. Perform the following steps to remove the engine and transmission. a. Remove accelerator or MONOTROLÂŽ pedal assembly. Disconnect brake and inching linkage, brake line, brake reservoir wires, and vacuum hose, and remove brake booster and master cylinder assembly. See Figure 14 and Figure 15. b. Disconnect inching linkage at transmission. Disconnect oil cooler hoses, transmission control valve wires, and temperature sender wire. c. Drain oil from axle housing. Remove capscrews that hold axle shafts to hubs. Remove axle shafts. d. Connect crane and slings to engine and transmission. Make sure crane has a capacity of at least 1000 kg (2200 lb). Make sure

22

1. CAPSCREWS - MOUNTING BRACKETS TO ENGINE 2. CAPSCREWS - MOUNTING BRACKETS TO MOUNTING PLATE 3. CAPSCREWS - MOUNTING PLATE TO FRAME 4. MOUNTING PLATE Figure 13. Engine Mounting Brackets e. Remove mounting bolts connecting transmission to drive axle. f.

Remove clamp for parking brake cable at bottom of transmission. Remove mast. See the section Masts, Description and Repairs 4000 SRM 736 for procedures to remove the mast. There are two holes with threads in drive axle housing. Use capscrews in these holes to separate housings.

g. Carefully lift engine and transmission from frame. Put engine in a position so it has stability and will not fall over. h. Remove transmission from engine as described in section Single-Speed Powershift Transmission, Troubleshooting and Repair 1300 SRM 397.


100 SRM 981

Engine Removal and Installation

A. SINGLE INCHING/BRAKE PEDAL

B. INCHING/BRAKE PEDALS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

11. 12. 13. 14.

INCHING/BRAKE PEDAL PAD PEDAL WELDMENT MASTER CYLINDER AND BOOSTER ASSEMBLY INCHING SPRING CRANK WELDMENT BOOSTER VACUUM HOSE BRAKE FLUID SWITCH BRACKET TRUCK FRAME INCHING LINK

15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

INCHING SWITCH ROD END PIN BRAKE SPRING BOOSTER/MASTER CYLINDER MOUNTING HARDWARE BRAKE PEDAL INCHING PEDAL BRAKE PEDAL PAD BRAKE FLUID LINES INCHING PEDAL PAD

Figure 14. Inching/Brake Pedal Assembly

23


Engine Removal and Installation

100 SRM 981

A. THROTTLE PEDAL

B. SINGLE (MONOTROL) THROTTLE PEDAL

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

PEDAL PAD THROTTLE PEDAL THROTTLE BRACKET STOP SCREW CRANK WELDMENT FORMED ROD

PEDAL STOP BRACKET AND BUMPER SPRING (MONOTROL) PEDAL PAD (MONOTROL) PEDAL CAPSCREW CAPSCREW

Figure 15. Throttle Pedal Assembly

INSTALL 1. Install engine mounts on engine. See Figure 13. a. GM V-6 engine: • Insert capscrews that hold engine mount brackets to engine and tighten to 38 N•m (28 lbf ft). b. Perkins diesel engine: • Apply adhesive sealant to threads of capscrews that hold engine mount brackets to engine. Tighten capscrews to 66 N•m (49 lbf ft). 2. Once engine mounts are secured, perform the following procedures to install engine onto frame: a. Connect lifting device to engine. Make sure device has lifting capacity of 450 kg (1000 lb).

24

CAUTION Make sure tabs on torque converter hub are aligned with notches in oil pump. If parts are not engaged correctly, the oil pump or torque converter will be damaged. b. Apply a sealant (Hyster Part No. 264159) to flange of flywheel housing. Ensure that torque converter is installed correctly and engaged with the oil pump. c. Install engine in lift truck. Carefully align engine with transmission, making sure the pilot on torque converter engages with flywheel. Also check that hydraulic pump drive gear bearing is aligned with torque converter housing. Tighten capscrews that hold engine mounting brackets to mounting plate to 66 N•m (49 lbf ft). Insert capscrews (3) that hold mounting plate to frame. Tighten to 121 N•m (89 lbf ft).


100 SRM 981

Engine Removal and Installation axle housing. Install capscrews that hold axle housing to transmission and tighten capscrews to 65 N•m (50 lbf in). Install bolts for engine mounts and tighten to 66 N•m (49 lbf ft).

d. On trucks with LPG/gas engines, install capscrews that hold engine mount to flywheel housing. Torque capscrews to 165 N•m (122 lbf ft). e. Install capscrews that hold torque converter housing to flywheel housing. Tighten capscrews to 40 N•m (30 lbf ft). f.

Install capscrews that hold drive plate for the torque converter to flywheel. Tighten capscrews to 45 N•m (33 lbf ft). Install plug in torque converter housing.

g. Install radiator, fan, and fan shroud. Connect radiator hoses to radiator. Make sure that all hoses are kept away from the lower fan pulley. See Radiator and Cooling System. h. Connect wiring harness and wires to engine. Connect throttle linkage and fuel lines at engine. Install and connect pipes for exhaust system. See Figure 6, S3.50-5.50XM (S70120XM) (E004) or Figure 7, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (F004). i.

Connect hydraulic lines for hydraulic pump. Install hydraulic control valve bracket and valve, connect tubes and hose to valve, and connect breather hose to hydraulic tank.

d. Install radiator, fan, and fan shroud. Connect radiator hoses and oil lines at radiator. Make sure all hoses are kept away from lower fan pulley. See Radiator and Cooling System. NOTE: See the section Single-Speed Powershift Transmission, Troubleshooting and Repair 1300 SRM 397 for procedures on connecting and adjusting linkages for the transmission, MONOTROL, or accelerator pedal and brake pedal. e. Install brake booster and master cylinder assembly. Connect vacuum hose to booster. Connect brake line to master cylinder. Connect wires to brake switch on master cylinder. Connect oil lines to main control valve and transmission control valve. See Figure 14. f.

Install inching linkage at transmission. Install brake linkage to booster assembly. Install accelerator to MONOTROL pedal.

Install battery tray and batteries. Install air filter assembly.

g. Connect wiring harness and wires at the engine and transmission. Connect throttle linkage and fuel lines at the engine. Install and connect pipes for exhaust system.

k. Check all fluid levels and fill as necessary. Install floor plates and covers. Install hood, hood crossmember, side covers, and overhead guard. Connect cables at the battery.

h. Connect hydraulic lines for hydraulic pump. Install hydraulic control valve bracket with valve. Connect tubes on hose to control valve. Connect breather hose to hydraulic tank.

j.

3. To install engine and transmission, perform the following procedures:

i.

Install battery tray and batteries. Install air filter assembly.

a. Install transmission on engine as described in section Single-Speed Powershift Transmission, Troubleshooting and Repair 1300 SRM 397.

j.

Check all fluid levels and fill as necessary. Remove air from brake system. Install floor plates and covers. Install hood and overhead guard. Install mast. See the section Masts, Description and Repairs 4000 SRM 736 for procedures on installing the mast. Connect cables at battery.

b. Connect a crane to engine and transmission. Clean flanges on transmission and axle housings. Apply a sealant (Hyster Part No. 264159) to flange of transmission housing. c. Install engine and transmission onto lift truck. Carefully align transmission with

25


Fuel and Hydraulic Tanks Repair

100 SRM 981

Fuel and Hydraulic Tanks Repair INSPECT Make a visual inspection of all sides of the tank. Inspect welds for cracks and leakage. Check for wet areas, accumulation of dirt, and loose or missing paint caused by leakage. Areas of tank that are not easily seen can be checked with an inspection mirror and a light that is approved for locations with flammable vapors.

REPAIRS, SMALL LEAKS Use the following procedure to repair small leaks: 1. Use steam to clean area around leak. Remove all paint and dirt around the leak.

WARNING Do not use tools that can make sparks, heat, or static electricity. Vapors in tank can cause an explosion. 2. Apply Loctite 290® to leak. Follow instructions of manufacturer.

REPAIRS, LARGE LEAKS 1. Use one of the procedures described under the Clean section, to clean and prepare the tank for repairs.

WARNING Forklift frames and components may be painted with a catalyzed paint such as polyurethane or a two-part primer. Welding, burning, or other heat sufficient to cause thermal decomposition of the paint may release isocyanates. These chemicals are allergic sensitizers to the skin and respiratory tract, and overexposure may occur without odor warning. Should work be performed, utilize good industrial hygiene practices including removal of all paint (prime and finish coats) to the metal around the area to be welded, local ventilation, and/or supplied-air respiratory protection. 2. Use acceptable welding practices to repair tank. See American National Standard Safety In Welding And Cutting AWS Z 49.1 - 1999.

26

CLEAN WARNING Special procedures must be followed when large leaks or other repairs need welding or cutting. All work must be done by authorized personnel. If the tank is cleaned inside of a building, make sure there is enough ventilation. See the following manuals for additional information: • Safe Practices For Welding And Cutting Containers That Have Held Combustibles, by the American Welding Society, F4.1 - 1999. • Safety In Welding And Cutting, American National Standard, AWS Z 49.1 - 1999. When cleaning tank, do not use solutions that generate dangerous gases at normal temperatures or when heated. Wear eye and face protection. Protect your body from burns. When cleaning with steam, use a hose with a minimum diameter of 19 mm (0.75 in.). Control the pressure of the steam by a valve installed at nozzle of hose. If a metal nozzle is used, it must be made of a material that does not make sparks. Make an electrical connection between nozzle and tank. Connect a ground wire to tank to prevent static electricity.

Steam Method of Cleaning Use the following procedure to clean tank with steam: 1. Remove all parts from tank and install drain plug. 2. Fill tank 1/4 full with solution of water and sodium bicarbonate or sodium carbonate. Mix 0.5 kg (1 lb) per 4 liter (1 gal) of water. 3. Mix solution in tank using air pressure. Make sure all surfaces on inside of tank are flushed with solution. Drain tank. 4. Put steam into tank until tank does not have odors and the metal is hot. Steam vapors must come from all openings. 5. Flush inside of tank with boiling water. Make sure all loose material is removed from inside of tank.


100 SRM 981 6. Make an inspection of inside of tank. If it is not clean, repeat Step 4 and Step 5 and make another inspection. When making inspections, use a light that is approved for locations with flammable vapors. 7. Put plugs in all openings in tank. Wait 15 minutes, then remove inlet and outlet plugs. Test a sample of the vapor with a special indicator for gas vapors. If the amount of flammable vapors is above the lower flammable limit, repeat cleaning procedures.

Chemical Solution Method of Cleaning If tank cannot be cleaned with steam, use the following procedure: 1. Mix a solution of water and trisodium phosphate or a cleaning compound with an alkali base. Follow instructions given by the manufacturer.

WARNING Compressed air can move particles so that they cause injury to the user or to other personnel. Make sure that the path of the compressed air is away from all personnel. Wear protective goggles or face shield to prevent injury to the eyes. 2. Fill tank with cleaning solution. Use compressed air to mix solution in tank. 3. Drain tank. Flush inside of tank with hot (boiling) water. Make sure all cleaning compound is removed. 4. Inspect inside of tank. If tank is not clean, repeat Step 1, Step 2, and Step 3. Make another

Fuel and Hydraulic Tanks Repair inspection of tank. When making inspections, use a light that is approved for locations with flammable vapors. 5. Check tank for flammable vapors using special indicator for gas vapors. If the amount of flammable vapors is not below the lower flammable limit, repeat cleaning procedures.

Other Methods of Preparation for Repair WARNING Forklift frames and components may be painted with a catalyzed paint such as polyurethane or a two-part primer. Welding, burning, or other heat sufficient to cause thermal decomposition of the paint may release isocyanates. These chemicals are allergic sensitizers to the skin and respiratory tract and overexposure may occur without odor warning. Should work be performed, utilize good industrial hygiene practices including removal of all paint (prime and finish coats) to the metal around the area to be welded, local ventilation, and/or supplied-air respiratory protection. 1. If nitrogen gas or carbon dioxide gas is available, prepare tank for welding using these gases. See the manual, Safe Practices For Welding and Cutting Containers That Have Held Combustibles, American Welding Society, F4.1 - 1999. If these gases are not available, another method, using water, can be used as follows: a. Fill tank with water just below the point where work will be done. Make sure space above the level of the water has a vent.

27


Fuel and Hydraulic Tanks Repair

100 SRM 981

Figure 16. Label Positions

28


100 SRM 981

Safety Labels Legend for Figure 16

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

PARK BRAKE WARNING LABEL INSPECTION PLATE MAST WARNING LABEL OPERATOR RESTRAINT LABEL BATTERY DISCONNECT LABEL AUXILIARY FUNCTION LABEL LIFT/TILT LABEL OPERATOR WARNING LABEL FLAMMABLE LPG LABEL EZ LIFT LABEL LPG TANK LABEL NAMEPLATE DRIVE TRAIN PROTECTION LABEL HOOD LATCH LABEL IMPACT RATING WARNING LABEL

16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30.

REPLACE OPERATING MANUAL LABEL FIRE SAFETY LABEL HYSTER LABEL ANTIFREEZE LABEL FAN WARNING LABEL FAN WARNING LABEL HYDRAULIC OIL FILL LABEL LIFT TRUCK MODEL LABEL HYSTER LABEL NO RIDERS LABEL PINCH POINT LABEL MAST WARNING LABEL HYSTER LABEL US PATENTS AND TRADEMARKS LABEL ETHER CAUTION LABEL

Safety Labels WARNING

WARNING

Safety labels are installed on the lift truck to give information about operation and possible hazards. It is important that all safety labels are installed on the lift truck and can be read.

Cleaning solvents can be flammable and toxic and can cause skin irritation. When using cleaning solvents, always follow the recommendations of the manufacturer.

DO NOT add to or modify the lift truck. Any change to the lift truck, the tires, or its equipment can change the lifting capacity. The lift truck must be rated as equipped and the nameplate must show the new capacity rating. Contact your dealer for Hyster lift trucks for a replacement nameplate.

1. Make sure surface is dry and has no oil or grease. Do not use solvent on new paint. Clean surface of old paint using a cleaning solvent.

If necessary, install new labels as follows (see Figure 16):

2. Remove paper from back of label. Do not touch adhesive surface. 3. Carefully hold label in correct position above surface. Label cannot be moved after it touches surface. Put label on surface. Make sure all air is removed from under label and that corners and edges are tight.

29


NOTES ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

30



GM ENGINES 4.3 LITER V-6 H3.50-5.00XL (H70-110XL) [G005]; S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) [D004]; H6.00-7.00XL (H135-155XL) [F006, G006]; S6.00-7.00XL (S135-155XL) [B024, C024]; H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005, L005]; S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]

PART NO. 897800

600 SRM 590


GM Engines

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS General ............................................................................................................................................................... Description ......................................................................................................................................................... Engine Removal and Installation ..................................................................................................................... Cylinder Head Repair ........................................................................................................................................ Remove and Disassemble .............................................................................................................................. Clean and Inspect .......................................................................................................................................... Valve Guides and Seats, Repairs .................................................................................................................. Valves, Repair ................................................................................................................................................ Valve Seats, Repair........................................................................................................................................ Valve Springs ................................................................................................................................................. Rocker Arm Studs (Early Models) ................................................................................................................ Rocker Arm Studs (Late Models) .................................................................................................................. Assemble and Install ..................................................................................................................................... Cylinder Block Cleaning and Inspection .......................................................................................................... Piston Bore Preparation .................................................................................................................................... Engine Mounts Installation .............................................................................................................................. Lubrication System Repair................................................................................................................................ Oil Pump, Remove and Disassemble ............................................................................................................ Clean and Inspect .......................................................................................................................................... Oil Pump, Assemble and Install ................................................................................................................... Oil Sump, Install ........................................................................................................................................... Timing Cover, Timing Sprockets, Camshaft, and Valve Lifters ...................................................................... Timing Cover.................................................................................................................................................. Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Timing Sprockets ........................................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Camshaft ........................................................................................................................................................ Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Inspect........................................................................................................................................................ Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Balance Shaft................................................................................................................................................. Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Hydraulic Valve Lifters ................................................................................................................................. Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Disassemble ............................................................................................................................................... Clean and Inspect...................................................................................................................................... Assemble .................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Crankshaft Repair ............................................................................................................................................. Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Inspect and Repair......................................................................................................................................... How to Check Clearance Between Main Bearings and Their Journals ..................................................... Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Piston and Connecting Rod Assemblies Repair ............................................................................................... Connecting Rod Bearings, Replace ............................................................................................................... Piston and Connecting Rod Assemblies, Remove ........................................................................................ Disassemble ................................................................................................................................................... Piston, Clean and Inspect .............................................................................................................................

Š2005 HYSTER COMPANY

1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 6 6 7 10 10 11 11 11 11 12 12 13 13 13 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 17 17 18 18 18 19 19 19 20 21 21 21 22 23 24 24 25 25 26

i


Table of Contents

GM Engines

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Cylinder Bores, Inspect and Repair.............................................................................................................. Piston Rings ................................................................................................................................................... Assemble ........................................................................................................................................................ Piston and Connecting Rod Assemblies, Install .......................................................................................... Flywheel and Flywheel Housing Repair........................................................................................................... Flywheel, Repair............................................................................................................................................ Flywheel, Install ............................................................................................................................................ H3.50-5.00XL (H70-110XL), S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL), S6.00-7.00XL (S135-155XL) ........................ H6.00-7.00XL (H135-155XL) .................................................................................................................... Flywheel Housing H3.50-5.00XL (H70-110XL), H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM), S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL), S6.00-7.00XL (S135-155XL) ................................................................................................... Engine Adapter H6.00-7.00XL (H135-155XL) ............................................................................................. Coolant Pump Repair......................................................................................................................................... Thermostat Replacement .................................................................................................................................. Fan Mount Repair (Early Models) .................................................................................................................... Fan Mount Assembly Repair (Late Models) ..................................................................................................... Drive Belt Installation....................................................................................................................................... Valve Clearance Adjustment (Early Models).................................................................................................... Valve Clearance Adjustment (New Models) ..................................................................................................... Compression Check............................................................................................................................................ Engine Specifications......................................................................................................................................... Engine Data ................................................................................................................................................... Cylinder Head ................................................................................................................................................ Hydraulic Valve Lifter ................................................................................................................................... Camshaft ........................................................................................................................................................ Pistons ............................................................................................................................................................ Crankshaft ..................................................................................................................................................... Connecting Rods ............................................................................................................................................ Balance Shaft................................................................................................................................................. Cooling System .............................................................................................................................................. Lubrication System ....................................................................................................................................... Torque Specifications ......................................................................................................................................... Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................................. This section is for the following models: H3.50-5.00XL (H70-110XL) [G005]; S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) [D004]; H6.00-7.00XL (H135-155XL) [F006, G006]; S6.00-7.00XL (S135-155XL) [B024, C024]; H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005, L005]; S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]

ii

26 27 28 28 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 30 30 30 30 32 33 34 34 35 35 35 36 36 36 37 37 38 38 38 38 39


600 SRM 590

Description

General NOTE: This SRM applies to different model years of the GM 4.3 liter, V-6 engine. While there can be physical differences in the parts, many of the procedures will apply to all of the models. If the different parts require separate procedures, all the procedures will be given.

CAUTION Changes to the engines have occurred at each model year. Do not install parts from one model year engine into another model year engine. Installation of the wrong parts will cause poor performance, wear, and failure of the engine.

CAUTION Disconnect the battery cables before doing any disassembly and repair of the engine or parts of the electrical system.

The diodes and resistors in the electrical system can be damaged if the following cautions are not followed: • Do not disconnect the battery when the engine is running. The voltage surge can damage the diodes and resistors. • Do not disconnect an electric wire before the engine is stopped and the switches are OFF. • Do not cause a short circuit by connection of the electric wires to the wrong terminals. Make sure a correct identification of the wire is made before it is connected. • Make sure a battery is the correct voltage and polarity before it is connected. • Do not check for current flow by making a spark because the electronic components can be damaged. This SRM has the description and the repair instructions for the GM 4.3 liter, V-6 engine. Checks and Adjustments, Troubleshooting procedures, and Specifications are also included.

Description The cylinder block is made of cast iron. The arrangement of the cylinders is in a V shape, with three cylinders on each bank. From the front, cylinders on the right bank are numbered 1, 3, and 5 and cylinders on the left bank are numbered 2, 4, and 6. The cylinder heads are cast iron and have one intake valve and one exhaust valve for each cylinder. A spark plug is located between the valves in the side of the cylinder head. The valve guides and seats are integral to the cylinder head. The crankshaft is supported by four main bearings. The number four bearing at the rear of the engine is the end thrust bearing. The bearings are retained by bearing caps that are matched with the block for proper alignment and clearances. The camshaft is steel and is supported by four bearings pressed into the engine block. The camshaft is driven by a chain from the crankshaft. A spiral gear machined into the camshaft near the rear journal drives a shaft assembly which operates the oil pump drive shaft assembly. The pistons are made of cast aluminum and have two compression rings and one oil control ring assembly.

The piston is a low-friction, lightweight design with a flat top and barrel-shaped skirt. The piston pins are offset to reduce piston slap. They have a floating fit in the piston and are retained by a press fit in the connecting rod. The connecting rods are forged steel and are machined with the rod cap installed for proper clearances and alignment. The balance shaft is cast iron and mounted in the crankcase above and in-line with the camshaft. The balance shaft is driven by a gear from the camshaft. The valve mechanism is actuated by push rods and rocker arms from the camshaft. The rocker arm pivots on a ball to open the valve. Later model engines have hydraulic valve lifters that keep all parts of the valve train in constant contact. Each lifter acts as an automatic adjuster and maintains zero lash in the valve train, eliminating the need for periodic valve adjustment. When the engine has a gasoline fuel system, it has electronic fuel injection with an electronic engine control system. When the engine has a LPG fuel system, it uses an LPG carburetor with the Microprocessor Spark Timing System (MSTS).

1


Cylinder Head Repair

600 SRM 590

Engine Removal and Installation The Removal and Installation procedures for the engine are in the Frame section for each model of lift truck. See the Transmission sections to separate the transmission from the engine.

Cylinder Head Repair REMOVE AND DISASSEMBLE WARNING Disconnect the battery cables before making repairs to the engine. 1. Drain cooling system. 2. Disconnect and remove coolant hose from housing for thermostat. 3. Remove air cleaner, distributor, throttle body, intake manifold, and exhaust manifolds. Remove drive belt(s) and remove brackets for drive belt tensioner and alternator. 4. Remove spark plugs. 5. Remove rocker arm cover. See Figure 1. NOTE: For year 2002 or later model engines, go to Step 10. 6. Remove nuts and balls for rocker arms. Remove rocker arms and push rods. Keep parts for each rocker arm assembly together. Mark assemblies so they can be installed in their original positions.

1. 2. 3. 4.

ROCKER COVER NUT BALL ROCKER ARM

5. CYLINDER HEAD 6. HEAD GASKET 7. GASKET

Figure 1. Cylinder Head 7. Remove rocker arm studs. 8. Remove capscrews that hold cylinder head to block. Remove capscrews in the reverse order of the tightening sequence shown in Figure 12. Remove cylinder head and gasket. 9. Use a valve spring compressor and remove valve stem keys, caps, springs, and oil seals. Discard oil seals. Remove valves. Organize valves and springs so they can be installed in their original positions. 10. Remove valve rocker arms. See Figure 2. 11. Remove valve rocker arm supports. 12. Remove valve push rods.

2

CLEAN AND INSPECT 1. Clean carbon from valve ports and combustion chambers in cylinder head. 2. Clean carbon and oil from valves, push rods, and rocker arms. 3. Clean valve guides. 4. Clean surfaces of cylinder head where gaskets fit. 5. Inspect cylinder head for cracks in ports, combustion chambers, and external surfaces. 6. Measure cylinder head for warping with a straight edge and feeler gauge. Refer to Engine Specifications for tolerances.


600 SRM 590

Cylinder Head Repair valve faces and seats within the specifications. Make sure all of the lapping compound is removed from the valve and valve seat when the process is completed. Valves with minor pits in the valve faces can be machined to the proper angle. There are many different types of equipment for repairing valve faces. Follow the instructions of the manufacturer of the equipment that you are using. Valves must be machined to the proper specifications. See Figure 4.

1. VALVE ROCKER ARM 2. VALVE ROCKER ARM SUPPORT 3. PUSH ROD Figure 2. Remove Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod (Year 2002 or Later Engine Models) 7. Inspect valves for burned or damaged areas in seat surfaces. Inspect for cracks and damaged or worn valve stems. Valve stems with excessive guide clearance must be repaired or replaced. Refer to Engine Specifications.

1. VALVE STEM 2. DIAL INDICATOR Figure 3. Valve Steam Clearance

VALVE GUIDES AND SEATS, REPAIRS Measure the clearance between the valve stem and the guide as shown in Figure 3. See Engine Specifications for maximum clearances. If the clearance is more than the maximum amount, oversize valves or new valve guides must be installed. Use a reamer of the correct size when installing new valve guides. Use normal service procedures when grinding the valve seats. See the Engine Specifications for dimensions.

VALVES, REPAIR NOTE: Before any work is performed on the valve faces and seats, make sure the clearance of the valve stems in their valve guides is within specifications. A correction for minimum wear and damage to the valve and seat can be done by a process called lapping. When the valve seats are lapped, keep the

NOTE: SEAT WIDTH DIMENSION APPLIES TO THE 46 FACE ONLY. 1. CYLINDER HEAD Figure 4. Valve Seat Specifications for Inlet and Exhaust Valves

3


Cylinder Head Repair Replace a valve if any of the following conditions are present: • Valve stem is worn below specifications. • Valve stem is bent. • Valve face is warped. • Any part of the valve is cracked. • Any wear or damage to the valve face that cannot be removed by resurfacing and still meet the specifications shown in Figure 5.

600 SRM 590 valve seats. Follow the instructions of the manufacturer of the equipment that you are using. The valve seats are ground at three different angles: 30 , 46 , and 60 . This method makes a valve seat that is the proper width and produces the correct contact line between the valve and valve seat. The specifications for the valve seats are shown in the Engine Specifications section and in Figure 4. • If the contact line is too high, it can be made lower by using a 30 stone. • If the contact line is too low, it can be raised using the 46 stone. • If the seat is too narrow, it can be made wider using a 46 stone. • If the seat is too wide, it can be made narrower using a 60 stone. The correct dimensions for the valve seat widths and valve/valve seat overlap are shown in Figure 6. The valve seat widths are the dimensions of the 46 face only. The valve/valve seat overlap is the distance from the edge of the seat to the outside edge of the valve.

Figure 5. Valve Head Measurements

VALVE SEATS, REPAIR NOTE: Before any work is done on the valve faces and seats, make sure the clearance of the valve stems in their valve guides is within specifications.

CAUTION The exhaust valve seats in these cylinder heads are induction-hardened. Removal of too much valve seat material will damage the valve seats which will require replacement of the cylinder head. Damaged valve seats can be resurfaced with a tool that is designed to repair valve seats. There are many different types of equipment for repairing

4

VALVE SPRINGS Measure the length of the valve springs. The correct length is 51.6 mm (2.03 in.).

WARNING Be careful when testing the valve springs. These springs can come loose with enough force to cause an injury. Always use equipment that was designed to test springs. Always wear eye and face protection while testing valve springs. Use a special tool to check the tension of the valve springs. Compress the spring to the correct height and check the tension. For the correct specifications, see Figure 7. Replace valve springs that are not within specifications.


600 SRM 590

Cylinder Head Repair

A. EXHAUST VALVE

B. INLET VALVE

1. CYLINDER HEAD

2. VALVE Figure 6. Valve Seat Widths and Valve/Valve Seat Overlap Legend for Figure 7 A. VARIATION FROM VERTICAL: LESS THAN 1.6 mm (0.063 in.) B. FREE LENGTH: 51.6 mm (2.03 in.) C. SPRING COMPRESSED TO 338 to 374 N (76 to 84 lbf) AT 43 mm (1.69 in.) D. INSTALLED HEIGHT EARLY MODELS : 42.92 to 43.43 mm (1.690 to 1.710 in.) LATE MODELS: INTAKE: 45.2 mm (1.78 in.) EXHAUST: 45.2 to 43.43 mm (1.780 to 1.710 in.)

Figure 7. Valve Spring Specifications

5


Cylinder Head Repair

ROCKER ARM STUDS (EARLY MODELS) These studs are pressed into the head. Replace a stud that has damaged threads or is loose in the cylinder head. New studs are available in the following oversizes: 0.003 in. and 0.013 in. 1. To remove old stud, install spacer, flat washer, and nut to damaged stud. Use a wrench to remove damaged stud. See Figure 8.

CAUTION

600 SRM 590

CAUTION Disposal of lubricants and fluids must meet local environmental regulations. Drain the cooling system before replacing the studs. The studs for late model engines have threads that hold them to the cylinder head. See Figure 10. A stud that has damaged threads must be replaced with a new stud. If the threads in the head are damaged, a thread repair kit can be used. If the damaged threads cannot be repaired with a thread repair kit, then the head must be replaced.

Do not attempt to install an oversized stud without reaming the stud hole to the new size. Installation of an oversized stud without reaming the stud hole can cause cracks in the cylinder head. 2. Use a reamer of the correct size for new oversized stud. Apply SAE 90 lubricant to new stud during installation. Install new stud as shown in Figure 9.

NOTE: EARLY MODELS ONLY. Figure 8. Rocker Arm Stud Removal

ROCKER ARM STUDS (LATE MODELS) NOTE: EARLY MODELS ONLY.

WARNING DO NOT remove a stud from the cylinder head when the engine is hot. Some of the studs fit into coolant passages and can release pressure and hot coolant when removed. The steam and boiling coolant can cause burns.

6

1. REAMER

2. INSTALLATION TOOL

Figure 9. Rocker Arm Stud Installation


600 SRM 590

Cylinder Head Repair Legend for Figure 11 A. VARIATION FROM VERTICAL: LESS THAN 1.6 mm (0.063 in.) B. FREE LENGTH: 51.6 mm (2.03 in.) C. SPRING COMPRESSED TO 338 to 374 N (76 to 84 lbf) AT 43 mm (1.69 in.) D. INSTALLED HEIGHT EARLY MODELS : 42.92 to 43.43 mm (1.780 to 1.710 in.) LATE MODELS: INTAKE: 45.2 mm (1.78 in.) EXHAUST: 45.2 to 43.43 mm (1.690 to 1.710 in.) 2. Clean surface of cylinder head and top of cylinder block. Make sure threads in block are clean.

NOTE: LATE MODELS ONLY. 1. STUD Figure 10. Studs With Threads

ASSEMBLE AND INSTALL 1. Install each valve in correct port. Install oil seal in lower groove. Install shim, damper, spring, shield, and cap or rotator. Using a spring compressor, compress assembly and install retainers. Measure height of valve spring as shown in Figure 11. Measure from top of shim to top of retainer cap. Install shims to get correct height shown in Figure 11. The installed height of valve spring must not be less than minimum height.

3. Install cylinder head gasket and cylinder head. Make sure cylinder head is aligned with pins in block. 4. Use a sealant on threads of capscrews for cylinder head. Install capscrews as follows: a. On 1995 and earlier engines, tighten capscrews in three steps. Tighten all capscrews to one torque specification, then use the next specification: 34 N•m (25 lbf ft), 61 N•m (45 lbf ft), and 90 N•m (65 lbf ft). Use sequence shown in Figure 12.

A. FAN END Figure 12. Cylinder Head Tightening Sequence

Figure 11. Valve Spring Specifications

b. On 1996 model and later engines, tighten all capscrews to 30 N•m (22 lbf ft). Use sequence shown in Figure 12. Next, tighten capscrews 11, 7, 3, 2, 6, 10 an additional 55 degrees. Tighten capscrews 12 and 13 an additional 65 degrees. Tighten capscrews 1, 4, 8, 5, 9 an additional 75 degrees.

7


Cylinder Head Repair 5. Apply RTV sealant (Hyster part number 280472) to front and rear surfaces between intake manifold and engine block. See Figure 13. The bead of sealant must be 5 mm (0.2 in.) thick and extend up sides of heads 13 mm (0.5 in.) to seal and retain gaskets.

600 SRM 590 8. Install valve push rods. See Figure 15.

1. EXTEND BEAD 13 mm (0.5 in.) UP HEADS (FRONT AND REAR). 2. REAR 3. FRONT Figure 13. Intake Manifold Sealant Locations 6. Install gaskets and intake manifold. Tighten capscrews in sequence shown in Figure 14. Tighten capscrews on early models to 48 N•m (35 lbf ft). On later models tighten capscrews on first pass to 3 N•m (27 lbf in). Tighten capscrews on second pass to 12 N•m (106 lbf in). Tighten capscrews on final pass to 15 N•m (133 lbf in).

A. EARLY MODELS B. LATE MODELS

C. FAN END

Figure 14. Inlet Manifold Tightening Sequence

NOTE: For year 2002 or later model engines, perform Step 8 through Step 18. For 2001 and earlier model engines, perform Step 7 and Step 14 through Step 18. NOTE: Install parts as marked during removal. 7. Install push rods, making sure they are in the seat of the valve lifter. Lubricate rocker arms and rocker arm balls with a molybdenum grease. Install rocker arms, balls, and nuts. The earlier and later models have different procedures to tighten rocker arms and adjust valves. The procedures are described in Valve Clearance Adjustment (Early Models) and Valve Clearance Adjustment (New Models).

8

Figure 15. Install Valve Push Rod


600 SRM 590

Cylinder Head Repair Legend for Figure 17

CAUTION Be sure that the arrow on the valve rocker arm support is in the up position. See Figure 16. 9. Install valve rocker arm supports.

1. 2. 3. 4.

VALVE PUSH ROD SOCKET ROLLER PIVOT VALVE STEM TIP ROCKER ARM BOLT

11. See Figure 18. Install the valve rocker arm assemblies as follows: a. Finger start the rocker arm bolt at location 1 in Figure 18. b. Finger start the rocker arm bolt at location 2 in Figure 18. c. Finger start the rocker arm bolt at location 3 in Figure 18. d. Finger start the remaining three valve rocker arm bolts.

Figure 16. Install Valve Rocker Arm Supports 10. Apply a molybdenum grease or equivalent to the following valve rocker arm contact surfaces: See Figure 17. • Valve push rod socket • Roller pivot • Valve stem tip

1. BOLT AT LOCATION 1 2. BOLT AT LOCATION 2 3. BOLT AT LOCATION 3 Figure 18. Install Valve Rocker Arm Assemblies 12. Rotate the crankshaft balancer to position the crankshaft balancer alignment mark 57 to 63 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise from the engine front cover alignment tab. See Figure 19. NOTE: Once the valve rocker arm assemblies are installed and properly torqued, no additional valve lash adjustment is required. 13. Tighten the valve rocker arm bolts to 30 N•m (22 lbf ft). See Figure 17. Figure 17. Lubricate Valve Rocker Arm Surfaces

14. Use new gasket and install valve covers. Tighten capscrews to 12 N•m (107 lbf in).

9


Piston Bore Preparation

600 SRM 590

15. Install spark plugs. 16. Install throttle body, air cleaner, and distributor. Install brackets for drive belt tensioner and alternator. Install drive belt(s). 17. Install exhaust manifolds. Tighten capscrews in two steps; first to 15 N•m (133 lbf in), then to 31 N•m (274 lbf in). If used, bend lock tabs against heads of capscrews. 18. Install coolant hose to housing for thermostat. Fill coolant system with coolant. See the Periodic Maintenance section for your lift truck.

1. CRANKSHAFT BALANCER ALIGNMENT MARK 2. ENGINE FRONT COVER ALIGNMENT TAB Figure 19. Rotate Crankshaft Balancer

Cylinder Block Cleaning and Inspection WARNING Cleaning solvents can be flammable and toxic and can cause skin irritation. When using cleaning solvents, always follow the solvent manufacturer’s recommended safety procedures.

WARNING Compressed air can move particles so they cause injury to the user or to other personnel. Make sure the path of the compressed air is

away from all personnel. Wear protective goggles or a face shield to prevent injury to the eyes. After the engine is disassembled, clean cylinder block in solvent and dry with compressed air. Make sure all oil passages are clean. Remove gaskets from surface of block. Inspect bores for pistons for wear or damage. Measure bores and check dimensions shown in Engine Specifications. Repair cylinder block, as necessary.

Piston Bore Preparation NOTE: It is important that the piston bores are prepared correctly before new piston rings are installed. Incorrect preparation can cause the parts to wear quickly.

2. Move hone quickly (approximately 60 times per minute) up and down in bore. Make sure hone makes a cross pattern of 45 to 60 degrees. Use hone until entire length of bore has this pattern.

Use a hone in the piston bores when installing new rings. Use the hone as follows:

3. After using the hone, clean cylinder block with hot water and detergent. Make sure all metal particles are removed from block. Dry bores and lubricate them with engine oil.

1. Use a hone with a 280-grit stone. Make sure stone is clean and will not damage bore.

10


600 SRM 590

Lubrication System Repair

Engine Mounts Installation If the engine mount was removed from the cylinder block, install and tighten capscrews for mount as follows.

S/H3.50-5.00XL (S/H70-110XL)

31 N•m (23 lbf ft)

S/H6.00-7.00XL (S/H135-155XL)

50 N•m (37 lbf ft)

H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM)

52 N•m (38 lbf ft)

Lubrication System Repair OIL PUMP, REMOVE AND DISASSEMBLE 1. Remove oil sump. 2. Remove capscrew at mount for pump. Remove oil pump and shaft. See Figure 20. 3. Remove cover for oil pump. Put marks on gear teeth to show their correct location during assembly. 4. Do not remove tube and screen assembly unless it is damaged. The tube and screen must be replaced as an assembly. 5. Remove retaining pin, pressure regulator spring, and pressure regulator valve from pump cover.

CLEAN AND INSPECT WARNING Cleaning solvents can be flammable and toxic and can cause skin irritation. When using cleaning solvents, always follow the solvent manufacturer’s recommended safety procedures.

WARNING Compressed air can move particles so they cause injury to the user or to other personnel. Make sure the path of the compressed air is away from all personnel. Wear protective goggles or a face shield to prevent injury to the eyes.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

CAPSCREW SCREEN DRIVEN GEAR DRIVE GEAR RETAINER SHAFT

7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

HOUSING SPRING RELIEF VALVE COVER PIN

Figure 20. Oil Pump

Clean parts of oil pump in solvent and dry with compressed air. Inspect gears, shaft, and body of pump for wear or damage.

11


Lubrication System Repair

OIL PUMP, ASSEMBLE AND INSTALL NOTE: There are some variations in the oil pumps installed during the years of manufacture of these engines, but the design is the same. The repair procedures are the same. See the Parts Manual for each oil pump.

600 SRM 590 a. Install new gasket(s) and oil sump. See Figure 22. Use a sealant on gasket(s) in the following locations: at front cover to block joint and rear seal retainer to block joint. The sealant must extend 25 mm (1 in.) in both directions at each of the four corners.

1. Install NEW pressure regulator valve and spring into pump cover. Install retaining pin. 2. Install gears in body of pump. Make sure to align identification marks. Install cover for oil pump and tighten capscrews to 12 N•m (106 lbf in). Turn shaft for oil pump and check for smooth operation. 3. Use a sealant when replacement of tube and screen assembly is necessary. The tube and screen assembly must have a good press fit into the oil pump body. Do not damage tube during installation. Make sure surface of screen assembly is parallel to bottom surface of cylinder block. See Figure 21.

Figure 21. Oil Pump Tube and Screen Installation 4. Install oil pump shaft and NEW retainer. 5. Install oil pump assembly to engine. Make sure shaft is aligned with slot in distributor shaft. On early models (1995 and older engines), tighten capscrew at mount to 47 N•m (35 lbf ft). On late models (1996 and later), tighten capscrew to 90 N•m (66 lbf ft).

OIL SUMP, INSTALL 1. Install oil sump on early models (1995 and earlier engines) as follows:

12

A. EARLY MODELS B. LATE MODELS

C. FAN END

1. OIL SUMP 2. GASKET

3. PLATE Figure 22. Oil Sump

b. Tighten capscrews for oil sump as follows: 1/4-20 capscrews, 10 N•m (89 lbf in); 5/16-18 capscrews, 19 N•m (168 lbf in). 2. Install oil sump on late models (1996 and later engines) as follows: a. Apply an RTV sealant to surfaces of engine block as shown in Figure 23.


600 SRM 590

Timing Cover, Timing Sprockets, Camshaft, and Valve Lifters b. Install gasket and oil sump. Make sure vertical surfaces at back of engine block and oil sump are even. c. Tighten capscrews and nuts for oil sump in sequence shown in Figure 24 to 25 N•m (221 lbf in).

Figure 24. Oil Sump Installation

A. FAN END Figure 23. Oil Sump Installation

Timing Cover, Timing Sprockets, Camshaft, and Valve Lifters TIMING COVER Remove NOTE: For model H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM), refer to the section Cooling System 700 SRM 740.

vibration damper. Do not pull on outside diameter of vibration damper. 3. Remove crankshaft position sensor from timing cover. See Figure 26.

1. Remove fan assembly and belts.

4. Remove capscrews and stud for timing cover. Remove timing cover from engine. See Figure 27.

2. Remove crankshaft pulley and vibration damper. See Figure 25. Use a tool that pulls on center of

5. Remove crankshaft position sensor reluctor ring from crankshaft. See Figure 28.

13


Timing Cover, Timing Sprockets, Camshaft, and Valve Lifters

1. TIMING COVER 2. VIBRATION DAMPER 3. TOOL FOR REMOVING VIBRATION DAMPER

600 SRM 590

1. TIMING COVER

2. ENGINE

Figure 27. Timing Cover

Figure 25. Timing Cover

1. CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR BOLT 2. CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR 3. TIMING COVER Figure 26. Crankshaft Position Sensor

14

1. CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR RELUCTOR RING 2. CRANKSHAFT Figure 28. Crankshaft Position Sensor Reluctor Ring


600 SRM 590

Timing Cover, Timing Sprockets, Camshaft, and Valve Lifters

Install

TIMING SPROCKETS

NOTE: The plastic timing cover can be used only once. When the engine has a plastic timing cover, always install a new one.

Remove

1. Install crankcase position sensor reluctor ring on crankshaft. See Figure 28. Make sure open side of seal is toward inside of cover. 2. Use a sealant on sump gasket in the following locations: at front cover to block joint and rear seal retainer to block joint. The sealant must extend 25 mm (1 in.) in both directions at each of the four corners. During installation of the cover, use a special tool to align oil seal with crankshaft. The vibration damper will damage the oil seal if it is not installed correctly. Tighten capscrews for cover to 12 N•m (106 lbf in). See Figure 27. 3. Install crankshaft position sensor. Tighten crankshaft position sensor bolt to 8 N•m (71 lbf in). See Figure 26. 4. Lubricate lips of seal with clean engine oil before vibration dampener is installed. Use a special tool to pull vibration damper onto crankshaft. See Figure 29. Tighten capscrew for damper to 95 N•m (70 lbf ft).

1. Remove timing cover. On late models, remove ring for crankshaft position sensor. See Figure 30. 2. Check timing chain for wear. If timing chain can be moved back and forth more than 16 mm (0.63 in.), install a new chain. 3. Remove capscrews for camshaft sprocket. Use a puller to remove crankshaft sprocket. Make sure timing chain is removed with sprockets.

Install 1. Install crankshaft sprocket. Install timing chain on camshaft sprocket. Install camshaft sprocket with chain. Make sure marks are aligned as shown in Figure 30. The number 4 cylinder will be at top dead center (TDC) on the compression stroke. Tighten capscrews to camshaft sprocket to 28 N•m (21 lbf ft). On late models, install ring for crankshaft position sensor. 2. Lubricate chain and sprockets with new engine oil. Install timing cover as described in section for Timing Cover.

5. Install crankshaft pulley, belts, and fan assembly.

1. SPECIAL TOOL

2. VIBRATION DAMPER

Figure 29. Timing Cover

1. TIMING MARKS 2. TIMING CHAIN

3. CAMSHAFT SPROCKET

Figure 30. Timing Marks

15


Timing Cover, Timing Sprockets, Camshaft, and Valve Lifters

CAMSHAFT Remove 1. Remove intake manifold, push rods, lifter guides, and valve lifters.

600 SRM 590

on the surface of the bearing to see if they are round. If the difference of the readings for each bearing is more than 0.025 mm (0.001 in.), replace camshaft. Check for a bent camshaft or excessive camshaft runout. If runout exceeds 0.065 mm (0.0026 in.), the camshaft is bent and should be replaced.

2. Remove timing cover as described in section Timing Cover. Align timing marks. Remove timing chain, sprockets, and camshaft retainer. 3. Install two or three 5/16-18 capscrews that are 100 to 125 mm (4 to 5 in.) long into camshaft. See Figure 31. These capscrews will make the camshaft easier to control. Carefully remove camshaft from cylinder block. All camshaft bearings are the same size. Do not damage bearings or camshaft during removal.

1. TOOL FOR CAMSHAFT BEARINGS Figure 32. Camshaft Bearings

Install 1. Use a special tool as shown in Figure 32 to install camshaft bearings. See Figure 33. Install front and rear bearings first. Make sure oil holes in bearings are aligned with oil holes in block. Use a sealant on rear camshaft plug and install plug in block. Make sure plug is even with or 0.80 mm (0.03 in.) below surface of block. NOTE: LATE MODEL SHOWN, OTHER MODELS SIMILAR. Figure 31. Camshaft 4. If necessary, use a special tool as shown in Figure 32 to remove camshaft bearings. Remove front and rear bearings last.

Inspect Inspect entire camshaft for any signs of wear or damage. Measure diameter of each bearing surface on camshaft. Do the measurement at different positions

16

2. Lubricate camshaft lobes with a molybdenum lubricant. Lubricate camshaft bearings with engine oil. Install two or three 5/16-18 capscrews that are 100 to 125 mm (4 to 5 in.) long into camshaft. See Figure 31. These capscrews will make camshaft easier to control. Carefully install camshaft in cylinder block. 3. Lubricate and install retainer for camshaft. Tighten capscrews to 14 N•m (125 lbf in). 4. Install gear for the balance shaft as described in procedures for Balance Shaft.


600 SRM 590

1. RETAINER

Timing Cover, Timing Sprockets, Camshaft, and Valve Lifters

2. CAMSHAFT

Figure 33. Camshaft and Retainer 5. Install timing sprockets, chain, and cover as described in procedures for Timing Cover. 6. Lubricate valve lifters with a molybdenum lubricant. Install lifters in block. Install push rods and adjust valve mechanism as described in Valve Clearance Adjustment (Early Models) and Valve Clearance Adjustment (New Models).

BALANCE SHAFT Remove 1. Remove intake manifold. 2. Remove retainer for lifters.

1. SPROCKET, CAMSHAFT 2. DRIVE GEAR, CAMSHAFT

3. DRIVEN GEAR, BALANCE SHAFT 4. BALANCE SHAFT 5. RETAINER

Figure 34. Balance Shaft Components

3. Remove timing cover as described in section Timing Cover. Remove timing chain and sprocket from camshaft. 4. Remove driven gear from balance shaft. Remove retainer. See Figure 34. 5. Use a soft-faced hammer to remove balance shaft. See Figure 35. NOTE: The balance shaft and front bearing are serviced as a unit. 6. Use a special tool to remove rear bearing. A. FRONT Figure 35. Balance Shaft Removal

17


Timing Cover, Timing Sprockets, Camshaft, and Valve Lifters

600 SRM 590

Install 1. Lubricate rear bearing with new engine oil. Use a special tool to push rear bearing into block. See Figure 34 and Figure 36.

1. ALIGNMENT OF TIMING MARKS 2. DRIVEN GEAR, BALANCE SHAFT 3. DRIVE GEAR, CAMSHAFT Figure 37. Balance Shaft Timing Marks

A. FRONT 1. HAMMER

2. BEARING DRIVER

Figure 36. Balance Shaft Installation

7. Install timing cover as described in section Timing Cover.

2. Lubricate front bearing with new engine oil. Use a driver to install balance shaft into engine block.

8. Make sure all lifters and guides for lifters are properly installed. Install retainer for lifters. Tighten bolts for retainer to 16 N•m (142 lbf in).

3. Install retainer for balance shaft. Tighten screws for retainer to 14 N•m (125 lbf in).

9. Install intake manifold as described in the section Cylinder Head Repair, Assemble and Install.

4. Install driven gear onto balance shaft. Tighten bolt to 20 N•m (177 lbf in), plus an additional 35 degrees of rotation. Rotate balance shaft by hand to make sure there is clearance between retainer and shaft. If the balance shaft does not rotate freely, check that retaining ring on the front bearing is in its seat.

HYDRAULIC VALVE LIFTERS

5. Temporarily install drive gear on camshaft. Turn camshaft until timing mark on drive gear is straight up. Remove drive gear and rotate balance shaft until mark on driven gear is straight down. Install drive gear on camshaft. Make sure timing marks are in the position shown in Figure 37. 6. Install timing chain and sprocket on camshaft. Make sure timing marks are in the position shown in Figure 30. Tighten capscrews that attach sprocket to camshaft to 28 N•m (21 lbf ft).

18

Remove 1. The hydraulic valve lifters normally do not need repair unless they become dirty, causing them to malfunction or the roller does not operate properly. The hydraulic valve lifters must be clean to operate correctly. If a hydraulic valve lifter must be disassembled, make sure small parts are handled carefully to prevent loss or damage. 2. Remove air bonnet, distributor, and intake manifold. 3. The push rods must be removed as described in Cylinder Head Repair, Remove and Disassemble. 4. Remove hydraulic valve lifters. Put lifters in a rack so they can be installed in their original positions.


600 SRM 590

Timing Cover, Timing Sprockets, Camshaft, and Valve Lifters

Disassemble CAUTION The internal parts of a lifter are a precise fit to each lifter body. When servicing the lifters, make sure the parts from one lifter are not mixed with another lifter. If any part of the lifter or roller is worn or damaged, the lifter must be replaced. 1. Hold plunger down with a push rod. See Figure 38. Use blade of a small screwdriver to remove retainer for push rod seat.

Figure 39. Check Ball Assembly Removal

Clean and Inspect Clean all parts in a cleaning solvent and inspect them carefully. If any parts are damaged or worn, the complete hydraulic valve lifter must be replaced. If the body of the hydraulic valve lifter is worn, also inspect bore in cylinder block. If roller of hydraulic valve lifter is worn or damaged, inspect camshaft lobe for wear and damage.

Assemble 1. CHECK BALL ASSEMBLY 2. PLUNGER 3. METERING VALVE 4. PUSH ROD SEAT

5. 6. 7. 8.

RETAINER SPRING LIFTER BODY RETAINER

Figure 38. Hydraulic Valve Lifter 2. Remove push rod seat and metering valve. 3. Remove plunger, check ball assembly, and plunger spring. 4. Use a small screwdriver as a pry bar to remove check ball retainer from plunger. See Figure 39.

1. Assemble check ball assembly. Put check ball on small hole in bottom of plunger. Install check ball spring in seat of check ball retainer. Put check ball retainer over check ball so check ball spring is on check ball. Carefully press check ball retainer into position in plunger. See Figure 40. 2. Put plunger spring over check ball retainer and slide lifter body over spring and plunger. See Figure 38. 3. Fill assembly with SAE 10 engine oil. Put a 3 mm (0.125 in.) drift into plunger and push plunger until holes for oil are aligned. See Figure 41. Now put a 1.6 mm (0.0625 in.) drift through holes to hold plunger. Remove 3 mm (0.125 in.) drift and fill assembly again with SAE 10 oil.

19


Timing Cover, Timing Sprockets, Camshaft, and Valve Lifters

600 SRM 590

(0.063 in.) drift and remove drift. The hydraulic valve lifter is now ready for installation.

Install 1. Lubricate all roller and lifter surfaces with new engine oil. Install lifters in their original positions. Make sure guides are in correct positions. See Figure 42. 2. Install retainer. Tighten capscrews to 16 N•m (142 lbf in).

Figure 40. Check Ball Assembly Installation

3. Install push rods. Adjust valves. The old and new models use different procedures to tighten rocker arms and adjust valves. The procedures are described in Valve Clearance Adjustment (Early Models) and Valve Clearance Adjustment (New Models). 4. Install intake manifold and distributor.

1. 3 mm (0.120 in.) DRIFT PIN 2. OIL FEED HOLE

3. 1.6 mm (0.063 in.) PIN

Figure 41. Hydraulic Valve Lifter Assembly 4. Install metering valve and push rod seat. See Figure 38. Install retainer for push rod seat. Push down push rod seat to loosen 1.6 mm

20

1. 2. 3. 4.

ROCKER ARM CYLINDER HEAD CYLINDER BLOCK CAMSHAFT

5. 6. 7. 8.

LIFTER RETAINER GUIDE PUSH ROD

Figure 42. Cylinder Head


600 SRM 590

Crankshaft Repair

Crankshaft Repair REMOVE 1. Remove oil pan, oil pump, and flywheel. Remove rear seal retainer (late models).

bearing is round. The correct sizes are given in the Engine Specifications section.

2. Remove timing cover as described in the procedure Timing Cover, Remove. 3. Mark caps for connecting rods so they can be installed in their correct locations. Remove caps and bearing inserts for connecting rods. Make sure all parts from each rod assembly remain together. 4. Mark caps for main bearings so they can be installed in their correct locations. Remove caps for main bearings. Make sure all parts from each bearing assembly remain together. 5. Remove crankshaft with extreme care to prevent damage to journals and thrust flanges of crankshaft.

INSPECT AND REPAIR WARNING Commercial cleaning solvents can be flammable and toxic and can cause severe skin irritation. When using commercial cleaning solvents, always comply with the solvent manufacturer’s recommended safety precautions. Compressed air can move particles so they cause injury to the user or to other personnel. Make sure the path of the compressed air is away from all personnel. Wear protective goggles or a face shield to prevent injury to the eyes. 1. Clean crankshaft with solvent and dry it with compressed air. Make sure oil passages are not plugged. 2. Inspect crankshaft for cracks or other damage. 3. Inspect bearing journals and thrust surfaces for scratches or damage caused by a lack of lubrication. 4. Inspect crankshaft for wear and damage. See Figure 43. Use a micrometer to measure journals for bearings of crankshaft. Do measurement at different positions to see if the surface of the

Figure 43. Crankshaft Inspection 5. If crankshaft journals must be repaired, they can be ground to the following diameters smaller (undersize) than the original size: 0.254 mm (0.010 in.) 0.508 mm (0.020 in.) NOTES ABOUT MAIN BEARINGS: Main bearings are an insert bearing that do not use shims for adjustment. Main bearings are available in a standard size and the following undersizes: 0.0254 mm (0.001 in.), 0.0508 mm (0.002 in.), 0.2286 mm (0.009 in.), 0.254 mm (0.010 in.), and 0.508 mm (0.020 in.). If a bearing on a journal is worn, both the upper and lower half of the bearing must be replaced. When the crankshaft is assembled by the manufacturer, the main bearings are specially selected to obtain close tolerances. For this reason, you can find one-half of a standard size insert with one-half of a 0.0254 mm (0.001 in.) undersize insert. This combination will decrease the clearance 0.0127 mm (0.0005 in.) from using a full standard bearing.

21


Crankshaft Repair When a production crankshaft cannot be fitted with this method, the main journal is then ground 0.2286 mm (0.009 in.) undersize. Only those main bearing journals that cannot be fitted with standard, 0.0254 mm (0.001 in.), or 0.0508 mm (0.002 in.) undersize main bearing will be ground. A 0.2286 mm (0.009 in.) and a 0.254 mm (0.010 in.) undersize bearings will be selected as described to obtain close tolerances. A production crankshaft that has been ground will have the following identification: • The crankshaft journal that has been ground will have a 9 marked in the metal of the crankshaft next to the journal. A spot of light green paint is also added to the crankshaft. • The main bearing cap is also marked with green paint.

HOW TO CHECK CLEARANCE BETWEEN MAIN BEARINGS AND THEIR JOURNALS 1. Use Plastigage® or equivalent to check clearance. The procedure is similar for both connecting rod bearings and main bearings. If engine has been removed from lift truck, put engine so crankshaft is up. The weight of the crankshaft is against the upper bearing half and the total clearance can be measured correctly. If the engine is still in the lift truck, the crankshaft must have a support to remove any additional clearance between the upper bearing half and its journal.

600 SRM 590 6. Remove main bearing cap. The Plastigage® will be compressed and wider and will adhere to either the bearing or its journal. Use scale on envelope for Plastigage® to measure width of plastic at its widest point. The scale will indicate the clearance in millimeters or thousandths of an inch. See Figure 47. 7. If the clearance is greater than the specifications, select a new undersize bearing set and install it. Measure clearance again. If clearance cannot meet specifications with the available undersize bearings, bearing journal must be ground to a new undersize. If bearing journal is already at maximum undersize, crankshaft must be replaced. 8. If clearance is within specifications, lubricate bearing with engine oil and install main bearing and bearing cap. Tighten capscrews on main bearing cap to correct specifications. 9. Turn crankshaft to make sure it rotates smoothly. 10. Check axial clearance between rear main bearing and thrust surface. Push crankshaft forward. See Figure 44. Measure clearance between crankshaft and thrust surface of rear bearing. See Engine Specifications for correct clearances.

2. All main bearing caps must be installed and their capscrews tightened to the specifications. 3. Check rear main bearing first. Remove cap for rear main bearing. The procedure for checking the clearance of the other bearings is similar. 4. Clean oil from bearing half and journal to be checked. Put a piece of Plastigage across full width of bearing journal as shown in Plastigage® on Bearing Journal. Do not rotate crankshaft when Plastigage is between main bearing and its journal. 5. Install main bearing cap and tighten capscrews. See Torque Specifications. The capscrews must be tightened to their final torque or there will be an error in the measurement.

A. FAN END 1. MEASURE CLEARANCE Figure 44. Measuring Crankshaft Axial Clearance

22


600 SRM 590

Crankshaft Repair

INSTALL 1. On engines with a two-piece rear seal, install seal halves so lips are toward fan end of engine. Apply sealant to ends of seal halves. Apply engine oil to seal during installation. Do not get any oil on ends of seal. NOTE: With the use of special tools, the main bearings and the rear crankshaft seal (two-piece) can be replaced without removing the crankshaft. 2. Install main bearings in cylinder block and bearing caps. Lubricate bearings with engine oil and carefully install crankshaft in cylinder block. 3. Install bearing caps. Make sure arrows on bearing caps are toward front (fan end) of engine. Push crankshaft forward and measure clearance at front side of rear main bearing. The correct clearance is 0.050 to 0.20 mm (0.002 to 0.008 in.). See Figure 44.

4. Tighten capscrews for bearing caps to 70 N•m (52 lbf ft). Move crankshaft forward and backward to align rear main bearing. Tighten capscrews for all bearing caps to 106 N•m (78 lbf ft). On late model engines, tighten capscrews for bearing caps to 20 N•m (177 lbf in) on the first pass. Move crankshaft forward and backward to align rear main bearing. Tighten capscrews for all bearing caps an additional 73 degrees on the final pass. 5. Install connecting rods, oil pump, and oil pan. Install flywheel and other parts. 6. On late model engines with a one-piece seal, install seal in retainer. Use new gasket and install seal retainer. See Figure 45. Tighten screws and nut to 15 N•m (133 lbf in).

A. SEAL REMOVAL NOTCHES 1. 2. 3. 4.

CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL SEAL RETAINER ENGINE BLOCK

5. 6. 7. 8.

GASKET STUD SCREW NUT

Figure 45. One-Piece Rear Seal

23


Piston and Connecting Rod Assemblies Repair

600 SRM 590

Piston and Connecting Rod Assemblies Repair CONNECTING ROD BEARINGS, REPLACE NOTE: Connecting rod bearings are insert bearings that do not use shims for adjustment. These bearings are available in a standard size and the following undersizes: 0.025 mm (0.001 in.), 0.051 mm (0.002 in.), 0.254 mm (0.010 in.), and 0.508 mm (0.020 in.). If a bearing on a journal is worn, both the upper and lower half of the bearing must be replaced.

envelope for Plastigage® to measure width of plastic at its widest point. The scale will indicate the clearance in millimeters or thousandths of an inch. See Figure 47.

1. Remove oil sump and oil pump. 2. Mark caps for connecting rods so they can be installed in their correct locations and positions. 3. Push connecting rod away from crankshaft and remove upper bearing half. Wipe oil from bearing halves and bearing journal. Make sure all parts from each rod assembly remain together.

Figure 46. Plastigage® on Bearing Journal

4. Use a micrometer to measure bearing journal. The bearing journal must be within the following specifications: Out-of-round less than 0.0254 mm (0.001 in.) Taper less than 0.0254 mm (0.001 in.) If bearing journals are not within specifications, crankshaft must be removed and bearing journal ground to an undersize. If bearing journal cannot be repaired so bearing journal is a correct undersize, crankshaft must be replaced. See Engine Specifications, Crankshaft. 5. If bearing journal is within specifications, measure clearance between new bearing and crankshaft. Use Plastigage® or equivalent to check clearance: a. Put a piece of Plastigage® across the full width of the bearing journal as shown in Figure 46. Do not rotate crankshaft when Plastigage® is between bearing and its journal. b. Install bearing cap and tighten bearing cap nuts first to 27 N•m (240 lbf in) and then an additional 70 degrees. c. Remove bearing cap. The Plastigage® will be compressed and wider and will adhere to either the bearing or its journal. Use scale on

24

Figure 47. Measuring Plastigage® on Bearing Journal d. If clearance is greater than specifications, select a new undersize bearing set and install it. Measure clearance again. If clearance cannot meet specifications with available undersize bearings, bearing journal must be ground to a new undersize. If bearing journal is already at maximum undersize, crankshaft must be replaced. e. If clearance is within specifications, lubricate bearing with engine oil and install bearing and bearing cap. First tighten nuts on bearing caps to 27 N•m (240 lbf in). After this step, tighten nuts an additional 70 degrees.


600 SRM 590 6. When all rod bearings have been replaced, use the following procedure to check side clearances between connecting rods and crankshaft:

Piston and Connecting Rod Assemblies Repair 7. Push connecting rod and piston from cylinder. Temporarily install bearing cap on connecting rod to keep parts together.

a. Use a hammer to lightly hit connecting rod parallel to crankshaft journal to make sure there is clearance.

DISASSEMBLE

b. Measure side clearance between caps for connecting rods and crankshaft. See Figure 48 and Engine Specifications.

The pistons are aluminum alloy and can be damaged if they are hit with a hard object. The grooves for the piston rings are machined to close tolerances. Use a tool made to clean the grooves of the piston rings. Do not use a wire brush to clean a piston.

CAUTION

1. Remove piston rings from pistons. 2. Use a press to remove piston pins from piston. See Figure 49.

Figure 48. Measuring Connecting Rods Side Clearance

PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLIES, REMOVE 1. Remove oil sump and oil pump. 2. Remove cylinder head as described in Cylinder Head Repair, Remove and Disassemble. 3. If engine has been in service for many hours, a ridge can be worn in the top of the cylinder. This ridge can be removed with a ridge reamer tool. Turn crankshaft to lower piston to bottom of stroke in its cylinder. Put cloth on top of piston for a collector of metal particles. Use a ridge reamer to remove ridge at top of cylinder. 4. Clean carbon from top of each cylinder. 5. Put an identification mark on top of each piston. 6. Remove caps and bearings from each connecting rod. Keep caps and bearings with their original piston assemblies. Mark caps so they will be installed again in their original positions. Do not mix parts.

Figure 49. Piston Pin Removal

25


Piston and Connecting Rod Assemblies Repair

600 SRM 590

PISTON, CLEAN AND INSPECT WARNING Commercial cleaning solvents can be flammable and toxic and can cause severe skin irritation. When using commercial cleaning solvents, always comply with the solvent manufacturer’s recommended safety precautions. Compressed air can move particles so they cause injury to the user or to other personnel. Make sure the path of the compressed air is away from all personnel. Wear protective goggles or a face shield to prevent injury to the eyes. 1. Use solvent to clean pistons and connecting rods. Use compressed air to dry parts. 2. Clean piston ring grooves with a ring groove cleaning tool. 3. Clean piston oil lubrication holes and slots. 4. Inspect pistons for wear, cracks, and damage. Replace a piston that is worn or damaged.

Figure 50. Cylinder Bore Measurement Measure cylinder bore in positions from top to bottom to find any taper from wear. A normal wear pattern for a cylinder bore is shown in Figure 51. A cylinder that has a taper (measurement A that is 0.127 mm (0.005 in.) greater than measurement B) must have a new bore. A tool called a hone can be used to remove a small amount of taper from a cylinder bore. Use a boring machine to repair a badly worn cylinder. The boring machine will make a more accurate cylinder bore. The hone is then used to finish the surface of the cylinder bore.

NOTE: If the cylinder bore must be repaired, the piston must be changed to the correct oversize. Check clearance of piston in its cylinder after surface of cylinder bore has been finished with a hone. 5. Check clearance of piston pin in piston. The normal clearance is shown in the Engine Specifications. The piston pin will normally fall from the hole in the piston by its own weight. The piston pin is a press fit in the connecting rod. The piston and piston pin are a matched set and must be replaced as a unit if the clearances are greater than the specifications.

CYLINDER BORES, INSPECT AND REPAIR Inspect cylinder bores for wear and damage. Measure cylinder bores in several positions as shown in Figure 50. Measure cylinder bore at right angles to centerline to find any distortion from wear. A cylinder that is out-of-round greater than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) must be repaired.

26

Figure 51. Pattern for Normal Cylinder Wear A cylinder bore that has been repaired with a hone or a boring machine must be fitted with a piston that is the correct size. Measure outer diameter of piston and inner diameter of cylinder bore as shown in Figure 52. Using different oversize pistons in the engine does not affect the dynamic balance of the engine. Replacement pistons from standard size to 0.508 mm (0.020 in.) oversize normally have the same weight. The clearance specifications between a piston and its cylinder bore is shown in Engine Specifications.


600 SRM 590

Piston and Connecting Rod Assemblies Repair

PISTON RINGS

clearances are shown in the Engine Specifications. Replace piston if clearances are greater than specifications.

NOTE: Check clearance of piston rings in cylinder after surface of cylinder has been finished with a hone. New piston rings are available for the following piston sizes: standard size, and 0.127 mm (0.005 in.), 0.254 mm (0.010 in.), 0.508 mm (0.020 in.), and 0.762 mm (0.030 in.) oversize. The piston rings must match the size of the piston on which they are installed. Check side clearance and end clearance of piston rings as described in the following paragraphs.

2. Measure end clearance of each piston ring as shown in Figure 54. The end clearances are shown in the Engine Specifications. Install piston ring into cylinder where it will be used. Use a thickness gauge to measure the amount of end clearance. Replace piston if clearances are greater than the specifications.

Each compression ring has a mark on one surface. This mark must be toward the top of the cylinder when the piston ring is installed. The No. 1 compression ring normally has a chrome or molybdenum surface.

Figure 53. Piston Ring and Groove Clearance Check

A. PISTON GAUGE POINT

B. BORE GAUGE POINT

Figure 52. Piston and Cylinder Bore Gauge Points The oil control ring has three pieces. There are two thin steel rings separated by a spacer. 1. Measure clearance between piston ring and groove in piston as shown in Figure 53. The

Figure 54. Piston Rings End Clearance Check

27


Piston and Connecting Rod Assemblies Repair

600 SRM 590

ASSEMBLE

Table 1. Piston Rings Arrangement on Piston

NOTE: There are notches cast in the top of all pistons to indicate the correct assembly and installation. The pistons must always be installed with this notch toward the fan end of the engine. See Table 1.

A Position of Gap for Spacer of Oil Ring

The connecting rods have a notch cast in the bearing journal as shown in Figure 55. This notch must be opposite the notch on the top of the piston when the piston and connecting rod are assembled. On later engines the flanges on the connecting rods and caps should face to the front of the engine on the left bank and to the rear of the engine on the right bank.

Fan End of Engine

B Position of Gap for Oil Ring C Position of Gap for Second Compression Ring D Position of Gap for First Compression Ring

PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLIES, INSTALL 1. Lubricate assembly with engine oil during installation. Arrange piston rings on piston as shown in Table 1. Install ring compressor on piston. 2. Make sure notch in piston is toward fan end of engine. Install piston and connecting rod assemblies in cylinder bores.

1. NOTCHES ON ROD OPPOSITE NOTCH IN PISTON Figure 55. Connecting Rod Identification 1. Assemble connecting rod to piston. Make sure the orientation of connecting rod and piston are correct as described in the NOTE above. Use a press to install piston pin into piston and connecting rod. Lubricate piston pin with engine oil during installation. 2. Check clearances of piston rings as described in Piston Rings. Install piston rings on piston as shown in Table 1.

28

3. Install bearings and caps for connecting rods. Tighten nuts. See the procedure in Connecting Rod Bearings, Replace. 4. Check side clearance of each connecting rod after bearing cap is installed. See the procedure in Connecting Rod Bearings, Replace. 5. Install cylinder head as described in Cylinder Head Repair, Assemble and Install. 6. Install oil pump and oil sump.


600 SRM 590

Flywheel and Flywheel Housing Repair

Flywheel and Flywheel Housing Repair FLYWHEEL, REPAIR 1. Replace ring gear (if applicable) on flywheel. During removal or installation, do not heat gear to more than 230 C (450 F). 2. During installation, push ring gear fully against flywheel. 3. The bearing in the flywheel can be replaced. Push old bearing from flywheel and push in new bearing.

ENGINE ADAPTER H6.00-7.00XL (H135-155XL) The engine adapter is used on engines with a manual transmission. When the seal in the adapter is replaced, use a sealant (Hyster Part No. 246108) between seal and adapter. When installing adapter on engine, make sure O-rings are installed under washers. Tighten capscrews for adapter to 48 N•m (35 lbf ft). See Figure 56.

FLYWHEEL, INSTALL H3.50-5.00XL (H70-110XL), S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL), S6.00-7.00XL (S135-155XL) NOTE: For model H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM), refer to the section Cooling System 700 SRM 740 for hydraulic pump drive. When installing the flywheel on these units, refer to the section Hydraulic Pump Drive Assembly.

H6.00-7.00XL (H135-155XL) Make sure dowel pin is installed in crankshaft. Install flywheel. Units with a manual transmission: Make sure O-ring is installed between flywheel and crankshaft. Use a sealant (Hyster Part No. 246108) on heads of capscrews. Tighten capscrews for flywheel to 79 N•m (58 lbf ft). Units with a powershift transmission: Tighten capscrews to 79 N•m (58 lbf ft).

FLYWHEEL HOUSING H3.50-5.00XL (H70-110XL), H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM), S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL), S6.00-7.00XL (S135-155XL) The flywheel housing on these units has the parts for the hydraulic pump drive assembly. When doing any service to the housing, refer to section Hydraulic Pump Drive Assembly.

1. 2. 3. 4.

ENGINE ADAPTER ENGINE FLYWHEEL PILOT BEARING

5. 6. 7. 8.

SEAL CAPSCREW WASHER O-RING

Figure 56. Engine Adapter H6.00-7.00XL (H135-155XL)

29


Fan Mount Assembly Repair (Late Models)

600 SRM 590

Coolant Pump Repair If any parts of the coolant pump are worn or damaged, replace coolant pump. Parts for the coolant pump are not available separately. During installation, apply a sealant to gasket for coolant pump.

Tighten capscrews for coolant pump to 41 N•m (30 lbf ft). Adjust tension of belt as described in the Periodic Maintenance section for your lift truck.

Thermostat Replacement CAUTION DO NOT operate the engine without a thermostat. The engine and cooling system can be damaged.

When installing the thermostat, make sure flange is completely in its seat. Install gasket and housing. Tighten capscrews to 25 N•m (221 lbf in).

Fan Mount Repair (Early Models) The fan mount has the shaft and bearings for the fan. On some early units the mount has an idler pulley for adjustment of the fan belt. When the fan is installed, tighten capscrews to 20 N•m (177 lbf in). See Figure 57.

1. INNER SNAP RING 2. OUTER SNAP RING

3. BEARING 4. FAN MOUNT 5. SHAFT

Figure 57. Fan Mount (Early Models)

Fan Mount Assembly Repair (Late Models) NOTE: For model H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM), refer to the section Cooling System 700 SRM 740.

WARNING Do not try to disassemble the belt tensioner. There is a strong spring inside the tensioner that, if removed, can cause an injury.

30

The fan mount assembly includes brackets and mounts that hold fan, belt tensioner, alternator, and hydraulic pump (where used) to engine. When the fan is installed, tighten capscrews to 20 N•m (177 lbf in). See Figure 58.


600 SRM 590

Fan Mount Assembly Repair (Late Models)

NOTE: S/H6.00-7.00XL (S/H135-155XL) SHOWN, OTHERS SIMILAR. A. EARLY MODELS

B. LATE MODELS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

MOUNT BEARING SNAP RING SHAFT HUB SPACER FAN PULLEY

FAN DRIVE BELT BELT TENSIONER CRANKSHAFT PULLEY BRACKET ALTERNATOR BRACKET TENSIONER BRACKET

Figure 58. Fan Mount Assembly

31


Drive Belt Installation

600 SRM 590

Drive Belt Installation NOTE: For model H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM), refer to the section Cooling System 700 SRM 740. 1. Check alignment of fan, alternator, and crankshaft pulleys. The pulleys must be aligned correctly to prevent damage to drive belt. See Figure 59.

1. BRACKET 2. UPPER HOLE 3. PULLEY

4. TENSIONER 5. ALIGNMENT LUG 6. LOWER HOLE

Figure 60. Drive Belt Tensioner Installation

CAUTION Do not use a pry bar to install the drive belt on the pulleys. The pry bar can damage the drive belt and pulleys. 3. Loosen top capscrew at alternator mount and move alternator toward engine. Install drive belt over fan and onto pulleys. NOTE: S/H3.50-5.50XL (S/H70-120XL) SHOWN, OTHERS SIMILAR. 1. ALTERNATOR PULLEY 2. FAN PULLEY 3. WATER PUMP PULLEY

4. CRANKSHAFT PULLEY 5. DRIVE BELT 6. TENSIONER PULLEY

Figure 59. Drive Belt Arrangement 2. Install drive belt tensioner on bracket and tighten bolts. See Figure 60. Make sure lug on back of tensioner fits into lower hole in bracket for new drive belts. Do not use the upper hole when installing a NEW drive belt. Putting the lug in the upper hole is only necessary to extend the life of a used drive belt.

32

4. Use a socket with a long handle on capscrew for the pulley (Figure 60) on belt tensioner. (The capscrew has left-hand threads and will not loosen.) Use the handle to pull the pulley away from drive belt. While holding pulley away from belt, pull alternator away from engine (as far as it will move) and tighten capscrew at mount. Release pulley for belt tensioner. 5. After installation is complete, check position of indicator on tensioner. When tension is correct, indicator will be in the area (3) as shown in Figure 61. If indicator is in the area as shown by (4), change position of tensioner to upper hole (Figure 60). Use the procedure described in Step 4. If tension on drive belt is still not correct, install new drive belt. Also check that brackets and pulleys are installed correctly.


600 SRM 590

Valve Clearance Adjustment (Early Models)

1. TENSIONER 2. INDICATOR

3. TENSION IS CORRECT 4. ADJUST TENSION OR REPLACE DRIVE BELT Figure 61. Drive Belt Tension Check

Valve Clearance Adjustment (Early Models) NOTE: The early models use rocker arm studs that are pressed into the head. 1. Disconnect negative cable at battery. Remove rocker covers. 2. Rotate engine until mark on vibration damper or crankshaft pulley is aligned with 0 timing mark on timing tab. Make sure valves for No. 1 cylinder are closed. If valves are moving as 0 timing mark is reached, engine is in firing position for No. 4 cylinder; rotate crankshaft one more turn to reach firing position for No. 1 cylinder. See Figure 62.

4. Adjust valve clearance by loosening nut for rocker arm until push rod is loose. Tighten nut for rocker arm until there is no clearance at push rod. Check clearance by rotating push rod while tightening nut. When there is no clearance at push rod, tighten nut for rocker arm one full turn. The additional turn of the nut will put the push rod in the seat of the valve lifter. 5. After the valves are adjusted in Step 3, rotate engine one full turn. Make sure timing marks are aligned. The valves on the No. 4 cylinder will be closed. When engine is in this position, adjust valves for the following cylinders:

3. When engine is in No. 1 firing position, adjust valves for the following cylinders:

Inlet Valves for Numbers. 4, 5, and 6 and Exhaust Valves for Numbers. 2, 3, and 4.

Inlet Valves for Numbers: 1, 2, and 3 and Exhaust Valves for Numbers: 1, 5, and 6.

6. Install valve covers. Connect battery cable. Start engine and check for correct operation.

33


Compression Check

600 SRM 590

NOTE: Early models shown.

Figure 62. Valve Clearance Adjustment

Valve Clearance Adjustment (New Models) NOTE: The new models use rocker arm studs screwed into the head. The new models have a valve system that is not adjustable. After the valve system has been assembled,

tighten nuts for rocker arms to 25 N•m (221 lbf in). The hydraulic valve lifter acts as an automatic adjuster and maintains zero lash in the valve train.

Compression Check Check the compression as follows: 1. Remove all spark plugs.

b. Crank engine approximately ten revolutions to distribute oil.

2. Make sure battery is fully charged.

c. Install compression gauge and do the same tests as described in Step 3.

3. Install a compression gauge. Hold throttle open and crank engine with starter. The minimum pressure is 690 kPa (100 psi). The lowest pressure in a cylinder must not be less than 70% of the highest pressure.

d. If compression pressure increases to a normal reading, the low pressure was caused by worn or damaged piston rings. The cylinder bore can also be damaged.

4. If the readings are lower than the minimum readings, there is a problem with the valves, piston rings, or cylinder head gasket. Do the following tests to find the problem: a. Add approximately 30 ml (1 oz) of engine oil to each cylinder at spark plug hole.

34

e. If compression pressure does not increase, the low pressure was caused by worn valves, valve seats, or valve guides. f.

If low pressure readings are in two cylinders next to each other, the cylinder head gasket can be leaking.


600 SRM 590

Engine Specifications

Engine Specifications ENGINE DATA Number of cylinders

6

Firing order

1 6 5 4 3 2

Bore

101.62 to 101.64 mm (4.0008 to 4.0016 in.)

Stroke

88.39 mm (3.480 in.)

Compression Ratio

9.2:1

Displacement

4.3 liter (262.4 in. 3 )

Governor speed

See Periodic Maintenance section for each model of lift truck.

CYLINDER HEAD Valve seat specifications

See Figure 4 and Figure 6.

Valve seat width (inlet valves) Early Models

1.02 to 1.65 mm (0.040 to 0.065 in.)

Late Models

0.89 to 1.52 mm (0.035 to 0.060 in.)

Valve seat width (exhaust valves) Early Models

1.65 to 2.49 mm (0.065 to 0.098 in.)

Late Models

1.57 to 2.36 mm (0.062 to 0.093 in.)

Clearance between inlet valve and guide Early Models

0.02 to 0.09 mm (0.001 to 0.0035 in.)

Late Models

0.0254 mm (0.001 in.) max

Clearance between exhaust valve and guide Early Models

0.02 to 0.12 mm (0.001 to 0.0047 in.)

Late Models

0.0508 mm (0.002 in.) max

Valve spring, free length

See Figure 7.

35


Engine Specifications

600 SRM 590

HYDRAULIC VALVE LIFTER Leak rate

12 to 90 seconds with 50-lb load

Body diameter

21.3868 to 21.4046 mm (0.8420 to 0.8427 in.)

Plunger travel

3.175 mm (0.125 in.)

Clearance in bore

0.0635 mm (0.0025 in.)

Lifter bore diameter

21.425 to 21.450 mm (0.8435 to 0.8445 in.)

CAMSHAFT Variation from front to rear of a cam lobe

Taper with larger dimension away from No. 1 piston

Bearing journals, diameter (All engines)

47.45 to 47.48 mm (1.8681 to 1.8693 in.)

Bearing journals, clearance

0.01778 to 0.9685 mm (0.0007 to 0.0381 in.)

Variation of a bearing journal in either diameter or axial direction

0.03 mm (0.001 in.)

Axial clearance

0.10 to 0.30 mm (0.004 to 0.012 in.)

PISTONS Piston diameter (see gauge points in Figure 52) Cylinder Bore Out-of-round (see Figure 50)

0.0508 mm (0.002 in.)

Maximum cylinder taper

0.025 mm (0.001 in.)

Clearance at bottom of cylinder

0.068 mm (0.0027 in.)

Piston ring to groove clearance for piston rings (see Figure 53) Compression rings

0.107 mm (0.0042 in.)

Oil ring to groove clearance Early Models

0.203 mm (0.008 in.) max

Late Models

0.508 to 2.032 mm (0.02 to 0.08 in.)

Piston ring end clearance (see Figure 54) Compression rings Early Models

0.89 mm (0.035 in.)

Late Models

1.524 to 0.88 mm (0.06 to 0.035 in.)

Oil ring Early Models

1.65 mm (0.065 in.)

Late Models

0.23 to 1.65 mm (0.009 to 0.065 in.)

Piston pin to piston clearance

0.025 mm (0.001 in.)

Piston pin to connecting rod clearance

0.020 to 0.040 mm (0.0008 to 0.0016 in.)

36


600 SRM 590

Engine Specifications

CRANKSHAFT Diameter of main bearing journal Number 1

62.20 to 62.22 mm (2.4488 to 2.4496 in.)

Number 2, 3

62.20 to 62.21 mm (2.4488 to 2.4492 in.)

Number 4

62.18 to 62.20 mm (2.4480 to 2.4488 in.)

Out-of-round of main bearing journal (maximum)

0.0254 mm (0.001 in.)

Taper of main bearing journal (maximum)

0.0254 mm (0.001 in.)

Clearance between journals and main bearings Early Models Number 1

0.025 to 0.038 mm (0.0010 to 0.0015 in.)

Number 2, 3

0.025 to 0.064 mm (0.0010 to 0.0025 in.)

Number 4

0.064 to 0.090 mm (0.0025 to 0.0035 in.)

Late Models Number 1

0.0254 to 0.05 mm (0.0010 to 0.0020 in.)

Number 2, 3, 4

0.025 to 0.006 mm (0.0010 to 0.0002 in.)

Available undersize main bearings

0.0254 mm ( 0.001 in.) 0.0508 mm ( 0.002 in.) 0.2285 mm ( 0.009 in.) 0.25 mm ( 0.010 in.) 0.50 mm ( 0.020 in.)

Axial Clearance (crankshaft to thrust surface main bearing) Early Models

0.15 to 0.18 mm (0.006 to 0.007 in.)

Late Models

0.050 to 0.20 mm (0.002 to 0.008 in.)

CONNECTING RODS Diameter of connecting rod journals

57.12 to 57.14 mm (2.2488 to 2.2496 in.)

Out-of-round of bearing journal (maximum)

0.0254 mm (0.001 in.)

Taper of bearing journal (maximum)

0.0254 mm (0.001 in.)

Clearance between crankshaft journals and connecting rod bearings

0.076 mm (0.0030 in.)

Available undersize connecting rod bearings

0.0254 mm ( 0.001 in.) 0.0508 mm ( 0.002 in.) 0.254 mm ( 0.010 in.) 0.508 mm ( 0.020 in.)

Side clearance of connecting rod to crankshaft

37


Torque Specifications

600 SRM 590

Early Models

0.15 to 0.36 mm (0.006 to 0.014 in.)

Late Models

0.15 to 0.44 mm (0.006 to 0.017 in.)

BALANCE SHAFT Front bearing journal diameter

54.99 to 55.00 mm (2.1650 to 2.1654 in.)

Rear Bearing Journal Diameter

38.08 to 38.10 mm (1.4992 to 1.500 in.)

Rear Bearing Journal Clearance

0.025 to 0.091 mm (0.001 to 0.0036 in.)

COOLING SYSTEM Thermostat

82 C (180 F)

LUBRICATION SYSTEM Oil pressure @ 2500 rpm

170 to 241 kPa (25 to 35 psi)

Minimum oil pressure Early Model @ idle rpm

48 kPa (7 psi)

Late Model @ 1000 rpm

41.4 kPa (6 psi)

Oil pressure switch ON

20 to 39 kPa (2.9 to 5.7 psi)

Torque Specifications Alternator Pulley 61 N•m (45 lbf ft)

Cooling Fan to Pulley 24 N•m (212 lbf in)

Balance Shaft Gear Capscrew 20 N•m (177 lbf in) Plus 35 Degrees

Cylinder Head See Text

Balance Shaft Retainer Capscrews 14 N•m (124 lbf in)

Distributor Mount Capscrew 34 N•m (25 lbf ft)

Camshaft Retainer Screws 14 N•m (124 lbf in)

Exhaust Manifold 15 N•m (133 lbf in) - first step 30 N•m (22 lbf ft) - second step

Camshaft Sprocket Capscrews 28 N•m (21 lbf ft)

Flywheel 80 N•m (60 lbf ft)

Camshaft Sprocket Nut 28 N•m (21 lbf ft)

Flywheel Housing 48 N•m (35 lbf ft)

Chain Control Block for Hydraulic Pump Drive 19 N•m (168 lbf in) with Adhesive Sealant

Inlet Manifold to Cylinder Head (Early Models) 48 N•m (35 lbf ft)

Connecting Rod Cap See Text

Inlet Manifold to Cylinder Head (Late Models) 15 N•m (133 lbf in) - in three steps

Coolant Pump to Engine Block 41 N•m (30 lbf ft)

38

Main Bearing Cap 106 N•m (78 lbf ft)


600 SRM 590

Troubleshooting

Motor Mount to Engine S/H3.50-5.00XL (S/H70-110XL) 31 N•m (23 lbf ft) S/H6.00-7.00XL (S/H135-155XL) 50 N•m (37 lbf ft) Oil Pump Cover 14 N•m (124 lbf in)

Rocker Arm Cover 10 N•m (89 lbf in) Rocker Arm Nuts (Late Models) 25 N•m (18 lbf ft) Rocker Arm Studs 47 N•m (35 lbf ft)

Oil Pump to Crankcase 90 N•m (66 lbf ft)

Rocker Arm Bolts (Model Year 2002 or Later Engines) 30 N•m (22 lbf ft)

Oil Pressure Switch 27 N•m (20 lbf ft)

Thermostat Housing 25 N•m (18 lbf ft)

Oil Screen Support to Crankcase 50 N•m (37 lbf ft) Oil Sump to Crankcase (Early Models) (1/4-20) 10 N•m (89 lbf in) (5/16-18) 19 N•m (168 lbf in) Oil Sump to Crankcase (Late Models) Capscrews 25 N•m (18 lbf ft) Nuts 25 N•m (18 lbf ft)

Timing Cover 14 N•m (124 lbf in) Valve Lifter Retainer Capscrews 16 N•m (142 lbf in) Vibration Damper 95 N•m (70 lbf ft)

Rear Oil Seal Retainer Screws and Nut 15 N•m (133 lbf in)

Troubleshooting PROBLEM When the key switch is in the START position, engine does not crank.

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Battery is damaged.

Install new battery.

Battery is not fully charged.

Charge battery.

Connections at the battery are loose or they have corrosion.

Clean and tighten battery connections.

Key switch does not operate correctly.

Check operation of the key switch. Check electrical wiring. Install new key switch.

Starter or starter circuit is damaged.

Check starter, starter relay, and wiring. Install new parts as required.

There is a seizure of parts in the engine or ring gear is damaged.

Rotate crankshaft manually. If crankshaft will rotate, check ring gear, if not overhaul engine.

39


Troubleshooting

PROBLEM The engine will not start.

The engine does not run smoothly.

The engine does not have enough power.

40

600 SRM 590

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

No fuel in fuel tank or fuel not entering engine.

Fill tank with correct fuel. If LPG, open shutoff valve. Check fuel delivery system (fuel pump, lines, etc.). Install new parts as required.

Cranking speed is too slow. Battery is not fully charged.

Charge battery or install new battery.

Valves are worn or damaged.

Grind valves. Install new valves.

Low compression. The piston rings are worn or damaged.

Install new piston rings. Overhaul engine.

Ignition system does not operate correctly.

Check spark delivery system. Repair or install new parts as required.

Ignition timing is not correct.

Adjust timing. Check timing chain and sprockets.

Valves are not adjusted correctly.

Adjust valves.

Head gasket is damaged.

Install new head gasket.

Cylinder head has cracks.

Install new cylinder head.

There is a leak in the intake system.

Repair leak.

Ignition timing is not correct.

Adjust timing.

Spark plugs are worn or damaged.

Install new spark plugs.

Ignition system does not operate correctly.

See sections for Electrical Systems for more information.

Restriction in air inlet. The air filter is dirty.

Check air restriction indicator. Clean or install new filter element.

Fuel is the wrong type or grade.

Drain fuel. Fill with correct fuel.

Ignition timing is not correct.

Check and adjust timing.

Valve mechanism is damaged.

Repair or install new parts.

Piston assemblies are damaged.

Repair or install new parts. Overhaul engine.

Valve timing is not correct.

Adjust valve timing.

Exhaust system has restrictions.

Remove restrictions. parts as necessary.

Install new


600 SRM 590

PROBLEM There is noise inside the engine.

The engine makes noise during acceleration.

Troubleshooting

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Main bearings are worn or damaged.

Install new main bearings or overhaul engine.

Bearings for the connecting rods are worn or damaged.

Install new rod bearings or overhaul engine.

Pistons or rings are worn or damaged.

Install new rings and piston or overhaul engine.

Engine is too hot.

Check thermostat. Check cooling system (radiator, fan, drive belt, etc.). Clean and repair as required.

Low oil pressure. Not enough oil in the engine.

Check oil level. Add oil to full mark on dipstick. Check oil pressure. Repair oil pump. Overhaul engine.

Flywheel is loose.

Tighten flywheel mounting bolts.

There is a leak in the exhaust system.

Repair leak.

Valve mechanism is damaged.

Repair or install new parts as required.

Valves are not adjusted correctly.

Check and adjust valve clearance.

Spark plugs are dirty.

Clean spark plugs and reinstall.

Spark plugs are the wrong type or heat range.

Install new spark plugs of correct type and heat range.

Ignition timing is not correct.

Check and adjust ignition timing.

Fuel is the wrong type or grade.

Drain fuel. Fill with correct fuel.

There is too much carbon in the combustion chamber (preignition).

Put truck in hard work cycle. Add engine cleaner to fuel. Do top engine overhaul.

Engine is too hot.

Check thermostat. Check cooling system (radiator, fan, drive belt, etc.). Clean or repair as required.

Fuel system is not adjusted correctly.

Adjust fuel system.

41


Troubleshooting

PROBLEM The engine is too hot during operation.

The bearings in the engine are damaged.

42

600 SRM 590

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

There is not enough coolant in the cooling system.

Check coolant level in radiator and coolant recovery bottle. Add coolant to correct level.

Radiator is dirty.

Drain and flush radiator. Clean radiator fins with high pressure air or water in reverse direction of normal airflow. Refill with clean coolant.

Drive belt for water pump is not adjusted correctly, worn, or broken.

Check water pump drive belt. Adjust or install new belt as required.

Thermostat is wrong heat range or does not operate correctly.

Check heat range. Install new thermostat.

Cooling system has restrictions.

Drain and back-flush engine and radiator. Refill with clean coolant.

Water pump worn or damaged.

Install new water pump.

Exhaust system has restrictions.

Check the exhaust system. Remove restrictions.

There is not enough oil in the engine.

Add oil to full mark on dipstick.

Oil in the engine is dirty.

Make sure dirt is not entering engine through air inlet system. Drain and fill with clean oil. Reduce time interval for oil and filter change.

Oil in the engine is the wrong type.

Drain and fill with correct oil.

Oil pump is worn or damaged.

Install new oil pump.

Connecting rod(s) and bearings have damage.

Check and repair crankshaft. Install new connecting rods and bearings.

Camshaft and bearings have damage.

Install new camshaft and bearings.

Passages for oil have restrictions.

Remove restrictions or overhaul engine.

Bearings are not installed correctly.

Install new bearings or overhaul engine.



HIGH ENERGY IGNITION (HEI) SYSTEM GM ENGINES S30-120E, S40-50F, S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL), S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), S6.00-7.00XL (S135-155XL), H30-60H, H60-110E, H110-150F, H3.50-5.00XL (H70-110XL), H6.00-7.00XL (H135-155XL), H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM), H150-250E, H150-275H, H250-300A, H300-350B, P150-200B, A66-80A, Z90A, S/H2.00-3.20XM (GM 3.0 LITER WHEN EQUIPPED WITH LPG), M200-400H, GM 6.0 LITER V8-366 ENGINE WHEN USED IN H8.00-12.00XL (H165-280XL), H13.00-16XL (H300-360XL), H10.00XL-12EC (H330XL-EC), H12.00XL-12EC (H360XL-EC)

PART NO. 899788

2200 SRM 107


High Energy Ignition (HEI) System

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS Description ........................................................................................................................................................... Distributor Repair................................................................................................................................................ Remove ............................................................................................................................................................. Disassemble ..................................................................................................................................................... Assemble .......................................................................................................................................................... Install, If Crankshaft WAS NOT Rotated when Distributor was Removed ................................................. Install, If Crankshaft WAS Rotated when Distributor was Removed .......................................................... Ignition Coil Replacement ................................................................................................................................. Some Four- and Six-Cylinder Models ........................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... V8, Some Four- and Six-Cylinder Models .................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Electronic Module Replacement........................................................................................................................ Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Sensing Coil Replacement ................................................................................................................................. Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Spark Plugs Replacement.................................................................................................................................. Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Visual Check....................................................................................................................................................... High Voltage Wires Check ................................................................................................................................. Ignition Coil Check ............................................................................................................................................ Coil in Distributor Cap Design ..................................................................................................................... Separate Coil Design ..................................................................................................................................... Sensing Coil, Check ....................................................................................................................................... Electronic Module Check ................................................................................................................................... Ignition Timing Adjustment.............................................................................................................................. GM V8-366 (6-liter) Ignition System Check ..................................................................................................... GM V6-LPG (4.3 liter) GM V6-LPG (4.3 liter) Ignition Timing and Idle Speed Adjustment ........................ Specifications...................................................................................................................................................... Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................................................

1 3 3 3 8 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 16 16 16 17 17 17 19 19 19 20

This section is for the following models: S30-120E, S40-50F, S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL), S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), S6.00-7.00XL (S135-155XL), H30-60H, H60-110E, H110-150F, H3.50-5.00XL (H70-110XL), H6.00-7.00XL (H135-155XL), H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM), H150-250E, H150-275H, H250-300A, H300-350B, P150-200B, A66-80A, Z90A, S/H2.00-3.20XM (GM 3.0 liter when equipped with LPG), M200-400H, GM 6.0 liter V8-366 engine when used in H8.00-12.00XL (H165-280XL), H13.00-16XL (H300-360XL), H10.00XL-12EC (H330XL-EC), H12.00XL-12EC (H360XL-EC)

©2002 HYSTER COMPANY

i


2200 SRM 107

Description

Description This section has a description and the service procedures for the High Energy Ignition (HEI) system for General Motors engines. See Figure 1. The High Energy Ignition (HEI) system generates the spark which starts combustion. The main parts of the system are: the battery, key switch, distributor, ignition coil, spark plugs, and the wires. If the engine is starting or running, current flows from the battery to the key switch, primary winding of the ignition coil, electronic module and returns to the battery. A magnetic field is generated in the primary winding of the coil when current flows through it. The pole piece and sensing coil sends a signal to the electronic module to interrupt primary current. When the current flow in the primary windings are interrupted, the decreasing magnetic field generates a high voltage in the secondary windings of the coil.

of the ignition coil. The flow of current generates a magnetic field around both windings. When the sensing coil removes the voltage signal, the electronic module deactivates OFF. Current stops flowing in the primary winding. The magnetic field decreases quickly. This changing magnetic field generates a high voltage in the secondary winding.

The distributor rotor applies the secondary (high) voltage to the correct spark plug at the correct time. The secondary voltage is applied to the rotor. The rotor transfers this high voltage to one of the terminals in the distributor cap. When the high voltage is applied through the high voltage wire to the spark plug, the spark in the spark plug starts combustion in the cylinder. The parts that generate the voltage signal for the electronic module are shown in Figure 2. The timer core of the distributor shaft has a tooth for each cylinder in the engine. The pole piece also has a tooth for each cylinder. A permanent magnet is fastened under the pole piece. A sensing coil is put in the center of the magnet and pole piece. When the teeth are aligned, the magnetic field from the permanent magnet will have a path. The magnetic field generates a voltage signal in the sensing coil. When the teeth are not aligned, the magnetic path is removed. This disables the magnetic field and the voltage signal. The electronic module is an electronic switch which controls the current in the primary of the ignition coil. The basic circuit is shown in Figure 3. When the electronic module receives a voltage signal from the sensing coil, the electronic module activates ON. Current now flows through the primary winding

1. BATTERY 2. TIMER CORE 3. POLE PIECE/SENSING COIL 4. SPARK PLUG

5. ROTOR 6. DISTRIBUTOR CAP 7. ELECTRONIC MODULE 8. IGNITION COIL 9. KEY SWITCH

Figure 1. HEI System

1


Description

2200 SRM 107

A. TEETH ALIGNED

B. TEETH NOT ALIGNED

1. TIMER CORE 2. POLE PIECE

3. PERMANENT MAGNET 4. SENSING COIL

Figure 2. Voltage Signal

A. MODULE "ON"

B. MODULE "OFF"

1. ELECTRONIC MODULE 2. BATTERY

3. PRIMARY (IGNITION COIL) 4. SECONDARY (IGNITION COIL)

Figure 3. Electronic Module Operation

2


2200 SRM 107

Distributor Repair

Distributor Repair REMOVE WARNING Do not disconnect the spark plug wires when the engine is running. The high voltage can cause electric shock. 1. Disconnect wire from negative terminal of battery. 2. Disconnect primary wiring connector to distributor. Some distributors have the primary wiring connected to the coil and others are connected to the distributor. NOTE: Some four- and six-cylinder models have two latch screws. Some four- and six-cylinder models and all V8 models have four latch screws. 3. Unlock latch screws that fasten the cap to the housing. Remove cap and put it away from the distributor.

CAUTION Do not rotate the engine after making the alignment marks. 4. Make a mark on distributor housing which aligns with rotor. Make a double mark on housing and engine to use during assembly. 5. Remove capscrew and clamp that fastens distributor to engine. Clean area around base of distributor. 6. Lift distributor from engine.

DISASSEMBLE 1. Remove distributor from engine according to the above procedure. 2. If installed, remove two screws that fasten rotor to shaft assembly. Remove rotor.

CAUTION Do not clean the lubricant from the electronic module or the area where it is fastened.

3. If needed, remove electronic module as follows: a. Distributors shown in Figure 4, Figure 5, and Figure 6: Remove two screws which fasten electronic module to housing. Move electronic module to a position where connector can be removed from B and C terminals. Remove connector from electronic module. Carefully disconnect wires from W and G terminals. Remove electronic module. If installed, remove screw from capacitor. Disconnect capacitor from wire connector. Remove capacitor. b. Distributors shown in Figure 7: Remove three screws that fasten electronic module, wiring harness, and capacitor to housing. Disconnect connector for the green and white wire from the electronic module. Remove electronic module, wiring harness, and capacitor from the housing. 4. Make a mark on gear and shaft which can be aligned during assembly.

CAUTION Do not damage the shaft when removing the gear. Hold the gear on a block of wood while removing the pin. 5. Remove pin from gear. Remove gear, shim, and thrust washer if used.

CAUTION Make sure the roll pin area of the shaft is smooth before removing the shaft. 6. Remove shaft assembly from housing.

CAUTION Do not disassemble the pole piece/sensing coil. If damaged, replace as a unit. 7. Remove snap ring/retainer from top of sleeve in center of housing. Remove pole piece/sensing coil and shield, if installed from the sleeve.

3


Distributor Repair

2200 SRM 107

Figure 4. GM-V8, Some Models

4


2200 SRM 107

Distributor Repair Legend for Figure 4

A. DESIGN 1

B. DESIGN 2

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

PIN DRIVE GEAR SHIM THRUST WASHER O-RING WIRING HARNESS HOUSING WIRE RETAINER FELT WASHER

SHIM CAPACITOR SPACER RETAINER POLE PIECE/SENSING COIL SNAP RING ELECTRONIC MODULE IGNITION COIL SEAL SPRING

19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25.

WIRE RETAINER COIL COVER CAP ROTOR CENTRIFUGAL MECHANISM TIMER CORE SHAFT

Figure 5. GM Four-Cylinder and Six-Cylinder Models with Separate Coil

5


Distributor Repair

2200 SRM 107 Legend for Figure 5

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

PIN DRIVE GEAR O-RING WIRING HARNESS HOUSING WIRE RETAINER

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

SCREW DISTRIBUTOR CAP ROTOR SHAFT ASSEMBLY RETAINER SHIELD

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

7. 8. 9. 10.

FELT WASHER SHIM CAPACITOR POLE PIECE/SENSING COIL SNAP RING ELECTRONIC MODULE

SENSING COIL POLE (STATIONARY) BOLT ELECTRONIC MODULE 11. PIN

12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

HOUSING THRUST WASHER SHIM GEAR PIN GASKET

Figure 6. GM V6 Models

6

13. CAP (FOUR-CYLINDER SHOWN) 14. ROTOR 15. TIMER CORE 16. SHAFT 17. CENTRIFUGAL MECHANISM

18. CLAMP 19. BOLT


2200 SRM 107

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

Distributor Repair

SCREW BRACKET CAPACITOR SCREW WIRING HARNESS ELECTRONIC MODULE SNAP RING POLE PIECE/SENSING COIL SCREW SPACER RETAINER* GREASE SEAL HOUSING

13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

THRUST WASHER* SHIM* GEAR PIN SHAFT ASSEMBLY ROTOR SCREW DISTRIBUTOR CAP (V8 SHOWN) 21. RESISTOR BRUSH AND SPRING 22. SEAL

23. 24. 25. 26. 27.

IGNITION COIL SCREW COVER SCREW VACUUM ADVANCE UNIT

*V8 ONLY Figure 7. HEI, Some Models with Coil as Part of Distributor

7


Distributor Repair

CAUTION Do not remove the bushing from the center of the housing. 8. If needed, remove spacer retainer from housing. Remove other parts as follows: a. On distributors shown in Figure 4 and Figure 5, remove shim, felt washer, and wire retainer from housing. Remove wiring from housing. b. On distributors shown in Figure 7, remove plastic retainer that seals the grease.

2200 SRM 107 2. If removed, install spacer retainer and screws. Install pole piece/sensing coil and shield if used. Make sure hole in arm of pole piece connects to pin of retainer. Install snap ring/retainer on top of sleeve. Make sure ring fits in groove. 3. Install distributor shaft. Slowly rotate shaft. Check for equal clearance between pole piece and timer teeth of shaft. If wrong, loosen three screws fastening pole piece. Move pole piece until it is in center. Tighten three screws. 4. Install gear with teeth toward housing as follows: a. Install thrust washer and then shim, if used. Align marks and slide gear on shaft.

WARNING Compressed air can move particles so they cause injury to the user or to other personnel. Make sure the path of the compressed air is away from all personnel. Wear protective goggles or a face shield to prevent injury to the eyes.

CAUTION

CAUTION Put a block under the gear to prevent damage when installing the gear pin. b. Align hole in gear with hole in shaft. Install pin to lock gear to shaft.

CAUTION

Do not use solvents with an oil base to clean electrical parts.

Make sure to put silicone grease (1198757) between the module and the fastening plate.

9. Wash housing, shaft assembly, and gear in solvent. Dry parts with compressed air.

5. Install electronic module as described in the following procedures:

10. Check all parts for damage. Replace damaged parts with new parts.

a. Distributors shown in Figure 4, Figure 5, and Figure 6: If used, install capacitor, but do not tighten screw. Connect wire connector to B and C terminals on electronic module. Apply silicone grease to bottom of electronic module. Fasten electronic module to housing with two screws. Make sure screws are tight. Put wiring grommet in the notch in the housing. Connect pink wire to capacitor terminal. If a black wire is used, connect it to screw that fastens capacitor. Tighten screw. Connect white wire from sensing coil to W terminal on electronic module. Connect green wire from sensing coil to G terminal on electronic module.

ASSEMBLE 1. Fill lubrication reservoir with correct lubricant. Install parts as follows:

CAUTION On four- and six-cylinder distributors shown in Figure 5, make sure the brown wire has a circle shape. a. On distributors shown in Figure 4, Figure 5, and Figure 6, install wiring in correct position in housing. Install wire retainer, felt washer, and shim in housing. b. On distributors shown in Figure 7, install plastic retainer on top of lubrication reservoir.

8

b. Distributors shown in Figure 7: Connect wiring connector to electronic module. Connect capacitor to wiring connector. Apply silicone grease to bottom of electronic module. Put wiring connector assembly into correct position in housing. Make sure wiring grommet fits into notch. Install three fastening


2200 SRM 107 screws and tighten. Install connector for green and white wires to electronic module.

CAUTION The notch on the rotor must fit into the tooth of the centrifugal mechanism. 6. Install rotor and two screws to shaft assembly. Tighten screws.

INSTALL, IF CRANKSHAFT WAS NOT ROTATED WHEN DISTRIBUTOR WAS REMOVED

Distributor Repair 7. Adjust ignition timing according to the procedure in Ignition Timing Adjustment.

INSTALL, IF CRANKSHAFT WAS ROTATED WHEN DISTRIBUTOR WAS REMOVED 1. Find ignition position of the number one cylinder as follows: a. Remove valve cover (left valve cover on V8 350). b. Rotate crankshaft until inlet valve closes.

1. Turn rotor 1/8 turn to the left, past the mark put on the housing during removal.

c. Rotate crankshaft 1/3 turn more. Stop crankshaft when timing mark on pulley aligns with TDC mark.

NOTE: If needed, turn rotor until gears align correctly. The rotor must align with the mark on the housing after installation.

2. Hold distributor just above the installation position. Rotate distributor rotor until it is aligned with number one terminal.

2. Push distributor into position in block. Turn housing until the double mark on the housing aligns with the marks on the engine.

NOTE: If needed, turn rotor until gears align correctly. If needed, rotate oil pump driveshaft with a screwdriver so distributor shaft aligns with oil pump drive. The rotor must align with the number one terminal of the distributor cap. (See Figure 8.)

3. Install distributor clamp and capscrew.

CAUTION The tooth on the bottom of the cap must fit into the notch in the housing. 4. Put distributor cap on housing. Lock cap to housing with four latch screws. The early fourand six-cylinder distributors use only two latch screws. 5. Connect primary wiring harness to distributor.

3. Push distributor into position in block. Turn housing until double mark on housing aligns with marks on engine. 4. Install distributor clamp and capscrew.

CAUTION The tooth on the bottom of the distributor cap must fit into the notch in the housing or the alignment will not be correct.

a. Some four- and six-cylinder models, connect connector to coil.

5. Put distributor cap in position on housing. Lock cap to housing with latch screws.

b. V8 350 and some four- and six-cylinder models, connect connector at side of distributor.

6. Connect primary wiring harness to distributor. (See Figure 4, Figure 5, Figure 6, and Figure 7.)

6. If removed, connect battery wire to negative terminal of battery. Tighten nut on capscrew.

7. Adjust ignition timing according to the procedure in Ignition Timing Adjustment.

9


Ignition Coil Replacement

2200 SRM 107

A. FIRING ORDER 1-3-4-2 B. FIRING ORDER 1-5-3-6-2-4

C. FIRING ORDER 1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2 D. FIRING ORDER 1-6-5-4-3-2

1. FOUR CYLINDER 2. SIX CYLINDER

3. V8 4. V6 Figure 8. Firing Order

Ignition Coil Replacement SOME FOUR- AND SIX-CYLINDER MODELS

2. Disconnect secondary wire from coil. See Figure 9 and Figure 10.

Remove

3. Remove dust cover from primary wiring.

1. Disconnect wire from negative terminal of battery.

4. Disconnect primary wiring harness from coil.

10

5. Remove nuts from studs that fasten coil to block.


2200 SRM 107

Ignition Coil Replacement 1. Turn coil so terminals are on top. See Figure 9 and Figure 10. Put coil frame on studs that fasten coil to engine. Install and tighten nuts. 2. Connect primary wiring harness to coil. Push connector until latches lock. 3. Install dust cover over primary wiring connector. 4. Connect secondary wire to coil. Push connector until latches lock. 5. If removed, connect battery wire to negative terminal of battery. Tighten nut on capscrew.

1. SECONDARY TERMINAL 2. TACHOMETER TERMINAL

3. PRIMARY TERMINAL 4. FRAME 5. BATTERY TERMINAL

Figure 9. Some Four- and Six-Cylinder Models Ignition Coil

V8, SOME FOUR- AND SIX-CYLINDER MODELS Remove 1. Disconnect wire from negative terminal of battery. 2. Unlock holder for secondary wires. See Figure 11. Remove secondary wires by carefully pulling on holder. 3. Disconnect wiring harness for primary wires from side of distributor. 4. Unlock four latch screws that fasten cap to housing. Remove distributor cap from distributor. NOTE: Some V8-350 models used three screws to fasten the cover. Some V8-350, four- and six-cylinder models use two screws to fasten cover. 5. Remove screws that hold coil cover to distributor cap. Remove cover.

1. SECONDARY TERMINAL 2. TACHOMETER TERMINAL

3. PRIMARY TERMINAL 4. FRAME 5. BATTERY TERMINAL

Figure 10. GM V6 Models Ignition Coil

Install NOTE: It is normal for a new coil to be loose in the frame.

CAUTION Do not damage the ground wires. 6. Remove four screws that hold coil to distributor cap. Loosen terminals of primary wires by pushing from connector side of cap. Carefully remove coil and primary wires. 7. Check rubber seal, spring, and resistor brush in cap for damage. Check cap for cracks or other damage. Replace parts that are damaged.

11


Ignition Coil Replacement

2200 SRM 107

Install NOTE: On some distributor models, the ground wire must be installed before the coil is installed. 1. If the ground wire was removed, install wire into position. 2. Install resistor brush, spring, and rubber seal in cap. See Figure 11. NOTE: If the coil is new, make sure the part number is correct. 3. Put coil in correct position in cap. Push terminals of primary wires into connector on side of cap. 4. Align terminal(s) of ground wire(s) to hole in coil frame. Install four screws in frame of coil. Tighten screws.

CAUTION Some V8 units use three screws to fasten the cover. Some V8, four- and six-cylinder models use two screws to fasten the cover. 5. Install coil cover and fastening screws. Tighten screws.

CAUTION The tooth on the bottom of the distributor cap must fit into the notch in the housing or the alignment will not be correct. 6. Put distributor cap in position on housing. Lock cap to housing with four latch screws.

A. DESIGN 1 B. DESIGN 2

C. DESIGN 3

1. TACHOMETER TERMINAL 2. PRIMARY WIRE

3. GROUND WIRE 4. BATTERY TERMINAL

Figure 11. V8 and Some Four- and Six-Cylinder Models Ignition Coil

12

7. Connect wiring harness for primary wires to side of distributor. Make sure connector is locked together. 8. Connect secondary wires and holder to cap. Make sure holder is locked to cap. 9. If removed, connect battery wire to negative terminal of battery. Tighten nut on capscrew.


2200 SRM 107

Electronic Module Replacement

Electronic Module Replacement REMOVE 1. Disconnect wire from negative terminal of battery. See Figure 12.

3. Unlock latch screws that fasten cap to housing. Remove cap. 4. If used, remove two screws that fasten rotor to shaft assembly. Remove rotor. 5. Remove electronic module as follows: a. Distributors shown in Figure 4, Figure 5, and Figure 6: Remove two screws which fasten electronic module to housing. Move electronic module so connector can be removed from B and C terminals. Remove connector from electronic module. Carefully disconnect other wires from W and G terminals. Remove electronic module from housing. b. Distributors shown in Figure 7: Remove three screws that fasten electronic module, wiring harness, and capacitor to housing. Disconnect connector for the green and white wire from the electronic module. Remove electronic module, wire connector, and capacitor from housing. Disconnect electronic module from connector.

INSTALL CAUTION Apply silicone grease (Part No. 1198757) between the electronic module and the fastening plate. 1. The following procedure is for installation of the electronic module:

1. WIRING HARNESS 2. CAPACITOR

3. SENSING COIL WIRES 4. ELECTRONIC MODULE

Figure 12. Electronic Module Installation 2. Disconnect primary wiring harness to distributor. (See Figure 4, Figure 5, Figure 6, and Figure 7.)

a. Distributors shown in Figure 4, Figure 5, and Figure 6: Connect wire connector to B and C terminals on electronic module. Apply silicone grease to bottom of electronic module. Fasten electronic module to housing with two screws. Make sure screws are tight. Put wiring grommet in notch in housing. Connect pink wire to capacitor terminal. If a black wire is used, connect it to screw that fastens the capacitor. Tighten screw. Connect white wire from sensing coil to W terminal on electronic module. Connect green wire from sensing coil to G terminal on electronic module.

13


Spark Plugs Replacement

2200 SRM 107

b. Distributors shown in Figure 7: Connect wiring connector to electronic module. Connect capacitor to wiring connector. Apply silicone grease to bottom of electronic module. Put wiring connector assembly into correct position in housing. Make sure wiring grommet fits into notch. Install three fastening screws and tighten screws. Install connector for the green and white wires to the electronic module.

2. Install rotor and two screws to shaft assembly.

CAUTION The tooth on the bottom of the distributor cap must fit into the notch in the housing or the alignment will not be correct. 3. Put distributor cap in position on housing. Lock cap to housing with latch screws. 4. Connect primary wiring harness to distributor.

CAUTION The notch on the rotor must fit into the tooth of the centrifugal mechanism.

5. If removed, connect battery wire to negative terminal of battery. Tighten nut on capscrew.

Sensing Coil Replacement REMOVE 1. Remove distributor from engine. See the procedure for Distributor Repair, Remove.

Crankshaft WAS Rotated when Distributor was Removed.

CAUTION Do not disassemble the sensing coil/pole piece. Disassembly can change the polarity of the coil. If damaged, replace the sensing coil/pole piece with a new assembly. 2. Disassemble distributor. See the procedure for Distributor Repair, Disassemble. See Figure 13.

INSTALL 1. Assemble distributor. See the procedure for Distributor Repair, Assemble. 2. Install distributor to engine. See the procedures for Distributor Repair, Install, If Crankshaft WAS NOT Rotated when Distributor was Removed and Distributor Repair, Install, If

1. MAGNET 2. POLE PIECE

3. POSITION ARM 4. SENSING COIL

Figure 13. Pole Piece and Sensing Coil

Spark Plugs Replacement REMOVE WARNING Do not remove the wires to the spark plugs with the engine running. The high voltage can cause electric shock.

14

CAUTION Do not pull on the wires. The core can separate and cause ignition problems. 1. Disconnect wires by pulling on terminal cover. Turn cover to loosen it from spark plug.


2200 SRM 107

High Voltage Wires Check

INSTALL

WARNING Compressed air can move particles so they cause injury to the user or to other personnel. Make sure the path of the compressed air is away from all personnel. Wear protective goggles or a face shield to prevent injury to the eyes. 2. Clean area around spark plug with compressed air.

CAUTION

1. Clean thread area where spark plugs screw into cylinder head. Make sure seat area is clean. 2. Check clearance between electrodes. Bend side electrode to get correct clearance.

CAUTION Do not use a gasket if the spark plug has a tapered seat. 3. Install spark plugs and if used, gaskets.

Use a deep socket for removing the spark plug. Make sure the insulator is not damaged.

Do not tighten the spark plugs to more than the specification.

3. Remove spark plugs. If used, remove gaskets. 4. Inspect spark plugs for normal operation. damaged, replace plugs.

CAUTION

If

4. Tighten plugs to correct torque. 5. Connect wires to spark plugs. Push wire terminal until wire locks to plug.

Visual Check WARNING Compressed air can move particles so they cause injury to the user or to other personnel. Make sure the path of the compressed air is away from all personnel. Wear protective goggles or a face shield to prevent injury to the eyes. The HEI distributor will operate for a long time without causing problems. A visual inspection of the distributor when the spark plugs are changed is a good

check. Remove the distributor cap. Inspect the rotor and the inside of the cap for dust and carbon deposits. Clean the dust from the parts with compressed air. Inspect the rotor and cap for damage. If parts are damaged, replace with new parts. Remove the rotor. Inspect the pivot area of the centrifugal weights. If the pivot has a rust condition, put one drop of oil on the pivot. If the pivot is damaged, replace the damaged parts with new parts.

High Voltage Wires Check The high voltage wires must be handled very carefully. Do not pull on the wires. The core can separate and cause ignition problems. If the wires are causing a problem, do the following checks:

WARNING Do not remove the high voltage wires with the engine running. The high voltage can cause electric shock.

1. Disconnect each wire by pulling on terminal cover. Turn cover to loosen wire. 2. Connect wires from an ohmmeter to high voltage wire. Set ohmmeter to a high scale. 3. Move high voltage wire a little while looking at ohmmeter. If the ohmmeter indicates more than 2500 ohms, replace wire with a new part. If the ohmmeter indication changes from infinity to any value, replace wire with a new part.

15


Ignition Coil Check

2200 SRM 107

CAUTION Make sure the new wires have a diameter of 8 mm and have silicone insulation.

4. Check wire without moving it. Replace wire with a new part if the meter indications are not within specifications.

Ignition Coil Check COIL IN DISTRIBUTOR CAP DESIGN

SEPARATE COIL DESIGN

1. Disconnect wire from negative terminal of battery.

1. Disconnect wire from negative terminal of battery.

2. Disconnect primary wiring connector to distributor.

2. Disconnect secondary wire from coil.

3. Unlock four screws that fasten cap to housing. Carefully remove cap and turn it to the position shown in Figure 14.

3. Remove dust cover from primary wiring. 4. Disconnect primary wiring harness from coil. 5. Set ohmmeter to the high scale. Connect ohmmeter as shown in step 1 of Figure 15. If the meter indication is less than infinity, install new coil and repeat Step 5.

Figure 14. Ignition Coil Checks, V8 and Some Four- and Six-Cylinder Engines 4. Set ohmmeter to the low scale. Connect ohmmeter as shown in step 1 of Figure 14. The normal indication is less than 2 ohms. Replace coil if indication is infinity and repeat Step 4. 5. Set ohmmeter to the high scale. Connect ohmmeter as shown in steps A and B of step 2 of Figure 14. Install a new coil if both the indications are infinity and repeat Step 4 and Step 5. A resistance indication one way and an infinity indication the other way is normal.

16

Figure 15. Ignition Coil Checks, Some Fourand Six-Cylinder Engines 6. Set ohmmeter to the low scale. Connect ohmmeter as shown in step 2 of Figure 15. If it does not indicate zero to one ohm, install new coil and repeat Step 5 and Step 6. 7. Set ohmmeter to the middle scale. Connect ohmmeter as shown in step 3 of Figure 15. If the meter indication is infinity, install new coil and repeat Step 5 and Step 7.


2200 SRM 107

Ignition Timing Adjustment

SENSING COIL, CHECK 1. Disconnect wire from negative terminal of battery. 2. Disconnect primary wiring connector to distributor. 3. Unlock latch screws that fasten cap to housing. Carefully remove cap and put it away from distributor. NOTE: Some models use separate terminals. Some models use a double terminal. 4. Disconnect white and green wires from electronic module. 5. Set ohmmeter to a middle scale. Connect ohmmeter as shown in step 1 of Figure 16. If the ohmmeter indicates less than 500 ohms or more than 1500 ohms, install new part and Step 5. 6. Set ohmmeter to a high scale. Connect ohmmeter as shown in step 2 of Figure 16. Do step 2 for each wire. If the meter indication is less than infinity, install new coil and repeat Step 5 and Step 6.

1. GREEN WIRE 2. WHITE WIRE

3. HOUSING

Figure 16. Sensing Coil Checks

Electronic Module Check The electronic module can be tested only with a special tool. Use the procedure given by the manufacturer to test the electronic module. If needed, get tool number J-24642 from the Kent-Moore Tool Division, Jackson, Michigan.

Ignition Timing Adjustment 1. If equipped with vacuum advance, disconnect vacuum line at distributor and put a plug in the line.

CAUTION Not all tachometers will give the correct indication of speed when connected to the HEI system. Check with the manufacturer of the tachometer to make sure it will work with HEI. 2. Connect tachometer to tachometer terminal. a. Some four- and six-cylinder engines, connect at the ignition coil. (See Figure 9.)

(Also see GM V8-366 (6-liter) Ignition System Check.)

CAUTION Not all timing lights will give the correct indication when connected to the HEI system. Check with the manufacturer of the timing light to make sure it will work with HEI. 3. Connect timing light to spark plug wire that goes to number one cylinder. Make other connections described by the manufacturer.

b. V8-350, some four- and six-cylinder engines, connect at the distributor. (See Figure 11.)

17


Ignition Timing Adjustment

2200 SRM 107

WARNING Do not touch moving parts (fan, belt, shafts, pulleys). 4. Start engine and run at correct speed. Hold timing light so it illuminates timing plate and the mark on crankshaft pulley. See Figure 17. Check for correct timing. If timing is not correct, loosen clamp that holds distributor housing. Rotate housing right or left to get correct timing. Tighten clamp when timing is correct. Connect vacuum line to distributor. NOTE: Do not use a dwell meter to check the cam angle. The cam angle is set by the electronic module.

A. BEFORE

B. AFTER

1. FOUR AND SIX CYLINDER

2. V8-350

Figure 17. Timing Marks

18


2200 SRM 107

Specifications

GM V8-366 (6-liter) Ignition System Check Check spark plugs. Replace worn spark plugs and distributor contacts. The correct spark plug gap is 0.89 to 1.1 mm (0.035 to 0.043 in.). Check ignition timing. See Figure 18. Adjust timing according to specifications.

1. CRANKSHAFT DAMPER

2. TIMING TAB

Figure 18. GM V8 Timing Marks

GM V6-LPG (4.3 liter) GM V6-LPG (4.3 liter) Ignition Timing and Idle Speed Adjustment For ingnition timing and idle speed adjustment for the GM V6 (4.3-liter) with EPIC LPG System, see Carbureted Engine Management System Open Loop 2200 SRM 744. For ingnition timing and idle speed adjustment for the GM V6 (4.3-liter) on lift trucks equipped with MSTS, see MSTS GM V6-4.3L (Later Control Modules)2200 SRM 765

Specifications Item

Specifications

Spark Plugs Electrode gap ............................................................ Torque Gasket type ........................................................... Tapered seat..........................................................

See Parts Manual 0.89 to 1.1 mm (0.035 to 0.045 in.)

Firing Order Four cylinder............................................................. Six cylinder (in-line) ................................................. V-6 ............................................................................. V-8 .............................................................................

35 to 40 N•m (26 to 30 lbf ft) 14 to 27 N•m (10 to 20 lbf ft) 1-3-4-2 1-5-3-6-2-4 1-6-5-4-3-2 1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2

19


Troubleshooting

2200 SRM 107

Item

Specifications

Ignition Timing 4 cylinder................................................................... 6 cylinder (in-line)..................................................... V-6 ............................................................................. V8-350 ....................................................................... V8-366 .......................................................................

8 BTDC @ 600 rpm 8 BTDC @ 600 rpm 0 BTDC @ 650 rpm 6 BTDC @ 600 rpm (gasoline fuel) 10 BTDC @ 650 rpm (LPG fuel) 6 to 8 BTDC @ 725 to 750 rpm (LPG fuel)

Module Grease ..............................................................

Silicone Grease, Part No. 1198757

Sensing Coil Resistance................................................

500 to 1500 Ohms

High Voltage Wire Resistance 0 to 381 mm (0 to 15 in.)........................................... 381 to 635 mm (15 to 20 in.)..................................... 635 to 890 mm (25 to 35 in.).....................................

3000 to 10,000 Ohms 4000 to 15,000 Ohms 6000 to 20,000 Ohms

Troubleshooting PROBLEM The engine will not start.

20

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Open circuit between the battery and the distributor.

Repair or replace cable from battery to distributor.

Moisture or dirt in the distributor cap.

Clean and dry distributor cap.

New spark plugs are needed.

Replace spark plugs. Plugs Replacement.

High voltage wires are damaged.

Perform high voltage wire checks. See High Voltage Wires Check.

Open circuit between the distributor connector and the ignition coil.

Perform Ignition Coil Check and repair as required. See Ignition Coil Check and Ignition Coil Replacement.

Open circuit in the ignition coil.

Replace ignition coil. Coil Replacement.

Open circuit in the sensing coil.

Replace Sensing Coil. See Sensing Coil Replacement.

The electronic module is damaged.

Replace electronic module. See Electronic Module Replacement.

See Spark

See Ignition


2200 SRM 107

PROBLEM Engine does not run correctly.

Troubleshooting

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Ignition timing is not correct.

Perform proper timing procedures. See Ignition Timing Adjustment.

New spark plugs are needed.

Replace spark plugs. Plugs Replacement.

High voltage wires are damaged.

Perform high voltage wire checks. See High Voltage Wires Check.

Moisture or dirt in the distributor cap.

Clean and dry distributor cap.

Distributor cap is damaged.

Replace distributor cap.

Centrifugal mechanism is damaged.

Replace centrifugal mechanism. See Distributor Repair.

Ignition coil is damaged.

Replace ignition coil. Coil Replacement.

Sensing coil is damaged.

Replace Sensing Coil. See Sensing Coil Replacement.

The electronic module is damaged.

Replace electronic module. See Electronic Module Replacement.

See Spark

See Ignition

21


NOTES ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

22



HYDRAULIC GEAR PUMPS H40.00-48.00XM-12 (H1050HD) [A917]; S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) [D004]; S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]; H3.50-5.00XL (H70-110XL); S30-60E/ES; S40-50F; H40-60H; H2.00-3.00J (H40-60J); H16.00-30.00C (H360-650C); P40-50A [A119]; S6.00-7.00XL (S135-155XL, S135-155XL 2) [B024, C024]; S3.00-5.50E (S60-120E); H60-110E; H360-620B; H16.00-30.00C (H360-650C); H36.00-48.00C/E (H800-1050C/E) [D117]; H7.00-12.50H (H150-275H); H13.50-16.00B (H300-350B); H32.00-42.00B (H700-920B); J25-35A/AS; J40-60A; E20-50B; E3.00-5.50B (E60-120B); H6.00-7.00XL (H135-155XL, H135-155XL 2) [F006, G006]; H40-60H; R30XMS2 [D174]; H40.00-52.00XM-16CH (H1050HD-CH, 1150HD-CH) [E117, F117]; R30XM2, R30XMA2, R30XMF2 [G118]; H2.00-3.00J (H40-60J)

PART NO. 910091

1900 SRM 97


Hydraulic Gear Pumps

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS Description ......................................................................................................................................................... Operation............................................................................................................................................................ Flow Control Valve ........................................................................................................................................ Relief Valve .................................................................................................................................................... Hydraulic Gear Pump Repair............................................................................................................................ Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Disassemble ................................................................................................................................................... Clean .............................................................................................................................................................. Inspect ............................................................................................................................................................ Assemble ........................................................................................................................................................ Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Pump Output Check .......................................................................................................................................... Method No. 1 ................................................................................................................................................. Method No. 2 ................................................................................................................................................. Hydraulic System Air Check ............................................................................................................................. Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................................................

1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 8 10 10 10 11 12 13

This section is for the following models: H40.00-48.00XM-12 (H1050HD) [A917]; S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) [D004]; S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]; H3.50-5.00XL (H70-110XL); S30-60E/ES; S40-50F; H40-60H; H2.00-3.00J (H40-60J); H16.00-30.00C (H360-650C); P40-50A [A119]; S6.00-7.00XL (S135-155XL, S135-155XL 2) [B024, C024]; S3.00-5.50E (S60-120E); H60-110E; H360-620B; H16.00-30.00C (H360-650C); H36.00-48.00C/E (H800-1050C/E) [D117]; H7.00-12.50H (H150-275H); H13.50-16.00B (H300-350B); H32.00-42.00B (H700-920B); J25-35A/AS; J40-60A; E20-50B; E3.00-5.50B (E60-120B); H6.00-7.00XL (H135-155XL, H135-155XL 2) [F006, G006]; H40-60H; R30XMS2; [D174]; H40.00-52.00XM-16CH (H1050HD-CH, 1150HD-CH) [E117, F117]; R30XM2, R30XMA2, R30XMF2; [G118]; H2.00-3.00J (H40-60J)

©2006 HYSTER COMPANY

i


1900 SRM 97

Description

Description Gear pumps have several sections and are made with a single set (single stage) of gears or with multiple sets (tandem) of gears. See Figure 1. A single-stage pump has two covers and the gear housing with the gears. Seals are used to prevent leaks between the sections. Tandem pumps have a gear housing for each set of gears. Most tandem pumps also have a center section for the bearings. The inlet and outlet ports are normally on the gear housing or rear cover. The front cover has the seal for the input shaft. The input shaft is connected to a driven sprocket, coupling, or gear by splines or a key.

All the gear pumps have devices that keep the thrust clearance at a minimum when the pressure increases. When the pressure is low, the clearance increases to prevent wear. To prevent leakage when the pressure is high, the oil from the outlet side of the pump is transferred to a wear plate. The oil pushes the wear plate against the gears. Some pumps have bearing blocks that move closer to the gears when the pressure increases.

1. ONE-SECTION PUMP 2. DRIVE GEAR

3. TWO-SECTION PUMP 4. DRIVEN GEAR Figure 1. Types of Gear Pumps

1


Operation

1900 SRM 97

Operation Gear pumps have the teeth of the gears engaged in the center of the pump. When the input shaft is turned, the drive gear turns the driven gear. See Figure 2. The oil in the inlet chamber is moved out from the center by the teeth of rotating gears. See Figure 3. The oil between the teeth is moved around the pumping chamber to the outlet chamber. The oil is pushed from the outlet chamber by the gear teeth that are beginning to engage.

When the pressure increases to the spring setting, the ball moves from its seat and oil flows to the inlet chamber.

1. OIL ENTERS GROOVES IN BUSHINGS 2. OIL ENTERS INLET CHAMBER Figure 3. Check Valve

FLOW CONTROL VALVE 1. INLET 2. OUTLET

3. SEAL MADE BY GEAR TEETH

Figure 2. Gear Pump Operation The gears and bearings are lubricated by oil from the outlet side of the pump. A small amount of oil flows past the gears and into the bearings and to the front seal cavity. A check ball and spring are installed in some pumps to keep pressure on the oil in this passage. The oil pressure prevents air leaks through the front seal and makes sure there is oil to the bearings.

2

Some of the pumps have a flow control valve in the rear cover. See Figure 4. The flow control valve has either a piston and spring, or a cartridge with a piston and spring. The piston has an orifice that permits a constant volume of oil to flow to the controlled flow port. When the pump speed increases, the piston moves to partly open the passage to the main control valve. This action keeps constant the pressure difference across the orifice. A constant pressure difference between both sides of an orifice causes a constant flow through the orifice.


1900 SRM 97

Hydraulic Gear Pump Repair

RELIEF VALVE Some pumps have a relief valve installed in a cartridge or in a bore in the rear cover. See Figure 4. Relief valves in the pump prevent the pressure in the controlled flow system from increasing beyond the specifications. The relief valve in the cartridge has a poppet and spring, with the seat for the poppet in the cartridge. The relief valve and flow control valve on some pumps are installed in the same cartridge. Some of the relief valves that are installed in the pumps are adjustable only with shims. Replace the cartridge if the relief valve has a problem.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

INPUT SHAFT BEARING BLOCKS REAR COVER DRIVE GEAR CARTRIDGE, FLOW CONTROL AND RELIEF VALVE 6. DRIVEN GEAR 7. FRONT COVER Figure 4. Gear Pump Basic Parts

Hydraulic Gear Pump Repair NOTE: Worn or damaged seals are the most common cause of pump failure. The pump bearings, gears, and shafts also wear. Many service persons do not repair a worn pump because the cost of repairs can be greater than the cost of a new pump. The seals can be replaced in the hydraulic pump. If the pump will be rebuilt, the following general procedures are for repairing gear pumps.

prevents the tank from draining too fast when the inlet line is disconnected. 2. Disconnect hoses from pump. Put caps on all fittings. Be careful so inlet hose is not damaged during removal. 3. If the pump is driven by a drive shaft, disconnect drive shaft at pump.

REMOVE WARNING WARNING Make sure the carriage is lowered before disconnecting any parts of the hydraulic system. 1. If the lift truck is equipped with a valve on the tank, the valve must be closed before removing the pump. If there is no valve on the tank, remove breather and install a plug. This action

Some of the hydraulic pumps are very heavy. Use a lifting device when removing or installing the pump. 4. Remove capscrews holding pump housing to the mount. 5. Remove pump from lift truck.

3


Hydraulic Gear Pump Repair

DISASSEMBLE NOTE: See Figure 6, Figure 7, Figure 8, or Figure 9 for the illustration that is similar to the pump being repaired. The illustration can have parts that are different than those in the actual pump that is being repaired. 1. Remove gear or sprocket from input shaft. If equipped, remove pulley from input shaft. See Figure 5.

1900 SRM 97 passages in the housing sections. The oil passage for the thrust plates is in the outlet chamber. Make sure you make careful notes of the location and orientation of the parts and seals during disassembly. Some of the parts are similar, but not exactly the same and it can be difficult to make an identification if they are mixed. 3. Remove capscrews or nuts that hold housings together. Use a plastic hammer to separate housings. Do not damage machined surfaces. 4. Remove gears and thrust plates (if used). Make a note of the positions of the thrust plates, seals, and gaskets. Do not use a punch to mark the parts. Remove any springs and check valves. 5. Remove bearings with a puller. In some pumps, the bearing blocks or plates must be replaced with the bearings. 6. Remove front seal.

CLEAN WARNING NOTE: NOT ALL LIFT TRUCK MODELS HAVE A PULLEY ASSEMBLY ON THE GEAR PUMP. 1. PLATE 2. CAPSCREW 3. WASHER

4. LOCKWASHER 5. PULLEY 6. NUT

Figure 5. Pulley Assembly on Gear Pumps 2. Before disassembling the pump, make alignment marks on all housings. Some housings can be assembled in the wrong positions, which will cause failure or increased wear. Carefully clean the outside of the pump. NOTE: The inlet ports in most gear pumps are larger than the outlet ports. NOTE: If the pump is held in a vise for disassembly, make sure the vise does not hold the pump too tightly and cause distortion of the pump body. NOTE: The position of the seals is important. In some pumps the direction of pump rotation is changed by changing the position of the seals and housings. The holes in the seals must be aligned with the oil

4

Cleaning solvents can be flammable and toxic and can cause skin irritation. When using cleaning solvents, always follow the solvent manufacturer’s recommended safety precautions.

WARNING Compressed air can move particles so they cause injury to the user or to other personnel. Make sure the path of the compressed air is away from all personnel. Wear protective goggles or a face shield to prevent injury to the eyes.

CAUTION Any dirt that enters the hydraulic system can cause damage to the parts. Clean all parts of the pump with solvent. Use compressed air to dry the parts. Do not use a cloth to dry the parts. Pieces of the cloth can cause restrictions in the hydraulic system. Make sure the work area and tools are very clean.


1900 SRM 97

Hydraulic Gear Pump Repair

NOTE: THERE CAN BE A VARIATION OF INTERNAL PARTS ON DIFFERENT MODELS OF LIFT TRUCKS. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

CAPSCREW WASHER REAR COVER DOWEL PIN SEAL GEAR HOUSING DRIVE GEAR SEAL SEAL SPACER SEAL RING FRONT COVER SHAFT SEAL BEARING BLOCKS DRIVEN GEAR BEARING BLOCKS DOWEL PIN

17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32.

SPACER O-RING CARTRIDGE RELIEF POPPET SPRING SPRING ADJUSTMENT SCREW O-RING PLUG SPRING FLOW CONTROL PISTON O-RING SNAP RING O-RINGS CAPSCREW AND WASHER CAPSCREW AND WASHER

Figure 6. Hydraulic Gear Pump Single-Stage

INSPECT 1. Inspect outside edges of gear teeth for grooves or scratches. If the edges of the gear teeth are sharp, use emery cloth to break the edges. Replace gears if there are deep grooves on the gears.

Wear on the seal area of the shaft indicates there is dirt in the oil or a hard seal. Inspect seal to see if it has been too hot. Look for small cracks in seal surfaces. If the seal was too hot or the wrong oil was used, the seal will be too hard or too soft. Inspect splines or key groove for damage.

2. If the gear shafts have grooves or are worn more than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.), they must be replaced.

5


Hydraulic Gear Pump Repair

1900 SRM 97

NOTE: THERE CAN BE A VARIATION OF INTERNAL PARTS ON DIFFERENT MODELS OF LIFT TRUCKS. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

REAR COVER SEAL GLAND SEAL RETAINER REAR WEAR PLATE DRIVEN GEAR DRIVE GEAR GEAR HOUSING FRONT WEAR PLATE

FRONT COVER STUD WASHER NUT SEAL SNAP RING SEAL PIN

Figure 7. Hydraulic Gear Pump Single-Stage NOTE: Some pump bodies will show gear marks where the gears rotate because of the small clearances between the parts. These gear marks do not indicate a worn or damaged pump unless the pump will not supply the volume and pressure shown in the specifications.

chamber indicate dirt is in the oil. Small holes in the outlet side of the gear chamber indicate that cavitation has occurred. Make sure inlet hose, fittings, and tank have no restrictions. Cavitation can also occur when the engine speed is too high.

3. Inspect gear housing for wear or grooves. Most wear occurs on the inlet side of the gear chamber. Put a straight edge across the inlet side of the gear chamber. If a 0.13 mm (0.005 in.) thickness gauge fits between the straight edge and the housing, the gear housing must be replaced. If the gear housing is worn, inspect bearings for wear. If the system pressure is too high, the gear housings will wear quickly. Grooves in the gear

If the surfaces of the gear chamber or gear teeth have blue marks, the pump was too hot. Heat damage in the pump can be caused by hot oil or lack of oil. Check front seal surface to see if air was entering the pump through the front seal. Make sure the oil is the correct viscosity. The wrong viscosity oil can increase leakage within the pump. Leakage inside the pump increases the oil temperature.

6


1900 SRM 97

Hydraulic Gear Pump Repair

NOTE: THERE CAN BE A VARIATION OF INTERNAL PARTS ON DIFFERENT MODELS OF LIFT TRUCKS. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

SNAP RING BEARING SEAL FRONT COVER PLUG RING SEAL ROLLER BEARINGS

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

SEALS THRUST PLATE DRIVE SHAFT AND GEARS HOUSING SEAL GEAR HOUSING BODY CONNECTOR SHAFT

15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

GEAR SET GEAR HOUSING REAR COVER WASHER (4) STUD (4) NUT (4)

Figure 8. Hydraulic Gear Pump Tandem 4. Check thrust plates for wear or grooves. If the thrust plate is worn more than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.), it must be replaced. Replace thrust plate if it has grooves or holes. Dirty oil causes the thrust plate to wear near where the gears engage. Small holes on the outlet side the thrust plate are caused by cavitation. Lack of oil can also cause small holes in the thrust plates. If the color of the thrust plates has changed, the pump was too hot.

5. Inspect all machined surfaces for scratches or damage. Remove with emery cloth any metal that is above the flat surface. Check surfaces with a straight edge. Inspect grooves for the seals for dirt or scratches. 6. Inspect bearings for wear or damage. Replace bearings if there is any small hole on the bearing surface. Replace bushing if it is not round.

7


Hydraulic Gear Pump Repair

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

1900 SRM 97

CAPSCREW (4) GEAR HOUSING PIN (4) DRIVE GEAR DRIVEN GEAR KEY (2) THRUST PLATE (2) PLASTIC GASKET (2) PAPER GASKET (2)

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

SEAL (2) BODY GEAR HOUSING DRIVE GEAR AND SHAFT DRIVEN GEAR AND SHAFT SPRING BALL FRONT COVER SEAL

Figure 9. Hydraulic Gear Pump Tandem 7. Look for damage on seals. Replace all seals and O-rings, even if they are in good condition. Look for cuts or changes in shape that can cause damage. Find out what damage caused the pump to fail. A damaged seal for the thrust plate can cause the shaft seal to leak. A damaged shaft seal can cause air to enter the hydraulic system. 8. Inspect flow control valve and relief valve for dirt or scratches. Make sure piston moves freely in the bore. Look at poppet and seat for damage. The springs must not be broken or bent. Inspect O-rings for damage. Make sure orifices are open.

CAUTION Do not permit dirty oil to enter the gear pump. 9. If any parts of the pump have damage from dirt in the oil, inspect hydraulic tank. Drain tank, clean screen and tank, and replace filter.

8

10. Inspect inlet hose to the gear pump. Use a lamp to look inside the hose. Look for pieces of rubber that are separating from the hose. Inspect hose for restrictions at bends. Check for loose fittings or damaged O-rings.

ASSEMBLE CAUTION Make sure no dirt enters the pump during assembly. 1. Lubricate all parts with hydraulic oil before they are installed into the pump. 2. Put Loctite 290ÂŽ sealant around outside of front seal. Install seal in front cover. Make sure seal is installed straight. If pump has a ball bearing for the shaft, install it in the front cover. Install snap rings.


1900 SRM 97 3. Install needle bearings into front and rear covers. Use a press to push bearings into position. Push on end of bearings that has writing. If the pump has check valves, install them in cover.

CAUTION Make sure the holes in the gaskets and seals are aligned with the hole in the output side of the pump. The pump will not operate correctly if the oil from the outlet chamber cannot flow to the thrust plate. 4. Install seals for thrust plate. Install rubber seal with lips away from gears. Install paper gasket against the rubber seal. The plastic gasket is installed between the paper gasket and the thrust plate. Install thrust plate with the bronze side toward the gears.

Hydraulic Gear Pump Repair 7. Install seal and rear cover. Use a plastic hammer to join the sections. Apply a small mount of Loctite 290Ž sealant to threads of capscrews or studs. Install capscrews or studs and tighten with your fingers. Rotate drive shaft to make sure pump is assembled correctly. Tighten capscrews or nuts to the specification using an "X" sequence. 8. Use a soft, blunt tool to install O-rings in bore of the flow and relief cartridge. See Figure 10. Install relief valve and flow control valve. Install fittings with new O-rings. 9. If a pulley was removed, install pulley on shaft and tighten nut to 72 N•m (53 lbf ft). See Figure 5.

Some pumps have thrust plates with small grooves for the seals. The seals must be cut to the correct length. Cut two strips that are 5.5 mm (0.22 in.) long from seal strip. Put grease on seals and install them in grooves in center of thrust plate. Cut thrust plate on front cover. Hit thrust plate with a plastic hammer to 0.8 mm (0.031 in.) from machined surface. Cut four strips 6 mm (0.24 in.) from seal strip. Push strips into slots in thrust plate. Lightly hit thrust plate against the machined surface. Use a sharp blade to cut the seals even with the edge of the thrust plate. Install seal that has a W shape and spacer in groove in front cover. Do not bend metal seal. Install seal in outer groove in front cover. Install bearing blocks in the same positions from which they were removed. 5. Install gears and bearing blocks in pump chamber housing. Make sure gear housing is installed in the correct position. The small hole in some housings must be in the outlet chamber. The large channels in the inlet and outlet chambers must be toward the rear cover. The arrow indicating the direction of rotation on the gear housing must be toward the front cover. Align marks on gear housing with marks on covers. 6. Put connecting shaft in drive gear shaft on the pumps with two pump chambers. Install thrust plates and seals. Put gears and pump chamber housing on center bearing housing with the marks aligned.

1. ADJUSTMENT SCREW 2. SPRING 3. SPRING 4. RELIEF POPPET 5. CARTRIDGE 6. SPRING 7. O-RING

8. FLOW CONTROL PISTON 9. SNAP RING 10. RELIEF FLOW 11. CONTROLLED FLOW 12. MAIN FLOW

Figure 10. Flow Control and Relief Valve Cartridge

9


Pump Output Check

1900 SRM 97

INSTALL

CAUTION

CAUTION Before the gear pump is installed, loosen the lock nut on the adjustment screw for the relief valve. Loosen the adjustment screw until the spring is not compressed. If the relief valve was adjusted for a worn pump, the setting will not be correct for a new pump. Damage to the hydraulic system can occur if the setting of the relief valve is too high. Always install a new filter when repairs are made to the hydraulic system. Drain and replace the hydraulic oil if the oil is dirty or burned. 1. Install new gasket or O-ring on front cover of pump. Put a thin layer of Never-SeezÂŽ on splines of drive shaft. Fill inlet port of the pump with hydraulic oil. Turn drive shaft in the direction of rotation until oil comes out of the outlet port.

WARNING Some of the pumps are very heavy. Use a lifting device to help install the pump. 2. Install pump in lift truck.

Do not permit hot oil to enter a cold pump. Make sure the relief valve in each system is at the lowest setting. 4. Remove plug from breather on tank. Install breather. Open valve on tank. Fill tank with clean hydraulic oil. 5. Install a 0 to 20 MPa (0 to 3000 psi) pressure gauge to a tee fitting at the pump outlet port. Start engine and run it at idle speed for 3 minutes.

CAUTION Do not operate any valve until the pump has run for 3 minutes at low pressure and low speed. 6. Touch pump with your hand. If pump is hot, it has a problem. If pump is not hot, then increase engine speed to high limit. Momentarily increase pressure to relief setting. Repeat this procedure for 3 minutes. 7. Look at pressure gauge and adjust relief valve. See Checks and Adjustments for the lift truck for which you are making repairs.

3. Install and tighten capscrews. Remove caps from fittings. Connect hoses.

Pump Output Check Two methods are given for checking the volume of flow from the hydraulic pump. The first method uses a flow meter, a pressure gauge, and a needle valve. The second method uses a needle valve, a pressure gauge, a container, and a timer. NOTE: If the pump has two outlet ports, do separate flow tests. Add the results of both tests to find the total output rate.

METHOD NO. 1 WARNING Hydraulic oil can be hot. Do not touch the oil during the tests. 1. If the flow meter is available, install flow meter between needle valve and outlet port of pump.

10

See Figure 11. The pressure gauge must be between the needle valve and the pump. Make a separate check for each system if pump is tandem or if flow regulator is part of pump. When the hydraulic oil is at operating temperature, run engine at 2800 RPM with no load on hydraulic system. Note the reading of the flow meter. Compare output rate of pump with specification found in the Capacities and Specifications section of the Service Manual for your lift truck. 2. Run engine at high limit. Slowly close needle valve until gauge indicates pressure just below specification for relief valve setting. The pump output at high or pressure must be within 25% of the output with no load. If the output at high pressure is less than 75% of the low pressure output, the pump has a problem.


1900 SRM 97

1. 2. 3. 4.

Pump Output Check

HYDRAULIC PUMP INLET PORT OUTLET PORT HYDRAULIC TANK

5. 6. 7. 8.

PRESSURE GAUGE TEE FITTING FLOW METER NEEDLE VALVE

Figure 11. Hydraulic Pump Output Check with Flow Meter

METHOD NO. 2 WARNING Hydraulic oil can be hot. Do not touch the oil during the tests. 1. Another method of checking the pump output is to measure the amount of oil moved in a given amount of time. See Figure 12. Run engine until oil is 55 to 65 C (131 to 149 F). Disconnect line from outlet port of pump. Install a 0 to 20 MPa (0 to 3000 psi) pressure gauge on a tee fitting connected to a hose from the outlet port. Install needle valve on end of hose. Connect another hose to needle valve. Put the other end of the hose in a container with a 18 liter (5 gal) capacity. Make sure reservoir is full.

CAUTION This test must be done quickly to prevent the hydraulic tank from becoming empty. Do not

operate the engine when there is no oil in the hydraulic tank. 2. The needle valve must be fully open. Start engine and run engine at its governed rpm for 5 seconds. Stop engine. Measure volume of oil that entered container in 5 seconds. Multiply quantity in container by 12 to find output per minute. Compare pump output rate with the specifications found in the Capacities and Specifications section of the Service Manual for your lift truck. The pump output rate must be within 20% of the specifications. 3. Start engine and run engine at its governed rpm. Close needle valve until pressure increases to just below relief valve setting. Measure the volume of fluid the pump moves in 5 seconds. Compare this quantity with the results from the test of the pump output at low pressure. The output of the pump at high pressure must be within 25% of the volume of oil flow at low pressure.

11


Hydraulic System Air Check

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

1900 SRM 97

HYDRAULIC PUMP INLET PORT OUTLET PORT HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURE GAUGE

6. 7. 8. 9.

TEE FITTING NEEDLE VALVE CONTAINER TIMER

Figure 12. Hydraulic Pump Output Check

Hydraulic System Air Check If the pump makes noise or does not move the correct amount of oil, check for air in the system. Run the engine until the oil is warm. Remove the filter head and look into the tank. If there are bubbles in the oil, air is in the hydraulic system. The most common place of entry of the air is in the inlet hose to

12

the pump. Check for air leaks by pouring oil over the fittings and hose when the engine is running. If the noise decreases, the leak is in that area. See the Troubleshooting section for other causes of air in the hydraulic system.


1900 SRM 97

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting PROBLEM The pump makes too much noise.

Low hydraulic pressure.

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Air in the hydraulic system.

Remove air from hydraulic system.

The bearings or gears are damaged.

Repair or replace hydraulic pump.

Outlet valve from the hydraulic tank is closed.

Open hydraulic tank outlet valve.

Low oil level in hydraulic tank.

Fill hydraulic oil tank to correct level.

Wrong oil.

Drain incorrect oil and fill hydraulic tank to correct level.

Supply hose is twisted or has a restriction.

Remove twist or remove restriction.

Breather on hydraulic tank has a restriction.

Replace hydraulic tank breather.

Seal for pump shaft is damaged.

Replace pump shaft seal.

Pump drive has a problem.

Repair pump drive.

Relief valve is set wrong or is damaged.

Adjust relief valve setting. Replace relief valve if it is damaged.

Screen in hydraulic tank has a restriction.

Clean hydraulic tank screen.

Pump is loose or not installed correctly in its mount.

Check pump installation and tighten bolts if necessary.

Relief valve is set wrong or is damaged.

Adjust relief valve setting. Replace relief valve if it is damaged.

Flow regulator valve is damaged.

Replace flow regulator valve.

Leak inside of a hydraulic cylinder.

Repair hydraulic cylinder.

Worn or damaged hydraulic pump.

Repair or replace hydraulic pump.

Air in the hydraulic system.

Remove air from hydraulic system.

Low oil level in hydraulic tank.

Fill hydraulic oil tank to correct level.

Wrong oil.

Drain incorrect oil and fill hydraulic tank to correct level with correct oil.

Supply hose is twisted or has a restriction.

Remove twist or remove restriction.

13


Troubleshooting

1900 SRM 97

PROBLEM Low hydraulic (Cont.)

pressure.

Pump has leaks, loose fittings, or damaged seals.

Pump is too hot. Relief valve is set wrong or is damaged.

14

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Breather on hydraulic tank has a restriction.

Replace hydraulic tank breather.

Seal for pump shaft is damaged.

Replace pump shaft seal.

Pump drive has a problem.

Repair pump drive.

Pump assembled wrong.

Reassemble pump correctly.

Screen in hydraulic tank has a restriction.

Clean hydraulic tank screen.

Housing capscrews are loose.

Tighten housing capscrews to correct torque.

Relief valve is damaged.

Replace relief valve.

Pump housing is damaged.

Replace hydraulic pump.

Worn seals and pump shaft.

Replace worn seals and pump shaft.

Flow regulator valve is damaged.

Replace flow regulator valve.

Leak inside of a hydraulic cylinder.

Repair hydraulic cylinder.

Worn or damaged hydraulic pump.

Repair or replace hydraulic pump.

Air in the hydraulic system.

Remove air from hydraulic system.

Low oil level in hydraulic tank.

Fill hydraulic oil tank to correct level.

Wrong oil.

Drain incorrect oil and fill hydraulic tank to correct level with correct oil.

Supply hose is twisted or has a restriction.

Remove twist or remove restriction.

Breather on hydraulic tank has a restriction.

Replace hydraulic tank breather.

Pump drive has a problem.

Repair pump drive.

Pump assembled wrong.

Reassemble pump correctly.

Screen in hydraulic tank has a restriction.

Clean hydraulic tank screen.

Replacement hydraulic hoses are wrong size.

Replace hydraulic hoses with correct size hoses.


1900 SRM 97

Troubleshooting

PROBLEM Hydraulic pump faster than normal.

POSSIBLE CAUSE wears

Air in the hydraulic system.

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Dirt in the hydraulic system.

Drain hydraulic tank and clean thoroughly.

Wrong hydraulic oil.

Drain incorrect oil and fill hydraulic tank to correct level with correct oil.

Relief valve is set wrong or is damaged.

Adjust relief valve setting. Replace relief valve if it is damaged.

Cavitation from restriction in inlet hose.

Clear restriction from inlet hose.

Pump drive has a problem.

Repair pump drive.

Pump drive is not correctly aligned.

Realign pump drive.

Pump is not installed correctly in its mount.

Install pump drive correctly.

Pump is operating too hot.

Check hydraulic oil level and fill to correct level.

Low oil level in hydraulic tank.

Fill hydraulic oil tank to correct level.

Leak in inlet hose.

Replace inlet hose.

Loose inlet fitting.

Tighten inlet fitting.

Breather on hydraulic tank has a restriction.

Replace hydraulic tank breather.

Supply hose is twisted or has a restriction.

Remove twist or remove restriction.

Screen in hydraulic tank has a restriction.

Clean hydraulic tank screen.

Pump seal is damaged.

Replace pump seal.

Check valve in pump is damaged.

Replace check valve.

Pump housing capscrews are loose.

Tighten pump housing screws to correct torque.

Worn or damaged hydraulic pump.

Repair or replace hydraulic pump.

15


NOTES ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

16



HYDRAULIC PUMP DRIVE ASSEMBLY S2.00-3.00XL (S40-60XL [GM engine only]) [A187, B187, C187]; H2.00-3.00XL (H40-60XL [GM engine only]) [B177, C177]; H3.50-5.00XL (H70-110XL) [F005, G005]; S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) [D004]; S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]; S6.00-7.00XL (S135-155XL, S135-155XL 2, S155XLS) [B024, C024]

PART NO. 897121

1900 SRM 339


Hydraulic Pump Drive Assembly

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS General ............................................................................................................................................................... Description ......................................................................................................................................................... Hydraulic Pump Drive Assembly Repair.......................................................................................................... Remove and Disassemble .............................................................................................................................. Clean .............................................................................................................................................................. Inspect ............................................................................................................................................................ Assemble and Install ..................................................................................................................................... Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................................................

1 1 3 3 4 4 4 5

This section is for the following models: S2.00-3.00XL (S40-60XL [GM engine only]) [A187, B187, C187]; H2.00-3.00XL (H40-60XL [GM engine only]) [B177, C177]; H3.50-5.00XL (H70-110XL) [F005, G005]; S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) [D004]; S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]; S6.00-7.00XL (S135-155XL, S135-155XL 2, S155XLS) [B024, C024]

©2003 HYSTER COMPANY

i


1900 SRM 339

Description

General This section has the description and repair procedures for the chain drive assembly for the hydraulic pump(s).

Description The chain drive assembly transfers the power from the engine to the hydraulic pump for the hydraulic system. See Figure 1. On H3.50-5.00XL (H70-110XL) units, the chain drive assembly also operates the hydraulic pump for the oil clutch system. The assembly has a drive sprocket, a leaf chain and a driven sprocket. The drive sprocket fastens directly to the engine crankshaft. The driven

1. 2. 3. 4.

FLYWHEEL HOUSING OIL SEAL SHIMS DRIVE SPROCKET

5. 6. 7. 8.

sprocket rotates on ball bearings. One bearing for the driven gear is installed in the flywheel housing. The other bearing for the driven gear is installed in the housing for the torque converter or the oil clutch. The leaf chain connects the two sprockets. Splines in the driven sprocket engage with the splines on the shafts of the pumps. Special blocks in the flywheel housing prevent oscillations of the chain.

LEAF CHAIN SPECIAL BLOCK (TOP) SPECIAL BLOCK (BOTTOM) BEARING

9. SNAP RING (DIESEL ONLY) 10. DRIVEN SPROCKET 11. HYDRAULIC PUMP

Figure 1. Chain Drive Assembly

1


Description

1900 SRM 339

On H3.50-5.00XL (H70-110XL), S3.50-5.50XL (S70120XL), and S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) units, oil from the powershift transmission circuit or the oil clutch system circuit lubricates the sprockets, bearings, and chain. On S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) units, oil from the powershift transmission circuit lubricates the sprockets, bearings, and chain. On S/H2.00-3.00XL (S/H40-60XL) units with the GM engine, oil from the hydraulic system lubricates the

1. RETURN OIL FROM STEERING CONTROL UNIT 2. OIL LINE FOR LUBRICATION 3. TORQUE CONVERTER HOUSING

4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

sprockets, bearings, and chain. See Figure 2. The oil supply for the lubrication circuit comes from the return circuit of the steering system. From the steering control unit, the oil flows to fittings at the torque converter housing. One fitting supplies oil for lubrication. The other fitting supplies the oil to operate the jet pump at the bottom of the torque converter housing. The jet pump removes the oil from the torque converter housing and sends it back to the hydraulic tank. A hose at the top of the torque converter housing is used as a breather for the housing.

FITTING JET PUMP NOZZLE JET PUMP SPRING O-RING

9. RETURN TO HYDRAULIC TANK 10. BREATHER 11. JET PUMP FITTING

Figure 2. Lubrication Circuit S2.00-3.00XL (S40-60XL)

2


1900 SRM 339

Hydraulic Pump Drive Assembly Repair

Hydraulic Pump Drive Assembly Repair REMOVE AND DISASSEMBLE NOTE: The hydraulic pump(s) can be removed without removing or disassembling the pump drive assembly. The powershift transmission or oil clutch housing must be removed for disassembly of the pump drive assembly. See the service manual sections that apply to the Powershift Transmission - Repairs or Oil Clutch System for these units. The repair information for the hydraulic pumps is in the sections for the Hydraulic Pump, Hydraulic System, and the Oil Clutch System. 1. Remove the hydraulic pump as follows (see Figure 1): a. Put the lift truck on blocks. The hydraulic pump must be removed from the bottom of the lift truck. b. Remove the battery and battery tray. c. Remove the breather from the hydraulic tank and put a plug in the tank fitting. Disconnect the return line at the tank and put a cap on the fitting. d. Remove the hose between the hydraulic pump and the tank. Put a cap on the fitting at the tank. e. Disconnect the lines to the steering control unit and the main control valve. Put caps on the lines. f.

Remove the capscrews for the pump and remove the pump from the flywheel housing.

2. Remove the oil line for the bearings at the flywheel housing. 3. Remove two of the capscrews for the flywheel. Install alignment pins in these holes to keep the flywheel from falling. (Use capscrews with the heads removed.) Remove the remaining capscrews for the flywheel. Do not remove the drive sprocket. 4. Check that the leaf chain has not become too long. See Figure 3. The chain must be replaced if dimension X is more than 31.8 mm (1.25 in.).

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

STRAIGHT EDGE LEAF CHAIN DRIVE SPROCKET DIMENSION X (CHAIN PUSHED DOWN) DRIVEN SPROCKET Figure 3. Chain Length

5. Remove the drive sprocket. Do not let the shims fall. Remove the shim set and keep the shims together. Remove the oil seal. 6. Remove the driven sprocket assembly and the leaf chain. If the bearings need replacing, use a puller to remove the bearings from the sprocket. 7. If the special blocks need replacing, remove the two capscrews that hold each block to the housing. 8. If necessary, disassemble the jet pump assembly [see Figure 2] on the S/H2.00-3.00XL (S/H4060XL) units as follows: a. Remove the jet pump fitting from the torque converter housing. b. Remove the spring and the jet pump. c. Remove the jet pump nozzle. d. Remove the oil line from the torque converter housing.

3


Hydraulic Pump Drive Assembly Repair

CLEAN WARNING Cleaning solvents can be flammable and toxic and can cause skin irritation. When using cleaning solvents, always follow the recommendations of the manufacturer. Clean all parts using solvent. Do not use steam or gasoline to clean parts.

INSPECT Inspect the sprockets and bearings for wear or damage.

ASSEMBLE AND INSTALL 1. If the flywheel housing was removed, install it on the engine. Install the capscrews with the O-rings. Tighten the capscrews to 50 N•m (45 lbf ft). Install the seal in the flywheel housing. Use a sealant on the outside diameter of the seal. Install the seal so that it is even with the inside edge (flywheel side) of the flywheel housing. See Figure 1, Figure 2, Figure 3, and Figure 4. 2. If new bearings are needed, install them on the driven sprocket. Install the special blocks in the flywheel housing. Tighten the capscrews for the blocks to 20 N•m (15 lbf ft). 3. Install the drive sprocket on the crankshaft without the flywheel. Use shims between the crankshaft and the drive sprocket so that the distance from the housing to the face of the sprocket is A as shown in Figure 4. 4. Install the driven sprocket and the chain. On diesel units, make sure the snap ring is on the

4

1900 SRM 339 bearing that fits in the torque converter or oil clutch housing. Install the flywheel on the drive sprocket. Use a gasket sealant on the threads and install the capscrews for the flywheel. On GM engines, tighten the capscrews to 80 N•m (60 lbf ft). On Perkins engines, tighten the capscrews to 120 N•m (90 lbf ft). Lubricate the chain and sprockets with hydraulic oil. 5. Connect the oil line for lubricating the chain drive assembly. Install the hydraulic pump. Use a sealant (Hyster Part No. 264159) on the flange of the pump. Connect the oil lines to the pump. 6. Install the powershift transmission as described in the section Powershift Transmission Repairs. Install the oil clutch assembly as described in the section for the Oil Clutch. 7. If removed, install the jet pump assembly (see Figure 2) for the S/H2.00-3.00XL (S/H40-60XL) units as follows: a. Clean the bottom of the torque converter housing and the jet pump nozzle. Use an adhesive sealant (Hyster Part No. 264159) and install the jet pump nozzle in the torque converter housing. b. Install the jet pump, spring, and O-ring in the torque converter housing. Make sure the jet pump fits over the jet pump nozzle. Install the fitting that holds the jet pump in the torque converter housing. c. Install the oil line for lubrication to the fittings on the torque converter housing.


1900 SRM 339

Troubleshooting Legend for Figure 4 NOTE: NOT ALL UNITS SHOWN. OTHERS SIMILAR. Model

Dimension A

S/H2.00-3.00XL (S/H40-60XL)

28.5 ±01 mm (1.12 ±0.004 in.) GM

H3.50-5.00XL (H70-110XL) S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL)

33.7 ±0.1 mm (1.33 ±0.004 in.) Gas & LPG

S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM)

33.7 ±0.1 mm (1.33 ±0.004 in.) Gas & LPG

S6.00-7.00XL (S135155XL, S135-155XL 2, S155XLS) (B024, C024)

29.7 ±0.1 mm (1.17 ±0.004 in.) DSL

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

CRANKSHAFT SHIMS FLYWHEEL DRIVE GEAR DRIVEN GEAR ARRANGEMENT (WITH OIL CLUTCH) 6. DRIVEN GEAR ARRANGEMENT (WITH POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION)

Figure 4. Chain Drive Assembly Parts

Troubleshooting Most problems that can occur in the chain drive assembly will cause noise that is not normal. Examples of these problems are as follows: (1) bearing wear, (2) sprocket wear, or (3) leaf chain wear. The leaf chain can also break. If the leaf chain breaks, there will be no pump output. To repair any of these problems, the drive assembly must be disassembled.

One of the hydraulic pumps can also be causing noise. With the unit running, actuate the system to put a load on the pump. If the noise is gone, the hydraulic pump is probably the cause of the noise and not the pump drive assembly.

5


NOTES ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

6



HYDRAULIC SYSTEM S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]; H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005, L005]

PART NO. 1466217

1900 SRM 743


Hydraulic System

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS General ............................................................................................................................................................... Description ......................................................................................................................................................... Operation............................................................................................................................................................ Hydraulic Pump H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) ............................................................................................ Hydraulic Pump S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) ............................................................................................. Main Control Valve........................................................................................................................................ Steering Control Unit .................................................................................................................................... Specifications...................................................................................................................................................... Hydraulic System Capacity (Powershift) ..................................................................................................... Hydraulic System Capacity (Hydrostatic).................................................................................................... Hydraulic Tank Capacity (Powershift and Hydrostatic) ............................................................................. Hydraulic Tank Capacity .............................................................................................................................. Relief Pressures @ 2200 RPM, 50 to 80 C (120 to 180 F) ............................................................................ Hydraulic Pump Flow to Valve ..................................................................................................................... Steering Priority Flow ................................................................................................................................... Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................................................

1 1 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5

This section is for the following models: S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]; H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005, L005]

©2005 HYSTER COMPANY

i


1900 SRM 743

Description

General This section has the description and operation of the hydraulic system and a brief description of the components of the hydraulic system. A troubleshooting guide for the hydraulic system is also included.

Description The hydraulic system includes the circuits for the mast and steering systems. See Figure 1 and Figure 2. The hydraulic pump’s oil flow increases when a hydraulic function is activated. The hydraulic pump receives oil from the hydraulic tank through a screen in the tank and sends it

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

HYDRAULIC TANK HYDRAULIC FILTER HYDRAULIC GEAR PUMP STEERING CYLINDER STEERING CONTROL UNIT MAIN CONTROL VALVE

through the control valve to the lift, tilt, and steering systems. The main control valve controls the flow of hydraulic oil to the lift, tilt, steering, and auxiliary hydraulic cylinders. A relief valve in the control valve controls the lift pressure within the design limits of the hydraulic system. The secondary relief valve controls the hydraulic pressure in the tilt and auxiliary systems.

7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

MAIN LIFT CYLINDERS LOWERING CONTROL VALVE TILT CYLINDERS MAIN OIL SUPPLY STEERING SUPPLY CHECK PORT

Figure 1. Hydraulic System Diagram

1


Description

1900 SRM 743

The steering control unit is operated by movement of the steering wheel. The steering control unit controls the movement of the steering cylinder. The steering relief valve controls the hydraulic pressure in the steering circuit.

The hydraulic oil returns from the control valve and flows through a filter in the hydraulic tank. The filter removes small particles from the hydraulic oil.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7. 8. 9.

LIFT CYLINDERS MAIN CONTROL VALVE HYDRAULIC PUMP STEERING CONTROL UNIT STEERING CYLINDER

TILT CYLINDERS STEERING RELIEF VALVE LIFT RELIEF VALVE TILT/AUX RELIEF VALVE

Figure 2. Hydraulic System Schematic

2


1900 SRM 743

Operation

Operation HYDRAULIC PUMP H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM)

pump and the outlet port is located on the back cover. The input shaft is splined to the hydraulic pump drive located on the flywheel end of the engine.

The hydraulic pump has several sections with a single set (single stage) of gears. See Figure 3. The pump has two covers and the gear housing with the gears. Seals are used to prevent leaks between the sections. The inlet and outlet ports are on the input shaft end cover. The input shaft is splined to a fan pulley. The fan pulley is connected to a drive shaft that is driven by the engine crankshaft.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

INLET PORT OUTLET PORT INPUT SHAFT END COVER GEAR HOUSING INPUT GEAR SHAFT OUTLET PORT COVER Figure 4. Hydraulic Pump S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM)

1. INLET PORT 2. INPUT SHAFT END COVER 3. GEAR HOUSING

4. PORT END COVER 5. OUTLET PORT 6. INPUT GEAR SHAFT

Figure 3. Hydraulic Pump H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) The hydraulic pump gets its oil supply from the hydraulic tank. Oil from the outlet port goes to the main control valve. Refer to the Specifications chart for the rate of flow to the main control valve.

HYDRAULIC PUMP S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) The hydraulic pump has several sections with a single set (single stage) of gears. See Figure 4. The pump has two covers and the gear housing with the gears. Seals are used to prevent leaks between the sections. The inlet port is located on the side of the

The hydraulic pump gets its oil supply from the hydraulic tank. Oil from the outlet port goes to the main control valve. Refer to the Specifications chart for the rate of flow to the main control valve.

MAIN CONTROL VALVE The main control valve controls the lift, tilt, and attachment functions of the mast and on a priority basis, provides steering flow to the steering control unit. See Figure 5 and Figure 6. The control valve receives oil from the hydraulic pump. The main relief valve (lift circuit) is set at 21.4 MPa (3100 psi) H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) and 22.4 MPa (3250 psi) S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM). The secondary relief valve (tilt and auxiliary circuits) is set at 15.5 MPa (2250 psi). The drain circuit from the main control valve is connected to the hydraulic tank and flows through an internal filter.

3


Specifications

1900 SRM 743

Figure 5. Main Control Valve H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) Oil flow in the main control valve goes first through a steering flow divider which ensures a priority flow to steering. Refer to the Specifications chart for the rate of flow to steering. The excess oil flow over that required by steering then goes to the main relief valve and the lift/lower spool. If none of the spools are actuated, the oil flows past all of the spools and returns to the hydraulic tank. When the lift/lower spool is actuated to lift, all of the oil flows to the cylinders. At this time the main relief valve controls the maximum pressure in the hydraulic system. If the tilt spool is actuated, oil can still flow to the auxiliary spools. When the tilt or auxiliary spools are actuated, the tilt/auxiliary relief valve controls the maximum pressure in the hydraulic system.

Figure 6. Main Control Valve S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM)

STEERING CONTROL UNIT The steering control unit is a rotary valve operated by the steering wheel that controls the movement of the steering cylinder. The steering control unit receives oil from the main control valve by means of a flow divider that ensures a priority flow to steering. A relief valve in the main control valve is set at 10.7 MPa (1500 psi) and controls steering inlet pressure. The control unit has a minimum restriction to oil flow when the steering wheel is not moved. The control unit has four ports (inlet, return, left, and right). Two of the ports (left and right) are connected to the steering cylinder. During the steering operation, the steering control unit controls the direction of flow and the amount of oil that flows to the steering cylinder. The hydraulic oil returns from the steering cylinder through the steering control to the main control valve, and then returns to the hydraulic tank through the filter.

Specifications HYDRAULIC SYSTEM CAPACITY (POWERSHIFT)

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM CAPACITY (HYDROSTATIC)

H3.50XM-4.00XMS (H70-90XM) 53 liter (14 gal)

H3.50XM-4.00XMS (H70-90XM) 78 liter (20.6 gal)

H4.00XM-5.50XM (H100-120XM) 75 liter (19.8 gal)

H4.00XM-5.50XM (H100-120XM) 100 liter (26.4 gal)

S3.50XM-S5.50XM (S70-120XM) 39 liter (10.3 gal)

4


1900 SRM 743

Troubleshooting

HYDRAULIC TANK CAPACITY (POWERSHIFT AND HYDROSTATIC)

Steering circuit 10.7 MPa (1550 psi)

H3.50XM-4.00XMS (H70-90XM) 45 liter (11.8 gal)

HYDRAULIC PUMP FLOW TO VALVE H3.50XM-4.00XMS (H70-90XM) @ 2200 rpm, 50 C (120 F) 116 liter/min (30.6 gal/min) No load 112 liter/min (29.6 gal/min) Rated load

H4.00XM-5.50XM (H100-120XM) 67 liter (17.7 gal)

HYDRAULIC TANK CAPACITY

H4.00XM-5.50XM (H100-120XM) @ 2200 rpm, 50 C (120 F) 125 liter/min (33 gal/min) No load 121 liter/min (32 gal/min) Rated load

S3.50XM-5.50XM (S70-120XM) 35 liter (9.2 gal)

RELIEF PRESSURES @ 2200 RPM, 50 to 80 C (120 to 180 F) Lift circuit H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) 21.4 MPa (3100 psi) Lift circuit S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) 22.4 MPa (3250 psi)

S3.50XM-5.50XM (S70-120XM) @ 2550 rpm, 80 to 100 C (176 to 212 F) 89 liter/min (23.5 gal/min)

STEERING PRIORITY FLOW 17 to 19 liter/min (4.5 to 5.0 gal/min) @ 9.6 MPa (1400 psi) & 800 engine rpm

Tilt and auxiliary circuit 15.5 MPa (2250 psi)

Troubleshooting PROBLEM Hydraulic functions will not operate.

Hydraulic pressure is above or below specifications.

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

There is no oil or not enough oil in the hydraulic tank.

Fill tank to correct level.

The hydraulic pump is worn or damaged.

Repair or replace hydraulic pump.

Hydraulic pump drive arrangement is damaged.

Repair pump drive.

Relief valve(s) in the main control valve is damaged or not adjusted correctly.

Replace relief valve(s).

Hydraulic pump is worn or damaged.

Repair or replace hydraulic pump.

The priority valve or flow divider in the hydraulic pump does not operate correctly.

Repair priority valve.

5


Troubleshooting

PROBLEM

1900 SRM 743

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

LIFT, LOWER AND TILT CIRCUIT Slow or no movement of cylinders.

Lift cylinders retract when the lift spool is in the neutral position.

Lift cylinder rods momentarily move down when the lift spool is moved to the lift position.

6

Relief valve(s) in main control valve is damaged or is not adjusted correctly.

Replace relief valve(s).

Large leaks between the spool and bore in the main control valve.

Replace control valve section.

Control valve spool not fully extended or retracted.

Adjust control valve linkage.

The hydraulic pump is worn or damaged.

Repair or replace hydraulic pump.

The hydraulic pump drive arrangement is damaged.

Repair pump drive.

Air is in the hydraulic system.

Remove air from hydraulic system.

There is a restriction in the hydraulic line(s).

Repair or replace hydraulic line(s).

The load is greater than the capacity of the system.

Handle only the correct load.

The cylinder seals have leaks.

Repair cylinder.

Cylinder seals leak or check valve for lift spool leaks.

Repair lift cylinder or main control valve.

Large leaks between the spool and bore in the main control valve.

Repair main control valve.

Hydraulic line(s) leak.

Repair or replace hydraulic line(s).

The load check valve is damaged.

Repair load check valve.


1900 SRM 743

PROBLEM Tilt cylinder rods move forward when the spool is in neutral position.

Troubleshooting

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Tilt control spool inside the tilt spool does not work correctly.

Repair tilt spool section of main control valve.

Oil leaks between the spool and the bore.

Repair main control valve.

Hydraulic line(s) leak.

Repair or replace hydraulic line(s).

Tilt cylinder seals have leaks.

Repair tilt cylinder.

STEERING CIRCUIT The lift truck steers slowly. The steering wheel is hard to turn.

The steering wheel turns the tires in the wrong direction.

The oil level is low. There is no oil in the tank.

Fill tank to correct level.

The line(s) to the steering control unit or steering cylinder are damaged.

Replace damaged hydraulic line(s).

Steering relief pressure is below specifications.

Replace relief valve.

The priority flow divider valve does not operate correctly.

Repair priority valve.

The hydraulic pump is worn or damaged.

Repair or replace hydraulic pump.

The steering control unit is worn or damaged.

Repair or replace steering control unit.

The steering supply lines are reversed.

Reverse supply lines.

7


NOTES ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

8



INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS AND SENDERS H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005, L005]; S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]

PART NO. 1468474

2200 SRM 756


Instrument Panel Indicators and Senders

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS General ............................................................................................................................................................... Description ......................................................................................................................................................... Instruments and Senders.............................................................................................................................. Password Function ........................................................................................................................................ Supervisor Password Function ................................................................................................................. Entering Operator Passwords .............................................................................................................. Deleting Operator Passwords............................................................................................................... Retrieve the Most Recent Operator Password Used to Enable the Truck ......................................... Display All Operator Passwords Programmed Into the System ........................................................ Enable and Disable Operator Passwords Function ............................................................................ Allow Supervisor Password to Enable the Truck to Start .................................................................. Operator Passwords Function .................................................................................................................. Component Replacement - General Information ............................................................................................. Sender Replacement .......................................................................................................................................... Fuel Level Sender .......................................................................................................................................... Pressure and Temperature Sender ............................................................................................................... Seat Sensor, Operator Presence System (OPS)............................................................................................ Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Operator Presence System Module Replacement ........................................................................................ Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Display Panel Replacement............................................................................................................................... Specifications...................................................................................................................................................... Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................................. Troubleshooting For Operator Presence System H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) (K005, L005) ...................... Troubleshooting For Operator Presence System S70-120XM (E004, F004) ...................................................

1 1 1 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 11 12 12 12 13 13 14 15 16 18 19 21

This section is for the following models: H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005, L005]; S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]

Š2007 HYSTER COMPANY

i


2200 SRM 756

Description

General The gauges and meters provide information to the operator on the condition of various systems. Gauges may be either direct reading (mechanical) or indirect (electrical). Unlike mechanical gauges, electrical gauges have electrical meter movements, light emitting diode (LED), or digital displays inside the case. These meters receive an electrical signal from a sender unit, usually in the engine or transmission case. The indicators of electric lift trucks receive an electrical signal from a sensor (motor temperature)

or a control board. This section only describes the electrical gauges, meters, senders, and instrument panel displays. Gauges will be referred to as meters. The meters and displays are used to provide operator information on the status of many systems including: engine coolant temperature, engine or transmission oil pressure or temperature, fuel level, battery current (ammeter), and battery voltage (voltmeter). See Figure 1.

Description INSTRUMENTS AND SENDERS WARNING If any of the instruments do not operate as described, report the problem immediately. DO NOT operate the lift truck until the problem is corrected.

flow that is directly related to a given voltage (electrical system voltage) applied. The display panel has a password function that permits operation of the lift truck. The lift truck cannot be started without first entering the password code. The password function can be disabled by the supervisor.

Many meters have meter movements that move an indicating needle attached to a shaft or pin. The shaft rotates to swing the needle when current flows through the movement. The movement operates on the same electromagnetic principle that causes a motor shaft to rotate. However, shaft rotation of a meter is limited to much less than one full revolution. The amount of rotation or deflection of the needle is directly related to the amount of current flow through the meter movement. Meter faces are calibrated to indicate a range of values that are converted from a directly proportional current flow through the sender. For examples of meter faces and indicators, see Figure 1 and Table 1. Meters such as voltmeters and the hourmeter are able to convert this proportional current within the meter case. Other meters and displays require a separate sender. See Table 2. Senders convert a specific pressure, temperature, or fluid level into a current

Figure 1. Instrument Cluster

1


Description

2200 SRM 756 Table 1. Instrument Panel Description

Item No.

Item

Function

1

Hourmeter

The hourmeter on the instrument panel displays the number of operating hours of the truck. The meter displays the operating time of 0000 to 999,999.9 hours. The hourmeter operates when the key switch is in the ON position. Periodic Maintenance recommendations are based on these hours.

2

Warning Light, Alternator

The light will be on when the key switch is ON and the engine is not running. The light must go off when the engine is running.

CAUTION Do not continue to operate the lift truck if the red light is on at engine speeds above idle. 3

Voltmeter

This gauge indicates the output of the alternator. During normal operation the gauge needle will be in the green area.

CAUTION Do not continue to operate the lift truck when the gauge needle is in the red area. 4

Indicator Light, Coolant Temperature

The light will be on when the key switch is ON and the engine is not running. If this light comes on while the engine is running, this indicates the engine coolant has overheated. The light must go off when the engine is running.

CAUTION Do not continue to operate the lift truck if the red light is on during operation. NOTE: Engine will stop after a 30-second warning buzzer if coolant is over 121 C (250 F). When engine stop occurs, the hourmeter display will show the word "Stop." 5

Coolant Temperature Gauge

This gauge indicates engine coolant temperature when the key switch is in the ON position. During normal operation the gauge needle will be in the green area.

CAUTION Do not continue to operate the lift truck if the red light is on during operation. NOTE: Engine will stop after a 30-second warning buzzer if coolant is over 121 C (250 F). When engine stop occurs, the hourmeter display will show the word "Stop."

2


2200 SRM 756

Description

Table 1. Instrument Panel Description (Continued) Item No.

Item

Function

6

Indicator Light, Left-Hand Turn, H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM)

The light is on when the turn indicator lever is in the left turn position.

7

Indicator Light, Service Engine Soon (Lift Trucks with GM 4.3L Engine and Gas/LPG Fuel System)

This light will be on when the key switch is ON and the engine is not running. This light will illuminate when the ECM computer senses a fault in the operation of the engine. If the engine starts, the operation of the engine will not be correct until the fault is corrected. A trained service person must make repairs and adjustments if this light is on when the engine is running.

8

Warning Light, Coolant Level in the Radiator

The red light is on when the key switch is in the START position and must go off when the engine is running. If the light is on when the engine is running, the level of the coolant in the radiator is too low.

CAUTION Do not continue to operate the lift truck if the light is on during operation. 9

Indicator Light, Air Filter Restriction

The red light is on when the key switch is in the START position and must go off when the engine is running. If the light is on when the engine is running, the air cleaner has a restriction and needs cleaning.

10

Operator Password Function

This system will only allow an operator whose password is preprogrammed in the system to operate the lift truck. Refer to Operator Passwords Function for more information.

11

Warning Light, Brake Fluid Level

The red light is on when the key switch is in the START position and must go off when the engine is running. If the light is on when the engine is running, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low.

CAUTION Do not continue to operate the lift truck if the light is on during operation.

3


Description

2200 SRM 756

Table 1. Instrument Panel Description (Continued) Item No.

Item

Function

12

Indicator Light, Cold Start (Diesel Only)

The red light is on when the key switch is ON and the glow plug dash button is pressed. The length of time the glow plugs are activated is determined by the temperature of the engine. When the light goes out, the engine can be started. When the starter is cranking, the light will come on again until the starter is off and the engine is running.

13

Warning Light, Fasten Seat Belt

The red light is on for 10 seconds any time the key switch is put in the ON position.

WARNING Always fasten the seat belt when operating the lift truck. 14

Indicator Light, Transmission 1st Gear, H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM)

The light is on when the two-speed transmission is locked into first gear by activating the transmission lockout switch on the dash.

15

Warning Light, Powershift Transmission Oil Temperature

The red light is on when the key switch is in the START position and must go off when the engine is running.

CAUTION Do not continue to operate the lift truck if the red light is on. NOTE: Engine will stop after a 30-second warning buzzer if transmission oil is over 132 C (270 F). When engine stop occurs, the hourmeter display will show the word "Stop." 15

4

Warning Light, Hydrostatic Transmission Oil Temperature, H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM)

The red light is on when the key switch is in the START position and must go off when the engine is running.

CAUTION Do not continue to operate the lift truck if the red light is on. NOTE: If the lift truck is equipped with a hydrostatic transmission and the oil temperature is 96 C (205 F), the warning light flashes, the fault light flashes an event code, and an alarm sounds. If the oil temperature is 104 C (220 F) for 30 seconds, the engine will shut off. When engine stop occurs, the hourmeter display will show the word "Stop."


2200 SRM 756

Description

Table 1. Instrument Panel Description (Continued) Item No.

Item

Function

16

Warning Light, Hydrostatic Transmission Overspeed, H3.505.50XM (H70-120XM)

This light indicates a hydrostatic transmission overspeed condition.

17

Warning Light, Water Separator (Diesel Only)

The red light is on when the key switch is in the START position and must go off when the engine is running. If the light is on when the engine is running, the water separator must be drained.

18

Warning Light, Hydrostatic Transmission Fault, H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM)

This light indicates a fault in the hydrostatic transmission control system. This light is also used to signal fault code numbers during troubleshooting.

19

Indicator Light, Right-Hand Turn, H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM)

The light is on when the turn indicator lever is in the right turn position.

20

Fuel Gauge

This gauge indicates the amount of fuel in the gasoline or diesel fuel tank. This gauge is not available on the LPG truck. When engine stop occurs, the hourmeter display will show the word "Stop."

21

Indicator Light, Fuel Level

This indicator light will come on when the fuel level is low. When engine stop occurs, the hourmeter display will show the word "Stop."

5


Description

2200 SRM 756

Table 1. Instrument Panel Description (Continued) Item No. 22

Item Engine Oil Pressure Gauge

Function This gauge indicates the pressure of the oil in the engine. During normal operation the gauge needle will be in the green area.

CAUTION Do not continue to operate the lift truck when the gauge indicates low oil pressure (needle in the red area). NOTE: Engine will stop after a 30-second warning buzzer if engine oil pressure is less than 13.8 kPa (2 psi). When engine stop occurs, the hourmeter display will show the word "Stop." 23

Warning Light, Engine Oil Pressure

The red light is on when the key switch is in the ON position and must go off when the engine is running.

CAUTION Stop the engine immediately if the red light is on while the engine is running. NOTE: Engine will stop after a 30-second warning buzzer if engine oil pressure is less than 13.8 kPa (2 psi). When engine stop occurs, the hourmeter display will show the word "Stop."

6


2200 SRM 756

Description Table 2. Sender Description

Item No.

Item

Function

1

Water Temperature Sender

The water temperature sender is mounted in the engine block and senses the water temperature. If the water temperature exceeds the specified temperature, the sender sends a signal to the control panel and lights the coolant temperature indicator. This signal also drives the coolant temperature gauge. See Table 3.

2

Transmission Temperature Sender

The transmission temperature sender unit is mounted in the front of the transmission and senses the transmission fluid temperature and pressure. When the transmission temperature or pressure exceeds system specifications, the sender sends a signal to the control panel and lights the transmission pressure/temperature indicator. See Table 3.

CAUTION Do not continue to operate the lift truck if the red light is on at engine speeds above idle. 3

Oil Pressure Sender

The oil pressure sender is located on the side of the engine block and senses the engine oil pressure. If the pressure exceeds the upper or lower pressure specifications, the sender sends a signal to the control panel and lights the engine oil pressure indicator. The oil pressure sender signal also drives the oil pressure meter. See Table 3.

CAUTION Do not continue to operate the lift truck when the gauge indicates in the red areas of the gauge. 4

Low Coolant Sender H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM)

S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM)

The low coolant sender is mounted in the coolant system radiator near the top of the tank. It senses the fluid level and, when low, sends a signal to the control panel and lights the coolant system fluid low warning indicator.

CAUTION Do not continue to operate the lift truck if the red light is on during operation.

7


Description

2200 SRM 756

Table 2. Sender Description (Continued) Item No. 5

Item Fuel Level Sender

Function The fuel level sender is installed in the fuel tank and indicates when the fuel is low. An internal float closes the circuit, sends a signal to the control panel, and lights the fuel level low warning indicator. A signal is also sent to the fuel level gauge to indicate the amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

CAUTION Do not continue to operate the lift truck if the red light is on during operation. 6

Brake Fluid Sender

The low brake fluid level sender is built into the brake fluid reservoir. When the brake fluid is low, the float inside the reservoir closes the circuit, sends a signal to the control panel, and lights the brake fluid low warning indicator.

CAUTION Do not continue to operate the lift truck if the red light is on during operation.

PASSWORD FUNCTION When enabled, the Operator Passwords Function allows only supervisors and operators, whose five-digit password has been preprogrammed in the system, the capability to start the lift truck engine. The supervisor password and the operator password provide different levels of access. The following sections describe functions available at Supervisor and Operator levels of access.

Supervisor Password Function NOTE: The five-digit supervisor’s access password is provided at lift truck delivery and is included on a removable label on the bottom of the display panel. If the access password is lost, contact your dealer and provide them with the display panel serial number and manufacturing date. See the section, Display Panel Replacement and Figure 8. The supervisor password, when entered, allows access to the following: • Enabling and disabling the operator passwords function. (5) • Entering operator passwords. (1) • Deleting operator passwords. (2)

8

• Retrieving the most recent operator password that enabled the truck to start. (3) • Displaying all operator passwords programmed into the system. (4) • Allowing the supervisor password to be used to enable the truck to start. (*) Input is from a six-key membrane pad labeled * and 1 through 5. The * key serves to execute a function or exit supervisor mode. Supervisor access mode will also time out, and the display will return to showing hours when no keys are pressed for 10 seconds. If a mistake is made during any password entry, re-enter the password before pressing the * key. Only the last 5 numbers entered will be used when processing passwords. Entering Operator Passwords 1. Enter supervisor password and press * key. 2. Press the 1 key and then press * key. 3. Enter a five-digit operator password and press * key. The display will show "Enter" if the password was accepted or "Full" if there are more than 100 passwords already programmed.


2200 SRM 756 4. Continue to enter additional operator passwords as in Step 3 or press * key again to exit supervisor mode. Deleting Operator Passwords 1. Enter supervisor password and press * key. 2. Press the 2 key and then press * key. 3. Enter five-digit operator password and press * key. The display will show "Clear" if the password was deleted or "Error" if the password was not programmed into the system. 4. Continue to enter additional operator passwords as in Step 3 or press * key again to exit supervisor mode. Retrieve the Most Recent Operator Password Used to Enable the Truck 1. Enter supervisor password and press * key. 2. Press the 3 key and then press * key. 3. The display will show the most recent password used to enable the truck. 4. Press * key to exit supervisor mode. Display All Operator Passwords Programmed Into the System 1. Enter supervisor password and press * key. 2. Press the 4 key and then press * key. 3. The display will show the first operator password in the list. 4. Press the 4 key again to scroll through list. For each press of the 4 key, the next password will be displayed. 5. When the end of the list is reached, the last password will remain on display for an additional press of the 4 key. 6. Press * to exit supervisor mode. Enable and Disable Operator Passwords Function 1. Enter supervisor password and press * key. 2. Press the 5 key and then press * key. 3. The 5 key may be pressed again to toggle the mode the password function will latch into when

Description the * key is pressed. Each time the 5 key is pressed, the display will toggle between "Loc" (enabled) and "Start" (disabled). This shows which mode the password function will latch into when the * key is pressed. 4. Press * key again to latch password operation enabled if display is showing "Loc" or disabled if display is showing "Start." If the * key is not pressed before the 10 second key, press timeout, the selected password mode will not be changed. 5. After enabling or disabling this function, turn key switch OFF for at least 10 seconds. Allow Supervisor Password to Enable the Truck to Start 1. Enter supervisor password and press * key. 2. Press * key again without pressing any of the number keys. 3. The display will show "Start" and the truck engine will be enabled to start. This enable period also continues for 5 minutes after the key switch is turned OFF. If the * key is pressed three times in succession with the key OFF, this enable period is reduced to 30 seconds.

Operator Passwords Function When enabled, the operator passwords function allows only operators, whose 5-digit password has been preprogrammed in the system, to start the lift truck engine. Operational instructions for the Operator Password Function follow: 1. Input is from a six-key membrane pad labeled * and 1 through 5. 2. The * key acts as an enter key to process the password that has been entered. If the * key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the last keypress, password entry will not be processed. 3. If a mistake is made during password entry, re-enter password before pressing * key. Only the last 5 numbers entered will be used when processing the password. 4. If an incorrect password is entered, the display will show "Loc" and inhibit password re-entry for 5 seconds. After the 5-second inhibit, entering the password may again be attempted.

9


Sender Replacement

2200 SRM 756

5. When a valid operator password is entered, the engine is enabled to run. The hourmeter display will show "Start." This enable period also continues for 5 minutes after the key switch is turned

off. If the * key is pressed three times in succession with the key off, this enable period is reduced to 30 seconds.

Component Replacement - General Information WARNING Before replacing any components, fully lower the mast and tilt it forward until the tips of the forks touch the ground. This will prevent the mast from lowering suddenly if the control lever is accidently moved. Always disconnect the battery and remove the key before replacing components. Remove any jewelry or metal objects from your fingers, arms, or neck. These items can accidentally make an electrical connection and cause an injury. NOTE: There are two versions of the display panel used on this line of trucks. On newer display panels, the turn signals are red. On older display panels, the turn signals are green. Newer display panels and their components are non-repairable and must be replaced with a complete new display unit.

NOTE: On older display panels, none of the electrical components of this section can be repaired. All bad components must be replaced. Meters, display panels, most indicators, and senders are not repairable items. The most accurate and usually easiest checks for proper operation of individual meters, indicators, or senders is direct replacement. The most common causes of failure are poor connections, damaged wires, or improper wiring, but not the meter, indicator, or sender itself. This section only has the replacement procedures. Before a meter, indicator, sender, or display panel is replaced, make the following checks: 1. Check that other meters and electrical circuits operate correctly. 2. Check that battery is fully charged and has a good ground (diesel, gasoline, and LPG units only), and check that cable terminals are clean and tight. 3. Check that wiring and connections to meter, indicator, or sender are tight and in good condition.

Sender Replacement FUEL LEVEL SENDER

2. Disconnect sender wire at sender.

WARNING All fuel vapors are extremely explosive. Do not allow sparks or flames around vehicles or fuel storage and service areas. Make sure there is no source of open flame or sparks in the vicinity. Use caution to prevent sparks from tools. The fuel level sending unit is mounted to the fuel tank surface (usually top surface) with screws through the sender plate and gasket. See Figure 2. Correct sender operation and screw hole alignment can only be obtained with the plate mounted in one position. Replace the sender as follows: 1. Turn key switch to OFF position and disconnect positive battery cable at battery. Install lock or tag on connector to prevent connection. 10

1. SHUTOFF VALVE 2. ELECTRICAL TERMINAL

3. SENDER UNIT 4. PLATE

Figure 2. Fuel Level Sender


2200 SRM 756

Sender Replacement

WARNING Electrical shock from voltage can cause personal injury. Put electrical tape on the wire connector to electrically insulate the connector if the wire is accidentally energized. 3. Remove screws that fasten sender plate to fuel tank. Remove sender. 4. Carefully install new sender with new gasket. 5. Make sure screw holes are aligned and install screws. Tighten screws enough to partially compress gasket to prevent leaks. 6. Remove tape from wire connector. Install connector on sender terminal.

PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENDER

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

ELECTRICAL TERMINAL HEX THREADED BODY SENSOR ELEMENT CASE OF ENGINE OR TRANSMISSION

Figure 3. Typical Pressure and Temperature Sender

Pressure senders have a hollow threaded fitting fastened to the base. See Figure 3 and Figure 4. This makes it possible for the sender to sense the pressure and also to fasten the sender to the equipment. The sender can be tightened or loosened using a wrench on the flats of the hex shape of the fitting. See Table 3. The body of the temperature sender has threads to fit a threaded hole in the equipment. Replace either sender as follows: NOTE: Make sure the system fluid is drained to a level below the sender to prevent leakage when the sender is removed. 1. Turn key switch to OFF position. 2. Disconnect sender wire. 3. Turn sender counterclockwise with a wrench until free. Remove and discard old sender. 4. Install new sender and tighten with a wrench. 5. Connect sender wire.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

ELECTRICAL TERMINAL SENDER HEX THREADED FITTING HOLE-TO-SENSOR ELEMENT CASE OF ENGINE OR TRANSMISSION Figure 4. Fluid Pressure Sender

11


Sender Replacement

2200 SRM 756

SEAT SENSOR, OPERATOR PRESENCE SYSTEM (OPS) Remove 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Disconnect seat harness from chassis harness. 3. Remove the four capscrews, washers, and seat from the hood. 4. Disconnect the seat harness from the seat sensor. See Figure 5. 5. Remove two capscrews and seat sensor from the seat.

Install 1. Using two capscrews, install seat sensor on the bottom of the seat. See Figure 5. 2. Connect seat sensor to seat harness. 3. Install seat onto hood using four capscrews and washers. Tighten capscrews to 18 N•m (156 lbf in). 4. Connect seat harness to chassis harness. 5. Connect battery.

12

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

CAPSCREWS SEAT SENSOR SEAT SENSOR ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR SEAT GROUND WIRE TO CHASSIS HARNESS Figure 5. Seat Sensor Location


2200 SRM 756

Sender Replacement

OPERATOR PRESENCE SYSTEM MODULE REPLACEMENT

2. Remove the dash cover from the cowl. See Display Panel Replacement.

NOTE: Remove the Operator Presence System Module only when directed to do so as a result of troubleshooting the Operator Presence System.

3. Disconnect the Operator Presence System Connector from the Operator Presence System Module. See Figure 6 and Figure 7.

Remove

NOTE: There are two washers on each mounting screw and nut combination. Note the location of the two washers during removal to aid in installation.

1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.

1. 2. 3. 4.

OPERATOR’S SEAT OPERATOR PRESENCE SYSTEM CABLE OPERATOR PRESENCE SYSTEM MODULE SHIELD OPERATOR PRESENCE SYSTEM MODULE Figure 6. Operator Presence System Module [H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM)]

13


Sender Replacement

1. 2. 3. 4.

2200 SRM 756

OPERATOR’S SEAT OPERATOR PRESENCE SYSTEM CABLE OPERATOR PRESENCE SYSTEM MODULE OPERATOR PRESENCE SYSTEM MODULE SHIELD Figure 7. Operator Presence System Module (S70-120XM)

4. Remove the Operator Presence System Module from the cowl and Operator Presence System Module Shield. See Figure 6. 5. Remove the Operator Presence System Module from the park brake mounting bracket and Operator Presence System Module Shield. See Figure 7.

14

Install 1. Install the Operator Presence System Module on the park brake mounting bracket and Operator Presence System Module Shield. See Figure 7. 2. Install the Operator Presence System Module on the cowl and Operator Presence System Module Shield. See Figure 6.


2200 SRM 756

Display Panel Replacement

3. Connect the Operator Presence System Connector to the Operator Presence System Module. See Figure 6 and Figure 7.

4. Install the dash cover on the cowl. See Display Panel Replacement. 5. Connect the negative battery terminal.

Display Panel Replacement 1. Disconnect battery and remove key. 2. Remove dust cover from thermal start switch. Remove switch from dash. See Figure 8 and Figure 9. 3. Remove six screws from dash cover. Lift dash over parking brake lever. NOTE: The pigtail on the display panel connector, the cold start switch, and the soot trap indicator should be long enough to tilt the dash back far enough to remove the display panel.

1. 2. 3. 4.

COLD START SWITCH DASH INSTRUMENT PANEL DASH MOUNTING SCREW (6)

4. Remove electrical connector from bottom of display panel. 5. Remove four screws, washers, and clips that fasten display panel to dash. 6. Install replacement display panel assembly on dash and tighten screws. Install electrical connector. 7. Install dash and tighten six screws that fasten dash cover.

5. U-NUT (6) 6. INSTRUMENT PANEL SCREW, WASHER, AND CLIP (4)

Figure 8. Display Panel Replacement H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM)

15


Specifications

1. 2. 3. 4.

2200 SRM 756

5. U-NUT (6) 6. INSTRUMENT PANEL SCREW, WASHER, AND CLIP (4)

COLD START SWITCH DASH INSTRUMENT PANEL DASH MOUNTING SCREW (6)

Figure 9. Display Panel Replacement S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120)

Specifications Table 3. Meter and Sender Specifications Item

Design Data

Operating Voltage Hourmeter (Engine Powered Equipment), 12 V All Other Meters, and Senders Sender Terminal Threads

#10-32 UNF or #6-32 UNC

Range of Meter

16

Hourmeter

0.0 to 999,999.9 Hours

Voltmeter

10 to 16 Volts

Temperature Gauge (Range Based on Requirements)

38 to 121 C (100 to 250 F) Water Temperature 38 to 182 C (100 to 360 F) Transmission Oil Temperature

Oil Pressure Gauge (Range Based on Requirements)

0 to 5.20 kPa (0 to 0.75 psi)


2200 SRM 756

Specifications

Table 3. Meter and Sender Specifications (Continued) Item

Design Data

Fastener Data (To Fit in a Threaded Hole) Water Temperature Sender (Gauge) Body Threads

3/8-18 NPTF (GM 4.3L) 1/2-14 NPTF (Diesel)

Hex (Across Flats)

19.0 mm (0.75 in.) (GM 4.3L) 22.0 mm (0.87 in.) (Diesel)

Water Temperature Sender (ECM/ECU) Body Threads

3/8-18 NPTF (GM 4.3L)

Hex (Across Flats)

19.0 mm (0.75 in.) (GM 4.3L)

Oil Pressure Sender Fitting Threads

1/8-27 NPTF (GM 4.3L and Diesel)

Hex (Across Flats)

14.0 mm (0.55 in.) (GM 4.3L and Diesel)

Low Coolant Sender Body Threads

1/2-14 Dryseal

Hex (Across Flats)

23.4 mm (0.92 in.) for a 15/16 in. Wrench

Fuel Sender Plate Number of Holes

2 (Equally Spaced)

Hole Size

7.30 to 7.60 mm (0.287 to 0.299 in.)

17


Troubleshooting

2200 SRM 756

Troubleshooting PROBLEM No Indication - All Meters

No Indication - Only One Meter

Incorrect Indication

18

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Battery disconnected.

Clean the battery terminals and battery cable connectors. Install connectors.

Battery malfunction or discharged.

Charge or replace battery.

Wiring group connector or connectors not connected.

Fasten connector or connectors.

Meter wires damaged or not connected.

Replace broken wires or connectors. Install connectors on proper meter terminals.

Separate sender wire damaged or not connected.

Replace broken wire or connector. Install connector on sender terminal.

Meter malfunction. Voltage is at terminal.

Replace meter.

Sender malfunction. terminal.

Replace sender.

Voltage is at

Battery is discharged.

Charge battery.

Meter movement or needle is damaged or has a malfunction.

Replace meter.

Separate sender malfunction.

Replace sender.

Sender will not sense because system has corrosion.

Clean and flush system.


2200 SRM 756

Troubleshooting For Operator Presence System H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) (K005, L005)

Troubleshooting For Operator Presence System H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) (K005, L005) NOTE: If a fuse is blown, always check the associated circuit(s) for short to ground before replacing the fuse. Table 4. Troubleshooting Procedure for the Operator Presence Module Symptom

Cause

Check

Result

Investigate

Truck does not move with Operator Present.

No power to Operator Presence System (OPS)

With power ON and engine OFF. Unplug the Operator Presence System connector, and check for battery voltage on Operator Presence System connector pin 2 and pin 1.

Battery voltage >No > Battery voltage >Yes > (Next step below).

Check ground and power wiring, connectors and fuse F5 for open circuit. Repair or replace.

Truck does not move with Operator Present.

Circuit disconnected from the module to the transmission solenoid’s power source.

With power ON and engine OFF. Unplug Operator Presence System connector, release the park brake and select a direction. Check for battery voltage on Operator Presence System connector pin 5 (+) and pin 6 ( ). Repeat for other direction selection.

Battery Voltage > No > Battery voltage >Yes> (Next step below).

Check Wiring, connectors, relays, direction switch, and Fuse F5 for battery open circuit. Check ground connection for an open circuit between pin 6 and Ground. Repair or replace.

Truck does not move with Operator Present.

Operator presence not detected.

With power ON and engine OFF. Plug the Operator Presence System connector in, and check for 5 volts on Operator Presence System connector pin 10 (+) and pin 12 ( ).

5 volts > no > 5 volts > yes > (Next step below).

Check circuit 257 for short to ground. If there is no short to ground, replace Operator Presence System module.

Truck does not move with Operator Present.

With power ON and engine OFF. Plug the Operator Presence System connector in, and with no operator in the seat, check for approximately 0.5 volts on Operator Presence System connector pin 11 (+) and pin 12 ( ).

0.5 volts > No > 0.5 volts > yes> (next step below).

Check circuit 007 for short to ground or open circuit. If there is an open circuit, repair. If there is no short to ground, or open circuit, replace faulty seat sensor.

Truck does not move with Operator Present.

With power ON and engine OFF. Plug the Operator Presence System connector in, and with operator in the seat, check for approximately 3.0 to 4.5 volts on Operator Presence System connector pin 11 (+) and pin 12 ( )

3 to 4.5 volts > No> 3 volts or more > yes > (next step below)

Faulty seat sensor.

19


Troubleshooting For Operator Presence System H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) (K005, L005)

2200 SRM 756

Table 4. Troubleshooting Procedure for the Operator Presence Module (Continued) Symptom

Truck does not move with Operator Present.

Truck can move without Operator Present.

20

Cause

Operator Presence System does not reset.

Operator Presence System is detecting a false seat presence signal.

Check

Result

Investigate

With power ON and engine OFF. Plug the Operator Presence System connector in, and with operator in the seat, check for approximately 3.0 to 4.5 volts on Operator Presence System connector pin 11 (+) and pin 12 ( ).

Greater than 4.5 volts > Yes> 3 to 4.5 volts > yes > (next step below)

Check circuit 007 for short to 5 volts or short to battery. Repair or replace.

With power ON, engine OFF, service brake applied, and the Operator Presence System connector unplugged, check for battery voltage on Operator Presence System connector pin 3 and pin 1.

Battery voltage >No> Battery voltage >yes> (next step below)

Check ground and power wiring for open circuits. Check connectors and the service brake switch for an open circuit. Check fuse F7 for an open circuit. Repair or replace.

With power ON, engine OFF, service brake not applied, and the Operator Presence System connector unplugged, check for battery voltage on Operator Presence System connector pin 3 and pin 1.

Battery voltage >yes>

Check power wiring or connectors for short to battery. Service Brake switch circuit shorted. Repair or replace.

With power ON and engine OFF. Plug the Operator Presence System connector in, and with no operator in the seat, check for approximately 3.0 to 4.5 volts on Operator Presence System connector pin 11 (+) and pin 12 ( ).

3 to 4.5 volts > Yes> 3 to 4.5 volts > No> (next step below)

Stuck seat mechanism Repair Stuck seat sensor Replace


2200 SRM 756

Troubleshooting For Operator Presence System S70-120XM (E004, F004)

Table 4. Troubleshooting Procedure for the Operator Presence Module (Continued) Symptom

Cause

Check

Result

Investigate

Truck can move without Operator Present.

Direction solenoids can be operated.

With power ON and engine OFF. Unplug Operator Presence System connector, release the park brake and select a direction. Check for battery voltage on Operator Presence System connector pin 2 (+) and pin 5. ( ). Repeat for other direction selection.

Battery voltage >Yes> Battery voltage >No> (next step below)

Check circuits 629 and 632 for short to ground Repair or replace.

Truck can move without Operator Present.

No Operator Presence System Interlock.

With power ON and engine OFF. Plug the Operator Presence System connector in, with no operator in the seat, check for battery voltage on Operator Presence System connector pin 2 (+) and pin 5 ( ).

Battery voltage >Yes>

Operator Presence System faulty. Replace

Troubleshooting For Operator Presence System S70-120XM (E004, F004) NOTE: If a fuse is blown, always check the associated circuit(s) for short to ground before replacing the fuse. Table 5. Troubleshooting Procedure for the Operator Presence Module Symptom

Cause

Check

Result

Investigate

Truck does not move with Operator Present.

No power to Operator Presence System (OPS)

With power ON and engine OFF. Unplug the Operator Presence System connector, and check for battery voltage on Operator Presence System connector pin 2 and pin 1.

Battery voltage >No > Battery voltage >Yes > (Next step below).

Check ground, power wiring, connectors fuses, and ignition relay for open circuit. Repair or replace.

Truck does not move with Operator Present.

Circuit disconnected from the module to the transmission solenoid’s power source.

With power ON and engine OFF. Unplug Operator Presence System connector, release the park brake and select a direction. Check for battery voltage on Operator Presence System connector pin 6 (+) and pin 5 ( ). Repeat for other direction selection.

Battery Voltage > No > Battery voltage >Yes> (Next step below).

Check Wiring, connectors, fuses and ignition relay 2, for open circuit between battery and pin 6. Check wiring, connectors, direction switches, relay coils, and right park brake switch for an open circuit between pin 5 and Ground. Repair or replace.

21


Troubleshooting For Operator Presence System S70-120XM (E004, F004)

2200 SRM 756

Table 5. Troubleshooting Procedure for the Operator Presence Module (Continued) Symptom

Cause

Check

Result

Investigate

Truck does not move with Operator Present.

Operator presence not detected.

With power ON and engine OFF. Plug the Operator Presence System connector in, and check for 5 volts on Operator Presence System connector pin 10 (+) and pin 12 ( ).

5 volts > no > 5 volts > yes > (Next step below).

Check circuit 430 for short to ground. If there is no short to ground, replace Operator Presence System module.

Truck does not move with Operator Present.

With power ON and engine OFF. Plug the Operator Presence System connector in, and with no operator in the seat, check for approximately 0.5 volts on Operator Presence System connector pin 11 (+) and pin 12 ( ).

0.5 volts > No > 0.5 volts > yes> (next step below).

Check circuit 431 for short to ground or open circuit. If there is an open circuit, repair. If there is no short to ground, or open circuit, replace faulty seat sensor.

Truck does not move with Operator Present.

With power ON and engine OFF. Plug the Operator Presence System connector in, and with operator in the seat, check for approximately 3.0 to 4.5 volts on Operator Presence System connector pin 11 (+) and pin 12 ( ).

3 to 4.5 volts > No> 3 volts or more > yes > (next step below)

Faulty seat sensor.

With power ON and engine OFF. Plug the Operator Presence System connector in, and with operator in the seat, check for approximately 3.0 to 4.5 volts on Operator Presence System connector pin 11 (+) and pin 12 ( ).

Greater than 4.5 volts > Yes> 3 to 4.5 volts > yes > (next step below)

Check circuit 431 for short to 5 volts or short to battery. Repair or replace.

With power ON, engine OFF, service brake applied, and the Operator Presence System connector unplugged, check for battery voltage on Operator Presence System connector pin 3 and pin 1.

Battery voltage >No> Battery voltage >yes> (next step below)

Check ground and power wiring for open circuits. Check connectors, service brake switch, and brake light relay for an open circuit. Check fuses for an open circuit. Repair or replace.

With power ON, engine OFF, service brake not applied, and the Operator Presence System connector unplugged, check for battery voltage on Operator Presence System connector pin 3 and pin 1.

Battery voltage >yes>

Check power wiring or connectors for short to battery. Service Brake switch circuit shorted. Repair or replace.

Truck does not move with Operator Present.

22

Operator Presence System does not reset.


2200 SRM 756

Troubleshooting For Operator Presence System S70-120XM (E004, F004)

Table 5. Troubleshooting Procedure for the Operator Presence Module (Continued) Symptom

Cause

Check

Result

Investigate

Truck can move without Operator Present.

Operator Presence System is detecting a false seat presence signal.

With power ON and engine OFF. Plug the Operator Presence System connector in and with no operator in the seat, check for approximately 3.0 to 4.5 volts on Operator Presence System connector pin 11 (+) and pin 12 ( ).

3 to 4.5 volts > Yes> 3 to 4.5 volts >No> (next step below)

Stuck seat mechanism Repair Stuck seat sensor Replace

Truck can move without Operator Present.

Direction solenoids can be operated.

With power ON and engine OFF. Unplug Operator Presence System connector, release the park brake and select a direction. Check for battery voltage on Operator Presence System connector pin 5 (+) and pin 1 ( ). Repeat for other direction selection.

Battery voltage >Yes> Battery voltage >No> (next step below)

Circuit 833 short to battery Repair or replace.

Truck can move without Operator Present.

No Operator Presence System Interlock.

With power ON and engine OFF. Plug the Operator Presence System connector in, with no operator in the seat, check for battery voltage on Operator Presence System connector pin 5 (+) and pin 1 ( ).

Battery voltage >Yes>

Operator Presence System faulty. Replace

23


NOTES ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

24



LIFT CYLINDERS E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) [C098]; H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005, L005]; S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]; E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) [D098]

PART NO. 1466169

4000 SRM 741


Lift Cylinders

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS Safety Procedures When Working Near Mast.................................................................................................. General ............................................................................................................................................................... Description ......................................................................................................................................................... Lowering Control Valve (Velocity Fuse) ....................................................................................................... Lift Cylinder Repair........................................................................................................................................... Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Disassemble ................................................................................................................................................... Assemble ........................................................................................................................................................ Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Lift System Leak Check .................................................................................................................................... Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................................................

1 3 3 3 6 6 7 7 8 8 9

This section is for the following models: E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) [C098]; H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005, L005]; S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]; E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) [D098]

©2005 HYSTER COMPANY

i


4000 SRM 741

Safety Procedures When Working Near Mast

Safety Procedures When Working Near Mast The following procedures MUST be used when inspecting or working near the mast. Additional precautions and procedures can be required when repairing or removing the mast.

WARNING Mast parts are heavy and may shift. Distances between parts are small. Serious injury can result if part of the body is hit by parts of the mast or the carriage. • Never put any part of the body into or under the mast or carriage unless all parts are completely lowered or a safety chain is installed. Make sure the power is OFF and the battery is disconnected. Put a DO NOT OPERATE tag in the operator’s compartment. • Be careful of the forks. When the mast is raised, the forks can be at a height to cause an injury. • DO NOT climb on the mast or lift truck at any time. Use a ladder or personnel lift to work on the mast. • DO NOT use blocks to support the mast weldments nor to restrain their movement. • Mast repairs require disassembly and removal of parts and can require removal of the mast or carriage. Follow the repair procedures in the correct Service Manual for the mast. WHEN WORKING NEAR THE MAST ALWAYS: • Lower the mast and carriage completely. Push the lift/lower control lever forward and make sure there is no movement in the mast. Make sure all parts of the mast that move are fully lowered.

OR • If parts of the mast must be in a raised position, install a safety chain to restrain the moving parts of the mast. Connect moving parts to a part that does not move. Follow these procedures: 1. Put mast in a vertical position. 2. Raise mast to align bottom crossmember of weldment that moves in outer weldment with a crossmember on outer weldment. On two-stage and free-lift mast, the moving part is the inner weldment. On three-stage mast, it is the intermediate weldment. See Figure 1. 3. Use a 3/8-inch minimum safety chain with a hook to fasten cross members together so the movable member cannot lower. Put hook on back side of mast. Make sure hook is completely engaged with a link in the chain. Make sure safety chain does not touch lift chains or chain sheaves, tubes, hoses, fittings, or other parts on the mast. 4. Lower mast until there is tension in safety chain, and free-lift cylinder (two-stage full free-lift and three-stage masts only) is completely retracted. If running, stop engine. Apply parking brake. Install a DO NOT REMOVE tag on safety chain(s). 5. Install another safety chain (3/8 inch minimum) between top or bottom crossmember of carriage and a crossmember on outer weldment. NOTE: After lowering or restraining the mast, shut off the power and remove the key. Put a DO NOT OPERATE tag in the operator’s compartment.

1


Safety Procedures When Working Near Mast

4000 SRM 741

A. TWO-STAGE LFL MAST

B. TWO-STAGE FFL MAST

C. THREE-STAGE FFL MAST

1. OUTER WELDMENT 2. INNER WELDMENT 3. INTERMEDIATE WELDMENT

4. HOOK 5. FREE-LIFT CYLINDER 6. CROSSMEMBER

7. CROSSMEMBER

Figure 1. Safety Chain the Mast

2


4000 SRM 741

Description

General This section has the description for lift cylinders used on the masts for model lift trucks S3.50-5.50XM (S70120XM), H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) [D098] and the instructions for their repair. The operation and repair procedures for the different lift cylinders are similar. See the section Lift Cylinders 4000 SRM 135 for lift cylinders used on other units.

Description All lift cylinders for the masts are single-action hydraulic cylinders. The hydraulic force is applied only in one direction. When hydraulic oil enters one end of the lift cylinder, the hydraulic force extends the piston rod. When the force is removed, the weight of the carriage and inner mast causes the piston rod to retract. A common maintenance problem is the repair of oil leaks. If the bore of the shell of the lift cylinder is damaged and cannot be repaired, the lift cylinder must be replaced. The two-stage and three-stage masts have two main lift cylinders. The free-lift mast has two main lift cylinders and a shorter free-lift cylinder. See Figure 2 and Figure 3. Spacers are used in some cylinders to limit the stroke of the piston rod. Worn spacers must be replaced with the same size spacer. The free-lift cylinder has a single-lip seal on the piston to prevent hydraulic oil leaks past the piston and retainer. The piston rod has a smaller diameter than the piston.

Small leaks are permitted if the internal leak rate of the hydraulic system is not greater than the specification. An internal check valve is installed in the piston of the free-lift cylinders. When the piston rod extends, the pressure increases more quickly on any oil in the rod end of the lift cylinder. The hydraulic oil transfers through the check valve to the piston end of the free-lift cylinder. This action prevents hydraulic damage to the single-lip seal and the wiper ring. See Figure 4.

LOWERING CONTROL VALVE (VELOCITY FUSE) A lowering control valve is installed in the hydraulic line to the bases of the main lift cylinders and at the inlet port of each lift cylinder. The lowering control valves (velocity fuses) permit easy entry of hydraulic oil into the cylinders, but give a restriction when the rods retract. This restriction controls the maximum speed at which a load on the forks can be lowered. The lowering control valves (velocity fuses) prevent a load on the forks from freely falling if a hydraulic hose breaks.

During operation, some hydraulic oil will leak past the piston area to the rod end of the lift cylinder.

3


Description

4000 SRM 741

A. TWO-STAGE MAST

B. THREE-STAGE MAST

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

PISTON U-CUP SEAL BACKUP RING WEAR RING PISTON RING SHELL LOWERING CONTROL VALVE (VELOCITY FUSE) 7. WIPER RING, ROD

BACKUP RING ROD SEAL WEAR RING RETAINER O-RING SPACER ROD ASSEMBLY

Figure 2. Main Lift Cylinders

4


4000 SRM 741

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Description

BACKUP RING SEAL WEAR RING SHELL WASHER, SEAL SCREW, BUTTON HEAD LOWERING CONTROL VALVE (VELOCITY FUSE) 8. WIPER, ROD

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

SEAL, ROD RETAINER BACKUP RING O-RING ROD ASSEMBLY CHECK VALVE O-RING WASHER SNAP RING

Figure 3. Free-Lift Cylinder

5


Lift Cylinder Repair

4000 SRM 741 Legend for Figure 4 A. INSTALLED

B. NOT INSTALLED

1. PISTON AND ROD ASSEMBLY 2. CHECK VALVE 3. O-RING

4. SINGLE-LIP SEAL 5. O-RING 6. BACKUP RING

Figure 4. Internal Check Valve and Single Lip Seal

Lift Cylinder Repair REMOVE WARNING Connect slings and a crane to the top of the inner mast (and intermediate mast, if it is a three-stage mast) using chains. If it is a threestage mast, make sure all masts are fastened together. Make sure the chains will not damage the sheaves, tubing, or other parts of the mast. Make sure the crane and slings can lift the load correctly. NOTE: Remove the carriage before removing the lift cylinders. See the procedure described in the Mast section. If the mast assembly must be removed for repairs, then remove the lift cylinders when the mast assembly is disassembled. When only the lift cylinder must be removed for repairs, remove the lift cylinders from the mast as described in the following paragraphs.

6

1. Clean area around lift cylinder hydraulic fittings. Disconnect fittings at the lift cylinders and put caps on open lines. 2. On free-lift mast, remove pins for the lift chains at chain anchors, and remove capscrews, washers, and clamp that hold free-lift cylinder to inner weldment. Remove free-lift cylinder. 3. Remove snap rings and washers from top of each main lift cylinder. Remove cylinder clamps near top of each lift cylinder. Two capscrews and washers are used to fasten each cylinder clamp to outer mast top crossmember. 4. Remove capscrews, washers, and brackets from mounts at bottom of each lift cylinder. 5. Support cylinder. Connect a crane to top of inner mast using chains. Raise inner mast from outer mast approximately 30 cm (12 in.). Disengage piston rod ends of lift cylinders from top


4000 SRM 741 crossmember of inner mast. Remove lift cylinders from mount plates at bottom of outer mast.

DISASSEMBLE WARNING Use slings and a crane to handle and disassemble the lift cylinders of most lift trucks. Make sure the crane and slings can lift the load correctly.

CAUTION Carefully disassemble and assemble the lift cylinders so the piston rods and sliding surfaces are not damaged. NOTE: Disassembly of the main lift cylinders and the free-lift cylinder is similar. All lift cylinders are disassembled from the rod end of the cylinder shell. 1. Loosen retainer with a spanner. See Figure 2 and Figure 3. 2. Remove retainer from shell. Remove and discard wiper ring, backup ring, rod seal, wear ring, and O-ring. 3. Remove protective cap from inlet and slide rod and piston assembly from shell. Drain hydraulic oil into a container.

Lift Cylinder Repair by seal leaks. Special tools are available from Hyster Parts and Service. See Parts-Service Gram L-A-2 (Latest Revision) for the available tools. NOTE: • Lubricate all internal parts of the lift cylinder with hydraulic oil during assembly. • Use new O-rings and seals. Apply lubricant (hydraulic oil) during assembly. Packing lubricant (Part No. 186061) is also available. • Make sure the single-lip seal assemblies are installed with the O-ring toward the base of the lift cylinder. See Figure 4. 1. Install internal check valve if removed. Make sure arrow on internal check valve is toward base of piston. 2. Install wear ring, single-lip seal, and backup ring onto rod assembly. If a spacer sleeve is used, install it. Use shim material and a clamp as a guide to move single-lip seal over threads of shell. NOTE: Do not use an adhesive on the threads of the piston rod and piston. 3. Carefully push rod assembly into shell. Release clamp on seal when seal has travelled past threads of shell.

4. Remove wear ring, single-lip seal, and backup ring from rod assembly.

4. Install seal, backup ring, O-ring, wear ring, and wiper ring in retainer. The wiper side of the wiper seal must be toward base of the lift cylinder. See Figure 4.

5. Remove internal check valve, if installed, from base of the lift cylinder.

5. Carefully install retainer on piston rod.

6. Remove lowering control valve (velocity fuse). 7. Clean all parts. Check sliding surfaces for damage. Repair or replace any damaged parts.

ASSEMBLE Refer to Figure 2 and Figure 3 for the following steps.

CAUTION A difficult and important step in assembling lift cylinders is the correct installation of the seals. Most lift cylinder maintenance is caused

6. The retainer for the free lift cylinder used on S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) and E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) [C098], and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) [D098] lift truck is tightened to 340 to 410 N•m (250 to 300 lbf ft). 7. Engage threads and tighten retainer to 340 to 410 N•m (250 to 300 lbf ft) for the main lift cylinder and 542 to 644 N•m (400 to 475 lbf ft) on the free-lift cylinder. Use a correct spanner. Do not hit the retainer with a hammer and driver. 8. Install lowering control valve (velocity fuse).

7


Lift System Leak Check

4000 SRM 741

INSTALL

lift cylinders. Install cylinder clamps to brackets mounted to outer weldment near top of each cylinder and tighten nuts to 18 N•m (13 lbf ft).

WARNING Connect slings and a crane to the top of the inner mast (and intermediate mast, if it is a three-stage mast) using chains. If it is a threestage mast, make sure all masts are fastened together. Make sure the chains will not damage the sheaves, tubing, or other parts of the mast. Make sure the crane and slings can lift the load correctly. NOTE: The clamp blocks used to hold the free-lift cylinder are designed to conform to different cylinder diameters depending on which side contacts the cylinder. Be sure the blocks conform properly to the cylinder shell. 1. Install main lift cylinders to mounts at base of outer mast. Use a crane and lower inner mast to engage piston rods of lift cylinders to holes in top crossmember of inner mast. Install washers and snap rings, or other locking device, at top of

2. Install brackets, capscrews, and washers on bottom mounts of each main lift cylinder. 3. When inner mast is lowered, install free-lift cylinder in inner mast. A pin in the base of the lift cylinder will fit into the cylinder mount at the base of the inner mast. Fasten upper end of cylinder to center crossmember with clamp blocks, washers, and capscrews. Tighten capscrews to 121 N•m (89 lbf ft). Install chain sheave and brackets to the top of free-lift piston rod. 4. Connect hydraulic lines and fittings at the lift cylinders. 5. Install chain sheaves and brackets. Connect lift chains to chain anchors on inner mast. Fasten wires between ends of the lift chains so they can be controlled during installation of carriage. 6. Install carriage. Connect the lift chains.

Lift System Leak Check WARNING Never allow anyone under a raised carriage. Do not put any part of your body through the lift mechanism unless all parts of the mast are completely lowered and the engine is stopped. Before making any repairs, use blocks and chains on the mast and carriage so they cannot move. Make sure the moving parts are attached to the parts that cannot move. Do not try to find hydraulic leaks by putting hydraulic components under pressure or putting hands on pressurized components. Hydraulic oil can be injected into the body by pressure. During the test procedures for the hydraulic system, fasten the load to the carriage with chains to prevent it from falling. Keep all personnel away from the lift truck during the tests. NOTE: See the procedures in the mast repair sections for lift chain adjustments, mast adjustments, carriage adjustment, and header hose roller adjustment.

8

1. Operate hydraulic system. Put a capacity load on forks and raise and lower load several times. Lower load and tilt mast forward and backward several times. Check for leaks. 2. Raise carriage and load 1 m (3 ft). If carriage lowers slowly with control valve in a NEUTRAL position, there are leaks inside the hydraulic system. Maximum speed the carriage is allowed to lower is 50 mm (2 in.) per 10 minutes when hydraulic oil is 30 C (90 F). If oil temperature is 70 C (160 F), maximum speed the carriage can lower is 150 mm (6 in.) per 10 minutes. 3. Check lift cylinder for internal leaks. Remove load from forks. Install a gate valve in supply line between main control valve and mast. Put a capacity load on forks again. Raise carriage 1 m (3 ft). Close gate valve. If carriage or mast lowers slowly, seals in the lift cylinders have leaks. 4. If carriage does not move, open gate valve and check for movement again. If carriage lowers when gate valve is open, check for leaks in hydraulic lines and fittings. If no leaks are found, the main control valve can have a defect. Remove load from forks.


4000 SRM 741

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting PROBLEM No movement of the lift cylinders.

Slow movement of the lift cylinders.

Rough movement of the mast assembly.

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Pilot line(s) to the control valve are disconnected or leaking.

Tighten or connect fittings.

No oil or not enough oil in the hydraulic tank.

Fill tank. Check for leaks.

Relief valve(s) not set correctly.

Adjust or install new relief valve.

Hydraulic pump does not operate or has damage.

Repair or install new pump.

Remote control valve does not operate.

Check and repair valve.

No oil or not enough oil to the lift cylinders.

Fill tank. Check for leaks.

Cylinders have internal or external leaks.

Repair leaks. Install new parts.

Relief valve is not set correctly.

Adjust or install new relief valve.

There is a restriction in a hydraulic line.

Remove restriction. parts.

Load is more than capacity.

Reduce load.

There is air in the hydraulic system.

Remove air. Check for loose connections or breaks in lines.

Lift cylinder(s) is damaged.

Repair or install new lift cylinder.

Mast weldments are damaged or not aligned.

Align weldments. Install new parts.

Mast weldments are not lubricated correctly.

Lubricate correctly.

Load rollers or bearing blocks are damaged or not adjusted correctly.

Replace or adjust load rollers or bearing blocks.

Lift chains are damaged.

Replace lift chains.

Install new

9


Troubleshooting

PROBLEM Lift or tilt cylinders extend or retract when the control valve lever (spool) is in the NEUTRAL position.

10

4000 SRM 741

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Load check valves and spools have damage.

Repair or install new load check valve and spool.

Cylinder seals have leaks.

Install new seals.

Hydraulic lines have leaks.

Repair leaks. Install new parts. Remove air from system.

Leaks between spool and bore.

Install new spool and O-ring seals.


LPG FUEL SYSTEM H3.50-5.00XL (H70-110XL) [G005]; H6.00-7.00XL (H135-155XL) [F006]; S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) [D004]; S6.00-7.00XL (S135-155XL) [B024]; S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004]

PART NO. 897129

900 SRM 348


LPG Fuel System

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS General ............................................................................................................................................................... Description and Operation ................................................................................................................................ Fuel Tank ....................................................................................................................................................... Fuel Filter and Fuel Valve Unit.................................................................................................................... Vaporizer ........................................................................................................................................................ Carburetor...................................................................................................................................................... Governor......................................................................................................................................................... LPG Tank Repair ............................................................................................................................................... Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... LPG Tanks with Fixed Mounting Bracket ............................................................................................... LPG Tanks with EZ Lift Mounting Bracket ............................................................................................ Install ............................................................................................................................................................. LPG Tanks with Fixed Mounting Bracket ............................................................................................... LPG Tanks with EZ Lift Mounting Bracket ............................................................................................ Hydrostatic Relief Valve Repair ........................................................................................................................ Remove and Install........................................................................................................................................ Filter Unit Repair .............................................................................................................................................. Fuel Filter Element, Replace ........................................................................................................................ Diaphragm and Fuel Valve, Replace ............................................................................................................ Hoses Replacement ............................................................................................................................................ Vaporizer Repair ................................................................................................................................................ Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Disassemble ................................................................................................................................................... Clean .............................................................................................................................................................. Inspect ............................................................................................................................................................ Assemble ........................................................................................................................................................ Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Carburetor Repair.............................................................................................................................................. Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Disassemble ................................................................................................................................................... Clean .............................................................................................................................................................. Assemble ........................................................................................................................................................ Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Governor Repair................................................................................................................................................. Filter Unit Check ............................................................................................................................................... Vaporizer Check ................................................................................................................................................. Pressure Reducer Valve................................................................................................................................. Vapor Valve .................................................................................................................................................... Carburetor Adjustment ..................................................................................................................................... Idle Mixture ................................................................................................................................................... Idle Speed....................................................................................................................................................... Power Mixture ............................................................................................................................................... Throttle Linkage Adjustment............................................................................................................................ Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................................................

Š2002 HYSTER COMPANY

1 3 3 4 5 6 8 9 9 9 9 10 10 11 12 12 12 12 12 14 14 14 14 14 14 16 19 20 20 20 20 20 20 21 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 24 24 26

i


Table of Contents

LPG Fuel System

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) This section is for the following models: H3.50-5.00XL (H70-110XL) [G005]; H6.00-7.00XL (H135-155XL) [F006]; S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) [D004]; S6.00-7.00XL (S135-155XL) [B024]; S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004]

ii


900 SRM 348

General

General This section has the description, operation, and repair procedures for the parts of the LPG fuel system used on the GM V-6 engines. See Figure 1.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

FUEL TANK CARBURETOR BALANCE LINE GOVERNOR FUEL VALVE ON TANK

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

HYDROSTATIC RELIEF VALVE TO COOLING SYSTEM VAPORIZER (IMPCO) FILTER UNIT VACUUM LINE

1


General

900 SRM 348

11. TO PCV VALVE Figure 1. LPG System

2


900 SRM 348

Description and Operation

Description and Operation The LPG fuel system (see Figure 1) has the following parts: • Fuel Tank with Hydrostatic Relief Valve • Fuel Filter and Fuel Valve Unit • Vaporizer (IMPCO) • Carburetor • Governor

FUEL TANK The fuel tank is the reservoir for the LPG system. See Figure 2 and Figure 3.

NOTE: SOME LPG TANKS HAVE AN AUXILIARY FILL FITTING INSTEAD OF A PLUG FOR ITEM 4. NOTE: FIXED MOUNTING BRACKET SHOWN. 1. SHUT-OFF VALVE 2. QUICK-DISCONNECT FITTING 3. FUEL GAUGE 4. PLUG 5. LIQUID LEVEL INDICATOR

6. RELIEF VALVE 7. ALIGNMENT PIN 8. TANK RELIEF VALVE 9. TANK LATCH 10. MOUNTING BRACKET

Figure 3. LPG Tank

A. HIGH-PRESSURE LIQUID FUEL B. LOW-PRESSURE VAPORIZED FUEL C. VACUUM 1. FUEL TANK 2. HYDROSTATIC RELIEF VALVE 3. FILTER UNIT (WITH FUEL VALVE) 4. ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM 5. VAPORIZER

6. CARBURETOR 7. GOVERNOR 8. INTAKE MANIFOLD FOR ENGINE 9. VACUUM ADVANCE LINE FOR DISTRIBUTOR

Figure 2. LPG System Schematic

The fuel tank keeps the fuel in the liquid condition. The pressure of the fuel is 1.7 MPa (240 psi) when the tank is full at an ambient temperature of 27 C (81 F). The tank has a pressure relief valve that is set at 3.4 MPa (480 psi). The inlet tube for the pressure relief valve is in the vapor area at the top of the tank. The tank has a fuel gauge that measures the percentage of fuel that is in the tank. A liquid level valve near the pressure relief valve is used to indicate the maximum liquid level that is permitted. The tank is filled until liquid fuel flows from the liquid level valve. One end of the outlet tube inside the tank is near the lower surface of the tank. The other end of the tube is fastened to the outlet port. A fuel valve is connected to the outlet port of the tank. The fuel valve can prevent fuel from leaving the tank when the outlet line is disconnected. A quick disconnect fitting is installed for easy tank removal. The tank has a guard to protect the valves and fittings from damage. The guard has a hole for the alignment dowel on the mount. The tank is fastened to the lift truck by metal straps with latches.

3


Description and Operation

900 SRM 348

FUEL FILTER AND FUEL VALVE UNIT A fuel line connects the fuel tank to the fuel filter. See Figure 4. The fuel filter prevents dirt from entering the vaporizer and has a fuel valve that is operated by engine vacuum. The fuel valve prevents fuel from entering the vaporizer unless the engine is being started or is running. The fuel valve has a leaf spring that holds a polyurethane pad against the seat. A diaphragm is used to open the fuel valve. Air

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

DIAPHRAGM FULCRUM VACUUM INLET O-RING WASHER PIN FUEL OUTLET VALVE PAD FILTER COVER

pressure pushes on the vent side of the diaphragm. The other side of the diaphragm has inlet manifold vacuum and a lever and plunger that open the fuel valve. When the engine starts, the air pressure on the lever side of the diaphragm decreases. Then the air pressure on the vent side of the diaphragm moves the diaphragm, lever and pin to move the valve pad from the seat. Liquid LPG then flows through the fuel valve to the vaporizer.

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

FILTER ELEMENT AND SCREEN FUEL INLET LEAF SPRING GASKET BODY DIAPHRAGM COVER AIR INLET LEVER

Figure 4. Fuel Filter and Fuel Valve

4


900 SRM 348

VAPORIZER The function of the vaporizer is to change the liquid fuel to a vapor (gas) and to control the pressure of the vapor. See Figure 5 and Figure 6. The LPG fuel changes from a liquid to a vapor inside the expansion chamber. A liquid needs heat to change to a gas. Heat is removed from the vaporizer when the pressure of the liquid LPG is quickly decreased in the expansion chamber. The vaporizer must be heated by the engine coolant to replace the heat that is lost to the fuel. Coolant passages in the vaporizer prevent the vaporizer from being too cold to operate. The vaporizer also controls the pressure of the gas that goes to the carburetor. The pressure reducer valve keeps the pressure of the gas in the expansion chamber at 38 mm (1.5 in.) of water. When gas is required at the carburetor, there is a vacuum in the vapor chamber. The vacuum opens the vapor valve and permits the gas to flow to the carburetor.

Description and Operation When the carburetor throttle is closed, the vacuum in the vapor chamber decreases and the vapor valve closes. The pressure in the vapor chamber stays at 10.3 kPa (1.5 psi). A balance line connects the air pressure side of the vapor diaphragm to an air inlet port at the carburetor. If the air filter has a restriction, the pressure decreases in the carburetor and in the vapor chamber of the vaporizer. When a balance line is not installed, this decrease can cause the diaphragm to move and open the vapor valve. When a balance tube is connected, the restriction causes an equal decrease on both sides of the diaphragm. The balance line prevents an increase in the fuel mixture in the carburetor. A button in the housing can be used to manually open the vapor valve. LPG vapor then flows to the carburetor for starting the engine.

Liquid fuel enters the vaporizer inlet from the filter unit. The pressure reducer valve has a polyurethane pad and a seat. When the pad is against the seat, the liquid fuel cannot enter the expansion chamber. When the liquid fuel enters through the pressure reducer valve, the pressure of the fuel pushes on the diaphragm. The diaphragm immediately moves and closes the valve. Because only a very low pressure is needed to close the valve, the fuel pressure in the expansion chamber is very low. The sudden decrease in pressure causes the fuel to change from a liquid to a vapor. This change of condition takes heat from the surfaces of the expansion chamber. Warm coolant flows next to the surfaces of the chamber to replace the heat. The LPG vapor is kept in the expansion chamber by the vapor valve. When the engine starts, the gas in the vapor chamber leaves the vapor chamber to flow through the carburetor. The pressure on the vapor diaphragm then decreases. Air pressure on the other side of the vapor diaphragm pushes on the diaphragm and opens the vapor valve. The gas flows from the expansion chamber to the vapor chamber and then to the carburetor. The pressure in the expansion chamber decreases, and again the pressure reducer valve opens to repeat the operation.

1. FUEL INLET 2. COOLANT PORTS 3. BUTTON FOR LOW PRESSURE VALVE

4. FUEL OUTLET 5. BALANCE LINE PORTS

Figure 5. Vaporizer

5


Description and Operation

1. VAPOR CHAMBER 2. COVER 3. DIAPHRAGM FOR VAPOR VALVE

900 SRM 348

4. 5. 6. 7.

VAPOR VALVE LEVER VAPOR VALVE EXPANSION CHAMBER COOLANT PASSAGE

8. DIAPHRAGM FOR PRESSURE REDUCER VALVE 9. PRESSURE REDUCER VALVE 10. OUTLET

Figure 6. Inside the Vaporizer

CARBURETOR The carburetor has one moving part, a diaphragm with the fuel metering valve. See Figure 7. The fuel tube in the center of the air tube is the seat for the fuel metering valve. When the engine starts, the air in the air tube and in the vacuum chamber flows to the engine. See Figure 8 and Figure 9. Air pressure on the outside of the air tube pushes the diaphragm against the metering spring. The fuel metering valve moves from its seat. Air then flows from the outside of the air tube to the inside of the air tube. The fuel pressure moves the LPG vapor past the fuel metering valve to mix with the air flowing through the air tube. Because the diaphragm causes a restriction, the pressure in the inside of the air tube is always less than on the outside of the tube. The difference in pressure changes when the amount of air flowing through the air tube changes. The diaphragm moves according

6

to the air flow. The amount of fuel that can flow past the fuel metering valve is controlled by the amount of air flowing into the air tube. When the throttle plates in the governor are near the closed position, the pressure difference decreases. The metering spring pushes the fuel metering valve toward its seat. Flow around the fuel metering valve decreases. An idle mixture screw permits adjustment of the air supply at low engine speed. When the throttle plates are fully open at high engine speeds, the fuel metering valve is at the top of its travel. The carburetor has an adjustable valve that controls the amount of LPG vapor that goes to the fuel metering valve. The restriction in fuel flow by this valve is small when the fuel flow is low. When more fuel flows through the valve, the valve becomes an orifice. Adjusting the valve opening changes the mixture of fuel and air when the engine is operated at high speed with a load.


900 SRM 348

Description and Operation

A. AIR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

AIR INLET PLATE DIAPHRAGM BACK-UP PLATE FUEL METERING VALVE 6. FUEL TUBE 7. POWER MIXTURE VALVE 8. VACUUM LINE FOR FUEL VALVE

9. BALANCE LINE PORT 10. AIR TUBE 11. METERING SPRING 12. VACUUM CHAMBER 13. IDLE MIXTURE SCREW

B. FUEL

Figure 8. Normal Operation of Carburetor

Figure 7. Carburetor Parts

A. AIR

B. FUEL

Figure 9. Air and Fuel Flow at Idle

7


Description and Operation

900 SRM 348

GOVERNOR The governor is installed between the carburetor and the intake manifold. See Figure 10 and Figure 11. The solenoid valve is installed to the body of the governor. The governor controller is on the cowl in the operator’s compartment. Vacuum lines connect the diaphragm of the governor to the solenoid valve and the throttle body of the governor. The governor controller is electrically connected to the solenoid valve and the ignition distributor. The operation of the governor is controlled by an electronic controller. Manifold vacuum provides the force to actuate the governor while the controller regulates this force. The governor has two throttle plates that are connected to a diaphragm. Linkage from the diaphragm closes the throttle plates. A spring in the governor opens the throttle plates. The electronic controller is connected to the distributor and controls the operation of the solenoid valve. The solenoid valve controls the vacuum at the diaphragm in the governor. When the solenoid valve is not energized, it is open and manifold vacuum does not affect the governor. During operation, the electronic controller receives engine speed (rpm) signals from the distributor. The controller compares these signals with an internal reference in the circuit for the controller. When the engine speed signal is more than the internal reference, current flows to the solenoid valve. The solenoid valve closes, causing manifold vacuum to operate the diaphragm. When actuated, the diaphragm works against the governor spring to close the throttle plates and decrease engine speed. The solenoid valve opens and closes as necessary to keep the engine speed within the governor limits.

8

1. DIAPHRAGM ASSEMBLY

2. GOVERNOR BODY 3. CONTROL SPRING

Figure 10. Governor

1. DISTRIBUTOR 2. GOVERNOR CONTROLLER 3. SOLENOID VALVE Figure 11. Governor Circuit


900 SRM 348

LPG Tank Repair

LPG Tank Repair REMOVE NOTE: The LPG tank on your lift truck can be mounted with either a fixed mounting bracket or an EZ Lift mounting bracket. Follow the procedures below for the mounting bracket used on your lift truck to remove the LPG tank.

LPG Tanks with Fixed Mounting Bracket WARNING • LPG tanks can cause an explosion even when the tanks are empty. When replacing the tanks, do not weld, cause sparks or permit flammable material on or near the tanks. Do not change tanks when the engine is running. Tanks must be filled by authorized personnel. Follow all the safety rules. Do not remove any parts from the tank. Use a cloth to protect your hands from cold metal. • LPG is heavier than air. LPG can stay in low places and cause an explosion when a spark occurs. • Before disconnecting any part of the LPG fuel system, close the valve on the fuel tank. Run the engine until the fuel lines are empty and the engine stops. If the engine will not run, close the valve on the fuel tank and release the fuel slowly in a non-hazardous area. 1. Move lift truck to area where tanks are changed. 2. Turn the tank shut-off valve clockwise until the valve is completely closed. See Figure 3. 3. Run engine until it stops. Turn the key to OFF position.

WARNING LPG is very cold in the atmosphere. Always wear gloves to protect your hands from the cold fittings. Do not permit LPG to contact the skin. 4. Disconnect the quick-disconnect fitting.

LPG Tanks with EZ Lift Mounting Bracket WARNING • LPG tanks can cause an explosion even when the tanks are empty. When replacing the tanks, do not weld, cause sparks or permit flammable material on or near the tanks. Do not change tanks when the engine is running. Tanks must be filled by authorized personnel. Follow all the safety rules. Do not remove any parts from the tank. Use a cloth to protect your hands from cold metal. • LPG is heavier than air. LPG can stay in low places and cause an explosion when a spark occurs. • Before disconnecting any part of the LPG fuel system, close the valve on the fuel tank. Run the engine until the fuel lines are empty and the engine stops. If the engine will not run, close the valve on the fuel tank and release the fuel slowly in a non-hazardous area. 1. Move lift truck to area where tanks are changed. 2. Turn the tank shut-off valve clockwise until the valve is completely closed. See Figure 3. 3. Run engine until it stops. Turn the key to OFF position.

WARNING LPG is very cold in the atmosphere. Always wear gloves to protect your hands from the cold fittings. Do not permit LPG to contact the skin. 4. Disconnect the quick-disconnect fitting. See Figure 12. 5. Grab tank handle on mounting bracket and swing tank out to left side of truck. 6. Tilt mounting bracket to position tank vertically. 7. Release tank strap and lift tank from mounting bracket.

5. Release tank latches and remove tank from bracket.

9


LPG Tank Repair

1. TANK HANDLE 2. QUICK-DISCONNECT FITTING

900 SRM 348

3. ALIGNMENT PIN 4. TANK STRAP 5. LPG TANK

6. EZ LIFT MOUNTING BRACKET 7. FUEL LINE

Figure 12. EZ Lift Mounting Bracket

INSTALL NOTE: The LPG tank on your lift truck can be mounted with either a fixed mounting bracket or an EZ Lift mounting bracket. Follow the procedures below for the mounting bracket used on your lift truck to install the LPG tank.

LPG Tanks with Fixed Mounting Bracket WARNING Do not use any LPG tank that is damaged. Damaged tanks must be removed from service. 1. Before the tank is installed on lift truck, check the operation of the fuel gauge. Look at the fuel gauge and move the tank. The needle of the gauge must move when the fuel moves. If the needle does not move, a new tank must be installed.

10

WARNING The tank must be installed in the correct position or the relief valve will not operate correctly. If the tank is not installed in the correct position, vapor instead of liquid fuel can go out the fuel valve. Also, liquid fuel can flow from the relief valve on the tank. The relief valve can close because of the freezing caused by the change of the liquid to vapor. 2. Put tank in tank bracket. Make sure alignment pin is in the hole in the bracket. Close latches. See Figure 3. 3. Connect the quick-disconnect fitting to the fuel valve on tank. Use your hand to tighten the fitting. Do not open fuel valve until the quick-disconnect fitting is completely tightened. To open fuel valve, slowly turn it counterclockwise.


900 SRM 348

WARNING The fuel valve on the tank must be closed when the truck is not being used. 4. Inspect fuel system for leaks when fuel valve is open. Make sure liquid level valve is closed. There are 4 methods used to inspect the fuel system for leaks:

LPG Tank Repair can close because of the freezing caused by the change of the liquid to vapor.

WARNING Make sure bracket assembly is locked in closed position.

b. Smell - LPG has a very distinctive odor. If you smell LPG, DO NOT start the engine.

2. Make sure mounting bracket is in a vertical position on left side of truck. Place tank into mounting bracket. Make sure alignment pin is in the hole in the bracket. Secure tank to mounting bracket by fastening tank strap. Move tank and bracket into horizontal position and swing tank into place behind seat. See Figure 12.

c. Soapy water - This method is used in conjunction with Step B above. If the odor of LPG is present but escaping fuel cannot be heard, apply soapy water to the fittings and observe for bubbles.

3. Connect the quick-disconnect fitting to fuel valve on tank. Use your hand to tighten fitting. Do not open fuel valve until the quick- disconnect fitting is completely tightened. To open fuel valve, slowly turn it counterclockwise.

a. Sound - Listen for the sound of LPG escaping from a tank fitting or hose connection.

d. Frost - If the amount of LPG escaping is sufficient, frost may appear on the fittings.

LPG Tanks with EZ Lift Mounting Bracket WARNING Do not use any LPG tank that is damaged. Damaged tanks must be removed from service. 1. Before the tank is installed on the lift truck, check the operation of the fuel gauge. Look at the fuel gauge and move the tank. The needle of the gauge must move when the fuel moves. If the needle does not move, a new tank must be installed.

WARNING The tank must be installed in the correct position or the relief valve will not operate correctly. If the tank is not installed in the correct position, vapor instead of liquid fuel can go out the fuel valve. Also, liquid fuel can flow from the relief valve on the tank. The relief valve

WARNING The fuel valve on the tank must be closed when the truck is not being used. 4. Inspect fuel system for leaks when fuel valve is open. Make sure liquid level valve is closed. There are 4 methods used to inspect the fuel system for leaks: a. Sound - Listen for the sound of LPG escaping from a tank fitting or hose connection. b. Smell - LPG has a very distinctive odor. If you smell LPG, DO NOT start the engine. c. Soapy water - This method is used in conjunction with Step B above. If the odor of LPG is present but escaping fuel cannot be heard, apply soapy water to the fittings and observe for bubbles. d. Frost - If the amount of LPG escaping is sufficient, frost may appear on the fittings.

11


Filter Unit Repair

900 SRM 348

Hydrostatic Relief Valve Repair REMOVE AND INSTALL

WARNING

WARNING LPG can cause an explosion. Do not cause sparks or permit flammable material near the LPG system. Close the fuel valve on the tank. Disconnect the negative battery cable to prevent sparks.

LPG is flammable. Make sure there are no sparks or open flames in the area when the fuel lines are drained. 2. Slowly loosen hose fitting for relief valve. Let fuel drain from fitting before removing relief valve. See Figure 3. 3. The valve cannot be repaired. If the valve has a defect, install a new valve. After installation, open the fuel valve slowly and inspect the system for leaks.

1. Close shut-off valve on tank.

Filter Unit Repair FUEL FILTER ELEMENT, REPLACE WARNING LPG is flammable. Make sure there are no sparks or open flames in the area when the fuel lines are drained. 1. Close shut-off valve on tank. See Figure 13. Slowly loosen hose fitting to filter. Let fuel drain from fitting before disassembling filter unit. 2. Remove 10 screws and filter cover. Replace filter element. 3. Install cover and gasket. Tighten screws for cover. Tighten hose fitting.

DIAPHRAGM AND FUEL VALVE, REPLACE 1. Close shut-off valve on tank. Slowly disconnect fittings for inlet and outlet hoses and let LPG drain from lines. Remove vacuum hose and mount capscrews. See Figure 13. 2. Remove 10 screws from filter cover. Remove filter and screen. Remove 6 screws from diaphragm cover. Remove covers and gaskets.

12

3. Remove diaphragm. Remove filter and screen. Remove screw for leaf spring. Remove valve pad. Pull pin from its bore. 4. Remove fitting from fuel outlet port. Remove washer and O-ring through outlet port. 5. Install new O-ring in its bore. Align washer with O-ring and install pin through washer and O-ring. 6. Install valve pad with the polyurethane pad side toward the bore. Install leaf spring, lockwasher, and screw. 7. Install screen and filter element. Put gasket on body and install filter cover and 10 screws and lockwashers. 8. Replace diaphragm. Install diaphragm so the large plate is toward valve. Install cover and tighten 6 screws and lockwashers. 9. Install capscrews for mount. Connect vacuum line. Connect lines for tank and vaporizer. 10. Open fuel shut-off valve on tank and check for leaks in the line to filter unit. Start engine and inspect for leaks on outlet side of filter unit.


900 SRM 348

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

SCREW DIAPHRAGM COVER DIAPHRAGM FULCRUM LEVER WASHER BODY

Filter Unit Repair

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

O-RING PIN VALVE PAD SCREEN FILTER GASKET FILTER COVER

Figure 13. Fuel Valve and Fuel Filter

13


Vaporizer Repair

900 SRM 348

Hoses Replacement The hoses installed on LPG systems are special. Hoses that are made for use with hydraulic oil are damaged by LPG. When replacing the LPG hoses, make sure to use only Hyster Approved LPG hoses. Make sure to use the correct size of hose.

When replacing the hose to the quick-disconnect fitting, make sure it is the same length as the hose it replaces. A longer hose permits the tank to be installed in an incorrect position. If a fuel hose has a restriction, it is coldest around the restriction.

Vaporizer Repair REMOVE WARNING LPG can cause an explosion. Do not permit any sparks or open flames in the work area. 1. Close fuel valve on tank. Run engine until it stops. Slowly disconnect fitting from filter unit on vaporizer. Disconnect hose to carburetor. 2. Put a drain pan under the drain valve for the radiator. Open drain valve and drain coolant into pan. 3. Disconnect coolant fittings to vaporizer. Remove balance line from vaporizer. Remove capscrews at the mount for the vaporizer.

DISASSEMBLE 1. Remove the 7 screws holding the primary cover and plate to vaporizer body. Remove primary cover and primary diaphragm. Remove actuating pin, spring, and seal from plate. See Figure 14. 2. Remove plate and gasket. Remove pressure reducer valve. 3. Remove the 6 screws holding the cover for the vapor chamber to the vaporizer body. Remove cover. Move secondary diaphragm toward the inlet port to release it from the lever.

14

4. Remove screw that holds secondary lever pin. Cut wire that holds vapor valve pad to lever. Remove pad.

CLEAN WARNING Cleaning solvents can be flammable and toxic, and can cause skin irritation. When using cleaning solvents, always follow the recommendations of the manufacturer.

WARNING Compressed air can move particles so that they cause injury to the user or to other personnel. Make sure that the path of the compressed air is away from all personnel. Wear protective goggles or a face shield to prevent injury to the eyes. Wash all parts of the assembly, except the diaphragms, in solvent. Use compressed air to dry the parts. Clean diaphragms in warm, soapy water and air dry. Do not use compressed air to dry diaphragm.

INSPECT Make sure vaporizer housing does not have cracks or damage. Inspect the threads for damage. The diaphragms, valve pads, and gaskets are included in the repair kit.


900 SRM 348

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

VAPORIZER BODY VAPOR CHAMBER COVER DIAPHRAGM (SECONDARY) DIAPHRAGM (PRIMARY) COVER (PRIMARY) GASKET LEVER (SECONDARY)

Vaporizer Repair

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

PIN PIN PLATE PLUG PLUG SCREW SCREW

15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.

SCREW SCREW SPRING SPRING SEAL VAPOR VALVE PAD SCREEN

Figure 14. Vaporizer Parts

15


Vaporizer Repair

900 SRM 348

ASSEMBLE Assemble the vaporizer as follows. Always use a Hyster Approved repair kit when assembling the vaporizer. STEP 1. Install pad for pressure reducer valve. Make sure polyurethane surface is against the seat.

STEP 2. Install a new gasket. Install plate with pin guide over the pressure reducer valve.

16


900 SRM 348

Vaporizer Repair

STEP 3. Install actuating pin, spring, and seal.

STEP 4. Install a new diaphragm.

17


Vaporizer Repair STEP 5. Install the cover. (21 lbf in).

900 SRM 348

Tighten screws to 2.4 N•m

STEP 6. Remove vapor valve pad from valve lever. Install a new valve pad in the lever. Leave pad loose enough against lever so that pad can tilt for alignment against the seat. Bend and cut the pin shown.

STEP 7. Put valve spring in position on housing. Put lever assembly over spring. Install screw so that head of screw is holding the pivot pin.

18


900 SRM 348

Vaporizer Repair

STEP 8. Tighten screw. Make sure lever moves freely.

STEP 9. Slide lever into slot in diaphragm bracket. Install diaphragm.

STEP 10. Install cover and tighten screws to 2.4 N•m (21 lbf in).

INSTALL Install mount capscrews. Connect all lines to fittings. Fill radiator with coolant. Check for leaks. See Figure 1.

19


Carburetor Repair

900 SRM 348

Carburetor Repair REMOVE 1. Remove hose from air cleaner to carburetor inlet. Remove balance line from carburetor. Remove fuel inlet hose and vacuum hose. 2. Remove carburetor from governor.

DISASSEMBLE Disassemble the carburetor using Figure 15 as a reference.

CLEAN WARNING Cleaning solvents can be flammable and toxic, and can cause skin irritation. When using cleaning solvents, always follow the recommendations of the manufacturer.

WARNING Compressed air can move particles so that they cause injury to the user or to other personnel. Make sure that the path of the compressed air is away from all personnel. Wear protective goggles or a face shield to prevent injury to the eyes. Wash all parts, except diaphragm, in solvent. Use compressed air to dry all parts. Make sure air passages in metering valve are clean. Clean diaphragm in warm, soapy water and air dry. Do not used compressed air to dry diaphragm.

ASSEMBLE See Figure 15 for the procedures for assembling the carburetor. Use only Hyster Approved repair kits.

INSTALL Install a new gasket on the governor. Install the carburetor on the governor. Install the balance line, the fuel hose, and the hose to the air cleaner.

1. 2. 3. 4.

INLET HOUSING SCREW COVER METERING SPRING 5. SCREW 6. BACK-UP PLATE 7. DIAPHRAGM

8. PLATE 9. FUEL METERING VALVE 10. BODY 11. SPRING 12. IDLE MIXTURE SCREW

Figure 15. Carburetor

20


900 SRM 348

Governor Repair

Governor Repair If the governor is removed or replaced, adjust throttle linkage as described in Throttle Linkage Adjustment. If the governor is not operating correctly, check the parts of the system as follows: (see Figure 16) NOTE: The vacuum hoses installed on the carburetor and governor are made of special high-temperature material. If any of the hoses are replaced, make sure the correct hoses are installed. 1. Check vacuum hoses and diaphragm in governor for damage. Remove the plate on the side of the governor and check that the linkage and spring move freely. 2. Check vacuum hoses for restrictions. Check teefitting at diaphragm for restrictions. Make sure tee-fitting is correctly installed. There are orifices in the fitting. The black (VAL) side is for the solenoid valve. The brass (GOV) side is for the governor. 3. Use an ohmmeter to check solenoid valve. Disconnect wire at solenoid valve. Measure resistance between terminals of solenoid valve. Correct resistance is 25-35 ohms. Measure resistance between one of the terminals and the body of the solenoid valve. Correct resistance is 800 ohms or higher. If readings are not correct, replace solenoid valve. If solenoid valve is defective, governor controller must also be checked.

A defective solenoid valve can damage the electronic controller. 4. Use a volt/ohmmeter to check the governor controller. a. Disconnect wiring harness at controller. Measure resistance between ground terminal in harness connector and cowl. Correct resistance is less than 3 ohms. If circuit is open or resistance is high, check for a defective wire. Correct the problem before doing Step b. b. Turn key switch to ON position (do not start engine). Use voltmeter to check for battery voltage at the terminals in the connector for the battery (red) and the solenoid (yellow). Check for defective wires if readings are not correct. c. Turn key switch to OFF position. Use an ohmmeter to check continuity of the signal input wire (black). Check wire between distributor (tachometer connector) and harness connector. 5. After checking the solenoid valve, wiring, hoses, and governor, if the governor does not operate correctly, replace electronic controller.

21


Governor Repair

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

900 SRM 348

IDLE MIXTURE ADJUSTMENT BALANCE LINE PORT FUEL INLET POWER MIXTURE ADJUSTMENT VACUUM PORT FOR FUEL VALVE PORT FOR PCV VALVE

7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

VACUUM PORT FOR GOVERNOR BRASS ORIFICE BLACK ORIFICE SOLENOID VALVE VACUUM HOSE

Figure 16. Carburetor and Governor

22


900 SRM 348

Carburetor Adjustment

Filter Unit Check WARNING LPG can cause an explosion. Do not permit any sparks or open flames in work area. 1. Check for leaks in the fuel valve by disconnecting the fuel inlet hose at the vaporizer. Put the end of the hose in a container of water. There must be no bubbles in the water. If there are bubbles in the water, install a new valve pad in the filter unit.

WARNING

2. If there are no bubbles in the water, remove the primary wire to the distributor or cause a short circuit in coil secondary wire. 3. Turn the key momentarily to the START position to cause a vacuum in the inlet manifold. Bubbles must appear in the container of water. 4. If there are no bubbles seen in Step 3, check the vacuum hose for a restriction. If there is vacuum to the filter unit, inspect the diaphragm for holes or cracks. Make sure the tank has fuel and that the tank valve is open.

Do not remove the coil secondary wire. Removing the coil secondary wire can cause an open circuit. A spark can cause an explosion.

Vaporizer Check PRESSURE REDUCER VALVE Connect a pressure gauge that can measure with accuracy a pressure below 35 kPa (5 psi) to the test port of the vaporizer. The gauge must indicate 10.5 kPa (1.5 psi) when the engine is at idle. If the gauge indicates a pressure greater than 10.5 kPa (1.5 psi), the pressure reducer valve inside the vaporizer is defective and the vaporizer must be replaced.

VAPOR VALVE 1. Run the engine until it is warm.

2. To check for leaks, stop the engine and disconnect the hose from the fuel inlet port at the carburetor. Put the end of the hose just below the surface of water in a container. If bubbles are seen, the vapor valve has a defect or is dirty. 3. To check the vapor diaphragm, remove the inlet hose to the vaporizer. Remove the inlet hose at the carburetor. Put the end of the hose below the surface of the water in a container. Remove the balance line from the carburetor and apply air pressure to the line. If bubbles continue to be seen in the water, the diaphragm has a defect.

Carburetor Adjustment IDLE MIXTURE 1. When the engine is not running, turn the idle mixture screw clockwise until it stops. In this position, the idle mixture screw prevents air from entering the air tube through the idle air port. See Figure 16. 2. Turn idle mixture screw 4 turns counterclockwise. Start engine. Adjust idle screw as needed until idle is smooth. Turning screw counterclockwise increases the ratio of air to fuel.

3. Stop and restart engine. If engine does not start easily, turn idle mixture screw clockwise turn and restart the engine. Continue this procedure until engine starts easily.

IDLE SPEED Turn idle speed screw until idle speed of engine is at 650 rpm. See Figure 16.

23


Throttle Linkage Adjustment

900 SRM 348

POWER MIXTURE The power mixture valve controls flow of fuel to the carburetor when engine is running at or near full capacity. Set power mixture valve to full rich position.

This setting will be satisfactory for most conditions. If further adjustment is required, proceed as follows: when adjusting the power mixture valve, the engine RPM must not be permitted to increase to the governor limit. See Figure 16.

Throttle Linkage Adjustment NOTE: The following throttle linkage adjustment procedure is for lift truck models H70-110XL (H3.50-5.00XL) (G005), H135-155XL (H6.00-7.00XL) (F006), S70-120XL (S3.50-5.50XL) (D004), and S135-155XL (S6.00-7.00XL) (B024). See Figure 17. 1. Adjust the idle speed as described in the Idle Speed section. 2. Make sure throttle linkage at pedal assembly is in correct position. See Figure 17.

4. Adjust pedal stop so that pedal and throttle lever reach full return positions at the same time. NOTE: The throttle linkage procedure listed below is for lift truck model S70-120XM (S3.50-5.50XM) (E004). See Figure 18. NOTE: Each time the throttle system is disassembled, the throttle cables must be readjusted to ensure proper operation of the cables, linkage, and throttle plates.

3. Depress throttle pedal until it stops against the floor plate. Adjust throttle cable so that pedal stops on the floor plate as throttle plates reach wide open position. Use nuts at both ends of cable housing to change the adjustment of the cable.

1. Adjust idle speed as described in the Idle Speed section.

1. LINKAGE FOR LPG CARBURETOR 2. THROTTLE CABLE 3. CABLE ADJUSTMENT NUTS

4. PEDAL ASSEMBLY 5. PEDAL STOP 6. THROTTLE LINKAGE

2. Adjust throttle cable length to allow for a 3 mm (0.12 in.) maximum of freeplay with the engine in idle position. See Figure 18 for the idle position the throttle linkage must be in before making adjustments to the throttle cable.

Figure 17. Throttle Linkage Adjustment 24


900 SRM 348

Throttle Linkage Adjustment

3. Depress throttle pedal until it stops against the floor plate. Adjust throttle cable so that pedal stops as throttle plates reach wide open position. Turn lock nuts at cable housing to change cable adjustment.

4. Adjust pedal stop so that pedal and throttle lever reach full return positions at the same time.

1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6. 7. 8.

THROTTLE CABLE CABLE ADJUSTMENT JAM NUTS PEDAL STOP PEDAL ASSEMBLY

ROD END THROTTLE LINKAGE LPG CARBURETOR LINKAGE THROTTLE CABLE INSTALLATION JAM NUTS

Figure 18. Throttle Linkage Adjustment (S70-120XM Models Only)

25


Troubleshooting

900 SRM 348

Troubleshooting PROBLEM Engine will not start easily. Vaporizer is freezing.

Engine idle speed is too high.

26

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Low coolant level.

Check coolant level at radiator and coolant recovery reservoir. Fill to correct level.

Water hoses have a restriction or are too small.

Make sure there is adequate water flow to vaporizer. Install larger hoses.

Air lock in coolant line to the vaporizer.

Remove air from coolant line.

Belt for water pump is loose or broken.

Adjust tension. belt.

Hose from vaporizer to carburetor has a leak.

Find and repair leak. hose.

Thermostat is not operating correctly.

Install new thermostat.

Ignition system does not function correctly. Starter is damaged.

See Microprocessor Spark Timing System (MSTS) - Late Model GM 3.0L and 4.3L Engines 2200 SRM 765.

Idle mixture screw is not adjusted correctly.

Adjust idle mixture screw.

Fuel valve in carburetor is damaged.

Install new fuel valve. Overhaul carburetor. Install new carburetor.

Solenoid valve is disconnected or does not operate correctly.

Connect wire to solenoid. Install new solenoid valve.

Air filter is dirty.

Check air restriction indicator. Clean or install new filter element.

Balance line is disconnected.

Connect balance line.

Truck accelerates too soon after engine is started.

Allow longer warm-up time before starting operation.

Idle mixture screw is not adjusted correctly.

Adjust idle mixture screw.

Idle speed screw is loose.

Tighten screw and adjust idle speed.

Idle control actuator is not adjusted correctly or the vacuum hose is disconnected.

Connect vacuum hose. idle control actuator.

Install new drive Install new

Adjust the


900 SRM 348

Troubleshooting

PROBLEM Engine does smoothly.

Engine does smoothly.

not

not

POSSIBLE CAUSE run

idle

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

The governor is damaged.

Install new governor.

Low pressure diaphragm or valve in vaporizer is damaged.

Repair or install new vaporizer.

Wrong or damaged fuel valve in carburetor.

Repair or install new carburetor.

PCV system has a restriction.

Remove restriction. Install new PCV valve.

Air leaks in the intake manifold.

Repair leaks.

Balance line has a restriction.

Remove restriction.

Idle mixture screw is not adjusted correctly.

Adjust idle mixture screw.

Diaphragm in carburetor is damaged.

Install new diaphragm or carburetor.

Air leak between carburetor and governor or between governor and intake manifold.

Fix air leak.

PCV system has a restriction.

Remove restriction. Install new PCV valve.

Air leak at throttle shaft.

Repair or install new carburetor.

Hose from vaporizer to carburetor is damaged.

Install new hose.

Balance line is disconnected.

Connect balance line.

Pressure reducer diaphragm has a hole.

Install new diaphragm.

Low pressure valve in vaporizer is damaged.

Install new low pressure valve or new vaporizer.

Idle speed is too low.

Adjust idle speed.

Idle speed screw is loose.

Tighten screw and adjust idle speed.

Water in fuel.

Check fuel supply and tank filling procedure. Clean system.

Fuel tank is installed in the wrong position.

Install fuel tank in correct position.

27


Troubleshooting

900 SRM 348

PROBLEM Engine does not smoothly. (Cont.)

Loss of power.

Engine stops running.

28

POSSIBLE CAUSE idle

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Fuel valve on the tank is in the wrong port.

Install fuel valve in the correct port.

Idle control actuator is not adjusted correctly or the vacuum hose is disconnected.

Connect vacuum hose. idle control actuator.

Air filter is dirty.

Check air restriction indicator. Clean or install new filter element.

PCV system has a restriction.

Remove restriction. Install new PCV valve.

Governor is damaged.

Install new governor.

Power mixture valve is not adjusted correctly.

Adjust power mixture valve.

Hose from vaporizer to carburetor has leaks.

Repair leak or install new hose.

Diaphragm in carburetor is damaged.

Install new diaphragm.

Wrong type of fuel.

Clear system of wrong fuel. Fill tank with correct fuel.

Hose from vaporizer to carburetor has a restriction or is too small.

Remove restriction or install new or larger hose.

Vaporizer is damaged.

Repair or install new vaporizer.

Valve on fuel tank is closed.

Open fuel valve at the tank.

Fuel tank is empty.

Install tank that has fuel.

Hose from fuel tank is too close to the exhaust pipe.

Locate new hose away from heat source.

Vacuum line to filter unit is disconnected.

Connect vacuum line.

Filter unit is damaged.

Install new filter unit.

Vaporizer is damaged.

Repair or install new vaporizer.

Carburetor is damaged.

Install new carburetor.

Hose to carburetor is damaged.

Install new hose.

Adjust the


900 SRM 348

Troubleshooting

PROBLEM Engine (Cont.)

stops

running.

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Idle speed is too low.

Adjust idle speed.

Water in the fuel.

Check fuel supply and tank filling procedure. Clean system.

Fuel filter is dirty.

Clean fuel filter.

Governor is damaged.

Repair or install new governor.

Air leak at the intake manifold.

Repair leak.

Solenoid valve is disconnected or does not operate correctly.

Connect wire to solenoid. install new solenoid valve.

29


NOTES ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

30



MAIN CONTROL VALVE H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005, L005]; S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]

PART NO. 1466211

2000 SRM 754


Main Control Valve

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS General ............................................................................................................................................................... Description ......................................................................................................................................................... Operation............................................................................................................................................................ Lift Section..................................................................................................................................................... Tilt and Auxiliary Sections ........................................................................................................................... Reattaching the Clevis End of the Tilt Spool........................................................................................... Relief Valve .................................................................................................................................................... Main Control Valve Repair ................................................................................................................................ Remove and Disassemble .............................................................................................................................. Clean and Inspect .......................................................................................................................................... Assemble ........................................................................................................................................................ Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Pressure Relief Valve Check and Adjustment.................................................................................................. Main Relief Valve (Lift) ................................................................................................................................. Steering Relief Valve ..................................................................................................................................... Secondary Relief Valve (Tilt and Auxiliary) ................................................................................................. Specifications...................................................................................................................................................... Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................................................

1 1 1 1 5 6 6 6 6 8 10 10 11 11 11 14 15 15

This section is for the following models: H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005, L005]; S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]

©2003 HYSTER COMPANY

i


2000 SRM 754

Operation

General This section contains a description and repair procedures for the main control valve used in the hydraulic system.

Description The main control valve controls the operation of the steering, lift, tilt, and auxiliary cylinders. The main control valve is fastened to a bracket located on the right side of the lift truck. The main control valve assembly is divided into the following sections: • Inlet section • Steering control section • Lift and lower section • Tilt section • Auxiliary section Additional auxiliary sections can be added to the main control valve to control optional auxiliary functions. The end section and any additional optional auxiliary sections are attached to the control valve with 3 through bolts.

Each spool has a spring that returns the spool to the NEUTRAL position when the control lever is released. The main control valve contains three pressure relief valves. One for the steering section, one for the lift section, and one for the tilt and auxiliary sections. The steering and lift relief valves are installed in the inlet section while the tilt and auxiliary relief valve is installed in the main body between the tilt and auxiliary spools. The pressure relief valves limit the maximum pressure within the hydraulic system. The inlet section also contains a valve that provides a steady 17 liter/min (4.5 gal/min) hydraulic flow out of the main control valve to the steering valve. This flow then returns to the hydraulic tank through the end section. See Figure 1, Figure 2, and Figure 3.

Operation The main control valve is an open center, series-parallel circuit valve. See Figure 4. When open center valve spools are in the NEUTRAL position, the hydraulic oil flows through the valve with minimum restriction. The oil passes through the valve and returns to the hydraulic tank through the end section. The inlet section of the valve also includes the steering flow divider. The steering flow divider is a priority valve that provides a steady supply to steering regardless of the downstream loads from lift, tilt, or auxiliary functions. Excess flow from the flow divider is routed to the lift, tilt, and auxiliary functions. The lift, tilt, and auxiliary functions of the main control valve are configured as an open center, series-parallel circuit valve.

LIFT SECTION The lift function is configured as a series circuit. As the spool is shifted to the lift mode, the lift spool makes a restriction in the open center passage. Increased pressure in the series passage causes oil to flow through the check valve to the supply cavity. The check valve prevents the movement of the load until the system pressure is great enough to control the load. When the lift spool is fully shifted in the lift mode, oil supply is blocked through the open center passage to the tilt and auxiliary function, forcing all flow to the lift circuit. When the spool is in the lower position, the spool opens a path from the lift cylinder to the drain cavity. The spool is made so that the oil flow through the open center passage is not stopped.

1


Operation

1. MAIN CONTROL VALVE BODY 2. STEERING OUT (TO STEERING CONTROL VALVE) 3. INLET 4. LIFT SECTION HYDRAULIC CONNECTION 5. TILT SECTION HYDRAULIC CONNECTION 6. STEERING RELIEF VALVE 7. AUXILIARY SECTION HYDRAULIC CONNECTION 8. TILT AND AUXILIARY RELIEF VALVE 9. OPTIONAL AUXILIARY SECTION 10. END SECTION 11. STEERING CONTROL VALVE RETURN 12. RETURN TO HYDRAULIC TANK

2000 SRM 754

13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25.

AUXILIARY SECTION SPOOL PARALLEL PASSAGE OPEN CENTER PASSAGE AUXILIARY SECTION, END CAP TILT SECTION, END CAP LIFT SECTION, END CAP O-RING (2 PLACES) PLASTIC SEAL (2 PLACES) SPRING RETAINING SCREW SPRING RETAINER WASHER SPRING SEAL RETAINER

Figure 1. Main Control Valve, Older Model H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005] Lift Trucks

2


2000 SRM 754

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

MAIN CONTROL VALVE BODY FITTINGS STEERING RELIEF VALVE LIFT RELIEF VALVE LIFT SECTION HYDRAULIC CONNECTION O-RING WIPER SEAL SEAL RETAINER CAPSCREW

Operation

10. NUT 11. TILT AND AUXILIARY RELIEF VALVE 12. AUXILIARY SPOOLS 13. SPRING RETAINER 14. SPRING 15. CAP 16. TILT SPOOL 17. LIFT SPOOL 18. PARALLEL PASSAGE

19. 20. 21. 22.

OPEN CENTER PASSAGE OUTLET SECTION SPRING RETAINER SCREW OPTIONAL AUXILIARY SECTION(S) 23. TILT SECTION 24. RETURN TO HYDRAULIC TANK 25. STEERING OUT (TO STEERING CONTROL VALVE)

Figure 2. Main Control Valve, Newer Model H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005] Lift Trucks, and H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [L005], and S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [F004] Lift Trucks

3


Operation

2000 SRM 754

Figure 3. Main Control Valve S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004] Model Trucks

4


2000 SRM 754

Operation Legend for Figure 3

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

MAIN RELIEF VALVE STEERING RELIEF VALVE MAIN CONTROL VALVE BODY LIFT RELIEF VALVE TILT RELIEF VALVE O-RING AUXILIARY RELIEF VALVE WIPER SEAL SPRING RETAINER PLATE SPRING BOLT LOCKWASHER AND CAPSCREW

1. MAIN CONTROL VALVE 2. 17 liter/min (4.5 gal/min) TO STEERING CONTROL VALVE 3. FLOW FROM HYDRAULIC PUMP 4. STEERING RELIEF VALVE 5. LIFT RELIEF VALVE

13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.

END SECTION STEERING CONTROL VALVE RETURN PLUG THROUGH-BOLTS RETURN TO HYDRAULIC TANK OPTIONAL AUXILIARY VALVE SECTIONS BACKUP RING SECONDARY RELIEF VALVE STEERING PRESSURE TEST PORT INLET PORT STEERING OUTLET PORT (TO STEERING CONTROL VALVE)

6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

LIFT/LOWER SPOOL TILT SPOOL TILT AND AUXILIARY RELIEF VALVE AUXILIARY SPOOL FROM STEERING CONTROL VALVE HYDRAULIC TANK

Figure 4. Control Valve Schematic

TILT AND AUXILIARY SECTIONS The tilt and auxiliary functions are configured as parallel circuits. Each spool can operate without preventing the flow of oil to another spool. The parallel circuit also allows a single relief valve to control the maximum pressure of all functions in the circuit. The operation of these spools is similar to that of the lift spool. As the spool is shifted from the NEUTRAL position, the flow through the open center passage is

restricted, increasing the system pressure. The increased pressure in the series passage causes the oil to flow through the check valve to the supply cavity. The check valve prevents the movement of the load until the system pressure is great enough to control the load. When the spool is fully shifted, the parallel flow path allows flow of oil to the other functions in the parallel circuit. Flow from the tilt cylinders or auxiliary attachments returns through the main control valve to the hydraulic tank.

5


Main Control Valve Repair

2000 SRM 754

When tilting forward, an additional tilt control spool, located inside the tilt spool, is used to prevent cavitation in the piston end of the tilt cylinders. Cavitation occurs when the available fluid does not fill the space in a closed system. When cavitation occurs in the tilt cylinders, the tilt forward function is not smooth. The tilt control spool permits the regulation of the tilt speed by using the pressure from the hydraulic pump. The pump pressure must be at least 800 kPa (116 psi) on the piston ends of the tilt cylinders. The tilt control spool prevents oil flow from the rod end of the tilt cylinder until the pressure is 800 kPa (116 psi). This action makes sure that a vacuum cannot occur at the piston ends of the tilt cylinders.

Reattaching the Clevis End of the Tilt Spool The clevis end of the tilt spool screws off to enable assembly of the tilt control spool and spring inside the tilt spool. If this clevis end becomes loose or disengages, then a hydraulic oil leak can occur. Follow these procedures to reattach the clevis end. 1. Remove the tilt spool assembly from the valve body.

2. Remove original O-Ring above threads on clevis end and replace with new O-Ring. 3. Clean threads of clevis end and apply one drop of Loctite 515. 4. Turn clevis end into tilt spool and tighten to 16 N•m (12 lbf ft). 5. Install tilt spool assembly into valve body.

RELIEF VALVE The relief valve limits the maximum pressure within the hydraulic system. The control valve has three relief valves. The steering relief valve and the lift relief valve are installed in the inlet section of the control valve. The third relief valve is for the tilt and auxiliary circuits and is installed in the section of the control valve with the tilt and auxiliary spools. All the relief valves are the same in description and operation. The tilt and auxiliary relief valve is set at a lower pressure than the lift relief valve. When the pressure in one of the hydraulic circuits reaches the relief valve setting, the relief valve opens a path between the inlet and drain circuits.

Main Control Valve Repair REMOVE AND DISASSEMBLE WARNING Lower the mast before disconnecting lines from the control valve to prevent the mast from lowering suddenly. NOTE: For H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) (K005, L005) lift trucks, perform Step 1 and Step 2 and Step 6 through Step 12. For S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004, F004) lift trucks, perform Steps Step 3 through Step 12. 1. Remove linkage cover. See Figure 5 and Figure 6. 2. Disconnect linkage at spools and remove lever assembly from main control valve. See Figure 5 or Figure 6.

6

3. Remove boot first before removing cover. Grab lip portion of boot that fits over hole in cover and pull forward to release boot from boot retainer. Remove boot from control levers. See Figure 7. 4. Remove four spring washers and nuts that hold cover on its mounting bracket. Remove boot retainer (two pieces) and two springs that are in the tube part of the boot retainer. See Figure 7. 5. Disconnect linkage at spools. Disconnect control lever assembly (linkage) by removing two capscrews from right hand bracket. Remove pivot shaft from control lever assembly. Remove control lever assembly from control valve. See Figure 7.


2000 SRM 754

Main Control Valve Repair spring retainers unless a spring must be replaced. See Figure 1, Figure 2, and Figure 3. 9. To remove the optional auxiliary valve sections from the main control valve body, remove three through-bolts. 10. Remove control spools by removing end caps and pulling spool out of control valve. 11. Remove spring retaining screw from end of spool to separate spring parts. 12. Inspect spring and spring retainers, replace damaged parts.

1. LINKAGE COVER 2. LEVER ASSEMBLY

3. MAIN CONTROL VALVE

Figure 5. Linkage Removal, Older Model H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005] Lift Trucks 6. Disconnect hydraulic lines at control valve. Put caps on open lines and install plugs in open ports of control valve. See Figure 8 and Figure 9. 7. Remove bolts that hold main control valve to control valve mounting bracket. See Figure 8, Figure 9, Figure 10, and Figure 11. NOTE: Disassemble main control valve as necessary for repairs. Most repairs require adjustments to the linkage and the replacement of O-rings to stop leaks. Passages in the tilt spool are small and can need cleaning if hydraulic oil becomes dirty. If the spool or valve section is damaged, replace main control valve. 8. Remove end cap from valve section. Carefully pull spool from valve section. Do not remove

1. LINKAGE COVER 2. LEVER ASSEMBLY

3. MAIN CONTROL VALVE

Figure 6. Linkage Removal, Newer Model H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005] Lift Trucks and H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [L005] Lift Trucks

7


Main Control Valve Repair

2000 SRM 754

Figure 8. Control Valve Removal, Older Model H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005] Lift Truck Models 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

BOOT COVER BOOT RETAINER BOOT SPRINGS CONTROL VALVE COVER ATTACHMENT CAPSCREW, NUT, AND SPRING CONTROL LEVER COVER CONTROL LEVERS CONTROL VALVE COVER MOUNTING BRACKET CAPSCREWS MAIN CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VALVE MOUNTING BRACKET PIVOT SHAFT

Figure 7. Linkage Removal S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004] Model Lift Trucks

8

CLEAN AND INSPECT WARNING Cleaning solvents can be flammable and toxic and can cause skin irritation. When using cleaning solvents, always follow the solvent manufacturer’s recommended safety precautions.

WARNING Compressed air can move particles so they cause injury to the user or to other personnel. Make sure the path of the compressed air is away from all personnel. Wear protective goggles or a face shield to prevent injury to the eyes.


2000 SRM 754

Main Control Valve Repair

Clean all parts of control valve with solvent. Dry parts with compressed air. 1. Inspect spools and bores for defects. If spool or bores have damage, replace control valve section. 2. Coat spools with clean hydraulic fluid and make sure spools move freely in bores. 3. Inspect relief valve for damage. If relief valve is damaged, it must be replaced.

Figure 10. Control Valve Removal S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004) Lift Truck Models

Figure 9. Control Valve Removal, Newer Model H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005] Lift Trucks and H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [L005] Lift Truck Models

Figure 11. Control Valve Removal S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (F004) Lift Truck Models

9


Main Control Valve Repair

2000 SRM 754

ASSEMBLE CAUTION Before installing the parts into the valve body, make sure all parts are clean. Replace all the seals and the O-rings. Lubricate all parts with clean hydraulic oil during assembly.

cover and boot lip is flush along edges of cover hole. See Figure 12. 8. Add hydraulic oil to tank. See section Periodic Maintenance for correct specifications. 9. Operate system and check for leaks and correct operation.

1. Install new seals in bores of control valve. Install new O-ring seals between control valve and optional auxiliary section if installed, or end section if the optional auxiliary section is not installed. Tighten 14 mm through bolts to 115 N•m (85 lbf ft). 2. If return springs were removed from control spools, install spring retainers. During assembly, use new O-rings for the parts of the tilt control spool. Do not damage O-rings during installation. 3. Lubricate spools with clean hydraulic oil. Make sure dirt does not get on any parts. Carefully install spools in valve body. Install seal retainers and covers for return springs. 4. Install relief valves.

INSTALL 1. Install control valve to mounting bracket. See Figure 8, Figure 9, Figure 10, and Figure 11. 2. Install linkage (control lever) assembly to control valve. See Figure 5, Figure 6, and Figure 7. 3. Connect linkage at spools. 4. Connect hydraulic lines to control valve. NOTE: For H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) (K005, L005) lift trucks, proceed to Step 8. For S3.505.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004, F004) lift trucks perform Step 5 through Step 9. 5. Install control lever cover to mounting bracket. See Figure 12. 6. Install boot springs in tube portion of boot retainer and connect boot retainer around control levers, just above hole in cover. Set boot retainer on edge of cover hole. Slide boot over control levers. See Figure 12. 7. Place lip of boot around edges of boot retainer. Push boot retainer under cover hole so it is under

10

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

BOOT COVER BOOT RETAINER BOOT SPRINGS CONTROL VALVE COVER ATTACHMENT CAPSCREW, NUT, AND SPRING CONTROL LEVER COVER CONTROL LEVERS CONTROL VALVE COVER MOUNTING BRACKET CAPSCREWS MAIN CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VALVE MOUNTING BRACKET PIVOT SHAFT Figure 12. Cover and Boot Installation S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) Models


2000 SRM 754

Pressure Relief Valve Check and Adjustment

Pressure Relief Valve Check and Adjustment The control valve has three relief valves. The steering relief valve and the lift relief valve are installed in the inlet section of the control valve. The third relief valve is for the tilt and auxiliary circuits and is installed in the section of the control valve with the tilt and auxiliary spools.

MAIN RELIEF VALVE (LIFT) To check the pressure of the main pressure relief valve, do the following: 1. Connect a 0 to 25 MPa (0 to 3500 psi) gauge to test port on side of main control valve. 2. Start engine and operate hydraulic system to warm oil temperature to 55 to 65 C (130 to 150 F). Run engine at approximately 1000 rpm when making pressure checks.

1. STEERING CONTROL VALVE 2. MAIN CONTROL VALVE

3. Check relief valve by raising mast until it stops. Hold lever and check reading of gauge when relief valve opens. If pressure is not correct, replace relief valve. See the Specifications section for the correct pressure. 4. Remove gauge when checks are complete.

STEERING RELIEF VALVE To check the pressure of the steering pressure relief valve, do the following: 1. Remove floor plates to access steering hydraulic lines. See Figure 13, Figure 14, Figure 15, and Figure 16. 2. Connect a 0 to 20 MPa (0 to 2000 psi) gauge to test port. See Figure 13, Figure 14, Figure 15, and Figure 16.

3. STEERING TEST PORT

Figure 13. Steering System Hydraulic Lines, Older Model H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005] Lift Trucks

11


Pressure Relief Valve Check and Adjustment

1. STEERING CONTROL VALVE 2. MAIN CONTROL VALVE

2000 SRM 754

3. STEERING TEST PORT

Figure 14. Steering System Hydraulic Lines, Newer Model H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005] Lift Trucks and H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [L005] Lift Trucks

12


2000 SRM 754

1. STEERING CONTROL VALVE 2. MAIN CONTROL VALVE

Pressure Relief Valve Check and Adjustment

3. STEERING TEST PORT

Figure 15. Steering System Hydraulic Lines S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004] Model Trucks

13


Pressure Relief Valve Check and Adjustment

1. STEERING CONTROL VALVE 2. MAIN CONTROL VALVE

2000 SRM 754

3. STEERING TEST PORT

Figure 16. Steering System Hydraulic Lines S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [F004] Model Trucks 3. Start engine and operate hydraulic system to warm oil temperature to 55 to 65 C (130 to 150 F). Run engine at approximately 1000 rpm when making pressure checks. 4. Check secondary relief valve by turning steering wheel to the right until it stops. Hold wheel in place and check reading of gauge when relief valve opens. If pressure is not correct, replace relief valve. See the Specifications section for the correct pressure. 5. Remove gauge and install floor plates when checks are completed.

14

SECONDARY RELIEF VALVE (TILT AND AUXILIARY) To check the pressure of the secondary pressure relief valve, do the following: 1. Connect a 0 to 20 MPa (0 to 3000 psi) gauge to main test port on side of control valve. 2. Start engine and operate hydraulic system to warm oil temperature to 55 to 65 C (130 to 150 F). Run engine at approximately 1000 rpm when making pressure checks. 3. Check secondary relief valve by tilting mast backward until it stops. Hold lever and check reading of gauge when relief valve opens. If pressure is not correct, replace relief valve. See the Specifications section for the correct pressure.


2000 SRM 754

Troubleshooting

Specifications Function

Specification

Pump input to valve..................................................................

125 liter/min (33 gal/min)

Steering output flow H3.50-120XM (H70-120XM).................................................

17 liter/min (4.5 gal/min)

S3.50-120XM (S70-120XM) ..................................................

Nonpriority Flow

Main relief valve (lift) operating pressure, (Port B1*)............

21.49 to 22.51 MPa (3125 to 3275 psi)

Secondary relief valve (tilt and auxiliary) operating pressure (Ports A2, A3, B2, B3*)..............................................

14.99 to 16.01 MPa (2175 to 2325 psi)

Steering relief valve operating pressure (At steering supply port)...........................................................

10.35 to 11.05 MPa (1450 to 1550 psi)

Operating temperature.............................................................

30 to 95 C ( 20 to 200 F)

Centering spring force: At neutral..............................................................................

15.5 kg (34.18 lb) max

At full force............................................................................

20.0 kg (44.1 lb) max

Oil type ......................................................................................

SAE 10 W (per HCE-4) or ISO VG32

*For port locations, refer to Figure 4. Port A1 is closed.

Troubleshooting PROBLEM Slow or no movement of cylinders.

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Air is in hydraulic system.

Remove air from hydraulic system.

Hydraulic pump is worn or damaged.

Repair or replace hydraulic pump.

Restriction in the hydraulic lines.

Repair hydraulic lines.

Cylinder seals are damaged.

Repair cylinders.

Load is greater than capacity.

Reduce load.

Linkage is disconnected or damaged.

Repair linkage for control levers.

Pressure relief valve(s) is not within specifications.

Replace relief valve.

Large leaks between spool and bore.

Replace control valve.

15


Troubleshooting

PROBLEM Oil leaks at the end of a spool.

Spool will not move or is difficult to move.

Spool will not return to Neutral.

Hydraulic pressure is above specifications.

Tilt cylinders extend when tilt spool is in Neutral position.

Tilt cylinders extend suddenly when tilt spool is moved to Back Tilt position.

16

2000 SRM 754

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Seal for spool is damaged.

Replace seal.

Spool is damaged.

Replace control valve.

Valve body is damaged.

Replace control valve.

Linkage is disconnected or damaged.

Repair linkage.

Return spring is damaged.

Replace spring.

Spool or bore is damaged.

Replace control valve.

Linkage is disconnected or damaged.

Repair and adjust linkage.

Return spring is damaged.

Replace spring.

Dirt between spool and bore.

Clean valve.

Spool is bent or damaged.

Replace control valve.

Pressure relief valve(s) is damaged.

Replace relief valve.

Restriction in return line.

Clean or replace return line or filter.

Cylinder seals have leaks.

Repair tilt cylinders

Oil leaks between control valve spool and bore.

Replace valve section.

Hydraulic lines have leaks.

Repair or tighten lines or fittings.

Tilt spool is damaged.

Replace tilt spool or control valve.


2000 SRM 754

PROBLEM

Troubleshooting

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Tilt cylinders extend suddenly when tilt spool is moved to Forward Tilt position.

Tilt spool is damaged.

Replace tilt spool or control valve.

Lift cylinders retract when lift spool is in Neutral position.

Cylinder seals have leaks.

Repair lift cylinders.

Hydraulic lines have leaks.

Repair or tighten lines or fittings.

Leaks between lift spool and bore.

Replace control valve.

17


NOTES ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

18



MASTS DESCRIPTION AND REPAIRS E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) [C098]; E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) [D098]; S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]; H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005, L005]

PART NO. 1466163

4000 SRM 736


Masts

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS General ............................................................................................................................................................... Description and Operation ................................................................................................................................ Carriages ........................................................................................................................................................ Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift ...................................................................................................... Two-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift ............................................................................................................ Three-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift ......................................................................................................... Safety Procedures When Working Near Mast.................................................................................................. Fork Replacement .............................................................................................................................................. Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Carriage Repair.................................................................................................................................................. Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Sideshift Carriage Repair.................................................................................................................................. Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Disassemble ................................................................................................................................................... Assemble ........................................................................................................................................................ Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Repair .............................................................................................. Remove, H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) Model Lift Trucks........................................................................... Remove, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) Model Lift Trucks .......................................................................... Disassemble ................................................................................................................................................... Clean and Inspect .......................................................................................................................................... Assemble ........................................................................................................................................................ Install, H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) Lift Truck Models ............................................................................. Install, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) Lift Truck Models .......................................................................... Two-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift Repair..................................................................................................... Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Disassemble ................................................................................................................................................... Clean and Inspect .......................................................................................................................................... Assemble ........................................................................................................................................................ Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Three-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift Repair.................................................................................................. Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Disassemble ................................................................................................................................................... Clean and Inspect .......................................................................................................................................... Assemble ........................................................................................................................................................ Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Mast Operation Check ....................................................................................................................................... Lift and Tilt System Leak Check ...................................................................................................................... Lift System..................................................................................................................................................... Tilt System ..................................................................................................................................................... Tilt Cylinder Stroke and Backward Tilt Angle Adjustment............................................................................ Lift Chain Adjustments ..................................................................................................................................... Mast Adjustments.............................................................................................................................................. Carriage Adjustment ......................................................................................................................................... Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................................................

©2005 HYSTER COMPANY

1 1 1 1 2 3 5 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 12 16 16 17 18 20 22 22 22 22 24 24 26 26 26 30 30 30 35 35 35 36 37 39 41 43 43

i


Table of Contents

Masts

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) This section is for the following models: E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) [C098]; E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) [D098]; S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]; H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005, L005]

ii


4000 SRM 736

Description and Operation

General This section contains the description, operation, and repair procedures for the masts. Information on sideshift carriage is also included in the section.

Description and Operation Vertical frames of a mast are called weldments. See Figure 1. Channels, load rollers, and crossmembers are parts of the weldments. Channels on each side of the weldment are support members of the mast and tracks for load rollers. While lifting and lowering a load, large forces are put on the mast assembly. Load rollers reduce the friction between the channels when the weldments move vertically.

lift truck. During tilt operation, the mast rotates on pivot pins in the frame. For S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) model lift trucks, mast mounting hangers are attached to the drive axle and connect the mast to the lift truck. During tilt operation, the mast rotates on the drive axle.

CARRIAGES The carriage is a separate section that moves on load rollers within vertical channels of the inner weldment. Forks or other types of load handling equipment are attached to the carriage. A load backrest extension is installed on the carriage. A sideshift carriage permits the operator to hydraulically change the lateral position of the load handling device on the carriage.

TWO-STAGE MAST WITH LIMITED FREE-LIFT

1. FORKS 2. CARRIAGE 3. LOAD BACKREST EXTENSION

4. OUTER WELDMENT 5. INNER WELDMENT 6. LIFT CYLINDER

Figure 1. Mast Components The mast can tilt forward and backward. Tilt cylinders are installed between the frame of the lift truck and outer weldment of the mast. For H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) lift trucks, the pivot mounts at the bottom of the outer weldment connect the mast to the

The two-stage mast with limited free-lift (LFL) has two weldments, an outer weldment and an inner weldment. See Figure 2. Outer weldment is connected to the lift truck by pivot mounts and tilt cylinders. The top of the outer weldment and the base of the inner weldment have one load roller on each side. These load rollers travel along channels of the weldments. The angle of the load rollers permits them to control the forces from the front, back, and sides of the mast. Shims on the load rollers control lateral clearance between weldments and load rollers. Strip bearings are installed at the top of each side of the outer weldment. Strip bearings keep correct clearance (forward and backward) between outer weldment and inner weldments.

1


Description and Operation

4000 SRM 736 weldment. A clamp holds the top of the lift cylinder in position on the outer weldment. Operation of lift cylinders extends and retracts the inner weldment. Two lift chains control the movement of the carriage. Chains are fastened to mounts near the top of the outer weldment. The chains go up and over chain sheaves on inner weldment and then connect to the carriage. When lift cylinders extend, lift chains transfer the force from lift cylinders to the carriage. When lift cylinders retract, weight of the load, carriage, and inner weldment push oil from the lift cylinders. Oil flows from lift cylinders, through lowering control valves, main control valve, and then to the hydraulic tank.

TWO-STAGE MAST WITH FULL FREE-LIFT The two-stage mast with full free-lift (FFL) has an inner weldment, an outer weldment, and three single-stage lift cylinders. See Figure 3. It is called a free-lift mast because the carriage can travel to the top of the inner weldment without increasing mast height. The free-lift mast has load roller and strip bearing arrangements similar to the two-stage mast with limited free-lift. Two main lift cylinders are installed at the back of the outer weldment. The base of each lift cylinder sits in a mount at the bottom of the outer weldment. The hydraulic fitting for each lift cylinder goes through a hole in the mount. The top of each lift cylinder (cylinder rod) fits into guides at the top of the inner weldment.

1. LIFT CYLINDER (2) 2. LIFT CHAIN 3. OUTER WELDMENT 4. CHAIN SHEAVE 5. INNER WELDMENT 6. CARRIAGE

7. FROM MAIN CONTROL VALVE 8. EXTERNAL LOWERING CONTROL VALVE 9. INTERNAL LOWERING CONTROL VALVE

Figure 2. Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift The two-stage mast with limited free-lift has two single-stage lift cylinders. Lift cylinders are installed at the back of the outer weldment. The base of each lift cylinder is held on a mount at the bottom of the outer weldment by brackets. The top of each lift cylinder (cylinder rod) fits into a guide at the top of the inner

2

Free-lift cylinder is installed in the inner weldment. Main lift cylinder on the right side of the mast and the free-lift cylinder each have an internal lowering control valve. A single external lowering control valve is connected by tubing to all lift cylinders. Two chain sheaves are installed on the cylinder rod of the free-lift cylinder. Lift chains are connected to a mount behind the free-lift cylinder. The chains then go over the sheaves and are connected to the carriage. Three lift cylinders are connected by hoses and tubing. To extend the mast, oil from main control valve flows to all lift cylinders at the same time. Free-lift cylinder raises first because it lifts the least amount of weight. Free-lift cylinder raises the carriage to the top of the inner weldment. After the free-lift cylinder reaches the end of its stroke, main lift cylinders begin to extend and raise the inner weldment.


4000 SRM 736

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Description and Operation

MAIN LIFT CYLINDER (2) OUTER WELDMENT FREE-LIFT CYLINDER INNER WELDMENT CHAIN SHEAVE

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

LIFT CHAIN CARRIAGE FROM MAIN CONTROL VALVE EXTERNAL LOWERING CONTROL VALVE INTERNAL LOWERING CONTROL VALVE

Figure 3. Two-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift During lowering, main lift cylinders lower first because they have a greater load. After main lift cylinders have retracted, free-lift cylinder lowers. All oil from the lift cylinders flows through the lowering control valves to the hydraulic tank.

THREE-STAGE MAST WITH FULL FREE-LIFT The three-stage mast with full free-lift (FFL) has an outer, an intermediate, and an inner weldment. See Figure 4. Three single-stage lift cylinders are used

to raise the carriage and extend weldments. Weldments are telescopic and have load roller and strip bearing arrangements similar to the two-stage mast. Two main lift cylinders are installed at the back of the outer weldment. The base of each lift cylinder is held on a mount at the bottom of the outer weldment by brackets. The top of each main lift cylinder (cylinder rod) fits into a guide at the top of the intermediate weldment. A clamp holds the top of the lift cylinder in position on the outer weldment. The free-lift cylinder is installed in the inner weldment and held in position by two clamps.

3


Description and Operation

4000 SRM 736

A. PHASE 1

B. PHASE 2

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

MAIN LIFT CYLINDER (2) OUTER LIFT CHAIN FREE-LIFT CYLINDER INNER LIFT CHAIN INNER WELDMENT

INTERMEDIATE WELDMENT OUTER WELDMENT FROM MAIN CONTROL VALVE EXTERNAL LOWERING CONTROL VALVE INTERNAL LOWERING CONTROL VALVE

Figure 4. Three-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift Two main lift chains fasten at one end near the top of the outer weldment. The lift chains then go over sheaves at the top of the intermediate weldment and fasten at the bottom of the inner weldment. Freelift chains are connected to a mount behind the freelift cylinder. Chains then go over the sheaves and connect to the carriage. Three lift cylinders are connected by hoses. To extend mast, oil from main control valve flows to all cylinders at the same time. Free-lift cylinder raises first because it lifts the least amount of weight. Free-lift

4

cylinder raises the carriage to the top of the inner weldment. After free-lift cylinder reaches the end of its stroke, the main lift cylinders begin to extend. As main lift cylinders extend intermediate weldment, inner weldment is extended by lift chains. During lowering, main lift cylinders lower first because they have a greater load. After the main lift cylinders have retracted, free-lift cylinder lowers. All oil from lift cylinders flows through the lowering control valves to the hydraulic tank.


4000 SRM 736

Safety Procedures When Working Near Mast

Safety Procedures When Working Near Mast The following procedures MUST be used when inspecting or working near the mast. Additional precautions and procedures can be required when repairing or removing the mast.

WARNING Mast parts are heavy and can move. Distances between parts are small. Serious injury or death can result if part of the body is hit by parts of the mast or the carriage. • Never put any part of the body into or under the mast or carriage unless all parts are completely lowered or a safety chain is installed. Also make sure that the power is off and the key is removed. Put a DO NOT OPERATE tag in the operator’s compartment. Disconnect the battery on electric lift trucks and put a tag or lock on the battery connector. • Be careful of the forks. When the mast is raised, the forks can be at a height to cause an injury. • DO NOT climb on the mast or lift truck at any time. Use a ladder or personnel lift to work on the mast. • DO NOT use blocks to support the mast weldments nor to restrain their movement. • Mast repairs require disassembly and removal of parts and can require removal of the mast or carriage. Follow the repair procedures in the correct Service Manual for the mast. WHEN WORKING NEAR THE MAST ALWAYS: • Lower the mast and carriage completely. Push the lift/lower control lever forward and make sure there is no movement in the mast. Make sure that all parts of the mast that move are fully lowered. OR

• If parts of the mast must be in a raised position, install a safety chain to restrain the moving parts of the mast. Connect moving parts to a part that does not move. Follow these procedures: NOTE: Apply the parking brake. After lowering or restraining the mast, shut off the power and remove the key. Put a DO NOT OPERATE tag in the operator’s compartment. Disconnect the battery on electric lift trucks and put a tag or lock on the battery connector. 1. Put mast in a vertical position. 2. Raise mast to align the bottom crossmember of the weldment that moves in the outer weldment with a crossmember on the outer weldment. On the two-stage and free-lift mast, the moving part is the inner weldment. On the three-stage mast, it is the intermediate weldment. See Figure 5. 3. Use a 3/8 inch minimum safety chain with a hook to fasten the crossmembers together so the movable member cannot lower. Put hook on back side of the mast. Make sure hook is completely engaged with a link in the chain. Make sure safety chain does not touch lift chains or chain sheaves, tubes, hoses, fittings, or other parts on the mast. 4. Lower the mast until there is tension in the safety chain and the free-lift cylinder (free-lift, three-stage, and four-stage masts only) is completely retracted. If running, stop the engine. Apply the parking brake. Install a DO NOT REMOVE tag on the safety chain(s). 5. Install another safety chain (3/8 inch minimum) between the top or bottom crossmember of the carriage and a crossmember on the outer weldment.

5


Safety Procedures When Working Near Mast

4000 SRM 736

A. TWO-STAGE LFL MAST

B. TWO-STAGE FFL MAST

C. THREE-STAGE FFL MAST

1. OUTER WELDMENT 2. INNER WELDMENT 3. INTERMEDIATE WELDMENT

4. HOOK 5. FREE-LIFT CYLINDER 6. CROSSMEMBER

7. CROSSMEMBER

Figure 5. Two-Stage LFL, Two-Stage FFL, and Three-Stage FFL Masts

6


4000 SRM 736

Fork Replacement

Fork Replacement The identification of a fork describes how the fork is connected to the carriage. The series of lift trucks

covered in this section have hook type forks. See Figure 6.

A. OLD STYLE LOCK PIN ASSEMBLY

B. NEW STYLE LOCK PIN ASSEMBLY

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

FORK LOCK PIN SPRING WASHER WASHER

WEDGE KNOB LEVER COTTER PIN LOCK PIN ASSEMBLY

Figure 6. Fork Lock Pin Assembly

7


Fork Replacement

4000 SRM 736

The forks can be connected to the carriage by one of two types of hooks and lock pins. See Figure 6. These lock pins are installed through the top fork hooks and fit into slots in the top carriage bar. Separate the forks as much as possible for maximum support of the load. Hook forks will slide along the carriage bars to adjust for the load to be lifted. Raise the lock pin in each fork to slide the fork on the carriage bar. Make sure the lock pin is engaged in the carriage bar to lock the fork in position after the width adjustment is made.

1. TIP ALIGNMENT (MUST BE WITHIN 3% OF FORK LENGTH) 2. CRACKS 3. LATCH DAMAGE 4. HEEL OF FORK (MUST BE 90% OF DIMENSION X) 5. CARRIAGE 6. LOAD BACKREST EXTENSION 7. MAXIMUM ANGLE 93 8. FORK REMOVAL NOTCH

A fork can be removed from the carriage for replacement of the fork or other maintenance.

2. Lower fork onto blocks so that bottom hook of fork moves through fork removal notch. See Figure 8.

Legend for Figure 7

REMOVE WARNING Do not try to move a fork without a lifting device. Each fork for these lift trucks can weigh 66 to 183 kg (145 to 403 lb). 1. Slide fork to fork removal notch on carriage. See Figure 7.

1. CARRIAGE FORKS 2. HOOK FORK

3. BLOCKS

Figure 8. Hook Fork Removal 3. Lower carriage further so that top hook of fork is disengaged from the top carriage bar. 4. Move carriage away from fork, or use a lifting device to move fork away from carriage.

INSTALL 1. Move fork and carriage so that top hook on fork can engage the upper carriage bar. 2. Raise carriage to move lower hook through the fork removal notch. 3. Slide fork on the carriage so that both upper and lower hooks engage the carriage. Figure 7. Forks Check

8

4. Engage lock pin with a notch in the upper carriage bar.


4000 SRM 736

Carriage Repair

Carriage Repair REMOVE

2. Lower carriage and forks on blocks so lift chains become loose.

WARNING Do not work under a raised carriage. Lower the carriage or use a chain or blocks to prevent the carriage and inner weldment from lowering. NOTE: If the mast is equipped with a sideshift carriage, see the paragraphs under Sideshift Carriage Repair. 1. Put weight on the forks so carriage has stability and will not fall when it is disconnected from the mast.

1. 2. 3. 4.

CARRIAGE LOAD ROLLER SHIMS SNAP RING

WARNING When disconnecting the lift chains, keep control of the ends. Use wire to temporarily connect the ends of the lift chains to the mast. This procedure will prevent the lift chains from falling and causing an injury or damage. 3. Remove pin from each chain anchor at the carriage. Disconnect lift chains from carriage. See Figure 9.

5. SIDE ROLLER 6. CHAIN ANCHOR (TWO-STAGE MAST) 7. CHAIN ANCHOR (FREE-LIFT AND THREE-STAGE MAST) Figure 9. Carriage

9


Sideshift Carriage Repair

4000 SRM 736

WARNING Make sure the carriage has stability and will not fall over when the inner weldment is raised above the load rollers of the carriage. 4. Use lift cylinders to raise inner weldment until it is above the load rollers of the carriage. If the hydraulic system cannot be used, connect a lifting device to the top of the inner weldment. Carefully raise inner weldment until it is above the load rollers of the carriage.

5. Move lift truck from carriage. Connect a lifting device to the carriage. Make sure carriage is stable. Remove load backrest and forks. Put carriage on floor so that load rollers are up. 6. If any of the load rollers must be replaced, make a note of the arrangement of the shims. 7. Reverse this procedure for carriage installation.

Sideshift Carriage Repair REMOVE 1. Relieve hydraulic pressure to the sideshift cylinder by moving sideshift lever in both directions several times. See Figure 10.

2. Disconnect hydraulic lines from sideshift cylinder. Put caps and plugs on open lines and cylinder ports.

Figure 10. Sideshift Carriage

10


4000 SRM 736

Sideshift Carriage Repair Legend for Figure 10

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

CAPSCREWS LOWER HOOK MOBILE FRAME LOWER PADS UPPER PADS GREASE FITTINGS

3. Remove sideshift carriage as described below: a. Put weight on the forks so carriage is stable and will not fall when it is disconnected from the mast. b. Lower carriage and forks on blocks so lift chains become loose.

WARNING When disconnecting the lift chains, keep control of the ends. Use wire to temporarily connect the ends of the lift chains to the mast. This procedure will prevent the lift chains from falling and causing an injury or damage. c. Remove pin from each chain anchor at the carriage. Disconnect lift chains from carriage. See Figure 9.

DISASSEMBLE 1. Remove capscrews from lower hooks and remove the lower hooks. See Figure 10. 2. Lift the mobile frame from the bottom and rotate it forward to free it from the fixed frame. 3. Remove upper and lower pads from the fixed frame. 4. If damaged, remove grease fittings from the fixed frame. 5. Remove sideshift cylinder rods from each end of the cylinder body.

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

CYLINDER ROD SNAP RING ROD SCRAPER ROD BUSHING SEAL FIXED FRAME

6. Remove snap rings from each end of the cylinder body and remove rod scrapers, rod bushings, and seals from cylinder body.

ASSEMBLE 1. Lubricate with clean hydraulic oil and install seals, rod bushings, and rod scrapers into the cylinder body and secure with snap rings. See Figure 10. 2. Install cylinder rods into each end of the cylinder body. 3. Install grease fittings into the fixed frame if removed. 4. Install upper and lower pads onto the fixed frame. 5. Install the mobile frame onto the fixed frame by hooking it at the top of the fixed frame first and lowering it to the bottom. 6. Install lower hooks and capscrews. Tighten the capscrews to 78 N•m (58 lbf ft).

INSTALL 1. To install the sideshift carriage onto the truck, reverse the procedure for removal as described in section Carriage Repair. 2. Remove protective caps and plugs from hydraulic lines and cylinder ports. Connect lines to the sideshift cylinder.

11


Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Repair

4000 SRM 736

Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Repair REMOVE, H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) MODEL LIFT TRUCKS 1. Fully lower the inner weldment. If mast must be disassembled, remove forks and carriage as described in sections Fork Replacement and Carriage Repair. 2. Connect a lifting device to all top crossmembers of the mast weldments (see Figure 5). Make sure lifting device will hold the weight of the mast. Raise lifting device so the mast has stability. 3. Remove anchor pins for tilt cylinders at the mast (see Figure 27). Use the hydraulic system to retract tilt cylinders. 4. Disconnect hydraulic line for the mast at the lowering control valve (see Figure 11). Disconnect breather lines for the cylinders. Put plugs in the open lines. 5. Remove capscrews for the pivot pins at the frame of the lift truck (see Figure 27). Use a lifting device to move mast from the lift truck. Put mast in a position so crossmembers are on the floor.

REMOVE, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), AND E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) MODEL LIFT TRUCKS 1. Fully lower inner weldment. If mast must be disassembled, remove forks and carriage as described in sections Fork Replacement and Carriage Repair. 2. Connect a lifting device to all top crossmembers of the mast weldments (see Figure 5). Make sure lifting device will hold the weight of the mast. Raise lifting device so the mast has stability. 3. Remove tilt pins, tilt pin retainers, anchor pin capscrews, and washers for tilt cylinders at the mast. Use hydraulic system to retract tilt cylinders. See Figure 12. 4. Disconnect hydraulic line for the mast at the lowering control valve. Disconnect breather lines for lift cylinders. Put plugs in open lines. See Figure 13. 5. Remove the four capscrews holding the left and right mast mounting hangers to the drive axle. Use a lifting device to move mast from lift truck. Put mast in a position so the crossmembers are on the floor.

Legend for Figure 11 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

12

OUTER WELDMENT INNER WELDMENT LIFT CYLINDER LIFT CHAIN CHAIN SHEAVE CHAIN ANCHOR LOAD ROLLER SHIMS SNAP RING STRIP BEARING SHIMS FITTING

13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.

CLAMP CLAMP CLAMP HOSE VELOCITY FUSE BRACKET HOUSING FITTING LOWERING CONTROL VALVE FITTING FITTING


4000 SRM 736

Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Repair

Figure 11. Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) Model Lift Trucks

13


Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Repair

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

TILT PIN ANCHOR PIN CAPSCREWS CAPSCREW AND WASHER LUBE FITTINGS MAST MOUNTING HANGER

6. MAST MOUNTING CAP 7. MAST BUSHING 8. MAST MOUNTING CAPSCREWS 9. TILT PIN RETAINER

4000 SRM 736

10. ROD END 11. TILT CYLINDER ASSEMBLY 12. CAPSCREW AND WASHER FOR MAIN LIFT CYLINDER RESTRAINT BRACKET

Figure 12. Mast Mounting and Tilt Cylinder Removal S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) Model Lift Trucks Legend for Figure 13 A. INNER MAST

B. OUTER MAST

C. OUTER MAST WITH MAIN LIFT CYLINDERS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25.

14

INNER MAST SNAP RING MAIN LIFT CYLINDER LIFT CHAIN HOSES WASHER SHIMS LOAD ROLLER BEARING STRIP

O-RING OUTER MAST CHAIN SHEAVE BEARING BRACKET LOCKWASHER CAPSCREW FITTING NUT

SPACER CONTROL VALVE HOUSING LOWERING CONTROL VALVE CLAMP COTTER PIN CHAIN ANCHOR PIN


4000 SRM 736

Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Repair

Figure 13. Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) Lift Truck Models

15


Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Repair

DISASSEMBLE 1. Clean area around hydraulic fittings for the lift cylinders. Disconnect fittings at the lift cylinders and put caps on open lines. See Figure 11 and Figure 13. 2. Remove capscrews, washers, and brackets that mount the bottom of each lift cylinder. 3. Slide inner weldment from outer weldment approximately 30 cm (12 in.) to disengage lift cylinders from inner weldment. Remove lift cylinders from the mounts at the bottom of outer weldment. 4. Slide inner weldment from the bottom of outer weldment approximately 30 cm (12 in.). Remove strip bearings. Remove load rollers from both weldments. Make a note of the shim arrangement. The shim arrangement will be approximately the same during assembly procedures. 5. Slide inner weldment halfway out of the top of outer weldment. Connect a crane to the center of inner weldment. See Figure 14. Slide inner weldment out of the outer weldment until stub shafts are in the notches of the outer weldment. Remove inner weldment from outer weldment.

4000 SRM 736 lift trucks, remove bushings and plugs at the mast mounting hangers. See Figure 12. 8. Remove and disassemble chain sheaves as necessary for cleaning and repair.

CLEAN AND INSPECT CAUTION DO NOT use steam or high-pressure water to clean the load rollers or the lift chains. Steam and high-pressure water can remove the lubrication from the bearings in the load rollers. Water in the bearings of the sheaves and the link pins of chains can also shorten the service life of these parts. 1. Inspect sheaves and load rollers for wear or damage. DO NOT use steam to clean lift chains, sheaves, or load rollers. The bearings in the sheaves and load rollers are sealed and lubricated.

WARNING Commercial cleaning solvents may be flammable and toxic and can cause severe skin irritation. When using commercial cleaning solvents, always comply with solvent manufacturer’s recommended safety precautions.

WARNING Never replace just the worn section of a chain. Replace the complete chain. Never replace just one chain of a chain pair. Replace both chains.

Figure 14. Inner Weldment 6. For H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) model lift trucks, remove snap rings and bushings at the mast mounts. See Figure 27. 7. For S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) model

16

2. Clean lift chains with solvent. Inspect lift chains for wear or damage. See Figure 15. A lift chain becomes longer when it is worn. If a section of chain is 3% longer than a similar section of new chain, the chain is worn and must be replaced. If a chain scale is available, check lift chains as shown in Figure 15. If a chain scale is not available measure 20 links of chain. Measure from the center of a pin to the center of another pin 20 pitches away. Compare the length with the chart in Figure 15. Replace chain if the length of 20 links of the worn section is more than the maximum wear limit. Lubricate chains with SAE 30 engine oil. The best procedure is to remove lift chains from lift truck and soak them in oil.


4000 SRM 736

Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Repair

NOTE: THE INSTRUCTIONS FOR MEASURING CHAIN WEAR ARE SHOWN ON THE CHAIN WEAR SCALE. Pitch

25.4 mm (1.00 in.) 31.8 mm (1.25 in.) 1. 2. 3. 4.

Total Length of 20 Links (Pitch) of New Chain

Wear Limit The Maximum Length of 20 Links

508.0 mm (20.0 in.) 635.0 mm (25.0 in.)

523.3 mm (20.6 in.) 654.1 mm (25.8 in.)

WORN PIN CRACKS EDGE WEAR HOLE WEAR

5. 6. 7. 8.

LOOSE LEAVES DAMAGED PIN RUST CHAIN WEAR SCALE

Figure 15. Lift Chains Check

ASSEMBLE NOTE: The shims for the load rollers keep the weldments parallel and provide correct clearance. During assembly, the location of the shims will be approximately the same as they were before disassembly. Check clearance and adjust shims for wear or changes because of repairs. Strip bearings are also adjusted by using shims. See Mast Adjustments in this section for the instructions to make the necessary adjustments. 1. Connect a lifting device to the center of inner weldment (see Figure 14). Put stub shafts through notches in the outer weldment. Slide inner weldment into the outer weldment so stub

shafts are seen at the top and bottom of the weldments. 2. Install strip bearings and shims on the outer weldment. Apply grease to bearing surface. See Figure 16. 3. Install the load rollers and shims on both weldments. Check the clearance of the load rollers and strip bearings as described in Mast Adjustments and Carriage Adjustment. 4. For H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) lift trucks, install the bushings and snap rings into the mast mounts. See Figure 27.

17


Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Repair

4000 SRM 736 18 N•m (159 lbf in). Connect hydraulic lines and fittings between lowering control valve and lift cylinders. 8. Install chain sheaves and brackets. Connect lift chains to chain anchors. Attach wires between the ends of the lift chains and crossmember to control lift chains during installation.

INSTALL, H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) LIFT TRUCK MODELS 1. Install pivot pins in the mounts in the outer weldment (see Figure 27). Make sure grease fittings are toward the center of the lift truck. Connect a lifting device to the top of the mast assembly. Make sure all weldments are fastened together. Make sure the chains do not damage any of the hydraulic lines or other parts. 1. STRIP BEARING 2. SHIMS

3. TOP OF OUTER WELDMENT

Figure 16. Strip Bearings 5. For S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) lift trucks, install bushings and plugs until bushing edge is flush with mast mounting hangers. See Figure 12. 6. Install lift cylinders. Make sure spacers, when installed, are in their original positions at the bottom mounts. Install capscrews, washers, and brackets at the bottom of each cylinder. Tighten capscrews to 38 N•m (28 lbf ft). Push inner weldment to engage the rods of the lift cylinders. Install washers and snap rings at the top of the lift cylinders. Install lift cylinder clamps to brackets at the top of the outer weldment. Tighten nuts to 18 N•m (159 lbf in). 7. Install lowering control valve on outer weldment. Tighten capscrews for lowering control valve to

18

2. Raise mast assembly to a vertical position. Move mast assembly into position on the lift truck. 3. Make sure the pivot pins are in the correct position, then install capscrews (see Figure 27). Tighten capscrews to 550 N•m (405 lbf ft). 4. Connect hydraulic line to the mast assembly. Install header hoses as shown in Figure 17. 5. Connect tilt cylinders to the outer weldment (see Figure 27). Install bushings, pins, and anchor pins. The capscrew on the rod end of the tilt cylinder must be toward the lift truck. The capscrew for anchor pin retainer must be toward the outside. Tighten both capscrews to 73 N•m (54 lbf ft). 6. Adjust lift chains, carriage, and tilt cylinders as described in Lift Chain Adjustments, Carriage Adjustment, and Tilt Cylinder Stroke and Backward Tilt Angle Adjustment.


4000 SRM 736

Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Repair

A. REAR VIEW

B. FRONT VIEW

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

HYDRAULIC HOSE HYDRAULIC HOSE CLAMP CLAMP BRACKET HOSE SHEAVE WASHER

SNAP RING CLAMP HEX HEAD BOLT HEX HEAD BOLT NUT FITTING

Figure 17. Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Header Hoses H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) Lift Truck Models

19


Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Repair

4000 SRM 736

INSTALL, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), AND E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) LIFT TRUCK MODELS

3. Connect the tilt cylinders to the outer weldment (see Figure 12). Install the tilt pins, tilt pin retainers, capscrews, and washers. Capscrew for anchor pin retainer must be toward the outside. Tighten both capscrews to 77 N•m (57 lbf ft).

1. Connect a lifting device to the top of the mast assembly. Make sure all of the weldments are fastened together. Make sure the chains do not damage any of the hydraulic lines or other parts. See Figure 13.

4. Secure mast assembly to lift truck by installing the two mast mounting caps onto mast mounting hangers. Insert capscrews and tighten to 320 N•m (236 lbf ft). See Figure 12.

2. Install new bushings in the mast mounting hangers. Raise the mast assembly to a vertical position. Place mast mounting hangers on the drive axle and lift mast assembly into position on lift truck. See Figure 12. NOTE: When installing tilt cylinders onto lift truck, be sure the lube fittings face the front of the truck. See Figure 12.

5. Connect hydraulic lines to mast assembly. Install header hoses as shown in Figure 18. 6. Adjust lift chains, carriage, and tilt cylinders as described in sections Lift Chain Adjustments, Carriage Adjustment, and Tilt Cylinder Stroke and Backward Tilt Angle Adjustment.

Legend for Figure 18 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

20

HOSES CLAMP SPACER STUBSHAFT SHEAVE CAPSCREW LOCKWASHER GROMMET NUT

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

FITTING TUBE PLATE WASHER NUT STRAIN RELIEF BRACKET HOSE REEL


4000 SRM 736

Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Repair

Figure 18. Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Header Hoses S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) Lift Truck Models 21


Two-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift Repair

4000 SRM 736

Two-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift Repair Remove lift cylinders from the mounts at the bottom of the outer weldment. Make a note of the spacers that are installed at the bottom of the lift cylinders.

NOTE: The information in this section is for S3.505.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) lift truck models only.

REMOVE Remove the two-stage mast with full free-lift using the same procedures described in section Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Repair, Remove, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) Model Lift Trucks.

DISASSEMBLE 1. Clean area around the hydraulic fittings for the lift cylinders. Disconnect fittings at the lift cylinders and put caps on open lines. See Figure 19. 2. Remove pins for lift chains at the chain anchors and remove lift chains. Disconnect hydraulic lines for the free-lift cylinder and put caps on open lines. Remove capscrews holding free-lift cylinder to the inner weldment. Remove free-lift cylinder. 3. Remove snap rings and washers from the top of each lift cylinder. Remove capscrew, washer, and spacer at the mount for each lift cylinder.

5. Slide inner weldment from the bottom of the outer weldment approximately 30 cm (12 in.). Remove strip bearings. Remove load rollers from both weldments. Make a note of the shim arrangement. Shim arrangement will be approximately the same during assembly procedures. 6. Slide inner weldment halfway out of the top of the outer weldment. Connect a lifting device to the center of inner weldment. See Figure 14. Slide inner weldment out of the outer weldment until stub shafts are in the notches of the outer weldment. Remove inner weldment from the outer weldment. 7. Remove bushings and plugs from mast mounting hangers. See Figure 12. 8. Remove and disassemble chain sheaves as necessary for cleaning and repair.

CLEAN AND INSPECT Clean and inspect parts of the free-lift mast using the same procedures outlined in Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Repair, Clean and Inspect.

4. Slide inner weldment from outer weldment approximately 30 cm (12 in.) to disengage lift cylinders from the inner weldment. See Figure 14. Legend for Figure 19 A. INNER MAST AND FREE-LIFT

B. OUTER MAST AND MAIN LIFT

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29.

22

OUTER WELDMENT LOAD ROLLER SNAP RING SHIM O-RING TUBE MAIN LIFT CYLINDER (RH) MAIN LIFT CYLINDER (LH) WASHER BEARING STRIP FITTING CAPSCREW BRACKET LOWERING CONTROL VALVE HOUSING LOWERING CONTROL VALVE

NUT LOCKWASHER HOSE CLAMP PIN CHAIN GUARD CROSSHEAD FREE-LIFT CYLINDER LIFT CHAIN VELOCITY FUSE COTTER PIN CHAIN ANCHOR INNER MAST CHAIN SHEAVE


4000 SRM 736

Two-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift Repair

Figure 19. Two-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift Repair S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) Model Lift Trucks

23


Two-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift Repair

4000 SRM 736

ASSEMBLE NOTE: Shims for the load rollers keep the weldments parallel and provide correct clearance. During assembly, the location of the shims will be approximately the same as they were before disassembly. Check clearance and adjust shims for wear or changes because of repairs. Strip bearings are also adjusted by using shims. See the Mast Adjustments in this section for instructions to make the necessary adjustments. 1. Connect a lifting device to the center of the inner weldment (see Figure 14). Put stub shafts through the notches in the outer weldment. Slide inner weldment into the outer weldment so stub shafts are seen at the top and bottom of the weldments. 2. Install strip bearings and the shims on the outer weldment. Apply grease to bearing surface. See Figure 16. 3. Install load rollers and shims on both weldments. Check clearance of the load rollers and strip bearings as described in Mast Adjustments and Carriage Adjustment. 4. Install bushings and plugs onto mast mounting hangers. See Figure 12.

5. Install chain sheave assembly on free-lift cylinder. Install free-lift cylinder on inner weldment. 6. Install lift cylinders. Make sure spacers, when installed, are in their original positions at bottom mounts. Push inner weldment to engage rods of lift cylinders. Install washers and snap rings at top of lift cylinders. Install capscrews, spacers, and washers at lift cylinder mounts. Tighten capscrews at mounts to 53 N•m (40 lbf ft). 7. Install lowering control valve on outer weldment. Connect hydraulic lines and fittings between lowering control valve, lift cylinders, and free-lift cylinder. 8. Connect lift chains to chain anchors at mount on inner weldment. Attach wires between ends of lift chains and bottom crossmember to control lift chains during installation.

INSTALL Install two-stage mast with full free-lift using the same procedures described in Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Repair, Install, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) Lift Truck Models. See Figure 19 and Figure 20.

Legend for Figure 20 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

24

HYDRAULIC HOSES CHANNEL BRACKET CLAMP WASHER HOSE SHEAVE SNAP RING PIN TUBE STRAP CLAMP

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

CAPSCREW PAD LOCKWASHER FITTING NUT STRAIN RELIEF HOSE REEL FITTING AND O-RING PLATE


4000 SRM 736

Two-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift Repair

Figure 20. Two-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift Header Hoses S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) Lift Trucks 25


Three-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift Repair

4000 SRM 736

Three-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift Repair REMOVE Remove the three-stage mast with full free-lift (FFL) using the same procedures as described in Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Repair, Remove, H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) Model Lift Trucks or Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Repair, Remove, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS

(E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) Model Lift Trucks depending on your model of lift truck.

DISASSEMBLE 1. Clean area around the hydraulic fittings for the lift cylinders. Disconnect fittings at the lift cylinders and put caps on open lines. See Figure 21, Figure 22, and Figure 23.

Figure 21. Three-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) Lift Truck Models

26


4000 SRM 736

Three-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift Repair Legend for Figure 21

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

OUTER WELDMENT INTERMEDIATE WELDMENT INNER WELDMENT MAIN LIFT CYLINDER LIFT CHAIN CHAIN SHEAVE CHAIN ANCHOR LOAD ROLLER SHIMS SNAP RING BEARING STRIP SHIM FITTING CLAMP HOSE CLAMP FITTING CLAMP BRACKET

2. Remove the pins for the lift chains at the chain anchors on the inner weldment. Remove chain sheave assembly from the free-lift cylinder. Disconnect hydraulic lines for the free-lift cylinder. Remove capscrews and clamps that hold free-lift cylinder to the inner weldment. Remove free-lift cylinder. 3. Disconnect and remove lift chains between the outer weldment and the inner weldment. Slide inner weldment from the bottom of the intermediate weldment approximately 30 cm (12 in.). Remove strip bearings. Remove load rollers from the inner and intermediate weldments. Make a note of the shim arrangement. Shim arrangement will be approximately the same during assembly procedures. 4. Slide inner weldment halfway out of the top of the intermediate weldment. Connect a lifting device to the center of inner weldment. See Figure 14. Slide the inner weldment out of the intermediate weldment.

20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38.

FITTING FITTING HOUSING, VALVE FITTING HOSE LOWERING CONTROL VALVE HOSE VELOCITY FUSE BRACKET SHIM FREE-LIFT CYLINDER CLAMP VELOCITY FUSE CROSSHEAD PIN HOSE HOSE SHEAVE STUB SHAFT CAPSCREW disengage lift cylinders from the intermediate weldment. Remove the lift cylinders from the mounts at the bottom of the outer weldment.

8. Slide intermediate weldment from the bottom of the outer weldment approximately 30 cm (12 in.). Remove strip bearings and load rollers. Make a note of the shim arrangement. Shim arrangement will be approximately the same during assembly procedures. 9. Slide intermediate weldment halfway out of the top of the outer weldment. Connect a lifting device to the center of the intermediate weldment. See Figure 14. Slide intermediate weldment out of the outer weldment until stub shafts are in the notches of the outer weldment. Remove intermediate weldment from the outer weldment. 10. For H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) lift trucks, remove snap rings and bushings at the mast mounts. See Figure 27.

5. Disconnect hydraulic lines from the lift cylinders. Remove snap rings and washers from the top of each lift cylinder. Remove cylinder clamps from the brackets at the top of each lift cylinder.

11. For S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 and E3.50-5.50XL, (E70-120XL 3) (C098), E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) lift truck models, remove bushings and plugs at the mast mounting hangers. See Figure 12.

6. Remove capscrews, washers, and brackets that mount the bottom of each cylinder.

12. Remove and disassemble sheaves and load rollers as necessary for cleaning and repair.

7. Slide intermediate weldment from the outer weldment approximately 30 cm (12 in.) to

27


Three-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift Repair

4000 SRM 736

NOTE: OUTER MAST ASSEMBLY SHOWN. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

OUTER MAST STUB SHAFT LOAD ROLLER SHIM SNAP RING BEARING STRIP O-RING CHAIN ANCHOR PIN COTTER PIN NUT LIFT CHAIN

13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.

MAIN LIFT CYLINDERS VELOCITY FUSE FITTING WASHER BRACKET LOCKWASHER CAPSCREW CLAMP HOSES LOWERING CONTROL VALVE HOUSING LOWERING CONTROL VALVE

Figure 22. Three-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) Lift Truck Models

28


4000 SRM 736

Three-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift Repair

A. INNER MAST

B. INTERMEDIATE MAST

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26.

INTERMEDIATE MAST INNER MAST STUB SHAFT LOAD ROLLER SHIM SNAP RING BEARING STRIP O-RING SPACER CHAIN SHEAVE BRACKET LOCKWASHER CAPSCREW

HOSE SHEAVE FREE-LIFT CYLINDER VELOCITY FUSE WASHER CROSSHEAD PIN CLAMP NUT HOSE CHAIN ANCHOR COTTER PIN LIFT CHAIN CHAIN GUARD

Figure 23. Three-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) Lift Truck Models

29


Three-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift Repair

CLEAN AND INSPECT Clean and inspect the parts of the three-stage mast using the same procedures as described in Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Repair, Clean and Inspect.

ASSEMBLE NOTE: Shims for load rollers keep weldments parallel and provide correct clearance. During assembly, location of the shims will be approximately the same as they were before disassembly. Check clearance and adjust shims for wear or changes because of repairs. Strip bearings are also adjusted by using shims. See Mast Adjustments procedure in this section for instructions to make the necessary adjustments. See Figure 21, Figure 22, and Figure 23. 1. Connect a lifting device to the center of the intermediate weldment (see Figure 14). Put stub shafts through the notches in the outer weldment. Slide intermediate weldment into the outer weldment so that stub shafts are seen at the top and bottom of the weldments. 2. Install strip bearings and shims on the outer weldment. Apply grease to bearing surface. See Figure 16. 3. Install load rollers and shims on both weldments. Check the clearance of the load rollers and strip bearings as described in Mast Adjustments and Carriage Adjustment. 4. For H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) lift trucks, install bushings and snap rings into the mast mounts.

4000 SRM 736 7. Install chain sheaves on the intermediate weldment. 8. Connect lift chains to the chain anchors at the bottom of the inner weldment. Use wire to hold the other end of the lift chains to the top of the outer weldment. 9. Connect a lifting device to the center of the inner weldment (see Figure 14). Put stub shafts through the notches in the intermediate weldment. Slide inner weldment into the intermediate weldment so stub shafts are seen at the top and bottom of the weldments. 10. Install strip bearings and shims on the outer weldment. Apply grease to bearing surface. See Figure 16. 11. Install load rollers and shims on both weldments. Check clearance of the load rollers and strip bearings as described in Mast Adjustments and Carriage Adjustment. 12. Connect lift chains to the mounts at the top of the outer weldment. 13. Install chain sheave assembly on the free-lift cylinder. Install free-lift cylinder on the inner weldment. 14. Connect lift chains to the chain anchors at the mount on the inner weldment. Attach wires between the ends of the lift chains and the bottom crossmember to control the lift chains during installation. 15. Install lowering control valve on the outer weldment. Tighten capscrews for the lowering control valve to 18 N•m (159 lbf in). Connect hydraulic lines and fittings between the lowering control valve and lift cylinders.

5. For S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) lift trucks, install bushings and plugs until edge bushing lip is flush with mast mounting hangers.

INSTALL

6. Install main lift cylinders. Make sure the spacers, when installed, are in their original positions at the bottom mounts. Install capscrews, washers, and brackets at the bottom of each cylinder. Tighten capscrews to 38 N•m (28 lbf ft). Push the inner weldment to engage the rods of the lift cylinders. Install washers and snap rings at the top of the lift cylinders. Install cylinder clamps to the brackets at the top of the outer weldment. Tighten nuts to 18 N•m (159 lbf in).

Install the three-stage mast using the procedures as described in Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Repair, Install, H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) Lift Truck Models or Two-Stage Mast With Limited Free-Lift Repair, Install, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) Lift Truck Models depending on your model of lift truck. Also, see the arrangement of the header hoses in Figure 24 or Figure 25.

30


4000 SRM 736

Three-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift Repair

Figure 24. Three-Stage Mast Header Hoses H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) Model Lift Trucks

31


Three-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift Repair

4000 SRM 736

Legend for Figure 24 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

BRACKET (LH) PIN (SPRING) SHEAVE WASHER SNAP RING BRACKET (RH) FITTING FITTING FITTING NUT NUT HEX HEAD BOLT BRACKET (RH) CLAMP HEX HEAD BOLT BRACKET NUT HEX HEAD BOLT

19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36.

CLAMP CLAMP HOSE (RH), THREE-FUNCTION HOSE (LH), THREE-FUNCTION HEX HEAD BOLT BRACKET HEX HEAD BOLT HEX HEAD BOLT LOCKWASHER WASHER BRACKET (RH) HEX HEAD BOLT BRACKET (LH) HOSE (RH), FOUR-FUNCTION HOSE (LH), FOUR-FUNCTION BRACKET (LH) CLAMP SPACER

Legend for Figure 25 NOTE: FOR LIFT TRUCK MODELS E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) THE HOSE HEADER ARRANGEMENT SHOWN IN FIGURE 25 DOES NOT COVER MAST HEIGHTS OF 5240 mm (17 ft) AND 5500 mm (18 ft). SEE FIGURE 26. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

32

HYDRAULIC HOSES NUT BRACKET HOSE SHEAVE WASHER SNAP RING CLAMP CAPSCREW

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

LOCKWASHER PIN FITTING SPACER STRAIN RELIEF HOSE REEL PLATE


4000 SRM 736

Three-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift Repair

Figure 25. Three-Stage Mast Header Hoses S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) and E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098) and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) Model Lift Trucks

33


Three-Stage Mast With Full Free-Lift Repair

4000 SRM 736

Figure 26. Three-Stage Mast Header Hoses E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) Model Lift Trucks

34


4000 SRM 736

Lift and Tilt System Leak Check Legend for Figure 26

NOTE: HOSE HEADER ARRANGEMENT SHOWN FOR LIFT TRUCK MODELS E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70120Z, E100ZS) (D098) WITH MAST HEIGHTS OF 5240 mm (17 ft) AND 5500 mm (18 ft) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

SNAP RING WASHER SHEAVE CLAMP CAPSCREW HOSE NUT BRACKET LOCKWASHER

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

FITTING O-RING MOUNTING BLOCK HOSE REEL PLATE FLOW VALVE PIN STRAIN RELIEF SPACER

Mast Operation Check 1. Check for leaks in the hydraulic system. Check condition of hydraulic hoses and tubes.

WARNING Lower the lift mechanism completely. Never allow anyone under a raised carriage. Do not put any part of your body in or through the lift mechanism unless all parts of the mast are completely lowered and the engine is STOPPED. Before making any repairs, use blocks and chains on the mast weldments and carriage so they cannot move. Make sure the moving parts are attached to a part that does not move. Do not try to locate hydraulic leaks by putting hands on pressurized hydraulic components. Hydraulic oil can be injected into the body by pressure.

NOTE: Some parts of the mast move at different speeds during raising and lowering. 2. Slowly raise and lower the mast several times without a load. Mast components must raise and lower smoothly in correct sequence. Carriage raises first, then inner weldment and intermediate weldment (three-stage masts only). 3. Inner weldments and the carriage must lower completely. 4. Check that controls for the attachment operate the functions of the attachment. See symbols by each of the controls. Make sure all hydraulic lines are connected correctly and do not leak.

Lift and Tilt System Leak Check LIFT SYSTEM WARNING Never allow anyone under a raised carriage. Do not put any part of your body through the lift mechanism unless all parts of the mast are completely lowered and the engine is stopped. Before making any repairs, use blocks and chains on the mast weldments and carriage so they cannot move. Make sure the moving parts are attached to the parts that cannot move. Do not try to find hydraulic leaks by putting your hands on hydraulic components under

pressure. Hydraulic oil can be injected into the body by pressure. During the test procedures for the hydraulic system, fasten the load to the carriage with chains to prevent it from falling. Keep all personnel away from the lift truck during the tests. NOTE: The procedures below apply to H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) lift truck models. 1. Operate hydraulic system. Put a capacity load on the forks, and raise and lower load several times. Lower load and tilt mast forward and backward several times. Check for leaks.

35


Lift and Tilt System Leak Check 2. Raise carriage and load 1 m (3 ft). If carriage lowers slowly with control valve in a NEUTRAL position, there are leaks inside the hydraulic system. Maximum speed the carriage is allowed to lower is 50 mm (2 in.) per 10 minutes when hydraulic oil is 30 C (90 F). If oil temperature is 70 C (160 F), maximum speed that the carriage can lower is 150 mm (6 in.) per 10 minutes. 3. Check lift cylinder for internal leaks. Remove load from the forks. Install a gate valve in the supply line between main control valve and mast. Put a capacity load on forks again. Raise carriage 1 m (3 ft). Close gate valve. If carriage or mast weldments lower slowly, seals in the lift cylinders are leaking. 4. If mast does not move, open gate valve and check movement again. If mast moves forward when gate valve is open, check for leaks in hydraulic lines and fittings. If no leaks are found, check main control valve for damage. Remove load from the forks. NOTE: The procedures below apply to S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) lift truck models. 1. Operate hydraulic system. Put a capacity load on forks and raise and lower load several times. Lower load and tilt mast forward and backward several times. Check for leaks. 2. Raise carriage and load 2.5 m (8 ft). If carriage lowers slowly with control valve in a NEUTRAL position, there are leaks in the hydraulic system. Maximum speed the carriage is allowed to lower is 63 mm (2.5 in.) per 10 minutes when hydraulic oil is 30 C (90 F). If oil temperature is 60 C (140 F), maximum speed the carriage can lower is 146 mm (5.7 in.) per 10 minutes. 3. Check lift cylinder for internal leaks. Remove load from forks. Install a gate valve in supply line between main control valve and mast. Put a capacity load on forks again. Raise carriage 2.5 m (8 ft). Close gate valve. If carriage or mast weldments lower slowly, seals in the lift cylinders are leaking. 4. If mast does not move, open gate valve and check movement again. If mast moves forward when gate valve is open, check for leaks in hydraulic lines and fittings. If no leaks are found, check

36

4000 SRM 736 main control valve for damage. from forks.

Remove load

TILT SYSTEM WARNING Never allow anyone under a raised carriage. Do not put any part of your body through the lift mechanism unless all parts of the mast are completely lowered and the engine is stopped. Before making any repairs, use blocks and chains on the mast weldments and carriage so that they cannot move. Make sure the moving parts are attached to the parts that cannot move. Do not try to find hydraulic leaks by putting your hands on hydraulic components under pressure. Hydraulic oil can be injected into the body by pressure. During the test procedures for the hydraulic system, fasten the load to the carriage with chains to prevent it from falling. Keep all personnel away from the lift truck during the tests. NOTE: The procedures below apply to H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) lift truck models. 1. Put a capacity load on forks. Slowly tilt mast forward. If mast continues to slowly tilt forward when control valve is in a NEUTRAL position, there are leaks in the hydraulic system. For maximum speed, the mast is allowed to tilt forward when there are internal leaks in lift system is 13 mm (0.50 in.) per 10 minutes (measured at the tilt cylinder). This maximum speed is measured when hydraulic oil is 30 C (90 F). If oil temperature is 70 C (160 F), maximum speed is 39 mm (1.5 in.) per 10 minutes. 2. If leak rate is greater than specifications, remove the load from mast. Install a gate valve between the port at the front of the tilt cylinder and the hydraulic line. Put load on forks again. Close the gate valve. If mast tilts slowly forward, cylinder seals are leaking. 3. If mast does not move, open gate valve and check movement again. If mast moves forward when gate valve is open, check for leaks in hydraulic lines and fittings. If no leaks are found, check


4000 SRM 736

Tilt Cylinder Stroke and Backward Tilt Angle Adjustment

main control valve for damage. from the forks.

Remove load

NOTE: The procedures below apply to S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) lift truck models. 1. Put a capacity load on forks. Slowly tilt mast forward. If mast continues to slowly tilt forward when control valve is in a NEUTRAL position, there are leaks inside the hydraulic system. 2. The maximum speed that mast is allowed to tilt forward when there are internal leaks in lift system is 16 mm (0.63 in.) per 10 minutes (measured at the tilt cylinder). This maximum speed is measured when hydraulic oil is 30 C (86 F). If oil temperature is 60 C (140 F), maximum speed is 73 mm (2.9 in.) per 10 minutes. 3. If leak rate is greater than the specifications listed in Step 2 or in Table 1, lower mast and remove load from mast. Install a gate valve between port at the front of tilt cylinder and hydraulic line. Put load on forks again. Close gate valve. If mast tilts slowly forward, the cylinder seals are leaking.

4. If mast does not move, open gate valve and check movement again. If mast moves forward when gate valve is open, check for leaks in hydraulic lines and fittings. If no leaks are found, check main control valve for damage. 5. Remove load from forks. Table 1. Tilt Cylinder Leak Check Specifications, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) Lift Truck Models Hydraulic Oil Temperature

Cylinder Stroke

20 C (68 F)

1.1 mm/min (0.043 in./min)

30 C (86 F)

1.6 mm/min (0.063 in./min)

40 C (104 F)

3.0 mm/min (0.118 in./min)

50 C (122 F)

4.9 mm/min (0.193 in./min)

60 C (140 F)

7.3 mm/min (0.287 in./min)

Tilt Cylinder Stroke and Backward Tilt Angle Adjustment Check tilt cylinder stroke by slowly tilting mast fully forward and backward several times. Both tilt cylinders must stop their stroke at the same time. There must be no twist in the mast weldments. See Figure 27 and Figure 28. 1. Adjust the tilt cylinders as follows: a. Tilt mast backward slowly until one rod is against its stop. On the opposite cylinder, loosen capscrews on the rod end. Use a wrench and turn the cylinder rod out until both rods stop at the same time. Legend for Figure 27 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

TILT CYLINDER MAST ROD END BUSHING PIN RETAINER, PIN

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

CAPSCREW LOCKWASHER NUT PIVOT PIN SNAP RING BUSHING

Figure 27. Tilt Cylinder Arrangement H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) Lift Truck Models

37


Tilt Cylinder Stroke and Backward Tilt Angle Adjustment

(H70-120XM) lift trucks and 90 N•m (66 lbf ft) for S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) lift trucks.

b. Repeat procedure to make sure rods stop at same time within 1 mm (0.04 in.). Check the tilt angles are correct as specified on Nameplate of lift truck. c. Tighten capscrews on rod end to 66 to 73 N•m (49 to 54 lbf ft) for H3.50-5.50XM

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

TILT PIN ANCHOR PIN CAPSCREWS CAPSCREW AND WASHER LUBE FITTINGS MAST MOUNTING HANGER MAST MOUNTING CAP MAST BUSHING

4000 SRM 736

8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

MAST MOUNTING CAPSCREWS TILT PIN RETAINER ROD END TILT CYLINDER ASSEMBLY CAPSCREW AND WASHER FOR MAIN LIFT CYLINDER RESTRAINT BRACKET

Figure 28. Tilt Cylinder Arrangement S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM), E3.50-5.50XL 3 (E70-120XL 3) (C098), and E3.50-5.50XL, E4.50XLS (E70-120Z, E100ZS) (D098) Lift Truck Models

38


4000 SRM 736

Lift Chain Adjustments

Lift Chain Adjustments WARNING When working on or near the mast, see Safety Procedures When Working Near Mast in this section. Never allow anyone under a raised carriage. Do not put any part of your body in or through the lift mechanism unless all parts of the mast are completely lowered and the engine is STOPPED.

NOTE: Prior to performing adjustment procedures, make sure the forklift truck is parked on a level surface and the mast is in the vertical position. 2. Adjust chain anchors which support the carriage until the bottom of the fork heel is 6 ±3 mm (0.25 ±0.12 in.) above the floor level. See Figure 29.

Do not try to find hydraulic leaks by putting your hand on hydraulic components under pressure. Hydraulic oil can be injected into the body by the pressure. During test procedures for the hydraulic system, fasten the load to the carriage with chains to prevent it from falling. Keep all personnel away from the lift truck during the tests. When lift chains are correctly adjusted: • Tension will be the same on each chain of the chain set. Check tension by pushing on both chains at the same time. • The chain length will be correct. • Chains must travel freely through complete cycle. NOTE: When chain adjustments are complete, make sure threads on the nuts of the chain anchors are completely engaged. Make sure all of the adjustment is not removed from the chain anchors. Chain anchors must be able to move on their mounting. 1. When adjusting lift chains on forklift trucks equipped with either pin- or hook-type forks installed, go to Step 2. If forklift truck is normally equipped with a hook-type carriage and has an attachment without forks, go to Step 3. If forklift truck is normally equipped with a pin-type carriage and has an attachment without forks, go to Step 4.

1. 2. 3. 4.

MAST CARRIAGE FORK HEEL OF FORK IS 6 ±3 mm (0.25 ±0.12 in.) ABOVE FLOOR LEVEL. Figure 29. Lift Chain Adjustment, Hook or Pin-Type Forks

3. Adjust chain anchors which support carriage until the bottom of the lower carriage bar is above the floor level as shown in Table 2. Also, see Figure 30. Table 2. Hook type Carriage Chain Adjustment Class II and III

82.5 ±3 mm (3.25 ±0.12 in.)

Class IV

133.5 ±3 mm (5.26 ±0.12 in.)

39


Lift Chain Adjustments

4000 SRM 736

1. MAST 2. CARRIAGE 3. DISTANCE FROM FLOOR TO LOWER CARRIAGE BAR Figure 30. Lift Chain Adjustment, Hook-Type Carriage 4. Adjust chain anchors which support carriage until the centerline of the fork pin is above the floor level as shown in Table 3. Also, see Figure 31. Table 3. Pin-Type Carriage Chain Adjustment H70-80, 90XLS

545 ±3 mm (21.5 ±0.12 in.)

H90-110XL

708 ±3 mm (27.87 ±0.12 in.)

H135-155XL

907 ±3 mm (35.71 ±0.12 in.)

1. LOAD BACKREST 2. FORK PIN 3. DISTANCE FROM FORK PIN TO FLOOR Figure 31. Lift Chain Adjustment, Pin-Type Carriage

40


4000 SRM 736

Mast Adjustments

Mast Adjustments 1. Adjust strip bearings. See Figure 32. Insert shims between the strip bearing and channel. Adjust strip bearings so maximum clearance at point of tightest fit is 0.8 mm (0.030 in.).

on the opposite side of the weldment. Weldments will be approximately in the center. 3. Adjust mast load rollers as follows (see Figure 33):

NOTE: Shims are installed on both sides of the load roller. Do not add or remove shims from the stub shafts. To change position of the load roller on the stub shaft, move shims from one side of the load roller to the other.

a. Use a crowbar to move weldments from side to side to measure amount of movement. Repeat this procedure in a minimum of three different positions of the weldments.

During assembly, shim arrangement will be approximately the same as before disassembly. Check clearance and adjust for wear or change because of repairs.

b. Separate weldments and change shim arrangements as needed. Assemble weldments. Slide weldment all the way to the top and bottom to find tightest fit.

2. Load rollers control alignment of the mast weldments. Alignment conditions are listed below with most important condition first.

c. Number of shims under a load roller must be approximately the same as the stub shaft on the opposite side of the weldment. Weldments will be approximately in the center.

a. Weldments must be parallel to each other to decrease wear. b. Maximum side clearance between load roller and channel at the point of tightest fit is 0.8 mm (0.030 in.).

d. Measure distance between channels of weldments on top and bottom. Change shims to keep distance equal between top and bottom of weldments. Also make sure weldments are parallel within 1.5 mm (0.060 in.).

c. Number of shims under a load roller must be approximately the same as the stub shaft

1. STRIP BEARING 2. LOAD ROLLER

3. WELDMENTS 4. SHIMS

5. O-RING

Figure 32. Strip Bearings Adjustment

41


Mast Adjustments

4000 SRM 736

NOTE: USE SHIMS TO KEEP CARRIAGE AND MAST WELDMENTS PARALLEL, TO GIVE APPROXIMATELY EQUAL SPACE BETWEEN BOTH SIDES OF CARRIAGE AND WELDMENTS AND TO GIVE CORRECT CLEARANCE AT TIGHTEST FIT. A. TOP VIEW B. UPRIGHT FRONT VIEW C. CARRIAGE FRONT VIEW 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

CHANNEL (WELDMENT) LOAD ROLLER STUB SHAFT SNAP RING SHIMS* PARALLEL 0.1 to 0.8 mm (0.004 to 0.030 in.) EQUAL SPACE WITHIN 1.5 mm (0.060 in.) PARALLEL INSTALL ALL SHIMS ON OUTSIDE OF ROLLER UNDER SNAP RING USE SHIMS TO ADJUST 0.13 to 0.5 mm (0.005 to 0.020 in.) AT POINT OF TIGHTEST FIT*

*MOVE SHIMS FROM ONE SIDE OF ROLLER TO OTHER SIDE TO CHANGE POSITION OF ROLLER ON STUB SHAFT. Figure 33. Mast and Carriage Adjustments

42


4000 SRM 736

Troubleshooting

Carriage Adjustment 1. Install load rollers and side rollers on carriage. Install shims for load rollers in the same sequence on stub shaft as before disassembly. Do not put any shims under top load rollers. See Figure 33. 2. Use lifting device to raise carriage up the inner weldment. Find point of tightest fit between load rollers and inner weldment. 3. Remove carriage from mast. Adjust shim arrangement for each load roller for clearance between the roller and inner weldment. Maximum clearance is 0.8 mm (0.030 in.) at the point of tightest fit. Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 if necessary.

of tightest fit between side rollers and inner weldment. Adjust shim arrangement under each side roller so maximum clearance is 0.8 mm (0.030 in.) at point of tightest fit. 5. Keep shim arrangement on each side of carriage approximately equal. Carriage must be parallel with inner weldment within 1.5 mm (0.060 in.).

CAUTION Too much grease will cause the rollers to slide and wear flat areas on the rollers. 6. After adjustment, lubricate channels with a thin layer of grease.

4. Install shims for side rollers. Use lifting device to raise carriage up inner weldment. Find point

Troubleshooting PROBLEM No movement of the lift or tilt cylinders.

Slow movement of the lift or tilt cylinders.

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Pilot line(s) to control valve are disconnected or leaking.

Tighten or connect fittings.

No oil or not enough oil in hydraulic tank.

Fill tank. Check for leaks.

Relief valve is not set correctly.

Adjust or install new relief valve.

Hydraulic pump does not operate or has damage.

Repair or install new pump.

Remote control valve does not operate.

Check and repair valve.

No oil or not enough oil to the lift or tilt cylinders.

Fill tank. Check for leaks.

Cylinders have internal or external leaks.

Repair leaks. Install new parts.

Relief valve is not set correctly.

Adjust or install new relief valve.

There is a restriction in a hydraulic line.

Remove restriction. parts.

Install new

43


Troubleshooting

PROBLEM Rough movement of the mast assembly.

Lift or tilt cylinders extend or retract when control valve lever (spool) is in the NEUTRAL position.

Cylinders at carriage do not operate correctly.

44

4000 SRM 736

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

There is air in the hydraulic system.

Remove air. Check for loose connections or breaks in lines.

Lift cylinder(s) is damaged.

Repair or install new lift cylinder.

Mast weldments are damaged or not aligned.

Align weldments. Install new parts.

Mast weldments are not lubricated correctly.

Lubricate correctly.

Load rollers or bearing blocks are damaged or not adjusted correctly.

Repair or adjust the parts.

Lift chains are damaged.

Replace lift chains.

Load check valves and spools have damage.

Repair or install new load check valve and spool.

Cylinder seals have leaks.

Install new seals.

Hydraulic lines have leaks.

Repair leaks. Install new parts. Remove air from system.

Leaks between the spool and bore.

Install new valve section.

Header hoses are damaged.

Replace header hoses.

Hydraulic lines at selector valve are damaged or not connected correctly.

Check connections or install new lines.

Wire harness or wires at selector valve are damaged or not connected correctly.

Check connections or install new wires.

Solenoid at selector valve does not operate.

Replace solenoid.


4000 SRM 736

Troubleshooting

PROBLEM

POSSIBLE CAUSE

No movement of the sideshift cylinder.

Slow movement sideshift cylinder.

Rough movement sideshift carriage.

of

of

the

the

Sideshift operation is to one side only.

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Linkage at control valve is disconnected.

Connect linkage.

No oil or not enough oil in hydraulic tank.

Fill hydraulic tank to correct level.

Relief valve is not set correctly.

Reset to correct setting.

Hydraulic pump does not operate or is damaged.

Repair or replace pump.

Faulty sideshift cylinder.

Rebuild sideshift cylinder.

No oil or not enough oil to the sideshift cylinder.

Check and fill hydraulic oil tank if needed.

The cylinder has leaks.

Rebuild cylinder.

Hydraulic pump does not operate or is damaged.

Repair or replace pump.

Damaged or restricted hydraulic lines.

Repair or replace hydraulic lines.

There is air in the hydraulic system.

Bleed system.

Worn sliding pads.

Replace and lubricate pads.

Dirty lower rollers.

Clean track and lubricate rollers.

There is air in the hydraulic system.

Bleed system.

Faulty sideshift cylinder.

Rebuild sideshift cylinder.

45


NOTES ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

46



METRIC AND INCH (SAE) FASTENERS ALL MODELS

PART NO. 910442

8000 SRM 231


Metric and Inch (SAE) Fasteners

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS General ............................................................................................................................................................... Threaded Fasteners....................................................................................................................................... Nomenclature, Threads................................................................................................................................. Strength Identification .................................................................................................................................. Cotter (Split) Pins.......................................................................................................................................... Fastener Torque Tables ................................................................................................................................. Conversion Table ...........................................................................................................................................

1 1 1 2 2 7 9

This section is for the following models: All Models

©2005 HYSTER COMPANY

i


8000 SRM 231

General

General THREADED FASTENERS Threaded fasteners, like bolts, nuts, capscrews, and studs, are made to specifications that describe the mechanical strength and hardness of the fastener. A fastener used in a design application is selected according to its specifications. Hyster® Company buys parts from many countries. Parts that are purchased must be to Hyster® Company standards. There are several standards used by these countries in the manufacture of threaded fasteners. Many of these fasteners are similar, but cannot be used as a direct replacement. To make sure that you have the correct fastener, order fasteners and parts through the Hyster® Parts Depot. Service persons must use replacement fasteners that have the same specifications. Fasteners made to each specification have identification marks for that specification. This specification is commonly called "Grade" for SAE standards and "property class" for metric standards. This section describes the identification of some common fasteners. The metric system used by Hyster® Company is described as SI (Le Systeme d’Unites or the International System of units, also called SI in all languages). The SI System of measurement is described in ISO Standard 1000, 1973. A conversion table of common measurements is shown in Table 7.

shown first in the series [M12 = 12 mm, M20 = 20 mm (1/2 = 1/2 in., 3/4 = 3/4 in.)]. The number of threads per inch is normally not shown for inch nomenclature and only the UNC (Unified National Coarse) or UNF (Unified National Fine) is shown. This number of threads per inch is not shown because a UNC or UNF fastener has a standard number of threads per inch for a specific diameter. Metric fasteners show the number of threads per millimeter. The length of the shank is often indicated as part of the description of a fastener. This length is shown in inches for inch fasteners and in millimeters for metric fasteners. A capscrew will have the following description: Metric

Inch

M12 × 1.75 × 50

1/2 × 13 UNC × 1-1/2

ABC

ABCD

A = Thread Size

A = Shank Diameter

B = Pitch

B = Number of Threads Per Unit of Length

C = Length

C = type of Thread D = Shank Length

NOMENCLATURE, THREADS The thread design is specified by a series of numbers and letters for inch and metric fasteners. See Figure 1. The diameter of the shank of the fastener is

Figure 1. Thread Design

1


General

8000 SRM 231

STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION CAUTION When fasteners must be replaced, the new fasteners must be of the same strength or greater than the original fasteners. The new fasteners must also be the correct size. NOTE: Identification marks are according to bolt strength. The higher the number or the increase in the number of marks indicates increased bolt strength. The most common property classes for metric fasteners are 8.8 and 10.9. The property class is marked with a number on the head of the capscrew or on a nut. Property classes less than 8.8 are often not marked. Grades for inch bolts go from 2 to 8. Grade 2 fasteners normally do not have any marks. The following tables show the marks that identify the grades and property classes for different fasteners.

Figure 2. Minimum Angle Between Cotter Pin Legs Unless otherwise specified, the legs of chain anchor cotter (split) pins are to be bent against the pin. See Figure 3.

COTTER (SPLIT) PINS Cotter (split) pins are used in many applications on your forklift. They are typically used to retain parts such as pins and nuts. Cotter (split) pins are typically not used as load-bearing members. Service personnel must use new cotter (split) pins. Do not reuse a cotter (split) pin. Replacement cotter (split) pin must be of the correct size. See Table 8. The legs of a cotter (split) pin are bent for the following reasons: • To retain the cotter (split) pin in the part • To provide clearance between the cotter pin legs and other parts or members. One or both cotter (split) pin legs must be bent to provide a minimum 90 angle between the legs. See Figure 2.

2

1. COTTER PIN Figure 3. Cotter (Split) Pins Used On Mast Chain Anchors


8000 SRM 231

General Table 1. Bolts and Screws

3


General

8000 SRM 231 Table 2. Studs and Nuts

4


8000 SRM 231

General Table 3. Torque Nuts

5


General

8000 SRM 231 Table 4. Torque Nuts With Nylon Insert

6


8000 SRM 231

General

FASTENER TORQUE TABLES Table 5. Torque Values for Metric Fasteners*

Size and Pitch

Property Class 5.8 1

Grade 8.8 2

Grade 10.9 3

N•m

lbf ft

N•m

lbf ft

N•m

lbf ft

M3 × 0.5 M3.5 × 0.6 M4 × 0.7 M5 × 0.8 M6 × 1

0.62 0.97 1.44 2.91 4.94

0.5 0.7 1.1 2.1 3.6

0.99 1.55 2.30 4.65 7.90

0.7 1.1 2.1 3.6 6

1.34 2.11 3.13 6.33 10.8

1.0 1.6 2.3 4.7 8

M8 × 1.25 M8 × 1 M10 × 1.5 M10 × 1.25

12.0 12.8 23.8 25.1

9 9 18 19

19.2 20.5 38.0 40.1

14 15 28 30

26.1 27.9 52 55

19 21 38 41

M12 × 1.75 M12 × 1.25 M14 × 2 M14 × 1.5

41.4 45.3 66 72

31 33 49 53

66 72 105 115

49 53 77 85

90 98 145 155

66 72 105 115

M16 × 2 M16 × 1.5 M20 × 2.5 M20 × 1.5

105 110 200 225

77 81 150 165

165 175 320 355

122 130 235 260

225 240 435 485

165 175 320 360

345 375 505 550

255 275 370 405

555 605 810 875

410 445 600 645

755 820 1,100 1,190

560 605 810 880

690 715 765 940 1,030

510 530 565 695 760

1,100 1,140 1,220 1,500 1,640

810 840 900 1,100 1,210

1,500 1,550 1,660 2,040 2,240

1,100 1,140 1,230 1,510 1,660

1,200 1,280 1,560 1,640

885 945 1,150 1,210

1,930 2,040 2,490 2,630

1,430 1,510 1,840 1,940

2,620 2,780 3,390 3,570

1,940 2,050 2,500 2,640

1,930 2,070 2,410 2,580 2,900 3,160

1,430 1,530 1,780 1,910 2,140 2,330

3,080 3,320 3,850 4,120 4,630 5,040

2,280 2,450 2,840 3,040 3,420 3,720

4,200 4,510 5,240 5,610 6,300 6,860

3,100 3,330 3,870 4,140 4,650 5,060

M24 M24 M27 M27

× × × ×

3 2 3 2

M30 × 3.5 M30 × 3 M30 × 2 M33 × 3.5 M33 × 2 M36 M36 M39 M39

× × × ×

4 3 4 3

M42 × 4.5 M42 × 3 M45 × 4.5 M45 × 3 M48 × 5 M48 × 3

* Unless otherwise specified 1 Approximately equal to Grade 2 2 Approximately equal to Grade 5 3 Approximately equal to Grade 8

7


General

8000 SRM 231 Table 6. Torque Values for Inch Fasteners* Grade 21

Size and Pitch

Grade 52

lbf ft

N•m

lbf ft

N•m

lbf ft

N•m

1/4 1/4

20 UNC 28 UNF

4 5

6 6

6 7

9 10

9 10

12 14

5/16 5/16

18 UNC 24 UNF

8 9

11 13

13 14

18 20

18 20

25 28

3/8 3/8

16 UNC 24 UNF

15 17

20 23

23 26

31 36

33 37

44 50

7/16 7/16

14 UNC 20 UNF

24 27

33 36

37 41

50 56

52 58

71 79

1/2 1/2

13 UNC 20 UNF

37 41

50 56

57 64

77 86

80 90

110 120

9/16 9/16

12 UNC 18 UNF

53 59

72 80

82 91

110 125

115 130

155 175

5/8 5/8

11 UNC 18 UNF

73 83

99 110

115 130

155 175

160 180

215 245

3/4 3/4

10 UNC 16 UNF

130 145

175 195

200 225

270 300

280 315

380 425

7/8 7/8

9 UNC 14 UNF

125 140

170 185

320 355

435 480

455 500

615 680

1 1

8 UNC 14 UNF

185 210

255 285

485 540

655 735

680 765

925 1,040

1-1/8 1-1/8

7 UNC 12 UNF

265 300

360 405

595 670

805 905

965 1,080

1,310 1,470

1-1/4 1-1/4

7 UNC 12 UNF

375 415

510 565

840 930

1,140 1,260

1,360 1,500

1,850 2,050

1-3/8 1-3/8

6 UNC 12 UNF

490 560

665 760

1,100 1,250

1,490 1,700

1,780 2,040

2,420 2,760

1-1/2 1-1/2

6 UNC 12 UNF

650 735

885 995

1,460 1,650

1,980 2,230

2,370 2,670

3,210 3,620

* Unless otherwise specified 1 Approximately equal to metric Property Class 5.8 2 Approximately equal to metric Property Class 8.8 3 Approximately equal to metric Property Class 10.9

8

Grade 83


8000 SRM 231

General

CONVERSION TABLE Table 7. Conversion Table for Metric and English Units By

Multiply

To Get

Multiply

By

To Get

× 0.155

= inches

Area inches feet

2

2

2

(in. )

(ft 2)

× 6.452

= centimeters

× 0.093

= meters

2

2

2

(cm )

centimeters

(m 2)

meters

2

2

(cm 2)

(m 2)

× 10.764 = feet

2

2

(in. 2)

(ft 2)

Linear inches (in.)

× 25.4

= millimeters (mm)

millimeter (mm)

× 0.039

= inches (in.)

feet (ft)

× 0.305

= meters (m)

meter (m)

× 3.281

= feet (ft)

yards (yd)

× 0.914

= meters (m)

meter (m)

× 1.094

= yards (yd)

miles (mi)

× 1.609

= kilometers (km)

kilometer (km)

× 0.621

= miles (mi)

Mass ounces (oz)

× 28.35

= grams (g)

grams (g)

× 0.035

= ounces (oz)

pounds (lb)

× 0.454

= kilograms (kg)

kilograms (kg)

× 2.205

= pounds (lb)

tons (2,000 lb)

× 907.18

= kilograms (kg)

kilograms (kg)

× 0.001

= tons (2,000 lb)

tons (2,000 lb)

× 0.907

= metric ton (t)

metric ton (t)

× 1.102

= tons (2,000 lb)

× 1.34

= horsepower (hp)

Power horsepower (hp)

× 0.746

= kilowatts (kW)

kilowatts (kW)

Pressure pounds/in.

2

(psi)

× 6.895

= kilopascal (kPa)

kilopascals (kPa)

× 0.145

= pounds/in.

2

(psi)

pounds/in.

2

(psi)

× 0.007

= megapascal (MPa)

megapascals (MPa)

× 145.04 = pounds/in.

2

(psi)

Temperature ( Fahrenheit 32)

× 0.56

= Celsius (C)

( Celsius × 1.8) +32

= Fahrenheit

Torque pound inches (lbf in.)

× 0.113

= Newton meter (N•m)

Newton meter (N•m)

× 8.851

= pound inches (lb f in.)

pound feet (lbf ft)

× 1.356

= Newton meter (N•m)

Newton meter (N•m)

× 0.738

= pound feet (lb f ft)

× 0.621

= miles/hour (mph)

× 0.061

= inches

3

(in. 3)

3

(in. 3)

Velocity miles/hour (mph)

× 1.609

= kilometer/hour (km/h) kilometer/hr (km/h)

Volume inches

3

3

3

3

(in. )

× 16.387

= centimeters

inches

3

(in. 3)

× 0.016

= liters (l)

liters (l)

× 61.024 = inches

quarts, U.S. (qt)

× 0.946

= liters (l)

liters (l)

× 1.057

= quarts, U.S. (qt)

quarts, U.S. (qt)

× 0.83

= quarts, Imp. (qt)

quarts, Imp. (qt)

× 1.205

= quarts, U.S. (qt)

gallons, U.S. (gal)

× 3.785

= liters (l)

liters (l)

× 0.264

= gallons, U.S. (gal)

gallons, U.S. (gal)

× 0.83

= gallons, Imp. (gal)

gallons, Imp. (gal)

× 1.205

= gallons, U.S. (gal)

ounces (oz)

× 29.57

= milliliters (ml)

milliliters (ml)

× 0.034

= ounces (oz)

(cm )

centimeters

3

(cm 3)

9


General

8000 SRM 231 Table 8. Cotter Pin Dimensional Data

Nominal Size A

Shank Diameter A

Head Dia. B

Length of Extended Prong C

Recommended Hole Size

max

min

min

max

min

min

max

1.00 mm (0.031 in.)

0.90 mm (0.035 in.)

0.70 mm (0.028 in.)

1.50 mm (0.060 in.)

1.52 mm (0.060 in.)

0.25 mm (0.01 in.)

0.91 mm (0.036 in.)

1.37 mm (0.054 in.)

1.60 mm (0.047 in.)

1.20 mm (0.048 in.)

0.90 mm (0.035 in.)

1.50 mm (0.060 in.)

2.54 mm (0.10 in.)

0.51 mm (0.02 in.)

1.50 mm (0.059 in.)

1.78 mm (0.070 in.)

2.00 mm (0.062 in.)

1.50 mm (0.060 in.)

1.30 mm (0.051 in.)

2.40 mm (0.094 in.)

2.54 mm (0.10 in.)

0.76 mm (0.03 in.)

1.90 mm (0.075 in.)

2.18 mm (0.086 in.)

2.50 mm (0.094 in.)

2.30 mm (0.091 in.)

2.10 mm (0.083 in.)

4.00 mm (0.158 in.)

2.54 mm (0.10 in.)

1.00 mm (0.04 in.)

2.41 mm (0.095 in.)

2.95 mm (0.116 in.)

3.20 mm (0.125 in.)

3.00 mm (0.120 in.)

2.70 mm (0.106 in.)

5.10 mm (0.201 in.)

3.30 mm (0.13 in.)

1.52 mm (0.06 in.)

3.12 mm (0.123 in.)

3.76 mm (0.148 in.)

4.00 mm (0.156 in.)

3.80 mm (0.150 in.)

3.50 mm (0.138 in.)

6.50 mm (0.256 in.)

4.06 mm (0.16 in.)

1.78 mm (0.07 in.)

3.94 mm (0.155 in.)

4.55 mm (0.179 in.)

5.00 mm (0.188 in.)

4.60 mm (0.181 in.)

4.40 mm (0.172 in.)

8.00 mm (0.315 in.)

4.06 mm (0.16 in.)

2.03 mm (0.08 in.)

4.93 mm (0.194 in.)

5.33 mm (0.210 in.)

6.30 mm (0.250 in.)

5.90 mm (0.232 in.)

5.60 mm (0.220 in.)

10.3 mm (0.406 in.)

4.06 mm (0.16 in.)

2.03 mm (0.08 in.)

6.22 mm (0.245 in.)

6.96 mm (0.274 in.)

8.00 mm (0.312 in.)

7.50 mm (0.295 in.)

7.00 mm (0.275 in.)

13.1 mm (0.516 in.)

4.06 mm (0.16 in.)

2.03 mm (0.08 in.)

7.85 mm (0.309 in.)

8.28 mm (0.326 in.)

9.50 mm (0.375 in.)

9.50 mm (0.374 in.)

8.40 mm (0.329 in.)

16.6 mm (0.654 in.)

6.35 mm (0.25 in.)

4.06 mm (0.16 in.)

9.45 mm (0.372 in.)

9.73 mm (0.383 in.)

13.0 mm (0.500 in.)

12.4 mm (0.488 in.)

11.9 mm (0.467 in.)

21.7 mm (0.854 in.)

6.35 mm (0.25 in.)

3.05 mm (0.12 in.)

12.62 mm (0.497 in.)

13.21 mm (0.520 in.)

16.0 mm (0.625 in.)

15.4 mm (0.606 in.)

15.0 mm (0.590 in.)

27.0 mm (1.063 in.)

8.89 mm (0.35 in.)

3.05 mm (0.12 in.)

15.80 mm (0.622 in.)

16.28 mm (0.641 in.)

10


8000 SRM 231

General Table 9. Cotter Pin Dimensional Data

Nominal Length L

Length Range

Nominal Size - Part Numbers 1.00 mm (0.031 in.)

1.60 mm (0.047 in.)

2.00 mm (0.062 in.)

2.50 mm (0.094 in.)

3.20 mm (0.125 in.)

5.50 mm (0.217 in.)

0221870

0221875

10.5 mm (0.413 in.)

8.80 mm (0.345 in.)

0221871

0221876

12.7 mm (0.500 in.)

13.5 mm (0.530 in.)

11.5 mm (0.453 in.)

0221872

0221877

0015200

0015211

0015221

19.05 mm (0.750 in.)

20.5 mm (0.807 in.)

18.3 mm (0.720 in.)

0221873

0221878

0015201

0015212

0015222

25.4 mm (1.000 in.)

26.9 mm (1.060 in.)

23.9 mm (0.940 in.)

0221874

0221879

0015202

0015213

0015223

31.75 mm (1.250 in.)

33.3 mm (1.310 in.)

29.2 mm (1.150 in.)

0015203

0015216

0015224

38.1 mm (1.500 in.)

40.9 mm (1.610 in.)

36.6 mm (1.440 in.)

0015204

0015217

0015225

44.45 mm (1.750 in.)

46.0 mm (1.810 in.)

42.9 mm (1.690 in.)

0015205

0015218

0015226

50.8 mm (2.000 in.)

52.3 mm (2.060 in.)

49.3 mm (1.940 in.)

0015206

0015219

0015227

57.15 mm (2.250 in.)

58.7 mm (2.310 in.)

55.1 mm (2.170 in.)

0015220

0056997

63.5 mm (2.500 in.)

65.0 mm (2.560 in.)

62.0 mm (2.440 in.)

0221894

0015229

69.85 mm (2.750 in.)

72.1 mm (2.840 in.)

68.3 mm (2.690 in.)

0015230

76.2 mm (3.000 in.)

81.3 mm (3.200 in.)

74.7 mm (2.940 in.)

0015279

88.9 mm (3.500 in.)

91.4 mm (3.600 in.)

87.4 mm (3.440 in.)

101.6 mm (4.000 in.)

113.3 mm (4.460 in.)

98.8 mm (3.890 in.)

max

min

6.35 mm (0.250 in.)

7.10 mm (0.280 in.)

9.525 mm (0.375 in.)

11


General

8000 SRM 231

Table 9. Cotter Pin Dimensional Data (Continued) Nominal Length L

Length Range max

min

127.0 mm (5.000 in.)

128.5 mm (5.060 in.)

123.7 mm (4.870 in.)

152.4 mm (6.000 in.)

153.9 mm (3.060 in.)

5.460 mm (138.7 in.)

Nominal Size - Part Numbers 1.00 mm (0.031 in.)

1.60 mm (0.047 in.)

2.00 mm (0.062 in.)

2.50 mm (0.094 in.)

3.20 mm (0.125 in.)

Table 10. Cotter Pin Dimensional Data Nominal Length L

Length Range 4.00 mm (0.156 in.)

5.00 mm (0.188 in.)

18.3 mm (0.720 in.)

0015232

0015241

23.9 mm (0.940 in.)

0015233

0015242

max

min

6.35 mm (0.250 in.)

7.10 mm (0.280 in.)

5.50 mm (0.217 in.)

9.525 mm (0.375 in.)

10.5 mm (0.413 in.)

8.80 mm (0.345 in.)

12.7 mm (0.500 in.)

13.5 mm (0.530 in.)

11.5 mm (0.453 in.)

19.05 mm (0.750 in.)

20.5 mm (0.807 in.)

25.4 mm (1.000 in.)

26.9 mm (1.060 in.)

12

Nominal Size - Part Numbers 6.30 mm (0.250 in.)

8.00 mm (0.312 in.)

0015251

0015261

9.52 mm (0.375 in.)


8000 SRM 231

General

Table 10. Cotter Pin Dimensional Data (Continued) Nominal Length L

Length Range

Nominal Size - Part Numbers 4.00 mm (0.156 in.)

5.00 mm (0.188 in.)

6.30 mm (0.250 in.)

8.00 mm (0.312 in.)

9.52 mm (0.375 in.)

29.2 mm (1.150 in.)

0015234

0015243

0015252

0015262

0221884

40.9 mm (1.610 in.)

36.6 mm (1.440 in.)

0015235

0015244

0015253

0015263

0221885

44.45 mm (1.750 in.)

46.0 mm (1.810 in.)

42.9 mm (1.690 in.)

0015236

0015245

0015254

0015264

0221886

50.8 mm (2.000 in.)

52.3 mm (2.060 in.)

49.3 mm (1.940 in.)

0015237

0015246

0015255

0015265

0015271

57.15 mm (2.250 in.)

58.7 mm (2.310 in.)

55.1 mm (2.170 in.)

0015238

0015247

0015256

0221880

0221887

63.5 mm (2.500 in.)

65.0 mm (2.560 in.)

62.0 mm (2.440 in.)

0015240

0015248

0015257

0221881

0015273

69.85 mm (2.750 in.)

72.1 mm (2.840 in.)

68.3 mm (2.690 in.)

0015280

0015249

0015258

0221882

0015286

76.2 mm (3.000 in.)

81.3 mm (3.200 in.)

74.7 mm (2.940 in.)

0015283

0015250

0015259

0015267

0015272

88.9 mm (3.500 in.)

91.4 mm (3.600 in.)

87.4 mm (3.440 in.)

0015239

0015284

0015266

0015274

101.6 mm (4.000 in.)

113.3 mm (4.460 in.)

98.8 mm (3.890 in.)

0015301

0015260

0128754

0015275

127.0 mm (5.000 in.)

128.5 mm (5.060 in.)

123.7 mm (4.870 in.)

0221883

0015277

152.4 mm (6.000 in.)

153.9 mm (3.060 in.)

5.460 mm (138.7 in.)

max

min

31.75 mm (1.250 in.)

33.3 mm (1.310 in.)

38.1 mm (1.500 in.)

0221888

13


General

8000 SRM 231 Table 11. Cotter Pin Dimensional Data

Nominal Length L

14

Length Range

Nominal Size - Part Numbers 13.0 mm (0.500 in.)

16.00 mm (0.625 in.)

max

min

19.05 mm (0.750 in.)

20.5 mm (0.807 in.)

18.3 mm (0.720 in.)

25.4 mm (1.00 in.)

26.9 mm (1.060 in.)

23.9 mm (0.940 in.)

31.75 mm (1.250 in.)

33.3 mm (1.310 in.)

29.2 mm (1.150 in.)

38.1 mm (1.500 in.)

40.9 mm (1.610 in.)

36.6 mm (1.440 in.)

44.45 mm (1.750 in.)

46.0 mm (1.810 in.)

42.9 mm (1.690 in.)

0221889

50.8 mm (2.000 in.)

52.3 mm (2.060 in.)

49.3 mm (1.940 in.)

0221890

57.15 mm (2.250 in.)

58.7 mm (2.310 in.)

55.1 mm (2.170 in.)

0221891

63.5 mm (2.500 in.)

65.0 mm (2.560 in.)

62.0 mm (2.440 in.)

0221892

69.85 mm (2.750 in.)

72.1 mm (2.840 in.)

68.3 mm (2.690 in.)

0221893

0221895

76.2 mm (3.000 in.)

81.3 mm (3.200 in.)

74.7 mm (2.940 in.)

0015291

0221896

88.9 mm (3.500 in.)

91.4 mm (3.600 in.)

87.4 mm (3.440 in.)

0015292

0221897

101.6 mm (4.000 in.)

113.3 mm (4.460 in.)

98.8 mm (3.890 in.)

0015293

0221898


8000 SRM 231

General

Table 11. Cotter Pin Dimensional Data (Continued) Nominal Length L

Length Range

Nominal Size - Part Numbers 13.0 mm (0.500 in.)

16.00 mm (0.625 in.)

123.7 mm (4.870 in.)

0015295

0221899

138.7 mm (5.460 in.)

0015297

0221900

max

min

127.0 mm (5.000 in.)

128.5 mm (5.060 in.)

152.4 mm (6.000 in.)

153.9 mm (3.060 in.)

15


NOTES ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

16



MICROPROCESSOR SPARK TIMING SYSTEM (MSTS) LATE MODEL GM 3.0L AND 4.3L LPG FUEL ENGINES

PART NO. 1473385

2200 SRM 765


Microprocessor Spark Timing System (MSTS)

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS General ............................................................................................................................................................... Description ......................................................................................................................................................... What MSTS Does........................................................................................................................................... How MSTS Begins Operation ....................................................................................................................... Operation............................................................................................................................................................ Distributor ..................................................................................................................................................... Ignition Coil ................................................................................................................................................... Ignition Module.............................................................................................................................................. When Engine Is Being Started ..................................................................................................................... When Engine Is Running .............................................................................................................................. Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor .................................................................................................. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor................................................................................................. MSTS Module Corrections ............................................................................................................................ Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................................. General ........................................................................................................................................................... Tools and Test Equipment ............................................................................................................................. MSTS .............................................................................................................................................................. Troubleshooting Procedure............................................................................................................................ Where to Start ........................................................................................................................................... Visual/Physical Inspection ........................................................................................................................ Knowledge/Tools Required ........................................................................................................................ Damage from Static Discharge (Static Electricity) ................................................................................. Troubleshooting Information ........................................................................................................................ Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) .......................................................................................................... Connecting CodeMate Tester .................................................................................................................... Reading Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)................................................................................................ Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC’s)............................................................................................. On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check ................................................................................................. Test Description......................................................................................................................................... No Malfunction Indicator Lamp........................................................................................................................ Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. No DTC-12, Malfunction Indicator Lamp ON .................................................................................................. Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. Starter Rotates Engine, Engine Does Not Run ................................................................................................ Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. DTC-14 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) (Low Temperature Indicated).................................................. Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. DTC-15 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECT) (High Temperature Indicated) .................................... Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. DTC-34 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor ........................................................................................ Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. DTC-41 Electronic Spark Timing (EST) Open Circuit..................................................................................... Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. DTC-42 Electronic Spark Timing (EST) Grounded Circuit ............................................................................. Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................

©2002 HYSTER COMPANY

1 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 8 10 11 11 11 11 11 11 12 12 12 13 14 14 14 16 16 16 18 18 18 19 19 23 23 23 25 25 25 27 27 27 30 30 30 32 32

i


Table of Contents

Microprocessor Spark Timing System (MSTS)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. DTC-51 MSTS Failure ....................................................................................................................................... Circuit Description ........................................................................................................................................ Distributor Repair.............................................................................................................................................. Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Disassemble ................................................................................................................................................... Inspect ............................................................................................................................................................ Assemble ........................................................................................................................................................ Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Ignition Timing .............................................................................................................................................. Ignition Module Repair...................................................................................................................................... Test For Fault ................................................................................................................................................ Replace ........................................................................................................................................................... Sensing Coil Repair ........................................................................................................................................... Test For Fault ................................................................................................................................................ Replace ........................................................................................................................................................... Ignition Coil Repair ........................................................................................................................................... Test For Fault ................................................................................................................................................ Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Install ............................................................................................................................................................. MSTS Module Repair......................................................................................................................................... Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Install ............................................................................................................................................................. ECT Sensor Replacement .................................................................................................................................. MAP Sensor Replacement ................................................................................................................................. This section is for the following models: GM 3.0L and 4.3L LPG Fuel Engines

ii

32 34 34 34 34 35 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 38 38 39 39 39 39 40 40 40 40 41


2200 SRM 765

General

General This section describes the operation of the Microprocessor Spark Timing System (MSTS). The MSTS ignition system is used on engines that use an LPG fuel system. The description, operation, troubleshooting, and repair of the MSTS is identical for both the GM

3.0L and 4.3L engines. Illustrations in this manual show the MSTS in the 3.0L engine only. Repairs and Troubleshooting procedures are also in this section. Typical installation of the MSTS is shown in Figure 1.

1. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR 2. DISTRIBUTOR 3. MSTS MODULE

4. TACHOMETER CONNECTOR 5. IGNITION COIL 6. MAP SENSOR

Figure 1. MSTS Arrangement in Engine Compartment (Typical)

1


Description

2200 SRM 765

Description The general operation of the MSTS system is described in the following paragraphs. The description of the components and a circuit analysis is given in the paragraphs under Operation.

WHAT MSTS DOES The MSTS module receives signals from sensors mounted on the engine and electronically processes the information to adjust the ignition timing for the best fuel use and engine performance. See Figure 2.

Figure 2. MSTS Module The MSTS module receives signals from the following sensors:

• Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor. This sensor is a pressure transducer that measures the atmospheric pressure before the engine is started. The MSTS module uses this pressure as a reference. This sensor then measures changes in pressure in the intake manifold during engine operation. • Engine Coolant Temperature sensor (ECT). This sensor is a thermistor (resistor that is calibrated to change its value as its temperature changes). • The ignition module is a small electronic module within the distributor. This module is a signal converter that senses the operation of the distributor. A sensing coil in the distributor senses the rotation of the timer core and the ignition module senses the speed of rotation. A square wave generator in the ignition module converts the pulses from the sensing coil to a square wave signal that is sent to the MSTS module. If the signals from the ignition module to the MSTS indicate that the engine is rotating at less than 400 rpm, the MSTS module determines that the engine is being rotated by the starter. The ignition module controls the ignition for an engine being started. The Electronic Spark Timing (EST) function from the MSTS module is deenergized. If the signals from the ignition module to the MSTS module indicate that the engine is rotating at greater than 400 rpm, the MSTS module determines that the engine is running and the Electronic Spark Timing (EST) controls the ignition.

Figure 3. Electronic Engine Control System

HOW MSTS BEGINS OPERATION When the ignition switch is turned to ON, the MSTS module measures the atmospheric pressure (BARO

2

signal) from the MAP sensor. See Figure 3. The MSTS module also checks the signal from the engine coolant temperature sensor (ECT). When the


2200 SRM 765

Operation

starter is engaged, the ignition module sends electronic pulses to the MSTS module. The frequency of the pulses indicates to the MSTS module that the engine is being started. The ignition module also electronically energizes (ON) and deenergizes (OFF) the primary circuit of the ignition coil to create a spark at the spark plugs. When the engine starts, the frequency of the pulses from the ignition module increases and indicates to the MSTS module that the engine is running. The

MSTS module then sends a bypass signal to the ignition module that removes control of the spark (ignition) timing from the ignition module. The MSTS module takes control of the ignition timing and follows its program to give ignition timing for the best engine operation. When the engine is operating, the MSTS module continuously checks the signals from the MAP, ECT, and distributor speed to make timing adjustments for the engine operating conditions.

Operation DISTRIBUTOR The distributor uses an internal magnetic pickup assembly that consists of a permanent magnet, pole piece with internal teeth and pickup coil. See Figure 4. When the rotating teeth of the timer core (permanent magnet) line up with the teeth of the pole piece, voltage is induced in the pickup coil. This voltage signals the ignition control module to trigger the primary ignition circuit bypass mode. Current flow in the primary circuit is interrupted and a high voltage of up to 35,000 volts is induced in the ignition coil secondary winding. This high voltage is directed through the secondary ignition circuit to fire the spark plugs. The principle of magnetic induction also controls the polarity of the voltage generated in the pickup coil. An increasing magnetic field will generate a voltage in the coil that is the opposite polarity of a magnetic field that is decreasing. This signal pulse causes the integrated circuits in the ignition module to generate a square wave signal. The ignition module and a magnetic pulse generator control the primary circuit to the ignition coil when the engine is started. After the engine is started, the MSTS module receives the square wave signal from the magnetic pulse generator and ignition module as one of the signals to control the EST. The pole piece has the same number of teeth as the engine has cylinders so that a spark voltage is correctly sent to each spark plug as the shaft in the distributor rotates.

IGNITION COIL The ignition coil generates a secondary voltage of up to 35,000 volts. The ignition coil connects to the distributor cap through a high voltage wire. There are two connectors on the coil used for battery voltage input, primary voltage output to the ignition module,

trigger signal from the ignition module and the tach output signal.

1. ROTOR 2. TIMER CORE/SHAFT 3. RETAINER 4. SHIELD

5. 6. 7. 8.

COIL POLE PIECE IGNITION MODULE HOUSING

Figure 4. Distributor

IGNITION MODULE The ignition module is a solid-state electronic device that operates like a fast switch except that it does not have any moving or mechanical parts. See Figure 5. Small electrical pulses from the sensing coil of the pulse generator go to the ignition module.

3


Operation

2200 SRM 765

The MSTS module must always know the speed at which the engine is operating. The engine speed signal is generated by the ignition module. The signal converter in the ignition module changes the signal voltage from the sensing coil to a square wave reference signal to the MSTS module. This square wave reference signal for engine speed is called REF HI. The MSTS module must also have a reference to compare with REF HI. An additional wire between the MSTS module and the ignition module is called REF LO. The REF HI and REF LO connections give the EEPROM in the MSTS module the necessary information about engine speed. The other two wires between the MSTS module and the distributor control the Electronic Spark Timing and are called EST and BYPASS. NOTE: The ignition module controls spark timing only when the engine is being started. The MSTS module controls the spark timing during engine operation. The ignition module will also control the spark timing if there are some failures in the signals to the MSTS module. This backup mode of operation will often permit operation of the engine so that the lift

truck can be moved to an area for repair. The results of the failures in signals to the MSTS module is described in the paragraphs under MSTS Module Corrections.

WHEN ENGINE IS BEING STARTED When the engine is rotated by the starter, the electronic relay is in the deenergized position. See Figure 5. The sensing coil is connected through the square wave generator to the base of the transistor. When the sensing coil applies a positive voltage (the square wave voltage is increasing) to the transistor, the transistor goes ON. When the voltage from the sensing coil changes to negative (the square wave voltage is decreasing), the transistor goes OFF. When the transistor is ON, current flows through the primary winding of the ignition coil. When the transistor goes OFF, the current flow through the primary winding stops. The changing magnetic field in the primary winding generates a high voltage in the secondary winding of the ignition coil. This high voltage generates a spark at the spark plug.

Figure 5. Ignition Module When Engine is Being Started

4


2200 SRM 765

Operation Legend for Figure 5

NOTE: THE NUMBER IN FRONT OF THE PIN DENOTES THE CONNECTOR. FOR EXAMPLE, 6E IS PIN E ON THE 6-PIN CONNECTOR WHILE 5E IS PIN E ON THE 5-PIN CONNECTOR. 1. 2. 3. 4.

IGNITION MODULE ELECTRONIC RELAY SQUARE WAVE GENERATOR SENSING COIL

WHEN ENGINE IS RUNNING When the engine speed is approximately 400 rpm, the MSTS module determines that the engine is running and applies 5 volts on the BYPASS wire to the ignition module. See Figure 6. This voltage energizes the electronic relay and makes the following

5. 6. 7. 8.

MSTS MODULE BATTERY VOLTAGE TO IGNITION COIL TRANSISTOR

changes: The EST wire is not grounded and is now connected to the base of the transistor. The sensing coil is disconnected from the base of the transistor. The ignition module and the ignition timing is now controlled by the EST signal from the MSTS module. This mode of operation is called the EST mode.

NOTE: THE NUMBER IN FRONT OF THE PIN DENOTES THE CONNECTOR. FOR EXAMPLE, 6E IS PIN E ON THE 6-PIN CONNECTOR WHILE 5E IS PIN E ON THE 5-PIN CONNECTOR. 1. 2. 3. 4.

IGNITION MODULE ELECTRONIC RELAY SQUARE WAVE GENERATOR SENSING COIL

5. 6. 7. 8.

MSTS MODULE BATTERY VOLTAGE TO IGNITION COIL TRANSISTOR

Figure 6. Ignition Module When Engine is Running

5


Operation

2200 SRM 765

MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor is a pressure transducer that measures changes in the pressure in the intake manifold. See Figure 7. The pressure changes are a result of engine load and speed changes. The MAP sensor converts these pressure changes to a signal voltage to the MSTS module.

the engine is started. The MSTS module remembers the barometric pressure (BARO signal) after the engine is running. The MSTS module then automatically adjusts the ignition timing for different altitudes and atmospheric conditions.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 8) is a resistor that changes its resistance value when the temperature changes (thermistor). This sensor is installed in the engine coolant system. A low coolant temperature makes the thermistor have a high resistance [100,700 ohms at 40 C ( 40 F)]. A higher coolant temperature makes the thermistor have a lower resistance [70 ohms at 130 C (266 F)].

1. SENSOR 2. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR Figure 7. MAP Sensor The MSTS module sends a 5-volt reference signal to the MAP sensor. When the pressure in the intake manifold changes, the electrical resistance in the MAP sensor also changes. The change in the voltage signal from the MAP sensor enables the MSTS module to sense the pressure in the intake manifold. A closed throttle causes a low pressure (high engine vacuum) in the intake manifold. This low pressure causes a low voltage signal from the MAP sensor to the MSTS module. A fully opened throttle causes a higher pressure (low engine vacuum) in the intake manifold. This higher pressure causes a higher voltage signal from the MAP sensor to the MSTS module. These pressure changes indicate the load on the engine to the MSTS module. The MSTS module then calculates the spark timing for the best engine performance. The MAP sensor also measures the barometric pressure when the key switch is turned to ON and before

6

1. TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR 3. LOCK TAB Figure 8. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The engine coolant temperature sensor uses a thermistor to control the signal voltage (see Figure 9) to the MSTS module. The MSTS module applies a 5-volt reference voltage to the ECT. The reference voltage will be high when the engine coolant is cold. The reference voltage will be lower when the engine coolant is at operating temperature. The MSTS module will adjust the ignition timing for more spark advance when the engine coolant is cold and less spark advance when the engine coolant is hot.


2200 SRM 765

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Operation

MSTS MODULE MSTS IGNITION FUSE IGNITION COIL SPARK PLUGS TACHOMETER CONNECTOR

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

DISTRIBUTOR AND IGNITION MODULE MAP SENSOR ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR DIAGNOSTIC CONNECTOR MSTS B+ FUSE

Figure 9. MSTS Wiring Diagram

MSTS MODULE CORRECTIONS The operation of the MSTS module was described in earlier paragraphs. (See the description in What MSTS Does.) These paragraphs describe the corrections made by the MSTS module. The MSTS module does a check of the system components. A set of normal operating limits are part of the PROM program. If a sensor sends a signal that is outside of the limits of the PROM program, the MSTS module will not use the information. The

MSTS module will use a standard value from its program and continue to operate the MSTS. The following examples are the action of the MSTS module if it finds a problem: MAP Sensor Signal Voltage Is Too High Or Too Low. The MSTS module will use a MAP value from its PROM program and use this value to calculate the ignition timing ECT Signal Voltage Is Too High Or Too Low. When a coolant sensor error occurs, the MSTS module will use a value that is approximately the normal operating temperature of the coolant.

7


Troubleshooting

2200 SRM 765

Open Circuit In The EST Circuit From The MSTS Module To The Ignition Module. If the EST circuit is open, it cannot be at ground potential, and the EST signal will rise and fall from the sensing coil. If the EST circuit becomes open when the engine is running, the engine stops but will restart and run in the backup mode from the ignition module. Short Circuit (Grounded Circuit) In The EST Circuit From The MSTS Module To The Ignition Module. When the engine is being rotated by the starter, the MSTS module normally detects 0 volts in the EST circuit because the circuit is at ground potential in the ignition module. The MSTS module would not detect a problem until the engine began to run. The MSTS module could not operate in the EST mode and the engine stops when the module switches to EST mode. If the EST circuit has a short-circuit (grounded circuit) when the engine is running, it will stop.

Open Circuit Or Short Circuit In The BYPASS Circuit. The MSTS module would not detect a problem until the engine began to run. The MSTS module could not operate in the EST mode and the engine would operate in the bypass mode from the ignition module. If this problem occurs when the engine is running, the engine continues to run but switches to the backup mode from the ignition module. Open Circuit Or Short Circuit In The REF HI Circuit. The MSTS module would not detect that the engine was operating. The MSTS module could not operate in the EST mode and the engine would operate with reduced economy. If this problem occurs when the engine is running, the engine continues to run but switches to the backup mode from the ignition module. Open Circuit In The REF-LO Circuit. This circuit provides a ground for the ignition module and the MSTS. If this circuit were open, it may cause poor performance.

Troubleshooting GENERAL WARNING This troubleshooting requires the operation of the engine for some of the tests. Make sure the tests are done carefully to prevent injury: • Put the lift truck on a level surface. Lower the carriage and forks and apply the parking brake. Make sure the lift truck cannot move and cause an injury during the tests. Put blocks in front and back of the drive tires to prevent movement of the lift truck. • The fuel system and the engine must operate correctly. Any problems or leaks in the fuel system or the engine must be repaired before doing troubleshooting on the MSTS. • The fan and the drive belts can remove fingers or cause other injuries. Be careful that your hands and tools do not touch the moving fan or the drive belts. • The engine exhaust and other parts of the engine are hot. Do not touch a hot surface and cause a burn.

CAUTION Electronic equipment can be damaged if troubleshooting and repairs are not done correctly. The following CAUTIONS must be followed

8

when doing troubleshooting or repairs on an engine with MSTS: • Always disconnect the battery negative cable before disconnecting and removing any parts of ignition system. • Never disconnect the battery from any equipment when the engine is running. • If the battery must be charged with a battery charger, ALWAYS disconnect the battery from the electrical system. • Make sure that all electrical connections are clean and have good electrical contact. • Never connect or disconnect the wiring harness at the MSTS module when the key switch is ON. • Always disconnect the battery and the MSTS module connectors if electric arc welding must be done on the vehicle. • Make sure that any water or steam is not sent toward the MSTS module or its sensors if the engine compartment is cleaned with steam. The heat and steam can damage the electronic components and cause corrosion in the electrical connections. • Use only the tools and test equipment described in Tools and Test Equipment to prevent damage to good components and to obtain correct test results.


2200 SRM 765

Troubleshooting test for a correct test light is shown in Figure 10.

• All voltage measurements must be done with a digital voltmeter with a minimum rating of 10 megohm input impedance. • When a test light is used in troubleshooting, the test light must have less than 0.3 amps (300 milliamps) of maximum current flow. A

The following troubleshooting diagrams are designed to give an efficient method of fault analysis on the MSTS. The MSTS connector pin assignments and functions are shown in Table 1.

Table 1. MSTS Module Connections This voltage chart is for use with a digital voltmeter when doing troubleshooting. There can be small variations in the voltage shown in the chart from those voltages measured during troubleshooting. These small variations are because of the battery charge and other resistances in the connections. A variation of more than 0.5 volts can be an indication of a malfunction. When this chart is used for troubleshooting, the engine must be at its operating temperature and the engine must be at idle speed (for ENGINE RUNNING column). MSTS 6-Pin Connector Pin

Function

Sensor Connector Pin C

Ignition Control Module

5.0

5.0

B

Ignition Control

D

Ignition Control Module

-

-

C

Bypass

B

Ignition Control Module

0

5.0

D

ECT Sensor

B

MSTS to ECT Sensor

0

1.5 - 2.0 2

E

MAP Sensor Signal

B

Manifold Absolute Pressure

4.75 1

1.0 1

F

+5 Volt Reference

C

Manifold Absolute Pressure

5.0

5.0

Function

Connector Pin

Function

Normal Voltage Key ON

Engine Running

Alternator EXC Terminal and Coil

12

12

B+ (Fuse Connector)

B+

B+

A

Ignition Feed

B

Battery Feed

C

Alternate Fuel

Not Used

0

0

D

Knock Signal

Not Used

0

0

E

MSTS Ground

Engine Ground

0

0

A

MSTS 3-Pin Connector Pin

3

Engine Running

Distributor Reference

Pin

2

Key ON

A

MSTS 5-Pin Connector

1

Function

Normal Voltage

Function

Diagnostic Connector Pin

A

Data

G

B

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

E

C

Diagnostic Test Terminal

B

Function

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Normal Voltage 3 Key ON

Engine Running

-

-

-

-

-

-

Voltage changes with atmospheric pressure. Voltage changes with temperature. Not applicable.

9


Troubleshooting

2200 SRM 765

TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT The following tools are necessary for troubleshooting the MSTS: • Digital-Volt-Ohmmeter (DVOM). The voltmeter must have a minimum input impedance of 10-megohms. (A digital voltmeter and ohmmeter are normally included in a multimeter test instrument.) • Tachometer with inductive trigger signal sensor. • Test light that has a low current draw as described in Figure 10.

• Vacuum pump with a gauge. This vacuum pump is held and operated with the hand. The gauge must be able to indicate a gauge pressure (vacuum) of 34 kPa (10 inHg)]. See Table 2. • Spark tester. The spark tester (ST125) is used to check the secondary ignition. • Diagnostic Trouble Code tester. Rinda Technologies CodeMate Tester® (Hyster part number 3071579) or equivalent.

Table 2. Pressure Conversion Chart Absolute Pressure Vacuum and pressure readings often cause confusion because everyone does not use the same point of reference. Absolute pressure is gauge pressure plus the atmospheric pressure. Standard atmospheric pressure is also called the standard barometric pressure and is equal to 101.325 kPa (14.695 psi) or [29.92 inches of mercury (Hg)] at sea level. The reference point for these measurements is zero pressure or an absolute vacuum. The conversion formula used in converting inches of mercury to kPa is: Inches of Hg × 3.37685 = kPa Service people normally use gauge pressure as the reference point which does not add the atmospheric pressure. The reference point for gauge pressure is atmospheric pressure. It is important to know when reading a pressure chart whether the units are given in absolute pressure or gauge pressure. The gauges used by most service people indicate gauge pressure. However, most gauges calibrated in a metric scale (kilopascals) and used to measure less than atmospheric pressure normally indicate absolute pressure as shown in the chart. A gauge calibrated in inches of Hg and used to measure a vacuum begins at zero and increases its indication as the vacuum increases as shown in the gauge pressure column of the chart. An additional cause of confusion is that the manifold pressure gauge for an engine with a turbocharger is normally calibrated for absolute pressure for both kilopascals and inches of Hg. The MAP sensor described in this section is also calibrated for absolute pressure, but the service person doing checking or troubleshooting will often be using gauges calibrated for gauge pressure.

10

Gauge Pressure

kPa

Inches of Hg

Inches of Hg

121.57

36

6

114.81

34

4

108.06

32

2

101.31

30

0

94.55

28

2

87.80

26

4

81.04

24

6

74.29

22

8

67.54

20

10

60.78

18

12

54.03

16

14

47.28

14

16

40.52

12

18

33.77

10

20

27.01

8

22

20.26

6

24

13.51

4

26

Pressure ↑ ----↓ Vacuum


2200 SRM 765

Troubleshooting

Where to Start There are three things to do to start troubleshooting. The first item is to become familiar with the electronic engine control system. Secondly, always start your work with a good visual/ physical inspection. See the following paragraph for more explanation. The last item on the Where-To-Start list is the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check.

Visual/Physical Inspection

CAUTION If the ammeter indicates less than 0.3 amps (300 milliamps), the test light can be used. If the ammeter indicates more than 0.3 amps (300 milliamps), the test light cannot be used because it can cause damage to the electronic components. 1. DC AMPS 2. TEST LIGHT

3. BATTERY

Figure 10. Current Flow Test for Test Light

MSTS The MSTS has the ability to perform some troubleshooting of itself and of other parts of the system. When a problem is found, the MSTS turns the malfunction indicator lamp in the CodeMate Tester to ON. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is kept in the memory of the MSTS.

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE Before using this part of the manual, you need to know the information and the correct troubleshooting procedures. If the correct troubleshooting procedures are not followed, as described in this section, it can result in replacement of good parts.

A careful visual and physical inspection must be done as part of any diagnostic procedure. This can cause the repair of a problem without further steps. Inspect all vacuum hoses for correct routing, restrictions, cuts or faulty connections. Be sure to inspect hoses that are difficult to see beneath the air filter. Inspect all wires in the engine compartment for proper connections, damaged spots, or contact with sharp edges or the exhaust manifolds. This visual/physical inspection is very important. It must be done carefully.

Knowledge/Tools Required To use this manual most effectively, a general understanding of basic electrical circuits and circuit testing tools is required. One should be familiar with wiring diagrams, the meaning of voltage, ohms, amps, the basic theories of electricity, and understand what happens in an open or shorted wire. To perform the troubleshooting procedures, the use of a diagnostic CodeMate Tester is required. A tachometer, test lamp, ohmmeter, digital voltmeter with 10 megohms impedance, vacuum gauge, and jumper wires are also required. Special tools that are required for system service and the ones described above are shown at the end of this section.

Damage from Static Discharge (Static Electricity) CAUTION To prevent damage to the MSTS by static electricity, do not touch MSTS connector pins. Electronic components used in control systems use a very low voltage and can be easily damaged by static discharge or static electricity. Less than 100 volts

11


Troubleshooting

2200 SRM 765

of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components. There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and by induction. An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a car seat; in which a charge of as much as 2 to 5,000 volts can build up. Charging by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off, leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges of either type can cause damage; therefore, it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components.

TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION The troubleshooting diagrams and function checks in this section are designed to find a faulty circuit or component through logic based on the process of elimination. The diagrams are prepared with the requirement that the vehicle functioned correctly at the time of assembly and that there are no multiple failures. The MSTS does constant testing on certain control functions. The MSTS communicates the source of a malfunction with Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC). The DTC’s are two digit numbers that can range from 12 to 99. When a malfunction is found by the MSTS, a DTC is set and the CodeMate Tester malfunction indicator lamp is turned ON. DTC codes for this MSTS are shown in Table 3.

Table 3. MSTS Diagnostic Codes Code

Description

12

Indicates that the fault monitor system is operating.

No

14

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Circuit - Low Temp Indicated

Yes

15

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Circuit - High Temp Indicated

Yes

34

MAP Sensor Circuit

Yes

41

Ignition Control (IC) System. Open EST Circuit

Yes

42

Ignition Control (IC) System.

Yes

51

Checksum Error

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) The malfunction indicator lamp on the CodeMate Tester has three functions: 1. To test that the lamp is functioning 2. To indicate a malfunction has occurred 3. To display the diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) kept by the MSTS which help the technician troubleshoot system problems. Follow the steps described in Connecting CodeMate Tester to install it onto the engine’s Diagnostic Link Connector.

Connecting CodeMate Tester 1. Turn the engine ignition switch to OFF. 2. Locate the engine diagnostic connector.

12

Indicator Lamp ON

Grounded EST Circuit, Open or Grounded Bypass Circuit.

Yes 3. Place the CodeMate Tester test switch to OFF and plug the CodeMate into the diagnostic connector. NOTE: Make sure to slide the CodeMate Tester completely into the diagnostic connector so that the connector’s locking tab clicks into place. As a bulb and system check, the lamp comes ON with the ignition switch ON and the engine not running. When the engine is started, the lamp turns OFF. If the lamp remains ON, the system has found a problem. This problem is referred to as a current DTC. If the problem goes away, the lamp goes out after ten seconds. In either condition a DTC remains in the MSTS. When the lamp remains ON while the engine is running, or when there is a malfunction, the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check must be done.


2200 SRM 765

Troubleshooting

When a problem is not regular or constant, the malfunction indicator lamp will turn ON for approximately ten seconds and then will turn OFF. However, the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) will be kept in the memory of the MSTS until the DTC’s are cleared (see DTC clearing in this section). A DTC that is not constant can reset. If it is a problem that is not constant, a DTC diagram is not used. When troubleshooting is complete, turn the ignition switch to OFF, and disconnect the CodeMate Tester.

Use the following steps to read trouble codes.

Reading Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)

4. Observe the sequence of flashes on the CodeMate malfunction indicator.

CAUTION To prevent MSTS damage, the key must be OFF when disconnecting or reconnecting MSTS power. The diagnostic connector is used to communicate with the MSTS. See Figure 11. The diagnostic connector is installed on the bracket near the MSTS. It is used in the assembly plant to receive information in checking that the engine is operating correctly before it leaves the plant. The DTC(s) kept in the MSTS’s memory can be read with a CodeMate Tester connected to the diagnostic connector.

1. Install the CodeMate Tester into the diagnostic connector. See the preceding section, Connecting CodeMate Tester. 2. Turn the ignition key to ON but do not start the engine. 3. Place the CodeMate Tester test switch to ON. This puts the MSTS in the diagnostic mode.

At this point, the malfunction indicator lamp on the CodeMate Tester flashes DTC 12 three times consecutively (see Figure 12). The following is the flash sequence for DTC 12: long pause, flash, pause, flash-flash, long pause, flash, pause, flash-flash, long pause, flash, pause, flash-flash. DTC 12 (which means no crankshaft rpm signal) indicates that the MSTS’s diagnostic system is operating correctly at this time. If DTC 12 is not indicated, a problem is in the diagnostic system itself. Following the output of DTC 12, if additional codes are stored, the malfunction indicator lamp flashes the DTC three times. If more than one DTC is stored in the MSTS’s memory, the DTC’s are flashed starting with the lowest DTC set and finishing with the highest DTC set. When all DTC’s have been flashed, the sequence starts over again with DTC 12. 5. When testing is complete, place the CodeMate test switch to OFF, turn the ignition key to OFF, and disconnect the CodeMate Tester from the diagnostic connector.

1. DIAGNOSTIC CONNECTOR

6. Secure the diagnostic connector to the MSTS bracket.

Figure 11. Diagnostic Connector

13


Troubleshooting

1. LONG PAUSE

2200 SRM 765

2. FLASH

3. PAUSE

4. FLASH-FLASH

Figure 12. Diagnostic Trouble Code-12 Example

Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC’s) To clear the stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes from the MSTS, do the following. 1. Install the CodeMate Tester into the diagnostic connector. See the preceding section Connecting CodeMate Tester. 2. Turn the ignition key to ON, but do not start the engine. 3. Place the CodeMate test switch to the ON position. 4. Turn the ignition switch to OFF for five seconds. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON and verify that DTC-12 is the only code in the MSTS memory.

no trouble codes shown. The data are an average of display values from normally operating vehicles and show a display of a normally operating system. After the visual/physical inspection, the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check is the starting point for all troubleshooting procedures. The correct procedure to find a problem is to follow two basic steps. 1. Are the On-Board Diagnostics working? This is determined by doing the OBD System Check. Since this is the starting point for the troubleshooting procedures, always begin here. 2. Is there a Diagnostic Trouble Code? If there is a DTC, go directly to the flowchart for that DTC number. This determines if the fault is still there.

6. When testing is complete, place the CodeMate test switch to OFF, turn the ignition key to OFF, and disconnect the CodeMate Tester from the diagnostic connector.

Test Description

7. Secure the diagnostic connector to the MSTS bracket.

1. The MIL should be ON steady with the ignition ON and the engine OFF. To isolate the malfunction if the MIL does not light, refer to Figure 15.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM CHECK The On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check is a troubleshooting method to find a problem caused by a malfunction in the electronic engine control system. It must be the starting point for any troubleshooting. See Figure 13. The data shown in Table 1 can be used for comparison after doing the troubleshooting checks and finding the on-board diagnostics working correctly with

14

The numbers below are a reference to the numbers in bold in Figure 13.

2. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 12 means no rpm reference pulses from the ignition module. This is correct when engine is not running. 3. For list of valid DTC’s, refer to the MSTS Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Table 3. An invalid DTC may be the result of a faulty MSTS. 4. If the engine does not start, refer to the troubleshooting diagram (Figure 18).


2200 SRM 765

Troubleshooting

Figure 13. On-Board Diagnostic System Check

15


No Malfunction Indicator Lamp

2200 SRM 765

No Malfunction Indicator Lamp CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the CodeMate Tester test switch is in the OFF position and the CodeMate is plugged into the diagnostic connector, the malfunction indicator lamp is

ON when the ignition is ON and engine is not running. See Figure 14. The MSTS controls the lamp and turns it ON by connecting it to ground through pin 3B.

NOTE: THE NUMBER IN FRONT OF THE PIN DENOTES THE CONNECTOR. FOR EXAMPLE, 6D IS PIN D ON THE 6-PIN CONNECTOR WHILE 5E IS PIN E ON THE 5-PIN CONNECTOR. Figure 14. No Malfunction Indicator Lamp Circuit

TEST DESCRIPTION The numbers below are a reference to the numbers in bold in Figure 15. 1. This tests the circuits to the MSTS and diagnostic connector for voltage.

16

2. This tests the electronic driver circuit for the malfunction indicator lamp. 3. Test the CodeMate on another vehicle. 4. Test for an open circuit between wire harness connectors.


2200 SRM 765

No Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Figure 15. No Malfunction Indicator Lamp

17


No DTC-12, Malfunction Indicator Lamp ON

2200 SRM 765

No DTC-12, Malfunction Indicator Lamp ON CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the CodeMate Tester switch is in the OFF position and the CodeMate is plugged into the diagnostic connector, the malfunction indicator lamp is ON when the ignition is ON and engine is not running. See Figure 16. The MSTS controls the lamp and turns it ON by connecting it to ground through pin 3B.

With the diagnostic connector pin B connected to ground through pin A, the malfunction indicator flashes a DTC-12, followed by any trouble codes kept in memory. A steady light means a short to ground in the light control circuit between MSTS connector pin 3B and diagnostic connector pin E, or an open circuit between MSTS connector pin 3C and diagnostic connector pin B.

NOTE: THE NUMBER IN FRONT OF THE PIN DENOTES THE CONNECTOR. FOR EXAMPLE, 6D IS PIN D ON THE 6-PIN CONNECTOR WHILE 5E IS PIN E ON THE 5-PIN CONNECTOR. Figure 16. No DTC-12, Malfunction Indicator Lamp ON Circuit

TEST DESCRIPTION The numbers below are a reference to the numbers in bold in Figure 17. 1. If the malfunction indicator lamp is ON with the MSTS 3-pin connector disconnected, there may

18

be a short in the circuit between MSTS connector pin 3B and diagnostic connector pin E. If the lamp is off, there may be a problem with either the connector or the MSTS.


2200 SRM 765

Starter Rotates Engine, Engine Does Not Run

2. If the malfunction indicator is OFF, there is a short between MSTS connector pin 3C and diagnostic connector pin B.

3. If the problem is not fixed by Step 2, replace the MSTS.

Figure 17. No DTC-12, Malfunction Indicator Lamp ON

Starter Rotates Engine, Engine Does Not Run TEST DESCRIPTION If a tachometer has been connected to the TACH CONN., disconnect it before doing this test. See Figure 18. The numbers below are a reference to the numbers in bold in Figure 19.

1. Check a minimum of two spark plug wires to make sure that one of the spark plug wire does not have an open circuit (Spark Tester ST-125).

19


Starter Rotates Engine, Engine Does Not Run

2200 SRM 765

Figure 18. Starter Rotates Engine, Engine Does Not Run Circuit 2. If a spark occurs when the electronic spark timing (EST) connector is disconnected, the output from the sensing coil is too low for EST operation. 3. A spark indicates that the fault is in the distributor cap or the rotor. 4. The normal voltage at the C and the + terminals is battery voltage. A low voltage can indicate: a. An open circuit or a high resistance circuit from the ignition switch to the distributor to the ignition coil or b. An open circuit in the primary winding of the ignition coil. If the voltage at C is less than battery voltage, and there is 10 volts or more at +, there is an open circuit from C to the ignition coil or an open circuit in the primary winding of the ignition coil. 5. Use the test light to check for a short circuit in the ignition module. Check for approximately 12 volts between the TACH CONN. and ground. If the voltage is low (approximately 1 to 6 volts), there can be a fault in the ignition module. This

20

condition can cause a failure in the ignition coil from too much heat. If there is an open circuit in the primary winding of the ignition coil, a low voltage can leak through the ignition module from the B+ to the TACH CONN. terminal. 6. The ignition module normally goes ON when 1.5 to 8 volts is applied to terminal P from the sensing coil. When the ignition module is ON, the voltage between the TACH CONN. and ground will normally decrease to 7 to 9 volts. This test checks if the sensing coil or the ignition module has a fault. When 1.5 to 8 volts is momentarily applied to terminal P, this voltage acts as a trigger voltage that replaces the voltage from the sensing coil. The procedure shows a test light, but any low voltage, low current source can be used as a trigger voltage. 7. When the momentary trigger voltage is removed, a spark is normally generated through the ignition coil. If no spark occurs, replace the ignition coil. If a spark occurs, check the sensing coil and the rotating timer core.


2200 SRM 765

Starter Rotates Engine, Engine Does Not Run

Figure 19. Starter Rotates Engine, Engines Does Not Run (Sheet 1 of 2)

21


Starter Rotates Engine, Engine Does Not Run

Figure 19. Starter Rotates Engine, Engines Does Not Run (Sheet 2 of 2)

22

2200 SRM 765


2200 SRM 765

DTC-14 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) (Low Temperature Indicated)

DTC-14 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) (Low Temperature Indicated) DTC-14 is set if the signal voltage indicates a coolant temperature below 5 C ( 23 F) after the engine runs for three minutes.

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The Engine Coolant Temperature sensor (ECT) uses a thermistor to control the signal voltage to the MSTS module. See Figure 20. The MSTS module

applies a 5-volt reference voltage (terminal 6D) to the ECT. When the engine coolant is cold, the thermistor resistance is higher than when the engine coolant is at operating temperature. As the temperature of the engine coolant increases after the engine is started, the resistance decreases and the signal voltage decreases. When the engine is operating at 82 to 95 C (180 to 203 F), the signal voltage is approximately 1.5 to 2.0 volts.

NOTE: THE NUMBER IN FRONT OF THE PIN DENOTES THE CONNECTOR. FOR EXAMPLE, 6D IS PIN D ON THE 6-PIN CONNECTOR WHILE 5E IS PIN E ON THE 5-PIN CONNECTOR. Figure 20. ECT Sensor Troubleshooting Circuit

TEST DESCRIPTION The numbers below are a reference to the numbers in bold in Figure 21. 1. This step determines if there is a fault in the wiring or the MSTS module or if the fault is in the ECT.

2. Make sure the electrical connections do not have dirt and corrosion. If an ohmmeter is connected across terminals A and B of the ECT, the resistance normally decreases as the temperature of the engine coolant increases. 3. This step checks if there is a fault in the wiring to the ECT or the sensor ground.

23


DTC-14 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) (Low Temperature Indicated)

Figure 21. ECT Sensor Troubleshooting Diagram (Low Temperature)

24

2200 SRM 765


2200 SRM 765

DTC-15 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECT) (High Temperature Indicated)

DTC-15 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECT) (High Temperature Indicated) DTC-15 is set if the signal voltage indicates a coolant temperature above 135 C (275 F) for three seconds.

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The Engine Coolant Temperature sensor (ECT) uses a thermistor to control the signal voltage to the MSTS module. See Figure 22. The MSTS module applies a 5-volt reference voltage (terminal 6D) to

the ECT. When the engine coolant is at operating temperature, the thermistor resistance is lower than when the engine coolant is cold. As the temperature of the engine coolant increases after the engine is started, the resistance decreases and the signal voltage decreases. When the engine is operating at 82 to 95 C (180 to 203 F), the signal voltage is approximately 1.5 to 2.0 volts.

NOTE: THE NUMBER IN FRONT OF THE PIN DENOTES THE CONNECTOR. FOR EXAMPLE, 6D IS PIN D ON THE 6-PIN CONNECTOR WHILE 5E IS PIN E ON THE 5-PIN CONNECTOR. Figure 22. ECT Sensor Troubleshooting Circuit

TEST DESCRIPTION The numbers below are a reference to the numbers in bold in Figure 23. 1. This step determines if there is a fault in the wiring or the MSTS module or if the fault is in the ECT.

2. Make sure the electrical connections do not have dirt and corrosion. If an ohmmeter is connected across the terminals A and B of the ECT, the resistance normally decreases as the temperature of the engine coolant increases.

25


DTC-15 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECT) (High Temperature Indicated)

Figure 23. ECT Sensor Troubleshooting Diagram (High Temperature)

26

2200 SRM 765


2200 SRM 765

DTC-34 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

DTC-34 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the load on the engine changes, the pressure in the intake manifold changes. See Figure 24. This pressure is less than the atmospheric pressure. The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor measures the changes in the intake manifold pressure and converts these changes to a voltage signal. The MSTS module sends a reference signal (5.0 volts) to the MAP sensor. When the manifold pressure changes, the electrical signal of the MAP sensor changes and the signal is received by the MSTS module. When the engine is at idle speed and does not have a load on it, the normal signal voltage from the MAP

sensor is approximately 1.0 volt. When the throttle valve is fully opened, the intake manifold pressure is higher (less vacuum) and the signal voltage from the MAP sensor is approximately 4.5 volts. When the ignition switch is turned to ON, the initial voltage signal from the MAP sensor indicates the barometric pressure (BARO signal) to the MSTS module. The MSTS module remembers the barometric pressure (BARO signal) after the engine is running. The MSTS module then automatically adjusts the ignition timing for different altitudes and atmospheric conditions.

NOTE: THE NUMBER IN FRONT OF THE PIN DENOTES THE CONNECTOR. FOR EXAMPLE, 6C IS PIN C ON THE 6-PIN CONNECTOR WHILE 5E IS PIN E ON THE 5-PIN CONNECTOR. Figure 24. MAP Sensor Troubleshooting Circuit

TEST DESCRIPTION The numbers below are a reference to the numbers in bold in Figure 25. 1. This step determines if there is adequate vacuum supply to the MAP sensor. 2. This step checks for the 5-volt reference signal in the MAP sensor harness connection.

3. This step checks for an open circuit from pin A to ground or an open or shorted wire between pin C and pin 6F. See Figure 24. 4. These steps are checking the MAP signal circuit for faults. 5. Low manifold vacuum may result from a restriction in the MAP sensor hose or from vacuum leaks in the engine air intake system.

27


DTC-34 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

Figure 25. MAP Sensor Troubleshooting Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)

28

2200 SRM 765


2200 SRM 765

DTC-34 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

Figure 25. MAP Sensor Troubleshooting Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)

29


DTC-41 Electronic Spark Timing (EST) Open Circuit

2200 SRM 765

DTC-41 Electronic Spark Timing (EST) Open Circuit DTC-41 is set if there is an open circuit in the electronic spark timing circuit.

Code 41 is set and the MSTS does not go into the EST operation mode.

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

If the bypass wire is open or grounded, the ignition module does not change to EST mode, and a Code 42 is indicated.

When the system is running on the ignition module, there is no voltage on the bypass wire and the ignition module grounds the EST signal. See Figure 26. If the MSTS senses a voltage on the EST circuit, a

If the EST circuit has a short circuit to ground, there is no EST signal, and a Code 42 is indicated.

Figure 26. EST Troubleshooting, Open Circuit

TEST DESCRIPTION The numbers below are a reference to the numbers in bold in Figure 27. 1. A Code 41 is indicated if there is an open circuit in the EST circuit. This test determines if the Code 41 is a real fault.

30

2. This test checks that the ground path through the ignition module is correct. A short circuit from MSTS connector pin 6B to ground also indicates less than 500 Ohms.


2200 SRM 765

DTC-41 Electronic Spark Timing (EST) Open Circuit

Figure 27. DTC-41 Troubleshooting Diagram

31


DTC-42 Electronic Spark Timing (EST) Grounded Circuit

2200 SRM 765

DTC-42 Electronic Spark Timing (EST) Grounded Circuit A DTC 42 is set if the EST circuit is grounded or if there is an open circuit or a short circuit in the bypass circuit.

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the system is running on the ignition module, there is no voltage on the bypass wire and the ignition module grounds the EST signal. See Figure 28. If the MSTS senses a voltage on the EST circuit, a Code 41 is set and the MSTS does not go into the EST mode.

When the engine is being started and approximately 400 rpm is sensed, bypass voltage is applied by the MSTS. The EST circuit is no longer grounded in the ignition module and the EST circuit voltage normally has a variation during operation. If the bypass wire is open or grounded, the ignition module will not change to EST mode and a Code 42 is indicated. If the EST circuit has a short circuit to ground, there is no ignition signal and a Code 42 is indicated.

Figure 28. EST Troubleshooting, Grounded Circuit

TEST DESCRIPTION The numbers below are a reference to the numbers in bold in Figure 29. 1. A Code 42 is indicated if there is an open circuit or a short circuit in the bypass circuit or if the EST circuit is grounded. This test determines if the Code 42 is a real fault.

32

2. This test checks that the ground path through the ignition module is correct. 3. This test checks to see if the IC module makes the switch in resistance. 4. This test checks for short circuits to ground in the EST circuit, opens in the bypass circuit, and faulty connections in the IC module.


2200 SRM 765

DTC-42 Electronic Spark Timing (EST) Grounded Circuit

Figure 29. DTC-42 Troubleshooting Diagram

33


Distributor Repair

2200 SRM 765

DTC-51 MSTS Failure CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The Electronic Control Module (MSTS) does an internal check. If the internal check fails, the MSTS sets DTC 51.

1. This step checks the MSTS. If a Code-51 is set and all connections are correct, replace the MSTS.

The number below is a reference to the number in bold in Figure 30.

Figure 30. MSTS Failure

Distributor Repair A distributor with a separate ignition coil is used on all MSTS engines. The ignition coil is connected to the rotor in the distributor through a high-voltage wire. The operation of the ignition module and the magnetic pulse generator is described under Operation at the beginning of this section. When the current in the primary circuit of the ignition coil quickly decreases, the induction in the secondary circuit sends a high voltage pulse (35,000 volts) to the rotor in the distributor. The rotor is aligned with one of the leads to a spark plug wire and this high voltage pulse is sent to one of the spark plugs.

REMOVE CAUTION Carefully lift and release lock tabs on connectors to distributor. Lock tabs can be easily broken if too much force is applied with a screwdriver or other tool. Never permit TACH CONN. terminal to touch ground. Ignition module or ignition coil can be damaged. 1. Disconnect battery negative (ground) cable. 2. If removal of the spark plug wires is not required for the repairs, leave them connected to distributor cap. Remove two capscrews that fasten distributor cap to distributor. Move distributor cap away from work area.

34


2200 SRM 765

Distributor Repair

3. Disconnect distributor 4-terminal connector. 4. Disconnect ignition coil connector. 5. Remove bolt and clamp that hold distributor in engine. Make a note of the positions of rotor to distributor housing and distributor to engine. Slowly pull distributor from engine until rotor just stops turning counterclockwise and make a note of the position of rotor. This position must be used when distributor is installed again.

5. Remove retainer from housing. driver as a prybar.

Use a screw-

6. Disconnect sensing coil from ignition module.

CAUTION Carefully lift and release lock tab on connector to sensing coil. Lock tab can be easily broken if too much force is applied with a screwdriver or other tool.

DISASSEMBLE

7. Use a screwdriver to lift lock tab. Remove sensing coil.

1. Remove rotor. See Figure 31. Make a match mark on gear and shaft so they can be assembled in the same position.

8. Remove two screws that hold ignition module in housing. Remove ignition module.

INSPECT Inspect shaft for a loose fit between shaft and its bushing in housing. If bushing or shaft is worn so that shaft moves from side to side in bushing, replace shaft or housing. Inspect housing for cracks or damage.

ASSEMBLE 1. Apply silicon grease to bottom of ignition module. See Figure 31. Install ignition module into housing and tighten two screws. NOTE: Hyster Part No. 304408 is a silicon bearing grease used between electronic components and their heat sinks. A small container of silicon grease is enclosed in the package with a new ignition module. 2. Install sensing coil. Tab on bottom of sensing coil fits into anchor hole in housing. 3. Connect sensing coil to ignition module. Make sure that lock tab on connector is fastened. 1. CAP 2. ROTOR 3. SHAFT/TIMER CORE 4. RETAINER 5. SHIELD 6. COIL 7. POLE PIECE

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

IGNITION MODULE ALIGNMENT PIN HOUSING WASHER SEAL DRIVE GEAR ROLL PIN GASKET

Figure 31. Distributor 2. Use a punch to remove roll pin from shaft. 3. Remove gear. 4. Remove shaft with timer core from housing.

4. Install shield. 5. Install retainer. 6. Install shaft assembly into housing. 7. Install washer and seal on housing. 8. Install gear on end of shaft. 9. Align marks on gear and shaft. Install roll pin. Turn shaft assembly and make sure teeth of timer core on shaft assembly do not touch pole piece.

35


Distributor Repair 10. Install gasket on gear. 11. Install rotor on shaft.

INSTALL 1. Put rotor and distributor in the same position as it was removed from engine. If engine has been rotated after distributor was removed, the following procedure must be used before distributor is installed again: a. Remove No. 1 spark plug. b. Put a finger over No. 1 spark plug hole and slowly rotate engine until pressure is felt on compression stroke. c. Align timing mark on crankshaft pulley to 0 (TDC) on engine timing indicator. d. Turn distributor rotor to point between positions on distributor cap for No. 1 and No. 4 spark plug leads. e. Install distributor in engine. Rotor and shaft will rotate a few degrees when gear on distributor shaft engages drive gear on engine cam. Timing is correct if rotor points at the position on distributor cap for No. 1 spark plug lead. 2. Install clamp and bolt. Tighten bolt with your hand. 3. Install distributor 4-terminal connector. 4. Install ignition coil connector. 5. Install distributor cap and two capscrews. If spark plug wires were removed, install them in correct sequence. 6. Connect battery negative cable.

36

2200 SRM 765 7. Start engine and check engine timing. See the following paragraphs about Ignition Timing. 8. Tighten bolt for distributor clamp to 43 N•m (31.7 lbf ft).

IGNITION TIMING WARNING Do not touch moving parts (fan, belt, shafts, pulleys). To check the initial ignition timing set point, do the following. 1. Warm engine to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn engine’s ignition switch to OFF position. 3. Make sure that CodeMate test switch is in OFF position. 4. Plug CodeMate into diagnostic connector in engine compartment. 5. Place CodeMate test switch in ON position and start engine. 6. Check initial timing set point with a timing light. The correct setting for initial timing set point is 8 BTDC for 3.0L engine and 0 TDC for 4.3L engine. 7. If timing is not correct, loosen clamp that holds distributor housing. Rotate housing right or left to get correct timing. Tighten clamp when timing is correct. 8. Turn ignition key to OFF position. 9. Remove CodeMate Tester from diagnostic connector and place diagnostic connector into protective cover.


2200 SRM 765

Ignition Module Repair

Ignition Module Repair TEST FOR FAULT NOTE: The ignition module can be checked in the distributor. A test light and three jumper wires are needed to make the tests. The battery in the vehicle must be fully charged so that the starter rotates the engine at the normal speed. 1. Disconnect 4-terminal connector from distributor. See Figure 32. Use two jumper wires between distributor and 4-terminal connector to connect the following circuits:

REFERENCE (pin C) GROUND (pin A) 2. Connect test light to a 12-volt positive source. Start engine. Touch probe of test light to pin B in 4-terminal connector on distributor. When 12 volts are applied through test light to pin B (BYPASS), ignition module changes to EST mode. The EST connection (pin D) is open and engine will normally stop. This step checks the BYPASS operation of the ignition module.

Figure 32. Ignition System Troubleshooting 3. Use a jumper to connect pin D (EST) to pin C (REFERENCE) at distributor. Apply 12 volts through test light to pin B (BYPASS) as described in Step 2. Start engine. If engine starts, this step checks that EST circuit in ignition module is good. 4. Remove test light from pin B (BYPASS) while engine is running. If engine stops, this check shows that ignition module internally changes EST circuit to ground. Since there is a jumper wire between pin D (EST) to pin C (REFERENCE), the

REFERENCE signal is also sent to ground and engine stops. 5. If any tests described in Step 2, Step 3, or Step 4 do not work as indicated, check wiring harness for a short circuit or an open circuit. If wiring harness is good, replace ignition module. 6. When the tests are complete, connect system for normal operation.

37


Sensing Coil Repair

2200 SRM 765

REPLACE 1. Remove distributor cap and rotor. 2. Remove two screws that hold ignition module in distributor. 3. Lift ignition module and disconnect connections. Make a note of the connections so that they can be correctly connected again. Remove ignition module from distributor. NOTE: Do not remove silicon grease from ignition module or distributor if the same ignition module will be installed again. If a new ignition module is installed, a small container of silicon grease is in the

package. Clean old silicon grease and apply a new layer of silicon grease to ignition module and distributor housing. This silicon grease is necessary for cooling the ignition module. 4. Connect connectors in distributor to ignition module. Make sure connectors are the same as when they were removed. 5. Install ignition module in distributor. 6. Install two screws that fasten ignition module in distributor. 7. Install distributor cap and rotor.

Sensing Coil Repair TEST FOR FAULT 1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Remove distributor cap. Disconnect connection from sensing coil to ignition module. 3. Check resistance of sensing coil with an ohmmeter. Connect ohmmeter to sensing coil connections as shown in step 1 of Figure 33. Check resistance between both connections and ground. Ohmmeter will indicate infinity for both connections, if sensing coil is good. 4. Connect ohmmeter across both sensing coil connections as shown in step 2 of Figure 33. If ohmmeter does not indicate 500 to 1500 ohms, replace sensing coil. Check wires for a loose connection.

REPLACE Remove and disassemble distributor as described in Distributor Repair. A. STEP 1

B. STEP 2

1. SENSING COIL CONNECTIONS

2. OHMMETER

Figure 33. Test Sensing Coil

38


2200 SRM 765

Ignition Coil Repair

Ignition Coil Repair TEST FOR FAULT 1. Disconnect battery negative (ground) cable. 2. Disconnect high voltage wire. 3. Disconnect connectors at ignition coil. 4. Set ohmmeter on one of the higher scales. Connect ohmmeter as shown in step 1 of Figure 34. If ohmmeter indication is less than infinity, install a new ignition coil.

5. Set ohmmeter on one of the low scales. Connect ohmmeter as shown in step 2 of Figure 34. If ohmmeter indication is greater than one ohm, install a new ignition coil. 6. Set ohmmeter on one of the middle scales. Connect ohmmeter as shown in step 3 of Figure 34. If ohmmeter indication is infinity (open circuit), install a new ignition coil.

REMOVE 1. Turn key switch to OFF. Apply parking brake. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Put tags for identification on connectors and disconnect them from coil.

CAUTION Do not damage high voltage wires (spark plug wires) during removal. Hold wire by boot near end of wire. Rotate boot before pulling it and connection from terminal. 4. Remove high voltage wires. 5. Remove nuts (or capscrews) that fasten bracket for ignition coil to engine. 6. Remove ignition coil and bracket assembly from engine. 7. Use a drill and punch to remove two rivets that fasten bracket to coil.

INSTALL A. STEP 1 B. STEP 2

C. STEP 3

1. CLEAN METAL FOR GROUND CONNECTION 2. OHMMETER

3. C AND TACH CONNECTOR 4. B AND + TERMINALS

Figure 34. Ignition Coil

1. Install original bracket on replacement coil using screws (supplied with replacement coil). 2. Install ignition coil assembly on engine with nuts (or capscrews). 3. Install control wire connectors and high voltage wire on ignition coil. 4. Connect negative (ground) battery cable.

39


ECT Sensor Replacement

2200 SRM 765

MSTS Module Repair NOTE: See the TROUBLESHOOTING descriptions to check the operation of the MSTS module. The following paragraphs describe the removal and installation of the MSTS module.

INSTALL

REMOVE

2. Connect three connectors at MSTS module. Connect battery negative cable.

1. Install MSTS module on its mount surface and install two bolts.

CAUTION Never connect or disconnect wiring harness at MSTS module when key switch is ON. Never connect jumper wires or test instruments to MSTS module when key switch is ON. The best procedure is to disconnect battery negative cable when removing or installing electrical components. Do not touch connector pins. MSTS module can be damaged with an electrostatic discharge. MSTS connector locations and mounting holes are shown in Figure 35. 1. Disconnect battery negative cable. Disconnect three connectors at MSTS module. 2. Remove two bolts that fasten MSTS module to its mount. Remove MSTS module.

Figure 35. MSTS Module

ECT Sensor Replacement WARNING The coolant can be very hot. Use caution to prevent personal injury.

4. Connect connector at ECT. Connect battery negative cable. 5. Fill radiator with coolant as required.

NOTE: See the TROUBLESHOOTING descriptions to check the operation of the ECT sensor. The following paragraphs describe the disconnection or the removal and installation of the ECT sensor. 1. Disconnect battery negative cable. Disconnect connector at ECT sensor. See Figure 36. 2. Use a wrench and carefully loosen ECT from coolant manifold. 3. Use a liquid sealant on threads and install ECT in its hole in coolant manifold and carefully tighten it with a wrench.

40

1. TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR 3. LOCK TAB Figure 36. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECT)


2200 SRM 765

MAP Sensor Replacement

MAP Sensor Replacement NOTE: The MAP sensor is on the bracket that is on top of the valve cover. 1. Disconnect battery negative cable. Disconnect vacuum hose from MAP sensor. Disconnect electrical connector at MAP sensor. See Figure 37. 2. Remove screws that fasten MAP to its mount. Remove MAP sensor. 3. Install MAP sensor on its mount surface and install screws. 4. Connect electrical connector at MAP sensor. Connect vacuum hose to MAP sensor. Connect battery negative cable.

1. SENSOR 2. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR Figure 37. Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

41


NOTES ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

42



PERIODIC MAINTENANCE S3.50-5.50XM [E004, F004]

PART NO. 1529971

8000 SRM 987


Periodic Maintenance

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS General ............................................................................................................................................................... Serial Number Data ...................................................................................................................................... How to Move Disabled Lift Truck ................................................................................................................. How to Tow Lift Truck............................................................................................................................... How to Put Lift Truck on Blocks................................................................................................................... How to Raise Drive Tires .......................................................................................................................... How to Raise Steering Tires ..................................................................................................................... Maintenance Schedule....................................................................................................................................... Maintenance Procedures Every 8 Hours or Daily............................................................................................ How to Make Checks With Engine Stopped................................................................................................. Engine Oil .................................................................................................................................................. Hydraulic System Oil ................................................................................................................................ Cooling System Reservoir Level ............................................................................................................... Fuel System ............................................................................................................................................... Battery ....................................................................................................................................................... Tires and Wheels ....................................................................................................................................... Forks .......................................................................................................................................................... Adjust..................................................................................................................................................... Hook Fork, Remove............................................................................................................................... Hook Fork, Install ................................................................................................................................. Forks, Mast, and Lift Chains, Inspect ..................................................................................................... Operator Restraint System....................................................................................................................... Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) .................................................................................................... Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................................................................................................... Safety Labels ............................................................................................................................................. Cooling System, Clean Debris from Radiator Core ..................................................................................... How to Make Checks With Engine Running................................................................................................ Gauges, Lights, Horn, and Fuses ............................................................................................................. Engine Oil Pressure .................................................................................................................................. Cooling System Temperature.................................................................................................................... Powershift Transmission Oil level Check ................................................................................................ Control Levers and Pedals........................................................................................................................ Lift System Operation............................................................................................................................... Service Brakes ........................................................................................................................................... Parking Brakes.......................................................................................................................................... Steering System ........................................................................................................................................ Maintenance Procedures Every 500 Hours or 3 Months ................................................................................. Engine Oil and Filter, GM V-6 Engines ....................................................................................................... Sideshift Carriage Lubrication ..................................................................................................................... Tilt Cylinder Lubrication .............................................................................................................................. Lift Chain Lubrication .................................................................................................................................. Engine Oil and Filter, Perkins Diesel Engine.............................................................................................. Drive Belts ..................................................................................................................................................... Fan Drive Belts ......................................................................................................................................... Perkins Diesel Engine ................................................................................................................................... Alternator Drive Belt ................................................................................................................................ GM 4.3L Engine............................................................................................................................................. Serpentine Drive Belt ............................................................................................................................... Tension Screw Adjustment ................................................................................................................... Hydraulic Tank Breather, Clean and Check ................................................................................................ Brake Fluid ....................................................................................................................................................

Š2007 HYSTER COMPANY

1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 12 12 14 14 14 15 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 18 19 19 19 19 20 21 21 21 22 23 23 23 23 23 23 24 24 24 25 26

i


Table of Contents

Periodic Maintenance

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Lift Chains Wear Check ................................................................................................................................ Forks, Wear and Damage Check................................................................................................................... Mast Lubrication ........................................................................................................................................... Control Levers and Pedals Lubrication........................................................................................................ Steering Axle Lubrication ............................................................................................................................. Fuel System, Checks and Adjustments ........................................................................................................ LPG Carburetor......................................................................................................................................... Fuel Injection (Perkins Engine)................................................................................................................ GM V-6 Engine .......................................................................................................................................... Inching/Brake Pedal ...................................................................................................................................... Steering Tie Rods........................................................................................................................................... Fork Pins and Guides .................................................................................................................................... Wheel Nuts..................................................................................................................................................... Air Filter ........................................................................................................................................................ Battery ........................................................................................................................................................... Maintenance Procedures Every 1000 Hours or 6 Months ............................................................................... Fuel Filter, Replace (Diesel Engine) ............................................................................................................. Fuel System, Remove Air (Perkins 1004.42 Diesel Engine) ....................................................................... Water Separator, Diesel Engine.................................................................................................................... PCV Valve, GM V-6 ....................................................................................................................................... Crankcase Breather, GM V-6 ........................................................................................................................ Valve Clearance, Check and Adjust.............................................................................................................. Differential and Drive Axle Oil..................................................................................................................... Spark Plugs, GM V-6..................................................................................................................................... Ignition Timing .............................................................................................................................................. Cooling System, GM V-6 EPA Compliant Engine........................................................................................ LPG Fuel Filter GM V-6 EPA Compliant Engine, Replace ......................................................................... Inspect Engine Electrical System, Connectors, and FCVS Connection ..................................................... Maintenance Procedures Every 2000 Hours or Annually ............................................................................... Differential Thrust Screw ............................................................................................................................. Hydraulic System .......................................................................................................................................... Hydraulic Oil and Filter, Replace............................................................................................................. Powershift Transmission Oil and Filter, Replace ........................................................................................ Spark Plugs, GM V-6..................................................................................................................................... Cooling System .............................................................................................................................................. Wheel Bearings.............................................................................................................................................. Steering Wheels, Lubrication ................................................................................................................... Drive Wheels, Lubrication ........................................................................................................................ PCV Valve, GM V-6 ....................................................................................................................................... LPG Filter, Replace ....................................................................................................................................... Gasoline Fuel Filter, Replace ........................................................................................................................ Brake Booster Filter, Replace ....................................................................................................................... Differential Oil for Powershift Transmission, Replace................................................................................ Air Filter Element, GM V-6 EPA Compliant Engine................................................................................... Oxygen Sensor GM V-6 EPA Compliant Engine.......................................................................................... Test LPG Regulator Pressure ....................................................................................................................... Inspect Low Pressure Regulator (LPR) for Oil Buildup and Leaks............................................................ Check Throttle Shaft for Sticking................................................................................................................. Inspect Exhaust Manifold and Piping for Leaks ......................................................................................... Safety Procedures When Working Near Mast.................................................................................................. Lift Chain Adjustments .....................................................................................................................................

ii

26 26 26 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 28 28 28 28 28 29 29 29 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 32 32 33 33 33 34 34 34 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 36 36 36 36 36 37 37 38 38 38 40


Periodic Maintenance

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Fuel Injectors Repair ......................................................................................................................................... Lift and Tilt System Leak Check ...................................................................................................................... Lift Cylinders, Leak Check ........................................................................................................................... Tilt System ..................................................................................................................................................... Welding Repairs ................................................................................................................................................. Overhead Guard Changes ................................................................................................................................. Wheel and Tire Replacement ............................................................................................................................ Solid Rubber Tire, Change ............................................................................................................................ Wheels, Install........................................................................................................................................... Adhesives and Sealants ..................................................................................................................................... Hydraulic Oil, Lubricant, and Coolant Specifications .....................................................................................

42 43 43 43 44 45 46 46 46 47 47

This section is for the following models: S3.50-5.50XM [E004, F004]

iii


8000 SRM 987

General

General WARNING Do not make repairs or adjustments unless you have both authorization and training. Repairs and adjustments that are not correct can make a dangerous operating condition. Do not operate a lift truck that needs repairs. Report the need for repairs immediately. If repair is necessary, put a DO NOT OPERATE tag in the operator’s area. Remove the key from the key switch. This section contains a Maintenance Schedule and instructions for maintenance and inspection. The Maintenance Schedule has time intervals for inspection, lubrication, and maintenance for your lift truck. The recommendation for the time intervals are for 8 hours of operation per day. The time intervals must be decreased from the recommendations in the Maintenance Schedule for the following conditions: • If the lift truck is used more than 8 hours per day. • If the lift truck must work in dirty operating conditions. Your dealer for Hyster lift trucks has the equipment and trained service personnel to do a complete program of inspection, lubrication, and maintenance. A regular program of inspection, lubrication, and maintenance will help your lift truck give more efficient performance and operate for a longer period of time. Some users have service personnel and equipment to do the inspection, lubrication, and maintenance shown in the Maintenance Schedule. Service Manuals are available from your dealer for Hyster lift trucks to help users who do their own maintenance.

SERIAL NUMBER DATA The serial number for the lift truck is found on the nameplate and also on the right-hand side of the frame under the battery box.

HOW TO MOVE DISABLED LIFT TRUCK How to Tow Lift Truck WARNING Use extra caution when towing a lift truck if any of the following conditions exist: • Brakes do not operate correctly.

• Steering does not operate correctly. • Tires are damaged. • Traction conditions are bad. • The lift truck must be towed on a slope. If the engine cannot run, there is no power available for the hydraulic steering system and the service brakes. This condition can make the lift truck difficult to steer and stop. If the lift truck uses power from the engine to help apply the brakes, the application of the brakes will be more difficult. Poor traction can cause the disabled lift truck or towing vehicle to slide. A slope will also make the lift truck more difficult to stop. Never lift and move a disabled lift truck unless the disabled lift truck MUST be moved and cannot be towed. A lift truck used to move a disabled lift truck MUST have a capacity rating equal to or greater than the weight of the disabled lift truck. The capacity of the lift truck used to move a disabled lift truck must have a load center equal to half the width of the disabled lift truck. See the nameplate of the disabled lift truck for the approximate total weight. The forks must extend the full width of the disabled lift truck. Put the weight center of the disabled lift truck on load center of the forks. Be careful to not damage the underside of the lift truck. 1. The towed lift truck must have an operator. 2. Tow truck slowly. 3. Using a lift truck or a lifting device that can be attached to the mast (I.E. come-a-long), raise the carriage and forks approximately 30 cm (12 in.) from surface. Install a chain araoound the mast crossmember and the carriage, to prevent carriage and mast channels from moving. 4. If another lift truck is used to tow the disabled lift truck, that lift truck must have an equal or larger capacity than the disabled lift truck. Install approximately 1/2 of a capacity load on forks of lift truck that is being used to tow disabled lift truck. This 1/2 capacity load will increase traction of lift truck. Keep load as low as possible. 5. Use a towing link made of steel that fastens to tow pins in counterweights of both lift trucks.

1


General

8000 SRM 987

HOW TO PUT LIFT TRUCK ON BLOCKS How to Raise Drive Tires

3. Tilt mast fully forward until drive tires are raised from surface.

WARNING The lift truck must be put on blocks for some types of maintenance and repair. The removal of the following assemblies will cause large changes in the center of gravity: mast, drive axle, engine, transmission, and counterweight. When the lift truck is put on blocks, put additional blocks in the following positions to maintain stability: • Before removing the mast and drive axle, put blocks under the counterweight so the lift truck cannot fall backward. • Before removing the counterweight, put blocks under the mast assembly so the lift truck cannot fall forward. The surface must be solid, even, and level when the lift truck is put on blocks. Make sure any blocks used to support the lift truck are solid, one-piece units. 1. Put blocks on each side (front and back) of steering tires to prevent movement of lift truck. See Figure 1.

1. DRIVE TIRES

2. Put mast in vertical position. Put a block under each outer mast channel.

4. Put additional blocks under frame behind drive tires. 5. If hydraulic system will not operate, use a hydraulic jack under the side of the frame near the front. Make sure jack has a capacity equal to at least half the weight of the lift truck. See nameplate.

How to Raise Steering Tires 1. Apply parking brake. Put blocks on both sides (front and back) of drive tires to prevent movement of lift truck. See Figure 1. 2. Use hydraulic jack to raise steering tires. Make sure jack has a capacity of at least 1/3 of total weight of lift truck as shown on the nameplate. 3. Put jack under steering axle or frame to raise lift truck. Put blocks under frame to support lift truck.

2. STEERING TIRES Figure 1. Put Lift Truck on Blocks

2


8000 SRM 987

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Schedule

Figure 2. Maintenance Points, LPG Engine Equipped Lift Trucks

Figure 3. Maintenance Points, Diesel Engine Equipped Lift Trucks

3


Maintenance Schedule

8000 SRM 987 Table 1. Maintenance Schedule

Item No.

Item

8 hr/ Daily

12

Parking Brake

X

2

GM V-6 Engine Oil

X

20

GM V-6 Engine Oil Filter

2

Perkins Diesel (1004-42) Engine Oil

20

Diesel (Perkins 1004-42) Engine Oil Filter

7

Fuel Filter, Diesel

X

5

Cooling System

X

5

Cooling System Clean Debris from Radiator Core

X

5

Cooling System GM V-6 EPA Compliant Engine

X

8

Coolant Hoses

9

Drive Belts

X=Check C=Change L=Lubricate

4

X

X

500 hr/ 3 mo

1000 hr/ 6 mo

2000 hr/ Procedure 1 yr or Quantity

Specification

Check operation C

4.7 liter (5.0 qt)

C

See NOTE 1

C

8.0 liter (8.5 qt)

C

See NOTE 1

C C

18 to 40 C (0 to 104 F) API SL SAE 10W-30 ILSAC GF-3 SAE 2362

18 to 40 C (0 to 104 F) SAE 10W-30 10 to 50 C (14 to 122 F) SAE 15W-40 API CG4/CH4 ACEA E3/E5 MIL-PRF-2104G

1 filter

See Parts Manual

18.9 liter (20 qt)

50% water with 50% Ethylene Glycol Boron-Free Antifreeze

Clean as Needed C

18.9 liter (20 qt)

50% water with 50% Ethylene Glycol Boron-Free Antifreeze

X

Check condition

See Parts Manual

X

Check condition

See Parts Manual


8000 SRM 987

Maintenance Schedule

Table 1. Maintenance Schedule (Continued) Item No.

Item

8 hr/ Daily

Check for Leaks- Fuel, Oil, Water

X

Check for leaks See NOTE 2

Radiator

X

Check radiator for debris, clean as necessary

Radiator Screen (if fitted)

X

Check radiator screen for debris, clean as necessary

Engine Compartment

X

Remove combustible materials

Seat Belts and Seat Rails

X

Check condition

Steering and Steering Wheel Position Latch

X

Check operation

11

Mast, Carriage, and Lift Chains

X

X

Check condition and operation

13

Forks

X

X

Check Condition

14

Lift Chains

X

L

Check for lubrication

Engine Oil

10

Tires

X

Check condition

See Nameplate

3

Powershift Transmission Oil

X

15 liter (16 qt)

Hyster P/N 336831

4

Fuel Tank

X

42 liter (11.1 gal)

Diesel No. 2 LPG-HD-5

Horn, Gauges, Lights, Alarms

X

Check operation

Warning Labels

X

Replace as necessary

500 hr/ 3 mo

1000 hr/ 6 mo

2000 hr/ Procedure 1 yr or Quantity

C

Specification

See Parts Manual

X=Check C=Change L=Lubricate

5


Maintenance Schedule

8000 SRM 987

Table 1. Maintenance Schedule (Continued) Item No. 12

Item

8 hr/ Daily

Service Brakes

500 hr/ 3 mo

2000 hr/ Procedure 1 yr or Quantity

X

Specification

Check operation

Brake Booster Filter

C

Hyster Part No. 1499886

Transmission

X

6

Battery Electrolyte, Battery Case and Cables

X

12

Service Brakes and Parking Brake

1

Hydraulic Fluid

15

Thrust Screw for Differential

17

Air Filter

X

Clean or replace. See NOTE 5

See Parts Manual

17

Air Filter GM V-6 EPA Compliant Engine

X

Clean or replace. See NOTE 5

See Parts Manual

17

Air Filter Element GM V-6 EPA Compliant Engine

18

Brake Fluid

X

0.2 liter (0.4 pt)

Brake and Inching/Brake Pedals

X

Adjust as required

Fuel System Idle Speed GM V-6 Engine

X

Adjust as required

675 to 725 rpm

Fuel System Idle Speed Perkins Diesel (1004-42) Engine

X

Adjust as required

725 to 775 rpm

X=Check C=Change L=Lubricate

6

1000 hr/ 6 mo

Check operation X

Check Level, Clean

X

Check condition

X

C

35.0 liter (9.4 gal)

X

Check adjustment. See NOTE 1

C

See Parts Manual

18 C (0 F) and Above SAE 10W API CC or CC/SG or CD/SH

See NOTE 4

SAE J-1703


8000 SRM 987

Maintenance Schedule

Table 1. Maintenance Schedule (Continued) Item No.

Item

8 hr/ Daily

500 hr/ 3 mo

1000 hr/ 6 mo

2000 hr/ Procedure 1 yr or Quantity

Specification

Fuel System Governed Speed GM V-6 and Perkins Diesel (1004-42) Engines

X

Adjust as required

2500 rpm

19

Wheel Nuts Drive Wheels

X

Check torque

610 to 680 N•m (450 to 500 lbf ft)

21

Steering Axle Spindles

L

4 fittings

See NOTE 3

22

Steering Tie Rods

L

2 fittings

See NOTE 3

23

Mast Pivots and Mast Sliding Surfaces

L

2 fittings

See NOTE 3

24

Sideshift Carriage

L

4 fittings and sliding surfaces

See NOTE 3

Tilt Cylinders

L

4 fittings

See NOTE 3

Fork Pins and Guides

L

As required

See NOTE 3

Pedals, Levers, Linkages, Cables, Hinges, Seat Rails

L

As required

Engine Oil

Check Plug Wire 6 Plugs

See NOTE 6

1

See Parts Manual

Adjust as required

0 BTDC @ 800 rpm

25

Spark Plugs

26

PCV Valve Timing GM V-6 Engine

C

X

C X

Timing Perkins Diesel (1004-42) Engine 27

Differential Oil

28

Fuel Filter, LPG

28

Fuel Filter, LPG GM V-6 EPA Compliant Engine Valve Adjustment GM V-6 Engine

No timing applicable X

C C

C

5.7 liter (6.0 qt)

SAE 80W-90 85W-140 See Parts Manual See Parts Manual Not adjustable

X=Check C=Change L=Lubricate

7


Maintenance Schedule

8000 SRM 987

Table 1. Maintenance Schedule (Continued) Item No.

Item

8 hr/ Daily

500 hr/ 3 mo

1000 hr/ 6 mo

Specification

Valve Adjustment Perkins Diesel Engine - All Units, Inlet Valves (cold)

Adjust as required

0.20 mm (0.008 in.)

Valve Adjustment Perkins Diesel Engine - All Units, Exhaust Valves (cold)

Adjust as required

0.45 mm (0.018 in.)

30

Oil Filter, Hydraulic System

C

1 filter See NOTE 1

See Parts Manual

31

Oil Filter, Powershift Transmission

C

1 filter See NOTE 1

See Parts Manual

32

Bearings, Steering Wheels

L

As required

See NOTE 3

33

Bearings, Drive Wheels

L

As required

See NOTE 3

34

Hydraulic Tank Breather

X

Clean or replace. See NOTE 5

SeeParts Manual

35

Crankcase Breather

X

Clean or replace. See NOTE 5

See Parts Manual

C

Oxygen Sensor GM V6 EPA Compliant Engine Inspect Engine Electrical System, Connectors, and FCVS Connection

X

Check Indicator Light

X

Inspect Engine Vacuum, Fuel Lines, and Fittings

X

Inspect Lock Off for Leaks, and Ensure Lock Off Closing

X

Test LPG Regulator Pressure

X

Inspect Low Pressure Regulator for Oil Build Up and Leaks

X

X=Check C=Change L=Lubricate

8

2000 hr/ Procedure 1 yr or Quantity

Drain if Necessary


8000 SRM 987

Maintenance Procedures Every 8 Hours or Daily

Table 1. Maintenance Schedule (Continued) Item No.

Item

8 hr/ Daily

500 hr/ 3 mo

1000 hr/ 6 mo

2000 hr/ Procedure 1 yr or Quantity

Check Air Induction System for Leaks

X

Check Manifold for Vacuum Leaks

X

Check Throttle Shaft for Sticking

X

Check Injectors and Rails for Leaks

X

Inspect Exhaust Manifold, and Exhaust Piping for Leaks

X

Inspect Catalyst Inlet and Outlet

X

Specification

NOTE 1: Check differential thrust screw adjustment and engine oil, hydraulic oil, and transmission oil filters on new lift trucks after the first 100 hours. NOTE 2: Check fuel system for leaks prior to any service or maintenance activity. NOTE 3: Multipurpose Grease with 2 to 4% Molybdenum Disulfide. NOTE 4: In dirty or dusty environments, replace at 1,000 hours. NOTE 5: Very dirty conditions require daily check and clean. NOTE 6: See Capacities and Specifications 8000 SRM 988. X=Check C=Change L=Lubricate

Maintenance Procedures Every 8 Hours or Daily HOW TO MAKE CHECKS WITH ENGINE STOPPED WARNING EXHAUST GASES Exhaust from internal combustion engines contains carbon monoxide and other harmful chemicals. Carbon monoxide is a colorless, odorless poison and can cause unconsciousness or death without warning. Long-term exposure to exhaust or chemicals in the exhaust can cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure to engine exhaust.

If engines are operated in confined spaces, maintain adequate ventilation or vent exhaust to the outside. Do not exceed applicable air contaminant limits. Follow the inspection and maintenance schedule and procedures in this manual. Do not alter exhaust, ignition, or fuel systems. FIRE HAZARD The hot engine surfaces and exhaust of internal combustion engine-powered lift trucks can present fire hazards when operating in areas containing flammable gases, vapors, liquids,

9


Maintenance Procedures Every 8 Hours or Daily dusts, or fibers. Engine and exhaust component surface temperatures can exceed the ignition temperatures of common solvents, fuels, oil, paper, and other organic materials (wood, wheat, cotton, etc.). Exhaust-emitted sparks can ignite these materials as well. Engine and exhaust surface temperatures increase after engine shutoff, presenting increased fire hazard. Check the engine compartment immediately following truck operation in areas containing combustible dusts, fibers, or paper and remove any foreign material. Operate the lift truck only in areas that have been approved for lift truck operation.

8000 SRM 987

Engine Oil After engine has stopped, wait one minute before checking oil level. Keep oil at correct level as indicated on dipstick. Use correct oil as shown in the Maintenance Schedule. See Figure 4.

Hydraulic System Oil WARNING At operating temperature, the hydraulic oil is HOT. Do not permit the hot oil to touch the skin and cause a burn.

CAUTION WARNING Do not operate a lift truck that needs repairs. Report the need for repairs immediately. If repair is necessary, put a DO NOT OPERATE tag in the operator’s area. Remove the key from the key switch. Put lift truck on level surface. Lower carriage and forks, stop engine, and apply parking brake. Open hood and check for leaks and conditions that are not normal. Clean any oil or fuel spills. Make sure that lint, dust, paper, and other materials are removed from engine compartment.

Do not permit dirt to enter the hydraulic system when the oil level is checked or the filter is changed. Never loosen cap or check hydraulic system fluid with the engine running. Never operate the hydraulic pump without oil in the hydraulic system. The operation of the hydraulic pump without oil will damage the pump. Check hydraulic system for leaks and damage or loose components.

Figure 4. Engine Maintenance Points

10


8000 SRM 987

Maintenance Procedures Every 8 Hours or Daily Legend for Figure 4

A. DIESEL

B. LPG

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7. 8. 9.

BATTERY FUEL FILL CAP (DIESEL ONLY) DIESEL COLD START AID HYDRAULIC TANK BREATHER

1. 2. 3. 4.

AUXILIARY COOLANT RESERVOIR ADD COLD MARK FULL COLD MARK FULL HOT MARK

DIPSTICK FOR ENGINE OIL ENGINE OIL FILL CAP AIR FILTER AUXILIARY COOLANT RESERVOIR PCV VALVE (GM V-6)

Check hydraulic oil level when oil is at operating temperature, carriage is lowered, and engine is stopped. See Figure 5. Add hydraulic oil only as needed. If more hydraulic oil is added than the FULL level, hydraulic oil will leak from the breather during operation. Oil level indicated by the dipstick is most accurate when oil temperature is 53 to 93 C (127 to 199 F).

Figure 6. Auxiliary Coolant Reservoir

WARNING 1. HYDRAULIC TANK DIPSTICK Figure 5. Hydraulic Oil Check

Cooling System Reservoir Level WARNING DO NOT remove the radiator cap from the radiator when the engine is hot. When the radiator cap is removed, the pressure is released from the system. If the system is hot, the steam and boiling coolant can cause burns. DO NOT remove the cover for the radiator when the engine is running. Make sure coolant level is between FULL COLD and ADD COLD mark on the auxiliary coolant reservoir when engine is cold. Coolant will expand as it is heated and the level in the auxiliary coolant reservoir will increase. Add coolant to auxiliary reservoir if additional coolant is needed. Make sure you do not fill reservoir beyond FULL COLD or FULL HOT levels. See Figure 6.

Compressed air can move particles so they cause injury to the user or to other personnel. Make sure the path of the compressed air is away from all personnel. Wear protective goggles or a face shield to prevent injury to the eyes. Check radiator fins. Clean radiator with compressed air or water as needed.

Fuel System WARNING All fuels are very flammable and can burn or cause an explosion. Do not use an open flame to check the fuel level or to check for leaks in the fuel system. If there is a leak in the fuel system, extra care must be used during the repair. Do not operate the lift truck until a leak is repaired. Check fuel system for leaks and condition of parts. When fuel is added to the lift truck, see the section, How to Add Fuel to Lift Truck procedures in the Operating Manual.

11


Maintenance Procedures Every 8 Hours or Daily

Battery WARNING The acid in the electrolyte can cause injury. If the electrolyte is spilled, use water to flush the area. Use a solution of sodium bicarbonate (soda) to make the acid neutral. Acid in the eyes must be flushed with water immediately. Wear eye protection.

8000 SRM 987 or damaged rims. Check for loose or missing parts. Remove any wire, straps, or other material wrapped around the axle. See Figure 7. Make sure drive wheel nuts are tight. Tighten wheel nuts in a cross pattern to correct torque value shown in the Maintenance Schedule.

Batteries generate explosive fumes. Keep the vents in the caps clean. Keep sparks or open flame away from the battery area. Do not make sparks from the battery connections. Disconnect the battery ground cable when doing maintenance. Keep battery and cable terminals clean. Check electrolyte level (unless maintenance-free). Keep electrolyte level above separators and plates. Use distilled water. Do not fill battery more than to bottom of internal filler neck. If battery becomes discharged and requires a booster battery to start the engine, follow these procedures carefully when connecting the jumper cables: 1. Always connect positive jumper cable to positive terminal of discharged battery and negative jumper cable to negative terminal. 2. Always connect jumper cable that is the ground cable last. 3. Always connect jumper cables to discharged battery before connecting them to booster battery.

Tires and Wheels CAUTION Check all wheel nuts after 2 to 5 hours of operation: when new lift trucks begin operation and on all lift trucks when the drive wheels have been removed and installed. Tighten the nuts in a cross pattern to the correct torque value shown in the Maintenance Schedule. When the nuts stay tight for 8 hours, the interval for checking the torque can be extended to 500 hours. Check tires for damage. Check tread and remove any objects that will cause damage. Check for bent

12

1. CHECK FOR DAMAGE (REMOVE NAILS, GLASS, AND OTHER OBJECTS FROM TREAD) 2. MAKE SMOOTH EDGES Figure 7. Tires Check

Forks Identification of a fork is how the fork is connected to the carriage. The S3.50-5.50XM series of lift trucks use only hook forks. See Figure 8. Adjust Hook forks are connected to the carriage by hooks and lock pins. The lock pins can be one of two types. See Figure 8. These lock pins are installed through the top fork hooks and fit into slots in the top carriage bar. Adjust forks as far apart as possible for maximum load support. Hook forks will slide along the carriage bars to adjust for the load to be lifted. Raise lock pin in each fork to slide the fork on the carriage bar. Make sure lock pin is engaged in the carriage bar to lock the fork in position after width adjustment is made.


8000 SRM 987

Maintenance Procedures Every 8 Hours or Daily

A. OLD STYLE LOCK PIN ASSEMBLY

B. NEW STYLE LOCK PIN ASSEMBLY

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

FORK LOCK PIN SPRING WASHER WASHER

WEDGE KNOB LEVER COTTER PIN LOCK PIN ASSEMBLY

Figure 8. Fork Lock Pin Assembly

13


Maintenance Procedures Every 8 Hours or Daily Hook Fork, Remove

WARNING Do not try to move a fork without a lifting device. Each hook fork for these lift trucks can weigh 45 to 115 kg (100 to 250 lb).

8000 SRM 987 Lower carriage further so top hook is disengaged from top carriage bar. Move carriage away from fork, or use a lifting device to move fork away from carriage.

A fork can be removed from the carriage for replacement of the fork or other maintenance.

1. CARRIAGE BARS 2. HOOK FORK

3. BLOCKS

Figure 10. Hook Fork Removal Hook Fork, Install Move fork and carriage so the top hook on fork can engage the upper carriage bar. Raise carriage to move lower hook through the fork removal notch. Slide fork on carriage so both upper and lower hooks engage the carriage. Engage lock pin with a notch in the upper carriage bar.

Forks, Mast, and Lift Chains, Inspect Fork Tip Alignment Length of Forks

3% Dimension

915 mm (36 in.) 1220 mm (48 in.) 1830 mm (72 in.)

27 mm (1.10 in.) 37 mm (1.46 in.) 55 mm (2.17 in.)

1. TIP ALIGNMENT (MUST BE WITHIN 3% OF FORK LENGTH) 2. CRACKS 3. LATCH DAMAGE 4. HEEL OF FORK (MUST BE 90% OF DIMENSION X) 5. CARRIAGE 6. LOAD BACKREST EXTENSION 7. MAXIMUM ANGLE 93 8. FORK REMOVAL NOTCH Figure 9. Carriage and Forks Slide a hook fork to fork removal notch on carriage. See Figure 9. Lower fork onto blocks so bottom hook moves through fork removal notch. See Figure 10.

14

WARNING Never work under a raised carriage or forks. Lower the carriage or use blocks and chains on the mast weldments and carriage so they cannot move. Make sure the moving parts are attached to a part that does not move. Do not try to correct the alignment of the fork tips by bending the forks or adding shims. Replace damaged forks. Never repair damaged forks by heating or welding. Forks are made of special steel using special procedures. Replace damaged forks. 1. Inspect welds on mast and carriage for cracks. Make sure capscrews and nuts are tight. 2. Inspect channels for wear in areas where rollers travel. Inspect rollers for wear or damage.


8000 SRM 987

Maintenance Procedures Every 8 Hours or Daily

3. Inspect load backrest extension for cracks and damage. 4. Inspect forks for cracks and wear. Check that fork tips are aligned within 13 mm (0.5 in.) of each other. See Figure 9. Check that bottom of fork is not worn. 5. Replace any damaged or broken parts that are used to keep forks locked in position. 6. If lift truck is equipped with a sideshift carriage or attachment, inspect parts for cracks and wear. Make sure parts that fasten sideshift carriage or attachment to carriage are in good condition. 7. Check that lift chains are correctly lubricated. Use SAE 30 engine oil to lubricate lift chains. 8. Inspect lift chains for cracks or broken links and pins. See Figure 11. 9. Inspect chain anchors and pins for cracks and damage. 10. Make sure lift chains are adjusted so they have equal tension. Adjustment or replacement of the lift chains must be done by authorized personnel. See Lift Chain Adjustments described later in this section.

Operator Restraint System Seat belt, seat, hip restraint bracket, seat mount, hood, latches, and floor plates are all part of the operator restraint system. Each item must be checked to make sure it is fastened correctly, functions correctly, and is in good condition. See Figure 12. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) NOTE: Lift trucks produced before November 2005 are equipped with the ALR type seat belts. The seat belt must fasten securely. Make sure the seat belt extends and retracts smoothly and is not frayed or torn. If the seat belt is damaged or does not operate properly, it must be replaced. See Figure 12. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) NOTE: Lift trucks produced after November 2005 are equipped with the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) style seat belt. When the ELR style seat belt is properly buckled across the operator, the belt will permit slight operator repositioning without activating the locking mechanism. If the truck tips, travels off a dock, or comes to a sudden stop, the locking mechanism will be activated and hold the operator’s lower torso in the seat. A seat belt that is damaged worn or does not operate properly will not give protection when it is needed. The end of the belt must fasten correctly in the latch. The seat belt must be in good condition. Replace the seat belt if damage or wear is seen. See Figure 12.

1. 2. 3. 4.

WORK PIN CRACKS EDGE WEAR HOLE WEAR

5. LOOSE LEAVES 6. DAMAGED PIN 7. CORROSION

Figure 11. Lift Chain Check

The following seat belt operation checks must be performed: • With the hood closed and in the locked position, pull the seat belt slowly from the retractor assembly. Make sure the seat belt pulls out and retracts smoothly. if the seat belt cannot be pulled from the retractor assembly or the belt will not retract, replace the seat belt assembly. • With the hood closed and in the locked position, pull the seat belt with a sudden jerk. Make sure the seat belt will not pull from the retractor assembly. If the seat belt can be pulled from the retractor, when it is pulled with a sudden jerk, replace the seat belt assembly. • With the hood in the open position, make sure the seat belt will not pull from the retractor assembly. If the seat belt can be pulled from the retractor,

15


Maintenance Procedures Every 8 Hours or Daily

8000 SRM 987

with the hood in the open position, replace the seat belt assembly.

hood must be fully closed. Lift the hood to make sure it is closed and will not move.

Make sure the seat rails and latch striker are not loose. The seat rails must lock securely in position but move freely when unlocked. The seat rails must be securely attached to the mounting surface. The

Adjust hood, hood latch, and latch striker when any of the parts of the operator restraint system are installed or replaced. See the section Hood Latch Check in this manual for the adjustment procedures for the hood.

NOTE: SWIVEL SEAT IS AN OPTIONAL FEATURE. A. AUTOMATIC LOCKING RETRACTOR

B. EMERGENCY LOCKING RETRACTOR

1. FORWARD/BACKWARD ADJUSTMENT 2. SWIVEL ADJUSTMENT 3. OPERATOR WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT

4. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTMENT (SEAT RAIL) 5. SEAT BELT

Figure 12. Operator Restraint System (Swivel Seat Shown)

Safety Labels Check that all safety labels are installed in correct locations on lift truck. See Parts Manual or the section Frame 100 SRM 981. If new labels must be installed, use the following procedure:

WARNING Cleaning solvents can be flammable and toxic and can cause skin irritation. When using cleaning solvents, always follow the recommendations of the manufacturer. 1. Make sure surface is dry and has no oil or grease. Do not use solvent on new paint. Clean surface of old paint with a cleaning solvent.

16

2. Remove paper from back of label. Do not touch adhesive surface. 3. Carefully hold label in correct position above surface. The label cannot be moved after it touches the surface. Put label on surface. Make sure all air is removed from under label and corners and edges are tight.

COOLING SYSTEM, CLEAN DEBRIS FROM RADIATOR CORE Check radiator core for restrictions and remove material causing radiator core to be plugged or restricted.


8000 SRM 987

Maintenance Procedures Every 8 Hours or Daily

Gauges, Lights, Horn, and Fuses

WARNING Compressed air can move particles so they cause injury to the user or to other personnel. Make sure the path of the compressed air is away from all personnel. Wear protective goggles or a face shield to prevent injury to the eyes.

Start engine. Check gauges and lights for correct operation as described in Operating Manual. Check operation of horn. If any lights or gauges do not operate correctly, check fuses. Fuses are under instrument panel on left side of cowl. See Figure 13.

Clean with compressed air and blow debris from the core and fan shroud.

HOW TO MAKE CHECKS WITH ENGINE RUNNING WARNING FASTEN YOUR SEAT BELT! The seat belt is installed to help the operator stay on the truck if the lift truck tips over. IT CAN ONLY HELP IF IT IS FASTENED. Make sure the area around the lift truck is clear before starting engine or making any checks of operation. Be careful when making checks. If lift truck is stationary during a check, apply parking brake and put transmission in NEUTRAL (N) position. Make checks carefully.

1. FUSE PANEL 2. MOUNTING BRACKET F1 20 AMPS

F2 5 AMPS F3 15 AMPS F4 15 AMPS

Figure 13. Fuses and Relays On S3.50-5.50XM (F004) lift trucks only, there are additional fuses and relays located in the engine compartment. See Figure 14.

F5 SPARE F6 SPARE R1 STARTER RELAY

R2 POWER RELAY R3 FUEL PUMP RELAY R4 SPARE

Figure 14. Engine Compartment Fuses and Relays, GM 4.3L EPA Compliant Engine S3.50-5.50XM Trucks Only

17


Maintenance Procedures Every 8 Hours or Daily

Engine Oil Pressure NOTE: Engine will stop after a 30-second warning buzzer if engine oil pressure is less than 13.8 kPa (2 psi) on lift trucks with protection system. When engine stop occurs, the hourmeter display will show the word Stop. There is an indicator light on the instrument cluster for engine oil pressure. The red light is on when key switch is in START position and must go off when engine is running. If the light is on when engine is running, engine oil pressure is low. There is also an oil pressure gauge. If needle is in red zone, oil pressure is too low. Stop engine and check oil level.

Cooling System Temperature WARNING DO NOT remove the radiator cap from the radiator when the engine is hot. When the radiator cap is removed, the pressure is released from the system. If the system is hot, the steam and boiling coolant can cause burns.

8000 SRM 987 the system. If the system is hot, the steam and boiling coolant can cause burns. Check radiator fins. Clean radiator with compressed air or water as needed. Be careful not to bend radiator fins. Check for and remove any debris on radiator core.

Powershift Transmission Oil level Check NOTE: Engine will stop after a 30-second warning buzzer if transmission oil is over 132 C (270 F) on lift trucks with this protection system. When engine stop occurs, hourmeter display will show the word "Stop." There is an indicator light on instrument cluster for transmission oil temperature. Red light is on when key switch is in START position and must go off when engine is running. If light is on when engine is running, temperature of transmission oil is too high. Stop operation of lift truck. Make a visual check of transmission, and check level of transmission oil. See Figure 15.

NOTE: The LPG vaporizer is connected into the cooling system, low coolant levels and restricted or plugged radiator cores can impact the performance of the fuel system. NOTE: Engine will stop after a 30-second warning buzzer if coolant is over 121 C (250 F) on lift trucks with protection system. When engine stop occurs, hourmeter display will show the word Stop. There is an indicator light on the instrument cluster for coolant temperature. Red light is on when key switch is in START position and must go off when engine is running. If light is on when engine is running, coolant and engine are too hot. Stop engine and check coolant level in coolant recovery reservoir. There is also a gauge for coolant temperature. If needle is in red zone when engine is running, coolant and engine are too hot. Stop engine and check coolant level in coolant recovery reservoir.

WARNING DO NOT remove the radiator cap from the radiator when the engine is hot. When the radiator cap is removed, the pressure is released from

18

1. ACCESS DOOR 2. DIPSTICK FOR TRANSMISSION Figure 15. Transmission Oil level Check Apply parking brake. Check oil level in powershift transmission when engine is running at idle speed. If lift truck has a direction control lever, put direction control lever in NEUTRAL (N) position. Use correct oil shown in Maintenance Schedule. Keep oil level at FULL mark on dipstick. Most accurate check of oil level is when transmission is at operating temperature.


8000 SRM 987

Control Levers and Pedals Check that control levers for transmission, mast, and attachment operate as described in the Operating Manual. Check that pedals operate correctly as described in the Operating Manual.

Lift System Operation WARNING Lower the lift mechanism completely. Never allow any person under a raised carriage. Do not put any part of your body in or through the lift mechanism unless all parts of the mast are completely lowered and the engine is STOPPED. Before making any repairs, use blocks and chains on the mast weldments and carriage so they cannot move. Make sure the moving parts are attached to a part that does not move. Do not try to find hydraulic leaks by putting hands on pressurized hydraulic components. Hydraulic oil can be injected into the body by the pressure. Perform the following checks and inspections: 1. Check for leaks in hydraulic system. Check condition of hydraulic hoses and tubes. NOTE: Some parts of the mast move at different speeds during raising and lowering. 2. Slowly raise and lower mast several times without a load. Raise mast to its full extension height at least once. Mast components must raise and lower smoothly in correct sequence. 3. Inner weldments and carriage must lower completely. 4. Raise mast 1 m (3 ft) with a capacity load. The inner weldments and carriage must raise smoothly. Lower the mast. All moving components must lower smoothly. 5. Lower load to approximately 0.3 m (1 ft). Tilt mast forward and backward. Mast must tilt smoothly and both tilt cylinders must stop evenly.

Maintenance Procedures Every 8 Hours or Daily symbols by each of the controls). Make sure all hydraulic lines are connected correctly and do not leak.

Service Brakes WARNING Loss of fluid from the brake fluid reservoir indicates a leak. Repair the brake system before using the lift truck. Replace the brake fluid in the system if there is dirt, water, or oil in the system. The lift truck has a brake booster that receives power from the hydraulic system. The brake pedal can be difficult to push when the engine is not running because the hydraulic system is not operating. Check operation of service brakes. Push on brake pedal. Brake pedal must stop firmly and must not move slowly down after brakes are applied. Service brakes must apply equally to both drive wheels. Service brakes must not pull lift truck to either side of direction of travel when they are applied. Service brakes are automatically adjusted when brakes are applied and lift truck changes direction.

Parking Brakes WARNING If the park brake switches are not adjusted correctly, the engine can be started with the park brake released. The purpose of the left-hand mounted switch (MONOTROL only) is to prevent the starter motor from being energized when the parking brake is not applied. The right-hand mounted switch de-energizes the forward/reverse solenoids to put the transmission in NEUTRAL (MONOTROL only) when the park brake is set. Check parking brake operation. Operator must adjust parking brake so lift truck does not move if it is parked on an incline. The parking brake, when in good condition and correctly adjusted, will hold a lift truck with a capacity load on a 15% grade [a slope that increases 1.5 m in 10 m (1.5 ft in 10 ft)]. See Figure 16.

6. Check controls for attachment. Make sure controls operate the functions of attachment (see the

19


Maintenance Procedures Every 8 Hours or Daily

8000 SRM 987

Figure 16. Defining a 15% Grade Turn adjustment knob at bottom of lever to adjust parking brake. Do not tighten adjustment so brake is applied when the lever is released. Lever for parking brake has a lock. Use your finger to release lock on lever when parking brake is released. See Figure 17. Lift trucks with a MONOTROL® pedal: when parking brake is applied, a switch in the starting circuit is closed so the engine can be started. The switch also puts the transmission in the NEUTRAL (N) position.

Steering System Make sure steering system operates smoothly and provides good steering control.

NOTE: THE LETTER H REPRESENTS THE GUIDE MOVEMENT RANGE. SEE THE SECTION BRAKE SYSTEM 1800 SRM 985 FOR H DIMENSIONS. 1. GRIP 2. ADJUSTMENT SLOT 3. YOKE ASSEMBLY 4. GUIDE PLATE 5. ADJUSTMENT KNOB 6. PARKING BRAKE CABLES

7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

NUTS COWL EQUALIZER LINK MICROSWITCH PARKING BRAKE LEVER 12. RELEASE BUTTON 13. NUT 14. BRACKET

Figure 17. Parking Brake Adjustment

20


8000 SRM 987

Maintenance Procedures Every 500 Hours or 3 Months

Maintenance Procedures Every 500 Hours or 3 Months NOTE: Do these procedures in addition to 8-hour (daily) checks.

NOTE: Change oil filter for engine after first 100 hours on new lift trucks.

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER, GM V-6 ENGINES

Change oil filter at the same time engine oil is changed. Use correct oil according to specifications. Install a new filter. Apply clean oil to gasket of new filter. Turn filter until gasket touches, then tighten 1/2 to 3/4 turn with your hand. Tighten oil pan drain plug to 25 N•m (18 lbf ft). Start engine. Check area around oil filter and drain plug for leaks.

WARNING Long-term exposure to used engine oil may cause skin irritation or cancer. Wash with detergent and water. Disposal of lubricants and fluids must meet local environmental regulations.

CAUTION Never run the engine without oil.

SIDESHIFT CARRIAGE LUBRICATION Lubricate grease fittings and sliding surfaces on sideshift carriage as needed with multipurpose grease. See Maintenance Schedule for more information. See Figure 18.

Figure 18. Sideshift Carriage

21


Maintenance Procedures Every 500 Hours or 3 Months

8000 SRM 987

Legend for Figure 18 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

CAPSCREWS LOWER HOOK MOBILE FRAME LOWER PADS UPPER PADS GREASE FITTINGS

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

CYLINDER ROD SNAP RING ROD SCRAPER ROD BUSHING SEAL FIXED FRAME

8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

MAST MOUNTING CAPSCREWS TILT PIN RETAINERS ROD END TILT CYLINDER ASSEMBLY CAPSCREW AND WASHER FOR CYLINDER RESTRAINT BRACKET

TILT CYLINDER LUBRICATION Lubricate grease fittings on tilt cylinders with multipurpose grease as needed. See Maintenance Schedule for more information. See Figure 19.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

TILT PIN ANCHOR PIN CAPSCREW CAPSCREW AND WASHER GREASE FITTINGS MAST MOUNTING HANGERS MAST MOUNTING CAP MAST BUSHING

Figure 19. Tilt Cylinders

22


8000 SRM 987

Maintenance Procedures Every 500 Hours or 3 Months

LIFT CHAIN LUBRICATION WARNING Do not repair a worn or damaged lift chain. Replace a worn or damaged lift chain with a new chain. If a pair of lift chains is used in the mast, both lift chains must be replaced. Lubricate lift chains with SAE 30 engine oil. The best procedure is to remove chains from lift truck and soak them in engine oil.

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER, PERKINS DIESEL ENGINE WARNING Long-term exposure to used engine oil may cause skin irritation or cancer. Wash with detergent and water. Disposal of lubricants and fluids must meet local environmental regulations.

CAUTION Never run the engine without oil. NOTE: Change filter after first 100 hours on new lift trucks. Change oil filter at same time engine oil is changed. Use correct oil according to specifications. Install a new filter. Apply clean oil to gasket of new filter. Turn filter until gasket touches, then tighten 1/2 to 3/4 turn with your hand. Tighten oil pan drain plug to 34 N•m (25 lbf ft). Start engine. Check area around oil filter and drain plug for leaks.

DRIVE BELTS

1. ACCEPTABLE CRACKS 2. NOT ACCEPTABLE CRACKS AND DAMAGE Figure 20. Drive Belt Inspection

Fan Drive Belts Both Perkins diesel engines and GM V-6 engines have self-adjusting tensioners.

PERKINS DIESEL ENGINE Alternator Drive Belt Loosen bolt on adjustment link and pivot fasteners to adjust tension of drive belts. Push alternator pulley against drive belts to adjust tension. Tighten adjustment link and pivot fasteners. Drive belts are removed from engine by loosening tension, disconnecting pump drive shaft, and then removing them from pulleys. See Figure 21. A common practice used to check tension is to press on the drive belt with your thumb at the center of the longest length of the drive belt and check deflection. When thumb pressure is 100 N (22 lbf), correct deflection is approximately 13 mm (1/2 in.).

Check drive belt for wear and damage. See Figure 20. A few small cracks that run across belt are acceptable. A belt with cracks that run length of belt or a belt with missing pieces is not acceptable.

23


Maintenance Procedures Every 500 Hours or 3 Months

8000 SRM 987

Figure 22. Drive Belt Tension Check Gauge 2. Route serpentine belt over pulleys for crankshaft, water pump, and alternator. 3. Insert stud of a 3/8-inch driver ratchet wrench into square hole on tensioner and move tensioner counterclockwise against force of internal spring. 4. While holding tensioner in counterclockwise position, install belt on tensioner pulley. 5. Release ratchet tension and make sure belt is centered on all pulleys. 1. PIVOT FASTENER

2. ADJUSTMENT LINK

Figure 21. Drive Belt Tension Check and Adjustment (Perkins Diesel) A gauge is available that will indicate tension in the drive belt. Fit gauge at center of longest length of drive belt and measure tension. See Figure 22. Correct tension is approximately 355 N (80 lbf).

GM 4.3L ENGINE Serpentine Drive Belt CAUTION Do not use a pry bar to install the drive belt on the pulleys. The pry bar can damage the drive belt and pulleys. NOTE: Figure 23 uses a self-adjusting tensioner. Figure 24 uses a belt adjustment tension screw.

6. Tension indicator should be centered between centering marks on tensioner. Tension Screw Adjustment NOTE: Do not use a pry bar to install the drive belt on the pulleys. The pry bar can damage the drive belt and pulleys. 1. Pull the alternator away from the engine and apply tension to the belt. A gauge is available that will indicate tension in the drive belt. Fit gauge at center of longest length of drive belt and measure tension. See Figure 22. Correct tension approximately. A gauge is available that will indicate tension in the drive belt. Fit gauge at center of longest length of drive belt and measure tension. See Figure 22. Correct tension is approximately 22.5 N (100 lb). 2. Torque the alternator capscrew to 12 (106.2 lbf in). 3. Release the alternator toward the engine.

1. Check alignment of alternator and crankshaft pulleys. The pulleys must be aligned correctly to prevent damage to drive belt.

24

N•m


8000 SRM 987

Maintenance Procedures Every 500 Hours or 3 Months

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

ALTERNATOR PULLEY WATER PUMP PULLEY CRANKSHAFT PULLEY SERPENTINE BELT TENSIONER CENTERING PULLEY CENTERING MARKS

Figure 23. GM 4.3 L Drive Belt Arrangement, Old

ALTERNATOR PULLEY WATER PULLEY CRANKSHAFT PULLEY BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT CAPSCREW PULLEY

Figure 24. GM 4.3 L Drive Belt Arrangement, New

HYDRAULIC TANK BREATHER, CLEAN AND CHECK WARNING Cleaning solvents can be flammable and toxic and can cause skin irritation. When using cleaning solvents, always follow the recommendations of the manufacturer. Clean hydraulic tank breather in solvent. Replace breather element if air will not flow through it easily. See Figure 2 or Figure 3 for location of hydraulic tank breather.

25


Maintenance Procedures Every 500 Hours or 3 Months

8000 SRM 987

BRAKE FLUID WARNING Loss of fluid from the reservoir indicates a leak. Repair the brake system before the lift truck is used. Replace the brake fluid in the brake system if there is oil, water, or dirt in the system. Check fluid level in reservoir for master cylinder. Brake fluid reservoir is in engine compartment. Add brake fluid as necessary. See Figure 4. Use brake fluid shown in Maintenance Schedule.

LIFT CHAINS WEAR CHECK If a section of chain is 3% longer than a similar section of new chain, chain is worn and must be replaced. Measure chain for wear where it moves over the sheaves. If a chain scale is available, check lift chains as shown in Figure 25. If a chain scale is not available, measure 20 links of chain. Measure from center of a pin to center of another pin 20 pitches away. Compare length with the chart in Figure 25. Replace chain if the length of 20 links of the worn section is more than the WEAR LIMIT.

Legend for Figure 25 NOTE: THE INSTRUCTIONS FOR MEASURING CHAIN WEAR ARE SHOWN ON THE CHAIN WEAR SCALE. Pitch

Total Length of 20 Links (Pitch) of New Chain

Wear Limit Maximum Length of 20 Links

25.4 mm (1.00 in.) 31.8 mm (1.25 in.) 38.1 mm (1.50 in.) 44.5 mm (1.75 in.)

508 mm (20.0 in.) 635 mm (25.0 in.) 762 mm (30.0 in.) 889 mm (35.0 in.)

523 mm (20.6 in.) 654 mm (25.7 in.) 785 mm (30.9 in.) 915 mm (36.0 in.)

1. CHAIN WEAR SCALE

FORKS, WEAR AND DAMAGE CHECK WARNING Never repair damaged forks. Do not heat, weld, or bend the forks. Forks are made of special steel using special methods. Replace damaged forks. 1. Check heel and attachment points of forks with a penetrant or magnetic particle inspection. See Figure 9. 2. Measure thickness of forks at a vertical section where there is no wear. This thickness is dimension X. Now measure the thickness at the heel (5) of the fork. If the thickness of the heel is not greater than 90% of dimension X, replace fork.

MAST LUBRICATION WARNING

Figure 25. Lift Chain Check

26

Do not work under a raised carriage. Lower the carriage or use a safety chain. Use the safety chain to prevent the carriage and the inner or intermediate weldments from lowering when servicing the mast and lift chains. Make sure the moving parts are attached to parts that cannot move.


8000 SRM 987

Maintenance Procedures Every 500 Hours or 3 Months

NOTE: Load rollers and sheaves have sealed bearings and do not need additional lubrication. 1. Lubricate sliding surfaces and load roller surfaces along full length of the channels as shown in Figure 26. Apply lubricant only to indicated surfaces. 2. Lubricate pivot pins for mast at grease fittings on pivot pins. Use multipurpose grease. 3. If a sideshift carriage is installed, lubricate fittings for rollers or sliding surfaces with multipurpose grease.

1. GREASE FITTING Figure 27. Steering Axle

FUEL SYSTEM, CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS LPG Carburetor

A. UPPER LOAD ROLLERS B. LOWER LOAD ROLLERS 1. LUBRICATE STRIP BEARINGS SURFACE 2. LUBRICATE LOAD ROLLER SURFACES 3. LOAD ROLLER Figure 26. Mast Lubrication

CONTROL LEVERS AND PEDALS LUBRICATION Lubricate linkages, pedal shafts, control cables (throttle, hood, parking brake), and seat rails. Use a silicone spray lubricant, Hyster Part No. 328388. Lubricate bushings for transmission and mast control levers with engine oil.

Refer to the section LPG Fuel System 900 SRM 348 or Electronic Controlled LPG/Gasoline Fuel System, GM 3.0L and 4.3L EPA Compliant Engines 900 SRM 1088 for LPG carburetor adjustment procedures.

Fuel Injection (Perkins Engine) Refer to Fuel System of the section Perkins Diesel Engines, 1004-42 (AR), 1006-60 (YG), 1006-60T (YH) 600 SRM 705 for repairs and adjustments to the fuel injection system.

GM V-6 Engine Refer to the section Electronic Engine Control, Troubleshooting and Repair 2200 SRM 782 or Electronic Engine Control, Troubleshooting and Repair MEFI-4 2200 SRM 1017 for repair and adjustment procedures to the fuel system.

INCHING/BRAKE PEDAL STEERING AXLE LUBRICATION Lubricate spindles on steering axle at grease fittings on bearing caps. Use multipurpose grease. See Figure 27.

Push on inching/brake pedal. Service brakes must be applied before inching/brake pedal reaches floor plate. Full application of inching/brake pedal applies service brakes and places transmission in NEUTRAL.

27


Maintenance Procedures Every 500 Hours or 3 Months

8000 SRM 987

Lift Trucks with a MONOTROL pedal: when inching/brake pedal is fully applied, a switch in the starting circuit is closed so the engine can be started. For more information on adjusting inching or brake pedal, see the section Single-Speed Powershift Transmission, Troubleshooting and Repair 1300 SRM 397.

STEERING TIE RODS Fill tie rods with new grease until old grease appears.

FORK PINS AND GUIDES Use multipurpose grease and lubricate the fork pins and guides as needed.

1. BODY 2. ELEMENT 3. LABEL

WHEEL NUTS Check wheel nuts to be sure they are at the correct torque. See the Maintenance Schedule for torque values.

AIR FILTER NOTE: Very dirty conditions require daily check and clean.

WARNING Compressed air can move particles so they cause injury to the user or to other personnel. Make sure the path of the compressed air is away from all personnel. Wear protective goggles or a face shield to prevent injury to the eyes. Clean or replace the air filter as necessary. See Figure 28. Use compressed air to clean the filter element. Air pressure must be less than 210 kPa (30 psi). Apply the air from the inside to the outside of the element.

WARNING Cleaning solvents can be flammable and toxic and can cause skin irritation. When using cleaning solvents, always follow the recommendation of the manufacturer. Inspect the filter element. Put a bright light inside and look for holes or other damage. If the element is damaged, replace it with a new element. Use a cloth with solvent to clean the inside of the canister when filter element is cleaned or replaced.

28

4. COVER 5. VALVE 6. PLUG Figure 28. Air Filter

BATTERY WARNING The acid in the electrolyte can cause injury. If the electrolyte is spilled, use water to flush the area. Use a solution of sodium bicarbonate (soda) to make the acid neutral. Acid in the eyes must be flushed with water immediately. Wear eye protection. Batteries generate explosive fumes. Keep the vents in the caps clean. Keep sparks or open flame away from the battery area. Do not make sparks from the battery connections. Disconnect the battery ground cable when doing maintenance. Keep battery and cable terminals clean. Check electrolyte level (unless maintenance-free). Keep electrolyte level above the separators and plates. Use distilled water. Do not fill battery beyond the bottom of the internal filler neck. If battery becomes discharged and requires a booster battery to start the engine, follow these procedures carefully when connecting jumper cables: 1. Always connect positive jumper cable to positive terminal of discharged battery and negative jumper cable to negative terminal. 2. Always connect jumper cable that is the ground cable last. 3. Always connect jumper cables to discharged battery before connecting them to booster battery.


8000 SRM 987

Maintenance Procedures Every 1000 Hours or 6 Months

Maintenance Procedures Every 1000 Hours or 6 Months NOTE: Do the procedures in addition to 500-hour checks.

air bubbles, comes out of threads. Tighten vent screw.

FUEL FILTER, REPLACE (DIESEL ENGINE)

4. Loosen fitting for fuel line at cold start aid. Operate lever under fuel pump until fuel, without air bubbles, comes out of the threads. Tighten tube nut.

1. Clean outside of fuel filter assembly. If there is a drain on filter bowl, drain fuel from fuel filter. See Figure 29. 2. Hold bowl and connector and loosen through-bolt from top of filter head. 3. Lower bowl and filter element and discard filter element.

5. Loosen fittings at two fuel injectors. Disconnect wire at shutoff solenoid so engine will not start. Use starter to rotate engine until fuel, without air bubbles, comes out of threads. Tighten tube nuts. Make sure all other fuel line fittings are tight.

4. Clean inside of bowl and filter head. 5. Install new seal rings. Put bowl on new filter element and hold bowl and filter element in position against filter head. Install and tighten through-bolt. 6. Remove air from fuel system. See Fuel System, Remove Air (Perkins 1004.42 Diesel Engine).

FUEL SYSTEM, REMOVE AIR (PERKINS 1004.42 DIESEL ENGINE) The engine cannot be started if there is air in the fuel system. Air must be removed from the fuel system if any part of fuel system has been disconnected or there is a leak in the low pressure part of the fuel system during operation of the engine. The following procedures are for removal of air from the fuel system. See Figure 30. Make sure there is fuel in the fuel tank. Refer to How to Add Fuel to Lift Truck procedures in the Operating Manual. 1. Loosen fitting at top of final fuel filter. Operate lever under fuel pump until fuel, without air bubbles, comes out of fitting. Tighten fitting. 2. Turn key to RUN position to activate shutoff solenoid. 3. Loosen vent screw at top of injection pump. Operate lever under fuel pump until fuel, without

1. CAPSCREW 2. WASHER 3. FUEL FILTER HEAD 4. TOP SEAL

5. O-RING 6. FUEL FILTER ELEMENT 7. BOTTOM SEAL 8. FUEL FILTER BOTTOM

Figure 29. Diesel Fuel Filter

29


Maintenance Procedures Every 1000 Hours or 6 Months

1. FUEL FILTER FITTING 2. FUEL PUMP LEVER 3. VENT SCREW (FUEL INJECTION PUMP)

8000 SRM 987

4. FITTING (COLD START AID) 5. FITTING (FUEL INJECTOR) 6. SHUTOFF SOLENOID

Figure 30. Diesel Fuel System Air Removal

30


8000 SRM 987

Maintenance Procedures Every 1000 Hours or 6 Months

WATER SEPARATOR, DIESEL ENGINE Replace water separator every 1000 hours or 6 months of operation. See Figure 31.

(YG), 1006-60T (YH) 600 SRM 705 for valve clearance adjustment procedures.

DIFFERENTIAL AND DRIVE AXLE OIL Differential and drive axle use same oil supply. Oil level must be even with bottom of fill hole. Fill hole for checking oil level is on left side of differential housing. Do not use plug on front of differential housing to check oil level. Add oil shown in Maintenance Schedule. Install plug and tighten to 122 N•m (90 lbf ft) and check for leaks.

SPARK PLUGS, GM V-6 Change copper spark plugs on lift trucks equipped with a GM V-6 engine. Refer to the appropriate Parts Manual for part number information.

IGNITION TIMING WARNING Do not touch moving parts (fan, belt, shafts, pulleys). 1. CAPSCREW 2. WASHER 3. FUEL FILTER HEAD 4. TOP SEAL

5. FUEL FILTER 6. BOTTOM SEAL 7. FUEL FILTER HOUSING 8. WATER SENSOR LEAD

1. Warm engine to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn engine’s ignition switch to OFF position. 3. Make sure that CodeMate test switch is in OFF position.

Figure 31. Water Separator

PCV VALVE, GM V-6 Check operation of PCV valve. Check valve inside PCV valve must permit airflow only in one direction from valve cover. PCV valve on GM V-6 engine is on right-hand valve cover. See Figure 4.

CRANKCASE BREATHER, GM V-6 Remove and replace crankcase breather. breather with your hand. See Figure 2.

To check the initial ignition timing set point, do the following.

Tighten

VALVE CLEARANCE, CHECK AND ADJUST GM V-6 engines have hydraulic valve lifters and do not require valve clearance adjustments during normal service. Check valve clearance on Perkins diesel engines, and make adjustments as needed. Refer to Valve Clearance Adjustments of the section Perkins Diesel Engines, 1004-42 (AR), 1006-60

4. Plug CodeMate into diagnostic connector in engine compartment. 5. Place CodeMate test switch in ON position and start engine. 6. Check initial timing set point with a timing light. The correct setting for initial timing set point is 8 BTDC for 3.0L engine and 0 TDC for 4.3L engine. 7. If timing is not correct, loosen clamp that holds distributor housing. Rotate housing right or left to get correct timing. Tighten clamp when timing is correct. 8. Turn ignition key to OFF position. 9. Remove CodeMate Tester from diagnostic connector and place diagnostic connector into protective cover.

31


Maintenance Procedures Every 1000 Hours or 6 Months

8000 SRM 987

COOLING SYSTEM, GM V-6 EPA COMPLIANT ENGINE

1. Move all equipment to a well-ventilated area with no ignition sources.

NOTE: The LPG vaporizer is connected into the cooling system, low coolant levels and restricted or plugged radiator cores can impact the performance of the fuel system.

2. Start engine.

WARNING DO NOT remove the radiator cap from the radiator when the engine is hot. When the radiator cap is removed, the pressure is released from the system. If the system is hot, the steam and boiling coolant can cause burns. DO NOT remove the cover for the radiator when the engine is running. 1. Change coolant in cooling system. Put lift truck on level surface and stop engine. 2. Remove drain plugs or open drain valves. Remove radiator cap and flush cooling system. Check hoses and fittings for damage. Replace with new hoses and fittings as needed.

3. Close manual value with the engine still running. 4. When the engine runs out of fuel and stops, turn the key to OFF. 5. Disconnect battery negative cable.

WARNING A small amount of fuel may still be present in the fuel line. Use gloves to prevent burns, wear protective eye protection. If liquid fuel continues to flow from the connections when loosened, check to make sure the manual valve is fully closed. 6. Slowly loosen and disconnect inlet and outlet fittings. 7. Remove filter housing. See Figure 32.

3. Install drain plugs or close drain valves. Fill cooling system with correct coolant (50% water and 50% ethylene glycol boron-free antifreeze) shown in the Maintenance Schedule. 4. Install radiator cap, start engine, and check for leaks. Add coolant to auxiliary coolant reservoir as needed.

LPG FUEL FILTER GM V-6 EPA COMPLIANT ENGINE, REPLACE WARNING LPG is flammable. Make sure there are no sparks or open flames in the area when the fuel line is drained. The LPG fuel system on the GM V6 EPA Compliant Engine uses an inline replaceable fuel filter element. Check the following: • Leaks at the inlet and outlet fittings. Use a soapy solution or electronic leak detector to detect leaks and repair. • Filter is securely mounted. • Filter housing for external damage. If damaged, replace. To replace the fuel filter, perform the following steps:

32

1. LPG FILTER ELEMENT Figure 32. LPG Fuel Filter, GM-V6 EPA Compliant Engine 8. Check for contamination. 9. Tap the filter opening on a clean cloth, and check for debris. 10. Check canister for proper mounting direction. 11. Reinstall filter housing. 12. Tighten inlet and outlet fittings.


8000 SRM 987

Maintenance Procedures Every 2000 Hours or Annually

NOTE: The fuel cylinder manual valve contains an Excess Flow Check Valve. Open the manual valve slowly to prevent activating the Excess Flow Check Valve. 13. Slowly open manual valve. 14. Check for leaks at the inlet and outlet fittings, and filter house end connection by using soapy solution or electron leak detector. If leaks are detected, make proper repairs.

INSPECT ENGINE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM, CONNECTORS, AND FCVS CONNECTION When inspecting the electrical system, check the following: • Check and clean battery connection. Ensure that connections are tight. • Check battery for damage or cracks to the case. Replace if necessary.

• Check positive and negative cables for corrosion, rubbing, and chaffing. Tighten connections at both ends. • Check engine wire harness for rubbing, chaffing, pinching, and cracks or breaks in the wiring. • Check engine harness connectors. Check to ensure connectors are fitted and locked by pushing the connectors together. Pull on the connector halves to make sure they are locked. • Check ignition coil wire and spark plug wires for hardening, cracking, arching, chaffing, separation, split boot covers, and proper fit. Replace spark plugs at the recommended interval as shown in the Maintenance Schedule. • Check that all electrical components are securely mounted and retained to the engine or chassis. • Check the MIL, charging, and oil pressure lights for operation by starting the engine and checking that the light illuminates before turning out.

Maintenance Procedures Every 2000 Hours or Annually NOTE: Do these procedures in addition to 1000-hour checks.

DIFFERENTIAL THRUST SCREW Check adjustment of thrust screw on new lift trucks after the first 100 hours of operation. Loosen lock

1. THRUST SCREW

2. LOCK NUT

nut and turn thrust screw into housing until screw touches ring gear. Turn thrust screw out of housing 1/6 turn and tighten lock nut to 120 N•m (85 lbf ft). Additional adjustment of thrust screw is not normally necessary after this time. See Figure 33.

3. RING GEAR

Figure 33. Differential Thrust Screw

33


Maintenance Procedures Every 2000 Hours or Annually

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM NOTE: Change on new lift trucks after first 100 hours.

Hydraulic Oil and Filter, Replace

8000 SRM 987 6. Connect supply line to hydraulic tank and fill tank with correct oil. 7. Operate system and check for leaks.

POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION OIL AND FILTER, REPLACE

WARNING At operating temperature, the hydraulic oil is HOT. Do not permit the oil to touch the skin and cause a burn.

WARNING At operating temperature, the oil for the powershift transmission is HOT. Do not permit the oil to touch the skin and cause a burn.

CAUTION Do not permit dirt to enter the hydraulic system when the oil level is checked or the filter is changed. Dirt can cause damage to components of the hydraulic system. 1. Place truck on level surface and place container under hydraulic tank. 2. Disconnect supply line for pump at tank and drain oil. 3. Using a spanner wrench, remove filter cover on hydraulic system oil reservoir. See Figure 34. 4. Remove and discard filter. 5. Install new filter and replace oil filter cover.

CAUTION Disposal of lubricants and fluids must meet local environmental regulations.

CAUTION Do not permit dirt to enter the powershift transmission when the oil level is checked or the filter is changed. Dirt can cause damage to the components. NOTE: Additional information on the powershift transmission can be found in the following sections: • Single-Speed Powershift Transmission, Description and Operation 1300 SRM 399 • Single-Speed Powershift Transmission, Troubleshooting and Repair 1300 SRM 397 1. Change oil and filter for transmission. Drain plug for transmission is on cover of transmission, toward rear of lift truck. Remove drain plug, spring, and screen. Drain oil into a container. 2. Clean screen. When oil has drained, install screen, spring, and drain plug. 3. Install a new oil filter when oil in the transmission is changed. Remove and discard old oil filter. Apply clean oil to gasket of new filter. Install new filter and tighten it with your hand. See Figure 35. 4. Add oil to transmission at dipstick tube. Correct oil is shown in Maintenance Schedule. Check for leaks during operation

1. 2. 3. 4.

OIL FILTER COVER WITH DIPSTICK O-RING HYDRAULIC FILTER HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR Figure 34. Hydraulic Filters

34


8000 SRM 987

Maintenance Procedures Every 2000 Hours or Annually 2. Remove drain plugs or open drain valves. Remove radiator cap. Flush cooling system. Check hoses and fittings for damage. Replace with new hoses and fitting as needed. 3. Install drain plugs or close drain valves. Fill cooling system with correct coolant (50% water and 50% ethylene glycol). 4. Install radiator cap. Start engine. Check for leaks. Add coolant to auxiliary coolant reservoir as needed.

WHEEL BEARINGS Steering Wheels, Lubrication Lubricate wheel bearings in hubs for steering wheels with multipurpose grease. See the section Steering Axle 1600 SRM 326 for instructions to remove and install steer wheels and hubs.

Drive Wheels, Lubrication

1. TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK

2. TRANSMISSION FILTER

Figure 35. Powershift Transmission Maintenance Points

Lubricate inner wheel bearings in hubs for drive wheels with multipurpose grease. See the section Drive Axle 1400 SRM 984 for instructions to remove and install drive wheels and hubs.

PCV VALVE, GM V-6 Replace PCV valve on GM V-6 engine.

SPARK PLUGS, GM V-6 Change platinum spark plugs on lift trucks equipped with a GM V-6 engine. Refer to the appropriate Parts Manual for part number information.

COOLING SYSTEM WARNING DO NOT remove the radiator cap from the radiator when the engine is hot. When the radiator cap is removed, the pressure is released from the system. If the system is hot, the steam and boiling coolant can cause burns. DO NOT remove the cover for the radiator when the engine is running.

LPG FILTER, REPLACE WARNING LPG is flammable. Make sure there are no sparks or open flames in the area when the fuel line is drained. 1. Close fuel valve on tank. Run engine until all fuel is gone and engine stops. Slowly loosen hose fitting to filter. Let any fuel drain from fitting before disassembling filter unit. 2. Remove screws and the filter cover. Replace filter element. See Figure 36.

1. Change coolant in cooling system. Put lift truck on a level surface. Stop engine.

35


Maintenance Procedures Every 2000 Hours or Annually

8000 SRM 987

1. FILTER ELEMENT Figure 36. LPG Fuel Filter

GASOLINE FUEL FILTER, REPLACE 1. Replace gasoline filter. Make sure fuel lines do not leak when they are connected again. For location of fuel filter, refer to Figure 2. 2. Install cover and gasket. Tighten screws for cover. Tighten hose fitting.

BRAKE BOOSTER FILTER, REPLACE 1. Remove the two clamps that hold the old brake booster filter onto the vacuum lines. Remove the brake booster filter. See Figure 37. 2. Install new filter onto brake vacuum lines. Install the two clamps to hold brake booster filter onto brake vacuum lines.

DIFFERENTIAL OIL FOR POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION, REPLACE CAUTION Disposal of lubricants and fluids must meet local environmental regulations. Change differential oil for powershift transmission. See Maintenance Schedule for type of oil and quantity to use. Install and tighten fill and drain plugs to 122 N•m (90 lbf ft) and check for leaks.

36

1. BRAKE BOOSTER FILTER 2. CLAMPS Figure 37. Brake Booster Filter

AIR FILTER ELEMENT, GM V-6 EPA COMPLIANT ENGINE NOTE: In dirty or dusty environments, change at 1,000 hours. Check the air filter element after 2,000 hours and replace.

OXYGEN SENSOR GM V-6 EPA COMPLIANT ENGINE NOTE: Make sure connections are air tight. If these connections are not air tight, the incorrect oxygen readings could be entered into the fuel air ratio.

CAUTION Do not use silicone spray or silicone-based products on the oxygen sensor. Use of silicone products can cause severe damage to the oxygen sensor.


8000 SRM 987 Check that the oxygen sensor electrical connector is seated and locked. Check wires for cracks, splits, chaffing, or burn through. If necessary, repair.

TEST LPG REGULATOR PRESSURE For more information regarding the Test LPG Regulator Pressure, see the section Electronic Controlled LPG/Gasoline Fuel System, GM 3.0L and 4.3L EPA Compliant Engines 900 SRM 1088.

INSPECT LOW PRESSURE REGULATOR (LPR) FOR OIL BUILDUP AND LEAKS CAUTION The Low Pressure Regulator (LPR) has been designed for the GM V6 EPA Compliant Engine. The regulator should not be disassembled or rebuilt. If the LPR fails to operate or has a leak, the LPR should be replaced with ONLY recommended HYSTER replacement parts. To check the LPR, perform the following checks: • Check for fuel leaks at the inlet fitting, outlet fitting, and regulator body. • Check the inlet and outlet fittings of the coolant supply for water leaks. • Check the coolant lines for hardening, cracking, chaffing, or splits. Replace if needed. • Check coolant supply hose clamp connections, make sure they are tight. • Check the Pressure Trim Valve (PTV) electrical connection. Make sure the connector is seated and locked, check mounting bolts, and check for external damage. • Check regulator is securely mounted. NOTE: During normal operation, oil may buildup inside the secondary chamber of the LPR. This may be a result of poor fuel quality, contamination of fuel supply chain, or regional variation of the fuel makeup. To correct these problems, drain oil periodically.

CAUTION

Maintenance Procedures Every 2000 Hours or Annually 1. Move the equipment to a well-ventilated area with no ignition sources. 2. Start engine. 3. Close manual value with engine still running. 4. When the engine runs out of fuel and stops, turn the key to OFF. 5. Disconnect negative battery cable.

WARNING A small amount of fuel may still be in the fuel line. Use gloves and eye protection to prevent injury. If fuel continues to flow from the connections when loosened, make sure the manual valve is completely closed. 6. Slowly loosen and disconnect inlet fitting. 7. At the outlet hose fitting, loosen clamp and remove hose. 8. Remove and retain locking pin in the outlet fitting and remove outlet fitting from the LPR. 9. Disconnect PTV connection and vacuum hose. 10. Remove two LPR mounting bolts. 11. Put a drain pan in engine compartment. 12. Rotate LPR to 90 degrees, so the outlet fitting is pointing down into the drain pan. Drain LPR. 13. Inspect secondary chamber for dried particles and remove. 14. Remove drain pan and reinstall LPR with the two retaining bolts. 15. Reinstall outlet fitting and secure with locking pin. 16. Reconnect PTV electrical connection, push connector until it locks ("clicks") into place. Pull connector to check it is locked. Connect vacuum line. 17. Reconnect the outlet hose and hose clamp.

Disposal of lubricants and fluids must meet local environmental regulations.

18. Reinstall fuel inlet line and tighten connection.

To drain the oil from the LPR, follow these steps:

NOTE: Open manual valve slowly to prevent activating the Excess Flow Check Valve.

NOTE: Drain oil from the LPR when the engine is warm. This will help the oil flow freely from the LPR.

19. Slowly open manual service valve.

37


Safety Procedures When Working Near Mast

8000 SRM 987

20. Check for leaks at inlet and outlet fittings and coolant line connections.

INSPECT EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND PIPING FOR LEAKS

21. Use soapy solution or electron leak detector. If leaks are found, make proper repairs.

To check the exhaust manifold and piping for leaks, perform the following:

22. Start the engine and recheck for leaks at regulator.

• Check the exhaust manifold at the cylinder head for leaks. Ensure that all bolts and shields are in place. • Check exhaust pipe fasteners to manifold for leaks to ensure they are tight. Repair if necessary. • Check all exhaust pipe extension connectors for leaks and tighten, if necessary. • Visually inspect converter for correct muffler mounting and tail pipe mounting. • Check for any leaks at the inlet and outlet of the converter.

23. Dispose of any drained material in a safe and proper manner.

CHECK THROTTLE SHAFT FOR STICKING Check Throttle body return action to ensure throttle shaft is not sticking. Repair if necessary.

Safety Procedures When Working Near Mast The following procedures must be used when inspecting or working near the mast. Additional precautions and procedures can be required when repairing or removing the mast. See the correct Service Manual section for the specific mast being repaired.

WARNING Mast parts are heavy and can move. Distances between parts are small. Serious injury or death can result if part of the body is hit by parts of the mast or the carriage. • Never put any part of the body into or under the mast or carriage unless all parts of the mast are completely lowered or a safety chain is installed. Also make sure that the power is off and the key is removed. Put a DO NOT OPERATE tag in the operator’s compartment. Disconnect the battery on electric lift trucks and put a tag or lock on the battery connector. • Be careful of the forks. When the mast is raised, the forks can be at a height to cause an injury. • DO NOT climb on the mast or lift truck at any time. Use a ladder or personnel lift to work on the mast. • DO NOT use blocks to support the mast weldments nor to restrain their movement.

38

• Mast repairs require disassembly and removal of parts and can require removal of the mast or carriage. Follow the repair procedures in the correct Service Manual for the mast. When Working Near the Mast, Always: 1. Lower mast and carriage completely. Push lift/ lower control lever forward and make sure there is no movement in the mast. Make sure all parts of the mast that move are fully lowered. OR 2. If parts of the mast must be in a raised position, install a safety chain to restrain the moving parts of the mast. Connect moving parts to a part that does not move. Follow these procedures: a. Put mast in vertical position. b. Raise mast to align bottom crossmember of weldment that moves in outer weldment with a crossmember on outer weldment. On the two-stage and free-lift mast, the moving part is the inner weldment. On the three-stage mast, it is the intermediate weldment. See Figure 38.


8000 SRM 987

Safety Procedures When Working Near Mast

A. TWO-STAGE LFL MAST B. TWO-STAGE FFL MAST

C. THREE-STAGE FFL MAST

1. 2. 3. 4.

5. FREE-LIFT CYLINDER 6. CROSSMEMBER 7. CROSSMEMBER

OUTER WELDMENT INNER WELDMENT INTERMEDIATE WELDMENT HOOK

Figure 38. Two-Stage LFL, Two-Stage FFL, and Three-Stage FFL Masts

39


Lift Chain Adjustments

8000 SRM 987

c. Use a 3/8-inch minimum safety chain with a hook to fasten the crossmembers together so the movable member cannot lower. Put the hook on the back side of the mast. Make sure the hook is completely engaged with a link in the chain. Make sure the safety chain does not touch lift chains or chain sheaves, tubes, hoses, fittings, or other parts on the mast. d. Lower the mast until there is tension in the safety chain and the free-lift cylinder (freelift, three-stage, and four-stage masts only) is completely retracted. If running, stop engine. Apply parking brake. Install a DO NOT REMOVE tag on the safety chain(s).

e. Install another safety chain (3/8-inch minimum) between the top or bottom crossmember of the carriage and a crossmember on the outer weldment. 3. Apply parking brake. After lowering or restraining the mast, shut off power and remove key. Put a DO NOT OPERATE tag in the operator’s compartment. Disconnect battery on electric lift trucks and put a tag or lock on the battery connector.

Lift Chain Adjustments When working on or near the mast, see Safety Procedures When Working Near Mast in this section.

• Tension will be the same on each chain of chain set. Check tension by pushing on both chains at the same time. • Chain length will be correct. • Chains must travel freely through complete cycle.

Never allow anyone under a raised carriage. Do not put any part of your body in or through the lift mechanism unless all parts of the mast are completely lowered and the engine is STOPPED.

NOTE: When chain adjustments are complete, make sure the threads on the nuts of the chain anchors are completely engaged. Make sure all adjustment is not removed from the chain anchors. Chain anchors must be able to move on their mounting.

Do not try to find hydraulic leaks by putting your hand on hydraulic components under pressure. Hydraulic oil can be injected into the body by the pressure.

1. When adjusting lift chains on forklift trucks equipped with either pin- or hook-type forks installed, go to Step 2. If forklift truck is normally equipped with a hook-type carriage and has an attachment without forks, go to Step 3. If the forklift truck is normally equipped with a pin-type carriage and has an attachment without forks, go to Step 4.

WARNING

During test procedures for the hydraulic system, fasten the load to the carriage with chains to prevent it from falling. Keep all personnel away from the lift truck during the tests. When lift chains are correctly adjusted:

40


8000 SRM 987

Lift Chain Adjustments

NOTE: Prior to performing adjustment procedures, make sure forklift truck is parked on a level surface and the mast is in the vertical position. 2. Adjust chain anchors which support the carriage until bottom of the fork heel is 6 ±3 mm (0.24 ±0.12 in.) above floor level. See Figure 39.

1. MAST 2. CARRIAGE 3. DISTANCE FROM FLOOR TO LOWER CARRIAGE BAR Figure 40. Lift Chain Adjustment, Hook-Type Carriage 1. 2. 3. 4.

MAST CARRIAGE FORK HEEL OF FORK IS 6 ±3 mm (0.24 ±0.12 in.) ABOVE THE FLOOR LEVEL.

4. Adjust chain anchors, which support the carriage, until the center line of the fork pin is above the floor level as shown in Table 3. See Figure 41.

Figure 39. Lift Chain Adjustments, Hook- or Pin-Type Forks

Table 3. Pin-Type Carriage Chain Adjustment

3. Adjust chain anchors which support carriage until the bottom of lower carriage bar is above the floor level as shown in Table 2 below. See Figure 40.

H70/80, 90XLS

545 ±3 mm (21.5 ±0.12 in.)

H90-110XL

708 ±3 mm (27.87 ±0.12 in.)

H135-155XL

907 ±3 mm (35.71 ±0.12 in.)

Table 2. Hook-Type Carriage Chain Adjustment Class II and Class III

82.5 ±3 mm (3.25 ±0.12 in.)

Class IV

133.5 ±3 mm (5.26 ±0.12 in.)

41


Fuel Injectors Repair

8000 SRM 987 Legend for Figure 41 1. LOAD BACKREST 2. FORK PIN 3. DISTANCE FROM FORK PIN TO FLOOR

Figure 41. Lift Chain Adjustment, Pin-Type Carriage

Fuel Injectors Repair WARNING Do not put your hands on fuel lines under pressure. Fuel oil can be injected into your body by the hydraulic pressure and cause injury. NOTE: Inspection and repair of fuel injectors require special tools and training. Most users have a special repair service make repairs on fuel injectors. Fuel injector nozzles that have a problem will cause black smoke in the exhaust, a decrease in engine power, and an increase in engine noise.

42

NOTE: Additional information on Perkins diesel engines can be found in the section Perkins Diesel Engines, 1004-42 (AR), 1006-60 (YG), 1006-60T (YH) 600 SRM 705. Engine will run roughly if a fuel injector has a problem. To find which fuel injector has a problem, operate the engine at approximately 1000 rpm. Loosen and tighten connection to the inlet of each fuel injector in a sequence. When connection to bad fuel injector is loosened, there will not be a change in engine speed.


8000 SRM 987

Lift and Tilt System Leak Check

Lift and Tilt System Leak Check LIFT CYLINDERS, LEAK CHECK WARNING

TILT SYSTEM WARNING

Never allow anyone under a raised carriage. Do not put any part of your body in or through the lift mechanism unless all parts of the mast are completely lowered and the engine is stopped.

Never allow anyone under a raised carriage. Do not put any part of your body in or through the lift mechanism unless all parts of the mast are completely lowered and the engine is stopped.

Before making any repairs, use blocks and chains on the mast weldments and carriage so they cannot move. Make sure the moving parts are fastened to the parts that cannot move.

Before making any repairs, use blocks and chains on the mast weldments and carriage so they cannot move. Make sure the moving parts are fastened to the parts that cannot move.

Do not try to find hydraulic leaks by putting your hand on hydraulic components under pressure. Hydraulic oil can be injected into the body by the pressure.

Do not try to find hydraulic leaks by putting your hand on hydraulic components under pressure. Hydraulic oil can be injected into the body by the pressure.

During test procedures for the hydraulic system, fasten the load to the carriage with chains to prevent it from falling. Keep all personnel away from the lift truck during the tests.

During test procedures for the hydraulic system, fasten the load to the carriage with chains to prevent it from falling. Keep all personnel away from the lift truck during the tests.

1. Operate hydraulic system. Put a capacity load on forks and raise and lower load several times. Lower load and tilt mast forward and backward several times. Check for leaks.

1. Put a capacity load on forks. Raise carriage and load. Slowly tilt mast forward. If mast continues to slowly tilt forward when control valve is in NEUTRAL position, there are leaks inside hydraulic system.

2. Raise carriage and load 2.5 m (8 ft). If carriage slowly lowers when control valve is in the NEUTRAL position, there are leaks inside hydraulic system. Maximum speed that carriage is allowed to lower is 63 mm (2.5 in.) per 10 minutes when hydraulic oil is 30 C (90 F). If oil temperature is 60 C (140 F), the maximum speed that the carriage can lower is 146 mm (5.7 in.) per 10 minutes.

2. Maximum speed that mast is allowed to tilt forward when there are internal leaks in lift system is 16 mm (0.63 in.) per 10 minutes (measured at the tilt cylinder). Maximum speed is measured when hydraulic oil is 30 C (86 F). If the oil temperature is 60 C (140 F), the maximum speed is 73 mm (2.9 in.) per 10 minutes.

3. Check lift cylinder for internal leaks. Remove load from forks. Install a gate valve in supply line between main control valve and mast. Put a capacity load on the forks again. Raise carriage 2.5 m (8 ft). Close gate valve. If the carriage or mast weldments lower slowly, seals in the lift cylinders have leaks. 4. If mast does not move, open gate valve and check movement again. If mast moves forward when gate valve is open, check for leaks in hydraulic lines and fittings. If no leaks are found, check main control valve for damage. Remove load from forks.

3. If leak rate is greater than specifications listed in Step 2 or in Table 4, lower mast and remove load from mast. Install a gate valve between port at the front of tilt cylinder and hydraulic line. Place load on forks again. Close gate valve. If mast tilts slowly forward, cylinder seals are leaking. 4. If mast does not move, open gate valve and check movement again. If mast moves forward when gate valve is open, check for leaks in hydraulic lines and fittings. If no leaks are found, check main control valve for damage. 5. Remove load from forks when checks are complete.

43


Welding Repairs

8000 SRM 987

Table 4. Tilt Cylinder Leak Check Specifications Hydraulic Oil Temperature

Cylinder Stroke

20 C (68 F)

Table 4. Tilt Cylinder Leak Check Specifications (Continued) Hydraulic Oil Temperature

Cylinder Stroke

1.1 mm/min (0.043 in./min)

50 C (122 F)

4.9 mm/min (0.193 in./min)

30 C (86 F)

1.6 mm/min (0.063 in./min)

60 C (140 F)

7.3 mm/min (0.287 in./min)

40 C (104 F)

3.0 mm/min (0.118 in./min)

Welding Repairs WARNING Welding can cause a fire or an explosion. Always follow the instructions in the Frame section if a fuel or hydraulic tank must be welded. Make sure there is no fuel, oil, or grease near the weld area. Make sure there is good ventilation in the area where the welding must be done. Do not heat, weld, or bend forks. Forks are made of special steel using special methods. The strength of the overhead guard can be reduced by welding or heating. Get information from your dealer for Hyster lift trucks before welding on a mast. Forklift frames and components may be painted with a catalyzed paint such as polyurethane or a two-part primer. Welding, burning, or other heat sufficient to cause thermal decomposition of the paint may release isocyanates. These chemicals are allergic sensitizers to the skin and respiratory tract

44

and overexposure may occur without odor warning. Should work be performed, utilize good industrial hygiene practices including removal of all paint (prime and finish coats) to the metal around the area to be welded, local ventilation, and/or supplied-air respiratory protection.

CAUTION When an arc welder is used, always disconnect the ground cable from the battery in the lift truck. This action will prevent damage to the alternator or the battery. Connect the ground clamp for the arc welder as close as possible to the weld area. This action will prevent damage to a bearing from the large current from the welder. Some repairs require welding. If an acetylene or arc welder is used, make sure procedures in previous WARNING and CAUTION are done.


8000 SRM 987

Overhead Guard Changes

Overhead Guard Changes WARNING Do not weld mounts for lights or accessories to the overhead guard except to the front and rear cross bars shown in Figure 42. The strength of the overhead guard can be reduced by welding or heating. Install lights and accessories or their mounts with clamps or nuts and bolts. Make sure mount holes are correct size and are in correct location. The strength of the overhead guard can be reduced if holes are in the wrong location or are larger than specifications shown in Figure 42. 1. DO NOT drill holes on front or rear surfaces of the legs of overhead guard. Drill holes only on centerline of inside or outside surface of the

leg. Maximum hole diameter allowed is 13 mm (0.51 in.). Minimum dimension allowed between holes is 50 mm (2.00 in.). 2. See Figure 42, VIEW A-A. Drill holes only on centerline of 50 mm (2.00 in.) surface of 12 × 50 mm (0.50 × 2.00 in.) cross bars. Maximum hole diameter allowed is 10 mm (0.393 in.). Minimum dimension allowed between holes is 50 mm (2.00 in.). 3. See Figure 42, VIEW B-B. One 22.3 mm (0.88 in.) hole is permitted on centerline of inside surface of right rear leg in location shown for electric wires to lights or accessories. 4. Mounts for lights and accessories can be welded to front and rear cross bars.

A. SIDE VIEW OF OVERHEAD GUARD 1. FRONT AND REAR SURFACES OVERHEAD GUARD LEGS 2. CROSSBAR CENTERLINES

3. CENTERLINE INSIDE SURFACE RIGHT REAR LEG 4. MOUNTS FOR LIGHTS AND ACCESSORIES

Figure 42. Overhead Guard Changes

45


Wheel and Tire Replacement

8000 SRM 987

Wheel and Tire Replacement SOLID RUBBER TIRE, CHANGE

Wheels, Install

When new solid rubber tires (press-on) must be installed, put lift truck on blocks as described in How to Put Lift Truck on Blocks at the beginning of this section. Remove wheel. Correct tools, equipment, and a press ring must be used for each size wheel. A press that has a capacity of approximately 36,000 kg (80,000 lb) is required to press the wheel from the rim. Do not try to change solid rubber tires on wheels unless you have correct tools, equipment, and experience. Make sure tires are installed on wheels according to dimensions shown in Figure 43. Install tires on both drive wheels at the same dimensions. Install tires on both steering wheels at same dimensions. Check nameplate on lift truck for correct tread width. Tread width is measured from outside of one wheel to inside of the other wheel.

CAUTION Check all wheel nuts after 2 to 5 hours of operation: when new lift trucks begin operation and on all lift trucks when the drive wheels have been removed and installed. Tighten the nuts in a cross pattern to the correct torque value shown in the Maintenance Schedule. When the nuts stay tight for 8 hours, the interval for checking the torque can be extended to 500 hours. Steering Wheels - Lubricate bearings with multipurpose grease and install wheel and bearings on spindle. Install washer and nut on spindle. Tighten nut to 200 N•m (148 lbf ft) while rotating wheel. Loosen nut until wheel rotates freely and bearings are not loose. Tighten nut to 35 N•m (26 lbf ft) and install cotter pin at closest slot in nut. Install cap for bearings. Drive Wheels - Install wheel on hub. Tighten nuts in a cross pattern to torque value in Maintenance Schedule.

Unit

A

B

S3.50-4.00XM

0

0

S5.00-5.50XM

25.4 mm (1.0 in.)

0

A. STEER TIRE AND WHEEL

B. DRIVE TIRE AND WHEEL

1. OUTSIDE EDGE

2. INSIDE EDGE

Figure 43. Wheels and Tires

46


8000 SRM 987

Hydraulic Oil, Lubricant, and Coolant Specifications

Adhesives and Sealants Hyster Part No.

Loctite® Part No.

Description

Size

360387

222

Small Screw Threadlock (Purple)

50 ml

318702*

242

Removable Threadlock (Blue)

10 ml

226414*

271

High Strength Threadlock (Red)

10 ml

318996

277

High Viscosity Threadlock (Red)

50 ml

318650

290

Low Viscosity Threadlock (Green)

0.02 oz

251099

290

Low Viscosity Threadlock (Green)

50 ml

355844*

422

SuperBonder® Adhesive

3 ml

350830

515

Gasket Eliminator (Purple)

6 ml

313022*

515

Gasket Eliminator (Purple)

50 ml

273338*

567

Pipe Sealant with Teflon®

50 ml

318705

595

Super Flex® Silicone

100 ml

318701*

609

Retaining Compound

10 ml

341959

680

Retaining Compound

50 ml

226415

Primer T - Aerosol

6 oz

316865

Antiseize Compound

1 lb

360053-10

Chisel Gasket Remover (10 Aerosol cans per case)

318700

Adhesive & Sealant Kit (Contains one each of * items)

18 oz

* Items marked with an asterisk are included in the Adhesive and Sealant Kit PN 318700. Loctite®, Super Flex®, and Super Bonder® are registered trademarks of the Loctite Corporation. Teflon® is a registered trademark of Du Pont de Nemours Co., Inc.

Hydraulic Oil, Lubricant, and Coolant Specifications Hyster Part No.

Description

Size

336830

Hydraulic and Transmission Oil (J20A, J20C Specifications)

1 qt

336831

Hydraulic and Transmission Oil (J20A, J20C Specifications)

2 gal

336832

Hydraulic and Transmission Oil (J20A, J20C Specifications)

5 gal

336833

Hydraulic and Transmission Oil (J20A, J20C Specifications)

55 gal

3002338

Antifreeze (Ethylene Glycol)

1 gal

326457

Multipurpose Grease

5 lb

328388

Silicone Spray Lubricant

8 and 16 oz

47


NOTES ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

48



PERKINS DIESEL ENGINES 1004-42 (AR), 1006-60 (YG), 1006-60T (YH) H3.50-5.00XL (H70-110XL) [G005]; S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) [D004]; H6.00-7.00XL (H135-155XL, H135-155XL 2) [F006]; S6.00-7.00XL (S135-155XL, S135-155XL 2) [B024]; H13.00-16.00XL (H300-360XL) [D019]; H8.00-12.00XL (H165-280XL) [E007]; H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005]; H8.00-12.00XM (H170-280HD) [F007]; H13.00-16.00XM (H300-360HD) [E019]; H10.00-12.00XM-12EC (H360HD-EC) [E019]; H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [E004, F004]

PART NO. 1455747

600 SRM 705


Perkins Diesel Engines

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS General ................................................................................................................................................................. General Safety Rules ....................................................................................................................................... Description ........................................................................................................................................................... Engine Serial Number Codes.......................................................................................................................... Engine Data ..................................................................................................................................................... Engine Removal and Installation ....................................................................................................................... Lift Engine ....................................................................................................................................................... Cylinder Head Assembly Repair ......................................................................................................................... Valve Cover ...................................................................................................................................................... Remove......................................................................................................................................................... Install ........................................................................................................................................................... Rocker Arm Assembly ..................................................................................................................................... Remove......................................................................................................................................................... Install ........................................................................................................................................................... Disassemble ................................................................................................................................................. Inspect.......................................................................................................................................................... Assemble ...................................................................................................................................................... Valve Clearance Adjustments ......................................................................................................................... Four-Cylinder Engines.............................................................................................................................. Six-Cylinder Engines ................................................................................................................................ Valve Springs ................................................................................................................................................. Cylinder Head Assembly ............................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Valves and Valve Springs .............................................................................................................................. Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Inspect........................................................................................................................................................ Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Valve Guides .................................................................................................................................................. Inspect........................................................................................................................................................ Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Cylinder Head and Valve Seats .................................................................................................................... Inspect........................................................................................................................................................ Repair......................................................................................................................................................... New Valve Seats, Install ........................................................................................................................... Piston and Connecting Rod Assemblies Repair ............................................................................................... Rod Bearings.................................................................................................................................................. Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Piston and Connecting Rod Assembly .......................................................................................................... Service Note............................................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Piston Rings ................................................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Inspect........................................................................................................................................................ Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Piston and Connecting Rod ........................................................................................................................... Disassemble ............................................................................................................................................... Inspect........................................................................................................................................................

Š2006 HYSTER COMPANY

1 1 2 5 5 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 10 12 12 14 18 18 18 19 19 19 20 20 20 20 20 20 22 22 23 23 24 24 24 25 26 26 26 26 27 27 28

i


Table of Contents

Perkins Diesel Engines

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) How to Select Correct Replacements ....................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Piston Cooling Jets ........................................................................................................................................ Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Crankshaft Assembly Repair ............................................................................................................................ General ........................................................................................................................................................... Crankshaft Pulley.......................................................................................................................................... Engine AR, Remove................................................................................................................................... Engines YG and YH, Remove ................................................................................................................... Inspect........................................................................................................................................................ Engine AR, Install..................................................................................................................................... Engines YG and YH, Install ..................................................................................................................... Rear Oil Seal .................................................................................................................................................. Replace ....................................................................................................................................................... Main Bearings................................................................................................................................................ Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Inspect........................................................................................................................................................ Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Thrust Washers.............................................................................................................................................. Crankshaft Axial Movement, Check ........................................................................................................ Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Crankshaft ..................................................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Inspect........................................................................................................................................................ Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Flywheel ......................................................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Ring Gear, Replace .................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Flywheel Housing .......................................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Timing Case and Timing Gears Repair ............................................................................................................ General ........................................................................................................................................................... Timing Case Cover ........................................................................................................................................ Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Front Oil Seal................................................................................................................................................. Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Crankshaft Pulley Wear Sleeve .................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Idler Gear and Hub ....................................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Air Compressor Drive, Bendix ...................................................................................................................... Disassemble ............................................................................................................................................... Assemble .................................................................................................................................................... Fuel Injection Pump Gear .............................................................................................................................

ii

28 29 29 29 30 30 30 31 31 31 32 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 35 35 36 36 37 37 37 37 39 39 39 39 40 40 40 41 41 41 41 42 42 42 42 43 43 43 43 44 45 45 46 46


Perkins Diesel Engines

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Camshaft Gear............................................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Crankshaft Gear ............................................................................................................................................ Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Timing Case ................................................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Camshaft and Tappets .................................................................................................................................. Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Cylinder Block Assembly Repair....................................................................................................................... Description ..................................................................................................................................................... Cylinder Block ............................................................................................................................................... Disassemble ............................................................................................................................................... Inspect........................................................................................................................................................ Assemble .................................................................................................................................................... Cylinder Bore (Four-Cylinder Engines) ....................................................................................................... Cylinder Liner (Six-Cylinder Engines)......................................................................................................... Inspect........................................................................................................................................................ Cylinder Liner Condition, Check.............................................................................................................. Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Service Liner, Install ................................................................................................................................. Partially Finished Liner, Install............................................................................................................... Engine Timing.................................................................................................................................................... Description ..................................................................................................................................................... How to Set Number One Piston to TDC on Compression Stroke ........................................................... How to Set Number One Piston to TDC on Compression Stroke (Alternate Procedure)...................... Valve Timing, Check.................................................................................................................................. Fuel Injection Pump Timing, Check......................................................................................................... Turbocharger - Engine YH Repair .................................................................................................................... General ........................................................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Impeller and Compressor Housing, Clean ............................................................................................... Lubrication System Repair................................................................................................................................ General ........................................................................................................................................................... Oil Filter, Replace .......................................................................................................................................... Filter Head ..................................................................................................................................................... Remove and Install ................................................................................................................................... Oil Sump ........................................................................................................................................................ Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Oil Pump ........................................................................................................................................................ Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Inspect........................................................................................................................................................ Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Relief Valve ....................................................................................................................................................

47 47 48 48 48 49 49 49 49 49 50 51 51 51 52 52 52 52 53 53 54 54 54 54 55 56 57 58 58 59 60 60 61 62 62 62 62 63 64 64 64 65 65 65 65 66 66 66 66 67 67

iii


Table of Contents

Perkins Diesel Engines

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Disassemble ............................................................................................................................................... Inspect........................................................................................................................................................ Assemble .................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Idler Gear Shaft, Replace .............................................................................................................................. Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Remove (Alternative) ................................................................................................................................ Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Install (Alternative) .................................................................................................................................. Install (Alternative for Four-Cylinder Engines Only)............................................................................. Fuel System Repair............................................................................................................................................ Description ..................................................................................................................................................... Fuel Injection Pump ...................................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Check and Adjust ...................................................................................................................................... Fuel System Air Removal.............................................................................................................................. Fuel Filter, Replace ....................................................................................................................................... Canister Type ............................................................................................................................................ Quick Release Canister Type.................................................................................................................... Fuel Injectors ................................................................................................................................................. Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Inspect........................................................................................................................................................ Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Fuel Pump...................................................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Disassemble ............................................................................................................................................... Assemble .................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Test ............................................................................................................................................................. Cooling System Repair ...................................................................................................................................... General ........................................................................................................................................................... Thermostat..................................................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Test ............................................................................................................................................................. Coolant Pump ................................................................................................................................................ Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Disassemble ............................................................................................................................................... Assemble .................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Fan and Fan Drive ........................................................................................................................................ Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Oil Cooler (Six-Cylinder Engines) ................................................................................................................ Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Disassemble and Assemble ....................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Oil Cooler Bypass Valve ............................................................................................................................ Electrical Equipment Repair.............................................................................................................................

iv

67 68 68 68 69 69 69 69 70 70 71 71 71 72 72 73 74 74 75 76 76 77 77 78 78 79 79 79 79 80 80 81 81 81 81 81 82 82 82 82 84 86 87 87 87 88 88 88 88 88 89


Perkins Diesel Engines

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Drive Belts ..................................................................................................................................................... Adjustment ................................................................................................................................................ Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Alternator....................................................................................................................................................... Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Starter Motor ................................................................................................................................................. Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Cold Start Aid ................................................................................................................................................ Air Compressor - Engines YG and YH.............................................................................................................. General ........................................................................................................................................................... Repair ............................................................................................................................................................. Remove....................................................................................................................................................... Install ......................................................................................................................................................... Rotary Exhauster Replacement ........................................................................................................................ Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Clean .............................................................................................................................................................. Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Engine Specifications......................................................................................................................................... Cylinder Head Assembly ............................................................................................................................... Piston and Connecting Rods ......................................................................................................................... Crankshaft Assembly .................................................................................................................................. Crankshaft Overhaul .............................................................................................................................. Timing Case and Drive Assembly............................................................................................................... Engine Block Assembly ............................................................................................................................... Turbocharger................................................................................................................................................ Lubrication System ..................................................................................................................................... Fuel System ................................................................................................................................................. Cooling System ............................................................................................................................................. Flywheel and Housing.................................................................................................................................. Electrical Equipment................................................................................................................................... Torque Specifications ....................................................................................................................................... Cylinder Head Assembly ............................................................................................................................. Piston and Connecting Rod Assemblies ..................................................................................................... Crankshaft Assembly .................................................................................................................................. Timing Case and Drive Assembly............................................................................................................... Turbocharger................................................................................................................................................ Lubrication System ..................................................................................................................................... Fuel System ................................................................................................................................................. Cooling System ............................................................................................................................................ Flywheel ....................................................................................................................................................... Auxiliary Equipment ................................................................................................................................... Special Torque Specifications .......................................................................................................................... Flywheel and Housing................................................................................................................................. Turbocharger................................................................................................................................................ Electrical Equipment................................................................................................................................... Auxiliary Equipment ................................................................................................................................... Special Tools* ................................................................................................................................................... Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................................

89 89 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 91 91 91 91 91 93 93 93 93 94 94 97 100 102 104 105 108 108 109 111 111 112 112 112 112 112 113 113 113 113 113 113 113 114 114 114 114 114 115 120

v


Table of Contents

Perkins Diesel Engines

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) This section is for the following models: H3.50-5.00XL (H70-110XL) [G005]; S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) [D004]; H6.00-7.00XL (H135-155XL, H135-155XL 2) [F006]; S6.00-7.00XL (S135-155XL, S135-155XL 2) [B024]; H13.00-16.00XL (H300-360XL) [D019]; H8.00-12.00XL (H165-280XL) [E007]; H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [K005]; H8.00-12.00XM (H170-280HD) [F007]; H13.00-16.00XM (H300-360HD) [E019]; H10.00-12.00XM-12EC (H360HD-EC) [E019]; H3.50-5.50XM (H70-120XM) [E004, F004]

vi


600 SRM 705

General

General This section has the description and repair instructions for three models of the Series 1000 Perkins diesel engine. The three diesel engines described in this section: 1004-42 (AR)..................... Four cylinder, normally aspirated 1006-60 (YG)..................... Six cylinder, normally aspirated 1006-60T (YH) .................. Six cylinder, turbocharged

GENERAL SAFETY RULES WARNING Some seals used in this engine are made of synthetic materials called fluoroelastomers (a commercial name is Viton). These fluoroelastomers can decompose at temperatures greater than 316 C (600 F) or by burning and cause hydrofluoric acid to form on the surface of the seal or nearby equipment. Do not touch gaskets, seals or O-rings which appear charred or black and sticky after exposure to temperatures greater than 316 C (600 F) or burning. Contact with this acid can cause severe burns of the skin and eyes. Burns can be delayed several hours after contact.

the electrical system. Put a DO NOT OPERATE tag in the operator’s area and on the battery connectors. Long-term exposure to used engine oil can cause skin irritation or cancer. Wash with detergent and water. Exhaust from internal combustion engines contains carbon monoxide and other harmful chemicals. Carbon monoxide is a colorless, odorless poison and can cause unconsciousness or death without warning. Long term exposure to exhaust or chemicals in the exhaust can cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure to engine exhaust. Do not use diesel engines indoors where soot can accumulate. If engines are operated in confined spaces, maintain adequate ventilation or vent exhaust to the outside. Do not exceed applicable air contaminant limits. Follow the inspection and maintenance schedule and procedures in this manual. Do not alter exhaust, ignition, or fuel systems.

CAUTION Do the following procedures to prevent exposure to hydrofluoric acid: • Wear disposable neoprene or PVC gloves and discard the gloves after use. • Wash the area with 10% calcium hydroxide solution to neutralize any acid and then clean with water. If burned seal by-product touches the skin or eyes: • Immediately flush with water for a minimum of 15 minutes. • Apply 2.5% calcium gluconate gel to affected area of skin. • Get medical help immediately for suspected hydrogen fluoride or hydrofluoric acid burn.

WARNING Disconnect the battery cables before doing any disassembly and repair of the engine or parts of

Disposal of lubricants and fluids must meet local environmental regulations. Disposal of batteries must meet local environmental regulations. The diodes and resistors in the electrical system can be damaged if the following cautions are not followed: • Do not disconnect the battery when the engine is running. The voltage surge can damage the diodes and resistors. • Do not disconnect an electric wire before the engine is stopped and the switches are OFF. • Do not cause a short circuit by connection of the electric wires to the wrong terminals. Make sure a correct identification is made of the wire before it is connected. • Make sure a battery is the correct voltage and polarity before it is connected.

1


Description

600 SRM 705

• Do not check for current flow by making a spark because the electronic components can be damaged.

CAUTION When setscrews or studs are fitted into holes which are tapped through the cylinder block, a suitable sealant must be used to prevent leakage. Micro encapsulated anaerobic sealant (M.E.A.S.) fasteners have been introduced instead of jointing compounds or other sealants when the fasteners are fitted in through holes into oil or coolant passages. The

identification of these fasteners, as supplied, is by a red, blue, or other color sealant around the fastener threads. With M.E.A.S. sealed studs, the sealed end must be fitted into the cylinder head/cylinder block, etc. Ensure that the threaded holes have a 1.59 mm (0.0625 in.) 45 chamfer, to ensure that when the new fasteners are fitted, the M.E.A.S. sealant is not removed. If the fasteners have to be removed and fitted again, the threads must be cleaned and a suitable sealant used. Observe the previous WARNINGS and CAUTION before repairing any equipment.

Description The cylinder head is cast iron and has one inlet valve and one exhaust valve for each cylinder. The valve seats and the valve guides are replaceable. The fuel injectors are in the cylinder head. The overhead valve assembly is actuated by a camshaft inside of the engine block. A gear train, turned by the crankshaft, turns the camshaft, coolant pump, injection pump, and a power-takeoff (PTO) is available for additional equipment. The hydraulic pump for the steering function or a compressor is normally turned by the PTO. The fuel pump is actuated by the camshaft. See Figure 1 and Figure 2. The crankshaft in the six-cylinder models have seven main bearings. The crankshaft in the four-cylinder models have five main bearings. The main bearing in the center of the crankshaft is the thrust bearing and has thrust washers on both sides of the bearing.

piston has three piston rings (two compression rings, and an oil control ring). The top compression ring has a special insert for the groove to reduce wear. Axial location of the fully floating piston pin is by circlips. The piston pin is off-center to reduce the noise level. A jet for cooling oil to the bottom of the piston is installed. The four-cylinder AR engines have only one cooling jet installed in the number one cylinder. The cooling fan and the alternator are turned by a drive belt. The cooling fan is not connected to the coolant pump. The coolant pump is turned by the gear for the fuel injection pump in the timing gear case.

The cylinder block is cast iron. The six-cylinder engines have cylinder liners that can be replaced during overhaul. The cylinders for the four-cylinder engine are bored directly into the cylinder block.

The timing and quantity of fuel sent to the fuel injectors is controlled by a throttle and governor in the fuel injection pump. The static timing is set by the position of the fuel injection pump when it is installed. The throttle linkage must be correctly adjusted to control the quantity of fuel sent to the injectors. A mechanical governor is used to control the engine speed.

A Fastram™ combustion chamber in the top of each piston is a design to give an efficient mix of fuel and air. The pistons for the four-cylinder AR engines have two recesses in the top face for the valves. Each

A Lucas DP200 series fuel injection pump is used on all engines. Special tools are needed to repair an injection pump and they are normally sent to an authorized repair station if repairs are necessary.

2


600 SRM 705

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

FILL CAP FOR ENGINE OIL FUEL FILTER FUEL INJECTION PUMP COOLANT PUMP OIL SUMP

Description

6. OIL FILTER (CAN BE INSTALLED ON EITHER SIDE OF ENGINE) 7. FAN DRIVE 8. ALTERNATOR

9. DIPSTICK, ENGINE OIL (CAN BE INSTALLED ON EITHER SIDE OF ENGINE) 10. CRANKSHAFT PULLEY 11. TIMING CASE

Figure 1. Engine 1004-42 AR

3


Description

600 SRM 705

NOTE: ENGINE 1006-60 YG IS SIMILAR BUT WITHOUT TURBOCHARGER. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

FILL CAP FOR ENGINE OIL FUEL FILTER (2) FUEL INJECTION PUMP COOLANT PUMP AIR COMPRESSOR VIBRATION DAMPER OIL FILTER (2)

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

OIL SUMP ALTERNATOR TURBOCHARGER DIPSTICK, ENGINE OIL FAN DRIVE OIL COOLER TIMING CASE

Figure 2. Engine 1006-60T YH

4


600 SRM 705

Description

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER CODES The engine number is on a label on the side or the rear of the engine block. See Figure 3.

Bore and stroke ............... 103 × 127 mm (4.055 × 5.000 in.) Displacement................... 4.23 liter (258 in. 3 ) Compression Ratio .......... 18.5:1 Minimum oil pressure..... 207 kPa (30 psi) (at 2400 rpm and normal operating temperature) Governor speed (no load) See the Periodic Maintenance section for your model of lift truck. Idle Speed ........................ 725 to 775 rpm Thermostat

1. PART NUMBERS FOR FUEL INJECTION PUMP

2. ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER 3. EMISSIONS LABEL

Figure 3. Serial Number Locations A typical serial number has the following code: AR

30126

U

510256

B

1

2

3

4

5

where: 1 = Type of engine; AR = 1004-42, (-42 4 liter engine) YG = 1006-60, YH = 1006-60T (-60 6 liter engine) 2 = Parts list number 3 = Country of manufacture (U = manufactured in the United Kingdom) 4 = Serial number 5 = Year of manufacturer. The letter indicates the year of manufacture. The letters I, O, Q, R, and Z are not used. If parts or service are required for your engine, the complete engine number must be given to your dealer.

ENGINE DATA The specifications and tolerance details for engine repair are in a chart at the end of this section. 1004-42 (AR) ENGINE (Low Governed Speed) Power Rating at 2100 rpm................................... 60.0 kW (80.5 bhp) Number of cylinders........ 4

Begin to open .............. 77 to 85 C (170 to 185 F) Fully open.................... 92 to 98 C (198 to 208 F) Valve clearance (cold) Inlet ............................. 0.20 mm (0.008 in.) Exhaust ....................... 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)

1004-42 (AR) ENGINE (High Governed Speed) Power Rating at 2400 rpm.................................... 61.5 kW (82.4 bhp) Number of cylinders......... 4 Firing order ...................... 1 3 4 2 Bore and stroke ................ 103 × 127 mm (4.055 × 5.000 in.) Displacement.................... 4.23 liter (258 in. 3 ) Compression Ratio ........... 18.5:1 Minimum oil pressure...... 207 kPa (30 psi) (at 2400 rpm and normal operating temperature) Governor speed (no load) See the Periodic Maintenance section for your model of lift truck. Idle Speed ......................... 725 to 775 rpm Thermostat Begin to open ............... 77 to 85 C (170 to 185 F) Fully open..................... 92 to 98 C (198 to 208 F) Valve clearance (cold) Inlet .............................. 0.20 mm (0.008 in.) Exhaust ........................ 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)

Firing order ..................... 1 3 4 2

5


Description

600 SRM 705

1006-60 (YG) ENGINE

1006-60T (YH) ENGINE

Power Rating at 2200 rpm................................... 79 kW (106 bhp)

Power Rating at 2300 rpm................................... 106 kW (142 bhp)

Number of cylinders........ 6

Number of cylinders........ 6

Firing order ..................... 1 5 3 6 2 4

Firing order ..................... 1 5 3 6 2 4

Bore and stroke ............... 100 × 127 mm (3.937 × 5.000 in.)

Bore and stroke ............... 100 × 127 mm (3.937 × 5.000 in.)

Displacement................... 6 liter (365 in. 3 )

Displacement................... 6 liter (365 in. 3 )

Compression Ratio .......... 17.25:1

Compression Ratio .......... 17.25:1

Minimum oil pressure..... 280 kPa (40 psi)

Minimum oil pressure..... 280 kPa (40 psi)

(at 2200 rpm and normal operating temperature) Governor speed (no load)

(at 2300 rpm and normal operating temperature) Governor speed (no load)

See the Periodic Maintenance section for your model of lift truck.

See the Periodic Maintenance section for your model of lift truck.

Idle Speed ........................ 700 to 775 rpm

Idle Speed ........................ 700 to 775 rpm

Thermostat

Thermostat

Begin to open .............. 77 to 85 C (170 to 185 F) Fully open.................... 92 to 98 C (198 to 208 F) Valve clearance (cold) Inlet ............................. 0.20 mm (0.008 in.) Exhaust ....................... 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)

6

Begin to open .............. 77 to 85 C (170 to 185 F) Fully open.................... 92 to 98 C (198 to 208 F) Valve clearance (cold) Inlet ............................. 0.20 mm (0.008 in.) Exhaust ....................... 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)


600 SRM 705

Cylinder Head Assembly Repair

Engine Removal and Installation See the Frame section for the procedure for removing the engine and transmission. See the Transmission section for the procedure to separate the transmission from the engine.

LIFT ENGINE There can be a variation in the maximum weight of the engine depending upon the components that are attached to it. The following minimum lifting capacity is needed for an engine without coolant, lubricants, or transmission: four-cylinder engines

500 kg (1102 lb)

six-cylinder engines

600 kg (1322 lb)

Always use a lifting device that provides a vertical lift above the engine lift brackets as shown in Figure 4. Never use a single bracket to lift an engine. Make sure the engine brackets are correctly fastened to the engine. Make sure that the valve cover and other components are not damaged by the lifting device. Use a lifting device to lift and move the heavy components of the engine: cylinder block, cylinder head, flywheel housing, flywheel, and crankshaft. 1. ENGINE LIFT BRACKETS Figure 4. Lifting an Engine

Cylinder Head Assembly Repair VALVE COVER Remove 1. Disconnect the breather pipe. 2. Remove the cap nuts and the sealing washers from the top of the valve cover. See Figure 5. 3. Lift the valve cover, gasket, and seal from the cylinder head. The valve cover seal fits between the valve cover and the induction manifold. 4. When the valve cover is installed, the cap nuts are tightened onto the nuts of the rocker brackets. When the cap nuts are removed, the nuts for the rocker brackets can be loosened. Check that the nuts for the rocker brackets are tight each time that the valve cover is removed.

1. CAP NUT AND RUBBER SEAL Figure 5. Valve Cover

7


Cylinder Head Assembly Repair

600 SRM 705

Install 1. Check the condition of the valve cover gasket and the seal washers used under the cap nuts. Make sure that the surfaces are clean. 2. Install the valve cover, gasket, and seal on the cylinder head. See Figure 6. Install the seal washers under the cap nuts. Tighten the cap nuts to 30 N•m (22 lbf ft). Do not tighten the cap nuts so that they are fastened to the nuts for the rocker brackets.

Figure 7. Rubber Seal Location

Install 1. Install a new rubber seal in the hole for the oil supply in the cylinder head. See Figure 7. 2. Check that the push rods fit correctly in the sockets for the tappets. Install the rocker arm assembly. Make sure that the oil supply connection fits correctly into the rubber seal. 1. SEAL, OIL FILLER CAP 2. CAP NUT

3. RUBBER SEAL 4. GASKET 5. VALVE COVER

Figure 6. Valve Cover 3. Connect the breather pipe.

ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY Remove 1. Remove the valve cover. 2. Loosen the nuts evenly that fasten the brackets for the rocker arm shafts to the cylinder head. Loosen the brackets at each end of the cylinder head first and loosen the brackets in sequence toward the center. Remove the nuts and washers when the pressure is removed from the rocker arms. Lift the rocker arm assembly from the cylinder head. 3. Remove the rubber seal from the oil supply connection or the hole for the oil supply in the cylinder head. See Figure 7.

8

3. Make sure that the alignment of the rocker arms and the push rods are correct. Install the nuts and washers on the studs that hold the brackets for the rocker arm shafts to the cylinder head. Tighten the nuts evenly. Begin tightening the nuts at the center of the rocker arm shaft and tighten in sequence toward the ends of the shaft. The final torque on the nuts: aluminum brackets = 40 N•m (30 lbf ft) iron brackets = 75 N•m (55 lbf ft). 4. Check and adjust valve tip clearances. See Valve Clearance Adjustments.

Disassemble 1. Remove the clips from both ends of the rocker arm shaft. Make sure that the ends of the rocker arm shaft are not damaged. Loosen the location screw for the oil supply connection. 2. Make a note of the position of each component on the rocker arm shaft so that they can be assembled correctly. Remove the components from the rocker arm shaft.


600 SRM 705

Cylinder Head Assembly Repair

Inspect 1. Clean and inspect all the components for wear and damage. Check the clearance of the rocker arms on the rocker arm shaft. If the clearance is greater than 0.13 mm (0.005 in.), install a new bushing in the rocker arm or install a new rocker arm shaft if it is worn. 2. If the bushing in the rocker arm is worn, use a press to remove the bushing. 3. Use a press to install a new bushing in the rocker arm. Make sure that the lubrication hole in the bushing is aligned with the hole in the rocker arm.

4. Use a reamer in the bushing as necessary to give a clearance on the rocker arm shaft of 0.03 to 0.09 mm (0.001 to 0.004 in.).

Assemble 1. Make sure that the lubrication holes in the rocker arms and the rocker arm shaft are open and clean. 2. Lubricate the components with clean engine oil as they are assembled on the rocker arm shaft. Make sure the components are assembled in the correct order. See Figure 8. Make sure that the location screw for the oil supply connection is fitted correctly in the rocker arm shaft. Install the clips at the ends of the rocker arm shaft.

Figure 8. Rocker Arm Assembly

VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENTS The valve clearance is measured between the top of the valve stem and the rocker arm as shown in Figure 9. Valve clearance (cold) Inlet Exhaust

0.20 mm (0.008 in.) 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)

Number one cylinder is at the end of the engine with the fan. The inlet valve is the first valve in the sequence. See Figure 10. Figure 9. Valve Clearance Adjustment

9


Cylinder Head Assembly Repair

600 SRM 705 3. Turn the crankshaft in the normal direction of rotation until the inlet valve of number four cylinder has just opened and the exhaust valve of the same cylinder has not fully closed. Check the valve clearances on number three cylinder and adjust them as necessary.

Figure 10. Valve Positions

Four-Cylinder Engines 1. Turn the crankshaft in the normal direction of rotation until the inlet valve of number four cylinder has just opened and the exhaust valve of the same cylinder has not fully closed. Check the clearance of the valves of number one cylinder and adjust them as necessary. 2. Turn the crankshaft in the normal direction of rotation until the inlet valve of number two cylinder has just opened and the exhaust valve of the same cylinder has not fully closed. Check the valve clearances on number three cylinder and adjust them as necessary. 3. Turn the crankshaft in the normal direction of rotation until the inlet valve of number one cylinder has just opened and the exhaust valve of the same cylinder has not fully closed. Check the valve clearances on number four cylinder and adjust them as necessary. 4. Turn the crankshaft in the normal direction of rotation until the inlet valve of number three cylinder has just opened and the exhaust valve of the same cylinder has not fully closed. Check the valve clearances on number two cylinder and adjust them as necessary.

4. Turn the crankshaft in the normal direction of rotation until the inlet valve of number one cylinder has just opened and the exhaust valve of the same cylinder has not fully closed. Check the valve clearances on number six cylinder and adjust them as necessary. 5. Turn the crankshaft in the normal direction of rotation until the inlet valve of number five cylinder has just opened and the exhaust valve of the same cylinder has not fully closed. Check the valve clearances on number two cylinder and adjust them as necessary. 6. Turn the crankshaft in the normal direction of rotation until the inlet valve of number three cylinder has just opened and the exhaust valve of the same cylinder has not fully closed. Check the valve clearances on number four cylinder and adjust them as necessary.

VALVE SPRINGS NOTE: This procedure is normally for changing the valve springs of a single cylinder while the cylinder head is still installed on the engine. If the valves and springs must be removed from the cylinder head for repairs, see the procedures under Valves and Valve Springs later in this section. Special Tools:

Valve spring compressor Stud adapter Setscrew adapter

Six-Cylinder Engines 1. Remove the valve cover. 1. Turn the crankshaft in the normal direction of rotation until the inlet valve of number six cylinder has just opened and the exhaust valve of the same cylinder has not fully closed. Check the clearance of the valves of number one cylinder and adjust them as necessary. 2. Turn the crankshaft in the normal direction of rotation until the inlet valve of number two cylinder has just opened and the exhaust valve of the same cylinder has not fully closed. Check the valve clearances on number five cylinder and adjust them as necessary.

10

2. Turn the crankshaft in the normal direction of rotation until the piston for the cylinder is at top dead center (TDC). The inlet valve will just open and the exhaust valve will not be fully closed when the cylinder is at TDC. 3. Remove the rocker arm assembly. 4. Install the spring compressor and the adapter. See Figure 11.


600 SRM 705

Cylinder Head Assembly Repair NOTE: Valve springs can be changed in two cylinders at a time. ENGINE AR. When the piston in cylinder one is at TDC, the piston in cylinder four is also at TDC. When the piston in cylinder two is at TDC, the piston in cylinder three is also at TDC. ENGINES YG and YH. When the piston in cylinder one is at TDC, the piston in cylinder six is also at TDC. When the piston in cylinder two is at TDC, the piston in cylinder five is also at TDC. When the piston in cylinder three is at TDC, the piston in cylinder four is also at TDC.

1. VALVE SPRING COMPRESSOR 2. STUD ADAPTER

3. SETSCREW ADAPTER

Figure 11. Valve Spring Compressor 5. Compress the valve springs and remove the retainers. Make sure the valve springs are compressed parallel to the valve stems or the valve stems can be damaged.

If the rocker arm assembly was removed before TDC was found, install the valve spring compressor and compress the valve springs to open the valve. Turn the crankshaft by hand in the normal direction until the piston touches the valve. Continue to turn the crankshaft, and at the same time, release the pressure on the valve spring compressor until the piston is at TDC. See Figure 12.

6. Release the valve spring compressor and remove the retainer cap and valve springs. NOTE: Do not turn the crankshaft while the valve springs are removed. NOTE: The outer diameter of the exhaust valve guide is 1 mm larger than the inlet valve guide. To prevent leakage past the inlet valve stem it is important that the larger exhaust valve seal is not fitted into the inlet guide. The seals are color coded. 7. Install new valve stem seals on the valve guides. Make sure that the brown seal is installed on the exhaust valve and the green seal on the inlet valves. 8. Install the new valve springs. Make sure the closed damper coils of the valve springs are toward the cylinder head. 9. Install the retainer cap. 10. Use the valve spring compressor to compress the valve springs and install the retainers. Remove the valve spring compressor. 11. Install the rocker arm assembly. 12. Check the valve clearances. See Valve Clearance Adjustments. 13. Install the valve cover.

Figure 12. Find TDC With Valve Spring Compressor

11


Cylinder Head Assembly Repair

600 SRM 705

CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY Remove 1. If the engine is still in the lift truck, do the following procedures: a. Disconnect the battery terminals. b. Drain the cooling system. c. Disconnect the sender unit for the coolant temperature gauge. 2. ENGINES AR and YG. Remove the hose from the air filter at the induction manifold. ENGINE YH. Remove air filter connection at the compressor inlet of the turbocharger. 3. Remove the fuel line between the cold start aid in the induction manifold and the fuel filter. Disconnect the electrical connection.

1. TOP HALF - INDUCTION MANIFOLD 2. BOTTOM HALF - INDUCTION MANIFOLD 3. CAPSCREWS Figure 13. Induction Manifold

4. ENGINE YH. Remove the boost control line between the front of the induction manifold and the fuel injection pump. 5. Remove the induction manifold. See Figure 13. For induction manifolds fitted to engine types AR: The top half of the induction manifold is sealed to the bottom half with a liquid joint and fastened together by six capscrews. The top half of the manifold must be removed to obtain access to four of the manifold capscrews, fitted inside the manifold. These capscrews retain the bottom half of the manifold to the cylinder head. 6. ENGINE YH. Disconnect all connections to the turbocharger and remove the turbocharger. See Turbocharger - Engine YH Repair, Remove. 7. Remove the exhaust manifold. Loosen the manifold fasteners in the reverse order shown in Figure 14. 8. Remove the low pressure fuel lines between the fuel injection pump and the fuel filter. Remove the fuel filter bracket and the fuel filters. 9. Remove the high pressure fuel lines. Use a separate wrench to prevent movement of the outlets of the fuel injection pump when the fuel lines are disconnected. Put plugs in the open ports of the fuel injection pump.

12

Figure 14. Exhaust Manifold Tightening Sequence 10. Remove the return fuel line from the fuel injectors.


600 SRM 705

Cylinder Head Assembly Repair

11. Remove the fuel injectors from the cylinder head. Keep the fuel injectors clean and prevent damage to the nozzles. 12. ENGINES YG and YH. If an air compressor is installed, remove the coolant pipe between the cylinder head and the compressor. Remove the coolant pipe between the bypass connection and the compressor. 13. Loosen the hose clamp and remove the coolant bypass hose from the cylinder head. Remove the capscrews and remove the coolant bypass connection and the hose.

20. Lift the cylinder head from the engine block. Do not use a pry bar between the cylinder head and the engine block that can cause damage to the gasket surfaces. See Figure 17. 21. Inspect the capscrews for the cylinder head with a straightedge. See Figure 18. Check that the capscrews are straight and do not have distortion. If there is a reduction in the diameter of the thread that has not been in engagement with the cylinder block, the capscrew must be discarded.

14. Disconnect the coolant temperature sender. 15. ENGINE AR. Remove the oil cooler if it is integral with the cylinder block. 16. Remove the valve cover. See Valve Cover, Remove. 17. Remove the rocker arm assembly. See Rocker Arm Assembly, Remove.

Figure 15. Cylinder Head Tightening Sequence, Four-Cylinder Engines

18. Remove the push rods. 19. Loosen the capscrews for the cylinder head evenly in a reverse sequence from the sequence shown in Figure 15 or Figure 16.

Figure 16. Cylinder Head Tightening Sequence, Six-Cylinder Engines

13


Cylinder Head Assembly Repair

600 SRM 705

Install Special Tools:

Angle gauge to tighten the capscrews for the cylinder head

1. Make sure the surfaces of the cylinder head and the top of the engine block are clean. Make sure that there is no dirt or objects in the cylinders. 2. Install the gasket for the cylinder head as shown in Figure 19. Make sure the "TOP FRONT" is in the correct position. Do not use any gasket sealant on any of the surfaces.

Figure 17. Cylinder Head Removal

Figure 19. Head Gasket Position

1. STRAIGHTEDGE 2. CAPSCREW MUST BE STRAIGHT AND WITHOUT DISTORTION 3. THREADS MUST BE IN GOOD CONDITION AND NOT HAVE A REDUCED DIAMETER

3. Use two 1/2 UNF studs in positions 16 and 21 on four-cycle engines and positions 25 and 30 on six-cycle engines. See Figure 20 and Figure 21 to hold the gasket in position. Lower the cylinder head into position on the engine block. See Figure 22.

Figure 18. Capscrews Inspection

Figure 20. Cylinder Head Tightening Sequence, Six-Cylinder Engines

14


600 SRM 705

Cylinder Head Assembly Repair shown in Figure 20 or Figure 21 according to the following procedure: Six-Cylinder Engines a. The short capscrews (S) must be tightened an additional 150 (2.5 flats). b. The medium capscrews (M) must be tightened an additional 180 (3.0 flats). c. The long capscrews (L) must be tightened an additional 210 (3.5 flats).

Figure 21. Cylinder Head Tightening Sequence, Four-Cylinder Engines

Figure 22. Cylinder Head Installation

CAUTION There are three lengths of capscrews. S = short, M = medium, L = long. Figure 20 and Figure 21 show their positions in the engine. Make sure that the capscrews are installed in the correct positions. 4. Lubricate the capscrews with a thin coat of oil and install them into their holes in the cylinder head. When the cylinder head and gasket are held in position, remove the two studs and install the two capscrews in those positions. The four 1/2 UNF capscrews on the four-cylinder (AR) engines are in positions 2, 8, 13, and 18. See Figure 21. 5. Evenly tighten the capscrews in the sequence shown in Figure 20 or Figure 21. The final torque on the capscrews is 110 N•m (81 lbf ft) for the six-cylinder engines and 45 N•m (33 lbf ft) for the four-cylinder engines.

Four-Cylinder Engines a. The short capscrews (S) must be tightened an additional 120 (2 flats). b. The medium capscrews (M) must be tightened an additional 120 (2 flats). c. The long capscrews (L) must be tightened an additional 150 (2.5 flats). d. The four 1/2 UNF capscrews in position 2, 8, 13, and 18 must be tightened an additional 180 (3 flats). NOTE: A special tool shown in Figure 23 can be used for this procedure to measure the tightening angles. If an angle gauge is not available, make a mark in a line with one of the corners of the capscrew. See Figure 24 and Figure 25. Make another mark at the correct angle (counterclockwise) on the edge of the flange of the cylinder head for each capscrew and according to the length of each capscrew. Tighten each capscrew in the correct sequence until the two marks are aligned. 7. Install the push rods in the engine. Make sure that the end of each push rod fits correctly in the tappet socket. 8. Install the rocker arm assembly per Rocker Arm Assembly, Install. 9. Adjust the valve clearances per Valve Clearance Adjustments. 10. Install the fuel injectors per Fuel Injectors, Install. 11. Install the high pressure fuel lines between the fuel injection pump and the fuel injectors. Use a separate wrench to prevent movement of the outlets of the fuel injection pump when the fuel lines are connected. Tighten the connection nuts to 22 N•m (16 lbf ft).

6. Make sure all of the capscrews are tightened to the correct torque described in Step 5. The capscrews must be further tightened in the sequence

15


Cylinder Head Assembly Repair

600 SRM 705 13. Install the coolant bypass connection. Tighten the capscrews and the hose clamp. 14. ENGINES YG and YH. If an air compressor is installed on the engine, install the coolant pipe between the cylinder head and the compressor. Install the pipe between the coolant bypass and the compressor. 15. Prepare to install the induction and exhaust manifolds. Do not use sealant on the joints of the manifolds. 16. ENGINE AR. Install the oil cooler if it is integral with the cylinder block.

Figure 23. Angle Gauge

17. ENGINE AR. The front and rear gaskets have tabs. Make sure that the gaskets are installed with the tabs installed toward the oil sump. See Figure 26.

Figure 24. Tighten Cylinder Head Capscrews, Engine AR

1. GASKET 2. GASKET

3. LOCATION TABS

Figure 26. Induction and Exhaust Manifold Gaskets, Engine AR Figure 25. Tighten Cylinder Head Capscrews, Engine YG and YH 12. Install the fuel filter and bracket. Install the lowpressure fuel lines between the fuel filter and the fuel injection pump.

16

NOTE: Some gaskets are now made as a single piece. 18. ENGINES YG and YH. The two end gaskets are the same. The center gasket has tabs. Make sure that the gaskets are installed with the tabs installed toward the oil sump. See Figure 27.


600 SRM 705

Cylinder Head Assembly Repair 20. Install the induction manifold. Tighten the capscrews evenly and gradually to 44 N•m (32 lbf ft). 21. For induction manifolds on engines AR (see Figure 29), the top half of the induction manifold is sealed to the bottom half with a gasket and fastened together by six capscrews.

1. GASKET 2. GASKET

3. LOCATION TABS

Figure 27. Manifold Gasket Installation, Engines YG and YH NOTE: Some replacement exhaust manifolds have large clearance holes for the fasteners. Two alignment bushings are supplied with a replacement manifold (Figure 28). These bushings must be installed for the replacement manifold. New alignment bushings are not necessary when the original manifold is installed. 19. Install the exhaust manifold. Tighten the capscrews 44 N•m (32 lbf ft) in the sequence shown in Figure 28.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

TOP HALF OF MANIFOLD BOTTOM HALF OF MANIFOLD CAPSCREWS (INSIDE OF MANIFOLD) CAPSCREWS (OUTSIDE OF MANIFOLD) GASKET

Figure 29. Induction Manifold Installation, Engine AR 22. The top half of the manifold must be removed to obtain access to four of the manifold capscrews inside the manifold. These capscrews and the four capscrews on the outside of the manifold retain the bottom half of the manifold cylinder to the cylinder head.

CAUTION Before the inlet manifold capscrews are installed again, any loose M.E.A.S. in the cylinder head holes must be removed to allow the manifold to be fully tightened. Do not scratch or damage the flange faces of the inlet manifold. A. FAN END 1. BUSHING (SEE NOTE) Figure 28. Induction Manifold Installation, Engines YG and YH

NOTE: The capscrews which retain the manifold to the cylinder head have M.E.A.S. applied to the threads. If the capscrews are removed and installed again, the threads must be cleaned and POWERPART threadlock sealant used.

17


Cylinder Head Assembly Repair 23. ENGINE YH. Install the turbocharger per Turbocharger - Engine YH Repair, Install. 24. Install the fuel line between the fuel pump and the fuel filter. 25. Install the fuel line between the fuel filter and the cold start aid. If the engine is in the lift truck, install the electrical connection to the cold start aid. 26. ENGINE YH. Install the boost control line between the induction manifold and the top of the fuel injection pump. 27. If the engine is still in the lift truck, do the following procedures: a. Connect the sender unit for the coolant temperature gauge. b. ENGINE YH. Install air filter connection at the compressor inlet of the turbocharger. ENGINES AR and YG. Install the hose from the air filter at the induction manifold. c. Connect the hoses for the coolant system. Fill the cooling system. d. Connect the battery terminals. e. If the engine is ready to operate, remove the air from the fuel system. See the procedure described in Fuel System Air Removal. 28. When the engine can be started, run it at low speed. Check that oil flows from the holes in the rocker arms. If the oil flow is correct, install the valve cover. See Valve Cover, Install.

600 SRM 705 2. Clean the bottom face of the cylinder head and check the depth of the heads of the valves below the face of the cylinder head. See Figure 30. 3. Check the depth of the valves below the face of the cylinder head before the valve springs are removed. Put the dial indicator and fixture or other measuring tool on the face of the cylinder head and set the gauge to zero. Carefully put the dial indicator over the head of each valve and make a note of the measurement. The maximum service depth is shown in the Engine Specifications. If a valve is below the depth limit, remove the valve and install a new valve in that position. If the valve depth is still below the limit, the valve seat must be replaced. See New Valve Seats, Install. 4. If the valves will be used again, make a mark on each valve head so that they can be installed again in the same positions. 5. Use the valve spring compressor and the correct adapter to compress the valve springs and remove the retainers. Make sure the valve springs are compressed parallel to the valve stems or the valve stems can be damaged. See Figure 31. 6. Release the valve stem compressor. Remove the valve spring cap, valve springs, seal, and seat washer. 7. Repeat Step 5 and Step 6 to remove the other valves.

Inspect 1. Check the valves for cracks. Check the stems of the valves for wear and the correct clearance in their valve guides. See Valve Guides.

NOTE: It is not necessary to tighten the cylinder head capscrews again with the engine hot or after a limited period of service.

VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS Special Tools:

Valve spring compressor Stud adapter Setscrew adapter

Remove 1. Remove the cylinder head. See Cylinder Head Assembly, Remove. Figure 30. Valves Depth Check

18


600 SRM 705

Cylinder Head Assembly Repair leakage past the inlet valve stem it is important that the larger valve seal is not installed into the inlet guide. The seals are color coded. 2. Install the seat washer. Install new seals on the valve guides. Make sure that the brown seal is installed on the exhaust valves and the green seal is installed on the inlet valves. 3. Install the inner and outer valve springs on the seat washer. Make sure that the damper coils of the valve springs are toward the cylinder head. 4. Use the valve spring compressor and the correct adapter to compress the valve springs. Install the retainers. Make sure the valve springs are compressed parallel to the valve stems or the valve stems can be damaged. 5. Repeat the installation procedure for each valve.

VALVE GUIDES Inspect

1. CAP 2. COLLET (2) 3. SPRING

4. VALVE STEM SEAL 5. VALVE

Figure 31. Valve Components 2. Check that the seat faces of the valves are not badly burned. Seat faces of valves that are damaged, but can be repaired, must be checked for valve depth when they are installed. See Figure 30. When new valves are installed, the valve depth must be checked. 3. Check that the load on the valve springs is correct at their installed length. See Engine Specifications. 4. Install new valve springs during a complete overhaul of the engine.

Install 1. Lubricate the valve stems with engine oil when they are installed in their valve guides.

1. Check the valve guides for wear. The maximum clearance between the valve stem and the bore of the guide is 0.100 mm (0.0039 in.) for inlet valves and 0.121 mm (0.0048 in.) for exhaust valves. If the clearance is greater than the limit when a new valve is installed, the valve guide must be replaced. 2. The following procedure is for checking the valve guides (see Figure 32): a. Put a new valve into the valve guide. b. Install a dial indicator on the cylinder head. c. Lift the head of the valve approximately 15 mm (0.6 in.) above its seat. Move the valve head away from the plunger of the dial indicator and set the dial indicator to zero. d. Move the valve toward the dial indicator and make a note of the movement. If the reading is equal to or greater than the maximum clearance, a new valve guide must be installed.

CAUTION The outer diameter of the exhaust valve guide is 1 mm larger than the valve guide. To prevent

19


Cylinder Head Assembly Repair

600 SRM 705 1. Check the cylinder head for cracks. Carefully check the areas around the valve seats and around the holes for the fuel injectors. 2. Use a straightedge and spacer gauges to check the cylinder head for distortion across and along its face that joins the engine block. See the Engine Specifications. If the distortion is more than the specifications, the face can be machined. Remove only the minimum metal so that the thickness of the cylinder head will not be less than 102.48 mm (4.035 in.) after the cylinder head has been machined.

1. MAGNETIC BASE 2. DIAL INDICATOR 3. VALVE HEAD

4. VALVE GUIDE 5. MAXIMUM CLEARANCE

Figure 32. Valve Guides Check NOTE: The partially finished valve guides are reamed and the valve seats are cut in one operation with a special tool. This is done to ensure the concentricity of the valve seat to the valve guide and provide a good seal between the guide and its seat. New valves and valve seat inserts must be installed each time a new valve guide is used.

Remove Install the tool for removal and replacement and the adapter on the valve guide. Pull the valve guide from the cylinder head. See Figure 33.

Install 1. Make sure the bore in the cylinder head is clean. 2. Lubricate the outer surface of the new valve guide with engine oil. 3. Install the valve guide on the special tool. See Figure 34. Use the special tool to pull the valve guide into the cylinder head. When the valve guide is correctly installed, the valve guide will extend 14.85 to 15.15 mm (0.585 to 0.596 in.) above the seat of the valve spring.

CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVE SEATS Inspect The valves must be removed from the cylinder head before the valve seats can be inspected and repaired. Carefully clean the cylinder head.

20

NOTE: After the cylinder head has been machined, the valve seats must be checked for the correct depth. See Valves and Valve Springs, Inspect. If the depth of the valve seats must be increased, use the minimum limit to allow for later wear. 3. Check the valve seats for wear and damage. Before any work is done on the valve seats, make sure the valve guides are good. See Valve Guides, Inspect for inspection and replacement. 4. Damaged valve seats can be repaired with a cutter tool. See Figure 35. If the valve seat cannot be repaired so that the valve depth is within the specifications, the valve seat must be replaced.

Repair Special Tools:

Cutter for inlet valve seats Cutter for exhaust valve seats Valve guides reamer

1. Install the correct cutter into the valve seat that is to be repaired. Carefully turn the cutter in a clockwise direction. Remove only the minimum metal to repair the valve seat. Keep the valve seat as narrow as possible. 2. When the valve seat has been cut, remove the cutter and pilot. Clean the port area and remove any particles. 3. Check the valve depth. See Valves and Valve Springs, Inspect. If the valve seat is badly damaged or worn, replace the valve seat as described in the following paragraphs.

New Valve Seats, Install 1. Remove the valve guide. Clean the bore and install a new valve guide. See Valve Guides for inspection and replacement.


600 SRM 705

Cylinder Head Assembly Repair

Figure 33. Valve Guide Removal 2. Use the bore of the new valve guide as a pilot and use a milling machine to remove the old valve seat. See the Engine Specifications. Clean the particles from the port and the area where the new valve seat will be installed.

1. 14.85 to 15.15 mm (0.585 to 0.596 in.) ABOVE SEAT OF VALVE SPRING Figure 34. Valve Guide Installation

3. If the bottom face of the cylinder head has been machined, the back face of the new valve seat must be machined so that it will not extend above the surface of the cylinder head. If the back face of the valve seat is machined, make sure that the outer edge of the back face dimensions are within the Engine Specifications. 4. Use the bore of the valve guide as a pilot. Use a press to install the valve seat into the cylinder head. Make sure the valve seat is fully inserted into the cylinder head. 5. Use a cutter to cut the valve seat at the correct angle. Check the valve depth as shown in Figure 30. Make sure that the dimensions are within the Engine Specifications.

Figure 35. Valve Seats Cutter

21


Piston and Connecting Rod Assemblies Repair

600 SRM 705

Piston and Connecting Rod Assemblies Repair The connecting rods are forged from steel. The piston height is controlled by the length of the connecting rod. Each piston and connecting rod is matched to a cylinder during assembly to make sure the piston height is correct for combustion efficiency to meet emission standards. The manufacturer uses six length grades of connecting rods during assembly to give the correct piston height. These six height grades are made by machining the small-end bushing a small amount off-center. Connecting rods for service replacement are available in two height grades. The combustion chamber is machined into the top of the piston. See Figure 36 and Figure 37. The pistons have two compression rings and an oil control ring. The groove for the top compression ring has a hard metal insert to reduce wear in the groove. The piston skirt has a layer of graphite to reduce wear.

Figure 37. Piston, Engines YG and YH

1. LOCATION DOWELS Figure 38. Connecting Rod Assembly with Location Dowels Figure 36. Piston, Engine AR

ROD BEARINGS Some engines have two steel dowels that are installed into the bearing cap to keep the alignment with the connecting rod. Two capscrews fasten the bearing cap to the connecting rod. See Figure 38. Some engines have grooves (serrations) that are machined in the joint faces of the connecting rod and bearing cap to keep alignment between the two parts. The bearing cap is fastened to the connecting rod with two nuts and special bolts. See Figure 39.

1. SERRATIONS Figure 39. Connecting Rod Assembly with Serrations

22


600 SRM 705

Remove 1. Drain the engine oil from the sump. Remove the oil sump. See Oil Sump, Remove. 2. Remove the suction pipe and oil strainer. See Figure 40. Remove the capscrew that holds the bracket to the main bearing cap. Remove the two capscrews from the flange of the suction pipe and remove the suction pipe and screen. Clean the faces of both flanges.

Piston and Connecting Rod Assemblies Repair 5. Remove the lower bearing half from the bearing cap. Keep the bearing half with its cap. 6. Carefully push the connecting rod up the cylinder bore just enough to permit access to the upper bearing half. Remove the upper bearing half from the connecting rod. Keep the bearing halves together.

Install 1. Clean the bearing surfaces of the connecting rod and the crankshaft. Make sure that the protrusion for the location dowels is 3.0 to 4.5 mm (0.12 to 0.18 in.) above the cap faces. Clean the bearing halves and lubricate them with clean engine oil. 2. Install the upper bearing half into the connecting rod. Make sure that the location tab is installed correctly into its position in the connecting rod. See Figure 41.

1. SUPPORT BRACKET, MAIN BEARING CAP 2. CAPSCREWS, FLANGE, SUCTION PIPE Figure 40. Sump Screen Removal 3. Turn the crankshaft until the connecting rod to be removed is at the lowest position on the crankshaft.

CAUTION Do not permit the connecting rods to hit the cooling jets for the pistons. If a cooling jet is hit, the alignment must be checked and the cooling jet replaced if necessary. 4. Connecting rods with capscrews. Loosen the capscrews for the bearing cap approximately four turns. Lightly hit the heads of the capscrews with a soft hammer to separate the connecting rod from the bearing cap. Remove the capscrews and the bearing cap.

1. POSITION OF LOCATION TAB IN BEARING HALF AND CONNECTING ROD Figure 41. Rod Bearings Position 3. Install the bearing cap on the connecting rod. Make sure that the assembly number on the bearing cap is the same as the number on the connecting rod. Make sure that the two assembly numbers are on the same side of the connecting rod as shown in Figure 42.

Connecting rods with nuts. Remove the nuts and remove the bearing cap.

23


Piston and Connecting Rod Assemblies Repair

Figure 42. Bearing Cap Position, Connecting Rod

600 SRM 705

Figure 43. Piston Grade Mark

Remove

4. Connecting rods with nuts. Install and tighten the nuts evenly to a torque of 125 N•m (92 lbf ft). Make sure that the crankshaft turns freely.

1. If the engine is still in the lift truck, drain the engine oil and the coolant.

Connecting rods with capscrews. Install and tighten the capscrews evenly to a torque of 155 N•m (114 lbf ft). Make sure that the crankshaft turns freely.

2. Remove the cylinder head assembly as described in Cylinder Head Assembly, Remove. Remove the carbon from the tops of the bores of the cylinder liners.

5. Loosely assemble the bracket of the suction pipe to the main bearing cap. Install a new gasket and fasten the flanges of the suction line to the oil pump. Make sure that the suction pipe is aligned correctly and then tighten the capscrew that holds the bracket to the main bearing cap. 6. Install the oil sump. See Oil Sump, Install.

PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY Service Note If a piston must be replaced, make sure that the piston has the same height grade. An H or an L is stamped into the top of the piston. See Figure 43. A production piston does not have an H or an L mark. The piston height must be checked after installation. See the procedure described in Installation.

3. Remove the oil sump. See Oil Sump, Remove. 4. Remove the suction line and oil strainer. See Figure 40. Remove the capscrew that holds the bracket to the main bearing cap. Remove the two capscrews from the flange of the suction line and remove the suction line and screen. Clean the faces of both flanges. 5. Remove the bearing cap and rod bearings as described under Rod Bearings, Remove. Mark the bearing caps and rod bearings so that they can be installed again in their original positions.

CAUTION Do not permit the connecting rods to hit the cooling jets for the pistons. If a cooling jet is hit, the alignment must be checked and the cooling jet replaced if necessary. 6. Push the piston and connecting rod out of the top of the cylinder liner. 7. Inspect the bearing surfaces on the crankshaft for damage.

24


600 SRM 705

Piston and Connecting Rod Assemblies Repair

Install

mark on the piston must be turned toward the end of the engine with the cooling fan. See Figure 45.

Special Tools:

Piston installation tool (piston ring compressor) Piston height tool Dial indicator gauge

1. Make sure all of the parts are clean. Lubricate the parts with engine oil as they are installed. 2. Turn the crankshaft until the position for the connecting rod to be installed is at the lowest position on the crankshaft. 3. Install the upper bearing half into the connecting rod. Make sure that the location tab is installed correctly into its position in the connecting rod. See Figure 41. 4. Put the piston installation tool at the top of the cylinder. See Figure 44. The tool has a bore with a taper to compress the piston rings when the piston and connecting rod assembly is installed. Make sure the smaller end of the taper is toward the cylinder block. 5. Put the spaces in the three piston rings so that they are 120 apart. Put the connecting rod through the piston installation tool and permit the piston to enter the tool. The piston and connecting rod must be turned so that the connecting rod does not hit the cooling jet for the piston.

Figure 45. Piston in Bore Position 7. Lubricate the lower half of the rod bearing and install it into the bearing cap. 8. Install the bearing cap on the connecting rod. Make sure that the assembly number on the bearing cap is the same as the number on the connecting rod. Make sure that the two assembly numbers are on the same side of the connecting rod as shown in Figure 42. 9. Connecting rods with nuts. Install and tighten the nuts evenly to a torque of 125 N•m (92 lbf ft). Make sure that the crankshaft turns freely. Connecting rods with capscrews. Install and tighten the capscrews evenly to a torque of 155 N•m (114 lbf ft). Make sure that the crankshaft turns freely. 10. Measure the height of the piston above the top of the engine block with a dial indicator gauge. The crankshaft must be turned so that the piston is at TDC in the engine block. Put the dial indicator on the top of the engine block and measure the height of the piston above the face of the engine block. See Figure 46.

Figure 44. Piston Installation Tool 6. When the connecting rod has passed the cooling jet during installation, the arrow or "FRONT"

The correct height of the piston above the engine block is 0.36 to 0.50 mm (0.014 to 0.020 in.). The tops of the pistons must not be changed or machined.

25


Piston and Connecting Rod Assemblies Repair

Figure 46. Piston Height Above Engine Block Measurement 11. Loosely assemble the bracket of the suction pipe to the main bearing cap. Install a new gasket and fasten the flanges of the suction pipe to the oil pump. Make sure that the suction pipe is aligned correctly and tighten the capscrew that holds the bracket to the main bearing cap. 12. Install the oil sump. See Oil Sump, Install.

600 SRM 705

Figure 47. Piston Ring End Clearance Check 3. Install new piston rings on the piston and check the clearance in the grooves with a spacer gauge. See Figure 48. If the clearance between the piston rings and the piston are greater than the specifications, the piston must be replaced. See the Engine Specifications. The clearance in the top groove of the pistons for these engines cannot be checked because it has a taper.

13. Install the cylinder head. See Cylinder Head Assembly, Install.

PISTON RINGS Remove 1. Check that the piston rings can move freely in their grooves and are not broken. 2. Remove the piston rings with a ring expander. Increase the diameter of the piston rings only enough to remove them without damaging the piston.

Inspect

Figure 48. Piston Ring Clearance Check

1. Check the piston for wear and damage.

Install

2. Clean the carbon from the top of the cylinder liners. Fit the piston rings in the top part of the cylinder liner and measure the clearance at the ends of the ring. See Figure 47. The spring must be installed in the oil control ring when its end clearance is measured. The clearance measurements for the piston rings are shown in the Engine Specifications.

Install the piston rings with a ring expander. Increase the diameter of the piston rings only enough to remove them without damaging the piston.

26

1. Install the spring for the oil control ring in the bottom groove of the piston. See Figure 49. Install the latch pin inside both ends of the spring. See Figure 50 and Figure 51. Install the oil control ring over the spring so that the end space in the oil control ring is 180 to the latch pin.


600 SRM 705

Piston and Connecting Rod Assemblies Repair mark which must be on the left of the clearance space at the ends of the ring when the ring is installed on the piston and the piston is upright. 3. Engines YG and YH. Install the barrel face ring with the molybdenum insert into the top groove of the piston. Engines AR. Install the parallel face ring with the molybdenum insert into the top groove of the piston.

Figure 49. Spring Installation for Oil Control Ring

1. TOP RING 2. SECOND RING

3. OIL CONTROL RING AND SPRING

Figure 51. Piston Rings Installation, Engine AR

1. TOP RING 2. SECOND RING

3. OIL CONTROL RING AND SPRING

Figure 50. Piston Rings Installation, Engines YG and YH 2. Install the cast iron ring with the taper into the second groove of the piston. Make sure that the word "TOP" or the manufacturer’s symbol is toward the top of the piston. New piston rings have a green identification mark which must be on the left of the clearance at the ends of the ring when the ring is installed on the piston and the piston is upright.

CAUTION Make sure that the word "TOP" or the manufacturer’s symbol is toward the top of the piston. New piston rings have a red identification

4. Check that the open gap of the piston rings are spaced 120 apart before installing the piston.

PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD Disassemble 1. Remove the piston rings as described in Piston Rings, Remove. 2. Make a mark on the piston to indicate the cylinder number as shown on the connecting rod. Make the mark on the same side of the piston as the number on the connecting rod. See Figure 52. 3. Remove the snap rings that hold the piston pin in the piston. Push the piston pin from the piston with your thumb. If the piston pin is tight, heat the piston and connecting rod to 40 to 50 C (104 to 122 F) to make removal of the piston pin easier.

27


Piston and Connecting Rod Assemblies Repair

600 SRM 705 A partially finished small-end bushing, which can be installed in the original connecting rod and machined to obtain correct length grade is also available. 3. If the bushing in the connecting rod is worn, use a press to remove the bushing. 4. Clean the parent bore of the connecting rod and remove any sharp edges.

CAUTION Figure 52. Marking Piston

Do not use a reamer to machine the partially finished bushing. Special equipment and trained personnel are needed.

1. Clean and inspect all the components for wear and damage. Check the alignment of the connecting rod with a test mandrel. See Figure 53.

5. Use a press to install a partially machined bushing in the connecting rod. Make sure that the lubrication hole in the bushing is aligned with the lubrication hole in the connecting rod.

Inspect

NOTE: The small end is wedge shaped. After the small end bushing has been installed, machine the bushing to the shape of the small end and remove any sharp edges. 6. Machine the partially finished bushing to obtain the correct connecting rod grade.

CAUTION Do not use a letter stamp to mark the connecting rod. NOTE: THE LARGE AND SMALL BORES IN THE CONNECTING ROD MUST BE SQUARE AND PARALLEL WITH EACH OTHER WITHIN THE LIMITS OF Âą0.25 mm (0.010 in.). THE MEASUREMENT IS MADE AT 127 mm (5.0 in.) ON EACH SIDE OF THE AXIS OF THE CONNECTING ROD. IF THE BUSHING IS INSTALLED IN THE SMALL END OF THE CONNECTING ROD, THE LIMITS ARE REDUCED TO Âą0.06 mm (0.0025 in.). Figure 53. Connecting Rod Alignment Check 2. Check the clearance of the bushing in the connecting rod with the piston pin. If the clearance is greater than 0.043 mm (0.0017 in.) or is damaged, install a new bushing. NOTE: Connecting rod kits are available with a new small-end bushing installed and finished to the correct grade. Refer to How to Select Correct Replacements to identify the correct rod grade.

28

7. Check that the grade letter on the connecting rod is correct. If necessary, delete the letter and etch a new letter on the side of the rod.

How to Select Correct Replacements CAUTION It is important that the piston does not contact the cylinder head. Ensure that the piston height above the cylinder block is correct. Check that the connecting rods are fitted in the correct cylinder. Record the position of the connecting rod and its relevant cylinder when it is removed from the engine. To check that the piston height above the cylinder block is correct, the engine may have up to six length grades (F to L) of connecting rods fitted.


600 SRM 705

Piston and Connecting Rod Assemblies Repair

Identification of the length grade is by a letter or color which is marked on the side of each connecting rod. See Figure 54. The letter F is the longest grade of connecting rod and letter L is the shortest grade. The difference between grades is 0.046 mm (0.0018 in.).

3. Turn the piston for access to install the connecting rod. Install the connecting rod in position in the piston. If the original piston is to be installed again, make sure that the mark on the piston is aligned with the mark on the connecting rod as shown in Figure 52. Make sure that the piston and connecting rod are installed in the same cylinder again. 4. If a new piston or connecting rod is being installed, make sure that index slot in the connecting rod for the rod bearing is on the same side of the piston as the boss for the piston pin. See Figure 55.

1. CONNECTING ROD Figure 54. Rod Bearings Position If the grade letter or color on the side of the connecting rod cannot be seen, the length can be checked by the measurement of the dimension (x) shown in Figure 54. Before the length of the connecting rod is measured, check that the bores of the big end and the small end are square and parallel, see Figure 53. The length is checked with the big end bearing removed and the original small end bush fitted. The dimensions for each grade are listed in the table below. Length Letter

Color Code

Length

F

Red

165.728 to 165.761 mm

G

Orange

165.682 to 165.715 mm

H

White

165.637 to 165.670 mm

J

Green

165.591 to 165.624 mm

K

Purple

165.545 to 165.578 mm

L

Blue

165.499 to 165.532 mm

1. INDEX SLOT FOR BEARING

2. IBOSS FOR PISTON PIN

Figure 55. Piston and Connecting Rod Orientation 5. Install the piston pin to fasten the connecting rod to the piston. If the piston pin is tight, heat the piston to 40 to 50 C (104 to 122 F) to make installation of the piston pin easier. 6. Install the other snap ring to hold the piston pin in the piston. 7. Install the piston rings as described under Piston Rings, Install.

PISTON COOLING JETS Install 1. Make sure that the parts are clean. Lubricate the parts with engine oil as they are assembled. 2. Install a new snap ring into one of the grooves to hold the piston pin.

Remove Release the valve assembly and remove the piston cooling jet. The crankshaft has been removed in Figure 56 to show the piston cooling jet. The AR engines have only one cooling jet and it is installed in the number one cylinder.

29


Crankshaft Assembly Repair

600 SRM 705 fit into the nozzle of the cooling jet. See Figure 57 and Figure 58 for checking the alignment of the cooling jet.

1. ALIGNMENT DOWEL Figure 56. Piston Cooling Jet Figure 57. Piston Cooling Jet Alignment, Engines YG and YH

Install 1. Check that the ball assembly moves freely against the spring pressure in the valve assembly and that the jet tube is not damaged. Replace any damaged or worn parts. 2. Install the cooling jet. Make sure that the assembly is installed correctly on the alignment dowel in the cylinder block. Tighten the valve assembly to 20 N•m (15 lbf ft). 3. Check the alignment of the cooling jet. Insert a 1.70 mm (0.067 in.) rod into the nozzle of the cooling jet. The length of the rod must extend out of the top of the cylinder. If a rod of the correct diameter is not available, grind one end of a thicker rod to the 1.70 mm (0.067 in.) diameter for a length of 16.00 mm (0.630 in.) so that it will

Figure 58. Piston Cooling Jet Alignment, Engine AR

Crankshaft Assembly Repair GENERAL The crankshaft is forged from chrome-molybdenum steel. The four-cylinder engines have five main journals and the six-cylinder engines have seven main journals. The center main bearing is the thrust bearing that controls the axial movement of the crankshaft. The thrust bearing has thrust washers on both sides of the bearing. The main bearings are an alloy of tin and aluminum. The center main bearing in the six-cylinder engines is a lead and bronze alloy. The

30

main bearing caps are made of cast iron or spheroidal graphite (SG) iron. The front and rear oils seals are lip seals with an additional dust seal outside of the main lip and oil return grooves on the face of the main lip. ENGINE AR. The crankshaft pulley, usually fitted without a damper is held in position by a plain thrust block and three setscrews. The nose of the crankshaft is serrated for location. See Figure 59.


600 SRM 705

Crankshaft Assembly Repair of the chassis or frame. The purpose of the balancer unit is to reduce the effect of the out-of-balance forces.

CRANKSHAFT PULLEY Engine AR, Remove 1. Remove the drive belts. 2. Remove the three capscrews which hold the pulley to the crankshaft. See Figure 59. Remove the thrust block and pulley.

1. THRUST BLOCK 2. CAPSCREWS

3. CRANKSHAFT PULLEY

3. Clean the parts and check for damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Engines YG and YH, Remove Figure 59. Crankshaft Pulley Arrangement, Engine AR ENGINES YG and YH. The location of the front pulley is by a key in the crankshaft nose and the pulley is held in position by a tapered rings arrangement. See Figure 60.

1. CRANKSHAFT PULLEY

1. Remove the drive belts. 2. Remove the three capscrews which hold the pulley to the crankshaft. See Figure 61. Remove the thrust block. If the crankshaft pulley will not slide from the crankshaft, DO NOT use a puller to remove the pulley. Hold a wood block against the inner hub of the pulley and lightly hit the wood block with a hammer. See Figure 62. This action will loosen the inner ring and outer ring so that the pulley can be removed from the crankshaft as shown in Figure 61.

2. VISCOUS DAMPER 3. TAPERED RING

Figure 60. Crankshaft Pulley Arrangement, Engines YG and YH An integral damper, with a rubber insert is built into the pulley of six-cylinder engines and some four-cylinder engines. Six-cylinder engines have a viscous damper which is fastened to the front or rear face of the pulley. See Figure 60. All dampers are designed for the suppression of torsional vibrations in the engine crankshaft.

1. SPACER RING 2. INNER RING 3. OUTER RING

4. THRUST BLOCK 5. O-RING

Figure 61. Crankshaft Pulley Arrangement, Engines YG and YH

A balancer unit is fitted to certain four-cylinder engines which have rigid mountings or which are part

31


Crankshaft Assembly Repair

600 SRM 705

CAUTION Do not use excessive force to lever the damper away from the engine. 3. Remove any paint or dirt in four positions 90 apart on the face of the damper, above the rubber insert. See Figure 63. Use a lever to move the damper forward and eliminate the crankshaft end-float. Fit a dial test indicator on the front cover of the timing case. Measure the alignment of the damper face at four locations, 90 apart. The maximum permissible difference between the maximum and minimum figures obtained is 0.18 mm (0.007 in.). Figure 62. Crankshaft Pulley Installation, Engines YG and YH 3. If a separate damper is connected to the crankshaft pulley, remove the capscrews and remove the damper.

Inspect 1. When an integral pulley and damper is fitted, the assembly should be replaced if (see Figure 63): • The rubber insert between the hub and the outer ring is split. • The rubber insert is damaged by oil or solvents. • There is movement of the pulley or outer ring on the hub.

4. Remove any paint or dirt from the circumference of the damper. Fit a dial test indicator on the front cover of the timing case. 5. Rotate the crankshaft slowly one complete revolution and measure for run-out on the circumference of the damper with the dial test indicator. The maximum permissible difference between the maximum and minimum figures obtained in 0.12 mm (0.005 in.). 6. If the alignment or the run-out is in excess of the permissible limit, renew the pulley. 7. A viscous damper must be renewed if there is impact damage to the outer casing or if there is leakage of the viscous fluid from the cover plate. See Figure 60. Check the area around the holes for the damper fasteners for damage.

Engine AR, Install 1. Put the pulley into position on the crankshaft. See Figure 59. Lubricate lightly the threads of the three capscrews. Install the thrust block and the three capscrews. Tighten the three capscrews evenly to 115 N•m (85 lbf ft). Check each capscrew again for the correct torque. 2. Install the drive belts. See Drive Belts. 1. RUBBER INSERT

2. PULLEY

Figure 63. Crankshaft Pulley 2. Check the area around the holes for the damper fasteners for cracks or wear.

32

Engines YG and YH, Install 1. If your engine has a separate damper that is connected to the crankshaft pulley and it was removed, install it on the crankshaft pulley. If a viscous damper is used, install the damper in position on the face of the pulley. Install the clamp ring or the washers and tighten the capscrews gradually and evenly to 35 N•m (26 lbf ft). If


600 SRM 705 M12 capscrews are used, tighten them to 75 N•m (55 lbf ft). 2. Clean the end of the crankshaft and the parts of the crankshaft pulley. Do not use a degreasing solution. See Figure 61. Do not make any changes to the inner ring or the outer ring. 3. Put the crankshaft pulley on the crankshaft so that the key is engaged. Push the pulley onto the crankshaft. NOTE: If the rings are not installed correctly, the crankshaft pulley will be very difficult to remove again. 4. Install the spacer ring, inner ring, and the outer ring in the correct order. 5. Lightly lubricate the O-ring and the thrust faces of the capscrews with engine oil. Put the thrust block and the capscrews in position.

Crankshaft Assembly Repair the housing. The spring in the seal goes toward the housing. The installation tool has two sides and will install the oil seal in the housing in either position 1 or position 2. 8. There are three positions in which the oil seal can be installed in the seal housing. See Figure 64. • Position "1" is used when a new seal is first fitted in service. • Position "2" is used when a new seal is fitted in service and the crankshaft flange is worn in position "1". • Position "3" can be used with a new seal in service, if a wet clutch is not used and the crankshaft is new or the crankshaft palm area has been corrected. Check that the seal is fitted square in the housing. If all positions have been used, the crankshaft must have a new surface ground on the crankshaft flange. See the Engine Specifications for the size limits.

6. Gradually and evenly tighten the capscrews to push the crankshaft pulley on the crankshaft. Tighten the capscrews to 115 N•m (85 lbf ft). 7. Install the drive belts. See Drive Belts.

REAR OIL SEAL Replace Special Tools: Replacement tool for oil seal. 1. Remove the drive components from the rear of the engine. Figure 64. Oil Seal Positions 2. Remove the flywheel and housing. See Flywheel, Remove. 3. Remove the capscrews and remove the seal housing and seal assembly. Clean the parts. 4. Inspect the oil seal for wear and damage. If there is any question about the condition of the oil seal, replace the oil seal. 5. Check that the oil seal area and outer circumference of the crankshaft flange are not worn or damaged. 6. Press the oil seal from the housing. 7. Lubricate the oil seal with engine oil and carefully press the oil seal into one of the positions in

9. Make sure that the two position dowels are installed in the engine block. Use a new gasket. Do not use gasket compound on any of the surfaces. 10. Make sure the lip of the seal is lubricated with engine oil where it touches the crankshaft flange. This lubrication of the oil seal is necessary to prevent damage to the oil seal when the engine is first started. 11. Install a new gasket on the seal housing. Put the oil seal and housing on the seal guide. Carefully push the oil seal assembly into position on the crankshaft flange and onto the dowels. See Figure 65.

33


Crankshaft Assembly Repair

600 SRM 705 The front main bearing can be difficult to replace when the timing case is on the engine. The oil pump is installed on the front bearing cap. A special wrench can be required to apply the correct torque to the capscrews for removal and installation. If a wrench is not available to install the capscrews on the main bearing cap, the timing case must be removed. The oil pump will be removed with the cap for the front main bearing. The suction pipe, oil strainer, delivery pipe, and relief valve must be removed.

Remove 1. Drain the engine oil and remove the oil sump. 1. SEAL GUIDE 2. OIL SEAL AND HOUSING

3. GASKET 4. DOWEL (2)

Figure 65. Oil Seal Installation 12. Remove the seal guide. Install the capscrews. See Figure 66. Tighten the capscrews and the two special capscrews to 22 N•m (16 lbf ft).

2. Remove the necessary components for access to the bearing cap for the bearing that must be replaced. 3. Remove the capscrews and remove the bearing cap. Remove the lower half of the bearing from the bearing cap. 4. Use a thin flexible tool to push on the side of the upper bearing half that is opposite from the location tab. Push on the bearing half so that it begins to rotate out of the engine block. Carefully rotate crankshaft so that bearing will rotate out of the engine block. 5. Check that the bearing journal on the crankshaft is clean and in good condition. See Figure 67.

1. SPECIAL CAPSCREWS Figure 66. Oil Seal Installation

MAIN BEARINGS NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of the main bearings without removing the crankshaft from the engine. If the rear main bearing must be replaced, the flywheel, flywheel housing, rear oil seal housing, and bridge piece must be removed.

34

1. BEARING REMOVAL TOOL

2. LOCATION SLOTS 3. BEARING GROOVE

Figure 67. Main Bearing Removal


600 SRM 705

Crankshaft Assembly Repair

Inspect Inspect the bearings for wear and other damage. If a bearing is worn or damaged, replace both halves of the shell bearings and check the condition of the other bearings.

Install NOTE: Only the upper half of the bearing has lubrication holes and it must be installed into the engine block. 1. Lubricate the upper bearing half with engine oil. Install the plain end of the bearing between the crankshaft journal and the side of the bearing housing that has the location slot. Carefully slide the bearing half into the bearing housing until the location tab fits into the location slot. 2. Lubricate the lower bearing half with engine oil and install it into the bearing cap. Make sure the location tab is installed correctly into the location slot. 3. Make sure that the location thimbles are installed in either the bearing cap or the bearing housing of the engine block. Make sure that the orientation of the location slots for the bearing halves are correct as shown in Figure 68. Install the bearing cap. 4. Make sure the capscrews are in good condition. Install the capscrews into the bearing cap. Tighten the capscrews gradually and evenly. Tighten the capscrews to a final torque of 265 N•m (195 lbf ft).

1. LOCATION SLOTS FOR MAIN BEARING HALVES Figure 68. Main Bearing Cap Orientation

THRUST WASHERS Crankshaft Axial Movement, Check The axial movement of the crankshaft is controlled by two half thrust washers installed on each side of the center main bearing. See Figure 69. The axial clearance can be checked with a spacer gauge inserted between the crankshaft and the thrust washer. See Figure 70. A dial indicator can be used to check the axial movement from the end of the crankshaft as shown in Figure 71. The normal axial movement is 0.05 to 0.38 mm (0.002 to 0.015 in.). The maximum axial movement permitted is 0.51 mm (0.020 in.).

5. Make sure that the crankshaft rotates freely. If the thrust washers have been removed and installed again, the axial movement of the crankshaft must be checked. See Thrust Washers in the following paragraphs. 6. Install the components that were removed for access to the main bearing. 7. Install the oil sump.

Figure 69. Thrust Washers

35


Crankshaft Assembly Repair

600 SRM 705 3. Remove the capscrews for the center main bearing cap. Remove the bearing cap, lower bearing half, and the lower halves of the thrust washers. 4. Use a thin flexible tool to push the upper halves of the thrust washers from their positions next to the main bearing housing. See Figure 72. Use a small pry bar as necessary to move the crankshaft to loosen a tight thrust washer.

Figure 70. Axial Clearance Measurement With Spacer Gauge

Figure 72. Thrust Washer Upper Half Removal

Install 1. Lubricate the thrust washers with engine oil. Slide the upper halves of the thrust washers into their positions in the engine block. Make sure that the sides of the thrust washers with the grooves are against the crankshaft. Figure 71. Axial Movement Measurement With Dial Indicator If the axial movement is greater than the specifications, oversize thrust washers can be installed on one side or both sides of the main bearing. The oversize thrust washers are 0.019 mm (0.00075 in.) larger than the standard thrust washers.

Remove 1. Drain the engine oil from the sump. Remove the oil sump. See Oil Sump, Remove. 2. Remove the suction pipe and oil strainer. See Figure 40. Remove the capscrew that holds the bracket to the main bearing cap. Remove the two capscrews from the flange of the suction pipe and remove the suction pipe and screen. Clean the faces of both flanges.

36

2. Install the lower halves of the thrust washers into the main bearing cap. Make sure that the location tabs are in their correct positions. 3. Make sure that the location thimbles are installed in either the bearing cap or the bearing housing of the engine block. Make sure that the orientation of the location slots for the bearing halves are correct as shown in Figure 68. Lubricate the bearing and thrust washers with engine oil. Install the bearing cap. 4. Inspect the capscrews, reuse if in good condition. Install the capscrews into the bearing cap. Tighten the capscrews gradually and evenly. Tighten the capscrews to a final torque of 265 N•m (195 lbf ft). 5. Make sure that the crankshaft rotates freely. Check the axial movement of the crankshaft to make sure that it is within the specifications.


600 SRM 705 6. Loosely assemble the bracket of the suction line to the main bearing cap. Install a new gasket and fasten the flanges of the suction line to the oil pump. Make sure that the suction line is aligned correctly and tighten the capscrew that holds the bracket to the main bearing cap. 7. Install the oil sump. See Oil Sump, Install.

CRANKSHAFT Remove 1. Remove the engine from the lift truck. See the Frame section. See the Transmission section for separating the engine from the transmission. 2. Remove the oil sump. See Oil Sump, Remove. 3. Remove the fan, drive belts, fan drive pulley and housing, and the coolant pump. 4. Remove the crankshaft pulley. See Crankshaft Pulley. 5. Remove the alternator and its mount bracket. 6. Remove the timing case cover. See Timing Case Cover, Remove.

Crankshaft Assembly Repair crankcase. Some engines have rubber seals and other engines have sealant. 13. Remove the bearing caps and lower bearing halves from the connecting rods. Make an arrangement so that the parts for each connecting rod will be assembled again in their original positions. Carefully push the pistons into their bores a small amount so that the connecting rods are separated from the crankshaft.

CAUTION Make sure the cooling jets for the pistons are not damaged or moved out of alignment. If a cooling jet is hit, the alignment must be checked and the cooling jet replaced if necessary. 14. Make sure that the main bearing caps are marked with their position number. Remove the main bearing caps, lower bearing halves, and the upper and lower thrust washers. Keep all the parts in an arrangement so that the parts can be installed in their original positions. 15. Lift the crankshaft from the cylinder block. Remove the upper bearing halves and put each of them with their lower bearing half.

7. Remove the fuel injection pump. See Fuel Injection Pump, Remove.

Inspect

8. Remove the timing gears and the timing case. See the section Timing Case and Timing Gears Repair.

Check the crankshaft for wear and other damage. The maximum wear and out-of-round on the bearing journals is 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.).

9. Remove the flywheel and the flywheel housing. See Flywheel, Remove.

The bearing journals on standard crankshafts can be ground to the following diameters smaller than the original size: 0.25 mm (0.010 in.) 0.50 mm (0.020 in.) 0.75 mm (0.030 in.)

10. Remove the rear oil seal housing. See Rear Oil Seal, Replace. 11. If the engine is not already in a position with the crankshaft facing up, turn the engine to that position. Remove the suction pipe and oil strainer. See Figure 40. Remove the capscrew that holds the bracket to the main bearing cap. Remove the two capscrews from the flange of the suction pipe and remove the suction pipe and screen. Clean the faces of both flanges. Remove the oil pump, delivery tube, and relief valve. See Oil Pump and Relief Valve. 12. Remove the bridge piece over the rear main bearing. Make a note if there is a round rubber seal at each end of the bridge piece where it joins the

Special bearings are available for these sizes. The crankshaft must be replaced if the surface must be ground more than 0.75 mm (0.030 in.). The area on the crankshaft flange for the rear oil seal can be machined to remove wear marks if the oil seal has been used in all three positions. See the Engine Specifications. The minimum diameter of this area is 133.27 mm (5.247 in.).

Install 1. Make sure that all of the oil passages are clean.

37


Crankshaft Assembly Repair

600 SRM 705

2. Make sure all of the bearings and bearing caps are clean. Install the upper bearing halves into their positions in the connecting rods and the housings for the main bearings. Make sure that the position tags of the bearings fit into their position slots. Lubricate the bearings with engine oil. 3. Install the crankshaft in position on the main bearings. 4. Lubricate the thrust washers with engine oil. Slide the upper halves of the thrust washers into their positions in the engine block. Make sure that the sides of the thrust washers with the grooves are against the crankshaft. 5. Install the lower halves of the thrust washers into the main bearing cap. Make sure that the location tags are in their correct positions. 6. Make sure that the location thimbles are installed in either the bearing cap or the bearing housing of the engine block. Make sure that the orientation of the location slots for the bearing halves are correct as shown in Figure 68. Lubricate the bearing and thrust washers with engine oil. Install the bearing cap. 7. Make sure the main bearing caps are installed according to their position numbers shown on the cap. The serial numbers on the main bearing caps will also be in alignment. The serial number on the main bearing caps must be the same as the number on the bottom face of the engine block. (The third and fifth bearing caps on six-cylinder engines are not marked with a serial number.)

1. LOWER GROOVE

2. UPPER GROOVE

Figure 73. Bridge Piece and Sealant NOTE: Many engines have capscrews instead of the two studs shown in the bridge piece in Figure 74. These capscrews fasten the oil sump to the bridge piece. Use sealant on the threads of either the studs or the capscrews. 10. Use a straightedge to make sure the bridge piece is aligned with the rear face of the engine block. See Figure 74. Tighten the capscrews to 16 N•m (12 lbf ft).

8. Inspect the capscrews, reuse if in good condition. Install the capscrews into the main bearing cap. Tighten the capscrews gradually and evenly. Tighten the capscrews to a final torque of 265 N•m (195 lbf ft). Repeat this step for all five main bearings. 9. When the bridge piece is put into position, inject liquid gasket sealant (Loctite® 5900) into the upper groove at each end of the bridge piece. See Figure 73. Inject the sealant until the upper groove is full and the sealant leaves the lower groove at the front and rear of the bridge piece. Make sure all of the grooves are completely full of sealant.

38

Figure 74. Bridge Piece Alignment 11. Install the connecting rods to the crankshaft. See Rod Bearings, Install. Install the upper bearing half into the connecting rod. Make sure that the location tab is installed correctly into its position in the connecting rod. See Figure 41. Make sure that the assembly number on the bearing cap is the same as the number on the connecting rod. Make sure that the two assembly numbers are


600 SRM 705

Crankshaft Assembly Repair

on the same side of the connecting rod as shown in Figure 42.

control the flywheel when the other capscrews are removed.

12. Connecting rods with nuts. Install and tighten the nuts evenly to a torque of 125 N•m (92 lbf ft). Make sure that the crankshaft turns freely. Connecting rods with capscrews. Install and tighten the capscrews evenly to a torque of 155 N•m (114 lbf ft). Make sure that the crankshaft turns freely.

2. Remove the other capscrews that fasten the flywheel to the crankshaft. Remove the flywheel.

13. Install the oil pump, delivery pipe, and relief valve. Loosely assemble the bracket of the suction pipe to the main bearing cap. Install a new gasket and fasten the flanges of the suction line to the oil pump. Make sure that the suction pipe is aligned correctly and tighten the capscrew that holds the bracket to the main bearing cap.

3. Check the flywheel and ring gear for damage.

Ring Gear, Replace WARNING Wear eye protection for this operation to prevent eye injury from metal chips. You will be using a hammer and chisel to break the ring gear. 1. Before the ring gear is removed, check the position of the chamfer on the teeth.

14. Install the rear oil seal housing. See Rear Oil Seal, Replace.

2. Use a hammer and chisel to break the ring gear. Make sure that you do not damage the flywheel.

15. Install the flywheel and the flywheel housing. See Flywheel, Install.

3. The ring gear must be heated before it can be installed on the flywheel. Use an oven that has a temperature control. Make sure that the ring gear is not heated to more than 250 C (482 F).

16. Install the timing gears and the timing case. See Timing Case and Timing Gears Repair. 17. Install the fuel injection pump. See Fuel Injection Pump, Install.

4. Make sure that the chamfer on the ring gear teeth is in the correct direction. Install the ring gear on the flywheel.

18. Install the timing case cover. See Timing Case Cover, Install.

Install

19. Install the alternator and its mount bracket. 20. Install the crankshaft pulley. See Crankshaft Pulley. 21. Install the coolant pump, fan drive pulley and fan housing, drive belts, and the fan. 22. Install the oil sump. See Oil Sump, Install. 23. Install the engine into the lift truck. See the Frame section and the Transmission section for the lift truck.

FLYWHEEL The steel flywheel has a hardened steel starter ring. The starter ring has 126 teeth.

Remove 1. Remove two opposite capscrews from the flywheel and temporarily install two studs to help

1. Make sure the surfaces of the crankshaft and flywheel are clean so that the two parts will fit together correctly. 2. Install the flywheel over the guide studs. Install four capscrews. Remove the two studs and install the remainder of the capscrews. Tighten the capscrews in a cross pattern to 105 N•m (77 lbf ft). 3. Check the flywheel run-out with a dial test indicator. See Figure 75. This must be less than 0.30 mm (0.012 in.) total indicator reading. 4. Check the alignment of the flywheel face. See Figure 76. The error in alignment must not be more than 0.003 mm (0.0001 in.) total indicator reading for every 25 mm (1.0 in.) of the flywheel radius from the crankshaft axis to the indicator plunger. During this check, keep the crankshaft pressed toward the front to remove the effect of crankshaft end-float.

39


Crankshaft Assembly Repair

600 SRM 705

Install 1. Ensure that the rear face of the cylinder block and the faces of the housing are clean and free from damage. Ensure that the location dowels are fitted correctly. If a felt seal is installed to the rear flange of the sump, replace the seal. 2. Fit the housing onto the dowels and tighten lightly the setscrews.

Figure 75. Flywheel Run-Out Check

Figure 76. Flywheel Face Alignment

FLYWHEEL HOUSING Remove WARNING The flywheel housing is heavy, use lift equipment or get help to assist with the lift operation before removal of the flywheel housing fasteners. 1. Remove the starter. 2. Release the housing setscrews and with a soft face hammer, hit carefully the housing to remove it from the dowels.

40

3. Check the housing concentricity with a dial test indicator. See Figure 77. The run-out limit is given in the data and dimensions. If any adjustment is necessary, it must be made on the housing and the concentricity checked again.

Figure 77. Flywheel Housing Concentricity Check 4. Tighten the setscrews to the torque recommended in the Special Torque Specifications. 5. Check the housing alignment. See Figure 78. The maximum tolerance is given in the data and dimensions. Any necessary adjustment must be made on the housing and not on the cylinder block. 6. Install the flywheel and the starter motor.


600 SRM 705

Timing Case and Timing Gears Repair

Figure 78. Flywheel Housing Alignment Check

Timing Case and Timing Gears Repair GENERAL The timing case can be either cast aluminum or cast iron. The timing gears are steel. The gear train includes the crankshaft gear, idler gear, gear for the fuel injection pump, camshaft gear, and PTO gear. The timing case cover is aluminum and has the front oil seal for the crankshaft. The timing case cover has a noise shield on its front surface. See Description for additional information on timing gears and engine timing. The camshaft is made from cast iron. The lobes on the camshaft for the fuel pump are hardened.

TIMING CASE COVER Remove 1. Drain the coolant. Remove the fan. See Figure 79. 2. Remove the drive belts and alternator. 3. Remove the crankshaft pulley. See Crankshaft Pulley. 4. Remove the fan drive pulley if additional clearance is needed. 5. Remove the coolant pump. See Coolant Pump, Remove.

1. CAPSCREW 2. CYLINDER BLOCK 3. STUD

4. GASKET 5. TIMING CASE COVER

Figure 79. Timing Case Cover

41


Timing Case and Timing Gears Repair 6. Remove the capscrews and nuts that hold the timing case cover to the timing case. Remove the timing case cover and the sound shield.

Install Special Tools:

600 SRM 705 5. Install the fan drive pulley if it was removed. 6. Install the alternator and drive belts and adjust the tension. See Drive Belts. 7. Install the fan. Fill the cooling system.

Alignment tool, front oil seal

1. Use a new gasket and install the timing case cover on the timing case. See Figure 79. Use two capscrews to hold the timing case cover in position. Install the special tool on the crankshaft. Use the special washer and the capscrews for the crankshaft pulley to hold the alignment tool in position. The purpose of the special tool is to make sure that the front oil seal evenly fits the circumference of the seal surface of the crankshaft pulley. See Figure 80.

FRONT OIL SEAL Remove 1. Remove the fan and drive belts. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 3. Use a pry bar to remove the front oil seal from the timing gear cover. Put the pry bar behind the main lip of the front oil seal. Make sure that the edge of the housing for the oil seal is not damaged during removal.

Install Special Tools:

Installation tool for front oil seal Pressure plate Fastener plate Sleeve Seal adapter

NOTE: The front oil seal is normally installed to a depth of 9.3 mm (0.366 in.) from the front face of the oil seal housing to the flat front face of the oil seal. If the crankshaft pulley is worn at this location, a wear sleeve can be installed. See Figure 82. Figure 80. Front Oil Seal Alignment Tool

CAUTION The correct alignment of the timing case cover is important and must be done carefully. The front oil seal can leak and the gears for the coolant pump can fail if the alignment is not correct. 2. When the timing case cover is aligned with the crankshaft, install the capscrews and nuts in the timing case cover. Tighten the capscrews and nuts to 22 N•m (16 lbf ft). Remove the alignment tool. 3. Install the coolant pump. See Coolant Pump, Install. 4. Install crankshaft pulley. See Crankshaft Pulley.

42

1. Clean the oil seal housing. Inspect the oil seal for damage. Do not install a front oil seal that has a scratch or any damage on the lip of the seal. 2. Lubricate the outer circumference of the oil seal with engine oil and install the front oil seal into the oil seal housing. Make sure that the lip of the seal is toward the inside of the cover for the timing gear case and the front oil seal is parallel to the bore of the oil seal housing. 3. Put the replacement tool for the front oil seal on the crankshaft as shown in Figure 81. Use the fastener plate to fasten the installation tool to the crankshaft. Install the seal adapter so that the 10.5 mm mark is toward the front oil seal. Put the sleeve and the pressure plate into position and fasten it to the stud of the fastener plate as shown in Figure 81.


600 SRM 705

Timing Case and Timing Gears Repair A new front oil seal must be used when a wear sleeve is fitted. The dimension, to press the new oil seal into the timing case, with or without a wear sleeve fitted, is 9.3 mm (0.366 in.), from the front face of the timing case. 3. Install the crankshaft pulley. See Crankshaft Pulley, Installation.

1. REPLACEMENT TOOL FOR FRONT OIL SEAL 2. PRESSURE PLATE

3. FASTENER PLATE 4. SLEEVE 5. SEAL ADAPTER

Figure 81. Front Oil Seal Installation 4. Install a rod through the hole in the end of the tool so that the tool will not turn. Turn the nut on the pressure plate with a wrench and the front oil seal will be pushed into the housing. Push the seal into the correct depth. Remove the installation tool.

1. SPIGOT 2. WEAR SLEEVE

3. FLANGE 4. OIL SEAL

Figure 82. Crankshaft Pulley Wear Sleeve

5. Lubricate the seal area of the crankshaft pulley with engine oil. Install the crankshaft pulley. See Crankshaft Pulley.

IDLER GEAR AND HUB

6. Install the drive belts and adjust the belt tension.

Remove

7. Install the fan.

1. Remove the timing case cover. See Timing Case Cover, Remove.

CRANKSHAFT PULLEY WEAR SLEEVE Install To renew a worn crankshaft pulley, a wear sleeve is fitted over the spigot. See Figure 82. 1. Remove the crankshaft pulley. See Crankshaft Pulley, Removal. NOTE: Full instructions and a special tool to install the wear sleeve are in each service kit. 2. Install the wear sleeve, in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. It is not necessary to remove the flange of the wear sleeve after it has been fitted.

2. Turn the crankshaft until the marked teeth of the crankshaft gear, the camshaft gear, and the gear for the fuel injection pump are aligned as shown in Figure 83. The marked teeth on the idler gear will not necessarily be aligned with the marked teeth of the other three gears because of the different speed of rotation of the idler gear.

CAUTION Make sure that the crankshaft is not turned while the idler gear is removed. A piston can hit and damage a valve. The valve timing and the fuel injection pump timing will be lost if the crankshaft is turned. 3. Remove the three capscrews, remove the plate of the idler gear, and remove the idler gear. See

43


Timing Case and Timing Gears Repair

600 SRM 705

Figure 84. Make a note of the position of the oil hole. The gear for the fuel injection pump will turn a small amount in the counterclockwise direction as the teeth become disengaged from the idler gear.

available, grind one of the faces from the bushings and use a press to remove them from the idler gear. Use a press to install new bushings. The bores and faces of the bushings will need machining to correctly fit the hub. See the Engine Specifications, Idler Gear and Hub for the measurements. 6. For engines that use the idler gear assembly with needle roller bearings - remove the three capscrews, remove the plate of the idler gear. Remove the front thrust washer, the front spacer, and the gear. Remove the two needle roller bearings. If these are to be used again, they should be fitted in their original positions. Remove the rear thrust washer and the rear spacer. Remove the hub. See Figure 85.

1. CAMSHAFT GEAR 2. CRANKSHAFT GEAR 3. IDLER GEAR

4. GEAR FOR FUEL INJECTION PUMP 5. PTO GEAR

Figure 83. Timing Marks Alignment

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

PLATE THRUST WASHER FRONT SPACER IDLER GEAR NEEDLE BEARINGS

6. REAR THRUST WASHER 7. REAR SPACER 8. HUB

Figure 85. Idler Gear with Needle Bearings Components

Install

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

PLATE THRUST WASHER IDLER GEAR TIMING MARKS HUB

6. OIL HOLE 7. REAR THRUST WASHER 8. CAPSCREW

Figure 84. Idler Gear Components 4. Inspect the idler gear and bushings for wear and damage. The idler gear and bushings are available as an assembly or as separate parts. 5. If the bushings must be replaced, use a puller to remove them from the idler gear. If a puller is not

44

1. Use the three capscrews for the idler gear to make sure that the hub for the idler gear is in the correct position with the lubrication hole at the top. 2. Lubricate the bushings in the idler gear with engine oil. Align the timing marks on the idler gear with the marks on the crankshaft gear and the camshaft gear. Turn the gear for the fuel injection pump clockwise as necessary to align the timing marks when the teeth of the idler gear engage the other gears. Make sure all of the alignment marks are aligned as shown in Figure 83.


600 SRM 705

Timing Case and Timing Gears Repair

3. Install the plate for the idler gear and the three capscrews. Tighten the capscrews to 44 N•m (32 lbf ft).

7. Install the timing case cover, coolant pump, crankshaft pulley, fan drive pulley, drive belts, and fan. See Timing Case Cover, Install.

4. Check the clearance between the bushings of the idler gear and the plate of the idler gear. The correct clearance is 0.10 to 0.20 mm (0.004 to 0.008 in.). A maximum service limit is 0.38 mm (0.015 in.). See Figure 86.

AIR COMPRESSOR DRIVE, BENDIX Disassemble CAUTION Do not turn the engine crankshaft nor the crankshaft for the air compressor. If either crankshafts are moved, the air compressor must be timed to the engine. 1. Set the number one piston to TDC as described in the Engine Timing section. 2. Remove the timing case cover as described in Timing Case Cover, Remove. 3. Remove the three capscrews shown. See Figure 87. Remove the cover plate. Remove the idler gear and the needle bearings from the idler hub.

Figure 86. Idler Gear Hub Clearance Check 5. For engines that use the idler gear assembly with needle roller bearings - inspect the components for wear and other damage and replace them as necessary. Lightly lubricate the components with clean lubricating oil before assembly onto the hub. See Figure 84. Position the idler gear hub with the lubrication hole to the top. See Figure 85. Put the rear spacer in position on the hub. Put the rear thrust washer in position on the rear spacer. Put bearings in position on the hub in the same position as they were removed. Lightly lubricate the bore and thrust washer faces of the gear with clean lubricating oil and put the gear in position on the bearings. Put the front spacer in position on the hub then put the front thrust washer in position on the spacer. Put the plate in position. The plate has TOP stamped on the front face as the holes in the plate are not equally spaced. Fit the setscrews and tighten them to 44 N•m (33 lbf ft). 6. Check the timing gear clearances as shown in Figure 89. The minimum clearances for all gears is 0.08 mm (0.003 in.).

1. 2. 3. 4.

O-RING CAPSCREW BRACKET DRIVE GEAR, AIR COMPRESSOR 5. TIMING CASE 6. COVER, TIMING CASE

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

NEEDLE BEARING CAPSCREW (3) IDLER HUB COVER PLATE IDLER GEAR ENGINE IDLER GEAR

Figure 87. Bendix Compressor Drive 4. Remove the three capscrews which fasten the idler hub to the bracket. Remove the idler gear hub. See Figure 88.

45


Timing Case and Timing Gears Repair

1. TIMING CASE 2. BRACKET, IDLER HUB

3. CAPSCREWS (3) 4. CAPSCREWS (4) 5. IDLER GEAR

Figure 88. Bendix Compressor Drive 5. Remove and discard the O-ring. See Figure 87. 6. Inspect the parts for wear or damage.

Assemble 1. Install the O-ring. See Figure 87. 2. Check that the four capscrews which fasten the idler hub bracket (4) to the timing case are tightened to 35 N•m (26 lbf ft). See Figure 88.

600 SRM 705

Figure 89. Timing Gear Clearances Check 7. Install the timing case cover as described in Timing Case Cover, Install.

FUEL INJECTION PUMP GEAR The fuel injection pump has a timing plate fastened to the front face of the gear for the fuel injection pump. See Figure 90. This timing plate is installed by the manufacturer after the fuel injection timing has been accurately set to TDC, number one cylinder on the compression stroke. The timing plate is fastened by two M5 special capscrews.

3. Install the hub into the timing case. See Figure 87 and Figure 88. Install the three capscrews and tighten them to 60 N•m (44 lbf ft). Install the needle bearing assembly on the hub. 4. Lubricate the bore of the idler gear with clean engine oil and install the idler gear on the needle bearings. See Figure 87. Install the cover plate and tighten three capscrews to 22 N•m (16 lbf ft). 5. Check the clearance between the bushings of the idler gear and the plate of the idler gear. The correct clearance is 0.10 to 0.20 mm (0.004 to 0.008 in.). A maximum service limit is 0.38 mm (0.015 in.). See Figure 86. 6. Check the timing gear clearances as shown in Figure 89. The minimum clearance is 0.08 mm (0.003 in.).

46

1. M5 SPECIAL CAPSCREWS

2. TIMING PLATE 3. CAPSCREWS (4)

Figure 90. Fuel Injection Pump Gear Removal


600 SRM 705

Timing Case and Timing Gears Repair

Remove CAUTION Do not loosen the two M5 special capscrews. If this timing plate is moved, the fuel injection pump must be timed again. Do not loosen nor remove the large nut from the shaft of the fuel injection pump. The hub is permanently fastened to the shaft. If the hub is removed, special equipment and special training is required to correctly install the hub again. Special Tools:

Lucas fuel injection pump timing pin

1. Remove the timing case cover. See Timing Case Cover, Remove.

CAUTION Make sure the shaft of the fuel injection pump is not locked. 2. Set the number one piston to TDC on the comTurn the crankshaft until pression stroke. the marked teeth of the crankshaft gear, the camshaft gear, and the gear for the fuel injection pump are aligned as shown in Figure 90. The marked teeth on the idler gear will not necessarily be aligned with the marked teeth of the other three gears because of the different speed of rotation of the idler gear.

1. TIMING PIN Figure 91. Fuel Injection Pump Gear Removal

Install CAUTION Make sure the shaft of the fuel injection pump is not locked. 1. The gear for the fuel injection pump can only be installed in one position. The letters C and M are toward the front of the engine. Make sure the number one piston is set to TDC on the compression stroke. 2. If the timing pin was removed during service, install it in the hole in the body of the fuel injection pump. See Figure 92. Leave the timing pin in position so that the gear for the fuel injection pump can be installed.

CAUTION DO NOT turn the crankshaft while removing the camshaft gear. A piston can hit and damage a valve. 3. Install the timing pin until the small end of the pin is pushed fully into the hole in the body of the fuel injection pump. See Figure 91. 4. Remove the four capscrews from the fuel pump gear and remove the gear from the hub. 5. Inspect the gear for wear and damage, replace if necessary.

1. GEAR FOR FUEL INJECTION PUMP

2. IDLER GEAR 3. TIMING PIN

Figure 92. Fuel Injection Pump Gear Installation 3. Install the gear for the fuel injection pump over the timing pin so that it engages correctly with the idler gear.

47


Timing Case and Timing Gears Repair

600 SRM 705

NOTE: If a new gear is installed, install the original timing plate onto the front face of the new gear. Install the two M5 special capscrews loosely and install the gear on the hub. If the gear and timing plate are installed correctly, the four threaded holes in the hub can be seen through the slots in the gear. 4. Install the four capscrews loosely in the centers of the slots of the gear. NOTE: If a new gear is installed, carefully rotate the gear counterclockwise to remove any clearance between the gear and the idler gear. See Figure 91. Do not rotate the crankshaft or it will be necessary to set TDC again. 5. Tighten the four capscrews to 28 N•m (21 lbf ft). Remove the timing pin from the fuel injection pump. 6. If a new gear has been installed, check the clearance as shown in Figure 89.

1. CAMSHAFT GEAR 2. CRANKSHAFT GEAR 3. IDLER GEAR

4. GEAR FOR FUEL INJECTION PUMP 5. PTO GEAR

Figure 93. Timing Marks Alignment

7. Install the timing case cover, coolant pump, crankshaft pulley, fan drive pulley, drive belts, and fan. See Timing Case Cover, Install.

CAMSHAFT GEAR Remove Special Tools:

Gear puller with adapters

1. Remove the timing case cover. See Timing Case Cover, Remove. 2. Turn the crankshaft until the marked teeth of the crankshaft gear, the camshaft gear, and the gear for the fuel injection pump are aligned as shown in Figure 93. The marked teeth on the idler gear will not necessarily be aligned with the marked teeth of the other three gears because of the different speed of rotation of the idler gear.

CAUTION Make sure that the crankshaft is not turned while the camshaft gear is removed. A piston can hit and damage a valve. 3. Remove the capscrew and washer. Use a puller and adapter to pull the gear from the camshaft. Make sure that the Woodruff key in the camshaft is not lost. Inspect the camshaft gear for wear and damage. See Figure 94.

48

Figure 94. Camshaft Gear Removal

Install CAUTION If the crankshaft or the camshaft must be turned to permit the alignment of the marks on the timing gears, a piston can hit and damage a valve. The rocker arm assembly must be loosened so that the valves are closed when the crankshaft or the camshaft is turned. 1. Make sure that the Woodruff key is installed correctly in the end of the camshaft. 2. Remove the idler gear. See Idler Gear and Hub, Remove.


600 SRM 705 3. Install the camshaft gear on the shaft with the marked teeth toward the front and the keyway correctly aligned. Use a soft hammer to push the gear onto the camshaft. Make sure that the timing marks are aligned correctly as the gear teeth are engaged. See Figure 93. 4. Install the idler gear with the marked teeth correctly aligned. See Idler Gear and Hub, Install. If the camshaft has to be turned and a valve hits a piston, disengage the rocker assembly. 5. Install the capscrew and washer and tighten the capscrew to press the gear into position. Tighten the capscrew to 78 N•m (58 lbf ft). 6. If new gears have been installed, check the timing gear clearances as shown in Figure 89. The minimum clearances for all gears is 0.08 mm (0.003 in.). 7. Install the timing case cover, coolant pump, crankshaft pulley, fan drive pulley, drive belts, and fan. See Timing Case Cover, Install.

CRANKSHAFT GEAR Remove 1. Remove the timing case cover. See Timing Case Cover, Remove. 2. Turn the crankshaft until the marked teeth of the crankshaft gear, the camshaft gear, and the gear for the fuel injection pump are aligned as shown in Figure 93. The marked teeth on the idler gear will not necessarily be aligned with the marked teeth of the other three gears because of the different speed of rotation of the idler gear.

CAUTION Make sure that the crankshaft is not turned while the idler gear or the crankshaft gear is removed. A piston can hit and damage a valve. 3. Remove the idler gear See Idler Gear and Hub, Remove. 4. The crankcase gear is pressed onto the crankshaft. Sometimes a puller will remove the crankcase gear. Sometimes the gear fits so tightly on the crankshaft that the crankshaft must be removed from the engine so that the gear can be removed.

Timing Case and Timing Gears Repair

Install 1. Put the crankshaft gear in a pan of hot oil. Make sure that the temperature can be controlled. DO NOT heat the crankshaft gear more than 180 C (356 F). Use boiling water if a container of hot oil and a temperature control is not available. DO NOT use an open flame to heat the gear. 2. Align the gear with the key on the crankshaft and with the timing marks on the gear away from the engine. Push the gear onto the crankshaft. 3. Install the idler gear. See Idler Gear and Hub, Install. 4. Check the timing gear clearances as shown in Figure 89. The minimum clearances for all gears is 0.08 mm (0.003 in.). 5. Install the timing case cover, coolant pump, crankshaft pulley, fan drive pulley, drive belts, and fan. See Timing Case Cover, Install.

TIMING CASE Remove 1. Remove the fan. 2. Remove the drive belts. 3. Remove the crankshaft pulley. See Crankshaft Pulley. 4. Remove the fan drive assembly. See Fan and Fan Drive, Remove. 5. Drain the coolant and remove the coolant pump. See Coolant Pump, Remove. 6. Remove the alternator and its mount bracket, and the front support plate. 7. Remove the air compressor. See Air Compressor - Engines YG and YH, Remove. Remove the compressor drive. See Air Compressor Drive, Bendix, Disassemble. 8. Remove the timing case cover. See Timing Case Cover, Remove. 9. Turn the crankshaft until the marked teeth of the crankshaft gear, the camshaft gear, and the gear for the fuel injection pump are aligned as shown in Figure 93. The marked teeth on the idler gear will not necessarily be aligned with the

49


Timing Case and Timing Gears Repair marked teeth of the other three gears because of the different speed of rotation of the idler gear. 10. Remove the fuel injection pump. See Fuel Injection Pump, Remove.

600 SRM 705 with the machined face of the engine block where the alternator bracket is installed. Tighten the M8 capscrews to 22 N•m (16 lbf ft). Tighten the M10 capscrews to 44 N•m (32 lbf ft).

11. Remove the idler gear and the camshaft gear. See Idler Gear and Hub, Remove and Camshaft Gear, Remove. 12. Remove the capscrews that hold the timing case to the engine block. Remove the capscrews that hold the oil sump to the timing gear case. 13. Remove the timing gear case, gasket, and hub for the idler gear. Do not permit the hub to fall and become damaged.

Install 1. Inspect the oil sump gasket for damage. If the gasket is damaged, remove the oil sump and install after the timing case has been installed. A damaged section of the gasket can be cut and a new section can be installed in its place, but the work must be carefully done to prevent oil leaks. 2. If the oil sump has been removed, install the hub for the idler gear on the front of the engine block. Use the three capscrews for the idler gear to hold the hub in position. Make sure that the oil hole in the hub is toward the top of the engine. 3. Make sure that the thrust washer for the camshaft is in the correct position. 4. Install a new gasket for the timing case to the engine block. Cut the bottom ends of the gasket to correctly fit the space. Use gasket compound at the bottom ends of the gasket. 5. Put the timing case into position on the engine block. If the oil sump was not removed, install the hub for the idler gear. Use the four capscrews for the idler gear to hold the hub in position. Make sure that the oil hole in the hub is toward the top of the engine. Install the four capscrews that hold the hub of the idler gear to the engine block. See Figure 95. 6. Install the alternator and its front support plate in position and install the remainder of the capscrews into the timing case. If the front support plate has been separated from the alternator bracket, make sure that the support plate is even

50

1. CAPSCREWS FOR HUB

2. HUB FOR IDLER GEAR

Figure 95. Idler Gear Hub Installation NOTE: If a new timing case is being installed, remove the two studs from the timing case and clean the threads that fit into the timing case. Apply liquid sealant to the threads of the studs and install them into the new timing case. 7. Install the camshaft gear. Install the capscrew and washer and tighten the capscrew to press the gear into position. Tighten the capscrew to 95 N•m (70 lbf ft). 8. Lubricate the bushings in the idler gear with engine oil. Align the timing marks on the idler gear with the marks on the crankshaft gear and the cam shaft gear. Remove the three capscrews from the hub for the idler gear and install the idler gear. Make sure that the timing marks are aligned as shown in Figure 93. 9. Install the fuel injection pump. See Fuel Injection Pump, Install. 10. If new gears have been installed, check the timing gear clearances as shown in Figure 89. The minimum clearances for all gears is 0.08 mm (0.003 in.). 11. If the oil sump was removed, install it. Make sure that any joints in the gaskets are fitted to prevent oil leaks.


600 SRM 705

Timing Case and Timing Gears Repair

12. Install the timing case cover, coolant pump, crankshaft pulley, fan drive, alternator, drive belts, and fan. See Timing Case Cover, Install.

CAMSHAFT AND TAPPETS Remove NOTE: The removal and installation of the camshaft and tappets require disassembly of many components of the engine. The engine is normally removed from the lift truck for this operation. See the Frame section for procedures to remove the engine. See the Transmission section for procedures to separate the engine from the transmission. 1. Drain the engine oil and coolant. 2. Remove the timing case. See Timing Case, Remove. 3. Remove the valve cover, rocker arm assembly, and push rods. See Rocker Arm Assembly, Remove.

Figure 97. Camshaft Removal and Installation 8. Remove the tappets. 9. Inspect the camshaft and the tappets for wear and damage. See the Engine Specifications for the measurements. Replace any worn or damaged parts.

Install

4. Remove the fuel pump. 5. Turn the engine so that the oil sump is up and remove the oil sump. 6. Remove the thrust washer for the camshaft. See Figure 96.

1. Make sure all of the parts are clean. Lubricate the parts with engine oil as they are assembled. 2. Install the tappets in their positions. 3. Carefully install the camshaft. See Figure 97. 4. Install the thrust washer for the camshaft. Make sure the thrust washer fits correctly on the dowel. See Figure 96. 5. Use a new gasket and install the timing case. See Timing Case, Install. 6. Check the axial clearance of the camshaft. A dial indicator can be used to check the axial movement from the end of the camshaft. The normal axial movement is 0.10 to 0.41 mm (0.004 to 0.016 in.). The maximum axial movement permitted is 0.53 mm (0.021 in.).

1. THRUST WASHER, CAMSHAFT

2. POSITION DOWEL

Figure 96. Camshaft Thrust Washer 7. Carefully remove the camshaft. See Figure 97.

7. Turn the camshaft until the cam for the fuel pump is at the minimum lift position. Install the fuel pump. 8. Turn the engine to the upright position. Turn the crankshaft until the key slot in the crankshaft is toward the top. Install the timing gears. See Crankshaft Gear, Install. 9. Install the fuel injection pump.

51


Cylinder Block Assembly Repair

600 SRM 705

10. Install the push rods and the rocker arm assembly. See Rocker Arm Assembly, Install.

13. Install the timing case cover. See Timing Case Cover, Install. Install the oil sump.

11. Adjust the valve clearances. See Valve Clearance Adjustments.

14. Install the engine. When the engine can be operated, remove the air from the fuel system before operation.

12. Install the oil pump.

Cylinder Block Assembly Repair DESCRIPTION The cylinder block is made of cast iron. The fourcylinder engines have the cylinders bored directly into the cylinder block. The six-cylinder engines have removable cylinder liners pressed into the cylinder block. A bushing is installed in the front of the cylinder block for the front journal of the camshaft. The other camshaft journals do not have bushings and run directly in the cylinder block.

CYLINDER BLOCK Disassemble 1. Remove the engine from the lift truck. See the Frame section for procedures to remove the engine. See the Transmission section for procedures to separate the engine from the transmission. 2. Remove the fan, drive belts, fan drive, and the coolant pump.

9. ENGINES YG and YH. Remove the oil cooler. See Oil Cooler (Six-Cylinder Engines). 10. ENGINE YH. Remove the turbocharger. See Turbocharger - Engine YH Repair, Remove. 11. Remove the starter motor. See Starter Motor, Remove. 12. Remove the timing gears and the timing case. See Timing Case and Timing Gears Repair. 13. Remove the oil filter and the oil sump. See Oil Sump, Remove. 14. Remove the cylinder head assembly. See Cylinder Head Assembly, Remove. 15. Remove the flywheel and the flywheel housing. See Flywheel. 16. Remove the rear oil seal housing. See Rear Oil Seal, Replace.

6. Remove the timing case cover. See Timing Case Cover, Remove.

17. If the engine is not already in a position with the crankshaft facing up, turn the engine to that position. Remove the suction line and oil strainer. See Figure 115. Remove the capscrew that holds the bracket to the main bearing cap. Remove the two capscrews from the flange of the suction line and remove the suction line and screen. Clean the faces of both flanges. Remove the oil pump, delivery pipe and relief valve. See the sections Oil Pump, Remove and Relief Valve, Remove.

7. Remove the fuel injection pump. See Fuel Injection Pump, Remove.

18. Remove the bridge piece over the rear main bearing.

3. ENGINES YG and YH. If the engine has an air compressor, remove it. 4. Remove the crankshaft pulley. See Crankshaft Pulley. 5. Remove the alternator and its mount bracket.

8. Remove the fuel injectors, fuel lines, fuel filter, and fuel pump. See the Fuel System Repair section.

52


600 SRM 705

CAUTION Make sure the cooling jets for the pistons are not damaged or moved out of alignment. If a cooling jet is hit, the alignment must be checked and the cooling jet replaced if necessary. 19. Remove the bearing caps and lower bearing halves from the connecting rods. Make an arrangement so that the parts for each connecting rod will be assembled again in their original positions. Carefully push the pistons into their bores a small amount so that the connecting rods are separated from the crankshaft. 20. Make sure that the main bearing caps are marked with their position number. Remove the main bearing caps, lower bearing halves, and the upper and lower thrust washers. Keep all the parts in an arrangement so that the parts can be installed in their original positions. 21. Lift the crankshaft from the cylinder block. Remove the upper bearing halves and put each of them with their lower bearing half.

Cylinder Block Assembly Repair a new bushing and align it in position in the cylinder block.

Assemble 1. Make sure all the parts are clean. 2. Remove the screw plugs from the cylinder block and clean the threads. Apply a sealant to the threads of the plugs and install them in the cylinder block. 3. Install the cooling jets for the pistons. See Piston Cooling Jets, Install. 4. Install the crankshaft and the rear oil seal assembly. See Crankshaft Assembly Repair section. 5. Install the flywheel housing and flywheel. See Flywheel section. 6. Install the tappets and the camshaft. Camshaft and Tappets, Install.

See

7. Install the relief valve, oil pump, suction line, and oil strainer.

22. Carefully remove the pistons and connecting rod assemblies from the engine.

8. Install the timing case and the timing gears. See Timing Case and Timing Gears Repair.

23. Remove the camshaft and tappets. See Camshaft and Tappets, Remove.

9. Install the cylinder head assembly. See Cylinder Head Assembly, Install.

24. Remove the cooling jets for the pistons.

10. Install the starter motor.

Inspect

11. Install the fuel pump.

1. Make sure all of the oil and coolant passages in the engine block are clean.

12. ENGINE YH. Install the turbocharger. See Turbocharger - Engine YH Repair, Install.

2. Check the engine block for cracks and damage.

13. Install the oil filter assembly and the oil sump. See Oil Sump, Install.

NOTE: The top face of the cylinder block for the six-cylinder engines cannot be machined because the cylinder liners and pistons will not fit. The top face of the cylinder block for the four-cylinder engines cannot be machined because the pistons and connecting rods are matched for each cylinder. 3. Check the front bushing for the camshaft for wear. If a new bushing must be installed, use a puller to remove the old bushing. Make sure the oil hole for the new bushing is away from the engine when it is installed. Make sure the oil hole is aligned with the passage in the cylinder block when it is installed. Use a press to install

14. Install the oil cooler. See Oil Cooler (Six-Cylinder Engines). 15. Install the fuel injectors, fuel lines, fuel filter, and fuel injection pump. See Fuel System Repair section. 16. Install the coolant pump, fan drive pulley, and fan. See Cooling System Repair section. 17. Install the alternator and mount brackets. 18. Install the drive belts and adjust the tension. See Drive Belts.

53


Cylinder Block Assembly Repair 19. Install the engine into the lift truck. 20. Remove the air from the fuel system before operating the engine. See Fuel System Air Removal.

CYLINDER BORE (FOUR-CYLINDER ENGINES) To ensure the best performance during the life of the engine, it is important that worn or damaged cylinder bores are corrected. The condition of a cylinder bore is decided by: • The amount and location of any polished areas. • Wear. • Damage to the cylinder wall.

600 SRM 705

CYLINDER LINER (SIX-CYLINDER ENGINES) Inspect For the best performance during the life of the engine, it is important that worn or damaged cylinder liners are replaced. If a change of liner becomes necessary, transition fit liners and partially finished liners are available. The condition of a cylinder liner is decided by: • The amount and location of any polished areas. • Wear. • Damage to the liner wall.

NOTE: It will not be necessary to correct the bore if: • The honed finish can still be clearly seen. • The engine performance and oil consumption is acceptable.

NOTE: It will not be necessary to replace the liners if: • The honed finish can still be clearly seen. • The engine performance and oil consumption is acceptable.

1. Inspect the surface of the cylinder bore for cracks and deep scratches.

Cylinder Liner Condition, Check

2. Check the bore wall for areas where the honed finish has been polished away. Check especially the area around the top of the liner bore just below the carbon ring. In this area, thrust from the top piston ring is at its maximum.

CAUTION Do not use "Flex-hone" to repair cylinder bores.

1. Inspect the liner surface for cracks and deep scratches. 2. Check the liner wall for areas where the honed finish has been polished away. See Figure 98 and Figure 99. Check especially the area around the top of the liner bore just below the carbon ring. In this area, thrust from the top piston ring is at its maximum.

An engine can have high oil consumption with very little wear of the cylinder bores, if the surfaces of the bores are glazed. Specialist training and equipment is needed to machine the finish of a cylinder bore. 3. If necessary, the cylinder bores can be bored and honed 0.50 mm (0.0195 in.) 1.00 mm (0.039 in.) oversize in diameter and oversize pistons installed. 4. To obtain oversize cylinder bores they must be bored and then diamond honed, silicon carbide base honed and silicon carbide plateau honed to the finished size to conform to the dimensions in the Engine Data section. Specialist training and equipment is needed to machine bore a cylinder bore. For further information contact your nearest Perkins distributor.

54

Figure 98. Cylinder Liner Wear Check


600 SRM 705

Cylinder Block Assembly Repair removed from the engine for each cylinder liner that must be removed. 2. Turn the crankshaft to give access to the cylinder liner and protect the bearing journal. 3. Install the removal and installation tool over the center of the cylinder liner as shown in Figure 100. Make sure that the base of the tool is not on top of the flange of the next cylinder liner.

Figure 99. Where to Measure Cylinder Liner for Wear Check

CAUTION Do not use "Flex-hone" to repair cylinder liners. Damaged or worn liners must be replaced. New piston rings must be fitted when the cylinder liner is replaced. An engine can have high oil consumption with very little wear of the liner bores, if the surfaces of the liners are glazed. Specialist training and equipment is needed to machine the finish of a partially finished liner. 3. Partially finished cylinder liners must be bored and then diamond honed, silicon carbide base honed and silicon carbide plateau honed to the finished size to conform to the dimensions in the Engine Data section. Specialist training and equipment is needed to machine a partially finished liner. For further information contact your nearest Perkins Distributor.

Remove Special Tools:

Removal and installation tool and adapters for cylinder liners Piston height tool Dial indicator gage

NOTE: If several cylinder liners must be removed, or a cylinder liner is very tight, a recommendation is to remove the crankshaft and use a press to remove the cylinder liners. The removal and installation tool can also be used to remove and install a cylinder liner if a press is not available or the crankshaft must stay in the engine. This procedure can be difficult. 1. Disassemble the engine as necessary. The piston, connecting rod, and piston cooling jet must be

1. 2. 3. 4.

THREADED ROD HANDLE BEARING SHELL REMOVAL ADAPTER

5. CYLINDER LINER 6. REMOVAL ADAPTER

Figure 100. Cylinder Liner Removal 4. Make sure that the lugs on the top of the removal adapter engage flats on the threaded rod. Install the nut and washer on the threaded rod and tighten the nut against the removal adapter. Turn the handle to remove the cylinder liner from the cylinder block. Use lubricating oil on the moving parts to reduce the friction.

55


Cylinder Block Assembly Repair

Service Liner, Install A service liner is a transition fit of ±0.03 mm (±0.001 in.) of the parent bore. Some replacement cylinder liners are easier to install than others because of the manufacturing tolerances. A cylinder liner installation tool can be used to install a tight cylinder liner. See Figure 101. A press can also be used to install a tight cylinder liner. DO NOT use a hammer to install a cylinder liner.

600 SRM 705 2. Install the cylinder liner in the bore in the cylinder block. Make sure the cylinder liner is vertical and aligned with the bore in the cylinder block. Use the cylinder installation tool as shown in Figure 101 to press the cylinder liner into the cylinder block to within 50 mm (2 in.) of the final position. 3. Apply Loctite 602® to the upper 25 mm (1 in.) of the outer surface of the cylinder liner. Apply Loctite 602® to the flange and the cylinder block where the flange of the cylinder liner will fit into the cylinder block. 4. Press the cylinder liner into its final position in the cylinder block. Remove the tool and clean the Loctite from the cylinder block. 5. Wait 15 minutes before the dimensions in the bore of the cylinder liner are checked. The Loctite will reach full strength after six hours. The inside diameter of a service liner, when fitted, should be 100.00 to 100.06 mm (3.937 to 3.939 in.). 6. Use the piston height tool and dial indicator gauge to check that the cylinder liner is in the correct position. See Figure 102. The flange of the cylinder liner must be between 0.10 mm (0.004 in.) above to 0.10 mm (0.004 in.) below the top surface of the cylinder block.

1. 2. 3. 4.

THREADED ROD HANDLE BEARING INSTALLATION ADAPTER

5. CYLINDER LINER 6. BASE, INSTALLATION ADAPTER

Figure 101. Cylinder Liner Installation 1. Make sure the parts are clean. Lubricate the bore in the cylinder block with engine oil. DO NOT lubricate the upper 50 mm (2 in.) of the bore in the cylinder block. Sealant will be applied to this area.

56

1. FLAME RING

2. FLANGE

Figure 102. Cylinder Liner Check 7. Install new piston rings on the piston. See Piston Rings, Install.


600 SRM 705 8. Install the piston and connecting rod assembly. See Piston and Connecting Rod Assembly, Install. 9. Install the cooling jets for the pistons. See Piston Cooling Jets, Install. 10. Install the cylinder head assembly. See Cylinder Head Assembly, Install. 11. Install the oil sump. See Oil Sump, Install. NOTE: Special training and equipment are often needed to correctly machine the finish on the inner surface of a cylinder liner. Contact a Perkins distributor for additional information. NOTE: If a new cylinder liner has been installed, the following recommendations are for the next five hours of engine operation: • Do not operate the engine at full load. • Do not operate the engine at high speed. • Do not permit the engine to operate at idle speed for long periods.

Partially Finished Liner, Install The partially finished liner is an interference fit in the parent bore. A special tool will be necessary to fit the liners, see Figure 101. If a liner is a very tight fit it may be necessary to use a hydraulic press.

CAUTION Do not hit a liner with a hammer. 1. Clean thoroughly the parent bore of the cylinder block. 2. Inspect the parent bore for damage and corrosion. Damaged cylinder blocks should be discarded. 3. Clean thoroughly the outer surface of the liner with an approved degreasing fluid.

Cylinder Block Assembly Repair 5. Install the cylinder liner into the parent bore; make sure that the liner is vertical. Use the cylinder installation tool as shown in Figure 101 to press the cylinder liner into the fully fitted position in the cylinder block. 6. Use the piston height tool and dial indicator gauge to check that the cylinder liner is in the correct position. See Figure 102. The flange of the cylinder liner must be between 0.10 mm (0.004 in.) above to 0.10 mm (0.004 in.) below the top surface of the cylinder block.

CAUTION Specialist training and equipment is needed to machine the finish of a partially finished liner. 7. Install new piston rings on the piston. See Piston Rings, Install. 8. Install the piston and connecting rod assembly. See Piston and Connecting Rod Assembly. 9. Install the cooling jets for the pistons. See Piston Cooling Jets, Install. 10. Install the cylinder head assembly. See Cylinder Head Assembly, Install. 11. Install the oil sump. See Oil Sump, Install. NOTE: Special training and equipment are often need to correctly machine the finish on the inner surface of a cylinder liner. Contact a Perkins Distributor for additional information. NOTE: If a new cylinder liner has been installed, the following recommendations are for the next five hours of engine operation: • Do not operate the engine at full load. • Do not operate the engine at high speed. • Do not permit the engine to operate at idle speed for long periods.

4. Apply a small amount of engine oil around the top of the parent bore to assist the entry of the liner.

57


Engine Timing

600 SRM 705

Engine Timing DESCRIPTION The correct timing is important for this engine to meet current emission standards. The correct timing of the fuel injection pump operates at a static timing very close to top dead center (TDC) on the compression stroke.

not be turned unless the spacer is in position under the lock screw. The latest fuel injection pumps have a hub which is mounted permanently onto the drive shaft. See Figure 105.

The timing gears are stamped with timing marks to make sure they are installed correctly. See Figure 103. The marked teeth of the crankshaft, the camshaft, and the fuel pump gears will each be engaged with the idler gear as shown in Figure 103 when the number one piston is at TDC on the compression stroke. The marks on the idler gear will not necessarily be aligned in this position because of the different speeds at which the gears rotate. The marks on the idler gear can be used to make sure the marked teeth of the other three gears are correctly aligned when the components of the timing system are being assembled. 1. SPACER

2. LOCK SCREW Figure 104. Lock Screw

NOTE: If a timing pin is not available, a 8 mm drill bit can be used. The manufacturer fits the hub to the pump to ensure very accurate timing. Engines that have this arrangement have the drive gear fastened to the hub instead of to the shaft of the pump. A pin is used to accurately time the pumps. See Figure 105.

1. CAMSHAFT GEAR 2. CRANKSHAFT GEAR 3. IDLER GEAR

4. GEAR FOR FUEL INJECTION PUMP 5. PTO GEAR

Figure 103. Timing Marks Alignment The fuel injection pump is timed at TDC on the compression stroke of number one cylinder. There is no timing mark on the rear of the timing case.

CAUTION A replacement fuel injection pump can have the pump shaft locked in position. See Figure 104. The drive shaft of the pump must

58

1. TIMING PIN 2. HUB

3. NUT

Figure 105. Injection Pump Timing Pin


600 SRM 705

Engine Timing

CAUTION Do not release the nut (Figure 105) from the fuel injection pump. See Figure 106. The nut is shown in position when the fuel pump is installed on the engine. The fuel pump hub is installed to the shaft in the factory to make sure that the fuel pump is in the correct position for timing. If the nut is removed and the hub moves, the hub will need to be accurately installed to the pump by use of specialist equipment before the pump can be installed on the engine.

1. Fasten a temporary pointer to the timing case cover with its tip near to the outer edge of the crankshaft pulley or damper. See Figure 107.

The fuel pump gear is fastened to the hub of the fuel pump by four setscrews. The setscrews pass through slots in the gear which allows for adjustment of the backlash. NOTE: On the latest engines with belt driven coolant pumps, four tamper proof fasteners retain the fuel pump gear. Special tools are needed to remove these fasteners; refer to your Perkins distributor. To remove the fuel injection pump from the engine it is only necessary to remove the four capscrews which secure the fuel pump gear to the hub. See Figure 106.

1. TEMPORARY POINTER

2. DIAL TEST INDICATOR

Figure 107. Procedure to Find TDC 2. Loosen the gland nuts that retain the fuel injectors. 3. Remove the rocker cover. 4. Rotate the crankshaft, clockwise from the front, until the push rod for the inlet valve of the rear cylinder just begins to push on the rocker arm. 5. Remove the spring clip and the spacer from the front of the rocker shaft. Release the capscrews of the front two pedestals of the rocker shaft and remove the front rocker lever; tighten the capscrews of the rocker shaft pedestals. 6. Remove the valve springs from the front valve with the valve spring compressor and the adapter, for pedestal studs, or the adapter for pedestal capscrews.

1. CAPSCREWS (4)

2. NUT

Figure 106. Injection Pump Hub

How to Set Number One Piston to TDC on Compression Stroke Special tools:

Valve spring compressor Stud adapter Setscrew adapter

CAUTION Fit a suitable collar near the top of the valve to hold the valve if the crankshaft is rotated too far. 7. Allow the valve to be held by the top of the piston. 8. Fasten a dial test indicator with its plunger in contact with the top of the valve stem and with a reading shown on the gage. See Figure 107. Rotate slowly the crankshaft, clockwise from the front, until the clockwise movement of the

59


Engine Timing dial gage pointer just stops. Make a mark on the crankshaft pulley or damper to align with the temporary pointer. Continue to rotate the crankshaft in the same direction until the gauge pointer just begins to move in a counterclockwise direction. Make another mark on the pulley or damper to align with the pointer. Mark the center point between the two marks on the pulley or damper and remove the other two marks. 9. Rotate the crankshaft approximately 45 counterclockwise from the front and then clockwise until the mark on the pulley or damper is aligned with the pointer. Number one piston is now at TDC on the compression stroke.

How to Set Number One Piston to TDC on Compression Stroke (Alternate Procedure) This alternative procedure can be used if the above procedure cannot be used. 1. Fasten a temporary pointer to the timing case cover so that its tip is near the outer edge of the crankshaft pulley as shown. See Figure 108.

600 SRM 705 Open the inlet valve enough to install a 5.0 mm (0.2 in.) spacer between the end of the valve stem and the rocker arm. 6. Slowly rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise until the piston touches the open valve. Carefully make a mark on the pulley that is aligned with the tip of the temporary pointer. 7. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise one or two degrees and remove the spacer between the valve stem and the rocker arm. Rotate the crankshaft 1/4 turn counterclockwise. Install the spacer again between the valve stem and the rocker arm. 8. Slowly rotate the crankshaft clockwise until the piston touches the open valve. Make a second mark on the pulley that is aligned with the temporary pointer. 9. Mark the center point between the two marks on the crankshaft pulley and remove the other two marks. Rotate the crankshaft 1/8 turn counterclockwise and remove the spacer between the valve stem and the rocker arm. 10. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise until the mark on the crankshaft pulley is aligned with the temporary pointer. Number one piston is now at TDC on the compression stroke.

Valve Timing, Check 1. Remove the valve cover. 2. Set the piston of number one cylinder to TDC on the compression stroke.

1. TEMPORARY POINTER Figure 108. Alternate Procedure to Find TDC 2. Loosen the gland nuts on the fuel injectors. 3. Remove the valve cover. 4. Rotate the crankshaft in a clockwise direction from the front until the push rod for the inlet valve in the rear cylinder just begins to push on the rocker arm. 5. Rotate the crankshaft a further 1/8 turn clockwise. Use a small lever between the rocker arm and the spring cap of number one inlet valve.

60

3. Fasten a temporary pointer to the timing case so that its tip is near the outer edge of the crankshaft pulley. See Figure 108. 4. Rotate the crankshaft, clockwise from the front, until the inlet valve of the rear cylinder is fully open. 5. Set the valve tip clearance of number one cylinder inlet valve to 1.5 mm (0.059 in.). 6. Rotate the crankshaft, clockwise from the front, until the push rod of number one cylinder inlet valve just tightens. In this position, check if the mark on the crankshaft pulley or damper is within Âą2.5 of the temporary pointer. Use the formula below to find the measurement which is equal to 2.5 on the pulley or damper.


600 SRM 705

Engine Timing 2. Remove the gear cover from the cover of the timing case. For gear driven coolant pumps: Remove the coolant pump.

CĂ—P 360 C = circumference of pulley or damper P = 2.5 degrees 7. If the timing is more than 2.5 out of position, the timing gears are probably not in correct mesh. NOTE: One tooth on the camshaft gear is equivalent to 23 mm (0.9 in.) at the circumference of a pulley of 203 mm (8 in.) diameter. If a large damper is fitted, one tooth on the camshaft gear is equivalent to 35 mm (1.4 in.) at the circumference of a damper of 310 mm (12.2 in.) diameter, or 37 mm (1.5 in.) at the circumference of a damper of 327 mm (12.9 in.) diameter.

NOTE: On the latest engines with belt driven coolant pumps, four tamper proof fasteners retain the fuel pump gear. Special tools and personnel with the correct training are necessary to remove these fasteners, refer to your nearest Perkins distributor. 3. Insert the timing pin through the hole in the fuel pump gear and the slot of the hub. See Figure 109. Push the pin fully into the hole in the body of the fuel pump. If the pin can be fully inserted then the pump timing is correct. There should be no resistance when the pin is inserted.

8. Rotate the crankshaft, clockwise from the front, until the inlet valve of the rear cylinder is fully open. Set the valve tip clearance of the inlet valve of number one cylinder to 0.20 mm (0.008 in.). 9. Install the rocker cover. 10. Remove the temporary pointer from the timing case and the timing mark from the pulley or damper.

Fuel Injection Pump Timing, Check Special tools:

Timing pin, Bosch fuel injection pumps Timing pin, Lucas and Stanadyne fuel injection pumps

CAUTION Do not remove the nut which retains the hub to the shaft of the fuel injection pump. See Figure 109. The hub is fitted permanently to the shaft. If the hub is moved, it will be necessary for a fuel injection pump specialist to correctly position the hub on the shaft with special test equipment available to Perkins distributors. 1. Set the piston of number one cylinder to TDC on the compression stroke operation. See How to Set Number One Piston to TDC on Compression Stroke or How to Set Number One Piston to TDC on Compression Stroke (Alternate Procedure).

1. TIMING PIN 2. NUT 3. TIMING HOLE IN BODY OF FUEL INJECTION PUMP

4. TIMING SLOT IN HUB 5. TIMING HOLE IN FUEL PUMP GEAR

Figure 109. Timing Gear for Fuel Injection Pump NOTE: The position for the timing pin for Lucas and Stanadyne fuel injection pumps is shown in Figure 109. The position for the timing pin for Bosch fuel injection pumps is shown in Figure 110. 4. Remove the timing pin. 5. If the timing pin cannot be pushed into the pump body, check that the engine is correctly set at TDC on the number one cylinder compression stroke. If the engine is set correctly at TDC on the number one cylinder compression stroke, but the pin does not fit in the hole, the fuel pump must be removed and set by a specialist.

61


Turbocharger - Engine YH Repair

600 SRM 705

6. Fit the gear cover to the cover of the timing case. For gear driven coolant pumps: Fit the coolant pump.

1. TIMING PIN Figure 110. Timing Gear for Bosch Fuel Injection Pump

Turbocharger - Engine YH Repair GENERAL The turbocharger is installed between the induction and exhaust manifolds. Exhaust gases turn the turbocharger and cause it to supply air to the induction manifold at greater than atmospheric pressure. The bearings in the turbocharger are lubricated with engine oil from the main oil passage in the engine block. The oil passes through the bearing housing of the turbocharger and returns to the oil sump.

6. Disconnect the oil drain line at the flange at the bottom of the bearing housing of the turbocharger. Remove the oil drain line and gasket. If necessary, release the hose clamps from the oil drain line and push the hose down.

Remove

7. Remove the nuts at the flange that holds the turbocharger to the exhaust manifold. Remove the turbocharger from the exhaust manifold. Remove the gasket. Cover the open ports in the manifolds, the turbocharger, and the pipes to be sure that dirt, etc., will not enter.

1. Clean the turbocharger. Remove the air cleaner hose at the compressor inlet.

8. Check the hoses, lines, and duct for cracks, wear, or damage.

2. Remove or disconnect the support bracket for the turbocharger. Remove the heat shield for the fuel pump if additional clearance is necessary.

Install

3. Remove the nuts and remove the exhaust elbow and its gasket from the turbocharger. 4. Release the hose clamps and push the hose from the compressor outlet up the elbow of the induction manifold. 5. Disconnect the oil supply line at the flange at the top of the bearing housing of the turbocharger. Remove the oil supply line and gasket.

62

1. Remove the covers from the pipes, manifolds, and turbocharger. 2. Check that the openings of the turbocharger and the manifolds are clean. Make sure that the compressor shaft in the turbocharger rotates freely. 3. Install a new gasket where the turbocharger connects to the exhaust manifold. See Figure 111. If the original nuts are to be used, make sure they are in good condition. Use a compound on the threads to prevent seizure of the nuts to the studs.


600 SRM 705

Turbocharger - Engine YH Repair from the oil drain line from the turbocharger. Connect the hose to the oil drain line. Connect the electric stop control.

Impeller and Compressor Housing, Clean NOTE: The compressor housing can sometimes be removed for cleaning without removing the turbocharger first. The compressor housing is held by a circlip and access to the circlip (large snap ring) is not always possible. 1. Clean the turbocharger. Remove the duct from the air filter where it connects to the inlet of the turbocharger. 1. GASKET Figure 111. Turbocharger Installation 4. Install the turbocharger. 44 N•m (32 lbf ft).

2. Release the hose clamps and push the hose from the compressor outlet up the elbow of the induction manifold.

Tighten the nuts to

5. Lubricate the bearing housing of the turbocharger with clean engine oil. Use a new gasket and install the oil supply line.

3. Make a reference mark on the compressor housing and the bearing housing as shown in Figure 112.

6. Use a new gasket and install the oil drain line. Tighten the capscrews, but do not connect the hose. 7. Install the exhaust elbow on the turbocharger. If the original nuts are to be used, make sure they are in good condition. Use a compound on the threads to prevent seizure of the nuts to the studs. New nuts have a coating on them to prevent seizure. Install a new gasket on the studs. Tighten the nuts to 22 N•m (16 lbf ft) (plated) or 25 N•m (18 lbf ft) (non-plated). 8. Install the support bracket for the turbocharger. Install the heat shield for the fuel pump if it was removed.

1. REFERENCE MARK

9. Slide the hose on the elbow for the induction manifold onto the outlet of the turbocharger. Install the hose clamps.

4. Remove the capscrews and remove the lock plates. If the compressor casting is fastened with a circlip, remove the circlip that holds the compressor housing. Carefully remove the compressor housing from the turbocharger as shown in Figure 112. If the compressor housing is a tight fit, use a soft hammer. If the circlip is not accessible, the turbocharger must be removed for this process.

10. Make sure that there is no restriction in the duct from the air filter to the turbocharger. Install the duct on the turbocharger and tighten the fastener. 11. Check that the bearings in the turbocharger have an oil flow. Disconnect the electric stop control so that the engine cannot start. Use the starter motor to operate the engine until engine oil flows

Figure 112. Compressor Housing Removal

63


Lubrication System Repair

600 SRM 705

Be careful that the blades of the impeller are not damaged. If the impeller is damaged, the turbocharger must be replaced or repaired by a special repair service.

7. Carefully push the impeller toward the bearing housing and turn the impeller with your hand. Check that the impeller turns freely and there is no noise that can indicate wear or damage. If there is a fault, the turbocharger must be replaced or repaired by a special repair service.

5. Put the compressor housing in a container with a solvent that is not caustic. When the dirt has loosened, use a hard brush or a soft scraper to clean the compressor housing. Use compressed air at low pressure to dry the compressor housing.

8. Install the compressor housing on the turbocharger. Make sure the reference marks are aligned. Install the circlip loosely on the bearing housing. Make sure that the face of the circlip with the bevel is toward the exhaust end of the turbocharger. Install the circlip in the groove.

6. Clean the impeller with a soft brush.

9. Install the ducts on the inlet and outlet of the compressor housing and tighten the clamps.

CAUTION

Lubrication System Repair GENERAL The oil pump is turned by a gear on the crankshaft through an idler gear. Engine oil from the sump passes through a strainer and pipe to the suction side of the pump. A relief valve on the outlet of the oil pump controls the maximum oil pressure in the lubrication system. The engine oil flows from the oil pump through an oil cooler fastened on the side of the cylinder block (four-cylinder engines), then to the oil filter. The engine oil flows from the oil pump through the oil filter to the oil cooler (six-cylinder engines). The oil cooler has a bypass valve that controls the oil pressure in the oil cooler and permits some cold oil to flow directly to the oil filter. The normal oil flow is through the oil filter to the main oil passage in the cylinder block.

through the bearings of the turbocharger and returns to the oil sump. Turbocharged engines have a cooling jet connected to the main oil passage for each cylinder. The cooling jets spray engine oil on the bottoms of the pistons for additional cooling. Engine type AR has only one cooling jet installed to the number one cylinder position.

OIL FILTER, REPLACE 1. Change the oil filter when the engine oil is changed. Put a drain pan under the filter. Remove the filter cartridge. Make sure the adapter stays in the filter head as shown in Figure 113. Discard the filter cartridge.

Engine oil from the main oil passage flows to the main bearings of the crankshaft and through the passages in the crankshaft to the rod bearings. The pistons and cylinder bores are lubricated by splash and oil mist. Engine oil also flows from the main bearings to the journals of the camshaft. Some engine oil goes through the center camshaft bearing to the rocker arm assembly. The hub of the idler gear has an oil passage to the main oil passage and the timing gears are splash lubricated. An outlet from the main oil passage supplies oil to the bearings of the turbocharger. The engine flows

64

1. ADAPTER Figure 113. Oil Filter


600 SRM 705 2. Clean the filter head. 3. Add some clean engine oil to the new filter cartridge. Apply clean engine oil to the gasket. 4. Install the new filter cartridge and tighten by hand only. 5. When new oil has been added and the engine can be operated, start the engine. Check the area around the filter for leaks.

Lubrication System Repair 7. Fit the new gasket to the filter head, the gasket is installed dry. 8. Apply Loctite to the first three threads of the capscrews and tighten the capscrews. 9. Install the oil cooler to the filter head, if used. 10. Install the flexible pipes to the filter head, if used.

Remove and Install

11. If the oil cooler is integral with the cylinder block, fit a new gasket to the flange of the oil cooler pipes. Fit the flange to the filter head and tighten the capscrews.

1. Put a drain pan under the filter head.

12. Install a new filter cartridge.

2. Remove the filter cartridge.

OIL SUMP

3. Remove the canister type oil cooler from the filter head, if one is used.

Remove

4. Remove the flexible pipes from the filter head, if they are used.

1. Drain the engine oil. Remove the capscrews and the two nuts that fasten the oil sump to the engine block. Lower the oil sump. Remove the gasket.

FILTER HEAD

5. Remove the capscrews and remove the filter head from the cylinder block. See Figure 114. Discard the gasket.

2. Clean the oil sump with mineral oil solvent. 3. If the suction line and oil strainer must be removed, see Figure 115. Remove the capscrew that holds the bracket to the main bearing cap. Remove the two capscrews from the flange of the suction line and remove the suction line and screen. Clean the faces of both flanges.

1. ADAPTER 2. GASKET 3. FILTER HEAD Figure 114. Filter Head Replacement 6. Clean the gasket face of the filter head and the cylinder block. NOTE: Some engines have an adapter between the cylinder block and the filter head. If an adapter is used, two gaskets are used.

1. SUPPORT BRACKET, MAIN BEARING CAP 2. CAPSCREWS, FLANGE, SUCTION PIPE Figure 115. Oil Sump Screen Removal

65


Lubrication System Repair

Install 1. If the oil strainer and suction line was removed, loosely assemble the bracket of the suction line to the main bearing cap. Install a new gasket and fasten the flanges of the suction line to the oil pump. Make sure that the suction line is aligned correctly and tighten the capscrew that holds the bracket to the main bearing cap.

600 SRM 705 2. Remove the outer rotor and clean all of the parts. Check for damage and wear.

2. Use a new gasket and install the oil sump. Use capscrews on each side of the oil sump to align and hold the gasket in position during assembly. Install the remainder of the capscrews and the two nuts. Tighten all of the fasteners to 22 N•m (16 lbf ft). 3. Install the drain plug in the oil sump. Use a new O-ring and tighten to 34 N•m (25 lbf ft).

OIL PUMP

1. WASHER 2. IDLER GEAR

3. BUSHING

Figure 116. Idler Gear, Oil Pump Removal

Remove 1. Drain the engine oil and remove the oil sump. Remove the oil strainer and suction line. See Oil Sump, Remove. 2. Remove the relief valve and connection line. 3. The oil pump is fastened to the number one main bearing cap. Access to the capscrews on the main bearing can be difficult when the timing case is on the engine. A special wrench can be required to apply the correct torque to the capscrews for removal and installation. If a wrench is not available to install the capscrews on the main bearing cap, the timing case must be removed. See Timing Case, Remove. 4. Remove the snap ring that holds the idler gear to the oil pump. Remove the washer and the idler gear. See Figure 116. 5. Remove the capscrews and remove the oil pump. See Figure 117.

Inspect If the oil pump is worn so that the performance is decreased, the oil pump must be replaced. 1. Remove the capscrews and remove the cover of the oil pump.

66

Figure 117. Oil Pump Removal 3. Install the outer rotor and check the clearances. See Figure 118. See the Engine Specifications for the wear tolerances. 4. Check the clearances of the inner rotor. See Figure 119. See the Engine Specifications for the wear tolerances. 5. Check end clearance and axial movement of the rotor. Use a spacer gauge and a straightedge. See Figure 120. See the Engine Specifications for the wear tolerances.


600 SRM 705

Lubrication System Repair

Install 1. Lubricate the internal parts of the oil pump with engine oil before installation. Install the oil pump on the main bearing cap and tighten the capscrews to 22 N•m (16 lbf ft). 2. Make sure the idler gear and bushing are in good condition. The bushing is available as a separate part. Install the idler gear, washer, and snap ring. See Figure 116. Check the gear clearance. See Figure 121. The minimum clearance is 0.0076 mm (0.003 in.) between the oil pump gear and the idler gear. Figure 118. Outer Rotor Clearance Check

Figure 121. Clearances Check Between Oil Pump Gear and Idler Gear Figure 119. Inner Rotor Clearances Check

3. If the main bearing cap was removed, lubricate the bearing with engine oil and install the bearing cap. Tighten the capscrews to 265 N•m (195 lbf ft). Check the gear clearance. See Figure 121. The minimum clearance is 0.0076 mm (0.0003 in.) between the crankshaft gear and the idler gear. 4. If the timing case was removed, install the timing case. See Timing Case and Timing Gears Repair. 5. Install the relief valve and the connection line. See Relief Valve, Install. 6. Install the oil sump. See Oil Sump, Install.

RELIEF VALVE Figure 120. Rotor End Clearances Check 6. When the parts are clean and inspected, install the cover to the oil pump. Tighten the capscrews to 28 N•m (21 lbf ft).

Remove 1. Drain the engine oil. Remove the oil sump. See Oil Sump, Remove.

67


Lubrication System Repair

600 SRM 705

2. ENGINE AR. Remove the capscrew and carefully pull the relief valve from the engine block. See Figure 122. Pull the relief valve from the connection line. Pull the connection line from the oil pump.

Disassemble CAUTION The relief valve has a compressed spring. Do not permit the spring to be released so that it causes an injury. NOTE: The relief valve can be disassembled without removing it from the engine. 1. Apply pressure against the end plate of the spring assembly. See Figure 124. Remove the snap ring. Carefully release the end plate and release the pressure on the compressed spring. Remove the end plate, spring, and the plunger.

1. THIMBLE, RELIEF VALVE 2. CONNECTION PIPE WITH O-RING Figure 122. Engine AR Relief Valve Removal ENGINES YG and YH. See Figure 123. Remove the capscrews that fasten the cross flow pipe to the relief valve. Remove the flange. Remove the two capscrews that fasten the relief valve to the cylinder block and remove the relief valve. 1. BODY, RELIEF VALVE 2. PLUNGER

3. SPRING 4. END PLATE 5. SNAP RING

Figure 124. Relief Valve Assembly

Inspect 1. Clean the parts. Check the parts for wear and damage. Check the load necessary to compress the spring to its fitted length, see Engine Specifications. 1. CAPSCREW (2)

2. CAPSCREW (2)

Figure 123. Engines YG and YH Relief Valve Removal

2. Check that the seat of the plunger is not damaged and that the plunger moves easily in its bore.

Assemble 1. Lubricate the parts with engine oil during assembly. Install the plunger in the bore as shown in Figure 124. Install the spring and end cap. Compress the spring and end cap into the bore so that the snap ring can be installed. Install the snap ring.

68


600 SRM 705

Lubrication System Repair

Install 1. Engine AR. Install new O-rings on the connection line. Lubricate the O-rings with engine oil and push the connection line into position in the oil pump.

roll pin is hardened metal. If the following procedure does not remove the roll pin, see Remove (Alternative).

2. Push the relief valve onto the connection line and install the relief valve into position on the engine block. Install and tighten the capscrew. 3. Engines YG and YH. Be sure the faces of the cross flow pipe and the relief valve are clean. Install the relief valve and new gasket to the cylinder block. Install the four capscrews and tighten the flange capscrews and then the valve capscrews. 4. Install the oil sump. See Oil Sump, Install.

IDLER GEAR SHAFT, REPLACE The shaft for the idler gear in the oil pump is installed in the front main bearing cap. See Figure 125. If this idler gear shaft must be replaced, use the procedures in the following paragraphs. The idler gear shaft has an oil passage for lubrication of the bushing for the idler gear. Engine oil from the front main bearing passes through a channel in the body of the oil pump and then through the oil passage to the idler gear.

1. ROLL PIN Figure 126. Idler Gear Shaft Roll Pin 1. Carefully use an M5 × 0.8 mm taper tap to put a chamfer in the end of the roll pin. 2. Carefully use an M5 × 0.8 mm plug tap to cut a minimum three threads in the end of the roll pin. If the tap breaks, see Remove (Alternative). 3. Obtain the following parts to make a puller: • M5 × 0.8 mm capscrew that has a minimum thread length of 15 mm. • M5 × 0.8 mm nut. • Spacer with a 15.88 mm or 19.05 mm outside diameter and a minimum internal diameter of 8.73 mm. The length of the spacer must be 9.5 mm. 4. Install the nut fully on the capscrew. Hold the spacer on the capscrew and engage the threads of the roll pin with the capscrew. 5. Center the spacer over the roll pin and tighten the nut against the spacer. Continue to tighten the nut to pull the roll pin from the front main bearing cap. 6. Press the idler gear shaft from the front main bearing cap.

1. OIL PASSAGE 2. IDLER GEAR SHAFT

3. CHANNEL IN OIL PUMP

Figure 125. Idler Gear Shaft

Remove (Alternative) 1. Make a drill guide to the dimensions shown in Figure 127.

Remove The idler gear shaft is fastened in the front main bearing cap with a roll pin. See Figure 126. This

69


Lubrication System Repair

600 SRM 705 5. Press the idler gear shaft from the front main bearing cap.

Install 1. Make sure the hole in the main bearing cap for the idler gear shaft is clean and any rough edges are removed.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

8.3 mm (0.327 in.) 20.0 mm (0.787 in.) 1.0 mm (0.039 in.) 16.1 to 16.4 mm (0.634 to 0.646 in.) 6.9 × 22 mm (0.272 × 0.866 in.) DIAMETER HOLE FOR 5/16-24 UNF × 18 MM THREAD 36.0 mm (1.42 in.) 6.5 to 6.6 mm (0.256 to 0.260 in.) DIAMETER HOLE, COUNTERSUNK 9.0 MM × 900 INCLUDED 31.75 mm (1.250 in.) 15.9 mm (0.626 in.)

2. Use a press to install the idler gear shaft into the main bearing cap. Make sure that the oil passage in the idler gear shaft is correctly oriented. See Figure 129. Apply Loctite 603 to the chamfer of the idler gear shaft where it joins the main bearing cap.

Figure 127. Drill Guide Dimensions 2. Install the drill guide on the front main bearing cap as shown in Figure 128. Make sure that the countersink in the guide faces away from the roll pin. Make sure the edge of the drill guide is aligned with the front edge of the bearing cap.

1. CHAMFER 2. OIL PASSAGE

3. IDLER GEAR SHAFT

Figure 129. Idler Gear Shaft Installation 3. Make sure the idler gear shaft is pressed fully into the main bearing cap. Use the original hole for the roll pin as a drill guide. Drill a 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) diameter hole into the idler gear shaft 9.5 mm (0.37 in.) deep. 4. Install a new roll pin into the main bearing cap and the idler gear shaft. 1. DRILL GUIDE 2. ROLL PIN

3. 5/16 UNF CAPSCREW 4. FLAT WASHER

Figure 128. Drill Guide Installation 3. Drill a 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) diameter hole in the bearing cap. Drill the hole 47.0 mm (1.85 in.) into the bearing cap. 4. Use a punch to drive the roll pin from its position.

70

Install (Alternative) Some engines do not have a roll pin installed to fasten the idler gear shaft in position. If the idler gear shaft must be replaced, a roll pin must be installed to hold the new idler gear shaft in position. This procedure describes how to install a new roll pin. 1. Make sure the hole in the main bearing cap for the idler gear shaft is clean and any rough edges are removed.


600 SRM 705

Fuel System Repair

2. Use a press to install the idler gear shaft into the main bearing cap. Make sure that the oil passage in the idler gear shaft is correctly oriented. See Figure 129. Apply Loctite 603 to the chamfer of the idler gear shaft where it joins the main bearing cap. 3. Make a drill guide as described in Remove (Alternative). 4. Install the drill guide on the front bearing cap as shown in Figure 130.

5. Use the drill guide and drill a 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) diameter hole into the idler gear shaft 25.4 mm (1.00 in.) deep. Remove the drill and the drill guide. 6. Install a roll pin into the bearing cap and the idler gear shaft.

Install (Alternative for Four-Cylinder Engines Only) Some four-cylinder engines do not have a roll pin installed to fasten the idler gear shaft in position. This procedure describes how to install a new idler gear shaft. 1. Make sure the hole in the main bearing cap for the idler gear shaft is clean and any rough edges are removed.

1. DRILL GUIDE 2. FLAT WASHER

3. 5/16 UNF CAPSCREW

2. Use a press to install the idler gear shaft into the main bearing cap. Make sure that the oil passage in the idler gear shaft is correctly oriented. See Figure 129. Apply Loctite 603 to the chamfer of the idler gear shaft where it joins the main bearing cap. Remove any excess Loctite and make sure the oil passage is clean.

Figure 130. Idler Gear Shaft Roll Pin

Fuel System Repair DESCRIPTION NOTE: Special tools and training are needed to repair the Lucas fuel injection pumps. They are normally sent to an authorized repair station if repairs are necessary. Fuel injectors also require special equipment and training for repair. Most users have a special repair service do this work. A Lucas DP200 series fuel injection pump is used on these engines. The pump timing and the speed adjustment cannot be changed. A mechanical governor controls the maximum engine speed. A lock screw holds the shaft of the pump from turning when it is not installed on the engine. See Figure 131. This lock screw must be released when the fuel injection pump is installed on the engine.

1. LOCK SCREW 2. BOOST CONTROL (TURBOCHARGED ENGINES ONLY)

3. STOP SOLENOID 4. COLD START DEVICE

Figure 131. Lucas Fuel Injection Pump

71


Fuel System Repair An electrically operated cold start device retards the timing for normal operation. A stop solenoid stops the operation of the engine. A vent in the pump permits an engine to start if there is a small amount of air in the fuel system. If the fuel system has a large amount of air, the air must be removed as described in Fuel System Air Removal. A boost control is added to the fuel injection pump for turbocharged engines. See Figure 131. The boost control is a device that is affected by the pressure from the turbocharger and reduces the maximum fuel flow at lower engine speeds. When the engine speed is lower, there is a reduced air supply to the cylinders. The fuel injectors receive fuel under high pressure from the fuel injection pump. The fuel injectors are set by the manufacturer, but must be checked according to the maintenance schedules. See Periodic Maintenance. The operation pressure of a fuel injector can be changed by adding or removing shims above the spring in the fuel injector.

600 SRM 705 Figure 133. The drive shaft of the pump must not be turned unless the spacer is in position under the lock screw. Before the crankshaft is turned or the pump is installed, put the spacer into position under the locking screw to make sure that the pump drive shaft is released. 1. Disconnect the battery. Remove the coolant pump as described in Coolant Pump, Remove. 2. Set the number one piston to TDC on the compression stroke. See How to Set Number One Piston to TDC on Compression Stroke. 3. Insert the timing pin through the hole in the fuel pump gear and the slot of the hub. See Figure 132. Push the pin fully into the hole in the body of the fuel pump. If the pin can be fully inserted, then the pump timing is correct. There should be no resistance when the pin is inserted.

The fuel pump has a diaphragm that is actuated by a lever. The lever is actuated by a lobe on the camshaft. The fuel pump has a small lever that can be operated with your hand to "prime" the fuel pump. NOTE: Good operation of the fuel injection system requires clean fuel and no dirt can be permitted in the system. Always clean carefully around a connection before it is disconnected. Install covers on open ports during maintenance. When the fuel system is opened for maintenance, the air must be removed from the fuel system before the engine is operated.

FUEL INJECTION PUMP Remove Special tools:

Timing pin PD.246 for Lucas fuel injection pumps

CAUTION Do not release the nut on the shaft of the fuel injection pump. See Figure 132. If this nut is removed, the fuel injection pump must be returned to an authorized service center. Setting the correct timing requires special equipment. A replacement fuel injection pump can have the pump shaft locked in position. See

72

1. TIMING PIN 2. NUT 3. TIMING HOLE IN BODY OF FUEL INJECTION PUMP

4. TIMING SLOT IN HUB 5. GEAR FOR FUEL INJECTION PUMP 6. CAPSCREW

Figure 132. Timing Components 4. Disconnect all of the fuel lines from the fuel injection pump. Use a second wrench to prevent movement of the union nuts when the fuel lines are disconnected. Disconnect the engine stop control. Disconnect the throttle cable. Disconnect the cold start device. 5. Remove the gear for the fuel injection pump as described in Fuel Injection Pump Gear.


600 SRM 705

Fuel System Repair 3. Install the fuel injection pump on the three studs and install the nuts. Tighten the nuts to 28 N•m (21 lbf ft). NOTE: The fuel pump gear will only fit in one position. The gear is fitted with the letters C and M at the front. 4. Install the fuel pump gear onto the hub of the fuel pump. See Figure 132. The fasteners for the fuel pump gear should be in the center of the slots to allow for the removal of the backlash. Tighten the capscrews finger tight.

1. SPACER

2. LOCK SCREW Figure 133. Lock Screw

6. Remove the nuts that fasten the flange of the fuel injection pump to the timing case. See Figure 134.

1. GASKET

5. Insert the timing pin through the hole of the fuel pump gear and the slot of the hub until it can be pushed fully into the hole in the body of the fuel pump. See Figure 132. If the timing pin cannot be pushed into the pump body, check that the engine is correctly set at TDC on the number one cylinder. 6. Carefully turn the gear for the injection pump with your hand to remove the clearance between the gear and the idler gear. See Figure 135. Do not rotate the crankshaft or the shaft of the fuel injection pump. Tighten the capscrews for the gear for the fuel injection pump to 28 N•m (21 lbf ft).

2. O-RING

Figure 134. Fuel Injection Pump Mount

Install 1. The engine must be set for the number one piston to TDC on the compression stroke. If the crankshaft needs to be rotated, the pump must be installed temporarily, or the loose gear could damage the timing case.

1. REMOVE GEAR CLEARANCE WITH YOUR HAND

2. Install a new gasket and new O-ring as shown in Figure 134. Lubricate the O-ring with a thin coat of engine oil.

7. Remove the timing pin.

Figure 135. Gear for Fuel Injection Pump Installation

8. Install the coolant pump. See Coolant Pump, Install.

73


Fuel System Repair 9. Connect the fuel lines. Use a second wrench to prevent movement of the union nuts when the fuel lines are connected. Do not tighten the union nuts greater than 22 N•m (16 lbf ft). If there is a leak, make sure the fuel line is correctly aligned. A union nut that is too tight can cause a restriction in the fuel line. 10. Connect the engine stop control and the control rod for the fuel injection pump. 11. Remove the air from the fuel system. See Fuel System Air Removal. 12. When the engine can be operated, do Check and Adjust.

Check and Adjust 1. Operate the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature and check the idle speed. The idle speed can be adjusted with the idle adjustment screw shown in Figure 136.

600 SRM 705 code for the fuel injection pump is also found on a data plate fastened to the side of the pump. A typical setting code can be 2643M000AK/1/2750 where 2750 is the correct governed speed. The governed speed on an original fuel injection pump is set and sealed by the manufacturer. A replacement fuel injection pump must have the governed speed correctly set and the adjustment screw sealed. A setting that has been changed from the correct setting can affect the engine warranty.

FUEL SYSTEM AIR REMOVAL Small amounts of air will be removed from the fuel injection pump automatically when the engine is in operation. If the fuel lines have been disconnected, the fuel filter has been replaced, or the engine has run out of fuel, air must be removed from the fuel system.

CAUTION Damage to the fuel injection pump, starter motor, and battery can occur if the starter motor is used to remove air from an empty fuel system. 1. If the fuel system or a component in the fuel system has been drained, use the following steps to remove air from the fuel system. a. Loosen the vent plug on top of the filter. See Figure 137.

1. GOVERNOR ADJUSTMENT SCREW 2. IDLE ADJUSTMENT SCREW Figure 136. Adjustment Screws NOTE: The idle speed and the governed speed can be different than the Engine Data when these engines are installed in some models of lift trucks. See the Periodic Maintenance for the specifications that apply to a lift truck model. 2. Check the governed speed. The maximum engine speed can be adjusted with governor adjustment screw shown in Figure 136. See the Engine Data for the correct governed speed. The setting

74

1. VENT PLUG Figure 137. Loosen Vent Plug


600 SRM 705 b. Operate the priming lever on the fuel pump until fuel, without air bubbles, comes from the loosened connection bolt. If the lobe on the camshaft has moved the internal lever of the fuel pump to the highest point of its lift, the priming lever will not operate. The crankshaft must be rotated one revolution to move the lobe on the camshaft. See Figure 138.

Fuel System Repair d. Loosen the connections at two of the inlets to the fuel injectors. Operate the engine with the starter motor until fuel, without air bubbles, comes from the loosened connections. Then tighten the connection to 22 N•m (16 lbf ft). See Figure 140.

1. CONNECTION Figure 140. Loosen Another Connection on Inlet to Cold Start Aid Figure 138. Rotate Crankshaft c. Loosen the connection on the inlet to the cold start aid. Operate the priming lever on the fuel pump until fuel, without air bubbles, comes from the loosened connection. Then tighten the connection. See Figure 139.

2. The engine is now ready to start. If there is still a small amount of air in the fuel system, the engine sometimes runs correctly for a short time and then stops. If a second attempt to start the engine causes the engine to run correctly for a short time and then stop, or runs roughly, check for air in the fuel system. Make sure you check for leaks in the low pressure (suction) part of the fuel system. 3. After the engine starts, operate the engine at idle speed for five minutes to make sure all of the air is removed from the fuel system.

FUEL FILTER, REPLACE NOTE: Four-cylinder engines normally have a water separator and a fuel filter. Six-cylinder engines normally have two fuel filters.

1. CONNECTION Figure 139. Loosen One Connection on Inlet to Cold Start Aid

75


Fuel System Repair

600 SRM 705

Canister Type CAUTION Disposal of diesel fuel and filter must meet local environmental regulations.

CAUTION It is important that only the genuine Perkins parts are used. The use of a wrong canister or element can damage the fuel injection pump. Do not allow dirt to enter the fuel system. Before a connection is disconnected, clean thoroughly the area around the connection. After a component has been disconnected, fit a suitable cover to all open connections. 1. Thoroughly clean the outside surfaces of the fuel filter assembly. 2. Loosen the drain device at the bottom of the filter and allow the water/fuel to drain into a suitable container. See Figure 141.

1. ADAPTER

2. TOP SEALS

Figure 142. Canister Type Fuel Filter 5. Lubricate lightly the top seals of the new canister with clean fuel. See Figure 142. Fit the new canister to the filter head and tighten, by hand only. 6. Remove the air from the fuel filter system. See Fuel System Air Removal.

Quick Release Canister Type CAUTION Disposal of diesel fuel and filter must meet local environmental regulations.

CAUTION It is important that only the genuine Perkins parts are used. The use of a wrong canister or element can damage the fuel injection pump. 1. DRAIN DEVICE Figure 141. Water/Fuel Drain 3. Use a strap wrench or similar tool to loosen the filter canister and remove the canister. 4. Make sure that the threaded adapter is secure in the filter head and that the inside of the head is clean. See Figure 142.

76

Do not allow dirt to enter the fuel system. Before a connection is disconnected, clean thoroughly the area around the connection. After a component has been disconnected, fit a suitable cover to all open connections. 1. Thoroughly clean the outside surfaces of the filter assembly. NOTE: If the filter does not have a drain device, release the cap on top of the filter head. See Figure 143. Remove the nylon insert to lower the level of the fuel in the filter canister. This will prevent fuel spill when the gland ring is released.


600 SRM 705

Fuel System Repair

2. Loosen the drain devices if a prefilter is fitted, at the bottom of the canister or sediment bowl and allow the water or fuel to drain into a suitable container. See Figure 143.

9. Support the canister(s), fit the gland ring, and rotate it to the right to fasten the canister to the filter head. 10. If it was removed, fit the nylon insert used to lower the level of the fuel in the filter canister and fasten the cap. 11. Remove the air from the fuel system. See Fuel System Air Removal.

FUEL INJECTORS The engine will run roughly if a fuel injector has a defect. To find which fuel injector has a defect, operate the engine at approximately 1000 rpm. Loosen and tighten the connection to the inlet of each fuel injector in a sequence. When the connection to the fuel injector with the malfunction is loosened, there will not be a change in the engine speed. 1. CANISTER REMOVAL 2. CAP 3. CANISTER INSTALLATION 4. FUEL FILTER

5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

SEDIMENT BOWL DRAIN DEVICE GLAND RING DRAIN DEVICE FUEL FILTER

Figure 143. Quick Release Canister Type Fuel Filter 3. Support the filter canister(s) and rotate the gland ring to the left and remove the gland ring.

Remove WARNING Do not put your hands on fuel lines under pressure. Diesel fuel can be injected into your body by the hydraulic pressure.

CAUTION

4. Remove the canister(s) from the filter head by a direct pull downwards, and discard the old canister.

Do not allow dirt to enter the fuel system. Before a connection is disconnected, clean thoroughly the area around the connection. After a component has been disconnected, cover all open connections.

5. If a sediment bowl is installed, remove the bowl and thoroughly clean the cover of the bowl.

1. Disconnect the fuel return line from the fuel injector.

6. Check the two O-ring seals of the sediment bowl and fit the bowl for damage and replace them if necessary.

2. Disconnect the high pressure line at the inlet to the fuel injector. Disconnect the other end of the high pressure line from the fuel injection pump. Hold the outlet fitting from the fuel injection pump with a wrench so that it does not turn while the connection is loosened for the fuel line. Do not bend the fuel line. See Figure 144. Install a plastic cap to cover the inlet connection and the injector.

7. Clean the threads of the sediment bowl and fit the bowl to the canister and tighten by hand only.

CAUTION It is important to ensure that the main and prefilters are fitted in the correct positions. 8. Ensure the filter head is clean. Push the new canister(s) fully into the filter head.

3. Loosen the nut and remove the fuel injector. See Figure 144. Remove the seat washer from the cylinder head.

77


Fuel System Repair

600 SRM 705 2. Make sure the wire clip is correctly installed. Put a 2 mm (0.08 in.) bead of thread sealant onto the first two threads of the nut. The thread sealant is either Perkins POWERPART Atomizer Thread Sealant or Hylomar Advance Formulation, Part No. 21825474. The bead should extend approximately 6 mm (0.24 in.) around each of the threads. Make sure there is no thread sealant on the body of the fuel injector. 3. Use a new seat washer. Make sure the original seat washer was removed from the cylinder head or the fuel injector will not fit correctly. 4. Install the fuel injector into the cylinder head. Make sure the location ball fits into the groove.

CAUTION Do not move the nut after it has been tightened. The seal will be broken and there can be leaks past the seat of the fuel injector. 5. Tighten the nut smoothly to 40 N•m (30 lbf ft). As the nut is tightened, the fuel injector will rotate a small amount clockwise as the location ball moves in its slot. Remove any excess thread sealant.

CAUTION 1. PLASTIC CAP 2. FUEL RETURN CONNECTION 3. NUT

4. 5. 6. 7.

WIRE CLIP GROOVE SEAT WASHER LOCATION BALL

Figure 144. Fuel Injector

Inspect The inspection and repair of fuel injectors require special tools and training. A special repair service normally makes repairs on injectors. Fuel injectors that have a malfunction will cause black smoke in the exhaust, a decrease in engine power, and an increase in engine noise.

Install 1. Make sure the threads of the nut and the threads in the cylinder head are clean. See Figure 144.

CAUTION Do not allow any thread sealant below the threads of the nut.

78

Do not tighten the union nuts of the high pressure pipes more than the recommended torque tension. If there is a leakage from the union nut, make sure that the pipe is correctly aligned with the fuel injector inlet. Do not tighten the fuel injector union nut more, as this can cause a restriction at the end of the pipe. This can affect the fuel delivery. 6. Remove the plastic cap and install the high pressure fuel line. Tighten the union nuts to 22 N•m (16 lbf ft). 7. Use new seal washers and install the fuel return line to the connection. Tighten the bolt on the banjo fitting to 9.5 N•m (84 lbf in). 8. If the fuel system is empty, remove the air from the fuel system. See Fuel System Air Removal. 9. When the engine can be operated, check for fuel leaks.


600 SRM 705

FUEL PUMP Remove 1. If a heat shield has been installed, remove the heat shield for the fuel pump. Disconnect the fuel lines to the fuel pump. 2. Remove the capscrews. Remove the fuel pump. If the lobe on the camshaft has moved the internal lever of the fuel pump to the highest point of its lift, the fuel pump can be difficult to remove. The crankshaft must be rotated one revolution to move the lobe on the camshaft.

Disassemble 1. Clean the outside surfaces of the fuel pump. Make a mark across the flanges of the two halves of the fuel pump to make sure that it is assembled again in the same positions. 2. Remove the cover and the screen. See Figure 145. Remove the screws and separate the two halves of the fuel pump.

Fuel System Repair 6. Remove the link arm. Hold the rocker lever in a vise and hit the body of the fuel pump with a soft hammer to release the two retainers. Be careful that the joint face of the fuel pump body is not damaged. Remove the rocker lever, pin, link arm, and the return spring. Check the components for wear or damage.

Assemble 1. Thoroughly clean the valve housings. Install new seat washers. See Figure 146. Push new valves into position. The valves are the same, but they are installed in the opposite direction from each other. Make sure that the valves are installed in the correct position. When the valves are correctly installed, use a punch on the edge of the valve housings to hold the valves in position. Use the punch in six places around each valve to hold the valve in position. 2. Install the rocker lever, pin, and the link arm assembly into position in the body of the fuel pump. Install the return spring. Make sure that the ends of the return spring are in their correct positions. 3. Use a small hammer and a drift or a punch to install the retainers in their grooves in the body of the fuel pump until they fasten the pin. Use a punch to close the ends of the grooves to fasten the retainers in position. 4. Install the diaphragm spring into its position under the diaphragm. Put the spring seat washer and the new stem seal into position on the pull rod. Make sure that the small diameter at the top of the stem seal is on the round part of the pull rod.

Figure 145. Fuel Pump Removal and Installation 3. Turn the diaphragm assembly 90 to release the pull rod from the link arm and remove the diaphragm assembly. 4. Remove the stem seal, the spring seat washer, and the spring from the pull rod. The diaphragm and pull rod assembly must be replaced as a unit.

5. Put the diaphragm assembly into position over the lower half of the body of the fuel pump. Align the blade of the pull rod with the slot in the link arm. Press down lightly on the diaphragm until the notch in the pull rod is in the slot in the link arm. Then turn the diaphragm 90 in either direction. This action will engage and retain the pull rod in the slot of the link arm.

5. The valves are held in their seats by punch marks in the metal. The metal must be made smooth so that valves can be removed.

79


Fuel System Repair

600 SRM 705

Install 1. The lobe on the camshaft must be in the minimum lift position before the fuel pump is installed. See Figure 145. Use a new gasket and install the fuel pump on the engine block. Apply Loctite to the first three threads of the capscrews. Install the capscrews. Tighten the capscrews to 22 N•m (16 lbf ft). 2. Connect the fuel lines to the fuel pump. Install the heat shield. 3. Loosen the connection bolt on top of the filter as shown in Figure 137. 4. Operate the priming lever on the fuel pump until fuel, without air bubbles, comes from the loosened connection bolt. See Figure 138. 5. When the engine can be operated again, check for leaks.

Test

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

COVER SCREEN SEAT WASHER (2) VALVE (2) DIAPHRAGM ASSEMBLY 6. STEM SEAL 7. SPRING SEAT WASHER

8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

LINK ARM PIN RETAINER (2) ROCKER LEVER DIAPHRAGM SPRING 13. SEAL

Figure 146. Fuel Pump Disassembly 6. Push the rocker arm toward the body of the fuel pump until the diaphragm is level with the flange half. Install the top half of the body in position. Align the reference marks. Keep the pressure on the rocker arm and install the lockwashers and screws. Tighten the screws evenly around the circumference of the fuel pump. 7. Install the screen and the cover. Make sure that the rubber seal is fitted correctly and tighten the screw that holds the cover.

80

1. Disconnect the fuel line from the outlet of the fuel pump. Install a 0 to 70 kPa (0 to 10 psi) pressure gauge to the outlet of the fuel pump. Loosen the connection at the gauge and operate the priming lever on the fuel pump to remove air from the fuel pump and the connection to the pressure gauge. Then tighten the connection. 2. Use the starter motor to operate the engine for 10 seconds. See the maximum pressure indicated on the pressure gauge. If the pressure is less than 42 to 70 kPa (6 to 10 psi), repair or replace the fuel pump. Also check the rate at which the pressure reduces to half of the maximum pressure. If the rate is less than 30 seconds to reduce to half of the maximum pressure, repair or replace the fuel pump. 3. Remove the pressure gauge from the fuel pump. Connect the fuel line to the outlet of the fuel pump again. 4. Loosen the connection bolt on top of the filter as shown in Figure 137. Operate the priming lever on the fuel pump until fuel, without air bubbles, comes from the loosened connection bolt. 5. When the engine can be operated again, check for leaks.


600 SRM 705

Cooling System Repair

Cooling System Repair GENERAL Coolant from the bottom of the radiator flows through the centrifugal coolant pump which is installed on the front of the timing case. The coolant pump is gear driven from the gear for the fuel injection pump. The coolant goes from the coolant pump through a passage in the timing case to the front of the engine block.

THERMOSTAT Most engines are fitted with a single thermostat (see Figure 147), some engines have twin thermostats. See Figure 148. 1. THERMOSTAT Figure 148. Engines YG and YH Thermostats Identification of the thermostat is by the nominal temperature which is stamped on the bypass valve of the thermostat. See Figure 147.

Remove 1. Drain the coolant level in the cooling system to below the thermostat position and disconnect the top hose from the coolant outlet connection. 2. Release the four capscrews and remove the thermostat housing from the lower body. See Figure 147. Discard the gasket. 3. Press the retainer clips inward, and lift the plastic collar from the thermostat housing. 4. Remove the thermostat and O-ring assembly from the thermostat housing. Discard the O-ring. NOTE: Engines YG and YH have two parallel thermostats. See Figure 148.

Install 1. Clean the thermostat housing, make sure that the groove for the clip retainers and the seat for the O-ring are free of debris. 1. THERMOSTAT HOUSING 2. GROOVE FOR RETAINER CLIPS

3. 4. 5. 6.

O-RING RETAINER CLIPS GASKET THERMOSTAT

Figure 147. Engine AR Thermostat

2. Make sure that the gasket faces of the thermostat housing and the lower body are clean and that the jiggle pin in the thermostat is free to move.

81


Cooling System Repair

600 SRM 705

3. Replace the O-ring and put the new thermostat in position in the housing. 4. Press the retainer clips inward, and push the plastic collar into the thermostat housing until the clip retainers engage the groove. 5. Install a new gasket; the gasket is installed dry. Fit and tighten the capscrews. 6. Connect the top hose and fill the cooling system.

Test 1. Hang the thermostat in a suitable container filled with coolant.

CAUTION If the thermostat does not operate correctly, it must be replaced. Do not try to adjust the settings. 2. Heat the coolant gradually. Use a thermometer to check the temperature at which the valve starts to open and at which it is fully open. The correct temperatures are given in the data and dimensions.

COOLANT PUMP Remove 1. Drain the cooling system and disconnect the hose at the inlet to the coolant pump.

1. NUTS ON REAR FACE OF TIMING CASE 2. COOLANT PUMP COVER 3. INLET CONNECTION Figure 149. Coolant Pump Removal

2. Remove the two capscrews from the rear face of the timing case. See Figure 149. 3. Remove the eight capscrews which hold the coolant pump to the front cover of the timing case. Remove the coolant pump. 4. Remove and discard the gasket.

Disassemble The coolant pump must be repaired if coolant or engine oil leaks from the hole in the pump body. See Figure 150. This leak indicates that the coolant seal or the oil seal is worn or damaged. Special tool:

Seal replacement tool

1. Remove the two studs from the pump body.

82

2. Remove the cover. See Figure 151. There are three access spaces on the edge of the cover so that a pry bar can be used to remove the cover from the pump body. Work carefully so that the cover does not have distortion. 3. Remove the impeller from the shaft. Drill four 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) holes at equal distance round the end of the pump shaft. These holes will break the press fit between the impeller and the pump shaft so that the impeller can be removed.

CAUTION Do not damage the seal face in the pump body for the coolant seal during removal of the seal. 4. Remove the coolant seal. The carbon seal must be broken and then use an extractor to remove the center sleeve of the seal from the pump shaft.


600 SRM 705

1. COOLANT PUMP COVER 2. OIL SEAL

Cooling System Repair

3. DRAIN HOLE 4. COOLANT SEAL 5. IMPELLER

1. ACCESS SPACE FOR PRY BAR Figure 151. Coolant Pump Cover Removal

Figure 150. Coolant Pump Seals 5. Remove the body of the seal. Drill three 3.175 mm (0.125 in.) holes through the top of the coolant seal 120 degrees apart. Install three 25.4 mm (1.00 in.) self-tapping screws in the holes. Insert a pry bar through the cooling inlet of the pump body and gradually and carefully apply the lever under the head of each self tapping screw. Carefully remove the coolant seal from the shaft. Discard the coolant seal. 6. Drill a 3.175 mm (0.125 in.) hole through the top of the oil seal. Install a 25.4 mm (1.00 in.) self-tapping screw in the hole. Insert a pry bar through the cooling inlet of the pump body and carefully apply the lever under the head of the self tapping screw. See Figure 152. Carefully slide the oil seal from the shaft. Discard the oil seal.

CAUTION Do not damage the seal face in the pump body for the oil seal during removal of the seal. 7. Remove and discard the snap ring. 8. Put a support under the pump body so that it is not damaged. Use a press to push the shaft through the pump gear and the pump body until the shaft and the ball bearing assembly are released from the pump. Discard the ball bearing assembly, pump shaft, and the two snap rings. Remove the pump gear. 9. Inspect the pump gear for wear and damage. Replace a worn or damaged pump gear. 10. Use a press to push the needle roller bearing from the pump body. Discard the bearing.

83


Cooling System Repair

600 SRM 705 Loctite does not get into the bearing. Use a press to install the needle roller bearing into the pump body until the end of the bearing is even with the body or not more than 0.5 mm (0.020 in.) below the surface of the body.

1. COOLANT PUMP BODY 2. OIL SEAL 3. BALL BEARING 4. PUMP GEAR

5. NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING 6. SNAP RING (2) 7. SNAP RING

Figure 152. Coolant Pump Seals Removal

Assemble 1. Clean the pump body. Give special attention to the bore for the bearing and the bore for the water seal. Both of these bores and their chamfers must be clean and free of corrosion. 2. Install a new snap ring onto the shaft. See Figure 153. 3. Put the pump gear into position in the pump body and use a press to push the shaft into the pump gear. If the original pump gear is used, use Loctite 638 between the pump gear and the shaft. Make sure the pump gear is against the shoulder of the shaft. 4. Apply a thin layer of Loctite 638 to the outer surface of the needle roller bearing. Make sure the

84

1. COOLANT PUMP BODY 2. BALL BEARING 3. HOUSING SURFACE 4. PUMP GEAR

5. NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING 6. SHAFT 7. SNAP RING 8. SNAP RING 9. SNAP RING

Figure 153. Coolant Pump Assembly 5. Apply a thin layer of Loctite 638 to the outer surface of the ball bearing. Make sure the Loctite does not get into the bearing. Use a spacer as a support for the pump gear. Make sure the pump gear is against the housing surface. Use an adapter and a press to push the new ball bearing onto the shaft. Make sure the adapter presses on both the inner and outer races of the ball bearing so it is not damaged as it is pressed into the housing. Make sure the inner race touches the snap ring.


600 SRM 705 6. Remove the spacer that is a support for the shaft at the end with the pump gear. Continue to press the ball bearing into the housing. Then install the snap ring. 7. Install the new snap ring. Make sure the bevel edge of the snap ring is toward the oil seal. This snap ring holds the shaft and bearing assembly in the pump body.

Cooling System Repair 9. Press the oil seal into the oil seal space in the pump body. The tool shown in Figure 155 can be made to press the oil seal into position. The tool will also prevent axial distortion of the oil seal when it is pressed onto the shaft.

8. Lightly lubricate the oil seal with clean engine oil. See Figure 154. Install the tapered tool PD.247 onto the shaft with the tapered end toward the bearing. The purpose of the tapered tool is to make sure the lip of the oil seal is correctly fitted when the oil seal is pressed into position. Push the oil seal over the tapered tool and into position in the pump body. The flat face of the oil seal is toward the impeller.

A. B. C. D.

40.0 mm (1.57 in.) 80.0 mm (3.15 in.) 60.0 mm (2.36 in.) 42.0 mm (1.65 in.)

E. 29.0 mm (1.14 in.) F. 14.5 mm (0.57 in.) G. 12.0 mm (0.47 in.)

Figure 155. Installation Tool for Oil Seal 10. Use the tool to press the oil seal into the pump body until the seal is 14.5 mm (0.57 in.) from the end of the flange for the coolant seal. When the seal is in position, continue to apply force for approximately 10 seconds to make sure the oil seal remains in position when the force is released.

CAUTION Do not lubricate the coolant seal. It is important that the coolant seal is not contaminated with oil or grease. If the seal is held in the hand, only touch the edge of the outside flange. Make sure the green sealant that is applied to the coolant seal just behind the flange is not damaged.

1. 14.5 mm (0.57 in.) DISTANCE BETWEEN OIL SEAL AND FLANGE FOR COOLANT SEAL 2. OIL SEAL Figure 154. Coolant Pump Seals Oil Seal Installation

11. Push the coolant seal onto the shaft until it touches the counterbore for the coolant seal. See Figure 156. The widest part of the coolant seal is toward the oil seal. Make sure the coolant seal is aligned with the counterbore and use a press and adapter to push the coolant seal into the counterbore. Make sure the adapter only pushes on the outer flange of the coolant seal. Continue to apply force for approximately ten seconds to

85


Cooling System Repair

600 SRM 705 pump body. See Figure 156. Rotate the impeller after installation to make sure it rotates freely.

be sure the seal remains in position when the force is released.

A. B. C. D. E.

44.0 mm (1.73 in.) 40.0 mm (1.57 in.) 12.2 mm (0.48 in.) 35.8 mm (1.41 in.) 16.1 mm (0.63 in.)

F.

1.00 mm (0.04 in.) AT 45 DEGREES G. 2.00 mm (0.08 in.) AT 45 DEGREES

Figure 157. Installation Tool for Coolant Seal 14. Put a bead of Loctite 290 on the contact surface of the pump cover (2). Make sure the cover is aligned with the pump body and use a press to install the cover. Make sure the pump cover is pressed evenly and fully onto the pump body. 15. Install the two studs into the pump body. See Figure 158. 1. IMPELLER CLEARANCE = 0.44 to 1.06 mm (0.017 to 0.042 in.) 2. COOLANT PUMP COVER 3. IMPELLER 4. COOLANT SEAL 5. RECESS DISTANCE FROM FRONT OF PUMP BODY TO IMPELLER Figure 156. Coolant Pump Assembly 12. A tool can be made to press the coolant seal into position. See Figure 157. The dimensions of this tool will make sure the coolant seal is the correct length after installation. The tool will prevent axial distortion of the coolant seal when it is pressed onto the shaft. 13. Make sure the end of the shaft with the drive gear has a support. Use a press and an adapter to press the impeller onto the shaft. The face of the impeller must be 10.35 to 10.48 mm (0.407 to 0.413 in.) recess distance from the front of the

86

Install 1. Make sure the gasket surfaces of the coolant pump and the timing case cover are clean. See Figure 158. Make sure the surface at coolant pump is clean. 2. Make sure the gear for the coolant pump is not worn or damaged. A worn or damaged gear must be replaced. 3. Install a new gasket on the pump body. Do not use sealant. 4. Make sure the studs are correctly installed and tightened. 5. Install the coolant pump on the timing case cover. Make sure the pump gear engages correctly the gear for the fuel injection pump.


600 SRM 705

1. TIMING CASE COVER 2. STUDS

Cooling System Repair

3. GASKET 4. COOLANT PUMP

Figure 158. Coolant Pump Connections

1. NUTS ON REAR FACE OF TIMING CASE 2. INLET CONNECTION 3. ADD SEALANT TO THREAD OF CAPSCREWS Figure 159. Coolant Pump Installation

6. Three of the capscrews have sealant applied when they are new. See Figure 159. If these capscrews are installed again, the old sealant must be cleaned and apply Loctite 542 to the first three threads.

2. Loosen the pivot fasteners for the alternator and the fastener for the adjustment bracket. Remove the drive belts.

7. Install and tighten the two nuts on the studs at the back of the timing case.

3. Check the axial movement of the fan shaft. If the axial movement is greater than 0.25 mm (0.010 in.), the fan bearing assembly must be replaced.

8. Install the eight capscrews that fasten the coolant pump to the cover of the timing case. 9. Connect the coolant hose at inlet connection and fill the cooling system. When the engine can be operated, check for leaks.

4. Remove capscrews and remove the fan drive from the timing case cover.

Install

FAN AND FAN DRIVE

1. Install the fan drive on the timing case cover and tighten the capscrews to 44 N•m (32 lbf ft).

Remove

2. Install the fan. Tighten the capscrews.

1. Remove the capscrews and remove the fan.

3. Install the drive belts and adjust the tension.

87


Cooling System Repair

OIL COOLER (SIX-CYLINDER ENGINES)

600 SRM 705 4. Use new O-rings on the flanges and studs as shown in Figure 161.

Remove 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Disconnect the oil lines at the flange on the cover of the oil cooler. 3. Remove the capscrews and nuts from the cover of the oil cooler and remove the cover and element. See Figure 160.

1. O-RINGS Figure 161. Cooler Element Joints 5. Install the cooler element on the cover and tighten the nuts to 22 N•m (16 lbf ft).

Install 1. STUDS Figure 160. Oil Cooler and Element

Disassemble and Assemble 1. Remove the capscrews and remove the cover. 2. Remove the nuts on the front of the cover and remove the cooler element from the cover. 3. Clean the cooler element and check for cracks. If a cleaning solution is used to clean the outside of the element, make sure that the cleaning solution does not enter the element. Check that there are no restrictions for the oil flow through the element. If the internal part of the element must be cleaned, use a cleaning solution that will not damage copper. Flush the element to remove the cleaning solution and dry the element with compressed air at low pressure. Then flush the internal part of the element with clean engine oil.

88

1. If the studs have been removed and will be used again, clean the threads on the studs and on the engine block. Use liquid sealant on the threads before they are installed in the engine block. 2. Use a new gasket and install the oil cooler assembly to the engine block. Tighten the capscrews and nuts to 22 N•m (16 lbf ft). 3. Use a new gasket and connect the oil lines to the flange on the cover and tighten the screws. 4. Fill the coolant system. 5. When the engine can be operated again, check for leaks.

Oil Cooler Bypass Valve 1. Remove the cap and remove the bypass valve. See Figure 162.


600 SRM 705

Electrical Equipment Repair 2. Check the spring and the valve seat for damage. Replace the parts if they are damaged. 3. Use a new aluminum washer. Install the bypass valve into the oil cooler and tighten the cap to 50 N•m (37 lbf ft).

1. O-RING Figure 162. Oil Cooler Bypass Valve

Electrical Equipment Repair DRIVE BELTS

the thumb pressure is 45 N (10 lbf), the correct deflection is approximately 10 mm (0.394 in.).

Adjustment Check the drive belts for wear and damage. When a pair of drive belts are used, they must be replaced as a pair. When a pair of drive belts are used, adjust the tension for the tightest belt. A gauge is available that will indicate the tension in the drive belt. Fit the gauge at the center of the longest length of the drive belt and measure the tension. See Figure 163. The correct tension is approximately 355 N (80 lbf).

1. PIVOT FASTENER

2. ADJUSTMENT LINK

Figure 163. Gauge to Check Drive Belt Tension

Figure 164. Drive Belt Tension Check and Adjust

Many service people press on the drive belt with their thumb at the center of the longest length of the drive belt and check the deflection. See Figure 164. When

Loosen the bolt on the adjustment link and the pivot fasteners to adjust the tension of the drive belts. Move the alternator pulley against the drive belts to

89


Electrical Equipment Repair adjust the tension. Tighten the adjustment link and pivot fasteners. The drive belts are removed from the engine by loosening the tension and then removing them from the pulleys.

Remove 1. Release the belt tension on the drive belt with the correct size socket and a breaker bar. 2. Remove the drive belt from the engine.

Install WARNING Do not use a prybar to install the drive belt on the pulleys. The prybar can damage the drive belt and pulleys. 1. Loosen the top capscrew at the alternator mount and move the alternator toward the fan. Install the Drive belt over the fan and onto the pulleys. 2. Use a socket with a breaker bar to loosen the belt tensioner. Use the handle to pull the pulley away from the drive belt. See Figure 164. While holding the pulley away from the belt, pull the alternator away from the fan (as far as it will move) and tighten the capscrew at the top mount. Release the pulley for the belt tensioner. 3. After installation is complete, check the position of the indicator on the tensioner. When the tension is correct, the indicator will be in the area shown in Figure 163. If the tension is not correct check for the correct installation of the brackets and pulleys.

ALTERNATOR NOTE: The alternator normally used with this engine is made by Delco Remy or Motorola. See the section Alternator With Regulator 2200 SRM 2 for troubleshooting and repairs.

Remove 1. Disconnect electrical connection. 2. Loosen the pivot and adjustment link capscrews. 3. Release belt tension and remove the belts.

90

600 SRM 705 4. Remove the adjustment link from the alternator and remove the pivot capscrews. Note the position of the washers and spacers. Remove the alternator.

Install 1. Position the alternator in place and loosely install the pivot and adjustment link capscrews. Be sure the washers and spacers are installed in their correct positions. Be sure the alternator is aligned to the crankshaft pulley within Âą2.4 mm (Âą0.09449 in.). 2. Install the drive belts and adjust tension. See Drive Belts for tension adjustment. 3. Tighten all capscrews and check belt tension again. Connect the electrical connection. 4. Connect the electrical connection.

STARTER MOTOR See the section Starter, Delco 2200 SRM 106 for troubleshooting and repairs for the starter motor.

Remove 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Disconnect the cables to the starter motor. 3. Remove the capscrews and remove the starter motor.

Install 1. Install the starter motor in position on the flywheel housing. Install and tighten the capscrews. 2. Connect the cables to the starter motor. 3. Connect the battery.

COLD START AID The cold start aid is an electrical device. A controlled amount of diesel fuel is inserted into the induction manifold where it is ignited by the cold start aid to heat the induction air. A heater coil in the body of the cold start aid expands a valve holder so that fuel can flow into the device where it is ignited by an ignition coil. The cold start aid is operated by a switch button on the instrument panel.


600 SRM 705

Air Compressor - Engines YG and YH

If the cold start aid is removed for cleaning or replacement, make sure that the surfaces between the induction manifold and the cold start aid are clean. Tighten the cold start aid to 31 N•m (23 lbf ft). If air

is in the fuel system because the fuel line was disconnected, remove the air as described in Fuel System Air Removal.

Air Compressor - Engines YG and YH GENERAL The air compressor is installed in the PTO position on the rear face of the timing case. See Figure 165. The compressor is driven from the main idler gear through an idler gear for the compression. The cylinder head of the single cylinder compressor is cooled by coolant from the engine. The compressor is lubricated from the engine oil system of the engine. Engine oil flows through a pipe from the main oil passage in the engine to the crankcase of the compressor. The engine oil then flows through the bearings of the compressor and the bushing for the drive shaft. The engine oil returns to the oil sump through the timing case.

1. COOLANT HOSES 2. SPACERS (1W150R ONLY) 3. CAPSCREWS 4. SUPPORT BRACKET

5. CAPSCREWS 6. OIL TUBE, LUBRICATION 7. NUT

Figure 166. Bendix Compressor Removal and Installation 4. If an oil pump for the steering system is fastened to the back of the compressor housing, remove it. 5. Loosen the two capscrews. Remove the two capscrews. Remove the support bracket.

Figure 165. Air Compressor Installation

6. Remove the nut from the stud at the bottom of the compressor flange. Remove the nut from the stud at the front of the timing case and remove the air compressor from the engine.

REPAIR

Install

Remove

1. Set the piston of number one cylinder to TDC.

1. Drain the cooling system.

2. Install a new O-ring in its recess in the drive housing. See Figure 167.

2. Release the air pressure in the air system and disconnect all the pipe connections to and from the cylinder head of the compressor. 3. Remove the oil tube for the engine oil between the compressor and the engine block. See Figure 166.

3. Turn the crankshaft of the air compressor until the timing mark on the rear face of the crankshaft is aligned with the 6A line on the label at the rear face of the air compressor. See Figure 168.

91


Air Compressor - Engines YG and YH

600 SRM 705 5. Slide the compressor into the timing case until the teeth of the drive gear are against the teeth of the idler gear. Slowly turn the rear of the crankshaft of the air compressor clockwise until the teeth of the drive gear and the idler gear are fully engaged. Check that the timing mark on the crankshaft of the air compressor is aligned with the 6A area on the timing label. 6. Install the nut (Figure 166) on the stud. Install the nut on the stud (Figure 167). Tighten both nuts to 75 N•m (55 lbf ft).

1. THROUGH HOLE IN TIMING CASE 2. IDLER GEAR

3. STUD 4. STUD 5. O-RING

Figure 167. Bendix Compressor Installation into Drive Assembly 4. Install the end of the stud with the shortest thread into the flange of the air compressor. See Figure 167. Install the nut fully on the stud. Move the air compressor into its position and engage the stud in its hole in the timing case. Slide the compressor onto the stud for the bottom of the flange.

7. Install the support bracket. Install the capscrews loosely. See Figure 166. Install the spacers if used and the capscrews. Adjust the support bracket so that it only holds the air compressor and does not put tension on it. Tighten the two capscrews to 22 N•m (16 lbf ft). Tighten the two capscrews to 44 N•m (32 lbf ft). 8. Check that the O-ring in the cover at the rear of the air compressor is not damaged. Install the cover and tighten the two capscrews. 9. Make sure the oil tube (Figure 166) is in good condition and does not have a restriction. Make sure the engine stop solenoid is disconnected or the engine stop control is in the STOP position. Operate the started motor until engine oil flows from the oil tube. Connect the oil tube. Connect the engine stop solenoid. 10. Connect the coolant hoses and air pipes to the air compressor. 11. Install the engine coolant. When the engine can be operated, check for oil, air, and coolant leaks.

1. TIMING MARK (SHOWN ALIGNED FOR FOUR-CYLINDER ENGINES. ALIGN WITH 6A FOR SIX-CYLINDER ENGINES) Figure 168. Bendix Compressor Installation into Drive Assembly

92


600 SRM 705

Rotary Exhauster Replacement

Rotary Exhauster Replacement REMOVE WARNING Do not run the engine with the vacuum hose to brake booster disconnected and the supply port to exhauster open. To do so will cause the front seal of exhauster to push out and pressurize the engine crankcase. NOTE: Engines that are diagnosed with excessive crankcase blow-by must first have the rotary exhauster removed from the engine and the engine run for this diagnosis to be valid. A brake booster diaphragm failure may also cause the rotary exhauster front seal to be pushed out causing crankcase pressurization.

INSTALL 1. Install rotary exhauster into the back of timing case cover. Install capscrews and tighten to 35 N•m (27 lbf ft). 2. Remove plugs from ports of the rotary exhauster and covers from lubricating oil and vacuum lines. Connect lubricating oil and vacuum lines to rotary exhauster.

NOTE: The rotary exhauster is used to provide vacuum for vehicle brake system. 1. Disconnect lubricating oil and vacuum lines from rotary exhauster. See Figure 169. Install covers on the oil and vacuum lines, and plugs in the open ports of the rotary exhauster to prevent dust and dirt from getting into the lines or the rotary exhauster. 2. Remove capscrews, rotary exhauster, and gasket from the back of timing case cover.

CLEAN

A. TO BRAKE BOOSTER

Clean all gasket material from timing case cover and rotary exhauster surfaces.

1. 2. 3. 4.

LUBRICATING OIL LINE VACUUM LINE CAPSCREW ROTARY EXHAUSTER Figure 169. Rotary Exhauster

93


Engine Specifications

600 SRM 705

Engine Specifications CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY Refer to the following tables and figures for specifications for the cylinder head assembly. Table 1. Cylinder Head

Table 2. Valve Guides Inside diameter (finished surface) ............................ 9.000 to 9.022 mm (0.3543 to 0.3552 in.) Outside diameter

Angle of valve seat .......... 46 (88 included angle) or 31 (118 included angle)

Inlet ............................. 13.034 to 13.047 mm (0.5131 to 0.5137 in.)

Diameter of parent bore for valve guide

Exhaust ....................... 14.034 to 14.047 mm (0.5525 to 0.5530 in.)

Inlet ............................. 13.00 to 13.027 mm (0.5118 to 0.5128 in.) Exhaust ....................... 14.00 to 14.027 mm (0.5512 to 0.5522 in.) Leak test pressure........... 200 kPa (29 psi) Head thickness................ 102.79 to 103.59 mm (4.047 to 4.078 in.) Maximum distortion of cylinder head. See Figure 170.

Interference fit of valve guide in cylinder head..... 0.047 to 0.007 mm (0.0018 to 0.00027 in.) Total length ..................... 51.25 mm (2.018 in.) Extension from bottom of recess for valve spring .... 14.85 to 15.15 mm (0.585 to 0.596 in.)

Table 3. Inlet Valves Diameter, valve stem ....... 8.953 to 8.975 mm (0.3525 to 0.3533 in.) Clearance in valve guide ................................. 0.025 to 0.069 mm (0.001 to 0.0027 in.) Maximum clearance in valve guide Production limit ........... 0.089 mm (0.0035 in.) Service limit ................. 0.100 mm (0.004 in.)

Engine AR:

Engines YG, YH:

1 = 0.08 mm (0.003 in.) 2 = 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) 3 = 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)

1 = 0.13 mm (0.005 in.) 2 = 0.25 mm (0.010 in.) 3 = 0.25 mm (0.010 in.)

Figure 170. Cylinder Head Distortion Check

94

Diameter, valve head (Engine YG and YH).... 42.88 to 43.12 mm (1.688 to 1.698 in.) (Engine AR).................. 44.88 to 45.12 mm (1.766 to 1.776 in.) Angle of valve face ........... 45 or 30


600 SRM 705

Engine Specifications

Table 3. Inlet Valves (Continued) Depth of valve head below face of cylinder head to Production limit (see Figure 171 and Figure 172): (Engine YG and YH).... 1.40 to 1.70 mm (0.055 to 0.067 in.) (Engine AR).................. 0.40 to 0.60 mm (0.016 to 0.024 in.) Depth of valve head below face of cylinder head to Service limit (see Figure 171 and Figure 172):

Table 3. Inlet Valves (Continued) (Engine AR).................. 0.805 mm (0.032 in.) Total length (Engine YG and YH).... 122.67 to 123.30 mm (4.829 to 4.854 in.) (Engine AR).................. 123.75 to 124.40 mm (4.872 to 4.897 in.) Seal arrangement............. Rubber seal installed on valve guide (green)

(Engine YG and YH).... 1.95 mm (0.077 in.)

Engine Types YG to YH:

Engine Type AR:

Inlet Valves 1 = 10.585 to 10.715 mm (0.4167 to 0.4219 in.) 2 = 45.535 to 45.560 mm (1.7927 to 1.7937 in.) 3 = Radius 0.38 mm (0.015 in.) Maximum

Inlet Valves 1 = 10.585 to 10.715 mm (0.4167 to 0.4219 in.) 2 = 48.035 to 48.060 mm (1.8911 to 1.8921 in.) 3 = Radius 0.38 mm (0.015 in.) Maximum

Exhaust Valves 1 = 10.585 to 10.715 mm (0.4167 to 0.4219 in.) 2 = 43.535 to 43.560 mm (1.7139 to 1.7149 in.) 3 = Radius 0.38 mm (0.015 in.) Maximum

Exhaust Valves 1 = 10.585 to 10.715 mm (0.4167 to 0.4219 in.) 2 = 44.035 to 44.060 mm (1.7336 to 1.7346 in.) 3 = Radius 0.38 mm (0.015 in.) Maximum

Figure 171. Dimensions of Recesses for Valve Seat Inserts Table 4. Exhaust Valves

Table 4. Exhaust Valves (Continued)

Diameter, valve stem ...... 8.938 to 8.960 mm (0.351 to 0.3528 in.)

(Engine YG and YH)... 40.88 to 41.12 mm (1.609 to 1.619 in.)

Clearance in valve guide ................................ 0.040 to 0.84 mm (0.0016 to 0.0033 in.)

(Engine AR)................. 41.88 to 42.12 mm (1.649 to 1.658 in.)

Maximum clearance in valve guide Production limit .......... 0.104 mm (0.0041 in.) Service limit ................ 0.121 mm (0.0048 in.) Diameter, valve head

Angle of valve face .......... 45 or 30 Depth of valve head below face of cylinder head to Production limit (see Figure 171 and Figure 172): (Engine YG and YH)... 1.50 to 1.80 mm (0.059 to 0.071 in.) (Engine AR)................. 0.40 to 0.60 mm (0.016 to 0.024 in.)

95


Engine Specifications

Table 4. Exhaust Valves (Continued) Depth of valve head below face of cylinder head to Service limit (see Figure 171 and Figure 172): (Engine YG and YH)... 2.05 mm (0.081 in.) (Engine AR)................. 0.805 mm (0.032 in.)

600 SRM 705

Table 4. Exhaust Valves (Continued) (Engine AR)................. 123.75 to 124.40 mm (4.872 to 4.897 in.) Seal arrangement............ Rubber seal installed on valve guide (brown)

Total length (Engine YG and YH)... 122.65 to 123.30 mm (4.829 to 4.854 in.)

Engine Types YG to YH:

Engine Type AR:

Inlet Valves 1 = 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) 2 = 20 mm (0.800 in.) 3 = 7.0 mm (0.28 in.) 4 = 100 mm (4.00 in.) 5 = 37.25 to 37.45 mm (1.467 to 1.474 in.) 6 = 44.75 to 45.00 mm (1.762 to 1.772 in.) 7 = Radius 1.4 mm (0.055 in.) Maximum 8 = Radius 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) 9 = 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) 10 = 8.54 to 8.57 mm (0.336 to 0.337 in.)

Inlet Valves 1 = 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) 2 = 20 mm (0.800 in.) 3 = 7.0 mm (0.28 in.) 4 = 100 mm (4.00 in.) 5 = 37.82 to 38.02 mm (1.488 to 1.496 in.) 6 = 47.25 to 47.50 mm (1.860 to 1.870 in.) 7 = Radius 1.4 mm (0.055 in.) Maximum 8 = Radius 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) 9 = 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) 10 = 8.54 to 8.57 mm (0.336 to 0.337 in.)

Exhaust Valves 1 = 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) 2 = 20 mm (0.80 in.) 3 = 7.0 mm (0.28 in.) 4 = 100 mm (4.00 in.) 5 = 34.38 to 34.58 mm (1.354 to 1.361 in.) 6 = 42.75 to 43.00 mm (1.683 to 1.693 in.) 7 = Radius 1.4 mm (0.055 in.) Maximum 8 = Radius 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) 9 = 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) 10 = 8.54 to 8.57 mm (0.336 to 0.337 in.)

Exhaust Valves 1 = 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) 2 = 20 mm (0.80 in.) 3 = 7.0 mm (0.28 in.) 4 = 100 mm (4.00 in.) 5 = 36.62 to 36.82 mm (1.441 to 1.44961 in.) 6 = 43.25 to 43.50 mm (1.702 to 1.712 in.) 7 = Radius 1.4 mm (0.055 in.) Maximum 8 = Radius 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) 9 = 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) 10 = 8.54 to 8.57 mm (0.336 to 0.337 in.)

Figure 172. Pilot Tool to Insert Valve Seats for 45 or 30 Valves

96


600 SRM 705

Engine Specifications

Table 5. Valve Springs

Table 8. Rocker Arms and Bushings (Continued)

Installed length ............... 39.0 mm (1.54 in.) Load, installed length (Engine YG and YH)... 246 to 277.5 N (55.3 to 62.4 lbf) (Engine AR)................. 136.3 to 153.7 N (30.6 to 34.5 lbf) Active coils, number........ 3.3 Damper coils, number..... 0 Direction of coils.............. Left hand

Clearance between rocker arm and rocker arm shaft ......................... 0.03 to 0.09 mm (0.001 to 0.0035 in.) Maximum clearance (service) between rocker arm and rocker arm shaft ......................... 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)

PISTON AND CONNECTING RODS Refer to the following tables and Figure 173 for specifications for the piston and connecting rods.

Table 6. Tappets Table 9. Pistons (Engine AR) Diameter, tappet stem ..... 18.99 to 19.01 mm (0.7475 to 0.7485 in.) Diameter, tappet bore in cylinder block ................... 19.05 to 19.08 mm (0.7500 to 0.7512 in.) Clearance of tappet in engine block...................... 0.04 to 0.09 mm (0.0015 to 0.0035 in.)

Table 7. Rocker Arm Shaft Outside diameter ............ 19.01 to 19.04 mm (0.7484 to 0.7496 in.)

Table 8. Rocker Arms and Bushings Diameter, bore in rocker arm for bushing............... 22.23 to 22.26 mm (0.8752 to 0.8764 in.) Diameter, outside of bushing ............................ 22.28 to 22.31 mm (0.8772 to 0.8783 in.) Interference fit of bushing in rocker arm................... 0.020 to 0.089 mm (0.0008 to 0.0035 in.) Internal diameter, bushing (finished size) .... 19.06 to 19.10 mm (0.7505 to 0.7520 in.)

Type: Fastram combustion bowl, top ring groove has insert, graphite skirt. Diameter, bore for piston pin ..................................... 39.703 to 39.709 mm (1.5631 to 1.5633 in.) Height of piston above top face of engine block .......... 0.38 to 0.50 mm (0.015 to 0.020 in.) Width of groove for top ring (engine AR) ............... 2.60 to 2.62 mm (0.1023 to 0.1031 in.) Width of groove for second ring (All engines).............. 2.56 to 2.58 mm (0.1008 to 0.1016 in.) Width of groove for third ring (engine AR) ............... 3.53 to 3.55 mm (0.1389 to 0.1397 in.)

Table 10. Pistons (Engines YG and YH) Type: Fastram combustion bowl, top ring groove has insert, graphite skirt. Diameter, bore for piston pin ..................................... 39.703 to 39.709 mm (1.5631 to 1.5633 in.) Height of piston above top face of engine block .......... 0.38 to 0.50 mm (0.015 to 0.020 in.)

97


Engine Specifications

Table 10. Pistons (Engines YG and YH) (Continued) Width of groove for top ring (engines YG and YH)............................. tapered Width of groove for second ring (All engines)............................. 2.56 to 2.58 mm (0.1008 to 0.1016 in.) Width of groove for third ring (engines YG and YH)............................. 3.54 to 3.56 mm (0.1393 to 0.1401 in.)

600 SRM 705

Table 11. Piston Rings (Engine AR) (Continued) Gap of second ring (engine AR) .................................... 0.30 to 0.63 mm (0.012 to 0.025 in.) Gap of third ring (engine AR) .................................... 0.30 to 0.63 mm (0.012 to 0.025 in.)

Table 12. Piston Rings (Engines YG and YH) Top compression ring (engines YG and YH) ....... Barrel face, molybdenum insert, wedge

Table 11. Piston Rings (Engine AR)

Second compression ring (All engines)...................... Taper face, cast iron, outside bottom step

Top compression ring (engine AR)....................... Barrel face, molybdenum insert, rectangular

Oil ring (All engines)........ Coil spring, chromium face

Second compression ring (All engines)...................... Taper face, cast iron, outside bottom step Oil ring (All engines)........ Coil spring chromium face Width of top ring (engine AR) .................................... 2.475 to 2.490 mm (0.097 to 0.98 in.) Width of second ring (All engines)............................. 2.48 to 2.49 mm (0.097 to 0.098 in.) Width of third ring (All engines)............................. 3.47 to 3.49 mm (0.1366 to 0.1374 in.) Clearance of top ring in groove (engine AR) ........... 0.110 to 0.145 mm (0.004 to 0.006 in.) Clearance of second ring in groove (All engines) ..... 0.07 to 0.1 mm (0.003 to 0.004 in.) Clearance of third ring in groove (All engines).......... 0.05 to 0.09 mm (0.002 to 0.003 in.) Gap of top ring (engine AR) .................................... 0.28 to 0.51 mm (0.011 to 0.020 in.)

98

Width of top ring (engines YG and YH) ...................... Tapered Width of second ring (All engines)............................. 2.48 to 2.49 mm (0.097 to 0.098 in.) Width of third ring (All engines)............................. 3.47 to 3.49 mm (0.1366 to 0.1374 in.) Clearance of top ring in groove (engines YG and YH).................................... Wedge Clearance of second ring in groove (All engines) ..... 0.07 to 0.1 mm (0.003 to 0.004 in.) Clearance of third ring in groove (All engines).......... 0.05 to 0.09 mm (0.002 to 0.003 in.) Gap of top ring (engines YG and YH) ...................... 0.28 to 0.63 mm (0.011 to 0.025 in.) Gap of second ring (engines YG and YH) ....... 0.40 to 0.85 mm (0.016 to 0.034 in.) Gap of third ring (engines YG and YH) ...................... 0.25 to 0.75 mm (0.010 to 0.030 in.)


600 SRM 705

Engine Specifications Table 13. Piston Pins

Type ................................. Full floating Outside diameter ............ 39.694 to 39.700 mm (1.5628 to 1.5630 in.) Clearance fit in piston .... 0.003 to 0.015 mm (0.0001 to 0.0006 in.)

Table 14. Connecting Rods Type ................................. "H" section, wedge shape at small end Location of cap to connecting rod ................. Flat joint face with dowels or serrations Diameter, parent bore at big end ............................. 67.21 to 67.22 mm (2.6460 to 2.6465 in.) Diameter, parent bore at small end ......................... 43.01 to 43.04 mm (1.693 to 1.694 in.)

Table 15. Small End Bushings Type .................................. Steel back, lead bronze tin bearing material Outside diameter ............. 43.11 to 43.15 mm (1.6972 to 1.6988 in.) Inside diameter ................ 39.723 to 39.738 mm (1.5638 to 1.5645 in.) Surface finish grade ......... Ra 0.8 micrometers Clearance between bushing and piston pin .... 0.023 to 0.044 mm (0.0009 to 0.0017 in.)

Table 16. Connecting Rod Bearings (Engines AR and YG) Type ................................. Steel back, aluminum to tin bearing material Width ............................... 31.62 to 31.88 mm (1.245 to 1.255 in.)

Length grades.................. F, G, H, J, K, L

Thickness......................... 1.835 to 1.842 mm (0.0723 to 0.0725 in.)

Length between centers .. 219.05 to 219.10 mm (8.624 to 8.626 in.)

Bearing clearance............ 0.035 to 0.081 mm (0.0014 to 0.0032 in.) Available undersize bearings ...........................

0.25 mm ( 0.010 in.) 0.51 mm ( 0.020 in.) 0.76 mm ( 0.030 in.)

Table 17. Connecting Rod Bearings (Engine YH) Type .................................. Steel back, lead bronze bearing material with lead finish Width ................................ 31.55 to 31.88 mm (1.240 to 1.255 in.) NOTE: THE LARGE AND SMALL BORES IN THE CONNECTING ROD MUST BE SQUARE AND PARALLEL WITH EACH OTHER WITHIN THE LIMITS OF ±0.25 mm (0.010 in.). THE MEASUREMENT IS MADE AT 127 mm (5.0 in.) ON EACH SIDE OF THE AXIS OF THE CONNECTING ROD. IF THE BUSHING IS INSTALLED IN THE SMALL END OF THE CONNECTING ROD, THE LIMITS ARE REDUCED TO ±0.06 mm (0.0025 in.).

Thickness.......................... 1.835 to 1.844 mm (0.0723 to 0.0726 in.) Bearing clearance............. 0.030 to 0.081 mm (0.0012 to 0.0032 in.) Available undersize bearings ............................

0.25 mm ( 0.010 in.) 0.51 mm ( 0.020 in.) 0.76 mm ( 0.030 in.)

Figure 173. Connecting Rod Alignment Check

99


Engine Specifications Table 18. Piston Cooling Jets Valve open pressure ........ 178 to 250 kPa (26 to 36 psi)

CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY Refer to the following tables for specifications for the crankshaft assembly. Table 19. Crankshaft Diameter, main journal (Engine AR)................. 76.16 to 76.18 mm (2.998 to 2.999 in.) (Engine YG and YH)... 76.159 to 76.190 mm (2.9984 to 2.9996 in.) Maximum wear and oval wear on main and crank journals............................ 0.004 mm (0.00016 in.) Width of front journal ..... 36.93 to 37.69 mm (1.454 to 1.484 in.) Width of center journal ... 44.15 to 44.22 mm (1.738 to 1.741 in.) Width of all other main journals............................ 39.24 to 39.35 mm (1.545 to 1.549 in.) Diameter of crank journal.............................. 63.47 to 63.49 mm (2.499 to 2.500 in.)

100

600 SRM 705

Table 19. Crankshaft (Continued) Width of crank journals ............................ 40.35 to 40.42 mm (1.589 to 1.591 in.) Diameter of flange........... 133.27 to 133.37 mm (5.247 to 5.251 in.) Depth of recess for spigot bearing (Engine AR)................. 20.22 to 20.98 mm (0.796 to 0.826 in.) (Engine YG and YH)... 14.72 to 15.48 mm (0.579 to 0.609 in.) Bore of recess for spigot bearing (Engine AR)................. 46.96 to 46.99 mm (1.849 to 1.850 in.) (Engine YG and YH)... 51.97 to 51.99 mm (2.046 to 2.047 in.) Axial movement .............. 0.05 to 0.38 mm (0.002 to 0.015 in.) Maximum axial movement (service) ......... 0.51 mm (0.020 in.) Fillet radii, all journals ............................ 3.68 to 3.96 mm (0.145 to 0.156 in.) Undersize journals, all....

0.25 mm ( 0.010 in.) 0.51 mm ( 0.020 in.) 0.76 mm ( 0.030 in.)


600 SRM 705

Engine Specifications

Table 20. Main Bearings Type ................................. Steel back, 20% tin to aluminum bearing material Width, center bearing (All engines)..................... 36.32 to 36.70 mm (1.430 to 1.445 in.) Width, other bearings (Engine AR) ..................... 31.62 to 31.88 mm (1.245 to 1.255 in.) Width, other bearings (Engines YG and YH) ..... 30.86 to 31.12 mm (1.215 to 1.225 in.) Bearing thickness (All engines)............................ 2.083 to 2.89 mm (0.0820 to 0.11378 in.) Bearing clearance (Engine AR) ..................... 0.057 to 0.117 mm (0.0022 to 0.0046 in.) Bearing clearance (Engines YG and YH) ..... 0.047 to 0.117 mm (0.0018 to 0.0046 in.) Available undersize bearings: ..........................

Table 21. Crankshaft Thrust Washers Type ................................. Steel back, lead bronze bearing material Position ............................ each side of the center main bearing Thickness: to Standard ................. 2.26 to 2.31 mm (0.089 to 0.091 in.) to Oversize................... 2.45 to 2.50 mm (0.096 to 0.098 in.)

Table 22. Crankshaft Heat Treatment The following part numbers are induction hardened: ..................... 3131H024 The following part numbers are nitrocarburized:............................ 3131H022 31315991 31315995 31315681 The following part numbers are 60-hour nitride: ............................ 3131H021

0.25 mm ( 0.010 in.) 0.51 mm ( 0.020 in.) 0.76 mm ( 0.030 in.)

101


Engine Specifications

600 SRM 705

Crankshaft Overhaul Induction hardened crankshafts do not need to be hardened after they have been machined undersize. Nitrocarburized crankshafts must be hardened again each time after they have been machined. If nitrocarburized or nitrided hardening methods are not available, the crank shaft must be replaced or exchanged with a crankshaft from the manufacturer.

Check the crankshaft for cracks before and after it is machined (ground). Remove any magnetism after the crankshaft has been checked for cracks. After the crankshaft has been machined, remove any sharp edges from the oil holes for lubrication. Surface finish and fillet radii must be according to the specifications. The finished sizes for machined crankshafts are shown in Table 23.

Crankshafts that have a 60-hour nitride treatment can be machined a maximum of 0.25 mm (0.010 in.) without the need to harden them again. Table 23. Crankshaft Overhaul Specifications Undersize

102

Item

0.25 mm (0.010 in.)

0.51 mm (0.020 in.)

0.76 mm (0.030 in.)

1

75.905 to 75.926 mm (2.9884 to 2.9892 in.)

75.651 to 75.672 mm (2.9784 to 2.9792 in.)

75.397 to 75.418 mm (2.9684 to 2.9692 in.)

2

63.216 to 63.236 mm (2.4888 to 2.4896 in.)

62.962 to 62.982 mm (2.4788 to 2.4796 in.)

62.708 to 62.728 mm (2.4688 to 2.4696 in.)

3

39.47 mm (1.554 in.) maximum

4

37.82 mm (1.489 in.) maximum

5

44.68 mm (1.759 in.) maximum

6

40.55 mm (1.596 in.) maximum

7

133.17 mm (5.243 in.) minimum

8

Do not machine this diameter

9

3.68 to 3.96 mm (0.145 to 0.156 in.)


600 SRM 705

Engine Specifications

Table 23. Crankshaft Overhaul Specifications (Continued) Undersize Item

0.25 mm (0.010 in.)

0.51 mm (0.020 in.)

0.76 mm (0.030 in.)

Surface finish for journals, crank fins and fillet radii must be 0.4 microns (16 micro inches). Surface finish for seal area of crankshaft palm must be 0.4 to 1.1 microns (16 to 43 micro inches).

When the crankshaft is on mounts at the front and rear main journals, the maximum variation (run-out) (total indicator reading) at the other main journals cannot be greater than in Table 24.

not be more than 0.10 mm (0.004 in.). The "run-out" on the crankshaft pulley diameter, rear oil seal diameter, and the rear flange diameter must not be more than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) total indicator reading.

The "run-out" must not be opposite. The difference in "run-out" between one journal and the next one must

103


Engine Specifications

600 SRM 705 Table 24. Maximum Variation (Run-out)

Journal

Four-Cylinder Crankshafts

Six-Cylinder Crankshafts

1

Mount

Mount

2

0.08 mm (0.003 in.)

0.10 mm (0.004 in.)

3

0.15 mm (0.006 in.)

0.20 mm (0.008 in.)

4

0.08 mm (0.003 in.)

0.25 mm (0.010 in.)

5

Mount

0.20 mm (0.008 in.)

6

0.10 mm (0.004 in.)

7

Mount

TIMING CASE AND DRIVE ASSEMBLY Refer to the following tables for specifications for the timing case and drive assembly. Table 25. Camshaft

Table 25. Camshaft (Continued) Maximum out of round and wear on journals ...... 0.05 mm (0.0020 in.) Axial movement:

Diameter, journal No. 1 .. 50.71 to 50.74 mm (1.9965 to 1.9975 in.)

to Production limit...... 0.10 to 0.41 mm (0.004 to 0.016 in.)

Diameter, journal No. 2 .. 50.46 to 50.48 mm (1.9865 to 1.9875 in.)

to Service limit ............ 0.53 mm (0.021 in.)

Diameter, journal No. 3

Width, thrust washer space ................................ 5.64 to 5.89 mm (0.222 to 0.232 in.)

Engine AR ................... 49.95 to 49.98 mm (1.9665 to 1.9677 in.) Engines YG and YH.... 50.20 to 50.23 mm (1.9765 to 1.9775 in.) Diameter, journal No. 4 Engines YG and YH.... 49.95 to 49.98 mm (1.9665 to 1.9677 in.) Clearances, all journals .. 0.06 to 0.14 mm (0.0024 to 0.0055 in.) Cam lift to inlet: Engine AR ................... 8.58 mm (0.3378 in.) Cam lift to exhaust: Engine AR ................... 8.80 mm (0.3464 in.)

Table 26. Camshaft Thrust Washer Type ................................. 360 Clearance fit, thrust washer in engine block ... 5.46 to 5.54 mm (0.215 to 0.218 in.) Thickness, thrust washer ............................. 5.49 to 5.54 mm (0.216 to 0.218 in.) Extension of thrust washer beyond front face of engine block.................

0.05 to +0.08 mm ( 0.002 to +0.003 in.)

Cam lift to inlet: Engines YG and YH.... 7.62 to 7.69 mm (0.2999 to 0.3029 in.) Cam lift to exhaust: Engines YG and YH.... 7.71 to 7.79 mm (0.3036 to 0.3066 in.)

104

Table 27. Camshaft Gear No. of teeth....................... 56 Diameter, bore .................. 34.93 to 34.95 mm (1.3750 to 1.3760 in.)


600 SRM 705

Engine Specifications

Table 27. Camshaft Gear (Continued) Outside diameter, hub of camshaft ........................... 34.90 to 34.92 mm (1.3741 to 1.3747 in.) Clearance fit, gear on hub .................................... 0.008 to 0.048 mm (0.0003 to 0.0019 in.)

Table 28. Gear for Fuel Injection Pump No. of teeth...................... 56 Bore.................................. 36.00 to 36.06 mm (1.417 to 1.419 in.) 0.003 to 0.075 mm Clearance fit, gear on hub ................................... (0.0001 to 0.0030 in.)

Table 29. Crankshaft Gear

Table 30. Idler Gear and Hub (Continued) Outside diameter, hub if equipped with needle roller bearings .................. 54.987 to 55.000 mm (2.1648 to 2.1654 in.) Clearance, bushings on hub .................................... 0.04 to 0.10 mm (0.0016 to 0.0039 in.) Axial movement: to Production limit....... 0.10 to 0.20 mm (0.004 to 0.008 in.) to Service limit ............. 0.38 mm (0.015 in.) Axial movement if equipped with needle roller bearings .................. 0.24 to 0.33 mm (0.009 to 0.013 in.) to Service limit ............. 0.38 mm (0.015 in.) Gear clearance (all) .......... 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)

No. of teeth...................... 28 Diameter, bore................. 47.625 to 47.650 mm (1.8750 to 1.8760 in.) Diameter, hub for gear on 47.625 to 47.645 mm crankshaft........................ (1.8750 to 1.8758 in.) Press fit of gear on crankshaft........................

ENGINE BLOCK ASSEMBLY Refer to the following tables for specifications for the engine block assembly. Table 31. Cylinder Block (Engine AR)

0.020 to +0.048 mm ( 0.0008 to +0.0019 in.)

Height between top and bottom faces...................... 441.12 to 441.33 mm (17.367 to 17.375 in.)

No. of teeth....................... 63

Diameter of cylinder bore ................................... 103.000 to 103.025 mm (4.055 to 4.0561 in.)

Diameter, gear bore.......... 57.14 to 57.18 mm (2.2495 to 2.2512 in.)

Maximum wear of cylinder bore ..................... 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)

Diameter, gear bore if equipped with needle roller bearings .................. 69.01 to 69.03 mm (2.717 to 2.718 in.)

Diameter of first oversize cylinder bore ..................... 103.500 to 103.525 mm (4.0748 to 4.0757 in.)

Table 30. Idler Gear and Hub

Width, gear with split bushing assembly............. 30.14 to 30.16 mm (1.186 to 1.187 in.) Width, gear with flange bushing assembly............. 50.78 to 50.80 mm (1.9992 to 2.000 in.)

Diameter of second oversize cylinder bore ...... 104.000 to 104.025 mm (4.0944 to 4.0954 in.) NOTE: Two oversize pistons are available in service: 0.5 mm (0.020 in.) and 1.0 mm (0.040 in.)

Outside diameter, hub ..... 50.70 to 50.74 mm (1.9960 to 1.9975 in.)

105


Engine Specifications Table 32. Cylinder Bore Specifications

CAUTION Special training and equipment are needed to correctly flush the internal bore of a cylinder with a hone. Contact your nearest Perkins dealer. Preliminary Bore Final size of standard bore before it is honed..... 102.873 to 102.924 mm (4.0501 to 4.0521 in.) First oversize of bore before it is honed ............. 103.373 to 103.424 mm (4.0698 to 4.0718 in.) Second oversize of bore before it is honed ............. 103.873 to 103.924 mm (4.0894 to 4.0914 in.) Surface Finish ................. Ra 3.2 to 4.0 micrometers Maximum out-of-round and taper ......................... 0.02 mm (0.0008 in.) Diamond Hone Hone angle (cross hatch) ............................... 35 Finish size of standard bore, diamond honed....... 102.949 to 102.961 mm (4.0531 to 4.0536 in.) Finish size of first oversize bore, diamond honed ............................... 103.449 to 103.461 mm (4.0727 to 4.0732 in.)

600 SRM 705

Table 32. Cylinder Bore Specifications (Continued) Finish size of first oversize bore, silicone carbide base hone ............ 103.500 to 103.525 mm (4.0748 to 4.0757 in.) Finish size of second oversize bore, silicone carbide base hone ............ 104.000 to 104.025 mm (4.076 to 4.0954 in.) Surface Finish ................. Ra 1.3 to 1.6 micrometers Maximum out-of-round and taper ......................... 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.) Silicone Carbide Plateau Hone Finish size of standard bore, silicone carbide plateau hone .................... 103.000 to 103.025 mm (4.0551 to 4.0561 in.) Finish size of first oversize bore, silicone carbide plateau hone....... 103.500 to 103.525 mm (4.0748 to 4.0757 in.) Finish size of second oversize bore, silicone carbide plateau hone....... 104.000 to 104.025 mm (4.076 to 4.0954 in.) Surface Finish ................. Ra 0.65 to 1.3 micrometers Maximum out-of-round and taper ......................... 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)

Finish size of second oversize bore, diamond honed ............................... 103.949 to 103.961 mm (4.0924 to 4.0929 in.)

Shaft Bores in Cylinder Block (Engine AR)

Surface Finish ................. Ra 2.2 to 3.0 micrometers

Diameter, camshaft bore (Engine AR):

Diameter of bore for main bearing ............................. 80.416 to 80.442 mm (3.1660 to 3.1670 in.)

Maximum out-of-round and taper ......................... 0.012 mm (0.0005 in.)

to No. 1 ........................ 55.56 to 55.59 mm (2.188 to 2.189 in.)

Silicone Carbide Base Hone

to No. 2 ........................ 50.55 to 50.60 mm (1.990 to 1.992 in.)

Hone angle (cross hatch) ............................... 35 Finish size of standard bore, silicone carbide base hone ......................... 103.000 to 103.025 mm (4.0551 to 4.0561 in.)

106

to No. 3 ........................ 50.04 to 50.09 mm (1.970 to 1.972 in.) Bore in bushing for No. 1 camshaft journal ............. 50.79 to 50.85 mm (2.000 to 2.002 in.)


600 SRM 705 Table 33. Cylinder Block (Engines YG and YH) Height between top and bottom faces...................... 441.12 to 441.33 mm (17.367 to 17.375 in.) Diameter, bore for cylinder liner .................... 104.20 to 104.23 mm (4.103 to 4.104 in.) Depth of space for flange of cylinder liner ................ 3.81 to 3.91 mm (0.150 to 0.154 in.) Diameter of space for flange of cylinder liner ..... 107.82 to 107.95 mm (4.245 to 4.250 in.) Diameter of bore for main bearing.............................. 80.416 to 80.442 mm (3.1660 to 3.1670 in.)

Engine Specifications

Table 34. Cylinder Liners (Engines YG and YH) (Continued) Inside diameter of service cylinder liner (installed) .. 100.00 to 100.06 mm (3.937 to 3.939 in.) Maximum wear of liner bore ................................... 0.25 mm (0.010 in.) Thickness of flange .......... 3.81 to 3.86 mm (0.150 to 0.152 in.) Top of flange even with face of engine block .......... 0.10 mm (0.004 in.) above 0.10 mm (0.004 in.) below

Table 35. Cylinder Liner Specifications (Partially Finished)

Diameter, camshaft bore (Engines YG and YH): to No. 1 ......................... 55.56 to 55.59 mm (2.188 to 2.189 in.) to No. 2 ......................... 50.55 to 50.60 mm (1.990 to 1.992 in.) to No. 3 ......................... 50.29 to 50.34 mm (1.980 to 1.982 in.) to No. 4 ......................... 50.04 to 50.09 mm (1.970 to 1.972 in.) Bore in bushing for No. 1 camshaft journal .............. 50.79 to 50.85 mm (2.000 to 2.002 in.)

Table 34. Cylinder Liners (Engines YG and YH) Outside diameter, production cylinder liner................................... 104.25 to 104.28 mm (4.105 to 4.106 in.) Fit of production cylinder liner................................... 0.03 to 0.08 mm (0.001 to 0.003 in.) Inside diameter of production cylinder liner................................... 100.00 to 100.03 mm (3.937 to 3.9385 in.) Fit of service cylinder liner................................... Âą0.03 mm (Âą0.001 in.)

CAUTION Special training and equipment is needed to machine the finish of a partially finished line. For further information contact your nearest Perkins Distributor. Partially finished liner Interference fit of liner in parent bore ...................... 0.025 to 0.076 mm (0.0010 to 0.0030 in.) Inside diameter of partially machined liner.................................. 99.162 to 99.415 mm (3.9040 to 3.9139 in.) Preliminary bore Final size of liner before it is honed ........................ 99.873 to 99.924 mm (3.9320 to 3.9340 in.) Surface finish .................. Ra 3.2 to 4.0 micrometers Maximum ovality and taper................................. 0.02 mm (0.0008 in.) Diamond hone Hone angle (cross hatch) ............................... 35 Finish size, diamond honed ............................... 99.95 mm (3.9350 in.) Surface finish .................. Ra 2.2 to 3.0 micrometers

107


Engine Specifications

Table 35. Cylinder Liner Specifications (Partially Finished) (Continued) Maximum ovality and taper................................. 0.012 mm (0.0005 in.) Silicone carbide base hone Hone angle (cross hatch) ............................... 35 Finish size, silicone carbide base hone ............ 100.012 mm (3.9374 in.) Surface finish .................. Ra 1.3 to 1.6 micrometers Maximum ovality and taper................................. 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.) Silicone carbide plateau hone Final finish size, carbide (plateau hone).................. 100.017 mm (3.9376 in.) Final surface finish grade ................................ 0.65 to 1.3 micrometers

CAUTION Special training and equipment are needed to correctly finish the internal bore of a cylinder liner with a hone. Contact your nearest Perkins dealer.

TURBOCHARGER

600 SRM 705

Table 36. Oil Pump (Engine AR) (Continued) Clearance of outer rotor to pump body ................... 0.15 to 0.34 mm (0.006 to 0.013 in.) Clearance of inner rotor to outer rotor ................... 0.04 to 0.13 mm (0.0015 to 0.0050 in.) Axial movement, rotor .... 0.03 to 0.10 mm (0.001 to 0.004 in.) Axial clearance of idler gear .................................. 0.012 to 0.643 mm (0.0005 to 0.0253 in.)

Table 37. Oil Pump (Engines YG and YH) Type .................................. Differential rotor, gear driven Number of lobes ............... Inner rotor 4, outer rotor 5 Clearance of outer rotor to pump body .................... 0.15 to 0.34 mm (0.006 to 0.013 in.) Clearance of inner rotor to outer rotor .................... 0.04 to 0.13 mm (0.0015 to 0.0050 in.) End clearance, Engine YG

Refer to the following table for specifications for the turbocharger.

to Inner rotor................ 0.05 to 0.12 mm (0.002 to 0.005 in.)

Engine YH ....................... Garrett T32

to Outer rotor ............... 0.04 to 0.11 mm (0.0015 to 0.0044 in.)

LUBRICATION SYSTEM Refer to the following tables for specifications for the lubrication system. Table 36. Oil Pump (Engine AR) Type ................................. Differential rotor, gear driven Number of lobes .............. Inner rotor 6, outer rotor 7

108

End clearance, Engine YH to Inner rotor................ 0.043 to 0.118 mm (0.0017 to 0.0046 in.) to Outer rotor ............... 0.031 to 0.106 mm (0.0012 to 0.0042 in.) Axial clearance of idler gear ................................... 0.020 to 0.650 mm (0.0008 to 0.0256 in.)


600 SRM 705

Engine Specifications

Table 38. Idler Gear for Oil Pump End float: Engine AR .................... 0.012 to 0.643 mm (0.0005 to 0.0253 in.) Engine YG and YH ...... 0.020 to 0.650 mm (0.0008 to 0.0256 in.) Inside diameter of bush (fitted) ............................... 22.23 to 22.26 mm (0.875 to 0.876 in.) Outside diameter of idler shaft .................................. 22.19 to 22.21 mm (0.873 to 0.874 in.) Clearance of bush of idler gear on shaft..................... 0.020 to 0.066 mm (0.0008 to 0.0026 in.)

Table 39. Relief Valve Diameter, bore for plunger............................. 18.24 to 18.27 mm (0.718 to 0.719 in.) Outside diameter, plunger............................. 18.16 to 18.18 mm (0.715 to 0.716 in.)

Table 39. Relief Valve (Continued) Load on spring, installed (Engines YG and YH) ..... 12.9 to 18.6 N (2.9 to 4.2 lbf) Pressure to open valve (Engine AR) ..................... 415 to 470 kPa (60 to 68 psi) Pressure to open valve (Engines YG and YH) ..... 345 to 414 kPa (50 to 60 psi)

Table 40. Oil Filter Type ................................. Full flow, canister Pressure to open bypass valve in oil filter .............. 55 to 83 kPa (8 to 12 psi) Pressure to open bypass valve in oil cooler............. 172 kPa (25 psi)

FUEL SYSTEM Refer to the following tables for specifications for the fuel system. Table 41. Lucas Fuel Injection Pump

Clearance of plunger in bore .................................. 0.06 to 0.11 mm (0.002 to 0.004 in.)

Type (Engines AR and YG) ................................... DP200 series

Length of spring, installed (Engine AR)...... 59.8 mm (2.4 in.)

Type (Engine YH)............ DP200 series with boost control

Length of spring, installed (Engines YG and YH)............................ 55.6 mm (2.2 in.)

Direction of rotation (from drive end)............... Clockwise

Load on spring, installed (Engine AR) ..................... 15.9 to 23.1 N (3.6 to 5.2 lbf)

Static timing: Timing pin and with the engine set with number one piston at TDC on the compression stroke. The pump is checked with the pump set at the start of injection for cylinder number one.

109


Engine Specifications

600 SRM 705 Table 42. Fuel Injector Codes

Code

Holder

Nozzle

Set and reset Pressure atm

(lbf/in 2)

MPa

KB

2645A308

2645A624

300

4410

30.4

KC

2645A309

2645A625

290

4263

29.4

KD

2645A310

2645A626

290

4263

29.4

KE

2645A311

2645A627

290

4337

29.9

KF

2645A311

2645A628

295

4337

29.9

KG

2645A314

2645A629

300

4410

30.4

KH

2645A314

2645A630

290

4263

29.4

KJ

2645A315

2645A631

250

3675

25.3

KK

2645A312

2645A632

300

4410

30.4

KL

2645A312

2645A633

300

4410

30.4

KM

2645A313

2645A634

300

4410

30.4

KN

2645A315

2645A635

290

4263

29.4

KP

2645A311

2645A636

290

4410

30.4

KR

2645A311

2645A608

290

4263

29.4

KT

2645A311

2645A638

290

4263

29.4

KS

2645A316

2645A637

290

4263

29.4

KU

2645A317

2645A627

290

4322

29.8

KV

2645A304

2645L615

250

3675

25.3

KW

2645A311

2645K609

290

4263

29.4

NX

2645L306

2645L617

290

4263

29.4

NY

2645L308

2645L618

290

4263

29.4

NZ

2645L307

2645L619

290

4263

29.4

PA

2645L309

2645L620

290

4263

29.4

PB

2645L310

2645L621

290

4263

29.4

PC

2645L310

2645L622

290

4263

29.4

PD

2645L310

2645L622

275

4043

27.9

RZ

0430 133 005

DSLA140P707

250

3675

25.3

SA

2645F316

2645F620

250

3675

25.3

SB

2645F316

2645F621

250

3675

25.3

SC

0430 133 06

DSLA150PV3378123

250

3675

25.3

The code letters are on the side of the fuel injector body and just below the connection for the nut of the high pressure line.

110


600 SRM 705

Engine Specifications

Table 43. Fuel Pump (Engine AR) Type ................................. A.C. Delco, types XD Method of drive ............... Eccentric on camshaft Static pressure (no delivery) ........................... 42 to 70 kPa (6 to 10 psi) Test pressure (75% of minimum static pressure) .......................... 31 kPa (4.5 psi)

Table 47. Thermostat Type, Engine AR ............. Single, wax element, bypass blanking Type, Engines YG and YH .................................... Twin, wax element, bypass blanking "Start to open" ................. 77 to 85 C (170 to 185 F) "Fully open" ..................... 92 to 98 C (198 to 208 F) Valve lift, fully open ........ 9.0 mm (0.35 in.)

Table 44. Fuel Pump (Engines YG and YH) Type ................................. A.C. Delco, types LU Method of drive ............... Eccentric on camshaft Static pressure (no delivery) ........................... 34.5 to 55.2 kPa (5 to 8 psi) Test pressure (75% of minimum static pressure) .......................... 26 kPa (3.77 psi)

Table 45. Fuel Filter Type ................................. single element

Table 48. Fan Drive Housing Bore of housing for bearing ............................. 41.9655 to 41.9785 mm (1.6529 to 1.6522 in.) Outside diameter, bearing ............................. 41.987 to 42.00 mm (1.6535 to 1.6530 in.) Press fit, bearing in housing ............................ 0.0085 to 0.0345 mm (0.00033 to 0.00136 in.) Bore of hub ...................... 21.938 to 21.958 mm (0.8637 to 0.8645 in.)

(YG and YH engines are equipped with twin parallel flow filters)

Outside diameter of shaft ................................. 21.987 to 22.00 mm (0.8656 to 0.8661 in.)

COOLING SYSTEM

Press fit, shaft in hub ..... 0.029 to 0.062 mm (0.0011 to 0.0024 in.)

Refer to the following tables for specifications for the cooling system.

Maximum axial movement ........................ 0.200 mm (0.0079 in.)

Table 46. Coolant Pump Type ................................. centrifugal, gear drive

FLYWHEEL AND HOUSING Refer to the following table for specifications for the flywheel and housing.

111


Torque Specifications

600 SRM 705

Table 49. Limits for Flywheel Run Out and Alignment (Total Indicator Reading)

Table 50. Alternator Type ................................. Delco Remy or Motorola

Diameter of Housing Maximum Limit (Total Flange Bore Indicator Reading) Table 51. Starter Motor

mm

in.

mm

in.

362

14.25

0.23

0.009

410

16.14

0.25

0.010

448

17.63

0.28

0.011

511

20.11

0.30

0.012

584

22.99

0.36

0.014

Type .................................. Diesel fuel, electrically operated heater

648

25.51

0.41

0.016

Voltage .............................. 12 volts

787

30.98

0.48

0.019

Fuel flow ........................... 3.5 to 5.9 milliliters/ minute

Type .................................. Delco Remy

Table 52. Cold Start Aid

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT Refer to the following tables for specifications for the electrical equipment.

Torque Specifications CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY Capscrews, Cylinder Head 1/2 UNF (Special Procedure, see Cylinder Head Assembly, Install)

Banjo Bolts, Piston Cooling Jets 3/8 UNF 27 N•m (20 lbf ft)

CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY

Fasteners, Rocker Arm Brackets Aluminum M12 40 N•m (30 lbf ft) Cast Iron M12 75 N•m (55 lbf ft)

Capscrews, Main Bearings (Six-Cylinder Engines) 5/8 UNF 265 N•m (195 lbf ft)

Cap Nuts, Valve Cover M12 20 N•m (15 lbf ft)

Capscrews, Crankshaft Pulley 7/16 UNF 115 N•m (85 lbf ft)

Capscrews, Inlet Manifold to Cylinder Head M10 44 N•m (32 lbf ft)

Capscrews, Viscous Damper to Crankshaft Pulley M12 75 N•m (55 lbf ft)

Nuts (Cadmium Plated), Exhaust Manifold to Cylinder Head M10 44 N•m (32 lbf ft) Capscrews, Engine Lift Brackets M10 44 N•m (32 lbf ft)

PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLIES Nuts, Connecting Rods 1/2 UNF 125 N•m (92 lbf ft) Capscrews, Connecting Rods 1/2 UNF 155 N•m (114 lbf ft)

112

Capscrews, Damper to Crankshaft Pulley M8 35 N•m (26 lbf ft) Capscrews, Rear Oil Seal Housing to Engine Block M8 22 N•m (16 lbf ft) Capscrews, Bridge Piece to Cylinder Block M6 16 N•m (12 lbf ft) Capscrews, Rear Oil Seal Housing to Bridge Piece M6 13 N•m (10 lbf ft)


600 SRM 705 Torx-screw, Rear Oil Seal Housing to Engine Block M8 18 N•m (13 lbf ft)

TIMING CASE AND DRIVE ASSEMBLY Capscrews, Timing Case to Engine Block M8 22 N•m (16 lbf ft) Capscrews, Timing Case to Engine Block M10 44 N•m (32 lbf ft) Capscrews, Hub of Idler Gear M10 44 N•m (32 lbf ft) Capscrew, Camshaft Gear M12 95 N•m (70 lbf ft) Capscrews, Timing Case Cover to Timing Case M8 22 N•m (16 lbf ft) Nuts, Timing Case Cover to Timing Case M8 22 N•m (16 lbf ft)

Torque Specifications Nut for Fuel Injector Body 40 N•m (30 lbf ft) Capscrews for Gear of Fuel Injection Pump M10 28 N•m (20 lbf ft) Special (Torx) Screws for Gear of Fuel Injection Pump M10 22 N•m (16 lbf ft) Nuts for Flange of Fuel Injection Pump M8 22 N•m (16 lbf ft) Locking Screw of Lucas DP 200 Fuel Injection Pump 10A/F 10 N•m (7 lbf ft)

COOLING SYSTEM Capscrews for Fan Drive Housing to Timing Case M10 44 N•m (32 lbf ft)

TURBOCHARGER

Capscrews, Fan Drive Pulley to Hub M8 22 N•m (16 lbf ft)

Nuts, Turbocharger to Manifold M10 44 N•m (32 lbf ft)

Capscrews, Fan Drive Pulley to Hub M10 44 N•m (32 lbf ft)

LUBRICATION SYSTEM

Capscrews, Fan M8 22 N•m (16 lbf ft)

Drain Plug, Oil Sump 3/4 UNF 34 N•m (25 lbf ft)

FLYWHEEL

Capscrews, Oil Pump to Front Bearing Cap M8 22 N•m (16 lbf ft)

Capscrews, Flywheel to Crankshaft 1/2 UNF 105 N•m (77 lbf ft)

Capscrews, Cover for Oil Pump M8 28 N•m (21 lbf ft)

AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT

Fasteners, Oil Sump M8 22 N•m (16 lbf ft)

Nut, Air Compressor Drive Gear to Compressor Drive Shaft 5/8 UNF 120 N•m (88 lbf ft)

FUEL SYSTEM Nuts, High to Pressure Fuel Lines M12 22 N•m (16 lbf ft) Bolt, Leak-Off Connection M8 9 N•m (7 lbf ft) Capscrews, Fuel Lift Pump M8 22 N•m (16 lbf ft)

Nut, (30 A/F) Air Compressor Gears M20 130 N•m (96 lbf ft) Capscrew, Bracket to Idler Hub M10 60 N•m (44 lbf ft) Capscrew, Bracket to Timing Case M8 35 N•m (26 lbf ft)

113


Special Torque Specifications

600 SRM 705

Special Torque Specifications FLYWHEEL AND HOUSING

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Capscrews, Flywheel to Crankshaft 1/2 UNF 105 N•m (77 lbf ft)

Nut, Alternator Pulley CAV AC5RA and AC5RS 5/8 UNF 55 N•m (40 lbf ft) Thin Nut A127, and Motorola Pulley, 22 mm A/F M17 60 N•m (44 lbf ft) Thick Nut A127, and Motorola Pulley, 24 mm A/F M17 80 N•m (59 lbf ft) Bosch 55A M14 45 N•m (33 lbf ft) Bosch 55A M16 50 N•m (37 lbf ft) Butec 5524 5/8 UNF 78 N•m (58 lbf ft)

Capscrews, Cast Iron Flywheel Housing to Cylinder Block M10 44 N•m (32 lbf ft) Head Stamped 8.8 M12 75 N•m (55 lbf ft) Head Stamped 10.9 M10 63 N•m (46 lbf ft) Head Stamped 10.9 M12 115 N•m (85 lbf ft) Capscrews, Aluminum Flywheel Housing to Cylinder Block M10 70 N•m (52 lbf ft) Capscrews, Flywheel Housing to Cylinder Block (Paper Joint) M10 70 N•m (52 lbf ft)

TURBOCHARGER Nuts, Turbocharger to Manifold M10 44 N•m (32 lbf ft)

Fuelled Start Aid to Induction Manifold 7/8 UNF 31 N•m (23 lbf ft) Port Heater to Induction Manifold M22 60 N•m (44 lbf ft) Nut/Screw, Starter Motor 3/8 UNF 30 N•m (22 lbf ft)

AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Nut, Compressor Drive Gear to Compressor Crankshaft 5/8 UNF 120 N•m (88 lbf ft) Nut (30 A/F), Compressor Gears M20 130 N•m (96 lbf ft) Capscrew, Bracket to Idler Hub M10 60 N•m (44 lbf ft) Capscrew, Bracket to Timing Case M8 35 N•m (26 lbf ft)

114


600 SRM 705

Special Tools*

Special Tools* Remove and replace tool for valve guides.

Adapter tool for use with tool for valve guides.

Adapter tool (inlet valves) for use with tool for valve guides.

Adapter tool (exhaust valves) for use with tool for valve guides.

Timing pin for Lucas fuel injection pumps.

Gauge for piston height, valve depth, and cylinder liner flange; for use with dial gauge.

Contact your Perkins dealer for special tools.

115


Special Tools*

600 SRM 705

Dial gauge for use with gauge for piston height, valve depth, and cylinder liner flange.

Replacement tool for rear seal of crankshaft.

Remove and replace tool for cylinder liner.

Adapters for use with tool for cylinder liner.

Puller for camshaft gear.

Adapters for use with puller for camshaft gear.

Contact your Perkins dealer for special tools.

116


600 SRM 705

Special Tools*

Alignment tool for timing case cover (four-cylinder engines).

Alignment tool for timing case cover (six-cylinder engines).

Replacement tool for seal of timing case cover.

Pressure plate for use with tool for seal of timing case cover.

Fastener plate for use with tool for seal of timing case cover.

Sleeve for use with tool for seal of timing case cover.

Contact your Perkins dealer for special tools.

117


Special Tools*

600 SRM 705

Seal adapter for use with tool for seal of timing case cover.

Replacement tool for pistons.

Valve spring compressor.

Stud adapter for use with valve spring compressor.

Capscrew adapter for use with valve spring compressor.

Angle gauge to tighten cylinder head capscrews.

Contact your Perkins dealer for special tools.

118


600 SRM 705

Special Tools*

Set of adjustable cutters for valve seats.

Handle set for valve seat cutters.

Coolant pump oil seal replacer tool.

Angle gauge to tighten cylinder head capscrews.

Contact your Perkins dealer for special tools.

119


Troubleshooting

600 SRM 705

Troubleshooting Trouble

Possible Causes Checks by the user

Checks by service personnel

The starter motor turns the engine too slowly

1, 2, 3, 4

13, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 40, 42, 43 44

The engine is difficult to start

5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 15, 17

13, 34, 36, 37, 38, 40, 42, 43, 44

Not enough power

8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21

13, 34, 36, 37, 38, 39, 42, 43, 44, 61, 63

Misfire

8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 15, 20, 22

13, 34, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 43

Uses too much fuel

11, 15, 17, 18, 19, 21, 22

13, 34, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 44, 63

Black exhaust smoke

11, 15, 17, 19, 21, 22

13, 34, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 44, 61, 63

Blue or white exhaust smoke

4, 15, 21, 23

36, 37, 38, 39, 42, 44, 45, 52, 58, 62

The engine oil pressure is too low

4, 24, 25, 26

46, 47, 48, 50, 51, 59

The engine "knocks"

9, 15, 17, 20, 22, 23

13, 36, 37, 40, 42, 44, 46, 52, 53, 60

The engine operation is not constant

7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 15, 16, 18, 20, 22, 23

13, 34, 38, 40, 41, 44, 52, 60

Unusual vibration

18, 20, 27, 28

13, 34, 38, 39, 40, 41, 44, 52, 54

The engine oil pressure is too high

4, 25

49

The engine temperature is too high

11, 15, 19, 27, 29, 30, 32

13, 34, 36, 37, 39, 52, 55, 56, 57

High crankcase pressure

31, 33

39, 42, 44, 45, 52

Bad compression

11, 22

37, 39, 40, 42, 43, 44, 45, 53, 60

The engine starts and stops

10, 11, 12

Table 53. List of Possible Causes

Table 53. List of Possible Causes (Continued)

1

Battery capacity is low.

2

Bad electrical connections.

11 Restriction in air cleaner or air induction system.

3

Fault in starter motor.

12 Air in fuel system.

4

Wrong grade of lubricating oil.

13 Fault in fuel injector.

5

Starter motor turns too slowly.

14 Cold start air used wrong.

6

Fuel tank is empty.

15 Fault in cold start system.

7

Fault in engine "STOP" control.

16 Restriction in vent of fuel tank.

8

Restriction in fuel line.

17 Wrong type or wrong grade of fuel.

9

Fault in fuel pump.

18 Malfunction in engine speed control.

10 Dirty fuel element.

19 Restriction in exhaust pipe. 20 Engine temperature is too high.

120


600 SRM 705

Troubleshooting

Table 53. List of Possible Causes (Continued)

Table 53. List of Possible Causes (Continued)

21 Engine temperature is too low.

43 Leaks between a valve and its seat.

22 Valve clearances are wrong.

44 Piston rings are worn, broken, or frozen in piston.

23 Air filter has a restriction. 24 Not enough engine oil in the sump. 25 Pressure gauge has a malfunction. 26 Filter for engine oil is dirty. 27 Cooling fan is damaged. 28 Engine mount has a problem.

45 Valve stems and valve guides are worn. 46 Crankshaft bearings are worn or damaged. 47 Engine oil pump is worn. 48 Relief valve on engine oil pump does not close. 49 Relief valve on engine oil pump does not open.

29 Too much engine oil in the sump.

50 Relief valve spring on engine oil pump is broken.

30 Restriction in the air or coolant passages in the radiator.

51 Fault in suction pipe of engine oil pump.

31 Restriction in the breather pipe. 32 Cooling system needs coolant. 33 Engine vent system has a restriction. 34 Fuel injection pump has a fault.

52 A piston is damaged. 53 The height of a piston is wrong. 54 Flywheel or flywheel housing is not aligned correctly.

35 Broken drive on fuel injection pump.

55 Thermostat has a fault or is the wrong temperature range.

36 Timing on fuel injection pump is wrong.

57 Coolant pump is damaged.

37 Valve timing is wrong.

58 A seal on a valve stem is leaking.

38 Low compression.

59 Restriction in the strainer in the oil sump.

39 Leak in cylinder head gasket.

60 A valve spring is broken.

40 A valve is damaged.

61 Turbocharger impeller is damaged or dirty.

41 High pressure fuel lines are wrong.

62 Lubrication oil seal of turbocharger leaks.

42 Worn cylinder bores.

63 Induction system (with turbocharger) leaks.

121


NOTES ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

122



SINGLE-SPEED POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) [D004]; S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]

PART NO. 897308

1300 SRM 397


Single-Speed Powershift Transmission

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS General ............................................................................................................................................................... Transmission Repair .......................................................................................................................................... Remove ........................................................................................................................................................... Disassemble ................................................................................................................................................... Transmission, Disassemble....................................................................................................................... Input Shaft, Disassemble.......................................................................................................................... Reverse Clutch, Disassemble.................................................................................................................... Output Shaft (Pinion) and Differential, Remove and Disassemble........................................................ Clean and Inspect .......................................................................................................................................... Assemble ........................................................................................................................................................ Input Shaft, Assemble............................................................................................................................... Reverse Clutch, Assemble......................................................................................................................... Output Shaft (Pinion) and Differential, Assemble and Install............................................................... Transmission, Assemble............................................................................................................................ Control Valve, Install ................................................................................................................................ Install ............................................................................................................................................................. Control Valve Repair.......................................................................................................................................... Remove, Early Model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Lift Trucks .................................................................... Disassemble, Early Model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Lift Trucks ............................................................ Assemble, Early Model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Lift Trucks ................................................................. Install, Early Model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Lift Trucks ...................................................................... Remove and Disassemble, Later Model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Trucks and S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) Lift Truck Models.................................................................................................................... Inspect, Later Model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Trucks and S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) Lift Truck Models.................................................................................................................................................. Assemble and Install, Later Model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Trucks and S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) Lift Truck Models.................................................................................................................... MONOTROL® Pedal Repair .............................................................................................................................. Remove and Disassemble, S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Model Lift Trucks ................................................. Assemble and Install, S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Model Lift Trucks ........................................................ Remove and Disassemble, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) Model Lift Trucks ............................................... Assemble and Install, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) Model Lift Trucks ...................................................... Direction Control Lever Repair......................................................................................................................... Remove and Disassemble .............................................................................................................................. Assemble and Install ..................................................................................................................................... Stall Test............................................................................................................................................................. Linkages Adjustment......................................................................................................................................... Linkage for Inching/Brake Pedal, S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (D004) Lift Truck Models......................... Linkage for Direction Control Lever ............................................................................................................ Linkage for Inching/Brake Pedal, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004, F004) Lift Truck Models ............ Brake Shoe Adjustment ............................................................................................................................ Inching/Brake Pedal Height Adjustment................................................................................................. Single Pedal Height Adjustment.......................................................................................................... Two Pedal Height Adjustment ............................................................................................................. Inching/Brake Linkage Adjustment......................................................................................................... Oil Pressures Check........................................................................................................................................... System Pressure Check Port......................................................................................................................... Torque Converter Check Port ....................................................................................................................... Clutch Pressure Check Port.......................................................................................................................... Inching Pressure............................................................................................................................................ Solenoid Check Ports (MONOTROL Control Only).....................................................................................

©2004 HYSTER COMPANY

1 1 1 2 2 3 5 8 10 10 11 19 24 31 34 34 35 35 35 36 36 36 39 39 41 41 42 44 44 46 46 46 47 48 48 50 50 50 50 50 50 52 54 54 54 55 55 57

i


Table of Contents

Single-Speed Powershift Transmission

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Lubrication Pressure Check Ports................................................................................................................ System Pressure Check Port......................................................................................................................... Torque Converter Check Port ....................................................................................................................... Reverse Clutch Pressure Check Port............................................................................................................ Forward Clutch Pressure Check Port........................................................................................................... Lubrication Pressure Check Port ................................................................................................................. Modulator Pressure Check Port.................................................................................................................... Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................................. This section is for the following models: S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) [D004]; S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]

ii

57 57 57 57 57 57 57 58


1300 SRM 397

Transmission Repair

General This section contains the repair procedures and troubleshooting table for the parts of the transmission assembly.

Transmission Repair REMOVE Remove engine, transmission, and torque converter as an assembly as follows: 1. Put lift truck on blocks. See Periodic Maintenance section for correct procedures to put lift truck on blocks. Remove cover between hood and counterweight. Remove overhead guard, hood, and hood cross bar. Remove floor plates. 2. Disconnect cables at battery. Remove battery and battery tray. 3. Remove radiator, fan, and fan shroud. Disconnect exhaust pipe at the exhaust headers. Remove air filter housing from frame. 4. Disconnect fuel lines at engine. Disconnect throttle linkage at engine. Disconnect wires and wiring harnesses at engine. 5. Disconnect hydraulic line between hydraulic filter and hydraulic tank. Put plugs in open holes and move filter toward cowl. Disconnect oil lines at hydraulic pump. Drain hydraulic tank and put plugs on open ports. 6. Remove accelerator or MONOTROLÂŽ pedal assembly. Remove brake pedal shaft. Disconnect lines at brake booster and remove brake booster and bracket. 7. Disconnect inching linkage at transmission. On lift trucks with manual control, disconnect direction control linkage at transmission. Disconnect supply line at main control valve and put a plug on supply line.

8. Drain oil from axle housing. Remove capscrews that hold axle shafts to hubs. Remove axle shafts. 9. Connect lifting device to engine and transmission. Make sure lifting device is holding weight of engine and transmission. Remove bolts that hold engine mounts to frame of lift truck. 10. Remove clamp for parking brake cable at bottom of transmission. Remove capscrews that hold drive axle housing to transmission housing. There are two holes with threads in drive axle housing. Use capscrews in these holes to separate housings. 11. Carefully lift engine and transmission from frame. Put engine in a position so it is stable and will not fall over. 12. Remove access cover in torque converter housing. Remove capscrews that hold drive plate to flywheel. Use a wire to hold torque converter to transmission. 13. Put straps around transmission and connect lifting device to straps. Make sure lifting device is holding weight of transmission. Remove capscrews that hold torque converter housing to flywheel housing. There are two holes in torque converter housing with threads. Use capscrews in these holes to push torque converter housing from flywheel housing. Remove transmission from engine, making sure torque converter does not fall from transmission. Also check that bearing for pump drive gear is out of torque converter housing.

1


Transmission Repair

1300 SRM 397

DISASSEMBLE Transmission, Disassemble Disassemble the transmission as follows: STEP 1. Remove torque converter from input shaft. Remove torque converter housing from transmission. Remove oil pump only for inspection or replacement. If oil pump is worn or damaged, it must be replaced as an assembly.

1. TORQUE CONVERTER HOUSING 2. OIL PUMP STEP 2. Put transmission in vertical position. Remove capscrews holding cover to transmission housing. Remove cover from housing. Do not damage seal ring on input shaft. Pull shaft assemblies from housing. Pull countershaft first, then the reverse clutch shaft, and the input shaft. Be careful not to damage seal rings on ends of shafts.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

2

TRANSMISSION HOUSING SEAL RING INPUT SHAFT COUNTERSHAFT REVERSE CLUTCH SHAFT OUTPUT GEAR


1300 SRM 397

Transmission Repair

Input Shaft, Disassemble Disassemble input shaft as follows: NOTE: Keep parts for each clutch assembly together. Do not mix parts between shaft assemblies. If original friction discs and separator plates are going to be installed again, be sure to keep them in the same sequence. STEP 1. Put clutch housing in vise. Remove seal ring from shaft. Pull bearing from shaft. Remove snap ring that holds bearing for hub on shaft. Remove clutch hub from shaft.

1. 2. 3. 4.

INPUT SHAFT SEAL RING BEARING CLUTCH HUB

1. 2. 3. 4.

HUB BEARING SNAP RING SPACER

STEP 2. If necessary, remove bearings, snap rings, and spacer from hub.

3


Transmission Repair

1300 SRM 397

STEP 3. Remove snap ring for pressure plate. Remove pressure plate. Remove separator plates and friction discs. For lift trucks with Exedy clutch assemblies, remove the conical plate, then remove the separator plates and friction discs.

NOTE: The conical plate is used only on lift trucks with Exedy clutch assemblies. 1. SNAP RING 2. PRESSURE PLATE 3. SEPARATOR PLATES, FRICTION DISCS AND CONICAL PLATE STEP 4. Remove piston only if there is a problem with piston or seals. Use two bars to push down on spring retainer. Remove snap ring for retainer. Remove retainer, spring, and piston.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

4

PRY BAR SNAP RING SPRING RETAINER SPRING PISTON


1300 SRM 397

Transmission Repair

STEP 5. Remove seal rings from shaft. Remove bearing from shaft.

1. SEAL RING 2. BEARING

Reverse Clutch, Disassemble Disassemble reverse shaft as follows: STEP 1. Put clutch housing in vise. Pull bearing from shaft. Remove snap ring that holds bearing for hub on shaft. Remove clutch hub from shaft.

1. BEARING 2. SNAP RING 3. HUB

5


Transmission Repair

1300 SRM 397

STEP 2. If necessary, remove bearings, snap rings, and spacer from hub.

1. 2. 3. 4.

HUB BEARING SNAP RING SPACER

STEP 3. Remove snap ring for pressure plate. Remove pressure plate. Remove separator plates and friction discs. For lift trucks with Exedy clutch assemblies, remove the conical plate, then remove the separator plates and friction discs.

NOTE: The conical plate is used only on lift trucks with Exedy clutch assemblies. 1. SNAP RING 2. PRESSURE PLATE 3. SEPARATOR PLATES, FRICTION DISCS AND CONICAL PLATE

6


1300 SRM 397

Transmission Repair

STEP 4. Remove piston only if there is a problem with piston or seals. Use two bars to push down on spring retainer. Remove snap ring for retainer. Remove retainer, spring, and piston.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

PRY BAR SNAP RING SPRING RETAINER SPRING PISTON

STEP 5. Remove seal rings from shaft. Remove bearing from shaft.

1. SEAL RING 2. BEARING

7


Transmission Repair

1300 SRM 397

Output Shaft (Pinion) and Differential, Remove and Disassemble Remove output shaft (pinion) as follows: STEP 1. Loosen nut that holds output gear on shaft.

1. OUTPUT GEAR 2. NUT 3. OUTPUT SHAFT (PINION) STEP 2. If the same parts for the differential (bearings and gears) are going to be installed again, check ring gear and pinion clearance. Use the procedures described in section Transmission, Assemble. Also, when removing adjustment rings, count the number of turns it takes to remove each adjustment ring. Use the number of turns during the assembly procedures to put adjustment rings in the same position.

1. RING GEAR 2. DIAL INDICATOR

8


1300 SRM 397

Transmission Repair

STEP 3. Make identification marks with a punch on bearing caps, adjustment rings, and housing. Bearing caps and adjustment rings must be assembled in the same position in the housing. See STEP 4. Remove lock plates that hold adjustment rings in position.

1. BEARING CAP 2. ADJUSTMENT RING 3. LOCK PLATE STEP 4. Loosen four capscrews for bearing caps. If necessary, remove adjustment rings as described in STEP 3. Remove bearing caps, adjustment rings, and bearing cups. Remove ring gear and differential assembly.

1. BEARING CAP 2. RING GEAR 3. DIFFERENTIAL

9


Transmission Repair

1300 SRM 397

STEP 5. Remove nut and output gear from output shaft. Remove output shaft and bearings from housing.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

CLEAN AND INSPECT WARNING Cleaning solvents can be flammable and toxic and can cause skin irritation. When using cleaning solvents, always follow the recommendations of the manufacturer. 1. Clean parts of transmission with solvent. Make sure all passages in housing, cover, and shafts are clean. Clean gasket material from transmission housing, cover, and control valve. 2. Check edges of seal rings for wear or grooves. Check bore for seal rings for grooves. 3. Inspect bearings for damaged or worn rollers. Check bearing cups and thrust washers for worn surfaces or cracks. Check bearing surfaces of shafts for wear or damage. 4. Check all gears and shafts for damaged teeth or splines. 5. Inspect friction discs for burned lining. Check that friction discs still have grooves in lining.

10

OUTPUT SHAFT (PINION) SHIM BEARING CONE BEARING CUP SPACER OIL SEAL OUTPUT GEAR NUT

When new, grooves have a minimum depth of 0.38 mm (0.015 in.). On lift trucks without Exedy clutch assemblies, replace friction discs when depth of grooves is less than 0.13 mm (0.005 in.). On lift trucks with Exedy clutch assemblies, replace friction discs when depth of grooves is less than 2.2 mm (0.087 in.). NOTE: The conical plate is used only on lift trucks with Exedy clutch assemblies. 6. Check separator plates and conical plate to ensure they are not bent and do not have burned areas on them. Inspect teeth on separator plates and friction discs for damage. 7. Check pistons and bores for scratches.

ASSEMBLE NOTE: Lubricate all parts with clean transmission fluid during assembly. If removed, install output shaft before installing clutch assemblies. See Output Shaft (Pinion) and Differential, Assemble and Install.


1300 SRM 397

Transmission Repair

Input Shaft, Assemble Assemble input shaft (forward clutch) as follows (see Figure 1 and Figure 2): STEP 1. Lubricate and install O-ring for piston on shaft. Lubricate and install piston seal on piston. Make sure lip of seal is away from clutch plates. Use another ring (large O-ring) to hold piston seal in position for 5 minutes. Install piston in clutch housing for forward clutch.

1. 2. 3. 4.

O-RING SHAFT PISTON PISTON SEAL

11


Transmission Repair

1300 SRM 397

STEP 2. Install spring and spring retainer. Use two bars to hold spring retainer and install snap ring on shaft.

1. 2. 3. 4.

12

PISTON PRY BAR SPRING RETAINER SNAP RING


1300 SRM 397

Transmission Repair

STEP 3. Install separator plates and friction discs alternately in clutch housing. Start with a separator plate against piston. There are eight separator plates and eight friction discs for clutch assembly. Install pressure plate and snap ring. For lift trucks with Exedy clutch assemblies, install the conical plate with the cone side pressing against the piston.

A. LIFT TRUCKS WITHOUT EXEDY CLUTCH ASSEMBLIES B. LIFT TRUCKS WITH EXEDY CLUTCH ASSEMBLIES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

SEPARATOR PLATE FRICTION DISC PRESSURE PLATE SNAP RING CONICAL PLATE

13


Transmission Repair

1300 SRM 397

NOTE: Use this check only to make sure all friction discs and separator plates have been installed. Do not use this dimension to check for wear in clutch parts. Clearance dimension is only for new parts. The procedure in STEP 4 applies only to trucks without Exedy clutch assemblies. For lift trucks with Exedy clutch assemblies, go to STEP 5. STEP 4. Use a dial indicator to check clearance within clutch assembly. Hold pressure plate down and set gauge at zero. Use air pressure to move piston and engage clutch assembly. Check distance that pressure plate moves. With new parts installed, correct clearance (movement of the needle) in clutch assembly is 2.26 to 3.81 mm (0.089 to 0.150 in.).

1. PRESSURE PLATE 2. DIAL INDICATOR STEP 5. Install snap rings for bearings in hub. Install spacer and bearings in hub. Make sure seals in bearings are toward outside of hub (away from each other).

1. 2. 3. 4.

14

HUB BEARING SNAP RING SPACER


1300 SRM 397

Transmission Repair

STEP 6. Install hub on shaft. Make sure teeth on hub align with all friction discs. Install snap ring on shaft.

1. HUB 2. SNAP RING STEP 7. Install bearings on both ends of shaft. Install seal rings on shaft. Make sure ends of seal rings are connected together.

1. BEARINGS 2. SEAL RINGS

15


Transmission Repair

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

HUB PRESSURE PLATE FRICTION DISC SEPARATOR PLATE SNAP RING SPRING RETAINER

1300 SRM 397

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

SPRING PISTON PISTON SEAL CLUTCH HOUSING SEAL RING BEARING

Figure 1. Input (Forward) Clutch Assembly, Lift Trucks Without Exedy Clutch Assemblies

Figure 2. Input (Forward) Clutch Assembly, Lift Trucks With Exedy Clutch Assemblies

16


1300 SRM 397

Transmission Repair Legend for Figure 2

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

HUB PRESSURE PLATE FRICTION DISC SEPARATOR PLATE SNAP RING SPRING RETAINER SPRING PISTON

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

PISTON SEAL CLUTCH HOUSING SEAL RING BEARING CONICAL PLATE SPACER SEAL RING O-RING

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

HUB PRESSURE PLATE FRICTION DISC SEPARATOR PLATE SNAP RING SPRING RETAINER

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

SPRING PISTON PISTON SEAL CLUTCH HOUSING BEARING SEAL RING

Figure 3. Counter (Reverse) Clutch Assembly, Lift Trucks Without Exedy Clutch Assemblies

17


Transmission Repair

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

HUB PRESSURE PLATE FRICTION DISC SEPARATOR PLATE SNAP RING SPRING RETAINER SPRING

1300 SRM 397

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

PISTON PISTON SEAL CLUTCH HOUSING BALL BEARING SPACER CONICAL PLATE O-RING

Figure 4. Counter (Reverse) Clutch Assembly, Lift Trucks With Exedy Clutch Assemblies

18


1300 SRM 397

Transmission Repair

Reverse Clutch, Assemble Assemble reverse clutch assembly as follows (see Figure 3 and Figure 4): STEP 1. Lubricate and install O-ring for piston on shaft. Lubricate and install piston seal on piston. Make sure lip of seal is away from clutch plates. Use another ring (large O-ring) to hold piston seal in position for 5 minutes. Install piston in clutch housing.

1. 2. 3. 4.

O-RING SHAFT PISTON PISTON SEAL

19


Transmission Repair

1300 SRM 397

STEP 2. Install spring and spring retainer. Use two bars to hold spring retainer and install snap ring on shaft.

1. 2. 3. 4.

20

PISTON PRY BAR SPRING RETAINER SNAP RING


1300 SRM 397

Transmission Repair

STEP 3. Install separator plates and friction discs alternately in clutch housing. Start with a separator plate against piston. There are eight separator plates and eight friction discs for clutch assembly. Install pressure plate and snap ring. For lift trucks with Exedy clutch assemblies, install the conical plate with the cone side pressing against the piston.

A. LIFT TRUCKS WITHOUT EXEDY CLUTCH ASSEMBLIES B. LIFT TRUCKS WITH EXEDY CLUTCH ASSEMBLIES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

SEPARATOR PLATE FRICTION DISC PRESSURE PLATE SNAP RING CONICAL PLATE

21


Transmission Repair

1300 SRM 397

NOTE: Use this check only to make sure all friction discs and separator plates have been installed. Do not use this dimension to check for wear in clutch parts. Clearance dimension is only for new parts. The procedure in STEP 4 applies only to lift trucks without Exedy clutch assemblies. For lift trucks with Exedy clutch assemblies, go to STEP 5. STEP 4. Use a dial indicator to check clearance within the clutch assembly. Hold pressure plate down and set gauge at zero. Use air pressure to move piston and engage clutch assembly. Check distance that pressure plate moves. With new parts installed, correct clearance (movement of the needle) in clutch assembly is 2.26 to 3.81 mm (0.089 to 0.150 in.).

1. PRESSURE PLATE 2. DIAL INDICATOR STEP 5. Install snap rings for bearings in hub. Install spacer and bearings in hub. Make sure seals in bearings are toward outside of hub (away from each other).

1. 2. 3. 4.

22

HUB BEARING SNAP RING SPACER


1300 SRM 397

Transmission Repair

STEP 6. Install hub on shaft. Make sure teeth on hub align with all friction discs. Install snap ring on shaft.

1. HUB 2. SNAP RING STEP 7. Install bearings on both ends of shaft. Install seal rings on shaft. Make sure ends of seal rings are connected together. If pinion was not removed, proceed to Transmission, Assemble. If pinion needs to be installed, proceed to Output Shaft (Pinion) and Differential, Assemble and Install.

1. BEARINGS 2. SEAL RINGS

23


Transmission Repair

1300 SRM 397

Output Shaft (Pinion) and Differential, Assemble and Install Assemble and install output shaft (pinion) and differential as follows: STEP 1. Lubricate and install an axle gear and thrust washer in the differential case. Put spider gears and thrust washers on the spider. Put spider and gears in case. Install second axle gear and thrust washer. Align punch marks and put two halves of differential case together. Use a thread locking compound (Hyster Part No. 257291) on capscrews. Use four capscrews at equal places. Check that differential gears rotate correctly. Install remaining capscrews and tighten all capscrews to 140 N•m (105 lbf ft). If ring gear was removed from differential case, it must be heated in water before installation. Heat ring gear in water to 82 to 105 C (180 to 220 F) for 10 minutes. Remove ring gear from water and put it on differential case. Do not use a press or a hammer to install ring gear on differential case. Tighten capscrews to 65 N•m (50 lbf ft) according to pattern shown. Tighten capscrews to 140 N•m (105 lbf ft) according to pattern. Install bearing cones on differential case.

1. 2. 3. 4.

24

AXLE GEAR THRUST WASHER SPIDER GEAR DIFFERENTIAL CASE HALF

5. SPIDER 6. RING GEAR 7. BEARING CONE


1300 SRM 397

Transmission Repair

STEP 2. If the same ring and pinion and pinion bearings are to be installed again, use the same shim and spacer arrangement that was removed. If a new ring gear and pinion or new bearings must be installed, see the instructions in STEP 3 for installation of a new pinion assembly.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

PINION BEARING CONE BEARING CUP SHIM SPACER OUTPUT GEAR NUT OIL SEAL

STEP 3. Install bearing cups for pinion in transmission housing. Do not install oil seal at this time. Install shims on pinion. Use a press to install bearing cone on pinion. Install pinion in transmission housing. Install spacer, shim, and bearing cone on pinion. Install output gear and nut. NOTE: The special nut for the output gear can be used only once. The installation and removal of the special nut several times can damage the threads on the pinion. When making adjustments, use a nut with tapered end removed. When adjustment is correct, install new nut. STEP 4. Tighten nut for output gear to 750 N•m (550 lbf ft). Check rotating torque of pinion caused by preload on bearings. The limits are 1.7 to 3.4 N•m (15 to 30 lbf in). Add or remove shims between spacer and bearing cone near output gear to adjust bearing preload. When adjustment is correct, check adjustment of ring gear and pinion as described in STEP 5 through STEP 12. STEP 5. The ring gear and pinion are made in sets. Both the ring gear and pinion must have the same number. The adjustments of the ring gear and pinion are correct when the gear clearance, contact pattern, and bearing preload are correct. STEP 6. The dimension on the end of the pinion is the variation from the standard Gauge Distance. The Gauge Distance is the distance from the center of the ring gear to the bearing shoulder behind the pinion. Shims must be added between the pinion and the outer bearing cone to adjust for manufacturing tolerances.

25


Transmission Repair

1300 SRM 397

STEP 7. Look at the number on the pinion that was removed. Subtract the variation number that is on the new pinion. The remainder is the amount of shim thickness that must be adjusted from the shim set on the pinion that was removed (see table below). In examples 3 and 4, you can see that shims must be added. Examples 1 and 2 show that shims must be subtracted from the original shim set. Use this shim set as a reference. The final adjustment of the shims is set according to the contact pattern on the teeth of the ring gear. See Ring and Pinion Tooth Contact Adjustment.

Shims Adjustment Examples Number on OLD PINION Number on (NEW PINION) SHIMS TO BE REMOVED FROM OR ADDED TO THE OLD SET

1

2

3

4

+0.31 (+0.26)

+0.31 ( 0.26)

+0.26 (+0.31)

0.26 (+0.31)

0.05 mm REMOVE

0.57 mm REMOVE

0.05 mm ADD

0.57 mm ADD

STEP 8. Install parts for pinion, and check and adjust bearing preload as described in STEP 4. Make sure oil seal is installed and nut is tightened to 750 N•m (550 lbf ft) when adjustments are correct. Install differential assembly, bearing cups, adjustment rings, and bearing caps. Align marks on bearing caps with marks on housing. Only tighten capscrews for bearing caps so adjustment rings can be installed, held in alignment, and rotated for adjustment.

26


1300 SRM 397

Transmission Repair

STEP 9. Tighten adjustment rings to 15 N•m (133 lbf in) to remove clearance between adjusting rings and bearings. Make sure there is clearance between ring gear and pinion. Loosen adjustment rings only until there is zero clearance between the bearings and adjusting nuts. Tighten one adjustment ring four notches more than zero clearance to put a preload on bearings.

1. RING GEAR 2. ADJUSTMENT RING 3. BEARING CAP STEP 10. Check clearance between ring gear and pinion. Ring gear and pinion must have a clearance of 0.25 to 0.33 mm (0.010 to 0.013 in.). Move ring gear toward pinion to decrease clearance. Move ring gear away from pinion to increase clearance. Loosen adjustment ring on opposite side the same amount, while the other adjustment ring is tightened, to adjust clearance between ring gear and pinion.

1. 2. 3. 4.

RING GEAR ADJUSTMENT RING BEARING CAP DIAL INDICATOR

27


Transmission Repair

1300 SRM 397

STEP 11. Check contact pattern of gear teeth as shown in Ring and Pinion Tooth Contact Adjustment. Apply grease to teeth of ring gear. Put a pry bar between ring gear and housing to keep ring gear from turning freely. Turn pinion. Compare pattern with Ring and Pinion Tooth Contact Adjustment. Adjust gear clearances as necessary. STEP 12. Install lock plates for adjustment rings. Tighten capscrews to 20 N•m (177 lbf in). Install thrust bolt. Tighten thrust bolt until it touches ring gear. Loosen bolt until there is 0.39 to 0.50 mm (0.015 to 0.020 in.) clearance between bolt and ring gear. Tighten lock nut.

1. THRUST BOLT 2. LOCK NUT 3. RING GEAR

28


1300 SRM 397

Transmission Repair Table 1. Ring and Pinion Tooth Contact Adjustment

1. Apply a colored dye or grease to approximately 12 of the ring gear teeth. 2. Rotate ring gear forward and backward so that the 12 gear teeth go past the drive six times to get to the contact patterns. Repeat if needed to get a clearer pattern. 3. Check the tooth contact pattern on the ring gear. Make sure that the pattern is checked on the side of the tooth where the pinion applies the force.

Correct Tooth Contact The contact area is the center between the top and bottom of the tooth. The contact area is toward the inner circumference of the ring gear.

NOTE: Normal pattern during adjustment shown.

The contact area is the center between the top and the bottom of the tooth. The contact area will be almost the full length of the tooth.

NOTE: Wear pattern from operation shown.

29


Transmission Repair

1300 SRM 397

Table 1. Ring and Pinion Tooth Contact Adjustment (Continued) Incorrect Tooth Contact The pinion is too far away from the center of the gear. Add shims to move pinion toward ring gear. Check that the clearance is correct. Some movement of ring gear away from pinion may be necessary.

The pinion is too close to the center of the ring gear. Remove shims to move pinion away from the ring gear. Check that the clearance is correct. Some movement of the ring gear toward the pinion may be necessary.

30


1300 SRM 397

Transmission Repair

Transmission, Assemble STEP 1. Put transmission housing in vertical position. Install input shaft, reverse clutch shaft, and countershaft. Be careful not to damage seal rings on ends of each shaft. Clean flanges of housing and cover. Apply a sealant (Hyster Part No. 264159) to flange of housing and install cover. Make sure seal ring on input shaft is not damaged. Tighten capscrews for cover to 40 N•m (30 lbf ft). Install cold oil relief valve and spring in cover. Make sure other plugs are installed.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

TRANSMISSION HOUSING SEAL RING INPUT SHAFT COUNTERSHAFT REVERSE CLUTCH SHAFT OUTPUT GEAR

31


Transmission Repair

1300 SRM 397

STEP 2. Install oil pump with O-ring and stator tube on housing. Tighten capscrews for oil pump to 40 N•m (30 lbf ft).

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

32

OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY TRANSMISSION COVER STATOR TUBE O-RING INPUT SHAFT


1300 SRM 397

Transmission Repair

STEP 3. Install oil strainer, spring, and plug in housing. Install sending unit in housing.

1. PLUG 2. SPRING 3. SENDING UNIT STEP 4. Install torque converter housing on transmission. Apply a sealant (Hyster Part No. 264159) to flange of transmission cover. Tighten capscrews for housing to 40 N•m (30 lbf ft).

1. TORQUE CONVERTER

33


Transmission Repair

1300 SRM 397

Control Valve, Install Install the control valve as described in the section Control Valve Repair.

INSTALL 1. Install torque converter in transmission. Make sure teeth on torque converter are engaged with notches in oil pump. Use wire to hold torque converter in position. See Transmission, Assemble, STEP 4. 2. Put lifting straps around transmission and connect lifting device to straps. Use a sealant (Hyster Part No. 264159) on flange of torque converter housing. Remove wire from torque converter. Align torque converter housing with flywheel housing, making sure pilot on torque converter engages with flywheel. See Figure 5. Also check that bearing for drive gear of hydraulic pump is aligned with torque converter housing. 3. Install capscrews holding torque converter housing to flywheel housing. Tighten capscrews to 40 N•m (30 lbf ft). 4. Install capscrews that hold drive plate for torque converter to flywheel. Tighten capscrews to 45 N•m (35 lbf ft). Install access cover on torque converter housing. See Figure 5. 5. Connect lifting device to engine and transmission. Clean flanges on transmission housing and axle housing. Apply a sealant (Hyster Part No. 264159) to flange of transmission housing. 6. Install engine and transmission in lift truck. Carefully align transmission with axle housing. Install capscrews that hold axle housing to transmission. Tighten capscrews to 65 N•m (50 lbf ft). Install bolts for engine mounts. Tighten bolts to 120 N•m (90 lbf ft). 7. Install radiator, fan, and fan shroud. Connect radiator hoses and oil lines at radiator. Make sure all hoses are kept away from lower fan pulley. 8. Install brake booster. Connect oil lines to brake booster. Connect brake lines to master cylinder. Connect wires to brake switch on master cylinder. Connect oil lines to main control valve and transmission control valve.

34

1. TORQUE CONVERTER 2. DRIVE PLATE

3. FLYWHEEL 4. TORQUE CONVERTER HOUSING

Figure 5. Torque Converter 9. Install inching linkage and direction control linkage at transmission. Install inching/brake pedal shaft. Install accelerator or MONOTROL pedal. 10. Connect wiring harness and wires at engine and transmission. Connect throttle linkage and fuel lines at engine. Install and connect exhaust system. 11. Connect hydraulic lines for hydraulic pump and hydraulic filter. 12. Install battery tray and batteries. Install air filter assembly. 13. Check all fluid levels and fill as necessary. Remove air from brake system. Install floor plates and covers. Install hood. Install overhead guard. Connect cables at the battery.


1300 SRM 397

Control Valve Repair

Control Valve Repair REMOVE, EARLY MODEL S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) LIFT TRUCKS NOTE: The procedures described below for removing the control valve pertain to early model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (D004) lift trucks. To remove the control valve for later model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (D004) lift trucks and for S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004, F004) lift trucks, see the Remove and Disassemble, Later Model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Trucks and S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) Lift Truck Models section. 1. Disconnect linkages at spools. Disconnect wires at switch on control valve. Disconnect return line for oil cooler at control valve.

Model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Trucks and S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) Lift Truck Models section. NOTE: Make sure the area for disassembling the control valve is clean. Keep parts from each bore together.

WARNING The springs behind the plugs in the control valve can release quickly when the plugs are removed. Be careful when disassembling the control valve. 1. Remove stop for inching plunger and direction spool (manual control). See Figure 7.

2. Remove oil filter from control valve. If transmission has a MONOTROL pedal, remove solenoid assemblies. Remove capscrews holding control valve to transmission. See Figure 6.

1. CONTROL VALVE 2. OIL FILTER 3. REVERSE SOLENOID

4. FORWARD SOLENOID 5. NEUTRAL START SWITCH

Figure 6. Control Valve With MONOTROL Control

DISASSEMBLE, EARLY MODEL S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) LIFT TRUCKS NOTE: The procedures described below for disassembling the control valve pertain to early model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (D004) lift trucks. To disassemble the control valve for later model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (D004) lift trucks and for S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004, F004) lift trucks, see Remove and Disassemble, Later

1. STOP FOR INCHING PLUNGER 2. WASHER FOR INCHING SPOOL Figure 7. Control Valve Stops

35


Control Valve Repair 2. Remove detent ball assemblies and neutral start switch. Remove inching plunger and direction spool (manual control) from control valve. See Figure 6. 3. Remove plugs for pressure regulators, and remove regulator assemblies. Remove plug for direction spool (MONOTROL pedal) and remove spool. 4. Push on inching spool and remove washer from inching spool as shown in Figure 7. Remove inching spool and spring. 5. Clean surface of control valve. Make sure passages and orifices in valve body and spools are clean.

ASSEMBLE, EARLY MODEL S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) LIFT TRUCKS NOTE: The procedures described below for assembling the control valve pertain to early model S3.505.50XL (S70-120XL) (D004) lift trucks. To assemble the control valve for later model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (D004) lift trucks and for S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004, F004) lift trucks, see Assemble and Install, Later Model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Trucks and S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) Lift Truck Models section. Lubricate parts of control valve with clean transmission oil during assembly. See Figure 6. Make sure all spools move freely in their bores. Install O-rings on plugs for the spools. 1. Install regulator for torque converter and regulator for system pressure. Regulators are the same but springs are different. Spring for system relief regulator is longer. Install O-rings and plugs. 2. Install clutch pressure regulator and spring. Install accumulator spool and springs. Install O-rings and plugs. 3. Install spring and inching spool in bore. Install washer over end of spool. Install spring over end of inching spool. Install spring for inching plunger and inching plunger. 4. Install stop for inching plunger (see Figure 7). Install seal for inching plunger. 5. Install drain spool and spring. Install modulation spool and spring. Install O-rings and plugs. 6. Install direction spool as follows:

36

1300 SRM 397 a. For valves with solenoids, install washers, spring, and snap ring on spool. Install spool and plug in valve body. b. For valves with manual control, install spool in valve body. Install stop pin, making sure it is below the surface of the valve body. Install neutral start switch and detent ball assembly. Install seal for spool.

INSTALL, EARLY MODEL S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) LIFT TRUCKS NOTE: The procedures described below for installing the control valve pertain to early model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (D004) lift trucks. To install the control valve for later model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (D004) lift trucks and for S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004, F004) lift trucks, see Assemble and Install, Later Model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Trucks and S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) Lift Truck Models section. 1. Make sure surfaces of transmission and control valve are clean. Install gasket, making sure holes align with transmission. See Figure 6. 2. Install gasket and control valve on transmission housing. Install all capscrews for control valve. Tighten capscrews in the pattern of a circle, beginning at center of valve body. Tighten capscrews to 20 N•m (177 lbf in). 3. Install solenoid assemblies. Make sure O-rings and backup rings are installed correctly. Install tube at reverse solenoid. 4. Connect return line for oil cooler at fitting on control valve. Connect wires to switch and solenoids at control valve. Connect inching linkage and direction control linkage at control valve. Adjust linkages as described in Linkages Adjustment.

REMOVE AND DISASSEMBLE, LATER MODEL S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) TRUCKS AND S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) LIFT TRUCK MODELS NOTE: The removal and disassembly procedures described below pertain to later model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) lift trucks and S3.50-5.50XM (S70120XM) lift truck models. To remove and disassemble the control valve for early model S3.50-5.50XL


1300 SRM 397

Control Valve Repair

(S70-120XL) lift trucks, see section Remove, Early Model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Lift Trucks and section Disassemble, Early Model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Lift Trucks.

1. VALVE BODY 2. PRESSURE REGULATOR, TORQUE CONVERTER 3. PRESSURE REGULATOR, CLUTCH 4. SPRING 5. PLUG AND O-RING 6. INCHING SPOOL PLUNGER 7. OIL SEAL

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

1. Clean area around control valve. See Figure 8. Remove transmission oil filter. Disconnect inching linkage at control valve. Remove capscrews holding brake pedal bracket to frame.

FITTING COPPER GASKET SNAP RING SPRING CAP DIRECTION SPOOL INCHING SPOOL MODULATOR REGULATOR QUICK DUMP VALVE MODULATOR PISTON

17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25.

FORWARD SOLENOID REVERSE SOLENOID MANIFOLD TUBE GASKET PIN STOP FOR INCHING SPOOL FITTING SEAL KIT

Figure 8. Control Valve

37


Control Valve Repair 2. Put identification tags on wires at solenoids and disconnect them. Remove manifold from control valve. Remove tube for direction spool. 3. Remove capscrews and control valve from transmission. Remove control valve. Cover top of transmission to keep dirt out. See Figure 9.

1300 SRM 397 plugs so that the compressed springs do not cause injury. 5. Remove cap for direction spool. Remove direction spool. 6. Remove clip used for the stop from under the inching spool. See Figure 8 and Figure 10. Remove inching spool plunger and spring. Push inching spool against its spring and remove retainer washer from bottom of control valve. See Figure 11 and Figure 12. 7. Carefully remove plug for modulator piston. Remove modulator piston, springs, and modulator regulator. See Figure 8. 8. Carefully remove plug for clutch pressure regulator. Remove spool and spring. See Figure 8. 9. Carefully remove plug for pressure regulator and torque converter. Remove spring and spool. 10. Carefully remove plug for the modulator valve. Remove spool and spring. See Figure 8.

1. MANIFOLD AND DIRECTION SOLENOIDS 2. CONTROL VALVE Figure 9. Control Valve Arrangement 4. Remove solenoids from manifold.

WARNING There are compressed springs under the plugs in the control valve. Carefully remove the

38

1. STOP FOR INCHING PLUNGER 2. WASHER FOR INCHING SPOOL Figure 10. Control Valve Stops


1300 SRM 397

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

INCHING/BRAKE PEDAL CONTROL VALVE MICROSWITCH INCHING LINKAGE CRANK LOCK NUT

Control Valve Repair

7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

SPRING LINK FLANGE BEARING BALL JOINT TEST PORT

Figure 11. Inching Linkage, Later Model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Lift Trucks

INSPECT, LATER MODEL S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) TRUCKS AND S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) LIFT TRUCK MODELS 1. Make sure there are no scratches or damage on spools or in bores.

(S70-120XL) lift trucks and S3.50-5.50XM (S70120XM) lift truck models. To assemble and install the control valve for early model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) lift trucks, see section Assemble, Early Model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Lift Trucks and section Install, Early Model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Lift Trucks.

2. Make sure springs are not bent or damaged. 3. Make sure spools move freely in their bores.

Lubricate parts of control valve with clean transmission oil during assembly.

4. Make sure the orifices in the modulator valve and valve body at the clutch pressure regulator are clean.

1. Install spool and spring for pressure regulator and torque converter. Install plug with new O-ring. See Figure 8.

ASSEMBLE AND INSTALL, LATER MODEL S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) TRUCKS AND S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) LIFT TRUCK MODELS

2. Install spool and spring for clutch pressure regulator. Install plug with new O-ring.

NOTE: The assembly and installation procedures described below pertain to later model S3.50-5.50XL

3. Install modulator regulator and springs. Install small plug for modulator regulator. Install modulator piston and install large plug with new O-ring.

39


Control Valve Repair

1300 SRM 397

A. TOP VIEW

B. FRONT VIEW

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

LINK LINKAGE TO INCHING SPOOL INCHING CRANK CONTROL VALVE MICRO SWITCH SPRING

FLANGED MOUNTING BRACKET NEUTRAL START DISK COTTER AND ROD END PINS INCHING SPOOL RETAINER WASHERS

Figure 12. Inching Linkage, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) Lift Truck Models 4. Install spring and modulator valve. Install plug. 5. Install new oil seal. Install spring, inching spool, and washer. Install two springs and inching plunger. Install clip used for inching plunger stop. See Figure 8 and Figure 10. 6. Install spring, spring caps, and snap ring on direction spool. Install direction spool in bore. Install fitting and copper washer for direction spool. 7. Use new O-rings and install solenoids in manifold.

40

8. Install control valve on transmission. See Figure 9. Install gasket and manifold. Tighten capscrews for control valve and manifold to 19 N•m (168 lbf in). Make sure ground wires for solenoids are installed with capscrew for manifold. Connect tube assembly to direction spool fitting. 9. Connect wires to solenoids and switches. Connect linkage to inching spool. See Figure 11 and Figure 12.


MONOTROL® Pedal Repair

1300 SRM 397

MONOTROL® Pedal Repair REMOVE AND DISASSEMBLE, S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) MODEL LIFT TRUCKS

1. Disconnect wiring harness at transmission. Remove capscrew that holds pedal to bracket. Remove pedal. See Figure 13.

NOTE: For the procedures to remove and disassemble the MONOTROL pedal for S3.50-5.50XM (S70120XM) (E004, F004) model lift trucks, go to Remove and Disassemble, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) Model Lift Trucks section.

2. Remove straps holding wiring harness to the pedal. Loosen setscrews in pedal pad three to four turns and remove pivot pin. Remove pedal pad and spring.

A. GASOLINE UNITS B. LPG AND DIESEL UNITS

C. DIESEL UNITS D. GASOLINE AND LPG UNITS

1. 2. 3. 4.

5. BLACK (FORWARD SOLENOID) 6. RED (BATTERY) 7. YELLOW (REVERSE SOLENOID)

PEDAL PAD LINK CRANK PEDAL FRAME

Figure 13. MONOTROL Pedal

41


MONOTROL® Pedal Repair

1300 SRM 397

3. Remove retainer for wiring harness. Loosen screws for switches, then remove switches and wiring harness. 4. If necessary, remove lock nuts for magnets, then remove magnets from pedal frame.

ASSEMBLE AND INSTALL, S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) MODEL LIFT TRUCKS NOTE: For the procedures to assemble and install the MONOTROL pedal for S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004, F004) model lift trucks, go to Assemble and Install, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) Model Lift Trucks section. NOTE: The switches and wiring harness must be replaced as an assembly.

1. 2. 3. 4.

PEDAL PAD SWITCH SURFACE OF MOUNT SURFACE OF SWITCH Figure 14. MONOTROL Pedal Switches

1. Install switches and wiring harness in pedal pad. See Figure 13. Align surface of switches with alignment surface of mount in pedal pad. Switches must be even with or below alignment surface as shown in Figure 14. Install retainer for wiring harness.

2. Install wiring harness through hole in pedal frame. Install spring and pedal pad on pedal frame. Install pivot pin. Apply a thread locking compound to setscrews. Install and tighten setscrews. Use straps to hold wiring harness to pedal frame.

A. FORWARD

B. REVERSE

1. LOCK NUT 2. MAGNET 3. PLATE

4. DIAL INDICATOR 5. PEDAL FRAME 6. PEDAL PAD Figure 15. MONOTROL Pedal Adjustment

42


MONOTROL® Pedal Repair

1300 SRM 397 3. Check and adjust pedal assembly (see Figure 15) as follows: a. Put pedal assembly in vise. Use dial indicator to measure movement of pedal pad. b. Push on REVERSE side of pedal. Place dial indicator on the REVERSE side of pedal pad as shown in Figure 15. Loosen lock nut and rotate screw for magnet counterclockwise until it stops. Set dial indicator to zero. Rotate screw for magnet clockwise until gauge needle moves 0.25 mm (0.01 in.) from zero. This adjustment makes sure magnet is in contact with plate in pedal pad. Rotate screw for magnet counterclockwise until gauge needle indicates zero. Rotate screw for magnet clockwise until gauge needle indicates 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) movement. Tighten lock nut to 5.2 N•m (46 lbf in) without changing adjustment. c. Push on FORWARD side of pedal. Place dial indicator on FORWARD side of pedal pad as shown in Figure 15. Loosen lock nut and rotate screw for magnet counterclockwise until it stops. Set dial indicator to zero. Rotate screw for magnet clockwise until gauge needle moves 0.25 mm (0.01 in.) from zero. This adjustment makes sure magnet is in contact with plate in pedal pad. Rotate screw for magnet counterclockwise until gauge needle indicates zero. Rotate screw for magnet clockwise until gauge needle indicates 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) movement. Tighten lock nut to 5.2 N•m (46 lbf in) without changing adjustment.

Pedal must move 1.00 mm (0.039 in.) minimum from FORWARD position before circuit is disconnected. 4. Use a dial indicator as shown in Figure 15. With pedal pad in either FORWARD or REVERSE position, check total amount of travel to opposite direction. Minimum amount of travel of pedal pad is 2.0 mm (0.079 in.). If pedal cannot be adjusted to obtain this dimension, replace pedal pad. 5. Test strength of magnets as follows (see Figure 16):

WARNING It is important for the correct operation of the MONOTROL pedal that the magnets have the correct strength. a. Place pedal assembly in vise. Use spring scale to change pedal from FORWARD and REVERSE positions. b. When pushing on spring scale, it must take 13.3 to 31.1 kg (29 to 69 lb) to change from FORWARD to REVERSE and REVERSE to FORWARD positions. If force is not within specifications, replace magnet(s). 6. Install capscrew, washers, tube, and nut that hold pedal assembly to bracket. Connect link between pedal and crank as shown in Figure 13. 7. Install pedal return springs. Make sure throttle cable is connected as shown in Figure 13.

d. Use an ohmmeter to check operation of switches. When FORWARD side of pedal is depressed, there must be a complete circuit between red (battery) and black (forward solenoid) wires. When REVERSE side of pedal is depressed, there must be a complete circuit between red (battery) and yellow (reverse solenoid) wires. e. Push on FORWARD side of pedal. Place dial indicator on FORWARD side of pedal pad as shown in Figure 15. Connect an ohmmeter between red and black wires. Check to ensure there is a complete circuit between wires. Push on REVERSE side of pedal.

1. PEDAL PAD

2. SPRING SCALE

Figure 16. MONOTROL Pedal Magnets Check

43


MONOTROLÂŽ Pedal Repair

1300 SRM 397

REMOVE AND DISASSEMBLE, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) MODEL LIFT TRUCKS NOTE: For the procedures to remove and disassemble the MONOTROL pedal for S3.50-5.50XL (S70120XL) (D004) model lift trucks, go to Remove and Disassemble, S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Model Lift Trucks section. 1. Disconnect wires at transmission. Remove capscrew that holds pedal to bracket, then remove pedal. See Figure 17. 2. Remove straps that hold wires to pedal. Loosen setscrews in pedal pad three to four turns and remove pivot pin. Remove pedal pad and spring. 3. Remove retainer for wires. Loosen screws for switches. Remove switches and wires. 4. If necessary, remove lock nuts for magnets, then remove magnets from pedal frame. Make sure screws are tight in magnets. Use a thread locking compound on screws if they are loose in magnets.

ASSEMBLE AND INSTALL, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) MODEL LIFT TRUCKS NOTE: For the procedures to assemble and install the MONOTROL pedal for S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (D004) model lift trucks, go to Assemble and Install, S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Model Lift Trucks section.

1. 2. 3. 4.

PEDAL PAD PEDAL FRAME MAGNET PIVOT SHAFT

5. SPRING 6. MAGNET PLATE 7. SWITCH

Figure 17. MONOTROL Pedal, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) Lift Trucks

2. Place wires through hole in pedal frame. Install spring and pedal pad on pedal frame. Install pivot pin. Apply a thread locking compound to setscrews. Install and tighten setscrews. Use straps to hold wires to pedal frame.

b. Push REVERSE side of pedal. Place dial indicator on REVERSE side of pedal pad as shown in Figure 15. Loosen lock nut and rotate screw for magnet counterclockwise until it stops. Set dial indicator to zero. Rotate screw for magnet clockwise until gauge needle moves 0.25 mm (0.01 in.) from zero. This adjustment makes sure magnet is in contact with plate in pedal pad. Rotate screw for magnet counterclockwise until gauge needle indicates zero. Rotate screw for magnet clockwise until gauge needle indicates 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) movement. Tighten lock nut to 5.2 N•m (46 lbf in) without changing adjustment.

3. Perform the following procedure to check and adjust pedal assembly (see Figure 15):

c. Push on FORWARD side of pedal. Place dial indicator on FORWARD side of pedal pad as

NOTE: These sealed switches can only be replaced as an assembly. 1. Install switches and wires in pedal pad. See Figure 17. Align surface of switches with machined surface of mount in pedal pad. Switches must be even with or below alignment surface as shown in Figure 14. Install retainer for wires.

a. Place pedal assembly in vise. Use dial indicator to measure movement of pedal pad.

44


MONOTROL® Pedal Repair

1300 SRM 397 shown in Figure 15. Loosen lock nut and rotate screw for magnet counterclockwise until it stops. Set dial indicator to zero. Rotate screw for magnet clockwise until gauge needle moves 0.25 mm (0.01 in.) from zero. This adjustment makes sure magnet is in contact with plate in pedal pad. Rotate screw for magnet counterclockwise until gauge needle indicates zero. Rotate screw for magnet clockwise until gauge needle indicates 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) movement. Tighten lock nut to 5.2 N•m (46 lbf in) without changing adjustment.

(0.079 in.) is still not obtained, replace pedal pad. 6. Install capscrew, washers, tube, and nut that hold pedal assembly to bracket. Connect link between pedal and crank as shown in Figure 18. 7. Install pedal return springs. Make sure throttle cable is connected to correct position as shown in Figure 18.

d. Use an ohmmeter to check operation of switches. When FORWARD side of pedal is depressed, there must be a complete circuit between red (battery) and black (forward solenoid) wires. When REVERSE side of pedal is depressed, there must be a complete circuit between red (battery) and yellow (reverse solenoid) wires. e. Push on FORWARD side of pedal. Place dial indicator on FORWARD side of pedal pad as shown. Connect an ohmmeter between red and black wires. Check that there is a complete circuit between wires. Push on REVERSE side of pedal. Pedal must move 1.00 mm (0.039 in.) minimum from FORWARD position before circuit is disconnected. NOTE: It is important for correct operation of MONOTROL pedal that magnets have correct strength. 4. Test strength of magnets as follows (see Figure 16): a. Place pedal assembly in vise. Use spring scale to change pedal from FORWARD and REVERSE positions as shown in Figure 16. b. When pushing on spring scale, it must take 13.3 to 31.1 N (3.6 to 7.0 lbf) to change from FORWARD to REVERSE and REVERSE to FORWARD positions. If force is not within specifications, replace magnet(s). 5. With pad located in either FORWARD or REVERSE, check to assure a minimum of 2.0 mm (0.079 in.) total pad travel when changed to opposite position. If 2.0 mm (0.079 in.) is not obtained, do adjustment again. If 2.0 mm

A. GASOLINE TRUCKS B. LPG/DIESEL TRUCKS 1. PEDAL PAD 2. PEDAL FRAME 3. PEDAL RETURN STOP 4. LINK 5. CAPSCREW 6. CRANK 7. SWITCH CONNECTOR

8. REVERSE SOLENOID (WHITE WIRE) 9. FORWARD SOLENOID (GREEN WIRE) 10. BATTERY (RED WIRE)

Figure 18. MONOTROL Pedal, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) Lift Trucks

45


Direction Control Lever Repair

1300 SRM 397

Direction Control Lever Repair REMOVE AND DISASSEMBLE NOTE: The information contained below on removing and disassembling the direction control lever applies only to S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004, F004) lift truck models. 1. Remove steering wheel. 2. Remove back cover from steering column. 3. Disconnect wires at switches for direction control lever. See Figure 19. Make sure wires have identification tags for correct installation.

3. Use capscrews and install control lever assembly and switches on steering housing. 4. Connect wires to switches. 5. Start lift truck and operate direction control lever in FORWARD and REVERSE to make sure lever operates correctly. 6. Install back cover on steering housing. Install steering wheel. Tighten nut for steering wheel to 40 to 54 N•m (30 to 40 lbf ft).

4. Remove capscrews that hold bracket for control lever to steering housing. Remove control lever assembly and switches. 5. Disassemble control lever assembly as necessary.

ASSEMBLE AND INSTALL NOTE: The information contained below on assembling and installing the direction control lever applies only to S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004, F004) lift truck models. 1. Assemble control lever assembly as shown in Figure 19. Tighten nuts that hold control lever to crank to 6.3 N•m (56 lbf in). Make sure spring washers are between cranks and actuator plate. Tighten nuts for cranks to 10.8 N•m (96 lbf in). Install detent plungers until they touch crank, then loosen one turn. Fill detent areas with multipurpose grease. 2. Install switches on switch plate as shown in Figure 19.

46

1. CRANK 2. DIRECTION INDICATOR 3. LEVER 4. DETENT CRANK 5. DETENT PLUNGER

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

SWITCH PLATE SWITCH MOUNT ACTUATOR PLATE SPRING WASHER

Figure 19. Direction Control Lever


1300 SRM 397

Stall Test

Stall Test CAUTION Do not hold the throttle open for more than 15 seconds. Run the engine at idle speed for 2 minutes between tests. Release the pedal immediately if the engine speed increases to the governor limit speed. Stall test checks condition of engine, transmission clutches, and one direction clutch in the torque converter. If engine is not operating correctly, stall speed cannot be reached. If one direction clutch does not hold, oil in torque converter flows into impeller in the direction that is opposite engine rotation. Instead of helping engine turn, oil flow prevents engine from reaching full speed. If engine speed is greater than given stall speed, clutches are not holding or wheels are turning. Clutches will not hold if application pressure is not high enough or clutches are worn. NOTE: Wheels must not turn during this test. Do a stall test to check operation of transmission clutches. Engine and hydraulic oil must be at operating temperature. Put capacity load on forks to prevent wheels from turning. Connect tachometer to engine. Put lift truck against an object that cannot move. Start engine and slowly push on accelerator or MONOTROL pedal to full throttle. Tachometer must indicate values shown in Table 2. If the engine speed is 50 to 200 rpm below the specification, the engine is not operating at full power. Check ignition timing, fuel system, and compression. If the engine speed is 250 to 500 rpm below the specification, the clutch in the torque converter has a defect. The torque converter must be replaced as a unit.

If the torque converter is not defective, check that torque converter housing is not full of oil. Also check ignition timing, fuel system, and compression. If the engine speed is greater than the specification, the clutch that is engaged is not holding. Test other clutch by changing direction control. If the engine rpm is again too high, do pressure checks. If engine speed is normal and one of the clutches is not holding when engaged, check circuits for that clutch. Table 2. Stall Speed Specifications Unit

Stall Speed

Gasoline New Engine

1660 to 1760 rpm

Engine with 50 hours

1760 to 1860 rpm

LPG New Engine

1585 to 1685 rpm

Engine with 50 hours

1685 to 1785 rpm

Diesel, S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) New Engine

2040 rpm

Engine with 50 hours

2090 rpm

Diesel, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) New Engine

1950 to 2000 rpm

Engine with 50 hours

2050 to 3000 rpm

47


Linkages Adjustment

1300 SRM 397

Linkages Adjustment LINKAGE FOR INCHING/BRAKE PEDAL, S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (D004) LIFT TRUCK MODELS NOTE: The procedures described below are for adjusting the inching/brake pedal linkages on lift truck models S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (D004). For adjusting the inching/brake pedal linkages on lift truck models S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004, F004), see section Linkage for Inching/Brake Pedal, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004, F004) Lift Truck Models. NOTE: If lift truck has been operated at least 25 hours and brakes operate normally, do not adjust brake shoes. If lift truck has been operated less than 25 hours with new brake shoes, adjust brake shoes as described in Step 1. 1. Put truck on blocks so drive tires do not touch the ground. Put a screwdriver through the slot in back plate and push automatic adjustment lever away from adjuster wheel. Turn adjuster wheel upward with an adjuster tool. Turn adjuster wheel until brake shoes are applied and drum will not rotate. Turn adjuster wheel at least 25 clicks downward to get clearance between brake shoes and drum. Remove blocks and drive lift truck in FORWARD and REVERSE while applying brake pedal. Make 10 stops in each direction while alternating direction of travel. This will make sure brake shoes are at their final adjustment. 2. Adjust height of inching/brake pedal so bottom of pedal pad is 98 mm (3.86 in.) from floor plate. Use capscrew and lock nut (4) behind the pedal to adjust height. 3. Make sure engine is not running and there is no pressure in brake booster. Loosen lock nut (6) on push rod. Loosen rubber boot on brake booster. Adjust push rod until it contacts plunger of brake booster. Then adjust for correct free travel of the pedal by turning push rod 2.5 turns counterclockwise. Tighten lock nut (6) for push rod. Check that free travel of pedal is 8 mm (0.31 in.).

48

4. Raise front of lift truck. Put blocks under outer upright weldments, then tilt upright forward until drive tires do not touch floor. Apply parking brake. Put blocks on both sides of steering tires so lift truck cannot move. 5. Make sure ball joint on link is installed on crank as shown in Figure 20. Ball joint must be in the second hole from crank pivot. Connect a pressure gauge to test port for common clutch pressure. Operate transmission until oil temperature is at least 82 C (180 F). Heat oil by engaging transmission while applying inching/brake pedal and increasing engine speed. 6. Release parking brake. Shift transmission to FORWARD or REVERSE and operate engine at 2000 rpm. 7. Loosen lock nuts (11 and 12) on link. Rotate link until inching plunger moves enough to reduce clutch pressure to 552 to 690 kPa (80 to 100 psi). Now rotate link 1.3 turns counterclockwise (viewed from the brake booster) to move inching plunger 3 mm (0.12 in.) into the valve body. Tighten lock nuts on link. This adjustment will cause clutch pressure to increase to 790 to 965 kPa (115 to 140 psi). Use this pressure as a system check, but do not use it to adjust inching linkage. NOTE: The above adjustment will give a small amount of overlap between the brake and inching functions. If further adjustment is necessary, follow the steps below. 8. If effort to push inching/brake pedal is too high, decrease overlap. Move ball joint to a hole in crank that is closer to control valve. 9. If there is too much free travel of inching/brake pedal, increase overlap. Move ball joint to a hole in crank that is further from control valve.


1300 SRM 397

Linkages Adjustment

Figure 20. Inching/Brake Pedal Linkage Adjustment

49


Linkages Adjustment

1300 SRM 397 Legend for Figure 20

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

INCHING/BRAKE PEDAL FLOOR PLATE CAPSCREW LOCK NUT BRAKE BOOSTER LOCK NUT PUSH ROD LINK

LINKAGE FOR DIRECTION CONTROL LEVER

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

BALL JOINT CRANK LOCK NUT LOCK NUT INCHING PLUNGER TEST PORT RUBBER

Brake Shoe Adjustment

NOTE: The adjustment procedures described below for the direction control lever apply only to S3.505.50XL (S70-120XL) (D004) lift truck models.

If lift truck has been operated at least 25 hours and brakes operate normally, do not adjust brake shoes. If lift truck has been operated less than 25 hours with new brake shoes, adjust brake shoes as described in Brake System 1800 SRM 985.

1. Disconnect ball joint (3) from the crank (5). Place direction spool in the REVERSE detent position. See Figure 21.

Inching/Brake Pedal Height Adjustment

2. Place direction control lever in REVERSE position and hold it against the stop. 3. Adjust ball joint until it aligns with crank. Connect ball joint to crank. Tighten lock nut (4) for the ball joint. 4. Operate direction control lever to make sure spool stops at three detent positions for FORWARD, NEUTRAL, and REVERSE.

LINKAGE FOR INCHING/BRAKE PEDAL, S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004, F004) LIFT TRUCK MODELS NOTE: The procedures described below are for adjusting the inching/brake pedal linkages on lift truck models S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004, F004). For adjusting the inching/brake pedal linkages on lift truck models S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (D004), see section Linkage for Inching/Brake Pedal, S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (D004) Lift Truck Models.

50

Apply parking brake and put lift truck on blocks so drive tires are off ground. Put blocks under steer tires to prevent movement of lift truck.

Single Pedal Height Adjustment 1. Adjust height of inching/brake pedal so bottom of pedal pad is 89 mm (3.50 in.) from floor plate. Use capscrew and jam nut behind pedal to adjust height. See Figure 22.

Two Pedal Height Adjustment 1. Adjust height of inching/brake pedal so bottom of pedal pad is 89 mm (3.50 in.) from floor plate. See Figure 22. 2. Adjust pedal drive capscrew to align left hand pedal with right hand pedal. Tighten locking nut. Use capscrew and jam nut behind pedal to adjust height.


1300 SRM 397

1. 2. 3. 4.

Linkages Adjustment

DIRECTION CONTROL LEVER SHIFT ROD BALL JOINT LOCK NUT

5. CRANK 6. DIRECTION SPOOL 7. INDICATOR

Figure 21. Direction Control Lever Adjustment

51


Linkages Adjustment

1300 SRM 397

A. TWO PEDAL OPTION

B. SINGLE PEDAL OPTION

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

BRAKE PEDAL INCHING/BRAKE PEDAL INCHING/BRAKE PEDAL LINK JAM NUTS (INCHING PEDAL/LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT) 6. INCHING PEDAL DRIVE SCREW AND LOCKING NUT

HEX (BRAKE) LINK INCHING LINK JAM NUT (BRAKE PEDAL ADJUSTMENT) TRUCK FRAME PIN SLOT

Figure 22. Pedal Height Adjustments

Inching/Brake Linkage Adjustment 1. To adjust brake booster, adjust capscrew so there is no movement when crank is moved. Loosen capscrew one hex point clockwise to provide clearance. Tighten lock nut. See Figure 23. NOTE: Perform adjustments described in Step 2, Step 3, and Step 4. These steps will provide a small amount of overlap between brake and inching functions. If further adjustment is necessary, go to Step 5. 2. Place inching capscrew onto inching crank. There should be no clearance between capscrew and inching crank. 3. Turn inching capscrew 1/8 turn for initial setting. Final setting is performed during pressure

52

adjustment process as outlined below (see Figure 23). a. Install a gauge that can measure 2000 kPa (300 psi) in the port for forward clutch pack. Transmission oil temperature must be at 50 to 80 C (120 to 180 F) during adjustment procedure. b. Start engine and move transmission control lever or MONOTROL pedal to FORWARD position. Release parking brake. c. Loosen locking nut at inching capscrew. Adjust inching capscrew until clutch pack pressure measures 862 to 1000 kPa (125 to 145 psi) at 2000 rpm.


1300 SRM 397

Linkages Adjustment

NOTE: MONOTROL PEDAL SHOWN. ADJUSTMENTS TO THE TWO-PEDAL OPTION ARE SIMILAR. SEE FIGURE 22. A. INCHING LINK ADJUSTMENT

B. BRAKE LINK ADJUSTMENT

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

CAPSCREW (BRAKE BOOSTER) LOCK NUT INCHING CAPSCREW JAM NUT (BRAKE PEDAL ADJUSTMENT) HEX (BRAKE) LINKAGE JAM NUTS (INCHING PEDAL/LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT) 7. INCHING LINK 8. CRANK

CRANK/BOOSTER MOUNTING BRACKET PIN SLOT STRAIGHT LINK INCHING LINK ROD END JAM NUT (DECREASE OVERLAP) BRAKE PUSH ROD COTTER PIN FRAME

* PIN TO END OF SLOT Figure 23. Inching/Brake Linkage Adjustment

53


Oil Pressures Check

1300 SRM 397

d. Turn capscrew clockwise until pressure drops to 345 kPa (50 psi) at 2000 rpm. e. Rotate capscrew counterclockwise 1-1/4 turn to move inching plunger 4.5 mm (0.18 in.) into valve body. Tighten lock nuts on the link. Check pressure of forward clutch again. The correct pressure is 862 to 1000 kPa (125 to 145 psi) at 2000 rpm. f.

Turn off engine.

4. To adjust inching link, loosen jam nuts and adjust inching link so pin is at the end of the slot. Tighten jam nuts. See Figure 23. To adjust the brake link, loosen the jam nuts and move the pin horizontally until the pin is at the end of the slot. Tighten jam nuts. See Figure 23. When the pins are at the end of the slots, as shown in Figure 23, the linkages are in their starting position (no lash when crank is moved) of 0 mm (0 in.).

NOTE: More or less overlap may be required for certain applications. If an increase or decrease in overlap is required, perform one of the procedures in either Step 5 or Step 6. DO NOT do both procedures. See Figure 23. 5. Decrease Overlap: If too much pedal force is required to keep lift truck from moving on level ground, decrease overlap (move pin in slot away from starting position). See item B in Figure 23. To decrease overlap, loosen jam nut on brake master cylinder push rod. Adjust push rod to move pin in the slot. One turn of the rod equals 1.5 mm (0.06 in.). Tighten jam nut after adjustment is completed. 6. Increase Overlap: If there is too much free travel of inching/brake pedal, increase overlap (move pin in slot further away from starting position). See item A in Figure 23. Adjust lock nuts on inching link to move pin in the slot. One turn of the lock nuts equals 1.0 mm (0.04 in.). Tighten lock nuts once increase in overlap is achieved.

Oil Pressures Check See Troubleshooting section for causes of pressures that are not within specified limits. If correct pressure for a regulator cannot be obtained, replace spring for regulator. Regulators are not adjustable. Before making oil pressure checks, do the following: 1. Make sure adjustment of inching pedal is correct. Make sure adjustment of direction spool is correct. 2. Connect tachometer to engine (gas/LPG) or use a special tachometer for diesel engine. 3. Connect pressure gauges to test ports shown in Table 3 and Table 4. See charts for pressures. 4. Start engine and tilt mast back. Put blocks under outer mast weldments. Tilt mast forward to raise drive tires from floor. Put blocks on both sides of steer tires (front and back) so lift truck cannot move. 5. Make sure oil level in transmission is correct. Make sure temperature of oil is within specification as noted in Table 3 and Table 4. Heat oil by engaging transmission while applying brake

54

pedal and increasing engine speed. Release parking brake. Do not heat oil by using inching pedal to disengage transmission. NOTE: Check ports described below apply only to S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (D004) lift truck models. See Table 3.

SYSTEM PRESSURE CHECK PORT With engine running at 2000 rpm, correct pressure reading is 1032 to 1312 kPa (150 to 190 psi). This reading checks pressure from oil pump. Pressure from oil pump is controlled by system regulator that is in control valve body. If pressure is not correct, see Troubleshooting procedures.

TORQUE CONVERTER CHECK PORT With engine running at 2000 rpm, correct reading is 765 to 903 kPa (111 to 131 psi). This reading checks pressure of oil that goes to torque converter. Regulator for torque converter is in control valve body. If pressure is not correct, see Troubleshooting procedures.


1300 SRM 397

Oil Pressures Check

Table 3. Transmission Oil Pressure Check, Early Model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Lift Trucks Port No.

Transmission Pressures*

1

System Pressure

1032 to 1312 kPa (150 to 190 psi)

2

Torque Converter Pressure

765 to 903 kPa (111 to 131 psi)

3

Clutch Pressure

827 to 965 kPa (120 to 140 psi)

4,5

Solenoid Pressure

927 to 1003 kPa (134 to 145 psi)

6,7

Lubrication Pressure

96 to 138 kPa (14 to 20 psi)

*Oil temperature is at least 82 C (180 F) and engine speed at 2000 rpm.

CLUTCH PRESSURE CHECK PORT

INCHING PRESSURE

There is a common check port for both clutch assemblies. With engine running at 2000 rpm, correct reading at common check port is 827 to 965 kPa (120 to 140 psi). Pressure at each of the four clutch check ports is the same. Pressure difference between the four check ports must not be more than 69 kPa (10 psi). If any pressures are not correct, see Troubleshooting procedures.

Use gauge at common clutch check port. With engine running at 2000 rpm, push on inching pedal. Pressure at gauge will drop quickly from clutch pressure of 927 to 1003 kPa (134 to 145 psi) to 476 to 558 kPa (69 to 81 psi). As inching pedal is depressed further, pressure will continue to decrease. When inching pedal is completely depressed, pressure will be zero. If inching function does not work correctly, see Troubleshooting procedures.

55


Oil Pressures Check

1300 SRM 397

Table 4. Transmission Oil Pressure Check, Later Model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) and S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) Lift Trucks Port No.

Transmission Pressures*

1

System Pressure

2

Forward Clutch

895 to 1035 kPa (130 to 150 psi)

3

Reverse Clutch

895 to 1035 kPa (130 to 150 psi)

4

Torque Converter

655 to 760 kPa (95 to 110 psi)

5

Lubrication Pressure

35 to 105 kPa (5 to 15 psi)

6

Modulator Pressure

Pressure Variation

1170 to 1380** kPa (170 to 200 psi) **Relief pressure 1379 kPa (200 psi)

*Oil temperature is at least 50 to 65 C (120 to 150 F) and engine speed at 2000 rpm. NOTE: The difference between forward and reverse clutch pressure must not be more than: • Manufacturing limit 48 kPa (7 psi) • Service limit 70 kPa (10 psi)

56


1300 SRM 397

SOLENOID CHECK PORTS (MONOTROL CONTROL ONLY) With engine running at 2000 rpm, correct reading at forward and reverse solenoid check ports is 927 to 1003 kPa (134 to 145 psi). To check pressures, shift transmission to FORWARD and then REVERSE. If pressures are not correct, see Troubleshooting procedures.

LUBRICATION PRESSURE CHECK PORTS There are check ports for checking lubrication pressure for clutch assembly. Shift to FORWARD and then REVERSE. With engine running at 2000 rpm, correct reading is 96 to 138 kPa (14 to 20 psi). If pressures are not correct, see Troubleshooting procedures. NOTE: The check ports described below apply only to S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004, F004) lift truck models. See Table 4.

Oil Pressures Check 2. Run engine at 2000 rpm and push inching/brake pedal down. Clutch pressure must decrease to approximately zero pressure when inching/brake pedal is fully depressed. 3. The difference in forward and reverse clutch pressures cannot be more than 70 kPa (10 psi). A larger difference in clutch pressures indicates a problem.

FORWARD CLUTCH PRESSURE CHECK PORT 1. Place transmission in FORWARD. If pressure is not 895 to 1035 kPa (130 to 150 psi), see Troubleshooting procedures. 2. Run engine at 2000 rpm and push inching/brake pedal down. Clutch pressure must decrease to approximately zero pressure when inching/brake pedal is fully depressed.

LUBRICATION PRESSURE CHECK PORT SYSTEM PRESSURE CHECK PORT With engine running at 2000 rpm, correct pressure reading is 1170 to 1380 kPa (170 to 200 psi). This reading checks pressure from oil pump. Pressure from oil pump is controlled by system regulator that is in control valve body. If pressure is not correct, see Troubleshooting procedures. To check relief valve for transmission, apply parking brake (direction control lever only). Put direction control lever in NEUTRAL. If pressure from transmission is not 1379 kPa (200 psi), see Troubleshooting procedures.

TORQUE CONVERTER CHECK PORT With engine running at 2000 rpm, correct reading is 655 to 760 kPa (95 to 110 psi). This reading checks pressure of oil that goes to torque converter. Regulator for torque converter is in control valve body. If pressure is not correct, see Troubleshooting procedures.

REVERSE CLUTCH PRESSURE CHECK PORT 1. Put transmission in REVERSE. If pressure is not 895 to 1035 kPa (130 to 150 psi), see Troubleshooting procedures.

Remove plug at lubrication pressure test port. See Table 4. Install a 0 to 500 kPa (0 to 73 psi) gauge. Transmission oil must be at operating temperature of 50 to 65 C (120 to 150 F). Apply parking brake (direction control lever only). Place direction control lever in NEUTRAL position. Run engine at 2000 rpm. Correct pressure is 35 to 105 kPa (5 to 15 psi).

MODULATOR PRESSURE CHECK PORT This test checks operation of modulator. When direction spool is moved from one direction to another, modulator causes a 1.1 to 1.5 second delay in application of the clutch for new direction. Changes in modulator pressure are shown in Figure 24. Remove plug and install a fitting for the gauge. Connect a 0 to 2000 kPa (0 to 300 psi) gauge to fitting. Run engine at 1500 to 2000 rpm. Check pressure on gauge when you change position of direction spool. Use a stopwatch to measure operation of modulator. A pressure gauge will not operate quickly enough to show complete variation shown in Figure 24, but it will indicate decrease and increase of pressure in modulator. If operation of modulator is not correct, control valve must be repaired. See Control Valve Repair section.

57


Troubleshooting

1300 SRM 397 Legend for Figure 24 1. CLUTCH DISENGAGES 2. OTHER CLUTCH FILLS WITH OIL 3. MODULATOR CONTROLS INCREASE IN PRESSURE 4. OTHER CLUTCH ENGAGED

Figure 24. Pressure Variation In Modulator During Forward/Reverse Shift

Troubleshooting PROBLEM Transmission is too hot.

58

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Inching and operating the lift truck with loads greater than capacity.

Check nameplate for load limits.

Oil level is not correct.

Make sure oil level is correct.

Clutch does not engage completely.

Check oil pressure or clutch parts.

Inching/brake pedal is not adjusted correctly.

Make correct adjustments to inching/ brake pedal.

Worn or wrong friction discs or separator plates.

Install new parts.

Clutch pressure is too low.

Check for cause of low pressure.

Brakes are not adjusted correctly.

Make correct adjustment to brakes.

Oil cooler circuit has a restriction or damage.

Clean oil lines and oil cooler.

Defect in the torque converter.

Install new torque converter.

Clutch discs bent or not releasing.

Install new clutch discs.

Clutch assembly will not disengage completely because piston orifice has a restriction.

Clean piston orifice.


1300 SRM 397

Troubleshooting

PROBLEM

POSSIBLE CAUSE

Bubbles in the oil fill tube.

Inching operation smooth.

is

not

Loss of power.

Lift truck will not move in either direction.

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Air leak on suction side of the oil pump.

Check pump mounting.

Oil level is not correct.

Make sure oil level is correct.

Oil is too hot.

Let oil cool.

Defect in the torque converter.

Install new torque converter.

Brakes are not correctly adjusted.

Adjust brakes.

Inching spool or plunger does not move freely.

Check linkage or install new spool or plunger.

Broken spring(s) for inching spool or plunger.

Install new spring(s).

Clutch piston does not move freely.

Check piston operation.

Control valve has leaks.

Repair control valve.

Clutch discs are bent.

Install new clutch discs.

Clutch that is engaged is not releasing.

Inspect clutch, replace as necessary.

Torque converter has a defect.

Replace torque converter.

Clutch does not engage completely.

Inspect clutch and replace as necessary.

Oil level is too low.

Fill to correct oil level.

Parking brake is applied.

Release parking brake.

Forward and reverse solenoids do not operate.

Repair solenoids or circuit.

Linkage to direction spool is disconnected.

Connect linkage to direction spool.

Linkage to inching spool is disconnected.

Connect linkage to inching spool.

Switches at MONOTROL pedal do not operate.

Connect wires switches.

or

install

new

59


Troubleshooting

PROBLEM Lift truck will not move in either direction. (Cont.)

Lift truck moves in one direction only.

Pressure at the system check port is below specifications.

Pressure at the system check port is above specifications.

60

1300 SRM 397

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Axle shaft(s) or differential is damaged.

Repair as necessary.

Direction spool will not move.

Check wiring or solenoids.

Forward or reverse solenoid does not operate.

Check solenoid, replace as necessary.

Spring on direction spool is damaged (MONOTROL).

Install new spring.

A clutch is damaged and will not release.

Install new clutch.

Spring for regulator is broken or is not correct.

Install new spring.

Clutch pressure regulator is in the open position.

Close clutch pressure regulator.

Oil pump is worn or damaged.

Install new oil pump.

Regulator is worn.

Install new regulator.

Oil filter is leaking.

Install new filter.

A regulator beyond the system regulator is leaking.

Troubleshoot the appropriate regulator.

Spring for the regulator is not correct.

Install new spring.

Regulator does not move freely in the bore.

Repair or replace regulator.

Oil in the transmission is not correct.

Fill with correct oil.

Oil is too cold.

Warm oil up.

There is a restriction in the lubrication circuit.

Clear restriction.


1300 SRM 397

PROBLEM Pressure at the common clutch pressure check port is below specifications.

Pressure at the common clutch pressure check port is above specifications.

Pressure at one of the individual clutch pressure check ports is below specifications.

Pressure at one of the individual clutch pressure check ports is above specifications.

Troubleshooting

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Spring for regulator is broken or is not correct.

Install new spring.

Oil filter has a restriction.

Clear restriction. Replace filter as needed.

Oil filter is leaking.

Replace filter.

Inching plunger and spool are not completely retracted in the bore.

Inspect plunger and spool. Replace as necessary.

Direction spool is not adjusted correctly.

Adjust direction spool.

Bores for direction spool or inching spool are worn.

Install new bores.

Spring for the regulator is not correct.

Install new spring.

Regulator does not move freely in the bore.

Repair or replace regulator.

The seal rings on the shaft are worn or damaged.

Install new seal rings.

The area for the seal rings in the housing is worn or damaged.

Replace with new seal rings.

The seals for the clutch piston are worn or damaged.

Install new seal.

Inching plunger and spool are not completely retracted in the bore.

Inspect plunger and spool. Replace as necessary.

Pressure at the common clutch pressure check port is above specifications.

Adjust pressure.

Orifice in the piston has a restriction.

Clear restriction.

61


Troubleshooting

PROBLEM Pressure at one of the solenoid clutch pressure check ports is below specifications.

1300 SRM 397

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PROCEDURE OR ACTION

Solenoid spool or seals are worn.

Install new spool or seals.

Solenoid assembly leaks.

Repair or replace solenoid assembly.

Pressure at one of the solenoid clutch pressure check ports is above specifications.

The clutch pressure regulator does not operate correctly.

Troubleshoot clutch pressure regulator.

Pressure at the torque converter check port is below specifications.

Spring for the torque converter regulator is broken or not correct.

Install new spring.

Pressure at the torque converter check port is above specifications.

Spring for the torque converter regulator is not correct.

Install new spring.

Torque converter regulator does not move freely in the bore.

Repair or replace regulator.

The supply pressure to the lubrication circuit is not correct.

Troubleshoot the lubrication circuit pressure.

The oil cooler has a restriction.

Clear restriction.

The oil pump is worn or damaged.

Replace with new pump.

The supply pressure to the lubrication circuit is not correct.

Troubleshoot the lubrication circuit pressure.

Pressure at the lubrication check port(s) is below specifications.

Pressure at the lubrication check port(s) is above specifications.

62



SINGLE-SPEED POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) [D004]; S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]

PART NO. 897322

1300 SRM 399


Single-Speed Powershift Transmission

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS General ............................................................................................................................................................... Mechanical Description ..................................................................................................................................... General ........................................................................................................................................................... Torque Converter ........................................................................................................................................... Oil Pump ........................................................................................................................................................ Shaft Assemblies ........................................................................................................................................... Input Shaft ................................................................................................................................................ Reverse Clutch Shaft ................................................................................................................................ Countershaft.............................................................................................................................................. Ring Gear, Pinion, and Differential.......................................................................................................... Clutch Assemblies ..................................................................................................................................... Hydraulic Operation .......................................................................................................................................... Torque Converter ........................................................................................................................................... Shaft Assemblies ........................................................................................................................................... Control Valve.................................................................................................................................................. General....................................................................................................................................................... System Regulator ...................................................................................................................................... Clutch Pressure Regulator........................................................................................................................ Torque Converter Regulator ..................................................................................................................... Inching Spool ............................................................................................................................................. Direction Spool, Manual Control .............................................................................................................. Direction Spool, MONOTROL Pedal........................................................................................................ Modulation Spool....................................................................................................................................... Accumulator............................................................................................................................................... Drain Spool ................................................................................................................................................ MONOTROL Pedal........................................................................................................................................ Control Valve.................................................................................................................................................. General....................................................................................................................................................... Regulator for Clutch Pressure .................................................................................................................. Inching Spool Assembly ............................................................................................................................ Direction Spool .......................................................................................................................................... Direction Spool, Manual Control .............................................................................................................. Modulator Circuit...................................................................................................................................... Regulator for Torque Convertor................................................................................................................ Lubrication Circuit ........................................................................................................................................ Direction Control Lever................................................................................................................................. MONOTROL Pedal........................................................................................................................................ Start Circuit, MONOTROL Pedal ............................................................................................................ Creep Speed Switch................................................................................................................................... Oil Flow Diagrams......................................................................................................................................... Neutral....................................................................................................................................................... Forward...................................................................................................................................................... Forward-Inching........................................................................................................................................ Reverse.......................................................................................................................................................

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 7 7 7 7 7 7 9 9 9 9 12 13 13 13 13 13 14 14 15 15 15 15 15 15

This section is for the following models: S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) [D004]; S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) [E004, F004]

©2003 HYSTER COMPANY

i


1300 SRM 399

Mechanical Description

General This section contains description and operating principles of the single speed powershift transmission. There are two parts in this section. The first part describes mechanical components of the transmission. The second part describes hydraulic operation of the transmission.

Mechanical Description GENERAL The transmission has a housing, torque converter, oil pump, control valve, three shaft assemblies, ring gear, pinion, and differential assembly.

TORQUE CONVERTER The torque converter is installed between engine and transmission. See Figure 1. The torque converter has three main parts: impeller, turbine, and stator.

The impeller is connected to the flywheel of the engine by a flexible disc. A flange on the impeller engages with the oil pump for the transmission and operates the pump when the engine is running. The turbine fits inside the impeller and engages with the input shaft of the transmission. The stator also fits inside the impeller and engages with the stator tube on the transmission.

OIL PUMP The transmission has its own hydraulic system. An oil pump is installed on the cover of the transmission inside the torque converter housing. The oil pump is driven by the impeller of the torque converter. The transmission cover has passages for oil to flow to and from the oil pump.

SHAFT ASSEMBLIES The three shaft assemblies are: input shaft (with forward clutch assembly), reverse clutch shaft (with reverse clutch assembly), and countershaft. See Figure 2.

Input Shaft The input shaft is driven by the engine through the torque converter and rotates in the direction of engine rotation. The input shaft has the forward clutch assembly. The clutch is installed in the forward clutch housing and has a piston, friction discs, separator plates, pressure plate, and return spring. The teeth on the forward clutch housing are engaged with the teeth on the reverse clutch housing. The hub for the forward clutch is engaged with the countershaft gear. 1. 2. 3. 4.

TURBINE IMPELLER STATOR ONE DIRECTION CLUTCH

5. STATOR TUBE 6. TRANSMISSION INPUT SHAFT 7. PUMP DRIVE SHAFT

Figure 1. Torque Converter

Reverse Clutch Shaft The reverse clutch shaft is installed next to the input shaft. The teeth on the reverse clutch housing are engaged with the teeth on the forward clutch housing. During operation, the reverse clutch shaft rotates in the opposite direction of engine rotation. The reverse

1


Mechanical Description

1300 SRM 399

clutch assembly has a piston, friction discs, separator plates, pressure plate, and return spring. The hub for the reverse clutch is engaged with the countershaft gear.

Countershaft The countershaft connects the direction clutches to the pinion shaft. The small gear on the countershaft is engaged with the drive gear for the pinion. The

1. INPUT SHAFT 2. FORWARD CLUTCH

3. REVERSE CLUTCH 4. COUNTERSHAFT

pinion, in turn, drives the ring gear and differential assembly.

Ring Gear, Pinion, and Differential The ring gear and pinion provide a gear reduction and change the direction of the power flow. The differential permits the drive wheels to turn at different speeds when the lift truck is turning a corner.

5. OUTPUT GEAR 6. PINION

Figure 2. Shafts Arrangement

2

7. RING GEAR


1300 SRM 399

Mechanical Description

Clutch Assemblies The two clutch assemblies use similar parts and operate in the same manner. See Figure 3 and Figure 4. Friction discs and separator plates are installed in the housing in a sequence. Each friction disc is next to a separator plate. Separator plates have a smooth surface while the friction discs have a friction material on the surface. The hub in each clutch assembly engages with the inner splines of the friction discs. Outer splines of the separator plates engage with the grooves in the clutch housing.

Legend for Figure 3 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

INPUT SHAFT ASSEMBLY FORWARD CLUTCH HOUSING FORWARD CLUTCH ASSEMBLY FORWARD CLUTCH HUB REVERSE CLUTCH SHAFT ASSEMBLY REVERSE CLUTCH HOUSING REVERSE CLUTCH ASSEMBLY REVERSE CLUTCH HUB

A pressure plate holds the friction discs and separator plates in the housing. A return spring keeps the piston retracted against the housing. There is an orifice in each piston. The orifice releases any oil pressure in the piston housing caused by centrifugal force after the clutch is disengaged. There is enough clearance in the clutch assemblies to let the friction discs rotate freely when a clutch assembly is not engaged.

A. REVERSE

B. FORWARD

1. FORWARD CLUTCH HUB 2. COUNTERSHAFT 3. REVERSE CLUTCH HUB

4. FORWARD CLUTCH HOUSING 5. REVERSE CLUTCH HOUSING 6. OUTPUT GEAR

Figure 4. Clutch Assemblies Operation Figure 3. Clutch Assemblies

3


Hydraulic Operation

1300 SRM 399

Hydraulic Operation TORQUE CONVERTER The torque converter has two main functions. It works as a fluid clutch to transfer power from the engine to the transmission. Also, the torque converter multiplies torque. The torque of the engine is increased by the torque converter when additional torque is needed to move the lift truck. If the need for additional torque is low, the torque converter works as a fluid coupling. The impeller has a set of curved blades that send oil out from the center of the impeller when the impeller turns. Oil is moving at high speed when it leaves the impeller. Because the impeller is curved, oil flows into the outer edge of the turbine. Oil pushes the turbine in the direction of the engine rotation. Oil then flows from the outside to the center of the turbine. Turbine blades change direction of oil flow so that oil leaving the center of the turbine is going in the direction opposite of engine rotation. See Figure 5. The stator is between the turbine and impeller in the center of the torque converter. When oil hits the stator blades, the one-direction clutch prevents the stator from turning against engine rotation. See Figure 6. Blades of the stator change direction of oil so that oil enters the impeller in the direction of engine rotation. The stator permits the torque converter to increase the torque of the engine. Force of the oil entering the impeller from the stator helps the impeller and engine turn.

1. TURBINE

2. STATOR

As the speed of the lift truck increases, the oil from the turbine flows toward the impeller. The centrifugal force of the rotating turbine sends the oil that is in the turbine against the oil flow from the impeller. The oil moving in this direction decreases the amount of oil flow to the impeller from the stator. Because the oil flow to the impeller decreases, the additional force on the impeller decreases. Less torque is available as the speed of the lift truck increases. When the lift truck is traveling at a constant speed on a level surface, the turbine and impeller turn at approximately the same speed. The centrifugal force of the oil is the same for both the impeller and turbine. The oil does not flow through the stator and no additional torque is transferred. The rotating oil hits the back of the stator blades and turns the stator in the direction of engine rotation. The one-direction clutch permits the stator to turn with engine rotation. The impeller, turbine, stator, and oil rotate as a unit when there is no load on the turbine. When the lift truck starts up a ramp, the turbine has a resistance to turning. The centrifugal force of the oil in the turbine decreases. The oil again flows from the impeller through the turbine and stator and enters the impeller with force. The torque converter again increases torque when the turbine speed is less than the impeller speed.

3. IMPELLER

Figure 5. Oil Flow through Torque Converter

4

4. OIL FLOW


1300 SRM 399

Hydraulic Operation there are two manually operated spools in the control valve: an inching spool and plunger, and a direction spool. On units with a MONOTROLÂŽ pedal, the direction spool is actuated by oil from two solenoid valves installed on the control valve. On all units the inching plunger is actuated by the inching/brake pedal.

System Regulator The system regulator is a spool and spring assembly that keeps the oil pressure for the operation of the transmission at 1032 to 1312 kPa (150 to 190 psi). See Figure 8. The regulator receives oil from the oil pump before the oil goes through the oil filter. Oil that is diverted by the regulator goes to the lubrication circuits. 1. OUTER RACE 2. ROLLERS

3. SPLINES ON INNER RACE

Figure 6. One Direction Clutch

SHAFT ASSEMBLIES The input shaft and the reverse clutch shaft have oil passages that connect the clutch assemblies to the control valve and the lubrication circuit. Seal rings are installed on the shafts to make sure the oil flows to the correct passages. The oil flow to engage a clutch enters at the groove in the shaft. The oil flow for lubrication enters the ports at the end of the shaft. See Figure 4.

CONTROL VALVE NOTE: The information below applies to early model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (D004) lift trucks.

General The control valve is installed on the top of the transmission housing. See Figure 7. Holes in the control valve gasket permit oil to flow from the valve body to passages in the transmission housing. The control valve has several regulators and spools to control the oil pressure and oil flow in the transmission. The control valve has the pressure regulators for: system pressure, clutch pressure, and torque converter pressure. The pressure regulators for the lubrication circuit are in the output end of the housing. The control valve uses three spools for modulation of oil pressure to the clutch assemblies. See Figure 8. These spools are: a drain spool, a modulation valve, and an accumulator. On units with a direction control lever,

Clutch Pressure Regulator Oil flows to the clutch pressure regulator after it goes through the oil filter. The regulator is a spool and spring assembly that keeps the oil pressure for the clutch assemblies at 827 to 965 kPa (120 to 140 psi). See Figure 8. The oil supply from the regulator flows to the inching spool. Oil that flows past the regulator goes to the torque converter circuit.

Torque Converter Regulator The torque converter regulator is a spool and spring assembly that controls the pressure in the circuit for the torque converter. See Figure 8. The regulator keeps the pressure at 765 to 903 kPa (111 to 131 psi). Oil for the regulator comes from the oil that goes past the clutch pressure regulator. The torque converter regulator sends excess oil flow to the lubrication circuit.

Inching Spool The inching spool controls the oil supply for the clutch assemblies. See Figure 8. The inching spool receives oil from the oil filter. The inching spool can control the oil pressure from 476 to 588 kPa (69 to 81 psi) to 0 kPa (0 psi). The inching plunger is connected to the inching pedal. The movement of the inching plunger lets the inching spool move in its bore. When the inching plunger and inching spool are fully retracted, oil flows around the spool without restriction. As the inching plunger extends from the bore, the inching spool makes a restriction

5


Hydraulic Operation

1300 SRM 399

in the oil flow to the direction spool. When the inching plunger is fully extended, the inching spool stops the flow of oil to the direction spool. At the same time, the inching spool opens a passage to the sump

1. VALVE BODY 2. CLAMP 3. FORWARD/REVERSE SOLENOIDS 4. ADAPTER 5. O-RING 6. ACCUMULATOR SPOOL 7. SPRING 8. PLUG AND O-RING 9. BRACKET 10. MANUAL CONTROL NEUTRAL START SWITCH 11. STEEL BALL 12. MONOTROL NEUTRAL START SWITCH

for the oil from the direction spool. On units with a MONOTROL pedal, the inching plunger actuates the neutral start switch when the plunger is fully extended.

13. FITTING 14. TUBE 15. MODULATOR REGULATOR SPOOL 16. TRIMMER SPOOL 17. QUICK DUMP VALVE 18. OIL SEAL 19. INCHING SPOOL PLUNGER 20. WASHER 21. INCHING SPOOL 22. MONOTROL DIRECTION SPOOL 23. INCHING SPOOL STOP 24. DIRECTION SPOOL PLUG 25. SNAP RING

26. SPRING CAP 27. MANUAL CONTROL DIRECTION SPOOL 28. SLOTTED PIN 29. PACK REGULATOR SPOOL 30. MODULATOR REGULATOR SPOOL 31. GASKET 32. FILTER 33. NUT

Figure 7. Control Valve - Early Model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Lift Trucks

6


1300 SRM 399

Direction Spool, Manual Control This direction spool is actuated by the direction control lever. See Figure 8. The spool has three positions: FORWARD, NEUTRAL, and REVERSE. The spool is held in each position by a detent ball. The spool actuates the neutral start switch. The oil flow to the direction spool comes from the inching spool. There is no oil flow past the direction spool when the spool is in the NEUTRAL position. When the spool is moved to FORWARD or REVERSE, oil flows to the accumulator through the drain spool, the modulation spool and the forward or reverse clutch.

Direction Spool, MONOTROL Pedal NOTE: Applying the parking brake actuates a switch that de-energizes the Forward and Reverse solenoids. This direction spool is actuated by the oil flow from two solenoids installed on the top of the control valve. See Figure 8. The spool has three positions: FORWARD, NEUTRAL, and REVERSE. The spool is held in the NEUTRAL position by a spring arrangement. The oil flow to the Forward and Reverse solenoids comes from the inching spool. There is no oil flow past the direction spool when the spool is in the NEUTRAL position. When the spool is actuated by one of the solenoids, oil flows to the accumulator through the drain spool, the modulation spool, and the forward or reverse clutch.

Modulation Spool The modulation spool works with the drain spool orifice to control the movement of the accumulator. See Figure 8. The oil flow that goes through the drain spool also pressurizes the modulation spool. The oil pressure can push against the modulation spool to open the drain passage. Oil that is not needed for modulation of the clutch assemblies flows through the drain passage. Figure 9 shows the pressure change in the modulation circuit when a clutch is being applied.

Accumulator The accumulator is used to slow the ratio of clutch engagement. See Figure 8. This delay reduces the shock and stress to the drive train when engaging

Hydraulic Operation the transmission or changing the direction of travel. When a clutch is engaged, the oil flow for the clutch must go to the accumulator and fill the chamber. The time it takes for the accumulator to fill controls the time it takes for the clutch to engage.

Drain Spool The drain spool is a spool and spring assembly that controls the flow of oil to and from the accumulator. See Figure 8. When a direction change is occurring, oil flows through an orifice in the drain spool and then flows to the accumulator. As the chamber for the accumulator fills, the oil pressure is adjusted by the modulation spool. When a direction change first starts, pressure to the drain spool decreases. The spring pressure of the accumulator causes the accumulator spool to push the oil from the cavity. The oil from the accumulator pushes the drain spool against its spring, letting the oil flow to the drain circuit.

MONOTROL PEDAL NOTE: The information below for the MONOTROL pedal applies to early model S3.50-5.50XL (S70120XL) (D004) lift trucks. The MONOTROL pedal controls the speed of the engine and the operation of the direction spool. See Figure 10 and Figure 11. The pedal pad is held to the pedal frame by a pivot shaft. The pedal pad rotates on the shaft and is held in the FORWARD or REVERSE position by magnets in the pedal frame. There are two switches in the MONOTROL pedal assembly. A switch on the cowl is actuated by the parking brake lever. The operation of this switch controls the flow of battery power to the MONOTROL pedal switches and the starter circuit. When the parking brake is applied, the starter circuit is energized and the MONOTROL circuit is de-energized. When the parking brake is released, the MONOTROL circuit is energized and the starter circuit is de-energized. The engine can only be started after applying the parking brake or depressing the inching/brake pedal. When the MONOTROL pedal is in the FORWARD position, both pedal switch buttons are actuated. Battery power flows through both pedal switches to energize the Forward solenoid. When the MONOTROL pedal is in the REVERSE position, both pedal switch buttons are released. Battery power flows through both pedal switches to energize the Reverse solenoid.

7


Hydraulic Operation

1300 SRM 399

Figure 8. Hydraulic Arrangement of Transmission

8


1300 SRM 399

Hydraulic Operation Legend for Figure 8

1. OIL PUMP 2. FILTER 3. SYSTEM PRESSURE REGULATOR 4. CLUTCH REGULATOR 5. TORQUE CONVERTER REGULATOR

6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

TORQUE CONVERTER OIL COOLER COLD OIL RELIEF VALVE INCHING SPOOL FORWARD SOLENOID REVERSE SOLENOID DIRECTION SPOOL

13. DRAIN SPOOL 14. ACCUMULATION AND MODULATION SPOOL 15. INPUT SHAFT (FORWARD) 16. REVERSE CLUTCH SHAFT 17. LUBRICATION CIRCUIT

CONTROL VALVE NOTE: The information below applies to later model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) lift trucks and S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) model lift trucks. See Figure 12.

General

1. CLUTCH DISENGAGES 2. OTHER CLUTCH FILLS WITH OIL 3. MODULATOR CONTROLS INCREASE IN OIL PRESSURE 4. OTHER CLUTCH ENGAGED Figure 9. Modulation Circuit Operation

The control valve is installed on the top of the transmission. The inching spool, direction spool, modulator circuit, regulator for clutch pressure, and the regulator for the torque converter are part of the control valve. The position of the inching spool is controlled by the inching/brake pedal. The oil filter for the transmission is also mounted on the control valve. A manifold with two solenoid valves is installed on top of the control valve. The solenoid valves are actuated by the direction control lever or the MONOTROL pedal. The solenoids control the position of the direction spool. See Figure 12.

Regulator for Clutch Pressure The regulator for clutch pressure controls oil pressure for applying clutches to engage the transmission. The control pressure of the regulator is 862 to 1048 kPa (125 to 152 psi). Oil that flows to the regulator for clutch pressure flows to the torque converter circuit and oil lubrication circuit. An orifice in the valve body and transmission case makes sure that there is always some oil flow to the torque converter.

Inching Spool Assembly

1. 2. 3. 4.

PEDAL PAD SWITCH SWITCH BUTTON MAGNET

5. PLATE FOR MAGNET 6. PEDAL FRAME

Figure 10. MONOTROL Pedal

Inching is the slow movement of a lift truck while a high engine speed is used for faster operation of the hydraulic system. Inching function is normally used for fine movements of the lift truck when handling a load. Operation of inching pedal decreases the oil pressure to a clutch so that the clutch is not completely applied.

9


Hydraulic Operation

1. 2. 3. 4.

1300 SRM 399

Wire

Color

Gauge

B E J K T W X CC FF LL HM PM XM

Red Yellow White Red Black Black Red Yellow Brown White Yellow Black Red

14 16 14 14 16 14 16 14 10 14 18 18 18

BATTERY STARTER IGNITION SWITCH PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

5. 6. 7. 8.

FUSE BRAKE PRESSURE SWITCH NEUTRAL START SWITCH MONOTROL PEDAL SWITCH

9. 10. 11. 12.

REVERSE SOLENOID FORWARD SOLENOID TO ALTERNATOR TO IGNITION SWITCH

Figure 11. MONOTROL Pedal Electrical Circuit (All Lift Truck Models)

10


1300 SRM 399

Hydraulic Operation

The inching spool assembly has an inching spool, inching spool plunger, and three springs. Oil flows to the inching spool from the transmission pump. The inching spool controls the oil flow and pressure to the direction spool. When inching function is not used, oil flows through the inching spool to the direction spool. Operation of the inching function causes a restriction of oil flow to the direction spool and the

1. VALVE BODY 2. PRESSURE REGULATOR TORQUE CONVERTER 3. PRESSURE REGULATOR CLUTCH 4. SPRING 5. PLUG AND O-RING 6. INCHING SPOOL PLUNGER

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

clutch. This operation decreases the oil pressure to the direction spool (and clutch) as the inching spool plunger is extended. When the inching spool plunger is completely extended, oil pressure to the direction spool (and clutch) is approximately zero. The clutch is then released and the transmission is in NEUTRAL. See Figure 12.

OIL SEAL FITTING COPPER GASKET SNAP RING SPRING CAP DIRECTION SPOOL INCHING SPOOL MODULATOR REGULATOR

15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.

QUICK DUMP VALVE MODULATOR PISTON FORWARD SOLENOID REVERSE SOLENOID MANIFOLD TUBE GASKET

Figure 12. Control Valve - Later Model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Trucks and S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) Trucks

11


Hydraulic Operation

Direction Spool The direction spool controls oil flow to the direction clutches. See Figure 13. The direction spool has three positions: FORWARD, NEUTRAL, and REVERSE. When the direction spool is in its FORWARD position, oil flow and pressure is sent to apply the forward-low clutch. When the direction spool is in its REVERSE position, oil flow and pressure is sent to apply the reverse clutch. When the direction spool is in its NEUTRAL position, oil pressure to both clutches is reduced to approximately zero. Both clutches are released and the transmission is in NEUTRAL. When the direction spool is moved to control a direction of travel, oil flows to and from the clutch assemblies and also to the modulator circuit.

1300 SRM 399 Two electric solenoids control the position of the direction spool in the transmission control valve. Electric switches in the MONOTROL pedal or direction control lever energize and de-energize the solenoids. The solenoids open and close small valves that send oil flow to the ends of the direction spool. Only one solenoid is energized for each direction. When a direction solenoid is energized, the oil pressure to one end of the direction spool moves the direction spool so that a clutch is applied. Oil flow and pressure on the ends of the direction spool move the spool to either its FORWARD or REVERSE position.

Figure 13. Control Valve - Later Model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) Trucks and S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) Trucks

12


1300 SRM 399

Hydraulic Operation Legend for Figure 13

1. TORQUE CONVERTER REGULATOR 2. CLUTCH PRESSURE REGULATOR 3. INCHING SPOOL WITH MONOTROL CONTROL 4. DIRECTION SPOOL, MONOTROL CONTROL 5. TRIMMER SPOOL 6. CONTROL VALVE BODY

7. TRIMMER REGULATOR SPRING 8. ACCUMULATOR SPRING 9. ACCUMULATOR SPOOL 10. SPRING 11. QUICK DUMP SPOOL 12. DIRECTION SPOOL, MANUAL CONTROL 13. INCHING SPRING 14. INCHING PLUNGER SPRING

Direction Spool, Manual Control This direction spool is actuated by the direction control lever. See Figure 13. The spool has three positions: FORWARD, NEUTRAL, and REVERSE. The spool is held in each position by a detent ball. The spool actuates the neutral start switch. The oil flow to the direction spool comes from the inching spool. There is no oil flow past the direction spool when the spool is in the NEUTRAL position. When the spool is moved to FORWARD or REVERSE, oil flows to the accumulator through the drain spool, the modulation spool and the forward or reverse clutch.

15. PACK REGULATOR SPOOL 16. SNAP RING 17. CONVERTER REGULATOR SPOOL 18. CONVERTER REGULATOR SPRING 19. PACK REGULATOR SPRING 20. INCHING STOP

the torque converter opens, oil that does not go to the torque converter flows directly to the passage to cool and lubricate the parts of the transmission. Oil that flows to the torque converter goes through the oil cooler before entering the passage to cool and lubricate the clutches. See Figure 13.

LUBRICATION CIRCUIT Oil supply for the lubrication circuit comes from oil that flows past the system regulator, torque converter regulator, and oil cooler. There is a lubrication circuit for each clutch assembly. The lubrication circuit supplies oil at 96 to 138 kPa (14 to 20 psi).

Modulator Circuit A modulator circuit is used to control the rate of application of the clutches. When the direction spool is moved to select a direction of travel, the modulator circuit controls the application of the clutch during a 1.5 to 2.0 second period. The modulator circuit controls the pressure increase to apply the clutch smoothly. This delay and smooth application of pressure reduces the shock and stress to the drive train when engaging the transmission or changing directions. See Figure 12.

Regulator for Torque Convertor When the engine speed is low, oil flows to the torque converter through an orifice in the bore in the clutch pressure regulator. The pressure regulator for the torque converter stays closed until the pressure to the torque converter increases to 765 to 903 kPa (111 to 131 psi). When the pressure regulator for

DIRECTION CONTROL LEVER NOTE: The information in the following paragraph applies to S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004, F004) model trucks only. The direction control lever is used to control operation of direction solenoids. See Figure 14. When the lift truck has a direction control lever, an accelerator pedal is used to control the speed of the engine. The control lever actuates two switches. In the NEUTRAL position, both of the switches are closed. The lever must be in this position to start the lift truck. When the lever is moved to the FORWARD position, the forward switch is open and the reverse switch is closed. In this position the forward solenoid is energized. In the REVERSE position, the reverse switch is open and the forward switch is closed, energizing the circuit for the reverse solenoid.

13


Hydraulic Operation

1300 SRM 399 direction solenoids. When both of the solenoid valves close (de-energized), the centering spring moves the direction spool to the NEUTRAL position.

1. CONTROL LEVER 2. FORWARD SWITCH

3. SWITCH ACTUATOR 4. REVERSE SWITCH

Figure 14. Direction Control Lever

MONOTROL PEDAL NOTE: The information below for the MONOTROL pedal applies to later model S3.50-5.50XL (S70120XL) (D004) lift trucks and to S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004, F004) model lift trucks. The MONOTROL pedal controls speed of the engine and operation of direction solenoids. See Figure 11, Figure 15, and Figure 16. The pedal pad is held to the pedal frame by a pivot shaft. The pedal pad rotates on the shaft and is held in the FORWARD or REVERSE position by magnets in the pedal frame. There are two switches in the MONOTROL pedal assembly. When the MONOTROL pedal is in the FORWARD position, both pedal switch buttons are actuated. Battery power flows through both pedal switches to energize the forward solenoid. When the MONOTROL pedal is in the REVERSE position, both pedal switch buttons are released. Battery power flows through both pedal switches to energize the reverse solenoid.

Start Circuit, MONOTROL Pedal For units with a MONOTROL pedal there are two switches on the bracket for the parking brake lever. The switch on the right-hand side of the bracket supplies power to the direction solenoids. When the parking brake is applied the switch de-energizes the

14

1. 2. 3. 4.

PEDAL PAD PEDAL FRAME MAGNET PIVOT SHAFT

5. SPRING 6. MAGNET PLATE 7. SWITCH

Figure 15. MONOTROL Pedal S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (Later Model) Lift Trucks The switch on the left-hand side of the bracket prevents the engine from starting unless the parking brake is applied. When inching/brake pedal is fully depressed, service brakes are applied and a disc on the end of the inching spool actuates the neutral start switch. Neutral start switch is in series electrically with pressure switch in the brake system. The disc actuates the neutral start switch and pressure in the brake system closes the brake switch. The pressure switch in the brake system makes sure that brakes are applied. When neutral start switch and brake switch are both closed, start circuit, controlled by ignition switch, can be energized. When inching/brake pedal is fully pushed down, oil pressure to the clutch pack is reduced to zero. This operation makes sure that


1300 SRM 399

Hydraulic Operation

the transmission clutch is disengaged and brakes are applied when the engine is started.

through Figure 20 apply to early model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (D004) lift trucks. The diagrams shown in Figure 21 through Figure 24 apply to later model S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (D004) lift trucks and to S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (E004, F004) lift trucks.

Neutral When engine is running and transmission is in NEUTRAL, the oil pump supplies oil to the following regulators: system regulator, clutch regulator, inching spool, and forward and reverse solenoids or direction spool. See Figure 17 or Figure 21, depending on your model of lift truck.

Forward When the direction spool is moved to the FORWARD position, oil from the inching spool flows past the direction spool. See Figure 18 or Figure 22. Oil then flows to the drain spool, modulation spool, forward clutch, and lubrication regulator for the forward clutch. Oil flow at the clutch assembly pushes on the piston to engage the clutch.

Forward-Inching 1. 2. 3. 4.

PEDAL PAD PEDAL FRAME MAGNET PIVOT SHAFT

5. SPRING 6. MAGNET PLATE 7. SWITCH

Figure 16. MONOTROL Pedal S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) Lift Trucks

Creep Speed Switch NOTE: The creep speed switch is an optional feature on S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) model lift trucks. A switch is installed on the accelerator or MONOTROL pedal to slow movement of the lift truck at idle speed. When the accelerator or MONOTROL pedal is not applied, the switch opens the electric circuit to the transmission controller. As the pedal is depressed, the switch closes, energizing direction solenoids.

OIL FLOW DIAGRAMS NOTE: The following information applies to all lift truck models. The diagrams shown in Figure 17

Pushing on the inching/brake pedal while lift truck is moving decreases oil pressure to the direction spool. See Figure 19 or Figure 23, depending on your model of lift truck. Pressure in the accumulator shifts the drain spool so that some oil from the accumulator flows to the drain passage. Decrease in oil pressure that engages the forward clutch lets the clutch partially disengage. Clutch completely disengages when inching plunger is fully extended. Inching operation lets operator move the lift truck slowly while keeping a high engine speed for hydraulic functions.

Reverse As the direction spool moves for a direction change, it opens the drain circuit for the forward clutch and the accumulator. Oil in the accumulator chamber pushes against the drain valve and flows to the drain passage. When the direction spool is in REVERSE position, the drain passages for the accumulator are closed. See Figure 20 or Figure 24. Oil from the inching spool fills the accumulator chamber and engages the reverse clutch.

15


Hydraulic Operation

1300 SRM 399

Figure 17. Hydraulic Schematic for Neutral MONOTROL Control S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (Early Model)

16


1300 SRM 399

Hydraulic Operation Legend for Figure 17

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

TRANSMISSION HOUSING OIL PUMP CONTROL VALVE OIL FILTER TORQUE CONVERTER OIL COOLER COLD OIL RELIEF SYSTEM REGULATOR CLUTCH REGULATOR TORQUE CONVERTER REGULATOR INCHING SPOOL DIRECTION SPOOL FORWARD CLUTCH

14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25.

REVERSE CLUTCH FORWARD SOLENOID REVERSE SOLENOID MODULATION SPOOL ACCUMULATOR DRAIN SPOOL MODULATION CHECK PORT LUBRICATION PRESSURE CHECK PORT FORWARD CLUTCH CHECK PORT REVERSE CLUTCH CHECK PORT TORQUE CONVERTER CHECK PORT SYSTEM PRESSURE CHECK PORT

17


Hydraulic Operation

1300 SRM 399

Figure 18. Hydraulic Schematic for Forward MONOTROL Control S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (Early Model)

18


1300 SRM 399

Hydraulic Operation Legend for Figure 18

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

TRANSMISSION HOUSING OIL PUMP CONTROL VALVE OIL FILTER TORQUE CONVERTER OIL COOLER COLD OIL RELIEF SYSTEM REGULATOR CLUTCH REGULATOR TORQUE CONVERTER REGULATOR INCHING SPOOL DIRECTION SPOOL FORWARD CLUTCH

14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25.

REVERSE CLUTCH FORWARD SOLENOID REVERSE SOLENOID MODULATION SPOOL ACCUMULATOR DRAIN SPOOL MODULATION CHECK PORT LUBRICATION PRESSURE CHECK PORT FORWARD CLUTCH CHECK PORT REVERSE CLUTCH CHECK PORT TORQUE CONVERTER CHECK PORT SYSTEM PRESSURE CHECK PORT

19


Hydraulic Operation

1300 SRM 399

Figure 19. Hydraulic Schematic for Forward-Inching MONOTROL Control S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (Early Model)

20


1300 SRM 399

Hydraulic Operation Legend for Figure 19

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

TRANSMISSION HOUSING OIL PUMP CONTROL VALVE OIL FILTER TORQUE CONVERTER OIL COOLER COLD OIL RELIEF SYSTEM REGULATOR CLUTCH REGULATOR TORQUE CONVERTER REGULATOR INCHING SPOOL DIRECTION SPOOL FORWARD CLUTCH

14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25.

REVERSE CLUTCH FORWARD SOLENOID REVERSE SOLENOID MODULATION SPOOL ACCUMULATOR DRAIN SPOOL MODULATION CHECK PORT LUBRICATION PRESSURE CHECK PORT FORWARD CLUTCH CHECK PORT REVERSE CLUTCH CHECK PORT TORQUE CONVERTER CHECK PORT SYSTEM PRESSURE CHECK PORT

21


Hydraulic Operation

1300 SRM 399

Figure 20. Hydraulic Schematic for Reverse MONOTROL Control S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) (Early Model)

22


1300 SRM 399

Hydraulic Operation Legend for Figure 20

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

TRANSMISSION HOUSING OIL PUMP CONTROL VALVE OIL FILTER TORQUE CONVERTER OIL COOLER COLD OIL RELIEF SYSTEM REGULATOR CLUTCH REGULATOR TORQUE CONVERTER REGULATOR INCHING SPOOL DIRECTION SPOOL FORWARD CLUTCH

14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25.

REVERSE CLUTCH FORWARD SOLENOID REVERSE SOLENOID MODULATION SPOOL ACCUMULATOR DRAIN SPOOL MODULATION CHECK PORT LUBRICATION PRESSURE CHECK PORT FORWARD CLUTCH CHECK PORT REVERSE CLUTCH CHECK PORT TORQUE CONVERTER CHECK PORT SYSTEM PRESSURE CHECK PORT

23


Hydraulic Operation

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

TORQUE CONVERTER OIL COOLER TORQUE CONVERTER REGULATOR CLUTCH PRESSURE REGULATOR QUICK DUMP VALVE MODULATOR CHECK PORT MODULATOR REGULATOR INCHING SPOOL DIRECTION SPOOL REVERSE SOLENOID FORWARD SOLENOID

1300 SRM 399

12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22.

REVERSE CLUTCH FORWARD CLUTCH REVERSE CHECK PORT FORWARD CHECK PORT PUMP PRESSURE CHECK PORT PUMP SCREEN PUMP RELIEF VALVE OIL FILTER TORQUE CONVERTER CHECK PORT LUBRICATION PRESSURE CHECK PORT

Figure 21. Hydraulic Schematic for Neutral S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) and S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (Later Model)

24


1300 SRM 399

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

TORQUE CONVERTER OIL COOLER TORQUE CONVERTER REGULATOR CLUTCH PRESSURE REGULATOR QUICK DUMP VALVE MODULATOR CHECK PORT MODULATOR REGULATOR INCHING SPOOL DIRECTION SPOOL REVERSE SOLENOID FORWARD SOLENOID

Hydraulic Operation

12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22.

REVERSE CLUTCH FORWARD CLUTCH REVERSE CHECK PORT FORWARD CHECK PORT PUMP PRESSURE CHECK PORT PUMP SCREEN PUMP RELIEF VALVE OIL FILTER TORQUE CONVERTER CHECK PORT LUBRICATION PRESSURE CHECK PORT

Figure 22. Hydraulic Schematic for Forward S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) and S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (Later Model)

25


Hydraulic Operation

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

TORQUE CONVERTER OIL COOLER TORQUE CONVERTER REGULATOR CLUTCH PRESSURE REGULATOR QUICK DUMP VALVE MODULATOR CHECK PORT MODULATOR REGULATOR INCHING SPOOL DIRECTION SPOOL REVERSE SOLENOID FORWARD SOLENOID

1300 SRM 399

12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22.

REVERSE CLUTCH FORWARD CLUTCH REVERSE CHECK PORT FORWARD CHECK PORT PUMP PRESSURE CHECK PORT PUMP SCREEN PUMP RELIEF VALVE OIL FILTER TORQUE CONVERTER CHECK PORT LUBRICATION PRESSURE CHECK PORT

Figure 23. Hydraulic Schematic for Forward-Inching S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) and S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (Later Model)

26


1300 SRM 399

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

TORQUE CONVERTER OIL COOLER TORQUE CONVERTER REGULATOR CLUTCH PRESSURE REGULATOR QUICK DUMP VALVE MODULATOR CHECK PORT MODULATOR REGULATOR INCHING SPOOL DIRECTION SPOOL REVERSE SOLENOID FORWARD SOLENOID

Hydraulic Operation

12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22.

REVERSE CLUTCH FORWARD CLUTCH REVERSE CHECK PORT FORWARD CHECK PORT PUMP PRESSURE CHECK PORT PUMP SCREEN PUMP RELIEF VALVE OIL FILTER TORQUE CONVERTER CHECK PORT LUBRICATION PRESSURE CHECK PORT

Figure 24. Hydraulic Schematic for Reverse S3.50-5.50XL (S70-120XL) and S3.50-5.50XM (S70-120XM) (Later Model)

27


NOTES ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

28



Turn static files into dynamic content formats.

Create a flipbook
Issuu converts static files into: digital portfolios, online yearbooks, online catalogs, digital photo albums and more. Sign up and create your flipbook.